Berkeley Review MCAT Prep Chemistry

General
Chemistry
Parti
Sections I-V
Section I
Stoichiometry
Section II
Atomic Theory
Section III
Equilibrium
Section IV
Acids & Bases
Section V
Buffers & Titrations
27^
BERKELEY
L/review*
Specializing in MCAT Preparation
ERRELEY
REV- IÊ W*
P.O. Box 40140, Berkeley, California 94704-0140
(800) N CAT-TB R
Phone: (800) 622-882 7
Internet: MCATprep@bcrkeleyreview.com
http://www.berkelcyrcvievv.com
The Berkeley Review and The Berkeley Review logo are registered trademarks of The Berkeley Review.
This publication for The Berkeley Review was written, edited, and composed on a desktop publishing system
using Apple Macintosh computers and Microsoft Word. Pages were created on the Apple LaserWnte Pro. Line
art was created using numerous graphics programs designed tor use onMacintosh computers. The majority ofthe
text type anddisplay type was set inTimes Roman and Palatino.
Cover Design by MacGraphics.
Copyright 2010, 2007, 2003, 2001, 2000, 1995, 1994, 1993, 1992 by The Berkeley Review. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical/photocopying, recording, orotherwise, without the prior written permission ofthe
copyright owner.
Section I
Stoichiometry
by Todd Bennett
O.lOMMX(aq)
JW^
JW*
jwv
Unit Conversion
a) Dimensional Analysis
b) Density Determination
c) Typical Conversions
Elemental Analysis
a) Mass Percent
b) Empirical Formulas
c) Molecular Formulas
d) Combustion Analysis
Solution Concentration
a) Units and Terminology
i. Molarity
ii. Molality
iii. Mass Percent (in Solution)
iv. Density
b) Dilution
c) Beer's Law
Balancing Reactions
a) Standard Balancing
b) Limiting Reagents
Reaction Types
a) Common Reactions
b) Oxidation States
Test-Taking Tips
a) General Advice
b) Mathematical Tricks
i. Addition and Subtraction
ii. Averaging
iii. Multiplication
iv. Division
f?EBKELEY
Stoichiometry Section Goals
Know how to convert one kind of concentration unit into another.
The concentration of a solution can be measured in terms of molarity, molality, and density. You
mustknow thedefinitions ofeach unitandhow they differ from one another. Although thetest
does not feature a great deal of math, you should have an idea of how to convert between units.
Understand the difference between empirical and molecular formulas.
Know the difference between the molecular formula (actual ratio of atoms in a molecule) and the
empiricalformula (simplestwholenumber ratioof the atoms in a molecule). Befamiliar with the
experimentsand informationneeded to determineboth of the formulas.
Know the effect of standard conditions.
Standard conditions are defined as 1 atm. and 298 K for thermodynamics, but STP (standard
temperature andpressure) isdefined as1atm. and273 K. Many calculations ofgasvolume usethe
ideal gas assumption that at STP, one mole of gas occupies 22.4liters.
Understand dilution and its effect on concentration of a solute.
Dilution involves a reduction in the concentration of a solute in solution by the addition of solvent
to the mixture. The addition of solvent therefore dilutes the concentration, but does not change the
moles of solute. The equation that you must recallis based on the constant number of solute moles:
Minitial-Vinitial = Mfinal-Vfinal.
Recognize standard reactions from general chemistry.
The most commonly recurring reactions in general chemistry that you are expected to know include
combustion, single replacement, double displacement, and proton transfer, to name just a few. You
must recognizethese reactionsand have a basicunderstanding of them.
Recognize the limiting reagent in a reaction and know its effect on the reaction.
The limiting reagent dictates theamount ofproduct thatcanbeformed andconsequently thepercent
yield for a reaction. Using only starting values andthestoichiometric equation, you mustbe able
to determine which reactant is the limiting reagent in the reaction.
Understand the stoichiometric ratios in combustion reactions.
In the combustion of both hydrocarbons and carbohydrates, there is a consistent relation between
the number of oxygen molecules on the reactant side, and the number of water and carbon dioxide
molecules that form on the product side. Know each reaction so that you may easily balance the
coefficients.
General Chemistry Stoichiometry
Stoichiometry
The perfect spot to start any review of general chemistry is the basics, which
traditionally include stoichiometry and chemical equations. The most
fundamental perspective of a chemical reaction, where bonds are broken so that
new bonds can be formed, is at the atomic and molecular levels. Due to the
minute size of atoms, we can never actually view a chemical reaction (so states
Heisenberg's uncertainty principle). We must therefore rely upon developing
models that can account for changes in all of the atoms and molecules involved
in a chemical reaction or physical process. At the molecular level, we consider
molecules. At the macroscopic level, we consider moles. Stoichiometry allows
us to convert one into the other and to shift between these two perspectives. The
number of molecules is converted into the number of moles using Avogadro's
number (6.022 x 1023). The concept of a mole is based upon the amount of
carbon-12 that is contained in exactly 12.0 grams of carbon, a quantity
determined by knowing the volume of a 12.0-g carbon sample, the type of
molecular packing in it, and the dimensions of the carbon atom. This task of
quantifying atoms in a mole is similar to guessing the number of peas that are
contained in an aquarium. It is important that you utilize the mole concept to
understand, and later to balance and manipulate, chemical equations.
In the stoichiometry section, we focus on those skills needed to solve ratio
questions. Stoichiometry is most commonly thought of as the mathematical
portion of general chemistry. The MCAT, however, has relatively few
calculations. It is a conceptual test, emphasizing logical thought process rather
than calculations. For some of you, this is great news. But before celebrating too
much, consider where the mathematical aspects of general chemistry fit into a
conceptual exam. The MCAT does involve some math, but it is not too
complicated. Math-related calculations required for MCAT questions involve
making approximations, determining ratios, setting up calculations, and
estimating the effect of errors on results. The initial problems presented in this
section involve slightly more calculations than you should expect to see on the
MCAT. Some of them may look familiar to you from your general chemistry
courses and should stimulate your recall. As the section proceeds, less emphasis
is placed on calculating and estimating, and more emphasis is placed on the art
of quickly determining ratios and approximating values.
The focus of the stoichiometry section is problem-solving, with special attention
to the idiosyncrasies of each type of problem. Definitions of important terms are
presented with sample questions and their solutions. Answer solutions discuss
test strategy and the information needed to obtain the correct answer. Each
problem in the stoichiometry section represents what we might call the "book
keeping" of reactions in general chemistry, and it offers an ideal opportunity to
begin work on fast math skills as well. As you do each of the questions, learn the
definitions and develop an approach that works well for you. You may want to
consider multiple pathways to arrive at the correct answer. It is important that
you be able to solve questions in several different ways and to get into the
mindset of the test writers. As you read a passage, think about the questions that
could be asked about it. If a passage gives values for various masses and
volumes, there will probably be a question about density. If it gives values for
moles and solution volume, there will probably be questions on concentration
and dilution. Use your intuition and common sense as much as you can, and
make every effort to develop your test-taking logic.
Introduction
Copyright by The Berkeley Review
Exclusive MCAT Preparation
General Chemistiy Stoichiometry Unit Conversion
Unit Conversion
Dimensional Analysis
Dimensional analysis is a mathematical conversion from one set of units into
another. It involves multiplyinga given value by a conversion factor or a series
of conversion factors until the value is finally expressed in the desired units.
Converting from one set ofunits toanother is a critical skill needed toeliminate
incorrect answer choices in the physical sciences section. Be systematic when
converting between units. The standard measurements that can be expressed in
a variety of units are distance (1 m=1.094 yd, 2.54 cm=1.00 in, and 1.609 km=
1.00 mile), mass (1.00 kg = 2.205 lb and 453.6 g = 1.00 lb), volume (3.79 L= 1.00
gal and 1.00 L= 1.06 qt), and time (3600 s = 1.00 hr). Always convert units as
they appear in a problem into the units indicated in the answer choices (the so-
called "target units").
Example 1.1
Sprinters can run 100 meters injustunder 10 seconds. At what average speed in
miles per hourmusta runner travel tocover 100 meters in10.0 seconds?
A. 3.7 miles/hour
B. 11.2 miles/hour
C. 22.4 miles/hour
D. 36.0 miles/hour
Solution
The first task is to determine the given units and the target units. From there,
convert the given units into the target units. We are given 100 meters in 10
seconds, but the answer choices are expressed in miles per hour. Use the correct
conversion factors, as follows:
10.0 s hour
Conversion of distance: 10mxmiles - miles
10.0 s rn s
Conversionof time: 10 mx-- =-^3_
10.0 s hr hour
mnm.. 1km x 1mile y 3600s _ 100x3600 miles
10.0 s 1000 m 1.609 km 1.00 hr 10 x 1000 x 1.609 hour
100x3600 _ 3600 _ 36 miles
10x1000x1.609 10x10x1.609 1.609 hour
36<
2
36 ,<36 where 36 _ 18and 36 =36. So18<^6_ < 36
1.609 1 2 1 1.609
Only choice C falls within the range of 18 to 36.
A frequent task in chemistry is the conversion between various types of
temperature units, volume units, pressure units, and concentration units.
Chemists, like most scientists, employ the MKS system, so the conversion from
conventional units less commonly used in science to MKS units is routine.
Example 1.2 demonstrates the interconversion between the conventional
Fahrenheit unit and the scientific Celsius unit of temperature.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 4 The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStiy Stoichiometry Unit Conversion
Example 1.2
At what temperature is the numerical value the same, whether the units are in
Celsius or Fahrenheit?
A. 32
B. 0
C. -40
D. -273
Solution
The formulas for conversion between Celsius and Fahrenheit are as follows:
T.F =t.c +32 .-. T-c = (T-f- 32)
5 9
Answering the question requires setting T>f = T>(\
T-F = T-c +32 becomes: T=T+32, soT=1.8 T+32
5 5
T = 1.8T + 32=> -0.8T = 32.\ T = -40
Density Determination
The density of a material or solution is the mass of the sample divided by the
volume of the sample. Density is a measured quantity, determined
experimentally. Understand the techniques used to measure density. The term
specific gravityrefers to the density of a material relative to the density of water,
and may be used in a question in lieu of density. For our purposes, specific
gravity means the same thing as density, but it has no expressed units.
Determining density is a typical example of dimensional analysis.
Example 1.3
Exactly 10.07 mL of an unknown non-volatile liquid is poured into an empty
25.41-gram open flask. The combined mass of the unknown non-volatile liquid
and the flask is 34.12grams. What is the density of the unknown liquid?
A 34.13 g n 8.71 g
B.
10.07 mL 10.07 mL
c 10-07 g D 8.71 mL
8.71 mL * 10.07 g
Solution
The density of the liquid is found by dividing the mass of the liquid by the
volume of the liquid. This results in units of grams per milliliter, which
eliminates choice D. The volume of the liquid is 10.07mL, so 10.07should be in
the denominator. This eliminates choice C. The mass of the liquid is the
difference between the final mass of the flask and liquid combined, and the mass
of the flask (34.12 - 25.41), which is equal to 8.71 grams. This means that the
numerator should be 8.71. The correct answer is choice B. incidentally, the
question did not state the reason for using a non-volatile liquid. The liquid must
be non-volatile, to prevent any loss due to evaporation from the open flask. In
the event the liquid evaporates away, then the mass you determine is too small,
due to the loss of vapor molecules.
Copyright by The BerkeleyReview 5 Exclusive MCAT Preparation
General Chemistry Stoichiometry Unit Conversion
Density questions may onoccasion involve a more intricate conversion of units.
For any density question, keep in mind that the target units are mass solution
divided byvolume solution. The mass percent of a solute is mass solute divided
by mass solution. The product of the density and mass percent is mass solute
dividedby volume solution. Converting the massof soluteinto moles of solute
yields molarity. Example 1.4shows this.
Example 1.4
Whatis themolarity ofa 3%NaClsolution witha densityof 1.05 grams/mL?
A. 0.497 M NaCl
B. 0.504 M NaCl
C 0.539 M NaCl
D. 0.724 M NaCl
Solution
Thefirststepis todetermine theunits you are looking for, whichin this example
is moles solute per liter solution. You must find both moles solute and liters
solution. The density of the solution is 1.05 grams/mL which means that one
liter of the solutionweighs1050 g. Threepercent (3%) of the solution is sodium
chloride, so the mass of sodium chloride is 0.03 x 1050g. This is the same as 3%
of 1000 g + 3% of 50g, which is 30g + 1.5 g = 31.5 g of NaCl per liter solution.
The grams of sodium chloride are converted to moles by dividing by the
molecular weightof NaCl (58.6 grams/mole). Theunit factor method is shown
below:
1.05 gsolution x1000 mLx 3gNaCl x1mole NaCl
mLsolution L 100gsolution 58.6g NaCl
_ 1.05 x 1000 x 3 moles NaCl - 3.15 x lOmoles NaCl
100 x 58.6 L solution 58.6 L solution
On the MCAT, you will not have time to solve for values precisely, so you must
makean approximation. Select the answer that is closest to that approximation.
3L5. >30 _1_ somevalue is greaterthan0.500 M
58.6 60 2
315.<33_11 __55./ so mevalueis lessthan 0.550 M
58.6 60 20 100
The value falls between 0.500 M and 0.550 M, so choices A and D are eliminated.
Next you must choose between 0.504 M and 0.539 M. The value is not close
enough to 0.504 M, so you should choose C, and be a wise student! Wise
students are a good thing. Some questions on the MCAT may present
mathematical set-ups, without solvingfor an exact number.
The physical sciences section of the exam incorporates physics and general
chemistry, so from the beginning of your review, make a conscious effort to
consider physics when working on general chemistry and to consider general
chemistry whenworking onphysics. Determining density is a problem common
to both disciplines. Example 1.5 shows an approach to the concept of density
that is more typical of what is found in a physicsproblem.
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review 6 The BerkeleyReview
Example 1.5
What can be concluded about the density of a metal object which, when placed in
a beaker of water at room temperature, sinks to the bottom?
A. The density of the metal is less than the density of either water or ice.
B. The density of the metal is less than the density of water, but greater than the
density of ice.
C. The density of the metal is greater than the density of water, but less than the
density of ice.
D. The density of the metal is greater than the density of either water or ice.
Solution
When an object floats in a liquid medium, its density is less than that of the
medium surrounding it. The fact that it floats means the buoyant force pushing
upward against it (pmedium'Vobjecfg) Is greater thangravitation force pushing
downward (weight = mg = PobjecfVobject'g)- Thus, an object floats when
Pmedium > Pobject- Because the metal object sinks in water, it must be denser
than water. Ice floats in water, meaning that ice is less dense than water and thus
less dense than the metal object. The density of the metal must be greater than
the density of either water or ice. The correct answer is therefore choice D.
Typical Conversions
In chemistry, conversions between products and reactants are common, so the
mole concept is frequently employed. The mole concept is pertinent in the
interconversion between moles and mass, using either atomic mass (for
elements) or molecular mass (for compounds). These calculations involve using
the unit factor method (also known as dimensional analysis.)
Example 1.6
How many moles of NaHCC>3 are contained in 33.6grams NaHCC>3?
A. 0.20 moles NaHC03
B. 0.40 moles NaHC03
C. 0.50 moles NaHC03
D. 0.60 moles NaHC03
Solution
The first step in determining the number of molesis to determinethe molecular
mass of NaHC03. The mass is 23 + 1 + 12 +48 = 84 grams. The number of moles
of NaHC03 is found by dividing 33.6 by 84, which is less than 0.50. This
eliminates choices C and D. The number is greater than 0.25 (21 over 84) and
thus greater than 0.20, so choiceA is eliminated. The only value left is choice B,
0.40 moles.
Beyond deteirnining the moles from grams for the same compound are questions
where the moles of products are determined from the grams of reactants. These
questions require converting from grams of a given substance to moles of the
given substance, and then expressing the quantity of a final substance in terms of
moles, grams, or liters. Bybalancing the reaction, the mass of a selected product
that is formed in the reaction can be calculated based on the mass of a selected
reactant (which must be the limiting reagent). Examples 1.7 and 1.8 involve
determining moles, mass, and volume from the given values.
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review 7 Exclusive MCAT Preparation
Example 1.7
Based on the following reaction, how many grams of water would form from
0.33moles C4H10O reactingwith an unlimited amount of oxygen gas?
C4HioO(g) + 6 02(g) * " 4C02(g) + 5H20(g)
A. 18.00 grams
B. 24.00 grams
C. 30.00 grams
D. 36.00 grams
Solution
With an excess of oxygen, the limiting reagent in this reaction is C4H10O. The
amount of water formed is determined by the 0.33 moles of C4H10O reactant.
Using the balanced equation, the ratio of H20 to moles C4H10O is 5 :1, so 1.667
moles of water are formed. At 18 grams per mole, this means that fewer than 36
grams but more than 27grams are formed. This makes choice C the best answer.
0.33molesC4H10Ox 5molesH2Q x 18gH2Q =ix5x 18gH20 =30gH20
1 mole C4H10O 1 mole H20 3
Example 1.8
How many liters of C02(g) result from the complete decomposition of 10.0grams
of CaC03(s) to carbon dioxide and calcium oxide at STP?
CaC03(s) *~ CaO(s) + C02(g)
A. 1.12 liters
B. 2.24 liters
C. 3.36 liters
D. 4.48 liters
Solution
You are asked to determine the amount of product from a known quantity of
reactant. The first step in problems of this type is to make sure the reaction is
balanced. In this case, it is already balanced. The mole ratio of the two
compounds is 1 : 1. The required conversion involves changing from mass
reactant, to moles reactant, to moles product, and finally to volume product.
This is one variation of unit conversion via mole ratio calculation. In addition,
there is the "g - m - m - g" conversion and the "v - m - m - g" conversion. You
need three steps to go from grams reactant to the target (liters product). Units
are important here. The units for the mass of reactant is grams. You need to
multiply mass by molesand divide by grams. This is the same as dividing by the
MW. The second step is to read the mole ratio from the balanced equation. In
this reaction, the mole ratio is 1:1 (the units of both numerator and denominator
are moles). The third and final step is to convert from moles product into liters
product (i.e., multiply by liters and divide by moles.) This is done by
multiplying by the molar volume of the product gas, which at STP (standard
temperature and pressure) is 22.4liters.
10gramsCaCO3X lleCaC03 x 1mole CO; x22.4 liters CQ2
100gramsCaC03 lmoleCaC03 lmoleCOfc
=10x22.4 =2.24 liters C02
100
Copyrightby TheBerkeley Review 8 The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry Stoichiometry
Elemental Analysis
Elemental analysis determines the atomic composition of an unknown molecule.
It is based on the idea that all molecules of the same substance combine atoms of
that substance in the same way. In other words, water always has two hydrogen
atoms and one oxygen atom. Because of this feature of structural uniformity, it is
possible to determine the atomic composition of any molecule. The fundamental
process of elemental analysis involves oxidizing an unknown completely and
collecting the products. The amount of each element that was present in the
unknown compound can be determined from the amount of oxidized product.
These mass values can be converted to mass percent and mole ratio values. In
the determination of the empirical formula, the mass percent is converted to a
relative mass value and then a relative mole value. The mass percent of an
element within a compound must be determined prior to determining the
empirical formula for an unknown compound. An empirical formula, you may
recall, is the simplest whole number ratio of the atoms in a molecule.
Mass Percent (Percent Composition by mass)
The mass percent of a particular element within a compound is found by
dividing the mass of that element by the mass of the compound and then
converting the fraction to a percentage. This is shown in Equation 1.1.
mass percent = mass atoms x 100o/o
mass compound
(1.1)
Mass percent can never exceed 100%for any component element. Determining
the mass percent of an element from the molecular formula is a straightforward
task, although the math may be challenging. Mass percent questions can be
asked in a conceptual or mathematical manner. Mass percent is independent of
the total mass of the sample of compound.
Table 1.1shows the relative masses of oxygen and carbon from different samples
of carbon dioxide. This demonstrates the law of multiple proportions. Atoms
combine in a fixed ratio in terms of mass and moles. Note that the outcome is the
same in all four trials measuring the ratio of oxygengas that reacts with a known
mass of carbon. The experiment involves oxidizing a known amount of carbon
and collecting the product gas. The mass of this product gas is deterrnined, and
the mass of oxygenis assumed to be the difference betweenthe initial and final
weighed masses of the carbon sample.
Mass Carbon Mass Oxygen
MassO/
'Mass C
1.33 g 3.53 g
3'53/l.33 =2-65
1.07 g 2.87 g lx 07 =2.68
1.11 g 2.96 g
2.96 / _ 9 fin
/l.H-2.67
1.27 g 3.39 g 339/127 =2.67
Table 1.1
The mass ratio of oxygen to carbon in the four trials averages out to be 2.67 : 1,
which is roughly 8 : 3. This means that for the oxidation product of carbon, the
ratio of oxygen to carbon is 8 grams to 3 grams, equivalent to 2 moles to 1 mole.
Elemental Analysis
General Chemistry Stoichiometry Elemental Analysis
Example 1.9
How much calciummetal combines with one gram of oxygen to form CaO?
A. 1.00 gCa
B. 1.25 gCa
C. 1.67 gCa
D. 2.50gCa
Solution
From the molecular formula, the mole ratio of calcium to oxygen is 1 : 1. The
atomic mass of calcium (Ca) is 40.08, while the atomic mass of oxygen (O) is
16.00. The mass ratio for the compound is 40.08to 16.00, which reduces to 2.505 :
1, which rounds to 2.50 to 1. This means that 2.50grams of calcium combine with
1.00 grams of oxygento formCaO. ChoiceD is best.
Example 1.10
What is the mass ratio of iron to oxygen in Fe203?
A. 1.08g Fe to 1.00g O
B. 1.63 g Fe to 1.00 g O
C. 2.33 gFe to 1.00gO
D. 3.49 g Fe to 1.00g O
Solution
From the molecular formula, the mole ratio of iron to oxygen is 2: 3. The atomic
mass of iron (Fe) is 55.85, while the atomic mass of oxygen (O) is 16.00. The mass
ratio of iron to oxygen for the compound is 2(55.85) to 3(16.00), which equals
111.7 : 48.0. This ratio is approximately equal to 116 : 50, or 232 : 100, which
reduces to 2.32 :1. Both numbers must be increased proportionally to keep the
ratio the same. Choice C is a ratio of 2.33 to 1, which is the closest of the choices.
This means that 2.33 grams of iron combine with 1.00grams of oxygen to form
Fe203- Choice C is best. You should note that iron and oxygen can combine to
make other compounds (with different molecular formulas). One of these
compoundsis FeO, witha massratioof 55.85 to 16.00, which reduces to a ratioof
3.49 :1.00. The mass ratio (and mole ratio) of an oxide can be used to identify a
specific compound. Thisprocessis known as combustion analysis.
Examples 1.9 and 1.10 demonstrate how mass percent questions can be
mathematical. Masspercent questions can alsobe asked in a conceptual manner,
where the relative masspercentage of a specific element is compared for several
compounds. Examples 1.11,1.12, and 1.13 demonstrate some different forms of
this type of question, starting with typical examples and graduating to more
abstract ways of asking for mass percent.
Example 1.11
What is the mass percent of oxygen in carbon dioxide?
A. 27.3%
B. 57.1%
C. 62.5%
D. 72.7%
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review 10 The Berkeley Review
Solution
The mass of carbon in C02 is 12 grams, and the mass of oxygen in C02 is 32
grams. The total mass of C02 is 44 grams, so the mass percent of oxygen is the
ratio of 32 to 44. This ratio reduces to 8 over 11.
Mass percentO= 32g x100% =22. x100% =-- x100%
44gC02 44 11
Quick Calculation Technique:
Quick calculations require knowing the values of selected fractions. One-
eleventh is equal to 0.091; therefore, eight-elevenths is equal to 8(0.091) = 0.728.
This method gets an exact value and is very fast, if you know how to do it.
_8_ = 8x J- = 8x 0.091 = 0.728 = 72.8%
11 11
Narrowing-Down-Choices Technique:
On a multiple-choice exam, you can eliminate answers by narrowing down the
range into which the answer fits. 8 over 11is less than 9 over 12,but greater than
7 over 10. Arange has beenestablished between -2- and -7-. 9 over 12is 75%,
12 10
and 7 over 10 is 70%, so the correct answer falls between 70% and 75%.
-2_ > _8_ > _7_, where -2- = 75% and-7- = 70%. So: 75% >-- > 70%
12 11 10 12 10 11
Choice D is the best answer.
Example 1.12
What is the mass percent of nitrogen in NH4NO3?
A. 28%
B. 35%
C. 42%
D. 50%
Solution
The total mass of the nitrogen in the compound is 28 g/mole, because there are
two nitrogen atoms in the compound at 14 g/mole each. The mass of the
compound is 28 + 4 + 48= 80g/mole. You must divide 28 by 80quickly. The
common denominator ofboth is 4. Reducing by 4yields afraction of -7-.
Mass percent N= ?**** x100% =2&x 100% =-7- x100%
80gNH4NO3 80 20
Quick Calculation Technique:
Quick calculations may involve getting a denominator to some easy-to-use
number, such as 10,100, or 1000. It is easy to convert a fraction into decimals or
percents when the denominator is either 10, 100, or 1000. For this question, a
denominator of 100 works well. To convert 20 to 100, we must multiply by 5.
Multiply both numerator and denominator by 5, to change the fraction -7- to-^2_.
V3 y 6 20 100
The percentage is 35%, so choice B is correct.
28 = _7_ = 7x5 = .35. = 0.35 = 35%
80 20 20x5 100
Narrowing-Down-Choices Technique:
Narrowing down the range into which the answer fits can be applied to any
multiple-choicemath question. 28 over 80 reduces to 7 over 20. The value of 7
over 20 is greater than 7 over 21, but less than 8 over 20. A range has been
established between-7- and--. Thevalue of 7 over 21is 33.3%, and the value of
21 20
8 over 20 is 40%, so the correct answer falls between 33.3%and 40%. Only choice
Bfits in this range, so choice Bmust be the correct answer.
-7_ < -Z. < A, where -7- = 33.3% and-- = 40%. So33.3% <-7- < 40%
21 20 20 21 20 20
Example 1.13
Which of the following samples yields the MOSTmoles of sodium cation?
A. 1.0 g NaCl
B. l.OgNaBr
C 1.0gNaNO3
D. 1.0gNa2CO3
Solution
This question is a subtle way of asking, "Which salt has the greatest mass percent
of sodium?" All choices are 1.0 g of compound, so the most moles of sodium are
found in the compound with the greatest mass percentage of sodium. Choices A,
B, and C have the same number of sodium atoms in the compound (one), so they
each have the same numerator in the mass percent formula. The best choice of
those three salts is the lightest compound (resulting in the smallest denominator
when calculating mass percent). The lightest compound of the three choices A,
B, and C is the salt with the lightest anion, which is choice A, NaCl. Now the
question involves comparing the mass percent of sodium in NaCl to the mass
percent of sodium in Na2C03, choice D.
Mass percent Na in NaCl = 23,0gNa x100% =-22_ x100%
58.5 g NaCl 58.5
Mass percent Na inNa 2C03 = 46,0gNa x100% =-^- x100% =23 x100%
106gNa2CO3 106 53
22. > -2_f sochoice Dis thebest answer.
53 58.5
Empirical Formula
An empirical formula for molecules uses the smallest whole number ratio of the
atoms in a compound. It is the formula that gives the relative numerical values
for each element in the molecule in such a way that the numbers in the ratio
cannot be reduced without involving fractions. An empirical formula may or
may not be the actual formula of the molecule. It is calculated from the mass
percentage of each element within a compound. You may recall from your
general chemistry courses that we start by assuming a 100-gram sample, so that
the percentages can be changed easily into mass figures. From this point, it is a
matter of converting from mass into moles, using the atomic masses for each
element. The empirical formula is a whole number ratio of these mole values.
Empirical formulas must include whole number quantities as subscripts.
Example 1.14
Which of the following is an empirical formula?
A. C2H6
B. C3H8
C. C4H10
D. C6H6
Solution
An empirical formula for a molecule is defined as the formula in which the
constituent atoms are in their smallest possible whole number ratio. Choice A,
C2H6, can be reduced to C1H3 (normally written as CH3), so choice A is not an
empirical formula. Choice C, C4H10, can be reduced to C2Hs, so choice C is not
an empirical formula. Choice D, CgH6, can be reduced to C1H1 (normally
written as CH), so choice D is not an empirical formula. This eliminates all of the
choices except choice B, C3H8. The ratio of 3 : 8 cannot be reduced any further,
so C3H8 is an empirical formula, making choice B the correct answer. In the case
of C3H8, the empirical formula and the molecular formula are the same, because
the compound is completely saturated with hydrogens. CgHi6 has too many
hydrogens and is not a possible formula. Organic chemistry rules can help to
save time on formula questions.
Example 1.15
What is the empirical formula for a compound that is 72% C, 12% H, and
composed solely of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen?
A. C3H60
B. C6Hi20
C. C6H14O
D. C7H14O
Solution
For empirical formula calculations, assume a 100-gramsample of the compound.
A 100-gramsample in this case would contain 72 grams C, 12 grams H, and 16
grams O. The 16 grams of oxygen are determined from the difference between
the mass of carbon plus hydrogen and the 100grams of sample. Next, you must
convert the grams of each element into the corresponding moles of each element.
To go from grams to moles, divide the mass of the element by its atomic mass. In
this case, 72grams of C is equivalent to 6 moles of C, 12grams of H is equivalent
to 12 moles of H, and 16 grams of O is equivalent to 1 mole of O. This is a
particularly easy example, because the ratios turn out to be whole numbers. In
cases where they don't come out whole, you must divide the mole quantity of
each element in the compound by the lowest mole quantity for any of the
elements. However, for this example the best answer is choice B. Drawn below
is a useful layout of empirical formula calculations. It is often easier just to plug
terms into an equation such as this, because you don't have to show your work
on the MCAT. Do the questions as quickly and carefully as you can,
emphasizing organization in your path to a solution.
Qpercentage carbon j-Jpercentage hydrogen Q percentage oxygen = Cl72Hl2Ql6 = CgHl2Ol
molarmasscarbon molarmasshydrogen molarmassoxygen 12 1 16
Example 1.16
What is the empirical formula of an oxide of sulfur that is 60% oxygenby
weight?
A. SO
B. S02
C. s2o5
D. SO3
Solution
Here againyou should assumea 100-gram sample. A100-gramsample would
have 60 grams of oxygen and 40 grams of sulfur. The moles ofO=-2> and the
16
moles ofS=^. $0. ismore than double 40., sothere aremore than two oxygen
32 16 32
atoms persulfur atom. This eliminates choices AandB. Upon reducing sQ. to20.,
r 32 16
we see that the ratio of oxygen to sulfur is 3 :1, making choice D the best answer.
g percentage sulfurQ percentage oxygen =S40_O60 =S20O60 =S\O3
molarmasssulfur molarmassoxygen 32 16 16 16
The test emphasizes ratios, so the more numerical intuition you develop, the
better. To make problem-solving less mathematical, focus on eliminating choices
by comparing relative ratios. An alternative way to ask an empirical formula
question with reduced math is shown in Example 1.17.
Example 1.17
If a molecule is composed of only two elements (Xand Y), and if Xand Y
combine in equal mass quantities, and if Yis less than twice as heavy as X, which
of the following molecular formulas is NOT possible?
A. XY
B. XY2
C X3Y2
D. X3Y
Solution
If Ywere exactly twice as heavy as X, then equal masses of Xand Ywould result
in exactly twice as many moles of Xas Y, a 2 :1 ratio of Xto Y. Because Yis less
than twice as heavy as X, there are fewer than twice as many moles of Xas Y.
Thus, the ratio of X: Ymust be 2 :1 or smaller. This limiting ratio is true of all
the answers except choice D. The wording of this question allows for the
possibility that the molecular mass of Xis equal to or greater than Y.
Molecular Formula
The molecular formula is the actual mole ratio of the elements within the
compound. The molecular formula is found by multiplying the empirical
formula by the whole number ratio of the molecular mass to the empirical mass
(including 1, in some cases). Therefore, conversion from the empirical formula to
the molecular formula requires knowing the molecular mass of the compound. If
the molecular mass is double the empirical mass, then all of the elements in the
empirical formula are doubled to get the molecular formula.
Example 1.18
What is the molecular formula for a compound that is 82.76%C, has a molecular
mass of 58.1 grams per mole, and is composed solely of carbon and hydrogen?
A. CH2
B. C2H5
C. C3H8
D. C4H10
Solution
Choice Bis eliminated immediately, because a hydrocarbon cannot have an odd
number of hydrogens. For neutral C2Hs to exist, it would have to be a free
radical. Continuing to use organic chemistry logic, choice A is not physically
possible. One carbon requires four bonds to hydrogen atoms to form a stable
molecule (methane). CiH2 would be a carbene (:CH2), which is not stable due to
its lack of an octet. To decide between choices C and D, you must first find the
empirical formula, and then convert that into the molecular formula.
C percentage carbon H percentage hydrogen = C82.76H17.24 = Cg.93H 17.24
molarmass carbon molar masshydrogen 12 1
empirical formula: CemHlZM. =C\H!Z. =QH2.5 =QH5
r 6.93 6.93 7
An empirical formula of QH5 when multiplied by a whole number cannot yield
C3H8, so choice C is eliminated. This leaves only choice D. The correct ratio of
molecular mass to empirical mass confirms that choiceD is the best answer. The
molecular formula is found using the molecular mass of 58.1 grams per mole.
The empirical mass is 2(12) + 5 = 29. This value is only half of the molecular
mass, so the formula must be doubled to yield C4H10. This question could have
been solved in seconds by seeing that only choice D has a molecular mass of 58.
Example 1.19
An unknown stable gas is composed of 13.10% H, 52.23% C, and the remainder
O. A 0.10-mole sample weighs 4.61 grams. What is the molecular formula for
the compound?
A. C2H60
B. C3H80
C. C3H9O
D. C4HgO
Solution
Astable compound made of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen cannot have an odd
number of hydrogens, so choice C is eliminated. Neutral C3H9O would have to
be a free radical. The remaining choices obey the octet rule. The molecular mass
is 46.1, so choice A is the correct answer. That is the method you should use on a
multiple-choice exam. Now let's confirm that by using the molecular formula.
First you must assume a 100-gram sample, resulting in 13.10 g H, 52.23 g C, and
34.67 g O. Next, the numbers are converted into moles, and then the values are
reduced to a whole number ratio. The calculation of the empirical formula is
shown below, where a formula arrangement is used to help keep track of the
values.
C52.23 H13.10 Q34.67 = C4 4H13 102 2 =CilHlM-O^ = QHaOi
12 1 16 ' 2.2 2.2 2.2
The empirical mass is 2(12) + 6 + 16 = 46. This value is equal to the molecular
mass, so the empirical formula is the molecular formula.
General Chemistry
Stoichiometry Elemental Analysis
Combustion Analysis (an Experimental Procedure)
Combustion analysis entails determining the mass percent of each component
element in an unknown compound. It is accomplished by oxidizing the
unknown with excess oxygen (to ensure completecombustion), followed by the
separation and collection ofall ofthe oxidized products. This isanexperimental
procedure, which makes it a likely topic on a conceptual exam such as the
MCAT. When a hydrocarbon is oxidized, carbon dioxide and water are formed.
Carbon dioxide and water can be separated using various methods. One method
involves passing theC02 gas and H20 vapor across a hygroscopic salt of known
mass. The hygroscopic salt absorbs the water, and thus increasesin mass.
Thehygroscopic salt must not react with carbon dioxide. Agoodchoice for the
hygroscopic salt is either calcium chloride or magnesium sulfate (both of which
youshould have used as drying agents in your organic chemistry lab). Once the
water is absorbed, the remaining gas is passed across a sample of KOHof known
mass. KOH undergoes a combination reaction with carbon dioxide to form
potassium bicarbonate (KHCO3). The potassium hydroxide salt absorbs the
carbon dioxide, and thus increases in mass. Knowing the masses of C02 and
H20, we can determine the masses of carbon and hydrogen by multiplying the
mass percent of each element by the mass of its respective oxide product that
was collected. Upon dividing these numbers by the mass of the original sample,
the mass percents ofhydrogen and carbonin the original sampleare determined.
The carbon dioxide and water can be separated and collected using a different
method than passing the gases over salts that bind the products. Bylowering the
temperature, carbon dioxide and water can be converted to their solid states.
Because solids do not flow, they can be collected easily. The math is the same,
once the quantity of each product has been established.
Figure 1-1 shows a typical apparatus used in a combustion analysis. The oxygen
tank serves to provide excess oxygen to the system constantly. The pressure
valve is a one-way valve designed so that oxygen can flow into the sample
chamber, but no gases can flow back. The resistor in the base of the sample
chamber provides heat to initiate the oxidation. The tube to the right of the
sample chamber is connected to a vacuum, to generate a lowpressure. Once the
reaction is complete, Valve #3 is closed so that no gases are lost to the
environment, and Valve #1 is opened. Gases flow into the region above the
magnesiumsulfate. Magnesium sulfate absorbs moisture fromthe gases. After a
time, Valve #2 is opened so that gases flow into the region above sodium
hydroxide. Sodium hydroxide absorbs carbon dioxide gas. Oxygen gas is then
used to flush any remaining gas in the sample chamber through the system.
Pressure
valve
Oxygen
tank
Sample
chamber
Resistor
rWWVHn
Adjustable voltage Trap I
Figure 1-1
16
Valve #2 Valve #3
Trap 11
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStiy Stoichiometry Solution Concentration
Solution Concentration
Units and Terminolgy
Solutions are mixtures formed by the addition of a solute to a solvent. A solution
may contain several different solutes. The amount of solute is measured relative
to the amount of solvent, which results in a certain concentration for the solution.
Concentration units include molarity (moles solute per liter of solution), molality
(moles solute per kilogram of solvent), mass percent (mass solute per mass of
solution), and density (mass solution per volume solution). The concentration of
a solute can be changed by changing the amount of solvent. Addition of solvent
to solution is referred to as dilution and results in a lower concentration by any
measurement. Paramount to solving problems involving concentrations and
dilution is an understanding of the different units.
Molarity
Molarity (M) is the concentration of a fluid solution defined as the moles of a
solute per volume of solution, where the volume is measured in liters (L). To
determine the molarity of a solution, the moles of solute are divided by the liters
of solution.
Example 1.20
What is the molarity of 500.0 mL of solution containing 20.0 grams of CaC03(s)?
A. 0.15 M CaC03(aq)
B. 0.20 M CaC03(aq)
C. 0.33 M CaC03(aq)
D. 0.40 M CaC03(aq)
Solution
Molarityis defined as moles of solute per liter of solution. In this question, you
must convertfromgrams CaC03 into molesCaC03by dividingby the molecular
mass of CaC03, and then dividing this value by the liters of solution:
20 grams CaCC^ =Q2Q moles CaC03
^^"lole
0.20 moles CaCQ3 =O20 MCa0o3 =0,40 MCaCo3 =0.40 MCa003, choice D
0.50 L solution 0.50 1
These questions can be trickier if the units are milligrams, milliliters, or
millimolar. The question uses similar math, but there are more opportunities to
make an error. A common error to avoid is the "factor of a thousand" error. To
become more conscious of possible trick questions, ask yourself: "If I were
writing this test question, what would I ask?" If youconsider questions fromthe
test writer's point of view, the tricks become more apparent.
Molality
Molality (m) is the concentration of a fluid solution defined as the moles of a
solute per kilogram of solvent. The molality of a solution does not change with
temperature, so it is often used to determine a change in the solution's
temperature when the change depends on concentration. Notable examples of
this include boiling-point elevation and freezing-point depression. To determine
the molalityof a solution, the moles of solute are divided by the kilogramsof the
solvent.
General Chemistry Stoichiometry Solution Concentration
Example 1.21
What is the molality of a solution made by adding 7.46 g KCl to 250 g of water?
A. 0.20mKCl(aq)
B. 0.33mKCl(aq)
C 0.40mKCl(aq)
D. 0.50mKCl(aq)
Solution
Molality is defined as moles of solute per kilogram of solvent. In this question,
you must convert from grams KCl into moles KCl by dividing by the molecular
mass of KCl, and then dividing this value by the kilograms of solvent:
7.46 grams KCl =010molesKa
^"tole
0.10 moles KCl =O10 mKC1=O40 mKCl =0.40 mKCl, choice C
0.25kgH2O 0.25 1
Mass Percent (in Solution)
Mass percent is the concentration of a fluid solution defined as the mass of solute
per mass of solution multiplied by one hundred percent. The mass percent of a
solution remains constant as temperature changes. To determine the mass
percent of a solution, the mass of solute is divided by the mass of the solution
(where both are measured in grams). Mass percent is a unitless value, because
mass is divided by mass.
Example 1.22
What is the mass percent of a 1.0 m NaCl(aq) solution?
A. 5.53%NaCl by mass
B. 5.85%NaCl by mass
C. 6.22%NaCl by mass
D. 9.50%NaCl by mass
Solution
Mass percent is defined as grams of solute per grams of solution. In this
question, you must convert from moles NaCl into grams NaCl by multiplying by
the molecular mass of NaCl, and then dividing this value by the total mass of
solution. The total mass of solution is the sum of the mass of solute and the mass
of solvent. It is easy to forget to consider the mass of solute in the total mass,
which leads to the incorrect answer choice B.
1.0 moles NaCl(aq) x58.5 S/mole =58.5 gNaCl
Total mass solution = 58.5 g NaCl +1000 g H2O = 1058.5g solution
Mass %NaCl = 58.5 gNaCl ^^ 58.5 <585 = 5.85%
1058.5g solution 1058.5 1000
Only choice A is less than 5.85%, so choice A is the best answer. Sometimes
questions that would normally require a calculator for a precise answer can be
determined well enough without one to answer a multiple-choice test question.
General Chemistiy Stoichiometry Solution Concentration
Density
Density (p) is the concentration of a fluid solution defined as the mass of solution
per volume of solution. The density of a solution varies with temperature. The
density of a solution is uniform throughout, so a small sample of the solution has
the same density as the entire solution. To determine the density of a solution,
the mass of a sample of the solution is divided by the volume of the sample
(usually measured in milliliters). Examples 1.3 and 1.5 addressed the topic of
density.
Dilution
Dilution involves the addition of solvent to a solution, thus resulting in an
increase in the volume of the solution and a decrease in the concentration of the
solute in solution. Equation 1.2below describes simple dilution where a solvent
is added to solution. Determining the concentration when two solutions are
mixed requires more work than simple dilution.
MinitiarVinitial = Mfinal'Vfinal ft-2)
When working with dilution questions, be aware of a common twist that the
writerscan employ. Their questionmay askfor volume added rather than asking
for the final total volume. Percent dilution may also be discussed. Multiple
containers are used in standard dilution procedure, so rinsing ensures that the
concentration of solution on the walls of the new containers are equilibrated with
the contents they will hold. Youmay recall filling a volumetric pipette with a
solution in general chemistry lab, thendraining thepipette before filling it with
thesample to be transferred. This is done to ensure that anyresidual liquid in
thepipette has thesame concentration as thesolution being transferred and that
any water in the pipette is rinsed away.
Example 1.23
What is the molarityof a solutionmade by mixing 200 mLpure water with 100
mL0.75MKCl(aq)?
A. 0.25MKCl(aq)
B. 0.50MKCl(aq)
C. 1.50MKCl(aq)
D. 2.25MKCl(aq)
Solution
Because water has been added to the solution, the concentration must decrease,
so choicesCand Dare eliminated. Solvingthis questioninvolvesusing Equation
1.2 to determine the effect of dilution on the molarity. The initial molarity
(Minitial) &0.75 M, the initial volume (Vinitial) is 100 mL, and the final volume
(Vfinal)is 300 mL- Thequestion requires solving forthefinal molarity (Mfinal)-
Minitial-Vinitial = Mnnal-Vfinal - 0.75M-100mL = Mnnal-300 mL
Mnnal -^^.-. Mnnal ^M-lOOmL, Q75MM =Q25U
Vfinai 300 mL V3/
Thefinal molarityis 0.25 M, so choice Ais the best answer. Because the molarity
is decreased by a factor of three, the dilution process in thisexample is referred
to as a threefold dilution. That is, when two parts solvent are added to one part
solution, the volume is tripled and the dilution is threefold. This terminology
may be unfamiliar at first, but in a short time it should make sense.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 19 Exclusive MCAT Preparation
General Chemistiy Stoichiometry Solution Concentration
Example 1.24
How many milliliters of water are needed to dilute 80 mL 5.00 M KN03(aq) to
LOOM?
A. 160mLH2O
B. 320mLH2O
C. 400mLH2O
D. 480mLH2O
Solution
Again, Equation 1.2should be employed to calculate the change in concentration
of a solution after dilution from the addition of solvent. First we must solve for
the final volume. You are provided with values for Minitial' Mfinal/ and Vjnitial/
so you can manipulate the equation to solve for Vfinal-
Vfinai =initial'Vinitial =5.00Mx80mL= 5x 80mL =400mL
Mfinal 1-00 M
The question asks how much water is added, not the final volume. The volume
added is the difference between the initial volume (80 mL) and the final volume
(400 mL). The difference between the two values is 320 mL, so 320 mL of water
must be added to 80 mL of 5.00 M KN03(aq) to dilute it from 5.00 M KN03(aq) to
1.00 M KN03(aq). Choice B is the best answer.
Example 1.25
Which dilution converts 6.00M HCl(aq) to 0.30 M HCl(aq)?
A. 11 parts water to 1 part 6.00 M HCl(aq)
B. 19 parts water to 1 part 6.00M HCl(aq)
C. 20 parts water to 1 part 6.00M HCl(aq)
D. 21 parts water to 1 part 6.00 M HCl(aq)
Solution
Hydrochloric acid goes from 6.00 M to 0.30 M, which is a twenty fold dilution.
This means that the final volume is twenty (20) times the initial volume. When
dealing with answer choices that present the dilution in terms of parts, the ratio
is volume of solvent added to volume of original solution. For the final volume
to be twenty times greater than the initial volume, nineteen parts must be added.
JVfinaL=MinitiaL^JVfinaL=4QQJM =20/.Vfinal =20 (Vinitial)
Vinitial Mfinal Vinitial 0.30 M
Vadded = Vfinal - Vinitial = 20 Vinitial - Vinitial = 19 (Vinitial)
The ratio of the volume added to the volume of solution initially present is 19 :1,
so the best answer is choice B. A part can be any set volume. A 20 :1 dilution
would result in a final volume that is 21 times the initial volume, so the final
concentration would be less than 0.30 M.
A solution can be diluted by adding solvent or another solution to it. The
addition of pure solvent is known as a simpledilution. Mixing two solutions is
more complicated than a simple dilution where pure solvent is added, because
solute from both initial solutions must be considered. The final concentration lies
somewhere between the two initial concentration values before mixing. The final
concentration is a weighted average of the initial concentrations.
General ChemiStiy Stoichiometry Solution Concentration
Example 1.26
What is the final concentration of CI" ions after mixing equal volumes of 0.20 M
KCl(aq) with 0.40 M CaCl2(aq)?
A. 0.20MCl-(aq)
B. 0.30MCl"(aq)
C. 0.40MCl"(aq)
D. 0.50MCl"(aq)
Solution
The salt KCl yields one chloride ion when it dissociates in water, so the chloride
concentration is 0.20 M. The salt CaCl2 yields two chloride ions when it
dissociates in water, so the chloride concentration is 0.80 M. The final
concentration equals the total CI" ions from both solutions divided by the new
total volume. Because equal volumes are mixed, the final concentration will be
an average of the two initial concentrations.
0.20 Mcr + 0.80 Mcr -l.ooMcr = 050 MC1-
2 2
If the volumes are not equal, then a weighted average yields the final
concentration. For this example, choice D is the best answer.
Example 1.27
What is the concentration of K+ ions in solution after 25.0 mL of 0.10 M
K2S04(aq) is added to 50.0 mL of 0.40 M KOH(aq)?
A. 0.25MK+(aq)
B. 0.30MK+(aq)
C 0.33MK+(aq)
D. 0.50MK+(aq)
Solution
The salt KOH yields one potassium ion when it dissociates in water, so the K+
concentration is 0.40 M. The salt K2S04 yields two potassium ions when it
dissociates in water, so the K+ concentration is 0.20 M. The final concentration
equals the total K+ ions from both solutions divided by the new total volume.
Because unequal volumes are mixed, the final concentration is a weighted
average of the twoinitial concentrations. The mixture involves 25 mL0.20 MK+
with 50 mL 0.40 M K+, so the final concentration must fall between 0.20 M and
0.40 M. This eliminates choice D. If the two volumes were equal, the final
concentration would be 0.30 M K+, the average of the two concentrations. But
because there is more of the more concentrated solution, the final concentration is
greater than 0.30M, so choices A and Bare eliminated. Only choice C remains.
25 mLx 0.20 MK+ +50 mLx 0.40 MK+ =1 (0.20 MKV- (0-40 MK+)
75 mL 75 mL 3 3
= 2. +3. MK+ = I MK+ = 0.33 MK+, choiceC
3 3 3
Beer's Law
When electromagnetic radiation is passed through a solution, the solute may
absorb some of the light. The fight absorbed is in a specific wavelength range,
and the intensity of the absorbance varies with the concentration of solute. A
generic absorbance spectrum for a hypothetical solute is shown in Figure 1-2.
General Chemistry
Stoichiometry Solution Concentration
^ma
Wavelength (nm)
Figure 1-2
Because the absorbance of light varies with concentration, absorbance can be
used to determine the concentration of a solute. This is the essence of Beer's law.
Beer's law is expressed in Equation 1.3, where e is a constant for the solute at
Xmax (the wavelength of greatest absorbance), C is the solute concentration (C=
[Solute]), and 1is the width of the cuvette (length of the pathway through which
the light passes).
Absorbance = C1 (1.3)
The key feature of this equationis its expressionof the principle that absorbance
is proportional to concentration. By knowing the absorbance for solutions of
known concentration, the concentration of an unknown solution can be
determined by comparing its absorbance value to the known values.
Example 1.28
For 100 mL of a solution with an absorbance of 0.511, what amount of water must
be added to reduce the absorbance to 0.100?
A. 389mLH20
B. 411mLH20
C. 488mLH20
D. 511mLH20
Solution
For this question, a hybrid of Equations 1.2 and 1.3 should be employed to
determine the volume that must be added to dilute the solution. Because
absorbance is directly proportional to concentration, Equation 1.2 can be re
written as follows:
Absinitial-Vinitial = Absfinal'Vfinal
First, we must solve for the final volume. You are provided with values for
Absinitial/ Absfinal, and Vinitial, so you can solve for Vfjnal.
Vfi _Absinitial-Vinitial _0.511 x100 mL =5.11 x100 mL _ 511 mL
Absfinal 0.100 1
The question asks for how much water is added, which is the differencebetween
the initial volume (100 mL) and the final volume (511 mL). The difference
between the two values is 411 mL; therefore, 411 mL of water must be added.
The best answer is choice B.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 22
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry Stoichiometry Balancing Reactions
Standard Balancing
Let us briefly address the process of balancing chemical reactions. Reactions are
written from reactants to products. Because of the law of conservation of matter,
the number of atoms must be identical on each side of the reaction. The two
sides of the reaction are separated by an arrow drawn from left to right.
C5Hu(l) + Oz() C02(g) + H20(g)
There are carbon atoms, hydrogen atoms, and oxygen atoms on both sides of the
reaction. To balance the reaction, keep track of the atoms on each side of the
reaction. Start with the compound whose atoms are least present in the reaction
(carbon and hydrogen are present in only two compounds each, so we start with
Q>Hi2). Starting with one C5H12, the atoms must be balanced step by step:
\ CsHi2(D + 02(g) C02(g) + H20()
5C ?C
12 H ?H
?o ?o
Balance carbon atoms by multiplying C02 by five:
1 C5Hi2(/) + Oz(g) 5 C02(g) + H20(#)
5C 5C
12 H ?H
?0 10 + ?O
Balancehydrogen atoms by multiplying H20 by six:
1C5H12W + Q2^ 5 C02(g) + 6 H2Ofg)
5C 5C
12 H 12 H
?0 16 O
Balance oxygen atoms by multiplying 02 by eight:
\C5Hu(l) + 8 02(g) 5C02(g) + 6H20(g)
5C 5C
12 H 12 H
16O 16O
Example
What are
1.29
the correct coef
Co(OH)3(s) +
1 :6
1 :3
1:3
1:6
ficients needed to balance the following reaction?
A. 2:3:
B. 3:2:
C. 2:3:
D. 3:2:
1i2oU4(tuj) *- ^.u^.jw^jim/,/ t ii^vu/
Solution
Balancing equations requires that you keep track of each atom. In this case,
because of cobalt, the ratio of Co(OH)3fs) to Co2(S04)3(aq) must be 2 :1, which
eliminates choices Band D. The correct answer is found using water. Two moles
of Co(OH)3(s> and three moles of H2SC>4(aq) have a total of in 12 H atoms and 18
O atoms, making choice A the best answer.
General ChemiStiy Stoichiometry Balancing Reactions
Balanced equations can be used to determine the amount of a product froma
given amount ofreactant. As wesawinExample 1.7, balanced equations can be
used to determine how much product is formed from a given mass of a reactant.
Werefer tothese questions as gram-to-mole-to-mole-to-gramconversions, where
the overall conversion processis fromgrams reactant to grams product.
Example 1.30
How many grams of water are formed when 25.0 grams of pentane (CsHi2)
reacts with oxygen?
A. 18.8 gH20
B. 25.0 g H20
C. 37.5 g H20
D. 75.0 g H20
Solution
Step1: Convert grams reactantto molesreactant by dividing by molecularmass
of the reactant:
grams reactant x mole reactant _moies reactant
grams reactant
Step 2: Convert moles reactant to moles product using the coefficient ratio from
the balanced reaction:
, L L moles product , , .
moles reactant x *- = moles product
moles reactant
Step 3: Convert moles product to grams product by multiplying by molecular
mass of the product:
moles product xsi E =grams product
moles product
The overall conversion is as shown below:
25.0 gC5Hi2 xlmoleC5H12x 6moleH2Q x 18gH2Q =37J.
72gC5Hi2 ImoleCsHn lmoleH20
The ratio of water to pentane comes from the balanced oxidation reaction. The
product of 6 x 18 is 108, which is greater than 72. This means that the original
25.0 grams is multiplied by a number greater than 1, which in turn means that
the final number is greater than 25.0g. This eliminates choices A and B. 108over
72 is less than two, so the final value is less than 50.0 grams, so choice D is
eliminated. The only answer that remains is choice C, 37.5 g.
Limiting Reagents
Determining the limiting reagentin a reactionrequirescomparingthe number of
moles of each of the reactants. The limiting reagent is the reactant that is
exhausted first, not necessarily the reactant with the lowest number of moles.
Whenthe limiting reagent is completely consumed, the reactionstops, regardless
of the amount of the other reactant. To determine the limiting reagent, the
amount of all reactants and the mole ratio of the reactants must be known. If the
ratio of the moles of Reactant A to Reactant Bis greater than the ratio of Reactant
A to Reactant B from the balanced equation, then Reactant B is the limiting
reagent. If the ratioof the molesof ReactantA to ReactantBis less than the ratio
of Reactant A to Reactant Bfrom the balanced equation, then Reactant A is the
limiting reagent.
Copyright by TheBerkeley Review 24 The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry Stoichiometry Balancing Reactions
Example 1.31
Assuming that the following reaction between oxygen and hydrogen goes to
completion, which statement is true if 10.0grams of hydrogen are mixed with
64.0grams of oxygen?
2H2(g) + 02(g) 2 H20(1)
A. The limiting reagent is oxygen.
B. 74.0 grams of water will form.
C. 3.0moles of hydrogen will be left over following the reaction.
D. 68.0 grams of water will form.
Solution
In limiting reagent reactions, you must decide which reactant is depleted first.
Limiting reagent questions often look like ordinary stoichiometric questions. The
rule is simple: If they give you quantities for all reactants, it is probably a limiting
reagent problem. In this question, you are given quantities for both hydrogen
and oxygen. 10grams of H is equal to 5 moles of H2, and 64grams of oxygen is 2
moles of 02 (remember your diatomic elements!) From the balanced equation,
we learn that twice as many moles of hydrogen as oxygen are needed. The
number of moles indicates there is a 5 : 2 ratio of hydrogen to oxygen, which is
greater than a 2:1 reaction ratio, so oxygen is depleted first. The correct choice is
answer A. The question gives you opposing choices in A and B. One of these
two choices must be true. The correct choice is A.
Example 1.32
What is the limiting reagent when 22.0 grams C3H8 are mixed with 48.0 grams
o2?
C3H8(1) + 02(g) C02(g) + H20(g)
A. Oxygen is the limiting reagent.
B. Propane is the limiting reagent.
C. Water is the limiting reagent.
D. There is no limiting reagent.
Solution
This question is more difficult than the previous question, but you are still
deciding which reactant is depleted first. Because the limiting reagent is a
reactant, choice C (a product) is eliminated. To solve the question, stick to this
simple rule: Compare the actual ratio of the two reactants to the balanced
equation ratio of the two reactants. In this question, you are given unequal mass
quantities of C3H8 and 02 and a mole ratio that is not 1:1. Good luck.
Remember, the first step is to balance the reaction.
1 C3H8(1) + 5 02(g) 3 C02(g) + 4 H20(g)
22 grams ofC3H8 is22. moles ofC3H8, which is0.50 moles C3H8. 48 grams of02
44
is 22- moles of O2: (remember your diatomic elements!), which is 1.50moles of 02.
From the balanced equation, we see that we need 5 moles of 02 for 1 mole of
C3H8. The number of moles indicates there is a 1.50 : 0.50 ratio of 02 to C3H8,
which is less than 5:1. This means that oxygen (02) is depleted first. Oxygen
gas is the limiting reagent, so choice A is the best answer.
General Chemistiy Stoichiometry Reaction Types
't^m^k^sÊ:..' - "': .1''".: .. . 7.-:.Z-
Common Reactions
Thereare somereaction typesthat are standard reactions in inorganicchemistry.
Included among the common reaction types are the following five: 1)
precipitation reactions (also known as double-displacement reactions), 2) acid-
base reactions (alsoknown as neutralization reactions), 3) composition reactions,
4) decomposition reactions, and 5) oxidation-reduction reactions (electron-
transfer reactions). Oxidation-reduction reactions can be categorized as either
single replacement or combustion. Each reaction type will be addressed in more
detail in later sections, so let us consider each type of reaction in minimal detail
in this section.
Precipitation Reactions
A reaction that involves two aqueous salts being added together to form
spectator ionsand a solidsalt precipitate that drops out of solutionis knownas a
precipitation reaction. It mayalsobe referredto as a double-displacement reaction,
although that termis not as useful in describingthe chemistry. Drawn belowis a
sample precipitation reaction:
Na2Cr04(aq) + Sr(N03)2(aq) 2NaN03(aq) + SrCr04(s)
AqueousSalt AqueousSalt Ions Precipitate
Precipitationreactions canbe recognizedby the solid salt on the product side of
the equation. Recognition of the type of reaction is useful for predicting the
product. Recognizing a precipitate is highly beneficial in identifying a double-
displacement reaction. The following solubility rules can be helpful in
identifyingthe likelihoodof a precipitate'sforming:
1. Most salts containing alkali metal cations (Li+, Na+, K+, CS+,
Rb+) and ammonium (NH4+) are water-soluble.
2. Most nitrate (NO3") salts are water-soluble.
3. Most salts containing halide anions (CI", Br", I") are water-soluble
(with heavy metal exceptions such asAg+ andPb2"*).
4. Most salts containing sulfate anions (SO42") are water-soluble
(with exceptions such as Ba2+, Pb2+, Hg2+, and Ca2+).
5. Most hydroxide anion (OH") salts are only slightly water-soluble.
KOH and NaOH are substantially soluble, while Ca(OH)2,
Sr(OH)2, and Ba(OH)2are fairly soluble in water.
6. Most carbonate anion (CO32"), chromate anion (Cr042"),
phosphate anion (P043"), and sulfide anion (S2") salts are only
slightly water-soluble.
Acid-Base Reactions
Areactionbetweenan acid (a proton donor) and a base (a proton acceptor) forms
a neutral salt and water. For now, recognize that proton donors (acids) must
have a proton on an acid (HAcid). Acids to recognize are HC1, HBr, HI, HNO3,
H2S04, and NH4+. Basesto recognize are NaOH, KOH, LiOH, and CaC03-
HC104(aq) + LiOH(aq) LiC104(aq) + H20(1)
Acid Base Salt Water
Acid-base reactions canbe recognized by the formation of a salt and water on the
product side of the equation. Aqueous acid-base reactions can be identifiedby
the transfer of an H from the acid to the hydroxide of the base on the reactant
side of the equation.
Copyright byTheBerkeley Review 26 The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry Stoichiometry Reaction Types
Composition Reactions
A composition reaction involves the combining of reactants to form a product.
The number of reactants exceeds the number of products in a composition
reaction. Entropy decreases and more bonds are formed than are broken in
composition reactions.
PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) PCl5(g)
2 Reactants 1 Product
Composition reactions may fall into other reaction categories as well. In the
sample reaction, when PCI3 reacts with Cl2, PCI3 is oxidized and Cl2 is reduced.
Decomposition Reactions
A decomposition reaction is the opposite of a composition reaction. It involves
reactants decomposing to form multiple products. The number of reactants is
less than the number of products in a decomposition reaction. Entropy increases
and more bonds are broken than are formed in decomposition reactions.
CaS03(g) S02(g) + CaO(s)
1 Reactant 2 Products
Like composition reactions, decomposition reactions can also fall into other
reaction categories as well.
Oxidation-Reduction Reactions
An oxidation-reduction reaction involves the transfer of electrons from one atom
to another. Loss of electrons is defined as oxidation, while gain of electrons is
defined as reduction (LeoGer). The atom (or compound) losing electrons is
causing reduction, so it is referred to as the reductant (reducing agent), while the
atom (or compound) gaining electrons is causing oxidation, so it is referred to as
the oxidant (oxidizing agent). The oxidation states must change in an oxidation-
reduction reaction. A sample reaction (below) shows how magnesium is losing
electrons (thus being oxidized and having an increase in oxidation state) to
bromine (which is being reduced and having a decrease in oxidation state):
Mg(s) + Br2(l) *- MgBr2(s)
Reductant Oxidant Salt
Combustion Reactions
Combustion reactions are a special case of oxidation-reduction reactions, where
the oxidizing agent is oxygen gas, and the products are oxides. Typical examples
of combustion reactions include the oxidation of organic compounds, such as
hydrocarbons and carbohydrates, into carbon dioxide and water.
lC3H8(aq) +5 02(g) 3C02(g) +4 H20(1)
Hydrocarbon Oxygen Carbon dioxide Water
Combustion reactions of both hydrocarbons and monosaccharides balance in a
predictable manner, as shown below:
Hydrocarbon Combustion
CxHy +(x +y)02(g) xC02(g) +^H20(g)
3 4 2
Monosaccharide Combustion
CxH2xOx + x02(g) xC02(g) + xH20(g)
General Chemistry Stoichiometry Reaction Types
Example 1.33
Thefollowing reaction is anexample of whichtypeof reaction?
MgCl2(aq) + AgN03(aq) Mg(N03)2(aq) + AgCl(s)
A. Cation-crossover
B. Oxidation-reduction
C. Neutralization
D. Double-displacement
Solution
Of the generic reactions withwhich youare familiar, thereare typical features to
note. In this example, you have two salts undergoing an exchange reaction to
yield a precipitate. This makes it a precipitation reaction. No proton was
transferred (eliminating neutralization), and no oxidation states changed
(eliminating oxidation-reduction). Cation-crossover is a fabricated name, so
choice A is eliminated. Choice D, double-displacement, is another name for a
precipitation reaction. In double-displacement reactions, you have two salts
undergoing a reaction where they exchange counterions, and one of the new
combinationsformsa precipitate. This is shown in a genericfashion below:
MX(aq) + NY(aq) MY(aq) + NX(s)
Oxidation States
Assigning an oxidation state to an atom is a matter of distributing electrons
within a bond based on which atom is more electronegative. The oxidation state
of an atom can be determined by assigning it a value of positive one (+1) for
everybond it formswith a more electronegative atomand assigning it a value of
negative one (-1) for every bond it forms with a less electronegative atom. The
oxidation state is a sum of all these bonding values. In general chemistry, it is
often easiest to say oxygen is -2 (except in molecular oxygen and peroxides),
hydrogen is +1 (except in molecular hydrogen and hydrides), and halides are -1
(except when they are a central atom in an oxyacid). The sum of the oxidation
states of the elements in the compound must equal the overall charge, so the
oxidation state of any remaining atom can be determined by finding the
difference between its charge and the sum of the known oxidation states.
Example 1.34
What is the oxidation state of manganese in KMn04?
A. +1
B. +3
C. +5
D. +7
Solution
To simplify this example, we will consider that O = -2, and alkali metals = +1. In
this case, K = +1, and there are 4 Os valued at -2 each, for a net oxidation state of
-8. Summingoxygen and potassiumyields a total of -7. This means that for the
molecule to be neutral, the Mn (the only atom remaining) must cancel out that -7
by being +7. In other words, the sum of the oxidation states equals the
molecule's formal charge (zero). Soin this case, the oxidation state of manganese
is +7. The correct answer is choice D.
General ChemiStiy Stoichiometry Test-TaldngTips
Test-Taking lips
General Advice
Thestoichiometry sectionof this reviewcourseis best learnedby trial and error
from examples (i.e., practice with many problems.) For the most part, to be
successful in stoichiometry requires being fast at math and being able to see
immediately what a questionis askingfor. These are skills that are acquired and
not necessarily memorized. Keep in mind that on a multiple-choice exam, the
math has been done for you, so all you need to do is approximate the answer.
There is no universal shortcut that works in everysituation, but finding a range
withinwhichonly one answer choice fitsis a goodapproachtomost questions.
Intuition will also prove useful on the MCAT. Traditional testing at major
universities generally rewards memorization over intuitive skills, but preparing
for the MCAT forces you to hone your analyticaland intuitiveskillsas you recall
certain facts from memory. You should try to emphasize this thought process
early and regularly throughout your review studies.
In the examples above, several topics and styles of questions were presented.
Before you move on to the practice questions in the passages, make sure that you
understand the basic principle of each topic and the math typically used to
answer these questions. Math tricks may prove helpful, even for the conceptual
questions in stoichiometry. Keep in mind that you are not graded for showing
your work on the MCAT, so don't solve every problem to the last decimal place.
Analyze each question only well enough to eliminate three wrong answers. Be
concise and efficient in your problem-solving, not exhaustive. Generally, the
questions ask you to decide which fraction (or ratio) is larger. This can be done
easily by converting all the fractions to values over the same denominator, and
looking for an answer choice that falls within a range. Keep it simple.
Mathematical Tips and Shortcuts
While the MCATdoes not require elaborate calculations, you still must be able to
deal with ratios and percentages. Do not use a calculator when practicing for the
MCAT. The following strategies are useful ways to calculate a value quickly and
to a fair approximation without tables or a calculator:
Addition and Subtraction
Splitting numbers and adding common terms is a useful way to make addition
and subtraction easier. To split a number, consider how you would round it, and
then split it into the rounded number and the differencebetween the original and
rounded numbers. 193rounds up to 200, so 193can be thought of as 200- 7. 826
rounds down to 800, so think of 826 as 800 + 26. Adding and subtracting
requires linking like terms. Thus, adding 193to 826can be thought of as:
193 + 826 = 200 - 7 + 800 + 26 = 200 + 800 +26 - 7 = 1000 + 19 = 1019
Subtractionis done in a similar way. 826-193 can be thought of as:
826 - 193 = 800 + 26 - 200 + 7 = 800 - 200 +26 + 7 = 600 + 33 = 633
This approach may seem awkward at first, but it is effective and easy when
adding and/or subtracting several numbers at once. For instance, consider
adding 213 to 681, then subtracting 411.
213 + 681 - 411 = 200 + 13 + 700 - 19 - 400 - 11 = 200 + 700 - 400 +13 - 19 - 11
= 500 - 17 = 483
General Chemistry
Stoichiometry
Test-Taking Tips
Averaging Terms
Averaging terms involves estimating a mean value, and then keeping a running
tally of the differences between the actual values and the estimated average. To
find theaverage difference, therunning tally is divided by thenumber of values
being averaged. For instance, the average of25, 33, 21, 28, and30 can be thought
of as being around 28 (the median value), so the actual average is 28 +/- the
average difference:
The total difference is -3 + 5 - 7 +0 +2 = -3
When the total difference is divided by 5, it yields an average difference of - 0.6
The average of the five values is thus 28- 0.6= 27.4
Multiplication
Multiplication can also be made easier by splitting numbers as you would round
them. For instance, 97 is 100 - 3. Only one number need be split in
multiplication. Thus,multiplying 97by 121 can be thought of as:
97 x 121= (100 - 3) x 121= (100x 121) - (3 x 121) = 12,100- 363
12,100 - 363 = 11,700 + 400 - 363 = 11,700 + 37 = 11,737
Division
If you memorize the following set of fraction-to-decimal conversions, then
problems involvingdivision will be far easier:
1 = 0.200,1 = 0.166,1 = 0.143,1 = 0.125,1 = 0.111, -L = 0.091, -1- = 0.083
5 6 7 8 9 11 12
Memorizing these decimal values canbe useful in several ways. For instance, the
decimal equivalent of the fraction 18/66 can be found in the following manner:
18=J_=3xi = 3x (0.091) = 0.273
66 11 11
Knowing these decimal values is also useful for estimating in decimal terms
fractions that are just less than 1. For instance, the decimal equivalent of the
fraction 11/12 can be found in the following manner:
li -12-1 =12
12 12 12
These decimal values are also useful in deciding what to multiply a denominator
by to convert it to some number close to 10, 100, or 1000. For instance, the
numerator and denominator of the fraction 47/142 should be multiplied by 7,
because 0.143 = 1/7 so 7 x 143 is nearly 1000 (actually, it's 1001). The decimal
equivalent of the fraction 47/142canbe found in the following manner:
_4Z = 7x47 =329 =_329_ + a Uttle = o.329 + a little
142 7x142 994 1000
12 12
1 - 0.083 = 0.917
"Better living through chemistry!"
The Berkeley Review
Stoichiometry
Passages
12 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Stoichiometry Passage Schedule:
I: After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I - III & VI - VIII
Grade passages immediately after completion and log your mistakes.
II: Following Task I: Passages IV, V, & IX, (20 questions in 26 minutes)
Time yourself accurately, grade your answers, and review mistakes.
Ill: Review: Passages X - XII & Questions 87-100
Focus on reviewing the concepts. Do not worry about timing.
^Sr
R-E-V-I.E'W
I. Density Experiment
II. Combustion Analysis
III. Empirical Formula Determination
IV. Molar Volume of a Gas
V. Elemental Analysis
VI. Dilution Experiment
VII. Solution Concentrations and Dilution
VIII. Beers Plot and Light Absorption
IX. Beers Law Experiment
X. Reaction Types
XI. Calcium-Containing Bases
XII. Industrial Chemicals
Questions Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
Stoichiometry Scoring Scale
Raw Score MCAT Score
84 - 100 13 - 15
66 -83 10 - 12
47 -65 7 -9
34-46 4-6
1 -33 1 -3
(1 -7)
(8- 13)
(14- 20)
(21 - 26)
(27 - 33)
(34 - 40)
(41 -47)
(48 - 54)
(55 -61)
(62 - 68)
(69 - 78)
(79 - 86)
(87 - 100)
Passage I (Questions 1 - 7)
A student fills a 50-mL graduated cylinder exactly
halfway with water, adds a previously weighed sample of an
unknown solid, and records the new water level indicated by
the markings on the side of the graduated cylinder. After
recording the volume, she removes the unknown solid and
adds water to the cylinder to raise the volume back to
precisely 25 mL, replacing any water that may have adhered
to the solid. This procedure is repeated for a total of five
unknown solids, and it is discovered that each of the solids
sinks to the bottom of the graduated cylinder. Table 1 shows
the data for all five trials.
Unknown Mass Volume Reading
1 9.63 g 31.42 mL
2 12.38 g 31.19 mL
3 14.85 g 29.95 mL
4 8.22 g 28.00 mL
5 5.64 g 26.41 mL
Table 1
A second experiment is conducted with liquids, using a
10.00-mL volumetric cylinder (one that holds exactly 10.00
mL of solution) that weighs 42.61 grams when empty. In
four separate trials, unknown liquids are poured into the
cylinder exactly to the 10.00-mL mark on the cylinder each
time, and the combined mass of the cylinder and the liquid is
recorded. Table 2 shows the results of the second experiment.
Unknown Mass of Cylinder with Liquid
6 51.33 g
7 58.72 g
8 53.21 g
9 49.03 g
Table 2
Given that all of the unknown liquids are immiscible
(will not dissolve) in water, how many of the unknown
liquids can float on water?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
2. Which of these unknown solids is the DENSEST?
A. Solid#2
B. Solid #3
C. Solid #4
D. Solid #5
3. What would be the volume of a 20.0-gram piece of
unknown Solid #1?
A. 13.3 mL
B. 15.0 mL
C. 25.0 mL
D. 30.0 mL
4. How many of the unknown solids can float on Liquid
#7?
A. 0
B. 1
C. 2
D. 3
5. Which of the following sequences does NOT accurately
reflect the relative densities of the unknown liquids?
A. Liquid #7 > Liquid # 6 > Liquid #8
B. Liquid #8 > Liquid # 6 > Liquid #9
C. Liquid #7 > Liquid # 8 > Liquid #9
D. Liquid #7 > Liquid # 8 > Liquid #6
6. How would the results in Experiment 2 differ from the
actual results, if a heavier graduated cylinder had been
used?
A. Both the mass of the cylinder with the liquid and
the density of the liquid would increase.
B. The mass of the cylinder with the liquid would
increase, while the density of the liquid would
decrease.
C. The mass of the cylinder with the liquid would
increase, while the density of the liquid would
remain the same.
D. The mass of the cylinder with the liquid would
decrease, while the density of the liquid would
increase.
7. Which of the following is NOT a unit of density?
g
mL
oz.
3
cm
kg
A.
B.
in
GO ON TO THE NEXT PAGE
Passage II (Questions 8-13)
Elemental analysis is often a preliminary study in
structural analysis. A sample compound is placed into a
chamber with a positive pressure of oxygen gas flowing in.
The chamber has an ignition coil that is heated by a current.
As the reaction proceeds, the pressure in the chamber builds
up. After a short time, Valve #l is opened to allow the
product gas mixture from the reaction to flow into an
evacuated tube containing some magnesium sulfate, which
absorbs water vapor from the product gas mixture. Then
Valve #2 is opened, allowing the gas to flow into a second
evacuated tube containing some sodium hydroxide, which
absorbs carbon dioxide from the product gas mixture. The
apparatus is shown in Figure 1. The oxygen tank provides
oxygen in excess throughout the process. Valve #3 is
connected to a line that can either evacuate the system or
supply nitrogen to the system.
Pressure
valve
.. . , , ,, MtiS04(s) NaOH(s)
Variable voltage e 4
Figure 1
Four different samples are analyzed. The sample mass of
each unknownsubstance is approximately two grams. Table
1 shows the sample mass placed into the reaction chamber,
and the initial and final masses of magnesium sulfate and
sodium hydroxide in the side tubes.
Unknown Sample Mass
MgS04 Tube NaOH Tube
I 2.011 g
Init: 40.00 g
Fin: 41.21 g
Init: 30.00 g
Fin: 32.94 g
II 1.995 g
Init: 40.01 g
Fin: 41.26 g
Init: 30.00 g
Fin: 34.39 g
III 2.003 g
Init: 40.00 g
Fin: 42.00 g
Init: 30.00 g
Fin: 34.89 g
IV 2.001 g
Init: 40.00 g
Fin: 41.99 g
Init: 30.00 g
Fin: 36.53 g
Table 1
Which of the following relationships best describes the
relative mass percent of carbon in the four unknown
compounds used in the experiment?
A. I > II > III > IV
B. I>III>II>IV
C. IV > II >III> I
D. IV > III > II > I
Ideally, the properties of sodium hydroxide should
include being:
A . hydrophobic and semi-reactive with CCb.
B. hydrophobic and highly reactive with CCb.
C . hygroscopic and semi-reactive with CCb-
D . hygroscopic and highly reactive with CCb.
10. Why is the oxygen tank attached to a pressure valve?
A. It absorbs excess oxygen.
B . It helps cool the reaction chamber.
C . It ensures that oxygen gas is in excess.
D . It ensures that oxygen is limiting.
1 1. Which of the four unknown compounds is LEAST
likely to contain oxygen?
A. Compound I
B. Compound II
C. Compound III
D. Compound IV
1 2. Why are the U-tubes containing the two salts arranged
in the order that they are?
A. To ensure that water is absorbed before the gases
interact with the NaOH chamber
B . To ensure that carbon dioxide is absorbed before the
gases interact with the NaOH chamber
C. To enhance the reaction between water and carbon
dioxide
D. To absorb any excess oxygen gas before it reacts
with NaOH
13. What solid is being formed in the second tube after the
product gas mixture interacts with the salt?
A . Magnesium bicarbonate
B. Magnesium carbonate
C. Sodium bicarbonate
D. Sodium carbonate
Passage III (Questions 14-20)
Exactly 10.0 grams of an unknown organic compound is
poured into a flask. The compound is then exposed to excess
oxygen gas to oxidize it to CO2 gas and H2O gas. The
oxidized vapor flows through a tube filled first with copper
oxide to ensure complete oxidation. The vapor then flows
through 100.00 grams of powdered anhydrous sodium sulfate,
which binds water vapor to form 112.16 grams of hydrated
salt. The vapor continues to flow through 100.00 grams of
powdered anhydrous sodium hydroxide, which binds carbon
dioxide vapor to form 123.79 grams of bicarbonate salt.
The unknown compound contains only oxygen, carbon,
and hydrogen. The mass percent of carbon in the compound
is determined to be greater than 50%. In a subsequent
experiment, the compound is found to have a molecular mass
somewhere between 70 and 80 grams per mole. When the
bottle containing the unknown compound is left uncapped,
its contents slowly evaporate.
The information from the combustion reaction can be
converted into mass percent for both carbon and hydrogen.
By multiplying the grams of CO2 times the mass of one
carbon atom and dividing by the mass of carbon dioxide, the
mass of the carbon in the original sample can be determined.
The mass of hydrogen in the original sample can be found in
a similar manner. These two mathematical procedures
convert the grams of product molecules into the grams of
each atom. The final numbers are the grams of carbon and
hydrogen, respectively, in the unknown compound. To.
determine the mass percent, the mass of the atom is divided
by the mass of the sample. The mass percent of oxygen in
the unknown compound is determined by difference.
The information from the mass percents of the
component atoms can be used to determine the empirical
formula (formula of the lowest coefficients) for the unknown
compound. To determine the molecular formula from the
empirical formula, the compound's molecular weight must be
known. For compounds containing only carbon, hydrogen,
and oxygen, the molecular formula must always have an even
number of hydrogens. Molecular formulas with an odd
number of carbons and oxygens, however, are possible.
14. If 20.0 grams of the unknown compound described in
the passage were oxidized, what would be observed?
A. The moles of CO2 would double, while the
percentage of carbon in the sample would remain
the same.
B. The moles of CO2 would double, and the
percentage of carbon in the sample would also
double.
C. The moles of CO2 would remain the same, and the
percentage of carbon in the sample would also
remain the same.
D. The moles of CO2 would remain the same, while
the percentage of carbon in the sample would
double.
15. The percentage of carbon by mass in the unknown
compound can be calculated as:
A. 23.79 x2-x 10 x 100%
44
B. 23.79 x 44 x 10 x 100%
12
C. 23.79 x^xlx 100%
44 10
D. 23.79 x4ix^-x 100%
12 10
16. What can be said about the boiling point (b.p.) and
melting point (m.p.) of the unknown compound relative
to ambient temperature (Tg)?
A. m.p. > Ta, and b.p. > Ta
B. m.p. > Ta, and b.p. < Ta
C. m.p. < Ta, and b.p. < Ta
D. m.p. < Ta, and b.p. > Ta
17. Which of the following formulas CANNOT be a
molecular formula?
A. C2H40
B. C2H5O
C. C3H60
D. C4H802
18. How many moles of water are formed from the
combustion of 10.0 grams of the unknown compound?
A. 0.31 moles H2OO)
B. 0.69 moles H20(l)
C. 1.10 moles H20(l)
D. 1.38 moles H20(l)
19. What is the empirical formula for the unknown
compound?
A. C3H602
B. C4H802
C. C4H10O
D. CgHirjO
2 0. What is the mass percent of carbon in C5H12O2?
A. 26.4%
B. 57.7%
C. 60.8%
D. 68.2%
Passage IV (Questions 21 - 26)
A researcher completely oxidizes exactly 1.00 grams of
an unknown liquid hydrocarbon in a containment vessel to
yield carbon dioxide and water vapor. The two gases thus
formed are collected and analyzed for quantity. The water
vapor is collected by passing the gas through a tube
containing anhydrouscalciumchloride. The carbondioxide
gas is collected by passingthe remaining gas through a tube
containing anhydrous sodium hydroxide. The mass of the
carbon dioxide gas thus collected is 3.045 grams at STP.
The carbon dioxide gas is regenerated upon heating the
sodiumcarbonate and this gas is found to occupy a volume of
1.55 liters at STP. The experimental apparatus is shown in
Figure 1.
C02, H20, and_
excess O2 enter
flU-uft-
CaCl2(s) NaOH(s)
Figure 1
In a second experiment, the researcher places a 5.0-mL
aliquot of the unknown liquid into a capped 1.00-liter flask.
The cap has a tiny hole in the top, and the empty flask with
cap weighs exactly 120.00grams. The compound is heated
until it reaches a gentle boil. The vapor escapes through the
tiny pore in the cap. The liquid continues boilingat 31"C,
until none of it remains visible in the flask. The heat source
is removed from the flask, and the contents are allowed to
cool back to ambient temperature. As the flask cools, the
vapor in it condenses into a small pool of liquid at the base
of the flask.
The flask and cap are then massed with the condensed
liquid present. The entire system is found to have a mass of
exactly 122.32 grams. This means that the mass of the
liquid is 2.32 grams. It is assumed that at the moment when
the heat source was removed, the flask was completely filled
with vapor from the liquid and that all of the air originally in
the flask was displaced. Table 1 lists the molar volume for
an ideal gas at selected temperatures.
Temperature (K) Molar Volume
273 22.41 L
288 23.64 L
298 24.46 L
304 24.96 L
313 25.69 L
323 26.51 L
Table 1
21. What is the mass percent of carbon in CO2 gas?
A. 25.0%
B. 27.3%
C. 31.4%
D. 35.0%
22. How can the molecular weight of this unknown liquid
be determined?
A 22.41 grams
2.32 mole
B 24.96 grams
2.32 mole
C. (2.32 x22.41) ^^
mole
D. (2.32 x24.96) ^^
mole
23. If the masspercentof carbonin the unknown compound
is found to be 82.9%, what is the empirical formula of
the unknown hydrocarbon?
A.
B.
C.
D.
CH2
C2H5
CH3
C2H7
24. Using the data from the first experiment, how can the
mass percent of carbon in the unknown compound be
determined?
A. 1-55 x 12.011 x 100%
22.41 x 1.00
B. 1.55 x 22.41 x 12.011 xl00%
1.00
c> 22.41 x 12.011 xl00%
1.55 x 1.00
D. 22.41 x 1.00 x iq0%
1.55 x 12.011
25. How many moles of CO2 gas were formed in the first
experiment?
A. J^55_ moles CO2
22.41
B. -L55_ moles CO2
23.64
C. 22AL moles C02
1.55
D. LQQ moles CO2
22.41 x 1.55
26. If in the second experiment the organic vapor had not
fully displaced all of the air from the flask by the time
the heat was removed from the flask, how would the
results have been affected?
A . The mass of unknown liquid collected would be too
great, so the calculated molecular mass would be
too high.
B. The mass of unknown liquid collected would be too
small, so the calculated molecular mass would be
too high.
C . The mass of unknown liquid collected would be too
great, so the calculated molecular mass would be
too low.
D. The mass of unknown liquid collected would be too
small, so the calculated molecular mass would be
too low.
Passage V (Questions 27 - 33)
The empirical formula for a compound can be determined
using the technique of elemental analysis. For hydrocarbons
and carbohydrates, the process involves trapping and
removing water vapor and carbon dioxide gas and then
quantifying the amounts collected. The products can be
trapped in many different ways. In this experiment, the
trapping of the gases is accomplished by passing the product
gas through a series of low-temperature gas traps. By
lowering the temperature, the gas can be converted into
solids, which cannot flow and thus are easily collected at the
bases of their respective temperature traps. The system is
evacuated completely and then flushed with nitrogen gas to
remove any remaining air. The vapor from the reaction
vessel is then allowed to enter one trap at a time. The gas
remains isolated in the region of each trap for a short interval,
to allow any gases to form a solid or freeze into a liquid. The
apparatus is shown in Figure 1.
Reaction
vessel
\
Gas
trap I
irv
Gas
trap II
Figure 1
Tl
Gas
trap III
Vacuuni
Oil bubbler
It is important to allow the excess oxygen gas to flow
out of the system. To accomplish this, the line is fitted with
a one-way oil bubbler. The oil bubbler maintains the closed
system by not allowing air to flow into the system, while
allowing the pressure to equilibrate with the environment
through venting.
27. At what temperature should the first trap be held in
order to isolate water vapor?
A . 25"C (standard temperature)
B. (fC (melting point of ice)
C . -33C (boiling point of Freon refrigerant)
D . -I96C (boiling point of liquid nitrogen)
2 8. The temperatures of the successive traps (i.e., Trap I,
Trap II, and Trap III) should be set in what manner?
A . The temperatures should gradually increase, so that
each gas is selectively removed one trap at a time.
B. The temperatures should gradually increase, so that
each gas can be trapped into all three traps,
allowing one to determine the moles by difference.
C. The temperatures should gradually decrease, so that
each gas is selectively removed one trap at a time.
D . The temperatures should gradually decrease, so that
each gas can be trapped into all three traps,
allowing one to determine the moles by difference.
29. What additional piece of information is necessary to
determine the molecular formula for the experimental
compound?
A. The volume of CO2 collected
B. The volume of the water collected
C. The volume of the hydrocarbon before the reaction
was carried out
D. The molecular mass of the hydrocarbon
30. If an unknown compound were combusted in the
presence of excess oxygen, what by-product of the
combustion would be collected to determine the
percentageof sulfur withinthat compound?
A. S02
B. CS2
C. H2S
D. S8
31. The mass percent of oxygen within a compound cannot
be determined directly using elemental analysis. Which
of the following is NOT an explanation for this?
A. Oxygen gas does not exist in the solid phase at any
temperature.
B. When a carbohydrate is oxidized, the oxygen of the
unknown carbohydrate can be found in both water
and carbon dioxide.
C. The procedure requires addingexcess oxygen, so the
oxygen atoms from the carbohydrate cannot be
distinguished from the oxygen reactant.
D. Oxygen in the carbohydrate, being fully reduced,
does not react with oxygen gas.
3 2. Why is the bubbler filled with mineral oil?
A. The oil traps out any unreacted organic vapor.
B. The oil can transfer heat to warm the gas rapidly.
C. The oil prevents back-flow of gas from the outside
environment.
D. The oil filters out any liquid products from the
reaction.
33. Which of the following is NOT associated with an
increasing mass percent of carbon ina hydrocarbon?
I. An increase in the mass of carbon per gram of the
compound
n. An increase in the mass of water formed upon
oxidation of one gram of the compound
HI. An increase in the mass of hydrogen per gram of
the compound
A. Ilonly
B. Dlonly
C. I and II only
D. II and ffl only
Passage VI (Questions 34 - 40)
Dilution reduces the concentration of a solute by adding
more solvent to the solution. The addition of solvent
increases the volume of solution while having no effect on
the moles of solute. Molarity is defined as moles solute per
liter solution, so the denominator is increased by the addition
of solvent, while the numerator is unaffected. To determine
the concentration, use:
MjVi = MfVf
Equation 1
where Mj is the initial molarity, Vj is the initial volume,
Mf is the final molarity, and Vf is the final volume.
Dilution can be described by the relative concentration of
the initial and final solutions. For instance, a fifty percent
dilution involves a reduction of the molarity by fifty percent.
This would result from doubling the volume of the solution,
achieved by mixing one part solvent with one part solution.
A solution is diluted as a solvent is added to it in a
volumetric flask, until the desired volume is reached. To
ensure complete transfer of the solute, the original flask is
often rinsed with the new solvent, and then the contents are
pouredinto the volumetric flask. The laboratory instructions
for a tenfold dilution are:
I: Fill a volumetric pipette with a sample of solution
from a beaker and then discard the solution. Repeat this
procedure two additional times to equilibrate the
concentration of the solution on the walls of the pipette
with the concentration of the solution in the beaker.
II: Using the treated volumetric pipette, transfer ten
milliliters of solution to a 100-mL volumetric flask.
HI: Rinse pure water through the pipette and into the
volumetric flask until the flask is roughly eighty
percent full.
IV: Set the pipette aside, and continue to add water to the
flask until the base of the meniscus is flush with the
100-mL line on the volumetric flask.
34. Which of the following solutions has the GREATEST
molarity?
A. 4% by mass KBr in water
B. 4% by mass KCl in water
C. 4% by mass NaBr in water
D. 4% by mass NaCl in water
35. To convert 300 milliliters of 0.150 M solution to a
solution with a concentration of 0.0075 M, how much
water must be added?
A. 6.00 liters
B. 5.70 liters
C. 4.30 liters
D. 4.20 liters
3 6. What is the final CI" concentration after you mix 50.00
mL 0.25 M HC1 with 25.00 mL 0.50 M NaOH?
A. 0.33 M
B. 0.25 M
C. 0.17 M
D. 0.15 M
3 7. Why in step HI is water passed through the volumetric
pipette?
A. To ensure complete transfer of solution
B. To measure the volume of the water added
C. To cool the volumetric pipette
D. To warm the water prior to mixing
38. Which of the following mixtures results in a 10-fold
dilution?
A. 9 parts solvent with 1 part solution
B. 10 parts solvent with 1 part solution
C. 10% solvent with 90% solution
D. 91% solvent with 9% solution
3 9. Addition of water to an aqueous salt solution would do
all of the following EXCEPT:
A. lower the molality.
B. lower the molarity.
C. increase the density.
D. increase the mass percent of solvent.
40. Which of the following would MOST dilute 0.10 M
LiCl(aq)?
A. The addition of 100 mL H20(1) to 25 mL 0.10 M
LiCl(aq)
B. The addition of 200 mL H20(l) to 60 mL 0.10 M
LiCl(aq)
C. The addition of 50 mL H20(1) to 15 mL 0.10 M
LiCl(aq)
D. The addition of 150 mL H20(1) to 50 mL 0.10 M
LiCl(aq)
Passage VII (Questions 41 - 47)
There are many ways in which the concentration of a
solution can be expressed, including:
Molarity: The concentration of a solution as measured in
moles solute per liter solution.
M _ moles solute
liters solution
Molality: The concentration of a solution as measured in
moles solute per kilogram solvent.
m _ moles solute
kilogram solvent
Percent solution: The percent of solute in a solution by
mass or moles.
%Solution by mass = mass solute x 100%
mass solution
%Solution by moles = moles solute x 100%
total moles in solution
Density: The mass of the solution divided by the volume
of the solution.
p _ mass solution
volume solution
The concentration of a solution can be expressed in any
of these units, which can be converted into one another as
long as the molecular mass of the solute and solvent are
known. For instance, when the percent solution by mass is
multiplied by the density, the result is mass of solute per
volume of solution. When the mass of solute is converted
into the moles of solute (which requires knowing the
molecular mass), the molarity can be determined. The
percent solution by mass can be converted into molality by
subtracting the mass of solute from the mass of solution to
find the mass of solvent. That determines the denominator.
To get the numerator, the mass of solute is converted into
moles solute, and solving for the molality becomes a simple
division problem.
Adding solvent to a solution dilutes the solution and
thus reduces the concentration of the solute in the solution.
Addition of solvent to the solution decreases all of the above
measurements of concentration, with the exception of the
density. The density change of a solution depends on the
relative density of the solvent and solution.
41. Adding water to an aqueous solution of known
concentration always decreases all of the following
EXCEPT:
A. density.
B. molarity.
C. molality.
D. mass percent of the solute.
42. When 1.0 grams of a salt are dissolved into 100 mL of
water, the volume of the solution is greater than 100
mL but less than 101 mL. What can be said about the
concentration of the solution?
A. The molality of the solution is greater than the
molarity of the solution; the density of the solution
is greater than that of pure water.
B. The molarity of the solution is greater than the
molality of the solution; the density of the solution
is greater than that of pure water.
C. The molality of the solution is greater than the
is less than that of pure water.
D. The molarity of the solution is greater than the
is less than that of pure water.
4 3. An organic compound with a density that is less than
1.00 g/mL is added to an organic liquid, also with a
density that is less than 1.00 g/mL. What can be said
about the concentration of the solution?
A. The molality of the solution is greater than the
is greater than that of pure organic liquid.
B. The molarity of the solution is greater than the
is greater than that of pure organic liquid.
C. The molality of the solution is greater than the
molarity of the solution; the relative densities of
the solution and the organic liquid cannot be
determined without more information.
D. The molarity of the solution is greater than the
molality of the solution; the relative densities of
the solution and the organic liquid cannot be
determined without more information.
44. Given that a solute is denser than the solvent into
which it dissolves, what is TRUE of the concentration
measurements of different solutions made up solely of
the two components?
A. The solution with the greatest density also has the
greatest molarity and molality.
B. The solution with the greatest density also has the
greatest molarity, but the molality is the same for
all of the solutions.
C. The solution with the greatest density also has the
lowest molarity and molality.
D. The solution with the greatest density also has the
lowest molarity, but the molality is the same for
all of the solutions.
45. How many milliliters of pure water must be added to
100 mL 0.25 M KBr to dilute it to 0.10 M?
A. 100
B. 150
C. 250
D. 500
46. To achieve the same chloride ion concentration as 1.0
grams NaCl(s) dissolved into 100 mL solution, how
many grams of MgCl2(s) must be added to enough
water to make 100 mL of solution?
A. 1.0xlx5-MgMgCl2(s)
2 94.9
B. 1.0 x2 x5-&4 g MgCl2(s)
94.9
C. 1.0x1x24,9 gMgCl2(s)
2 58.4
D. 1.0x2x9-^9-gMgCl2(s)
58.4
4 7. Given two compounds, Compound A and CompoundB,
and the fact that B has a higher molecular mass than A,
but A is denser than B, which of the following mixtures
would have the greatest mole fraction of A?
A. The mixture of 1.0 grams Compound A with 1.0
grams Compound B
B. The mixture of 1.0 moles Compound A with 1.0
moles Compound B
C. The mixture of 1.0 mL Compound A with 1.0 mL
Compound B
D. The mixture of 1.0x 1023 molecules Compound A
with 1.0x 1023 molecules Compound B
Passage VIII (Questions 48 - 54)
The absorbance of visible light by colored aqueous
solutions is directly proportional to the concentration of
solute in the solution. Based on this fact, the concentration
of a solution can be determined by monitoring the absorbance
at one wavelength of light. For best results, the detector
should be focused on the wavelength of highest absorbance
(known as Amax). The relationship between absorbance and
solute concentration is expressed as
Absorbance = e[C]l
Equation 1
where is the molar absorbtivity constant of the solute, [CI
is the concentration of solute, and 1is the path length of the
light passing in through the cuvette.
A student measures the absorbance for a series of standard
solutions. Once enough data points are collected, the
molarity of another solution using the same solute in an
unknown concentration is analyzed by comparing its
properties with the experimental data. The molar
absorbtivity constant and cuvette path length remain constant
throughout all the trials, so any difference in absorbance
between the unknown and the reference compounds can be
attributed to differences in solute concentration. Figure 1 is a
graph of thestudent's datacollected for thestandard solutions.
Concentration (in molarity)
Figure 1
Table 1 lists the same data summarized graphically above.
Molarity Absorbance
0.10 0.093
0.20 0.188
0.30 0.278
0.40 0.363
0.50 0.456
0.60 0.560
0.70 0.636
Table 1
48. If the concentration of a solute were doubled, what
would happen to the absorbance of the solution?
A. It would increase by a factor of four.
B. It would double.
C. It would be cut in half.
D. It would decrease by a factor of four.
49. How could the plateau of the following curve be
explained?
Solute added to solution
A. The solvation catalyst in solution has become
saturated.
B. The reverse reaction is favored at higher solute
concentration.
C. As more solute is added to the solution, the solute
that is already dissolved begins to repel the solvent.
D. A maximum solute concentration has been reached,
because no more solute molecules can dissolve into
solution.
50. Adding 50 mL of pure water to a 10.0-mL sample of
aqueous salt solution with an absorbance of 0.518
would yield a new absorbance of:
A. 0.518.
B. 0.104.
C. 0.086.
D. 0.259.
51. The concentration can be found according to which of
the following equations?
A. [C^^
el
B. [C] =
C. [C] =
D. [Cl =
el
Abs
Abs-1
8
Abs-e
5 2. According to the data from the experiment, what is the
concentration of an unknown solution, if it has an
absorbance of 0.242?
A. 0.197 M
B. 0.240 M
C. 0.258 M
D. 0.289 M
53. What are the units of e?
A. M-cm
B. M-cm"1
C. cm-M-1
1
54.
D.
M-cm
Which of the following relationships may be TRUE?
I. As the molarity increases, the absorbance increases.
II. If Compound X has a lower molar absorbtivity
constant (e) than Compound Y, then to have equal
absorbance readings for separate solutions of X(aq)
and Y(aq), the concentration of Y must be greater
than the concentration of X.
HI. Absorbance = e[C]l at all A, where absorbance of
light can occur.
A. I only
B. Ilonly
C. I and m only
D. II and m only
Passage IX (Questions 55-61)
An experiment to ascertain the effects of solution
concentration on the absorbance of visible light studies
solutions of varying concentration for three different
compounds. The solutions are analyzed in cuvettes using a
UV-VIS spectrometer set at fixed values specific for each
compound. The goal is to maximize the absorbance, so the
wavelength of maximum absorbance is used for each
compound. For Compound M, the spectrometer was set at
561 nm; for Compound Q, the spectrometer was set at 413
nm; and for Compound T, the spectrometer was set at 697
nm. Table 1 shows concentration and corresponding
absorbance for each solution.
Trial Contents Absorbance
I 0.10 M Compound M 0.362
n 0.10 M Compound Q 0.299
m 0.10 M Compound T 0.511
IV 0.06 M Compound M 0.217
V 0.06 M Compound Q 0.180
VI 0.06 M Compound T 0.307
vn 0.03 M Compound M 0.109
vm 0.03 M Compound Q 0.090
DC 0.03 M Compound T 0.153
Table 1
The absorbance of each solution was compared to the
absorbance of a sample of distilled water, which remained in
place in the spectrometer for the duration of the study.
Because all three compounds have absorbance bands in the
visible range, they are all observed to have a distinct color
when they are exposed to white light. The absorbed color is
the complementary color of the observed color. The visible
spectrumranges from a wavelength of 400 nm to 700 nm.
55. Why is the spectrophotometer set at 561 nm for the
trial involving Compound M?
A. 561 nm is the average wavelength of absorbance for
the complementary color of what is absorbed.
B. 561 nm is the average wavelength of absorbance for
the color that is absorbed.
C. 561 nm is the wavelength of maximum absorbance
for the complementary color of what is absorbed.
D. 561 nm is the wavelength of maximum absorbance
for the color that is absorbed.
56. How can a compound's molar absorbtivity constant be
obtained, if absorbance varies with cuvette length?
A. e = Abs- [Compound] -1
B. = Abs
[Compound]-1
P _ [Compound]-1
Abs
D. 6 = ^-
1
5 7. Which solution has the GREATEST concentration?
A. Compound M solution, with an absorbance 0.400
B. Compound Q solution, with an absorbance 0.250
C. Compound T solution, with an absorbance 0.500
D. O.lOMKCl(aq)
5 8. Which graph accurately shows absorbance as a function
of concentration for Compounds M, Q, and T?
Concentration
Concentration
Concentration
D. T
Concentration
5 9. What can be expected for other solutions?
I. 0.05 M Compound M has an absorbance of A =
0.181 at X = 561 nm.
n. A solution of Compound Q with an absorbance of
A = 0.225 at X = 413 nm has a concentration of
0.075 M.
HI. 0.11 M Compound T has an absorbance of A =
0.611 atA. = 710nm.
A. I only
B. I and II only
C. I and D3only
D. II and m only
60. To forma solution of Compound T with an absorbance
of 0.250 at X= 697 nm, what must be done?
A. Mix 10.0 mL 0.10 M T with 5.0 mL H2O
B. Mix 20.0 mL 0.10 M T with 20.0 mL H2O
C. Mix 19.0 mL 0.10 M T with 20.0 mL H2O
D. Mix 10.0 mL 0.10 M T with 9.0 mL H2O
61. What are the observed colors for each solution?
A. M: green; Q: violet; T: red
B. M: red; Q: violet; T: green
C. M: green; Q: yellow; T: red
D. M: red; Q: yellow; T: green
Passage X (Questions 62 - 68)
Stoichiometric reactions can be classified into six
categories:
Combination Reaction: Occurs with the combination
of reactants to form one product.
PBr3(l) + Br2(l) PBr5(s)
Decomposition Reaction: Occurs with the
decomposition of one reactant to formtwo products.
CaC03(s) CaO(s) + C02(g)
Single-Replacement Reaction: Occurs with the
exchange of either the cations or the anions in a salt, but not
both. A single-replacement reaction is also referred to as an
oxidation-reduction reaction.
3 Mg(l) + 2 ScBr3(g) 2 Sc(s) + 3 MgBr2(s)
Metathesis Reaction: Occurs when two cations
exchange their anions. At least one precipitate falls out of
solution. A metathesis reaction is also referred to as a
double-displacementreaction.
AgN03(aq) + KCl(aq) KN03(aq) + AgCl(s)
Combustion Reaction: Occurs with the addition of
oxygen to a reactant to form oxidized products (usually
carbon dioxide and water, when dealing with hydrocarbons and
carbohydrates).
1 C3H8(g) + 5 02(g) 3 C02(g) + 4 H20(1)
Neutralization Reaction: Occurs with the reaction of an
acid with a base to form water and a salt.
HN03(aq) + KOH(s) KN03(aq) + H20(l)
Each reaction is unique from a stoichiometric
perspective. When a solid is formed by the reaction of ions
(in the metathesis example above), it is referred to as a
precipitate. Gases can also be formed from reactions. The
neutralization of sodium bicarbonate (NaHC03) yields carbon
dioxide gas. It is possible to categorize all inorganic
chemistry reactions by reaction type.
6 2. How should the following reaction be classified?
Ba(N03)2(aq) + K2S04(aq)
2 KN03(aq) + BaS04(s)
A. Combination reaction
B. Decomposition reaction
C. Single-replacement reaction
D. Metathesis reaction
63. Aprecipitate is LEAST likely to occur as a resultof a:
A. combustion reaction.
B. decomposition reaction.
C. single-replacement reaction.
D. metathesis reaction.
64. What is the precipitate formed when aqueous sodium
iodide reacts with aqueous calcium nitrate?
A. Cal
B. NaN03
C. Cal2
D. Na2N03
65. What is the gas formed when magnesium carbonate is
treated with hydrobromic acid?
A. Hydrogen gas (H)
B. Hydrogen gas (H2)
C. Carbon dioxide gas (CO2)
D. Magnesium bromide gas (MgBr2)
66. What type of reaction is LEAST likely to form carbon
dioxide gas?
A. Combustion reaction
B. Metathesis reaction
C. Decomposition reaction
D. Neutralization reaction
6 7. How should the following reaction be classified?
CaBr2(l) + Cl2(g) CaCl2(s) + Br2(D
D. Metathesis reaction
68. What type of reaction is MOST likely to have a
negative value for the change in entropy (AS)?
D. Combustion reaction
Passage XI (Questions 69 - 78)
Calcium carbonate is found in many everyday products,
such as marble, chalk, and antacids. Commercially, it can be
excavated as either calcium oxide or calcium carbonate.
Calcium oxide converts to calcium carbonate upon exposure
to carbon dioxide under high pressure. At room temperature,
calcium carbonate is relatively insoluble in water. The
solubility of calcium carbonate increases as the pH of the
aqueous solution decreases, because calcium carbonate is
basic. Reaction I can be combined with Reaction II to
convert calcium oxide into calcium carbonate in water.
CaO(s) + H20(1) Ca(OH)2(aq)
Reaction I
Ca(OH)2(aq) + C02(g)
CaC03(s) + H20(1)
Reaction II
Ca(OH)2 and CaC03 both readily form a relatively
insoluble white solid precipitate in water. Because of this
low solubility, the products of both Reaction I and Reaction
II are easy to isolate from solution. Fortunately, calcium
hydroxide is more soluble in water than is calciumcarbonate,
which allows for the selective precipitation of calcium
carbonate in Reaction II. Because of this, industrial processes
for isolating calcium carbonate are primarily water-based.
Calcium carbonate can also be formed according to the
following equilibrium reaction:
CaO(s) + C02(g) ** CaC03(s)
Reaction III
6 9. Ca(OH)2 is considered to be which of the following?
A. An amphoteric salt
B. A non-metal hydroxide
C. An Arrhenius acid
D. An Arrhenius base
70. Which of the following molecules are NOT held
together by ionic bonds?
I. co32-
n. CO2
IE. CaO
A. I only
B. II only
C. HI only
D. I and II only
71. The mass percent of calcium is LEAST in which of the
following molecules?
A. CaO(s)
B. Ca(OH)2(s)
C. CaC03(s)
D. CaCl2(g)
72. If 10.00 grams of Ca(OH)2(s) produces 5.00 grams of
CaC03(s), what is the percent yield for the reaction?
A. 37%
B. 68%
C. 74%
D. 100%
7 3. What is the mass percent of calcium in CaO?
(Ca = 40 g/mole O = 16 g/mole)
A. 28.6%
B. 50.0%
C. 66.7%
D. 71.4%
74. 28.0grams of CaO(s) whenreactedwith 10.00gramsof
H2OO) wouldyield whichof the following?
(Ca = 40 g/mole 0 = 16 g/mole H = 1 g/mole)
A. 37.00 grams Ca(OH)2 with leftover water
B. 37.50 grams Ca(OH)2 with leftover CaO
C. Exactly 38.00 grams Ca(OH)2with no leftover
D. Exactly 42.60 grams Ca(OH)2 with no leftover
75. Which of the following is required to neutralize 5.00
mL of 0.20 M CaC03(aq)?
A. 10.0 mL 0.10 NNaOH(aq)
B. 10.0 mL 0.10 NHN03(aq)
C. 10.0 mL 0.30 N H3P04(aq)
D. 10.0 mL 0.20 N HCl(aq)
76. What is the final concentration of Ca(OH)2(aq) after
50.0mLof pure water are added to 5.0 mLof 0.50M
Ca(OH)2(aq)?
A. 0.055 MCa(OH)2(aq)
B. 0.050 M Ca(OH)2(aq)
C. 0.046 M Ca(OH)2(aq)
D. 0.025 M Ca(OH)2(aq)
77. If 20.0 mL of 0.20 M CaCl2(aq) were mixed with 30.0
mL of 0.30 MCaC03(aq), what would the final Ca2+
concentration be?
A. 0.233 MCa2+(aq)
B. 0.250 MCa2+(aq)
C. 0.260 MCa2+(aq)
D. 0.267 MCa2+(aq)
78. If 50.0 grams of CaC03(s) are completely neutralized
with HC1, how many liters of C02(g) form at STP,
knowing that one CaC03 yields one CO2?
A. 4.48 L
B. 10.00 L
C. 11.20 L
D. 13.56 L
Passage XII (Questions 79 - 86)
Every year, a substantial amount of the countless tons of
chemicals produced worldwide is used in the manufacture of
fertilizers and plastics. Described below, according to a
common element each one contains, are some of the typical
chemical fertilizers used in America.
Potassium:
Salts containing potassium are referred to as potash. The
most common forms are K2SO4, 2 MgS04-K.2S04, and
KCl. The amount of potassium per gram of salt is important
to know when determining the quantity of fertilizer needed for
a job. The compound richest in potassium (by mass percent)
is potassium oxide, K2O. The potassium content of any
potash is expressed as a fraction of the potassium in
potassium oxide (K2O).
Nitrogen:
Salts containing nitrogen are very useful as fertilizers. The
most common forms are NH4N03, (NH4)2S04, and
NH4H2PO4. A very common organic fertilizer containing
nitrogen is urea, H2NCONH2, which is made from ammonia
and carbon dioxide. Ammonium sulfate is also made from
ammonia by combining Reaction I with Reaction II:
2 NH3(aq) + C02(g) + H20(1) - (NH4)2C03(aq)
Reaction I
(NH4)2C03(aq) + CaS04(aq)
(NH4)2S04(aq) + CaC03(s)
Reaction II
Phosphorus:
Salts containing phosphorus are also very useful as
fertilizers. The most common form is Ca(H2P04)2-
Calcium bisdihydrogenphosphate is produced by Reaction HI:
2 Cas(P04)3F(s) + 7 H2S04(aq)
3 Ca(H2P04)2(aq) + 7 CaS04(aq) + 2 HF(g)
Reaction III
Fluoroapetite (Ca5(P04)3F) is added as the limiting
reagent in Reaction HI. This is done to maximize the percent
yield of phosphorus in the reaction. Industrially, the percent
yield of a reaction and the mass percent of its product are
critical in terms of profit margin for the fertilizer producer.
79. Which of the following compounds has the
GREATEST amount of potassium per gram?
A. K20
B. K2S04
C. KCl
D. KN03
80. Which of the following compounds has the LOWEST
mass percent of nitrogen?
A. H2NCONH2
B. NH4N03
C. (NH4)2S04
D. NH4H2PO4
81. What is the mass percent of nitrogen in urea?
A. 23.3% N
B. 31.9% N
C. 46.6% N
D. 66.7% N
82. Why is Cas(P04)3F the limiting reagent in the
synthesis of Ca(H2P04)2?
A. It prevents leftover Cas(P04)3F from being
wasted, so that P-containing compounds are
conserved.
B. It allows leftover Ca5(P04)3F to be wasted, so that
P-containing compounds are conserved.
C. It prevents leftover Cas(P04)3F from being
wasted, so that P-containing compounds are not
conserved.
D. It allows leftover Cas(P04)3F to be wasted, so that
P-containing compounds are not conserved.
83. If 10.0 grams of (NH4)2C03 are used in Reaction II to
obtain 10.0 grams of (NH4)2S04, then what is the
percent yield for the reaction?
A. Less than 50%
B. Greater than 50%, but less than 75%
C. Greater than 75%, but less than 100%
D. Greater than 100%
84. The molarity of potassium is GREATEST for which of
the following solutions?
A. 10.0 g KCl in enough water to form 100 mL of
solution
B. 10.0 g K2SO4 in enough water to form 100 mL of
solution
C. 10.0 g K2C03 in enough water to form 100 mL of
solution
D. 10.0 g KN03 in enough water to form 100 mL of
solution
85. From which of the following reactions is it EASIEST
to isolate the desired product?
A. A reaction yielding the product as a precipitate
B. A reaction yielding the product as a liquid
C. A reaction yielding the product as a gas
D. A reaction yielding the product as an aqueous solute
8 6. Which of the following relationships must be TRUE?
I- pKal(H3PO4) is less than pKa(HF)
H. pKa2(H3P04) is less than pKa2(H2S04)
D3. pKa(HF) is less than pKai(H2S04)
A. I only
B. Ilonly
C. I and II only
D. II and m only
Questions 87 through
descriptive passage.
100 are NOT based on a
87. If 25 grams of oxygen are combined with 20 grams of
propane gas, then which of the following statements
would be TRUE after the mixture is ignited?
A. 45.0 grams of carbon dioxide forms.
B. 38.0 grams of water vapor forms.
C . Oxygen is the limiting reagent.
D . Propane is the limiting reagent.
88. The hemoglobin in red blood corpuscles of most
mammals contains approximately 0.33% iron by
weight. If osmotic pressure measurements show that
the molecular weight is 68,000 for hemoglobin, how
many iron atoms must be present in each molecule of
hemoglobin?
A. 1
B. 4
C. 224
D. 400
89. 9.00 grams of a sugar are burned in a containment
vessel, and all the CO2 is collected. The volume
occupied by the CO2 at STP is 6.72 liters. If the
molecular weight of the sugar is 180 g/mole, what is
the ratio of O2 to CO2 in the balanced equation?
A. 3 :3
B. 3 :6
C. 6:3
D. 6:6
90. What is the molecular formula for an unknown gas with
the empirical formula C2H30, if 1.00 grams of the
unknown gas occupies 260 mL at STP?
A. C2H30
B. C4H602
C. C6H903
D. CgHi204
91. What volume of 02(g) is produced from 1.0 g BaO
upon its decomposition to Ba(s) and 02(g) at STP?
A. 0.074 L
B. 0.100 L
C. 0.148 L
D. 0.166 L
92. For the following reaction, calculate the mass of
Mg2P207(s) that is formed from the decomposition of
2.0 grams MgNH4P04(s).
2 MgNH4P04(s) Mg2P207(s) + 2 NH3(g) + H20(g)
A. 0.8 grams
B. 1.7 grams
C. 2.2 grams
D. 2.8 grams
93. A compound containing 50% by weight of Element X
(atomic weight = 40) and 50% by weight of Element Z
(atomic weight = 80) is one in which:
A . the molecular formula is XZ or ZX.
B. the simplest formula is XZ or ZX.
C. the simplest formula is XZ2 or Z2X.
D. the simplest formula is X2Z or ZX2.
94. 11.89 grams of hot iron are exposed to a continuous
stream of pure oxygen for ten minutes. At the end of
this time, the completely oxidized sample weighs 16.99
grams. The empirical formula for the compound thus
formed is MOST accurately written as:
A. Fe302-
B. FeO.
C. Fe203.
D. Fe03.
95. A stable compound consisting of 53.4% C, 11.0% H,
and the remainder O has a molecular weight of 90
grams/mole. The molecular formula for the compound
is:
A. C5H602.
B. C3H603.
C. C4H26O.
D. C4H,o02.
96. In reducing Cr042"(aq) to Cr203(s), how does the
oxidation state of chromium change?
A . From +6 to +3
B. From +4 to +3
C. From +3 to +4
D. From +3 to +6
97. An unknown metal is found to combine with oxygen in
a 2 : 3 ratio in the molecular formula. The metal oxide
is approximately 53%metal by mass, and the remainder
is oxygen. What is the MOST probable identity of the
metal?
A. Calcium
B. Iron
C. Chromium
D. Aluminum
98. Which of the following organic compounds has the
GREATEST mass percent of carbon?
A. Acetic acid (CH3C02H)
B. Ethanol (CH3CH2OH)
C . Methyl acetate (CH3C02CH3)
D. Glucose (C6H12O6)
99. When one gram of each of the following organic
compounds is burned (oxidized), which one yields the
GREATEST amount of carbon dioxide (by mass or
moles)?
A. Acetic acid (CH3CO2H)
B. Ethanol (CH3CH2OH)
C . Methyl acetate (CH3CO2CH3)
D. Glucose (C6H12O6)
100. What is the mass percentage of chlorine in
Mg(C104)2?
A. 71.0%
B. 40.6%
C. 31.8%
D. 15.9%
49
"Count on molecules to make your day!"
1. B 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. A 6. C
7. D 8 D 9. B 10. C 11. D 12. A
13. C 14. A 15. C 16. D 17. B 18. B
19. C 20. B 21. B 22. D 23. B 24. A
25. A 26. D 27. C 28. C 29. D 30. A
31. A 32. C 33. D 34. D 35. B 36. C
37. A 38. A 39. C 40. A 41. A 42. A
43. C 44. A 45. B 46. C 47. C 48. B
49. D 50. C 51. A 52. C 53. D 54. C
55. D 56. B 57. A 58. D 59. B 60. C
61. D 62. D 63. A 64. C 65. C 66. B
67. C 68. A 69. D 70. D 71. D 72. A
73. D 74. A 75. D 76. C 77. C 78. C
79. A 80. D 81. C 82. A 83. B 84. C
85. A 86. A 87. C 88. B 89. D 90. B
91. A 92. B 93. D 94. C 95. D 96. A
97. D 98. B 99. B 100. C
YOU ARE DONE.
Stoichiometry Passage Answers
Passage I (Questions 1-7) Density Experiment
Choice Bis correct. In order for a liquid to float on water, the liquid must be both immiscible in water and less
dense than water. All of the liquids are assumed to be immiscible in water, according to the question, so the
only stipulation that remains to be considered is the density of each liquid. The density of water is defined as
1.00 grams per milliliter. We know that the mass of the empty volumetric cylinder is 42.61 grams and its
capacity is 10.00 mL. For the density of any liquid to be less than 1.00, a 10.00-mL sample of the liquid must
have a mass of less than 10.00 grams. This means that when 10.00 mL of a liquid is added to the volumetric
cylinder, the liquid and cylinder must have a combined mass of less than 52.61 grams. If the combined mass is
less than that, then the density of the liquid must be less than 1.00. According to Table 1, unknown Liquid #6
(with a combined mass with the volumetric cylinder of 51.33 grams) and unknown Liquid #9 (with a combined
mass with the volumetric cylinder of 49.03 grams) are the only two unknown liquids with combined masses of
less than 52.61 grams. Only Liquid #6 and Liquid #9 can float on water. The best answer is therefore choice B.
Choice D is correct. This question requires evaluating the density for unknown Solids #2, #3, #4, and #5.
Density is defined as mass per volume. In this case, the volume of the solid is obtained by taking the volume
reading from the chart for each unknown and subtracting 25.00 mL for the volume of the water already in the
cylinder. This method of measurement is known as the "volume by displacement technique." The following
table shows the values of mass, volume, and density obtained for each solid:
Unknown Mass (g)
12.38
14.85
8.22
5.64
Volume (ml.)
31.19-25.00 = 6.19
29.95 - 25.00 = 4.95
28.00 - 25.00 = 3.00
26.41 -25.00=1.41
Density
2=*-zoo-S-
6.19 mL mL
2i^g_=3.ooJL
4.95 mL mL
îL=2.74JL
3.00 mL mL
5-64g =4.00-g-
1.41 mL mL
The unknown solid with the greatest density is unknown Solid #5. The correct answer is thus choice D. The
numbers could have been compared to one another to obtain the relative values.
ChoiceAis correct. Thedensityof unknownSolid #1 must be determined first. It is found by dividing its mass
by its volume (found by difference):
p= ?^g =J^g.= 1J0_g.
31.42 - 25.00 mL 6.42 mL mL
Because the density is 1.50grams per milliliter, a 20.0-gram piece of the solid must have a volume of 13.3 mL,
because 20.0 grams divided by 13.3 mLis equal to 1.50 grams per milliliter. The correct answer is choice A.
Choices Cand Dshould have been eliminated immediately, because when the volume of an object is greater
than its mass, then the density of the object is less than 1.00. Solid #1 sinks when placed into water, indicating
that its density is greater than that of water, which is 1.00 grams per milliliter. Distinguishing between
choice A and choice Brequires looking more closely at the ratios.
Choice Bis correct. In order for a solid to float onunknown Liquid #7, it must have a density less than that
liquid. The density for unknown Liquid #7 is:
58.72-42.61 g 16.11
P =
10.00 mL
= 1.611-2-
0.00 mL mL
Only Solid #1, with a density of only 1.50 grams per milliliter, has a density less than 1.611 grams per
milliliter. The best answer is choice B. The relative densities of Liquid #7 and Solid #1 are shown below:
16.11 g 32.22g 9.63g 28.89g 32.22g 28.89g
PLiquid#7 = , = . ; PSolid#l =
10.00 mL 20.00 mL 6.42 mL 19.26 mL 20.00 mL 19.26 mL
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 50 Section I Detailed Explanations
Choice A is correct. The following table shows how to solve for the densities of the four liquids:
Density (-%-)
mL
872 g =Q.872 S-
10.00 mL mL
1611 g =1.611--
10.00 mL mL
m6g =1.Q60 JL
10.00 mL mL
642 g =Q.642 JL
10.00 mL mL
From the calculations, the relative densities in descending order are: Liquid #7 > Liquid #8 > Liquid #6 >
Liquid #9. The answer choice that doesnot follow this pattern is choice A: Liquid #7 > Liquid #6 > Liquid #8.
This question could also have been solved by comparing the masses in the chart for the cylinder and liquid
combined. All of the liquids have the same volume (10.00 mL) and were in the same cylinder, so the same mass
is subtracted from each in determining the liquid's mass. This would have saved much time.
Choice C is correct. If the mass of the cylinder were heavier than 42.61 grams, then the reading for the mass of
theliquid andcylinder combined would begreater thanit was in Experiment 2. However, the mass of liquid in
a fixed volume is the same, so its density does not change. No matter what container is chosen to hold it, the
density of a liquidis an invariant propertyof that liquid. This is best reflected in answer choice C.
Choice Dis correct. Density is defined as a measure ofmass per volume. The units for density should therefore
reflect a massunit divided by a volume unit. Inanswerchoice A, the massis measured in grams and the volume
is measured in milliliters, which makes choice A acceptable. In answer choice B, the mass is measured in
ounces and the volume is measured in centimeters cubed, which makes choice B acceptable. You should recall
that a milliliter is a centimeter cubed. In answer choice C, the mass is measured in kilograms and the volume is
measured in liters, which makes choice C acceptable. In answer choice D, the weight (and not necessarily the
mass) ismeasured inpounds andisdivided by anarea (dimension squared) andnot byvolume. Choice Dis thus
a measureof pressure, not density. Thecorrect answer is choice D.
Unknown Mass (g) Volume (mL)
6 51.33 - 42.61 = 8.72 10.00
7 58.72-42.61 = 16.11 10.00
8 53.21 - 42.61 = 10.60 10.00
9 49.03 - 42.61 = 6.42 10.00
Passage II (Questions 8 - 13)
Combustion Analysis
8. Choice Dis correct. Given that all of the samples were of nearly equal mass (between 1.995 g and 2.011 g), the
greatest mass percent of carbon is in the compound that has the greatest mass of carbon. The compound with the
greatest mass of carbon produces the greatest mass of carbon dioxide gas. This means that the easiest way to
solve this question is to compare the amount of carbon dioxide collected for each sample, as listed in column 4
(the NaOH tube column) inTable 1. From the data in the NaOH tube column, the greatest mass of CO2 is
collected from Compound IV (36.53 - 30.00 =6.53), eliminating choices Aand B. Because a greater mass of CO2 is
produced by oxidizing Compound III than by oxidizing Compound II, choice Disthe best answer.
9. Choice Bis correct. The roleof thesodium hydroxide salt is tobindCO2, not to bind H2O. This means that the
salt should be both hydrophobic (non-water-binding) and reactive with carbon dioxide, making choice Bthe
best answer. The term "hygroscopic" refers toa compound with a high affinity for binding moisture inthe air.
10. Choice Cis correct. The pressure valve is designed toallow oxygen gas to flow from the tank into the system
when a threshold pressure is maintained. The oxygen partial pressure can be controlled and maintained at a
high level. The oxygen tank is left open with a positive pressure of oxygen to ensure that oxygen gas is
continually flowing into the system, so choice Ais eliminated. Nothing was mentioned about the temperature of
the oxygen gas, sochoice Bis eliminated. Oxygen gas is always present, so it is in excess and is not a limiting
reagent. This eliminates choice Dand makes choice Cthe correct answer.
11. Choice Dis correct. The greatest mass percent of carbon is found in the compound with the smallest number of
oxygen atoms in its formula. Thus, the compound least likely to contain oxygen is the one that produces the most
CO2 upon combustion. That is Compound IV. In addition, pure carbon when oxidized yields 7.33 g CO2.
Compound IV yields 6.53 grams CO2, so itis close enough to pure carbon to assume no oxygen is in it, choice D.
Section I Detailed Explanations
12. Choice A is correct. When the first valve is opened, the gas is exposed to magnesium sulfate, which binds water,
but not carbon dioxide. This means that water is bound first, leaving an atmosphere of excess oxygen gas and
carbon dioxide. This is important, because the sodium hydroxide compound can bind both carbon dioxide and
water. Using magnesium sulfate first to remove the water vapor ensures that all water is removed from the gas
when the second valve is opened, exposing the gas to the sodium hydroxide salt. Any increase in the mass of
magnesiumsulfate is due to the binding of water. Any increase in the mass of sodium hydroxide is due to the
binding of carbon dioxide. If the gases were first exposed to sodium hydroxide, the increase in mass would be due
to both water and carbon dioxide. Choice A is the best answer. Excess oxygen leaves the system as a free gas.
13. Choice C is correct. The solid formed in the second tube results from the reaction of sodium hydroxide (NaOH)
with carbon dioxide (CO2), so it must be a sodium salt. This eliminates choice A and B. The following reaction
confirms that the best answer of the given choices is sodium bicarbonate, choice C:
NaOH(s) + C02(g) NaHC03(s)
Passage III (Questions 14 - 20) Empirical Formula Determination
14.
15.
Choice A is correct. If 20.0 grams of the unknown were oxidized, instead of 10.0 grams, then the amount of
carbon dioxide and water formed as products would double. This eliminates choices C and D. The mass percent
of carbon should remain the same, because the mass of carbon dioxide formed and the mass of the compound both
doubled. The best answer is choice A. The mass percent of carbon is constant, because the molecular formula of
the compound is constant.
Choice C is correct. To determine the mass percent of carbon in the unknown compound, the grams of carbon in
carbon dioxide (CO2) are divided by the total number of grams of original compound. The mass of carbon
dioxide formed is found by subtracting 100.00 grams of original sodium hydroxide from the 123.79 grams of
bicarbonate salt. The difference is the mass of carbon dioxide that binds the salt.
12gC
23.79grams CO2 x
44gC2 x 100% =23.79 x 12. x J_ x 100o/o
10.0grams unknown 44 10
This makes choice C the best answer.
16. ChoiceDis correct. In the first sentence of the passage, we read that the unknown organic compound is poured
into a flask. The term "poured" implies that the compound flows, which makes it a fluid. The fact that it can
be poured into a flask means that it is flowing down, which defines it more specifically as a liquid. The
compound is a liquid at ambient temperature (room temperature). This means that the melting point is less
than ambient temperature, because at room temperature it has already melted into a liquid. The boiling point
is greater than ambient temperature, because at room temperature it has not yet boiled into a gas. Because i t
readily evaporates, the boiling point may be close to ambient temperature; but because it is a liquid at ambient
temperature, the boiling point must be greater than ambient temperature. The best answer is choice D.
17. Choice B is correct. As stated at the end of the passage, the molecular formula for a compound with just
hydrogen, oxygen, and carbon cannot have an oddnumber of hydrogens. An odd number of hydrogens results in
an odd number of bonding electrons (electrons present in bonds). Considering that there are two electrons per
bond, an odd number of bonding electrons results in only half of a bond somewhere in the compound (which
equates to a single electron, or free radical.) A half-bond is not stable (possible to isolate physically), so choice
B, with five hydrogens in the formula, is not possible. Knowledge from organic chemistry can prove useful in
solvinggeneral chemistryquestions. You must incorporate information frommany sources to excel at this exam.
18. Choice Bis correct. There are 12.16 grams of water produced from the oxidation of 10.0 grams of the unknown.
This canbe determined by subtracting100.00 grams for the mass of the anhydrous sodiumsulfate from the final
mass of 112.16 grams for the hydrated sodiumsulfatesalt. The moles of water formed are greater than 0.5 moles,
because12.16 grams divided by 18is greater than 9 grams divided by 18. The moles of water formed is less than
1.0moles, because 12.16 grams divided by 18is less than 18grams divided by 18. The best answer is therefore
choice B.
H
12.16 g
< . <
18g
0.5 moles =
18g/mole 18g/mole H mole
= 1.0 moles
19.
20.
Choice C is correct. The question asks for the empirical formula, but because information is given about the
molecular mass, you may wish to consider the molecular formula first, then eliminate choices based on that
information. According the passage, the molecular mass has a value between 70 and 80 grams per mole, so
choice B(MW = 48 + 8 + 32 = 88) and choice D (MW= 96 + 10 + 16 = 122) are eliminated. The only choices with a
mass in the range of 70 grams to 80 grams are choice A (which has a mass of 74 grams per mole) and choice C
(which also has a mass of 74 grams per mole). Choice A is percent carbon, while choice C is percent
carbon. The mass percent of carbon is greater than fifty percent, so choice A is eliminated, leaving choice C as
the best answer. The exact numerical value for the mass percent of carbon can be approximated as follows:
12gC
23.79 grams CO2 x
44gC2 x 100% = 23.79 x 12. x J_ x 10n% = 2379 x 12 x 100% = 23'79 X3 x 100%
10.0grams unknown 44 10 44 x 10 11 x 10
= 7L3Z x 100%, whereZL3Z x 100% > 50%
110 110
Choice C is both the molecular formula and the empirical formula.
Choice Bis correct. The mass percent of carbon in C5H12O2 is found by dividing the mass of five carbon atoms
(60 amu) by the molecular mass of C5H12O2 (60 + 12 + 32 = 104amu). The value determined when 60 is divided
by 104 is less than 60%, because it is less than 60 divided by 100. The best choice for a value close to, but less
than, 60%is choice B, 57.7%. You really should choose answer choice B, if you know what's best for you.
mass percent of carbon =
5 x 12
60 + 12 + 32
_ 60
104
-6Q_ = 60%
100
Molar Volume of a Gas
21. Choice B is correct. The mass percent of carbon in carbondioxide is the mass of carbon (12.011) divided by the
mass ofcarbon dioxide (44.009) x100%. The fraction I2- reduces to-2- =3x^ =3x 0.091 =0.273 x100% =27.3%.
44 11 11
To make math easier, you should memorize the following set of fraction-to-decimal conversions. A
demonstration of how these fractions are useful is found on page 30.
I = 0.333,1 = 0.250,1 = 0.200,1 = 0.166,1 - 0.143,1 = 0.125,1 = 0.100, -1- = 0.091,-1- - 0.091,-1- = 0.083
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
This trickworks well, once learned. It mayseem awkward at first, but try it. Thecorrect answer is choice B.
22. Choice D is correct. The second experiment was conducted to determine the molecular mass of the unknown
liquid. At 304 K, the boiling point of the liquid (and thus, the temperature of the gas), the volume of gas is
exactly 1.00 liters, assuming that the flask is completely filled with vapor from the liquid. Molar volume at
this temperature is 24.96 liters per mole. At 304 K, the gas has a density of 2.32 grams per liter. When this
value is multiplied bymolar volume at 304 K, the liters cancel out and the remaining units are grams per mole.
The molecular mass is 2.32 g/L x24.96 L/mole =2.32 x24.96 g/mole =58 g/mole. The best answer ischoice D.
You should always consider units when looking at math questions. The question asks for a molecular weight,
which has units of grams per mole. The numbers in the answer choices are2.32 (which is in grams per liter),
22.41 (which is in liters per mole), and 24.96 (which is in liters per mole.) To get the target units, grams per
liter are multiplied by liters per mole, choices Cor D. Choice Dhas the correct molar volume of the unknown
liquid at 304 K.
23. Choice Bis correct. You know the molecular mass of the unknown compound (58grams per mole) and the mass
percent (82.9%), soyou can make anintuitive determination of the molecular formula. The mass ofcarbon inthe
compound must equal either 12, 24, 36, or 48 (multiples of 12). Given that 82.9% of 58 is closest to 48 of the
multiples of 12, it can beassumed that the molecule has four carbons. This leaves ten hydrogens (to round out
the 10 grams in 58 grams per mole not accounted for by the four carbons); so the molecular formula is C4H10,
which has an empirical formula of C2H5. All of this intuition should lead you to pick B.
If you want to solve for the empirical formula exactly, here is the math using the compact formula, where a
100-gramsample is assumed. Do lengthy math calculations only if they are absolutely necessary.
C82.9H17.1 = C69H171 = C&MU2A = C1H25 = C.2Hn;
12 1 " 6.9 6.9

24. Choice A is correct. The mass percent of carbon in the unknown! compound must be less than 100%. This
automatically eliminates choices B, C, and D. If you didn't notice that fact, then the problem can be solved
knowing that the mass of carbon in the CO2 is equal to the massof carbon in the unknown compound. The mass of
carbon in CO2 will be the moles of CO2 (1.55/22.41) multiplied by the mass of carbon (12.011). When this is
divided by the mass of the sample (1.00), the result is answer choice A.
25. Choice A is correct. The key fact in the passage is that the 3.045 grams of carbon dioxide gas formed occupies
1.55 L at STP. The question asks for moles of carbon dioxide, so the liters must be converted to moles. The
conversion is given in the chart as 22.4liters per mole. To convert to moles, either the 3.045 CO2 grams must be
divided by the molecular mass of 44 grams per mole, or the 1.55 liters CO2 must be divided by the 22.41 liters
per mole. The second option is answer choiceA, so pickthat. If you wish to get an exact value for the moles, you
must get the denominator close to 100. This can be done by scaling the numerator and the denominator (i.e.,
adding a value to each that is equivalent to multiplying both by the same value).
155 x 4 =620 =6.20 +0.775 =jx9Z5 s 0.069 moles COz
22.4 x 4 89.6 89.6 + 11.2 100.8
This is fairly precise, but unnecessary on the MCAT. The addition of 0.775 to the numerator and addition of 11.2
to the denominator accomplish the goal of making the denominator close to 100 while scaling proportionally.
26. Choice D is correct. If the organic vapor had not displaced all of the air in the flask at the time the heat was
removed, then the flask would not have been filled with pure organic vapor at that time (as was assumed).
The actual amount of organic vapor in the flask would be less than the assumed value (100%), so the actual
amount of liquid collected would be too low. If the measured mass of the liquid is too small, then the value in
the numerator is too small for the calculation of the molecular mass, so the calculated molecular mass is too low
as well. Pick D to feel that happy sensation of correctness.
Passage V (Questions 27 - 33) Elemental Analysis
27. Choice C is correct. Water must be frozen out of solution, so the temperature of the trap should be less than the
freezing point of water (0C). This eliminates choices A and B. The temperature of the trap cannot be lower
than the sublimation point of carbon dioxide, however; otherwise, the carbon dioxide gas would solidify in the
trap along with the water vapor. The trap's temperature must be greater than the sublimation point of carbon
dioxide, but that temperature is neither given in the passage nor is it common knowledge, unless you happen to
own the Jeopardy Chemistry game. To play it safe, choose a temperature just less than the freezing point of
water. The value closest to 0C without exceeding 0C is -33C The best answer is therefore choice C.
28. Choice C is correct. The successive traps should be aligned in a manner to isolate each gas separately. The
moles are not determined by difference, sochoices Band Dare eliminated. The trick here is determining the
relative temperature sequence. If the traps were set first to isolate carbon dioxide by deposition (converting
from gas into solid), then water vapor would freeze out along with the carbon dioxide gas, and thus the
compounds would not be separated. By freezing water vapor first, the carbon dioxide can pass to a later trap
where it can in turn be isolated free of water. Because the freezing point of water is 0C and the sublimation
point of carbon dioxide is -78C, the temperatures of successive traps should gradually decrease. Choose C.
29. Choice D is correct. To determine the molecular formula from the empirical formula, the molecular mass of the
compound must be known. This fact makes choice Dthe best answer. The volume of the products and reactants
is dependent on the mole ratio in the reaction, but not exclusively cm the molecular formula. The volume may
change depending on other conditions, such as temperature. This eliminates choices A, B, and C Pick D.
Determination of the molecular formula from the empirical formula involves comparing the empirical mass to
the molecular mass. If the empirical mass is equal to the molecular mass, then the empirical formula is the
molecular formula. Choose D for the satisfaction of knowing you got this correct.
30. Choice A is correct. Combustion analysis involvesoxidizingcompounds and collecting their oxide gases. Sulfur
gas can be oxidized like carbon (given that carbon and sulfur are roughly equivalent in electronegativity). This
means that sulfur oxide can be collected and analyzed like the oxide of carbon. The oxide of sulfur that is
formed is uncertain, but the only answer choice showing oxidized sulfur is choice A, where sulfur carries a
positive four (+4) oxidation state. Sulfur can also be oxidized into sulfur trioxide (SO3), but that is not listed as
a choice.
31. Choice A is correct. If oxygen gas were trapped out from the gas mixture, there would be no way to know
whether the oxygen gas collected was from the original hydrocarbon, or from the excess oxygen gas needed to
ensure the complete combustion. This makes choice C valid. It is true that oxygen from the carbohydrate is
found in both the carbon dioxide product and the water product; thus, the oxygen from the compound cannot be
isolated. This makes choice B valid.
Oxygen in the carbohydrate is fully reduced (has a negative two (-2) oxidation state when bonded to carbon and
hydrogen). When looking at complete combustion reactions, remember that oxygen atoms from the compound do
not react with oxygen gas at all. This makes choice D valid. Oxygen gas has a sublimation point around -180C
(so oxygen gas undergoes deposition when the temperature drops below -180C); thus, oxygen gas can be
collected out of the air using a liquid nitrogen trap. Nitrogen liquid has a boiling point of -196C, so the
temperature of the trap must be -196C. The best choice is therefore choice A, because oxygen can exist as a
solid. The correct answer was a double negative.
32. Choice C is correct. As stated in the passage, the bubbler vents any pressure buildup within the system while
keeping the system closed. The bubbler is a one-way valve that allows gas to effuse from the system, but does
not let gas infuse from the environment. The oil in the bubbler is intended to interact only with the gas, so no
unreacted organic vapor should dissolve into the oil. Choice A is a valid possibility in the reaction (a true
statement), but it is not relevant to the goals of the experiment. Answer choices like choice A are difficult to
eliminate sometimes. The oil in the bubbler is not serving as an oil bath, so choice Bis eliminated. The bubbler
keeps the systemclosed by preventing infusion of gaseous compounds from the outside. The best answer is choice
C. Liquids cannot flow into the oil in the bubbler, so choice D is eliminated.
33. Choice D is correct. An increase in the mass percent of carbon is defined as an increase in the amount of carbon
per gram of the compound, so statement I is valid.
The amount of water formed depends on the number of hydrogens in the compound, which depends on the mass
percent of hydrogen. As the mass percent of carbon within a hydrocarbon increases, the mass percent of
hydrogen inthe hydrocarbon decreases. This reduces the amount ofwater formed from one gram ofcompound, so
it is not true that the mass of water formed increases upon oxidation. The decrease in mass percent of hydrogen
reduces the mass of hydrogen formed per gramof compound. This means that neither statements II nor III is
associated with an increasing mass percent of carbon within a hydrocarbon. Choice D is the best answer.
Dilution Experiment
34. Choice D is correct. The four salts listed as choices are all present in the same mass quantity in solution(4% of
their respective solution.) All of the solutions have 96% water solvent, so the salt with the greatest number of
moles has the highest molarity. Given that all of the salts have an equal mass, the greatest number of moles
belongs to the salt with the lowest molecular weight. Sodium (Na) is lighter than potassium (K), and chlorine
(CI) is lighter than bromine (Br), so NaCl is the lightest salt of the choices. Pick D, and feel fresh.
35. Choice B is correct. The trick here lies in the wording: "...how much water must be added?" This question
requires that you use the dilution equation, MinitialVinitial =MfjnaiVfirial, where Mis molarity and Vis volume.
0.15 Mx300 mL =0.0075 MxVfinal .-. Vfina, =0.15Mx300mL =J5_ xmmL =lîi x300 mL
0.0075 M 0.75 3
= 15 x 4 x 100 mL = 6000 mL = 6.0 L
This value is Vfjnai, not the answer to the question (volume of water added)! To finish with 6.0 liters of
solution from an original volumeof 0.3 liters, 5.7 liters must be added. Choice Bis the correct answer.
36. Choice C is correct. As far as chloride ion concentration is concerned, it doesn't matter whether you add pure
water or NaOH(aq) to theHCl(aq) solution, because CI" is just a spectator ion in the acid-base reaction. Neither
NaOH(aq) nor pure water increases the moles of chloride anion inthe solution. Solve the question by using the
dilution equation, MinjtiaiVinitiai = MfinaiVfjnai, whereMis molarity and Vis volume:
0.25 Mx 50 mL =Mfinai x 75 mL .-. Mfina, =a25Mx50mL =SI x 0.25 M=2 x 0.25 M=0.167 M
75 mL 75 3
The final molarity is 0.167 M, which makes choice C, 0.17M, the best answer.
37. Choice A is correct. Pure water is passed through the volumetric pipette to flush any residue out of the
volumetric pipette. Not all of thecontents of thepipette may come free because of the adhesion of water to the
glass, so rinsing ensures that the residual solution in the pipette is forced from the pipette into the new
solution. The rinsing is not quantitative, so it does not measure a volume. This eliminates choice B. No
temperature is mentioned, so the water used to rinse the pipette is not responsible for heating or cooling
anything. This eliminateschoices Cand D. Thebest answer is choice A.
38. Choice A is correct. A ten-fold dilution is defined as a dilution that results in a final concentration of a solution
that is ten percent of its original concentration. For this to occur, the final volume of the solutionmust be ten
times the initial volume. The final volume is the sum of the initial volume and the added volume, so the
following math can be applied:
Vfinal = Vinitial + Vadded and Vfinal = lOVjnitial/ so 10Vinitial = Vinitial + Vadded
9Vjnitial = Vadded/ so 1 Part solution is mixed with 9 parts solvent.
Tenparts solvent mixedwith one part solution yields a final volume that is eleven times larger; thus, the final
concentration would be one-eleventh, which is less than ten percent. This eliminates choice B. Choice C is the
reverse of a ten-fold dilution. Choice C is a dilution to ninety percent of the original concentration. Choice D is
the same as choice B. Pick choice A to feel that jovial tingle of correctness.
39. Choice C is correct. The addition of water to an aqueous salt solution increases the mass of the solvent without
changing the moles of solute, so the molality decreases (given that the denominator increases.) This makes
choice A valid. Addition of water to an aqueous salt solution increases the volume of the solution without
changing the moles of solute, so the molarity decreases (given that the denominator increases.) This makes
choice Bvalid. The salt solution is denser than the pure water, so the addition of water (a less dense solution)
to the salt solution decreases the density of the solution, making choice C invalid. Addition of water to an
aqueous salt solution increases the mass of the solvent without changing the mass of solute, so the mass percent
of solvent increases. This makes choice D valid. The correct answer is choice C.
40. Choice A is correct. The greatest dilution results from the greatest relative addition of solvent. The greatest
dilution involves the greatest ratio of solvent added to initial solution present, and it does not depend on the
total volume of the initial or final solution. The ratio of solvent added to the initial volume of solution in
choice A is 100 : 25, which reduces to 4 :1. The ratio of solvent added to the initial volume of solution in choice
B is 200 : 60, which reduces to 10 : 3. The ratio of solvent added to the initial volume of solution in choice C is 50
: 15, which reduces to 10 : 3. The ratio of solvent added to the initial volume of solution in choice D is 150 : 50,
which reduces to 3 :1. The greatest ratio of solvent added to initial volume of solution is found in choice A, the
best answer.
Passage VII (Questions 41 - 47) Solution Concentrations and Dilution
41. Choice A is correct. If the density of the solution is less than the density of water, then the addition of water
to the solution may actually increase the density of the solution. The molarity and the molality of the solution
always decrease as solvent is added, because the denominator in both molarity and molarity increase while
the numerator remains the same. As solvent is added to the solution, the mass percent of solute in solution
decreases, because the mass of solute in solution remains constant while the mass of solution is increasing. Only
the density does not always decrease upon the addition of water to an aqueous solution; thus, the best answer is
choice A. In rare cases where the aqueous solution has a density of less than 1.00, the density increases when
water is added.
42. Choice A is correct. Calculating the molarity and the molality of the solution involves the moles of salt in the
numerator. The numerator is the same in both the molarity and molality, so the difference between the two
values depends solely on the denominator. The mass of water is 0.100 kg, while the volume of solution is
greater than 0.100 liters. This means that the denominator in the molarity calculation is greater than the
denominator in the molality calculation. The larger the denominator, the smaller the value. This means that
the molality is greater than the molarity, which eliminates choices B and D. The density of pure water is 1.00
grams per mL. The density of the aqueous salt solution is the mass (101 grams due to salt and water) divided by
the volume. The volume of the solution is less than 101 mL, so the density of the solution is greater than 1.00
(given that the numerator is 101 and the denominator is less than 101). The density of the solution is greater
than the density of water, so the best answer is choice A.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
Choice C is correct. Because the density of the solvent is less than 1.0 grams per mL, the volume in liters
exceeds the mass in kilograms for the solvent. When comparing molality and molarity, both values have the
same numerator. You are looking for the value with the smaller denominator. The mass of solvent is less than
the volume of solution, so molality is greater than molarity. This eliminates choices Band D. The density is
the mass of the solution divided by the volume of the solution. The density values are less than 1, but are not
known specifically. In addition, there is no information about the mixing process. The density cannot be
determined without information about the density of the components. The best answer is choice C.
Choice A is correct. All of the solutions are made up of one solute and solvent, but in different ratios. The solute
is denser than the solvent, so it can be concluded that the solution with the greatest density has the highest
concentration of solute. As solute concentration is reduced, the density is also reduced. Increasing the amount of
solute relative to solvent increases both molality and molarity. The best answer is choice A.
Choice B is correct. This questions requires the use of the dilution equation, Mjn;tiaiVjnjtjai = MfjnaiVfjnai,
where M is the molarity and V is the volume. Plugging the given values into the equation yields:
0.25 Mx 100 mL =0.10 Mx Vfinai .-. Vfiriai ='25M x 100mL =-Q^. x 100 mL =2.5 x 100 mL =250 mL
0.10M 0.10
The final volume (Vfjnai) is 250 mL, but Vnnai is not the answer. The question asks for the volume of water
added. To start with 100 mL of solution and finish with 250 mL of solution, 150 mL of water must be added.
Choice C is correct. The units of molarity are moles solute per liter solution. Because both solutions have the
same final volume (100mL), the question reduces to asking how many grams of MgCl2 yield the same number of
moles of CI" as 1.0 grams NaCl. There are two chlorides per magnesium chloride molecule, so only half the
number of moles of MgCl2 as moles of NaCl is required. This accounts for the factor of one-half in the
calculation. The grams of NaCl must be converted into moles of NaCl, which in turn are converted into grams of
MgCl2 after accounting for the mole ratio of the two salts This calculation requires knowing the molecular mass
for both salts. Because the magnesium chloride is heavier than sodium chloride, intuition tells us that more
grams of the magnesium chloride are needed to form a mole quantity equal to that for the sodium chloride.
This means that in the calculation, the molecular mass ratio term should be greater than 1, making choice C
the best answer. The unit factor method solution is as follows:
1.0 grams NaCl x
1 mole NaCl x lMgCl2x 94.9 grams MgCl2 =^ x1 x9jL grams MgCl2
58.4 grams NaCl 2 NaCl 1 mole MgCl2 2 58.4
The final answer is less than 1.0 grams MgCl2-
Choice C is correct. The mole fraction of a compound in a solution is found by dividing the moles of the given
compound by the total moles of the solution. Choice Bhas a mole fraction of 0.50 for both Compound A and
Compound B, because there is one mole of each compound, and the total number of moles is two. In an equal-
mass mixture (one gram each), the greater number of moles is present in the compound with the lower molecular
mass. Compound A is lighter than Compound B; therefore, in equal masses of Compound A and Compound B,
there are more moles of Compound A than Compound B. The mole fraction of Compound A is therefore greater
than 0.50in choice A. This eliminates choice B. For an equal volume solution (in choice C there is one mL each),
the relative masses can be determined by the densities. Because Compound A is denser than Compound B, equal
volumes of Compound A and Compound Bresult in the mass of Compound A being greater than the mass of
Compound B. The mass percent of Compound A is greater than 50%, as it is in answer choice A; thus, choice C
results in an even larger mole fraction of Compound A than in the equal mass solution of choice A. The equal-
molecules solution (choice D) has the same mole fraction as the equal-mole solution (0.50 for each). Because
choice Band choice D are the same answer, they are both eliminated. The greatest mole fraction of Compound
A is found in the equal-volume solution, choice C.
Beer's Plot and Light Absorption Passage VIII (Questions 48 - 54)
48. Choice Bis correct. According to the absorbance equation (and the data and the graph), when the concentration
of solute is doubled, the absorbance of the solution containing it doubles. This occurs because twice as many
molecules are present to absorb light. The best answer is choice B. Choices C and D should have been
eliminated immediately, because the absorbance increases as the concentration of solute increases. Choice A is
eliminated, because the absorbance does not increase as the square of an increase in molarity.
49. Choice D is correct. At lowconcentrations, the relationship between concentration and absorbance is linear, as
predicted from the absorbance equation. At higher concentrations, deviation begins to occur, until the
absorbance reaches a maximum. There is no reaction occurring, so choice Bcan be eliminated. No solute would
dissolve into the solvent if the two repelled one another, so choice C can also be eliminated. Choice A may
sound tempting, if you are blindly choosing anamount on the basis ofwords you recall from biochemistry. The
saturation of the solvationcatalyst sounds like a good answer (especially considering that Michaelis-Menten
kinetics shows a similar graph when saturation of some sort occurs). The problem here is that "saturation of
solvation catalyst" means nothing, as there is no solvation catalyst. Also, catalysts affect the rate (not the
concentration) of reactants, products, solutes, or other components ofa solution. Choice Ashould be eliminated.
Once water (the solvent) has interacted withas muchsoluteas it can, no more solutecan dissolve intosolution.
The molarity reaches a maximum, so the absorbance reaches a maximum. The graph would be a line that just
ends at the saturated concentration. The best answer is choice D.
50. Choice C is correct. The addition of 50 mL of water to 10 mL of solution results in a dilution to one-sixth of the
original concentration value. The absorbance of light should also be reduced by a factor ofone-sixth. One-sixth
of 0.518 is a value less than 0.100, so the only possible answer choice is choice C.
51. Choice A is correct. Dividing the equation Absorbance = e[C]l by e and 1isolates the value of solute
concentration ([C]). Theresult is that choice Ais thebest answer. Thisquestion may have seemed toosimple to
you. Onoccasion, there aresome simple questions about theMCAT, sodon't try to find tricks that aren't there.
52. Choice C is correct. From the data in Table 1, we know that the absorbance of a solution with a concentration of
0.20 M is 0.188, while the absorbance of a solution with a concentration of 0.30 M is 0.278. If the absorbance of
the unknown solution is 0.242, then the molarity of the solution must lie between 0.20 M and 0.30 M. The
average of 0.20 Mand 0.30 Mis 0.25 M, and theaverage of0.188 and 0.278 is 0.233, so theabsorbance fora 0.250
Msolution should be roughly 0.233. Because 0.242 is slightlygreater than 0.233, an absorbance value of 0.242 is
associated with a concentration value that is slightly greater than 0.250 M. The best answer is choice C.
53. Choice D is correct. Isolating the value for e in the absorbance equation yields absorbance divided by
(concentration-pathlength). Absorbance is unitless, while concentration is in molarity, and pathlength is in
some fraction of meters (like centimeters). The units of e therefore must involve inverse molarity times inverse
centimeters. The best answer is choice D.
54. Choice C is correct. As solute concentration (molarity) increases, the absorbance increases. This makes
statement I valid. At this point, the answer choices narrowto either choice A or choice C. If you are strapped
for time, just look at statement III. Beer's law applies at all wavelengths (Xmax is chosen because it is the
greatest value, and thus is the easiest wavelength at which to obtain an accurate measure of absorbance).
Because statement III is valid, choice C is the best answer. The absorbance depends on both the molar
absorbtivity constant and solute concentration, so if Compound Xhas a lower constant than Compound Y, then
the solution with Compound Xmust be moreconcentrated than the solution with Compound Y, in order to have
an equal absorbance. This makes statement II invalid. The best answer is choice C.
Passage IX (Questions 55 - 61)
Beer's Law Experiment
55. Choice D is correct. The spectrophotometer measures the absorbance of light, so the wavelength setting
corresponds to an absorbed color, not a complementary color. This eliminates choices A and C, both of which
refer to the reflected (or complementary) color. To obtain the most accurate value, the spectrophotometer is set
at the wavelength corresponding to maximum absorbance. This makes choice D the best answer. Choice Bis
coincidentally correct in some cases, where the absorbance band is symmetric. This does not make choice Ba
better answer than choice D, but it does raise an important point: Remember that the test writers reward you
for choosing the best answer, not just a correct answer.
56. Choice B is correct. The question states that the absorbance varies with cuvette length. From the passage, we
know that absorbance varies with the concentration of solute in the solution. It makes sense that the
absorbance depends on the molar absorbtivity constant (e), so the Beer's law relationship of Abs. = e-[C]-l can be
deduced. Dividing both sides of the equation by [Compound]-l yields choice B. From the term "molar
absorbtivity," it can be inferred that absorbance is in the numerator and molarity in the denominator, which
makes choice B the only possible answer. Units may not always be the best route to the correct answer.
57. Choice A is correct. This question requires converting absorbance to concentration. A 0.10 M solution of
Compound Mhas anabsorbance of0.362, so if the absorbance is0.400, the molarity is greater than 0.10 M. This
eliminates choice D. Compound Q with an absorbance of 0.250 is less that 0.10 M (where the absorbance is
0.299), so choice Bis eliminated. Compound T with an absorbance of 0.500 is less that 0.10 M (where the
absorbance is 0.511), meaningchoice Cis eliminated, leaving choice Aas the best answer.
58. Choice Dis correct. From thedatainTable 1, we see that Compound Thas the greatest absorbance of thethree
compounds, sochoices AandBareeliminated. The absorbance values for Compound Mat aconcentration equal
to that of the othercompounds arecloser to thevalues ofCompound QthanCompound T. That means that the
better graph is choice D. This is a question where it easy to make a mistake by choosing answer choice C
without examining theotherchoices more closely. Abrief survey offormer students showed that roughly one-
third of you will make a careless mistake on this question and choose C.
59. Choice B is correct. Compound M has an absorbance of 0.217 at 561 nm when the concentration is 0.06 M.
Therefore, when the concentration is reduced to 0.05 M (a value that is about 17%less), the absorbance should
be reduced to a value that is five-sixths of 0.217, which is roughly 0.181. Statement I is valid. A solution of
Compound Q with an absorbance of 0.225 at 413 nm must have a concentration between 0.06 M (where the
absorbance is 0.180) and 0.10 M (where the absorbance is 0.299). Because 0.225 is a little closer to 0.180 than
0.299, the concentration should be a little closer to 0.06 M than 0.10 M, which makes statement II valid, and
makes choice Bthe only possiblechoice. Statement IIIis invalid, because at 697nm, 0.10 MCompound Thas an
absorbance of 0.511. This means that at the same wavelength, with a molarity of 0.11 M, the absorbance is
about 0.56+. Given that the wavelength is not 697 nm (the wavelength where maximum absorbance is
observed), the absorbance is actually less. This makes statement III invalid, agreeing with the selection of
choiceB. Pick Bto gain the prestige, honor, and pride that goes with knowing you got another question right.
60. Choice C is correct. Compound Thas an absorbance of 0.511 when it has a concentration of 0.10M. An absorbance
of 0.250 is just less than half of the 0.511 value, so the concentration must be just less than 0.05M (half of 0.10
M). The question is then, "Which solution results in a concentration of Compound T that is just less than
0.05M?" The starting solutions are all 0.10 M Compound T; so to achieve a solution that is just under 0.05 M, the
amount of water added should be just a tiny amount greater than the amount of Compound T solution. This is
observed with choice C. The absorbance for each choice is listed below:
Choice A: 10/i5 (0.511) >*/2 (0.511) >0.25; therefore, choice Ahas too high an absorbance.
Choice B: 20/4fj (0.511) =1/2 (0.511) >0.25; therefore, choice Bhas too high an absorbance.
Choice C: 19/39 (0.511) <1/2 (0.511) .-. 19/39 (0.511) may equal 0.25; therefore, choice Cis good.
Choice D: 10/i9 (0.511) >*/2 (0.511) >0.25; therefore, choice Dhas too high an absorbance.
The value of 19/39 (0.511) should be close enough to 0.250 to convince you to choose C.
61. Choice D is correct. Although colors were not reviewed in this section, it is a topic that frequently is discussed
along with the absorbance of light. One of the goals of these review passages is to expose you to this kind of
integrated material. In each section, there are some questions on topics that have yet to be discussed. Such is
the case here. The color observed for the solution is the complementary color of what is absorbed. The visible
spectrum is from roughly 700+nm to 400nm. Red light is the least energetic of visible light, so red light has a
broad wavelength of approximately 700 nm. Violet light is the most energetic of visible light, so violet light
has a narrow wavelength of approximately 400nm. Compound Q absorbs light with a wavelength of maximum
absorbance (A,max) of 413 nm. This corresponds to violet light, so the color observed for the solution is yellow
(the complementary color of violet). This eliminates choices A and B. Compound T absorbs light with a
wavelength of maximum absorbance (Xmax) of 697nm. This corresponds to red light, so the color observed for
the solution is green (the complimentary color of red). This eliminates choice C, and makes choice D the best
answer. You should be able to answer this with the background knowledge that 400 nm is at the violet end of
the visible spectrum, 700 nm is at the red end of the visible spectrum, and a working knowledge of
complementary colors. Compound M is irrelevant in solving this question. Appearing red (reflecting red light)
means that green light (the complementary color of red) was absorbed. Green light is in the middle of the
visible spectrum, so it could have a wavelength of 561nm. There is no reason for you to know the exact Xvalues
for each color, but you must be able to deduce the best answer to this question. Absorbed light, reflected light,
complementary colors, the color wheel, and the visible spectrum will all be addressed in the next chapter.
Passage X (Questions 62 -68) ReactionTypes
62. Choice Dis correct. It is not acombination reaction, because nocompounds combined toform a single compound,
so choice Ais eliminated. It is not a decomposition reaction, because no compound broke apart to form multiple
compounds, so choice Bis eliminated. It is not asingle-replacement reaction, because no metal compound was
formed orconsumed, so choice Cis eliminated. Because the barium cation (Ba2+) and the potassium cation (K+)
have exchanged their respective anions in this reaction, the reaction is classified as a metathesis reaction
(known also as adouble-displacement reaction). The best answer is choice D. By picking choice D, you can feel
satisfied knowing youpicked a correct answer. Go ahead, feel good!
63. Choice Ais correct. Aprecipitate is asolid that forms from solution and deposits on the bottom of the flask as
a reaction proceeds. The reaction least likely to form a precipitate is the reaction that is least likely to form a
solid product. In choice A, the combustion reaction forms water liquid and carbon dioxide gas, but does not form
a solid of any kind. For this reason, choice Ais the best choice. In a decomposition reaction, a solid can be
formed, as in the example offered inthe passage. Inthe single-replacement and metathesis reactions, salts are
formed as products, so precipitates areboth likely and probable.
64. Choice C is correct. The reaction of aqueous sodium iodide (Nal(aq)) with aqueous calcium nitrate
(Ca(N03)2(aq)) is a double-displacement (metathesis) reaction, so the precipitate formed in the reaction must
be one of the two possible product salts. Calcium is a dication (carries a +2 charge), so choice Aiseliminated,
because the calcium salt is not neutral when bonded to only one iodide anion. Sodiumand nitrate are both
highly soluble in water, so neither sodium nor nitrate is found inthe precipitates. Both choice Band choice D
are therefore eliminated. The best choice is answer C. The reaction is given below:
2 Nal(aq) + 1 Ca(N03)2(aq) 2 NaN03(aq) + 1 Cal2(s)
65. Choice Cis correct. Thereaction of aqueous hydrobromic acid (HBr) withmagnesium carbonate (MgCOs) is a
neutralization reaction. It is stated in the passage that carbonates, when neutralized, yield carbon dioxide
gas. The best choice is answer C. Thereaction is drawnbelow:
2 HBr(aq) + 1 MgC03(s) 1 H2C03(aq) + 1 MgBr2(s)
lH2C03(aq) 1 H20(aq) + 1 C02(g)
2 HBr(aq) + 1 MgC03(s) 1 H20(aq) + 1 C02(g) + 1 MgBr2(s)
You should recall that baking soda (sodium bicarbonate) effervesces when an acid is added. The bubbles that
form are carbon dioxide gas. Hydrogen gas cannot exist as H (molecular hydrogen is a diatomic gas), and
magnesium bromide is anionic salt (which isdefinitely not a gas at room temperature), meaning that choices A
and D should be discarded immediately. To eliminate choice B, you had to recognize that magnesium
carbonate is a base, and not a reducing agent. Magnesium metal is rich in electrons, so it would make a strong
reducing agent, but not magnesium cation (Mg2+). The addition of HBr to Mg(s) would yield H2(g) by way of an
oxidation-reduction reaction.
66. Choice Bis correct. Carbon dioxide gas is acommon product in combustion reactions, sochoice Ais eliminated.
The example reaction for decomposition shows calcium carbonate (CaC03) decomposing toform calcium oxide
and carbon dioxide. Choice C is thus eliminated. The same reaction is possible with calcium sulfite (CaS03),
so sulfur dioxide can be formed in the decomposition reaction of calcium sulfite. The passage states that the
neutralization of sodium bicarbonate (NaHC03) forms carbon dioxide gas; therefore, choice D is eliminated.
The only choice left is answer choice B, the metathesis reaction, where cations are interchanged, but no carbon
dioxide gas is formed. If the anion begins ascarbonate, it finishes ascarbonate, andnot carbon dioxide.
67. Choice Cis correct. Inthe reaction, the chlorine gas isreduced tochloride anion andexchanged for the bromide
anion, which is oxidized into bromine liquid. The product is not the result of coupling (combining) of the
reactants, so it is not a combination reaction. This eliminates choice A. The products are not the result of the
breakdown (decomposition) of a reactant, so it is not a decomposition reaction. That eliminates choice B. The
anion in the salt is exchanged, while the cation is not. This describes a single-replacement reaction, meaning
choice C is valid. Because the cation remains the same, the reaction cannot be a metathesis reaction, which
eliminates choice D. The best answer is choice C.
68. Choice A is correct. A negative value for AS results when the reaction gains order (or loses randomness). In a
combination reaction, the number of molecules decreases from reactant to product, which is an increase in order.
As such, a combination reaction is likely to have a negative value for AS. This makes choice A the best answer.
In a decomposition reaction, the number of molecules increases from reactant to product, which is an increase in
disorder. A decomposition reaction is likely to have a positive value for AS. This eliminates choice B.
In a single-replacement reaction, the number of molecules remains the same on each side of the reaction. Both
sides of the equation have a precipitate and a solute, whichleads to no conclusionabout the change in order for
the system. A single-replacement reaction can have either a positive or negative value for AS. Although a
single-replacement reaction may have a negative AS, choice C is not as good an answer as choice A. In a
combustion reaction, there is an increased number of molecules from reactants to products. The products are
gases, so there is a large positive value for AS. This eliminates choice D.
Passage XI (Questions 69 - 78) Calcium-Containing Bases
69. Choice D is correct. Ca(OH)2 yields a hydroxide anion (OH") when added to water, which makes Ca(OH)2 an
Arrhenius base. Ca(OH)2 cannot donate a proton, so it is not an Arrhenius acid. This eliminates choice C.
Choice A is also eliminated, because it cannot be an amphoteric species, unless it can act as both an acid and a
base. Calcium is a metal, so Ca(OH)2 is a metal hydroxide, not a non-metal hydroxide. Choice B is
eliminated. The correct answer is choice D.
70. Choice D is correct. Although C032" is charged and thus an ion, the anion itself is held together by covalent
bonds (three a-bonds and a resonating 7i-bond). Carbon dioxide is held together by covalent bonds between the
central carbon and the two adjoining oxygens atoms. Only CaO (III) has an ionic bond, and it is considered to be
partially ionic. Calcium carries a +2 charge, and oxygen carries a -2 charge. This makes D the correct choice.
The structures and bonds are shown below:
O
a
O a a O"
a a
o=c=o
Ionic bond
2+
Ca O
2-
71. Choice D is correct. All of the compounds contain only one calcium per molecule, so the smallest mass percent of
calcium is found in the compound with the greatest molecular mass. The mass percent is found by dividing the
mass of calcium by the mass of the compound. The molecular mass for CaO is 56 grams per mole; for Ca(OH)2 it
is 74 grams per mole; for CaC03 it is 100grams per mole; and for CaCl2 it is 111grams per mole. The heaviest
compound is CaCl2 (choice D), meaning choice D has the greatest denominator and therefore the smallest mass
percent of calcium. This makes choice D the best answer.
72. Choice A is correct. To calculate the percent yield, the actual yield (in moles) is divided by the theoretical
yield (in moles). The actual yield in moles is 5 g/100g-moles"1, while the theoretical yield in moles is 10 g/74
g-moles"1. Thepercent yield is found as follows:
5g
Percent yield =
_ 100 g-mole
-1
10 g
x 100% = 5 x 74 x 100% = Z4 x 100% = -2Z_ X100% = 37%
100 x 10 100 x 2 100
74 g-mole"1
The percent yield is 37%, which makes choice A the correct answer.
73. Choice D is correct. The mass percent of calcium in calcium oxide is the mass of calcium (40 grams per mole)
divided by the mass of calcium oxide (56 grams per mole) and multiplied by 100%. 40/56 x 100% is greater than
50%, which eliminates choices A and B, and is greater than 66.7%, which eliminates choice C. Only choice D
is greater than 66.7%, so choice D must be the correct answer.
Range method: ^ x 100% >4Q. x100% =2. x 100% =66.7%
56 g 60 3
Calculation method: ^1 =1 =5 x - ~ 5 x 0.143 = 0.715 = 71.5%
56g 7 7
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
Choice A is correct. Because matter can be neither creatednor destroyed, the total mass of reactants must equal
the total mass of the products. There are 38.0 grams of reactants, so choice Dis eliminated for having more
than 38.0 grams of products. The question from here becomes a limiting reagent problem. We must decide
whether there is leftover water (is CaO the limiting reagent?), leftover calcium oxide (is water the limiting
reagent?), or an exact mixture (there is no leftover and thus no limiting reagent.) The moles of CaO equal 28/56
(which is one-half) and the moles of H2O equal 10/18 (which is greater than one-half.) Because the calcium
oxide reacts with the water in a one-to-one ratio, there is leftover water. This means CaO is the limiting
reagent in the reaction, so the reaction does result in leftover H2O. The only choice with leftover water is A.
Choice D is correct. The N in the answer choices stands for normality, which is the molarity of the protons
that can be generated by the acid. Normality is the molarity of an acid times the equivalents of hydronium
per molecule. CaC03(aq) reacts according to the equations shown below. A2: 1ratio is needed to reach full
neutralization.
CaC03(aq) + 2H+(aq)
H2C03(aq) + Ca2+(aq) H2C03(aq) H20(1) + C02(g)
5 mL x 0.2 moles/liter = 1 mmole CaC03, so 2 mmoles of a strong acid (which yield H+) are needed to reach
equivalence. Choice Ais astrong base, so eliminate it. Choice Byields only 1mmole of H+, and choice Cyields
3 mmole of H+, so eliminate both choices Band C Choice D yields the 2 mmole of H+that are needed. The best
answer is choice D. For a monoprotic acid, normality and molarity arethe same. However, for a diprotic acid,
the normality is double the molarity; and for a triprotic acid, the normality is triple the molarity.
Choice Cis correct. This is a case whereEquation 1.2 in the text, MjnitialVinitial =MfinaiVnnai, must be used.
0.500 Mx5.0 mL =Mfinal *55.0 mL .-. Mfinal =5/55 x0.50 .-. Mfinal =Vll x-50 <VlOx-50 =-050
The final molarity is therefore less than 0.05 M. Without pounding numbers, youshould see that choice Cis
the best choice (the choice just less than 0.050 M). Choice D is too far below 0.050 M to be reasonable. Donot
solve mathquestions exactly, but find a range into which only one answer choice fits. In this case, the range is
from just less than0.050 (maybe 0.040 or so) to0.050. Only choice Cfits intothat range.
Choice C is correct. The final concentration can be determined by taking a weighted average of the
concentrationsfor the two initial solutions before they are mixed. A quick observation you should apply to this
question is that if the mixture were a fifty-fifty mixture by volume (the mixture of equal volume solutions),
then the final concentration would lie exactly between (be the mean value of) the two values. In this
particular question, the mean value would be 0.250 M. Because there is an excess of the higher-concentration
solution (30 mL at 0.30 M, withonly 20 mL at 0.20 M), theanswer should becloser to0.30 Mthan0.20 M(making
it greater than0.250 M). This eliminates choices Aand B. The exact value canbesolved for as follows:
Total moles = (20 mL x0.20 M) +(30 mL x0.30 M) =4+9 =13 = 0.26, choice C.
Total volume 50 mL 50 50
Choice Cis correct. 50 grams CaC03(s) is equal to0.50 moles CaC03(s), because themolecular mass of CaC03(s)
is 100 grams per mole. Because there is only one carbon in CaC03(s), 0.50 moles CaC03(s) yield 0.50 moles of
CO2. 0.50 moles of CO2 at STP occupies avolume of: 0.50 moles x22.4 liters/mole =!/2x 22-4 =1L2 L- Pick c
Industrial Chemicals
79. Choice Ais correct. The greatest amount ofpotassium per gram ofcompound is found in thecompound with the
greatest mass percent ofpotassium. The greatest mass percent of potassium isfound inK2O, aswas mentioned in
the passage. This means that thebest choice is answer A. The mass percents for the four saltsare as follows:
2 x 39.1
K20:
2 x 39.1 _ 78.2 _ 39.1
(2 x 39.1) + 16 94.2 47.1
39.1 _39.1
KCl:
39.1 + 35.5 74.6
K2SO4:
KN03:
The relative mass percents when comparing the four values are: ^^- > *"'
The greatest mass percent of the choices is found with K2O (choice A).
62
39.1
47.1
78.2 -39.1
(2 x 39.1) + 32 + (4 x 16) 174.2 87.1
39.1 - 39.1
39.1 + 14 + (3 x 16) 101.1
39.1 ^ 39.1 39.1
74.6 97.1 101.1
80. Choice Dis correct. The compounds inchoices A, B, and Call have two nitrogen atoms percompound, while the
compound inchoice Dhas only one nitrogen atom inthe compound. The lowest mass percent ofnitrogen isin
choice D, because thefour compounds areroughly comparable inmolecular mass, but they have different masses
of nitrogen. The mass percents for the four choices are shown below:
A. H2NCONH2 => ^ =28 =_7_ <1
60gH2NCONH2 60 15 2
B. NH4NO3 => ?^? =&=-7_ =35%
80g NH4NO3 80 20
C. (NH4)2S04 => ?M^ =_28_ =_7_ =21+%
132g (NH4)2S04 132 33
D. NH4H2P04 => l^N =J4_ <14%
115g NH4H2P04 115
28 > 28 > _28_ > _28_ (= _14\
60 80 132 230 115
81. Choice C is correct. The mass percent of nitrogen in urea is just less than 50%:
Mass percent urea = 2 28 _ 7_ < 1_
60gH2NCONH2 60 15 2
The only answer choice that is just less than 50%is choice C.
82. Choice A is correct. According to the passage, the phosphorus content of the compound is critical, so no
phosphorus should be wasted in unreacted reactant. This can be prevented by adding the reactants in a ratio
that avoids the presence of any leftover phosphorus-containing reactant. The goal is to conserve the
phosphoms-containing compound, which makes choice A the best answer.
83. Choice B is correct. The percent yield for a reaction is defined as the actual quantity of product isolated from
the reaction mixture, divided by the theoretical quantity of product that should form, as determined from the
limiting reagent of the reaction. According to the balanced equation, for every one mole of (NH4)2C03 that
reacts, one mole of (NH4)2S04 forms. This means that 10 grams of (NH4)2C03 (which is 10/96 moles
(NH4)2C03) should produce 10/96 moles of (NH4)2S04, which is (10/96 x 132) grams (NH4)2S04. Dividing
the mass of (NH4)2S04 obtained (10 grams) by the theoretical mass of (NH4)2S04 that should have formed
(13.75 grams) determines the percent yield. The calculation of the yield is shown below:
Theoretical mass: 0- x 132 = -1320- = 330=n0>104+6 = 133 = 13.75
96 96 24 8 8 8 4
Range for thepercent yield: 50% < 5 = 10. < 1OQ0 < 3 = _J0_ = 75*%
7 14 13.75 4 13.33
The value for the percent yield lies somewhere between 50%and 75%, which makes choice B the best answer.
84. Choice C is correct. All of the choices have the same volume (100mL) and the same mass of salt, so the greatest
molarity of potassium is present in the solution with the greatest number of moles of potassium in solution.
Hence, the greatest molarity results from using the compound with the greatest mass percent of potassium,
which corresponds to the salt with the lowest molecular mass. Choice D is eliminated, because NO3 is heavier
than CI, so KCl has a lower molecular mass than KN03, and thus a greater mass percent of potassium than in
KNO3. Choice B is eliminated, because S04 is heavier than CO3, so K2CO3 has a lower molecular mass than
K2S04/ and thus a greater mass percent of potassium than K2S04. The question boils down to determining the
relative mass percents of potassium in KCl and K2CO3. The molecular mass of KCl is 74.5 grams per mole, and
the molecular mass of K2C03 is 138.2 grams per mole. Potassium carbonate (K2CO3) yields two potassium ions
per molecule, so to have the same mass percent of potassium as KCl, its molecular mass would have to be double
that of KCl (which equals 149 grams per mole.) Because K2CO3 is less than twice as massive as KCl, the
relative denominator is smaller when calculating the mass percent of K2CO3 than when calculating the mass
percent of KCl. The greatest mass percent of potassium, and thus the most grams of potassium in a 10.0-gram
salt sample, is found in K2CO3. This means that the highest concentration of potassium is present in the
aqueous K2CO3 solution, so choose answer choice C for best results.
85. Choice A is correct. It is easiest to isolate a solid (precipitate) from solution, because the solid canbe filtered
from solution rather easily. Equally, a liquid and gas can flow, while a solid cannot, so removing liquid and gas
to leave solid behind is easy. This is the crux of many lab techniques. Aliquid must be distilled away from
solution, a solute must be either distilled, extracted, or removed by chromatography, and a gas must be
collected in a gas-trapfree of air. Thebest answer is thus choice A.
86. Choice Ais correct. This is another casewhere the questionfocuses on a topic we have yet to discuss. Tliere are
a few things you should recall. First, the lower the pKa value is, the stronger the acid is. Second, when the pH
of the solution exceeds the pKa of an acid, that site exists predominantly in the deprotonated state. Statement
III can immediately be eliminated, because the first proton of sulfuric acid is strong, meaning it has a very low
(negative) pKa value associated with it. From the products of the last equation in the passage, it can be seen
that H2PO4-, SO42", and HF all simultaneously exist in solution. Sulfuric acid has lost both of its protons,
phosphoric acid has lost its first proton, and hydrofluoric acid has yet to lose a proton. The first proton of
phosphoric acid is lost more readily than the proton of HF, which means that pKai of H3P04 is lower than
the pKa value of HF. Statement I is thus true. Because the second proton of sulfuric acid has been lost, while
the second proton of phosphoric acid has not been lost, the second proton of sulfuric acid is more acidic than the
second proton of phosphoric acid. The result numerically is that pKa2 of H2SO4 is less than pKa2 of H3P04.
Statement II is thus false. Only statement I is true, so the best answer is choice A.
Questions 87-100
Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
87. Choice Cis correct. This is a limiting reagent question. The balanced equation for thereaction is as follows:
lC3H8(g) +5 02(g) 3C02(g) + 4H20(g)
There are 25/32 moles 02(g) and 20/44 moles C3Hs(g) as reactants. According to the mole ratio from the
balanced equation, the moles of 02(g) must be five times that of C3H3(g). The moles of 02(g) needed to react
with20/44moles of C3Hg(g) is 100/44. The value of 25/32 is less than1, so there is less than onemole of 02(g)
present. The value of 100/44 is greater than 2, so more than two moles of 02(g) are needed. This means that
oxygen (02(g)) is depleted before C3Hs(g), making 02(g) the limiting reagent andchoice Cthe best answer.
88. Choice Bis correct. If youknow this answer from your biology classes, trust your knowledge and don't waste
time doing the calculation. You should know that hemoglobin contains four iron atoms. That is the point of
this question. The math is time-consuming, sosave time wherever you can. If you didn't know that fact about
hemoglobin, then doing the math was necessary. The mass of iron in hemoglobin is the mass percent of iron
times the total mass ofhemoglobin. 0.33% x68,000 =.0033 x68,000 =3.3 x68 =204 +20.4 =224.4 grams Fe. The
number of irons is therefore 224.4/55.8, which makes 4 (choice B) the best answer choice.
89. Choice D is correct. The first method which probably comes toyour mindis the method learned from general
chemistry classes. Inthis method, the 9grams ofcarbohydrate are converted to0.050 moles of carbohydrate by
dividing by the molecular mass of 180. The 6.72 liters of carbon dioxide at STP are then divided by 22.4 liters
per mole to yield 0.30 moles CO2. The ratio of CO2 to O2 in the combustion of a monosaccharide is 1 : 1.
Therefore, 0.30 moles of oxygen reacted as well, and thus the mole ratio of carbohydrate to O2 to CO2 is0.05 :
0.30 : 0.30, which equals 1:6:6. This is a long-winded, but valid, solution. Ashorter method is as follows:
In the combustion of a monosaccharide, the mole ratio of oxygen reactant to carbon dioxide to water is always 1:
1 : 1. A monosaccharide has the molecular formula CnH2nOn, so it has a molecular mass of 30n (12n+ 2n + 16n)
grams per mole. For a molecular mass of 180 grams per mole, the value of n is 6, so the formula for the
monosaccharide is C6H12O6. Themole ratioof O2 toCO2 is therefore 6 : 6. Pick D and feel relaxed.
90. Choice B is correct. Choices A and C are eliminated, because they cannot be a molecular formula. For a
compound with justcarbon, oxygen, and hydrogen, the number ofhydrogens must be aneven number. With an
oddnumber ofhydrogens, the bonding does not work out. To decide between choices BandD, you must determine
the molecular mass of the compound, by dividing the mass by the volume and then multiplying this value by
the molar volume:
Igram y 22.4 liters = 22.4 grams B22.4 grams =4 x ^ grams = ^ grams
0.26 liters 1 mole 0.26 moles 0.25 moles mole mole
OnlyC4H6O2 has a molecular massjust under 90 g/mole, sochoice Bis the bestanswer.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review*3 64
91. Choice A is correct. This is a question testingyour knowledge of the unit factor method. Barium oxide (BaO)
canform bariummetal and oxygen gas(O2) upondecomposition. These aretheonlytwoproducts possible from
the decomposition of barium oxide. Hence, for every two moles of BaO, one mole of O2 forms. To solve this
problem, the 1.0grams of BaOmust be converted tomoles, and the moles of BaO in the 1.0-gramsamplemust be
multiplied by one-half. This gives the moles of O2formed. Multiplyingthe moles of O2by 22.4 liters per mole
(the volume for one mole of gas at standard temperature and pressure), gives liters of oxygen gas produced by
decomposition:
1.0 grams BaO x 1kBaO x 1mole Q2 x22.4 liters - 22.4 =2Z4 <_1_
153 grams BaO 2 moles BaO lmole 153x2 306 10
Only choiceA is less than 0.1 liters, so pick choiceA and make yourself one point wiser.
92. Choice Bis correct To determine the grams of product, the conversionmust go through moles. This question is a
standard grams reactant-to-moles reactant-to-moles product-to-grams product conversion.
2.0 grams MgNH4PQ4 y 1Mg2P2Q7 y222.6 gMg2P2Q7 _ 2x 222.6 _ 222.6 - hfeP(y
137 3&amsI 2MgNH4P04 1mole Mg2P207 137.3 x 2 137.3
/mole
2> 222A >i
137.3
The mass of Mg2P2C>7(s) is greater than 1, but less than 2. The only answer that falls between 1 and 2 is answer
choice B.
93. Choice D is correct. We know nothing of the molecular mass, so any formula we determine is the empirical
formula (simplest formula). This eliminates choice A. Because the elemental mass of Z is twice the elemental
mass of X, a compound with equal mass quantities of Xand Z contains twice as many moles of Xas moles of Z.
The mole ratio of X to Z is therefore 2:1; thus, the empirical formula is either X2Z1 or Z1X2. Pick choice D to
feel correct.
94. Choice C is correct. The math here is beyond the MCAT level, but the point of such a question is to encourage
you to use intuition and simplify the question. You can always eliminate some of the answer choices, and at
least narrow your guess from random choice to a fifty-fifty chance of success. This question is simplified by
knowing the possible oxidation states of iron. From your experience with hemoglobin, you know that iron has a
oxidation state of either +2 or +3, and that oxygen has an oxidation state of -2 when it is coupled with a metal.
If oxygen has an oxidation state of -2, then iron cannot have an oxidation state of +2 or +3 in either Fe302 or
Fe03. Choices A and D are eliminated based on outside knowledge. This problem can now be solved using your
mathematical intuition. In the iron oxide sample, there are 11.89 grams of iron and 5.10 grams of oxygen (found
by subtracting 11.89from 16.99). The molecular weight of iron (Fe) is 55.85 grams per mole, and the molecular
weight of oxygen (O) is 16.0 grams per mole. An empirical formula is based on mole ratios, so the elemental
masses must be converted into mole quantities. 5.1 over 16 is just less than one-third, so there are roughly 0.30
moles of oxygen in the iron oxide. 11.89 over 55.85 is just over one-fifth, so there is roughly 0.20moles of iron in
the iron oxide. There are more moles of oxygen than iron, which eliminates choice B(FeOhas equal moles of
iron and oxygen) and leaves choice C as the correct answer by default. Minimize doing math by using your
background knowledge and logic.
Feii.89 O5.10 = Fei+Or = Feo2+O0 33_ = Fe203
55.85 16.0 5 3
95. Choice D is correct. It is not possible to have 26hydrogens and only 4 carbons in a stable compound. Youmay
recall from organic chemistry that the maximum number of hydrogens in a hydrocarbon or carbohydrate is 2n +
2, where n is the number of carbons in the compound. This eliminates choice C. Perhaps it is easiest to solve
this question by first determining the number of carbons in the molecule. The mass percent of carbon in the
molecule is 53.4%. When this percentage is multiplied by 90 grams/mole, it tells us that just over half the mass
is carbon. Carbon has a mass of 12grams per mole, so the value must be a multiple of 12. The mass due to carbon
is 48 grams, which is the mass of four carbon atoms. The molecular formula therefore contains four carbons,
eliminating choices A and B. The only choice left is answer D, which does in fact have roughly 11% hydrogen.
Again, the goal in preparing for your exam is to be able to solve these questions quickly and using as much
intuition as possible. You are not rewarded only for being thorough; you are also rewarded for being fast. Take
logical short cuts whenever they present themselves. Do not blindly repeat the calculation techniques you
learned in your general chemistry courses.
96. Choice A is correct. Because this is a reduction reaction, the oxidation state must decrease, which eliminates
choices Cand D. By assuming oxygen has a -2 oxidation state, it is possible to reduce this problem to simple
algebra. In the reactant, the sum of the oxidation states for the four oxygen atoms is -8. In order for the overall
charge on Cr042"(aq) to be -2, the chromium must have an oxidation state of +6. The sum of +6 and -8 is the ionic
charge of -2. In the product Cr203(s), each chromium must be +3 to cancel out the three oxygen atoms (at -2
each) to make theoverall molecule neutral. For this reason, choice Ais thebestanswer.
97. Choice Dis correct. Themetal combines ina 2:3 ratio withoxygen to form an oxide that is 53% metal bymass.
Assuming a 100-gram sample implies that there are 53 grams of metal and 47 grams of oxygen in the 100-gram
sample of the metal oxide. This means that the ratio of (53 divided by the molecular mass of the unknown
metal) to (47 divided by the molecular mass of oxygen, which is 16) isequal to 2: 3. This can be solved long
hand or by intuition. Rather than solve the math exactly, it is a good idea to plug the values for all four
answer choices into the setup, and get a rough estimate:
53gmetal._47gO_=2.3^Giyen ^4Zferougmy 3/53gI^L mustbeabout2
MWmetal 16 / . 16 MWmetal
/mole
The molecular masses of the four answer choices are 40.0, 55.9, 52.0, and 27.0 respectively. 47 divided by 16 is
slightly less than 3, so 53 divided by the molecular mass of the metal must be slightly less than 2. This
eliminates the first threechoices (40.0, 55.9, and 52.0), leaving 27.0 (aluminum) as the best answer. The correct
answer is choice D. You could also have eliminated choice A from knowing that calcium cannot achieve a +3
oxidation state (orcharge), socalcium cannot combine withoxygen in a 2: 3ratio.
98. Choice Bis correct. The mass percent of carbon is the mass of carbon ineach compound, divided by the total
mass of each compound, multiplied by 100%. For each compound, the mass percent can be determined as follows:
Acetic acid: 2i x 100% Ethanol: 2! x 100% Methyl acetate: 26 x 10o% Glucose: -T-2- x 100%
60 46 74 180
24<30=1 24>23=1 36 < 37 =1 -Z2_ < -2Q_ = 1
60 60 2 46 46 2 74 74 2 180 180 2
Of the choices, only choice B(ethanol) has a fraction greater than one-half. This implies that the greatest
mass percent ofcarbon isfound inethanol. The best answer istherefore choice B.
99. Choice Bis correct. The MCATtest writers can ask about the same concept in many ways. It is more important
that you walk away from this question knowing the concept than it is getting the question correct. The most
carbon dioxide results from the compound with the greatest mass percent ofcarbon, aslong as there are equal
masses ofeach sample present initially. There was one gram ofeach compound initially, before oxidation, so
our only concern iswith the mass percent of carbon. The greatest mass percent of carbon isfound inethanol, so
the greatest amount ofcarbon dioxide results from the oxidation ofethanol. The best answer ischoice B.
100. Choice C is correct. Because there are twoCI in the Mg(C104)2 molecule, the mass percent of chlorine is the
mass of two CI over the mass of Mg(C104)2-
Mass chlorine _ 2 x 35.5 71 _ 71
Mass compound 24.3 + (2 x 35.5) + (8 x 16) 24.3 + 71 + 128 223.3
Jl_ >_Z1_ >_ZL, where 3- =X = 33.3%, and: -ZL =i- = 25%. So 33.3% > -7-1- > 25%
213 223.3 284 213 3 284 4 223.3
The mass percent is a little less than 33.3%, so choices Aand Bare eliminated. The value is just a little less
than 33.3%, because thedenominator (223.3) isjust a little greater than 213. The best answer is thechoice that
isslightly less than 33.3%, which is 31.8%, choice C. Choice Dcan be eliminated, because it isless than 25%.
Section II
Atomic
Theory
by Todd Bennett
Voltage
source
Filter
Photographic
plate
Atomic Structure
a) Subatomic Particles
b) Isotopes
c) Average Atomic Mass
d) Classical Experiments and Machinery
i. Thomson Experiment
ii. Mass Spectroscopy
iii. Millikan Oil Drop Experiment
iv. Rutherford Experiment
e) Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle
f) Atomic Model
g) Hydrogen Energy Levels
Electronic Structure
a) Electronic Theory
b) Effective nuclear Charge
c) Electronic Spin Pairing
d) Spin Pairing and Magnetism
e) Electronic Density and Orbitals
f) Collective Orbital View of Energy Levels
g) Electronic Configuration
h) Quantum numbers
Periodic Trends
a) The Periodic Table
b) General Elemental Periodic Trends
i. Atomic Radius
ii. Ionization Energy
iii. Electron Affinity
iv. Electronegativity
c) Periodic Families (Groups)
Light Absorption and Emission
a) Excitation and Relaxation
b) Atomic Spectrum of Hydrogen
c) Electromagetic Spectrum
d) Visible Spectrum and Colors
iii. Emitted Color
iv. Reflected Color and the Color Wheel
e) Fluorescence
f) Photoelectric Effect
Nuclear Chemistry
a) Muclear Particles
b) nuclear Decay and Capture
c) Half-Life
Berkeley
Ur.E.V.KE'W
Atomic Structure Section Goals
*
Be familiar with the location, mass, and charge of sub-atomic particles,
Anatom, from thechemist's perspective, iscomposed ofa nucleus madeup ofprotonsand neutrons,
surrounded byorbiting electrons. You mustknowtheBohr model andtheproperties ofeachparticle
withregard toitscharge, mass, andeffect ontheatom. Forinstance, additional electrons result in
the formation of an anion, while a decrease in electrons results in the formation of a cation.
Be familiar with energy levels and energy transitions.
The electrons orbitin distinct, quantized levels. There is a base(lowest-energy) level, and excited
states above that to which electrons jump when enerey is added to the atomic system. Energy is
absorbedwhen an electronis elevatedfromthe ground state to an excitedstate. Energy, in the form
of a photon, is released whenan electron drops to thegroundstatefroman excited state.
Understand electronic configurations.
Electronsfill the orbitals accordingto a defined sequence, described by the Aufbau principle. The
keys facts to recall about the principleare that there are two electronsper orbital, and there is one
s-orbital per level, three p-orbitals per level, five d-orbitals per level, andseven f-orbitals per level.
The filling order has exceptions m the transition metals, lanthanides, and actinides. There are
exceptionsthat allowfor half-filled shell stability, as is seen with chromium.
a^j* Understand quantum numbers.
fit L
Quantum numbers are used to define the orientation and location of an electron. There are four
quantum numbers: n, 1m/, and ms. Youmust be familiar with the quantum numbers and how to
determine themfor agiven electron within anatom.
^j* Be familiar with periodictrends.
*
Knowing theperiodic trendsforthemain-group elements is essential. Thetrendsthat youmust be
familiarwith includeionizationenergy, atomicradius, electronaffinity, and electronegativity(although
electronegativity of the noble gases need not be committed to memory). It is important that you be
familiar with each basic trend and the reason for that trend. Beable to explain any deviations from
standard periodic behavior.
Understand isotopes, average atomic mass, and isotopic labeling.
Isotopes are atoms with the same number of protons, but a different number of neutrons in their
nuclei. For some elements, there are several isotopes. The elemental mass (average atomic mass)
found inthe periodic table isaweighted average ofall ofthe isotopes ofthatgiven element. Isotopes
are chemically equivalent, so they are hard to detect without using a mass spectrometer. Isotopes,
because of their chemical similarity, are substituted for one another in some reactions to serve as
labels.
Understand nuclear decay and half-life associated with first-order decay.
It isessential that youunderstand thebreakdown andbuildupofnuclei through thegainand loss
of nuclear particles. It is also important to be able to determine the concentration ofa species by
combining the initial concentration with half-life information. The half-life is the period of time
requiredforhalf of a givensampletodecaytosomeproduct Mostexampleswill involvedetermining
the concentration at a given time for a reaction (or process) that follows first-order decay kinetics.
General Chemistry Atomic Theory
Atomic Theory
From the work of Thomson, Millikan, Rutherford, Bohr, Pauling, and others, we
have a modern view of the atom and its fundamental structure. The core of the
atom by this view is a nucleus composed of protons and neutrons held together
by an unbelievably strong force. The details of the nucleus are not well
understood, but using a simplistic model, the majority of the mass and all of the
positive charge of the atom is found at the core. The nucleus is surrounded by
orbiting electrons that stay in distinct orbits, no two of which are exactly the
same (Hund's rule). Coulomb's law explains the mutual attraction of the orbiting
electrons and the nucleus. Electron energy levels are based on Coulomb's law,
although quantum mechanics is invoked to explain the overall behavior of the
orbiting electron. The closer an electron is on average to the nucleus, the more
tightly it is held, and the greater the energy required to remove that electron
from the atom. The space in which an electron is believed to orbit is referred to
as an orbital. Each orbital is distinct from all other orbitals, and electrons have the
option of spinning clockwise or counterclockwise as they occupy the orbital.
Only two electrons may occupy each orbital at the same time, and they must
have opposite spins to do so. These distinct orbitals are quantized energy levels
where the electrons are said to reside. This fundamental idea is the basis of all
atomic theory.
Atomic behavior and electronic configurations are explained by the concept of
electronic bookkeeping. The ease or difficulty of gaining, removing, or sharing
an electron are determined by the location of the electron. An electronic
configuration is an account of all of the electrons in an atom. Quantum numbers
are specific for each individual electron. Questions about electronic
configuration and quantum numbers on the MCAT should be some of the
simpler questions you see, so be sure to get them correct, as they are worth the
same amount of points as the more difficult topics. Understanding the
experiments and applications associated with the absorption and emission of
light is critical to performing well on the MCAT. Absorption spectroscopy,
lasers, and fluorescent tubes are just a few examples of devices that utilize light
that you are expected to understand for the MCAT.
Equally important as understanding the structure of an atom and the energetics
of its orbiting electrons is seeing the effect the structure has on the reactivity of
the atom. There are distinct trends in atomic radius, ionization energy, electron
affinity, and electronegativity that can be traced back to the filling of electrons in
the atom. Knowing the reasoning behind the periodic trends is more important
than memorizing the direction of each trend and notable exceptions to the trend.
The last of the topics that fits under the heading of atomic structure is nuclear
chemistry. This section should be one of the easier sections, as scientists do not
understand the topic in enough detail to expect you to have a deep
understanding of it. Nuclear chemistry is made easy by knowing the particles
and the processes of decay and capture, and your ability to do algebra. Know the
definitions of isotopes, nuclear decay, nuclear capture, nuclear particles, and
half-life. This chapter starts with an elementary look at subatomic particles and
finishes with an overview of the atom, the energy states of its particles, and
transitions between energy levels.
Introduction
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Atomic Structure
Atomic Structure
j^X&&&U^'uf2iX \
Subatomic Particles
Our most fundamental view of matter is that atoms are composed of three sub
atomic particles. These particles are the proton, neutron, andelectron. Each sub
atomic particle isunique inits properties andposition. Aproton andneutron are
comparable inmass, while an electron is roughly Vl800 * ê mass * aProton-
The proton andelectron carry the same magnitude of charge, but withopposite
sign. Physical properties associated with each particle arelisted inTable 2.1
Particle Mass (kg) Mass (amu) Charge (C) Charge (e)
Electron 9.11 x 10"31 5.49 xlO-4 -1.602 xlO"19 -1
Neutron 1.67 x 10"27 1.0087 0 0
Proton 1.67 xlO"27 1.0073 1.602 xlO"19 +1
Table 2.1
Thenucleusis made up of neutrons and protons. Mass and charge are the two
measurements repeatedly usedtodescribe subatomic particles and whole atoms.
By convention, the mass of an atom is saidto be due only to the protons and
neutrons, because the electrons are essentially massless. An atom normally
carries a neutralcharge, unless it has lost or gained electrons. In a neutral atom,
the number ofprotons equals the number ofelectrons. Aconvenient shorthand
notation is usedtodescribe every element. There is themassnumber (A) usedto
describe the number of protons and neutrons in an atom. There is also the
atomicnumber (Z) used to describe the number of protons in an atom (and thus
the number of electrons in a neutral atom). The notation used to represent each
atom is shown in Figure 2-1.
A number Elemental Symbol
197^Pt
Z number Platinum-195
The A number tells us that the combined
number of neutrons and protons is 195.
The Z number tells us that the number of
protons is 78. Combining these facts
tells us that there are 117 neutrons and
78 protons in this atom.
Figure 2-1
Isotopes
Isotopes are atoms of the same element that contain a different number of
neutrons but the samenumber of protons within their nuclei. Isotopes, having
the same number of protons, are chemically similar but have different atomic
masses. Isotopes react the same way chemically andthus can bedistinguished
onlyby mass separation techniques (such as mass spectroscopy). Isotopes are
often used as markers in chemical labelingexperiments and as tags in nuclear
magnetic spectroscopy studies. An isotope can betraced from the source (where
it is added) totheendpoint ina physiological system, a biochemical pathway, or
a reaction mechanism. Typical examples of isotopes include 1H (standard
hydrogen), 2H (deuterium), and 3H (tritium). Common isotopes used inlabeling
studies include deuterium, tritium, carbon-13, carbon-14, phosphorus-32, and
iodine-121. These isotopes canbemonitored either bytheradioactive decay they
emit orbynuclear magnetic resonance imaging (known asNMR spectroscopy).
Copyright by The BerkeleyReview
70
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Atomic Structure
Example 2.1
How do thesubatomic particles in26A1 and27A1 differ?
A. The two are isotopes with a different number of neutrons.
B. The two are isotopes with a different number of protons.
C. The two are ions with a different number of electrons.
D. The two are ions with a different number of protons.
Solution
Because the symbol is Al, the atomic number is always 13, implying that there
are 13 protons. This eliminates choices Band D. In either case there is no charge,
so there are thirteen electrons present and the species is not an ion. This
eliminates choiceC and leaves choice A as the correct answer. In 2*>A1, there are
13 neutrons (because 13 and 13 sumto 26), while in 27A1, there are 14neutrons
(because 14 and13 sumto27). In26A1, there are13 neutrons, 13 protons, and 13
electrons, while in 27A1, there are14neutrons, 13 protons, and13electrons. The
two differ by one neutron, making them isotopes. Choice A is good.
Example 2.2
What symbol represents the neutral atom with fifteen electrons and sixteen
neutrons?
A. i5Ga
B. IIP
C.
31p
15A
D.
31c
165
Solution
Because there are fifteen electrons, there are also fifteen protons in the neutral
atom. This makes the atomic number 15, which is associated with the element
phosphorus, and eliminates choices A and D. The mass is 31 (15protons and 16
neutrons), so the symbol is 15P, choiceC.
Example 2.3
Which of the following is an isotope of element 35 containing 44neutrons?
A. ^Br"
B. 79Br
C. 81Br
D. 79Kr
Solution
The atomic number of bromine is 35, regardless of which isotope is being
observed. Because the element in this question is bromine, choice D is eliminated
immediately. When the 35 protons of bromine are coupled with 44 neutrons, the
mass of the bromine isotope is 79 amu. The answer which shows a mass of 79
amu is choice B. Choice A is an anion, which is formed upon the addition of an
electron.
Average Atomic Mass
The average atomic mass ofanelement is a weighted average of themasses ofall
of theisotopes, anaverage that takes intoaccount abundance. Thereference for
all isotopic masses is 12C, which is assigned a mass of12.000 amu. All isotopic
masses are measured relative to 12C
Example 2.4
Whena sample of magnesium is subjected to mass spectroscopy, it is found that
there are three detectable isotopes. What is the average atomic mass of
magnesium, given that the relative isotopic abundance is 79% 24Mg, 10%^Mg,
andll%26Mg?
A. 23.71 g/mole
B. 24.31 g/mole
C 25.83 g/mole
D. 26.92 g/mole
Solution
The math associatedwith this question is time-consuming, so before diving into
it, review the answers to see what can be eliminated. The average mass has to
fall within the rangebetweenthe lightest and heaviest isotopes. In other words,
the averageis in the middle somewhere. This eliminateschoices A and D. The
most abundant isotope is24Mg, sothe average atomic mass should beclose to24
grams per mole. Because the heavier isotopes are 21% the total mass of the
sample, the average atomic mass is a littlemore than 0.21 grams above 24. The
best answer is choice B. The mathematical solution is shown below, but in
preparation for thisexam, use rigorous math only to confirm intuitivelyobvious
answers.
Averageatomicmass = 79%(24) +10%(25) + 11%(26)
= (0.79 x 24) + (0.10x 25) + (0.11 x 26)
= (0.79 x 24) + (0.10x (24 + 1)) + (0.11 x (24 + 2)
= (0.79 x 24) + (0.10 x24) + (0.10 x1) + (0.11 x24) + (0.11 x 2)
= (0.79 x24) + (0.10 x24) + (0.11 x24) + (0.10 x1) + (0.11 x 2)
= (1.00 x 24) + (0.10 x 1) + (0.11 x2) = 24 + 0.10 + 0.22 = 24.32
The math is shown in an intuitive, step-wise fashion that does not require a
calculator. The number used as the center point, 24, was chosen knowing that
the average value was around 24.
Classical Experiments and Machinery
Classical experiments inchemistry arestudies that determined the fundamental
features of matter. These experiments are important, because they define the
nature of matter and the smallest units of matter. Of interest when looking at
matter are charge, mass, location, and composition. There are three classical
experiments: the Thomson experiment (used to determine thesignof charges),
the Millikan oil drop experiment (used to determine the magnitude of charge),
and the Rutherford experiment (used to determine the location of dense
particles). The experiments as listed herearemodified from their original form
to emphasize the rationale, rather than the procedure. Of equal significance
today is the mass spectrometer (used todetermine thecharge tomass ratio for a
particle), which wasdeveloped tosupport theclassical experiments.
Thomson Experiment
The Thomson experiment demonstrated the existence of opposite charges in an
atom and that charge is a fixed quantity. Thomson deflected a stream of charged
particles (electrons) using an external electric field (the plates of a capacitor).
Because the stream of particles bent in a uniform fashion, Thomson concluded
that there was a consistent charge-to-mass ratio for the particles.
Procedure andApparatus
In the Thomson experiment, a beam of electrons was generated traveling left to
right, as shown in Figure 2-2. Thomson observed that when he applied an
electric field (a positively charged plate on one side and a negatively charged
plate on the other) perpendicular to the electron beam, he could deflect it by an
exact amount each time. The magnitude of deflection depends on the strength of
the field (charge on the plates) and the mass of the electron. Reversing the plates
of the external field gets the opposite deflection.
v l\
Circuit open .*. No electron beam Circuit closed/. Electron beam
*
Electron field on .*. Electron beam bends Electron field on .-. Electron beam bends
Figure 2-2
Results and Conclusions
Because the direction of the deflection changed when the orientation of the field
changed, Thomson concluded that there must be twotypes ofcharge that oppose
one another. Because the arc of the deflection was constant, Thomson concluded
that electrons have afixed charge-to-mass ratio, measured to be 1.76 x108 C/g.
Adapted Thomson Experiment (in MCAT testing style)
What is presented here is a spin-off of the Thomson experiment. The Thomson
experiment concept canbe applied to various particle beams besides theelectron
beam. A simplified version of the apparatus has an accelerating field (not
shown), which accelerates particles to the left, a double filter to ensure uniform
linear trajectory, and an electric field perpendicular to the vector of entry.
Charged particles are deflected according to theirsign ofcharge. Four particles
are considered. Their pathways are shown in Figure 2-3.
Particle accelerated
from left to right
Double
filter
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
III
Figure 2-3
Atomic Structure
Pathway I is attributed to an electronbeam, while Pathways n, HI, and IVare not
identified. The MCAT test writers are more interested in ascertaining your
intuitive understanding of problems than your superficial knowledge of facts.
Questions are likely to introduce obscure particles and test you on their
properties, which must be derivedfromthe experiment. Consider the following
question based on the data in Figure 2-3.
Example 2.5
Pathway II is taken by which of the following?
A. A positron
B. A neutrino
C. A gamma ray
D. Amuon
Solution
The particle following Pathway II must be negatively charged, based on the
direction of its deflection. It deflects in the same direction as the electron.
Although some of the particles in the answer choices may seem unfamiliar, the
question still can be answered. Based on the name, you should deduce that a
positron is positively charged. This eliminates choice A. A positron is an anti-
electron, in that it has the same mass as an electron, but the opposite charge.
Based on the name, you should deduce that a neutrino is neutrally charged. This
eliminates choice B. A neutrino is essentially massless and carries no charge.
They are difficult to detect. Detection of neutrinos is done through collision and
scintillation. Choice C is eliminated, because a gamma ray is a photon. A photon
does not bend in an electric field. Photons may be refracted, but that requires a
change in medium. The only choice left is a muon, choice D. In all likelihood,
you do not know what a muon is. This question is not testing your knowledge of
particles; it is testing your reasoning abilities. A muon traces a different pathway
than the electron, because it is about 200 times as massive as an electron.
Mass Spectrometry
A mass spectrometer is designed to measure the charge-to-mass ratio for a
charged particle. This is accomplished by sending a particle into a perpendicular
magnetic field and observing the degree to which it curves. The degree of arcing
(radius of curvature) for a particle can vary with mass, initial velocity, magnitude
of charge, and the strength of the magnetic field. As momentum increases (either
mass or initial velocity), the particle deflects less, so the radius of curvature
increases. As the charge magnitude increases, the force causing deflection
increases, so the particle deflects more, causing the radius of curvature to
decrease. Bycomparing the curvature for an atomic or molecular ion to a known
standard, the mass of the unknown ion can be determined. The mass
spectrometer is used in general chemistry to determine isotopic abundance.
Recall that isotopes are the same element with a different number of neutrons. In
organic chemistry, the mass spectrometer is used to determine molecular mass
and fragmentation behavior to help elucidate the structure of an unknown
compound. Figure 2-4shows a basic schematic design for a mass spectrometer.
Note that some mass spectrometers may also have a velocity selector situated
between the accelerating region and the deflecting region.
it-
Particle path
H
_ X X X X X X X
o
5 X X_vx X X X X
X X X\ X\ X X X
ri\ ]
X X X K ,' X X X
X X x//x XXX
X X X X X X X
r2>rl
m v
r oc
qB
Magnetic field into page
Double filter to ensure uniform particle
beam perpendicular to Bfield
Figure 2-4
The mass spectrometer embodies a simple concept. Force depends on mass, so
when an equal force is applied to different masses, they accelerate at different
rates. The mass spectrometer takes advantage of this by accelerating charged
particles inmotion using a magnetic field. The procedure isas follows:
O An element or molecule is ionized using high-energy electron impact
or incident electromagnetic radiation. The ionized particle is then
accelerated to the cathode plate. The strength of the accelerating
region (voltage of the electric field) is adjustable, so the velocity of
the particlecan be set to any desired value.
The particle passes through the double filter to ensure a uniform
perpendicular beam.
The particle leaves the accelerating region and enters a
perpendicular magnetic field (oriented into the page as drawn in
Figure 2-4) whereit is deflected in a counterclockwise, radial fashion
by the perpendicular magnetic force.
The radius is ascertained from the strike point against a collision
detector. The mass-to-charge ratio is calculated from the radius of
the arc.
Atomic Structure
Example 2.6
Which of thechanges to thesystem wouldincrease the radius of curvaturein the
mass spectrometer?
A. Usinga doublyionizedrather than singlyionizedelement
B. Using an isotope with fewer neutrons
C. Increasing the acceleratingvoltage
D. Increasing the magnetic field
Solution
The trick here is translating what the answer choices mean in terms of the
physics of theapparatus. Using a doubly ionized element (+2 cation) rather than
a singly ionized element (+1 cation) results in a greater q value, so a greater
degree of deflection is observed. This reduces the radius of curvature (r), so
choice A is invalid. Usingan isotope with fewer neutrons results in a reduced
value for mass, so a greater degree of deflection is observed. This reduces the
radius of curvature (r), so choice Bis invalid. Increasing the accelerating voltage
results in a greater velocity, so a lessened degreeof deflection is observed. This
increases the radius of curvature (r), so choice C is the best answer. Increasing
the magnetic field results in a greater force, so a greater degree of deflection is
observed. This reduces the radius of curvature (r), so choice D is invalid. This
question can be answered from a conceptual perspective or based on the
relationship of variables described in a formula, with equal success. Whether
you use equations or intuitionis a matter of personal preference and timing.
Themass spectrometer canbe used to determine the charge-to-massratio for the
electron and the proton. The mass of a neutron is obtained by looking at the
mass difference between known isotopes. For instance, the mass difference
between 1H+ (aproton) and2H+ (deuteriumion) is themass ofone neutron. The
mass spectrometer can also be used to determine the isotopic abundance for the
component atoms of eachelement. Commonisotopes that should be memorized
include: 12C (the most abundant isotope ofcarbon), 13C (used in carbon NMR),
14C (used incarbon dating, because it undergoes decay), 1H (the most abundant
isotope ofhydrogen), 2H (deuterium, used inproton NMR solvents), 3H (tritium,
used inradio-labeling experiments), 235U (used innuclear fission), and 238U (the
most abundant isotope of uranium).
Millikan Oil Drop Experiment
TheMillikan oil drop experiment is a difficult experiment to perform. Its aimis
tosuspenda charged oil drop in an electric field. Todo this, an electron must be
added to the oil drop or the oil drop must be ionized by impact, before it is
placed into the electric field. We will consider adding the electronhere. This
cannot be accomplished easily, given that the oil drop is neutral and has no
affinity for the negatively charged electron. Falling oil drops pass through a
beam of electrons where some oil drops are penetrated at random by an electron.
Ideally, the electron penetrates the core of the oil drop and comes to rest, due to
the viscosity of the oil. Thesuspensionof an electronin the oil drop produces a
charged oil drop. Enough charged oil drops continue to fall, one of which
eventually passes through a pore in the upper plate of a capacitor. The two
plates of the capacitor are separated, but both lie within the walls of a glass
cylinder. Figure 2-5 is a basic schematic of the apparatusused in the Millikan oil
drop experiment.
General Chemistry
Oil can
Figure 2-5
Atomic Theory
If suspended or falling
at constant speed,
qE=-mg
A
qE|
q =
mg
E
Charged oil drop
In the Millikan experiment, a fine mist of oil droplets is allowed to fall through a
tiny pore in the upper capacitor plate into a region where a uniformelectric field
exists. The oil droplets fall because of gravity, so Millikanset out to apply a force
that could stop the droplets from falling. If the droplets are suspended, then the
force applied equals the gravitational force (a known quantity that is dependent
on the mass of the falling object). The applied force is formed by charging the oil
dropletsby exposure to either an electron beamor an x-raybeam(onlyone of the
beams is appliedin different trialsof the experiment). Anelectric field is applied
to suspend the charged droplets. The uncharged oil drops fall unaffected by the
field. Despite the difficulty of this experiment, Millikan obtained enough valid
data so that an average measurement was put forth and acceptedby the scientific
community at large.
O The falling oil drop gains a charge by either losing or engulfing an
electron as it falls (depending on the version of the experiment). On
rare occasions, the falling oil drop both gains an electron after
passing through the pore in the upper plate. The electric field
strength is adjustable, so that the oil droplet can be suspended.
If the particle is suspended (or falling at a constant velocity), then the
net force is zero, so mg = - qE. Because we know g and we can set
the electric field strength (thus we know E), by plugging in the
average mass of an oil drop (we know an average m), we can solve
for q, the charge of the electron.
Results and Conclusions
The charge of an electron has a fixed numerical value that is the same for all
electrons. The value for this fundamental unit of charge is 1.6 x10"19 C. The
charge of a proton is found to have the same magnitude, but opposite signof the
electron. When a proton is combined with an electron, there is no net charge.
The Millikan oil drop experiment was difficult to carry out, so even after many
trials, there were only two significant figures in the final number.
The Thomson experiment, the Millikan oil drop experiment, and the use of the
mass spectrometer generally address questions about the subatomic particles in
terms of what they are. The where they are questions are answered by interactions
with incident light and particle beams. The Rutherford experiment is the most
significant location experiment we will consider.
Atomic Structure
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory Atomic Structure
Rutherford Experiment
TheRutherford experiment determined that atoms havedensenuclei withnearly
all of the atomic mass centrally concentrated, and that metals have uniformly
spaced atoms in their microscopic composition. The Rutherford experiment
relies upona technique that canbe employed to find a ball in the bushes in the
dark. "What does finding a ball in the bushes at night have to do with the
MCAT?" youmayask. Well, whena ball is lost in the bushes, it is easierto find
its location by looking for its shadow than by hunting for the ball itself. By
shining light through the bushes and observing the shadow cast against the
background of a wall, a circular shadowcan give hints as to the location of the
spherical ball. Depth in thebushes canbe obtained by first moving the flashlight
closer to the bushes, then moving it farther away. The size of the shadow varies
with position of the light source, so the relative position of the ball to the light
source is determined from shadow dimensions. In essence, the ball can be
located and its dimensions can be found without ever seeing the ball. This same
principle was used by Rutherford to find subatomic particles. A subatomic
particle is smaller than a ball, so a light source of significantly shorter
wavelength must be employed. In this example, we use x-rays as the light
source. In the analogy, the bushes had to be thin for the light to pass through
them, so a thin strip of gold foil is used for the study. Rather than looking for a
shadow on the wall, the experiment uses photographic paper to collect the x-rays
that pass through. Figure2-6shows the basic design of the experiment.
Lead reaction vessel
X-ray beam
X-ray source
Lead filter
Figure 2-6
Thin gold foil strip
Photographic plate
or
Luminescing screen
An incident beam (x-rays, alpha particles or electrons may be used) is focused
and aimed at a thin slice of gold metal, thin enough that the beam is able to
penetrate and pass through the gold foil. Gold is chosen, because it has a large
nucleus and its atoms pack in such a manner where light can pass through its
lattice more easily than other metals. If alpha particles are used, a luminescent
screen is placed around the gold foil to detect where the particles pass through
the foil and strike the luminescent screen (which glows when struck by an alpha
particle). If x-rays are used, a photographic plate is placed around the gold foil
to detect where the photons pass through the foil and strike the film. In the
alpha-particle version of the experiment, some particles are deflected by the gold
sample, resulting in parts of the luminescing screen never illuminating.
Residts and Conclusions
Because the incident beam mostly passes straight through the sample, with
deflection (ricocheting particles) being observed in only a few cases, it is
concluded that the atom is made up predominantly of empty space. The mass
associated with the atom occupies very little space and is not spread uniformly
through the material. Atoms are composed of a nucleus holding the mass (the
protons and neutrons.) This dense nucleus carries all of the mass besides that of
the electrons. But given that the electrons are of such low mass, it is not possible
to discern their whereabouts from the Rutherford experiment.
The Rutherford experiment disproved the diffuse particle model (referred to as
the plum pudding model.) In the version of this experiment using the x-ray beam,
the photographic screen displayed the output shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7
Dark spots represent areas where no x-rays struck the film. In essence, the spots
are the shadows of the sub-atomic particles. Based on the distribution of the dark
spots, it is concluded that the mass of gold is not evenly distributed in the gold
foil, but is in fact found in concentric, dense nuclei. Because the nuclei (spots) are
evenly spaced, the gold atoms must be arranged in a lattice structure. This is
because the shadow pattern on the filmmimics the distribution of particles in the
material. Gold is chosen because it is malleable and it has a massive nucleus,
thus it diffracts x-rays more readily than lighter elements, like aluminum. This is
why x-rays in medical imaging show bones and teeth (rich in calcium nuclei)
rather than tissue (rich in the light carbon, oxygen, and nitrogen nuclei). In order
to analyze blood using x-rays, a heavy salt must be added to the solution, often
barium iodide.
Example 2.7
What hypothesis did the Rutherford experiment support?
A. Atoms combine in definite proportions.
B. Atoms contain subatomic particles.
C. Protons and electrons carry opposite charges.
D. Solids are made of atoms with a dense nucleus and vast empty space
between nuclei.
Solution
Choice A is Dalton's law of definite proportions. Choice B is particle theory.
ChoiceC is the Thomson experiment, conducted by observing the deflection of
the beam in a cathode ray tube when an external electric field is applied. The
Rutherford experiment involves the bombardment of a thin piece of metal foil
with either high-energy photons (x-rays) or a beam of electrons (Rutherford did
both in separate experiments.) The photons pass through and strike an
illuminating screen, which forms a shadow pattern indicative of the material's
shape. Most of the beam passes through, with a minimal amount being either
reflected or diffracted. The conclusion is that the material is essentially empty
space, with a few dense nuclei scattered throughout the material. The spots on
the screen are uniformly spaced, so the nuclei must also be evenly spaced within
the element. This makes choice D the best answer.
The location of the electrons is not determined by Rutherford experiment.
Electrons are too small and moving too fast to locate precisely. This is described
by Heisenberg's uncertainty principle.
Copyrightby The Berkeley Review 79 Exclusive MCATPreparation
Heisenberg's Uncertainty Principle
The Heisenberg uncertainty principle quantifies the idea that it is not possible
simultaneouslyto identifya particle'sposition (where something is) and velocity
(howfast and where it's going). Equation2.1 is the mathematical versionof the
Heisenberg uncertainty principle, where Ax is the uncertainty in position and
A(mv) is the uncertainty in momentum.
Ax.A(mv)>h/4jl (2.1)
The basic premise here is that you can know either where something is, or how
fast it is going, but not both at the same time. Think of using a camera to focus
on a movingball. If your aperture is small and the shutter speed is fast, then the
pictureof the ball showsyouwhereit is, but you don't knowwhere and how fast
it's going. If your aperture is large and the shutter speed is slow, then the picture
of the ball is a streak that shows you where and how fast it's going, but you don't
know exactly where the ball is. Because we cannot locate an electron's precise
position, we settle for a view where the electron is observed over time. This
results in orbitals as a model for the orbiting electron.
Atomic Model
The Bohr model presents a simplified picture that explains the quantization of
light and the reproducibility of spectra. The basic premise is that electrons
occupy specific circular orbits about the nucleus, and thus the electrons have
specific energy levels (associated with each orbit). Electrons can exist only in
specified orbits (electronic shells), so eachenergylevel of an atomis quantized.
Figure 2-8 shows this:
n = 4
n = 3
n = 2
n = l
ywWW A.4_,
w w w
Electronic energy levels
Electronic shells
Figure 2-8
Theenergy levels arespaced according to theenergetics of transition between the
levels. More energy is required to carry out transitions when the electron is
nearest to the nucleus. The electrons are situated in various energy levels
(known more accurately as orbitals). These are quantized states that electrons
occupy. Principle energy levels arenumbered 1 to , where n = 1 is the lowest
electronic energy level. Energy must be absorbed by the atomfor an electron to
elevate to a higher energy level. This is referred to as both excitation of an
electron and absorption of energy. Conversely, energy is emitted when an
electron drops from a higher energy level (excited state) to the lowest energy
level (ground state). A good analogy to electrons climbing energy levels is a
The Berkeley Review
rocket ship escaping Earth's gravitational pull. It takes less energy to increase
distance as the rocket ship pulls farther away from the Earth. Likewise, it takes
less energy for an electron to increase energy levels as the electrons increase to
higher energy levels (farther from the nucleus). For instance, it requires more
energy for an electron to go from the n = 2 level to the n = 3 level, than for the
electronto go from the n = 3 level to the n = 4 level in any atom. This is why the
energy levels for electron states are drawn closer and closer as the principle
quantumnumber (n) increases in Figure2-8. Thispicturebecomes a littlemore
complicated if the rotational energylevels associated withan atomare combined
with the electronic energy levels. At the level of understanding needed for
answering MCAT questions, we ignore the rotational energy levels when we
lookat electronic energy levels. We shall consider only the principal energy level
when considering electrons. Equation2.2 is used to determine the energyof an
electron in its principal energy level.
E=2*2mZ2e4 (2.2)
n2h2
E=energy (principal energy level) m=mass of an electron (9.11 x10"31 kg)
Z=nuclear charge e=the charge of an electron (1.6 x10"*9 C)
n=the electronic energy level h=Plank's constant (6.63 x10"34 J-sec)
Themass of an electron, m, the charge of an electron, e, and Planck'sconstant, h,
are all constants, so when Equation 2.2 is considered as a proportionality, it
becomes Equation 2.3.
EocZ?_ (2.3)
n2
Example 2.8
According to Figure 2-8, howwould the photonfrom ann =4ton =2 transition
compareto the photon froman =2ton = l transition?
A. The n = 4 to n = 2 transition is twice as energetic as the n = 2 to n = 1
transition.
B. The n = 4 to n = 2 transition is more than twice as energetic as the n = 2 to n =
1 transition.
C. The n = 2 to n = 1 transition is twice as energetic as the n = 4 to n = 2
transition.
D. The n = 2 to n = 1 transition is more than twice as energetic as the n = 4 to n =
2 transition.
Solution
The distance between the n = 4 and n = 2 levels is less than the distance between
n = 2 and n = 1, so transition energy is greater from the n = 2 level to the n = 1
level. Thephotonreleased froman n = 2 level ton =1 level transition has more
energy thanthephoton released from ann =4level ton =2level transition. This
eliminates choices A and B. The transition energy from the n = 2 level to the n =
1 level is more than twice the transition energy from n = > to n = 2, so it is
definitely more than twice the energy of the n = 4 level to n = 2 level transition.
Choice D is the best answer. This energy differenceis shown in Figure 2-8. On
the MCAT, you should assume that the diagrams are drawn to scale, unless
otherwise noted in the question or passage.
General ChemiStry Atomic Theory Atomic Structure
The energy required to excite an electronfrom a lower level (orbital) to a higher
level is often in the ultraviolet (UV) to visible range of electromagnetic radiation,
so the energy givenoff as the electrondrops back down to the lower level (orbit)
is emitted as light energy. This is the basic principle behind spectroscopy.
Lower energy levelshave less absolute energy and thus are more stable states in
which an electron can exist. The smaller the gap between energy levels, the less
energy that is given off, and therefore the longer the wavelength of light that is
emitted. One formula is important for understanding the relationship between
the speed of light, the frequency and wavelengthof light, and light energy. The
energy of a photon and its wavelength of light are inversely proportional.
Equation 2.4sums this up, where Eis the energy of the photon, v is frequency, c
is speed of the wave, and Xis wavelength.
E = hv = he. (2.4)
X
Hydrogen Energy Levels
Hydrogen is the simplestatomto study, becauseit has only one electronand one
proton. Much of our atomic theory is extrapolated from what we know about
hydrogen. Because energy is quantized and the energy of the electron depends
on features of the hydrogen atom, the energy levels can be calculated. Equation
2.5represents the energy of the different levels of hydrogen.
E=-2.178x lO'18^2-] (2.5)
Energy levels are defined as being negative relative to a free electron. If the
electron is in the n = oo energy level, then E = 0, and the electron is free from a
nucleus. Considering that photons are absorbed and emitted when electrons
change energylevels, the more useful application of the energy equation involves
transitionenergy. Equations 2.6and 2.7show the relationship between transition
energy and the corresponding wavelength of the photon involved.
AE =Efina! - Einitiai /. AE =-2.178x lO'18 U -\ (2.6)
18/ 1 _ 1 \
\nfinal ninitial/
X= h- (2.7)
AE
The ionization energy of hydrogen from its ground state (from the n = 1 level) is
1312 kj/mole. Because of the squaring of the principle energy level, the
ionization of an electron in hydrogen from the n = 2 level is one-fourth of that
value (328 kj/mole). The transition energy from the n = 1 level to n = 2 level is
the difference between the two values, 984 kj/mole.
General ChemiStry Atomic Theory Electronic Structure
Electronic Structure r-r;...;.;;; ^Yl/Î^L;^
Electronic Theory
In atoms, the electrons orbit in distinct shells. Not all shells can hold the same
number of electrons. Shells farther from the nucleus have a greater radius, and
thus a greater capacity to hold electrons. Equation 2.8 gives the maximum
occupancy of electrons in a shell, where n is the principle quantum number.
Numberof electrons inshell=2(n)2 (2.8)
Figure 2-9 shows electrons of the lithium atom in their respective shells. The first
shell holds two electrons, so the third electron must occupy the second shell. The
first shell is the core shell, while the outermost shell is the valence shell.
Valence shell 2"d ""'level
(electron occupancy up to 8)
Core shell 1$' "*<&level ,
(electron occupancy of 2)
Nucleus: made up of both
neutrons and protons
Figure 2-9
Effective Nuclear Charge (Nuclear Attraction)
Orbitingelectronsare held in their orbits by an attractive electrostatic force to the
nucleus. In addition to nuclear attraction, electrons are also repelled by other
electrons. The net force is responsible for holding the valenceelectrons in place.
The net charge exerted upon the valence electrons is referred to as the effective
nuclear charge. Theeffective nuclear chargeaccounts for attraction to the nucleus,
repulsionfromcore electrons, and minimal repulsionby other valenceelectrons.
When approximating the effective nuclear charge (Zeff), the nuclear charge is
added to the core electron charge (a negative term). Figure2-10 shows effective
nuclear charge increasing whilemoving lefttoright across theperiodic table.
7Li /> v\ 9Be
nucleus: +3; core electrons -2 nucleus: +4; core electrons -2
.-.Zeff = +1 Zeff =+2
Figure 2-10
When we move from left to right in the periodic table, the nucleus of each
succeeding atomadds a proton and the valence shelladds anelectron. Theeffect
of the extra valence electron is not as significant as the effect of the additional
proton. As a result, the effective nuclear chargeincreases as the periodictable is
scanned from left to right.
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Electronic Structure
Each electron in an element travels a unique pathway, dictated by several
principles. Electrons are difficult to track, so we have theories to explain
electronic behavior, but they are just models to explain observed behavior.
Accordingto the Heisenberguncertainty principle we cannot see an electron, but
we can study its pathway over time. Charged particles in motion create
magnetic fields, so by studying the magnetic field generated by a moving
electron, it is possible to learn about the pathway and position of the moving
electron. This is why two of the four quantum numbers associated with an
electron refer to magnetismthat results from a moving electron. We shall blend
the many ideas about the electron that have evolved over time, starting with the
most simplistic model, the Bohr model.
Electron Spin Pairing
Electrons fill orbitals in a pre-determined sequence, filling evenly into orbitals of
equal energy with like spin (all orbitals get a single electron, said to be "spin up"),
before placing a second electron with opposite spin into each orbital. The
physical reality is that electrons may spin either clockwise or counterclockwise
about their axis. Spinning charged particles generate magnetic moments, so the
two opposite spins produce opposite magnetic fields. The magnetic fields
generated by electrons revolving about their axis are referred to as either spin up
(implying that the spin produces a magnetic field vector oriented upward) or
spin down. Byconvention, electrons are said to fill orbitals spin up first, before
filling spin down. Figure 2-11 shows the electron filling of lithium-7 and
beryllium-9, where arrows represent electrons, and the orientation of the arrow
implies spin.
n = l
(Core shell: Is2)
n = 2
(Valence shell: 2s1)
With unpaired electrons, it is paramagnetic.
n = l
2
(Core shell: Is )
* n = 2
(Valence shell: 2s2)
ii
il
ii
2s
Is
With all electrons paired, it is diamagnetic.
Figure 2-11
The shells represent energy levels an electron can occupy, while orbitals
represent the region in which the electron is likely to be found. An s-orbital has
spherical electron density. The difference between the Is and 2s orbitals lies in
their dimensions. The Is has a smaller radius and has no nodal shells (regions
where the electron has zero probability of existing.)
Spin Pairing and Magnetism
A paramagnetic species is defined as an atom or molecule that contains at least one
unpaired electron. In organic chemistry, paramagnetic compounds are referred
to as radicals. An unpaired electron is an electron that has no second electron
spin paired with it. By convention, the first electron into an orbital is said to
enter in a spin up fashion, thus an unpaired electron is a spin up electron in an
orbital that has no spin down electron. Because the electron is unpaired, it is
susceptible to magnetic fields. If an external magnetic field is applied to a
paramagnetic species, the electron spins align with the field. This induces a
magnetic moment into the compound, thus making it magnetic. This is to say
that paramagnetic species can have magnetism induced into them.
A diamagnetic species is defined as an atom or molecule that contains no unpaired
electrons. All electrons in the atom or molecule are spin-paired, meaning that
every electron that is spin up will have a spin down electron sharing its orbital.
By convention, the first electron into an orbital is said to enter in a spin up
fashion, so the second electron is a spin down electron. Because all of the
electrons are spin-paired, diamagnetic compounds are not susceptible to
magnetic fields. If a magnetic field is applied to a diamagnetic species, half of the
electron spins align with the field, forcing the other half to align against the field.
No magnetic moment is induced into the compound. This is to say that
diamagnetic species cannot have magnetism induced into them.
Electron Density and Orbitals
Atomic orbitals are three-dimensional pictorial representations of the region
where an electron is likely to be found. Because we observe electrons over time,
we look at where the electron usually is, and draw a probability map of the
electron distribution. It's like look at a spinning fan. You cannot see each blade
as they turn, but you can see over time the area where they spin. Figure 2-12
represents the electrondensity of an electronin an s-orbital over time, the orbital
representation, and the probability map based on distancefromthenucleus.
** * v * .
Electron
density map
Orbital
representation
from nucleus
Figure 2-12
The electron density map shows that electrons are found most often near the
nucleus. This is also represented by the graph of the probability of finding an
electron as a function of its distance from the nucleus. The orbital representation
is typically used by chemists to depict the s-orbital. The size of the sphere varies
with the electron density map, depending on the atom. The shape of an orbital is
defined by the distribution of electrons about the nucleus. Ninety-five percent of
the time, the electron can be found within the boundaries of the orbital. We will
look at the s-, p-, and d-orbitals in substantial detail, while f-orbitals will be
considered, but in minimal detail. Most common elements do not have electrons
occupying the f-orbitals.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory Electronic Structure
S-orbitals
S-orbitals result from spherical distribution of the electrons about the nucleus.
Figure 2-13 shows three different s-orbitals, where the principle quantum
number represents the energylevel and the average distance fromthe nucleus.
Is 2s
Figure 2-13
P-orbitals
P-orbitals result from barbell-like distribution of the electrons about the nucleus.
Figure 2-14 shows the three different p-orbitals, each oriented about a different
axis. Electrons are not found at the nucleus in p-orbitals. Absence of electron
density at any point is referred to as a node. P-orbitals have one node at the
nucleus that is part of a nodal plane between the two lobes.
u'-y
D-orbitals
D-orbitals result from double barbell-like distribution of the electrons about the
nucleus. Figure 2-15 shows the five different d-orbitals, each oriented differently.
D-orbitals have two nodal planes, and electrons are not found at the nucleus.
Indxz, dxy, anddyz, lobes lie between theaxes
In dv2 ,,2and d _2, lobes lie on the axis
x - y t.
Figure 2-15
86 The Berkeley Review
F-orbitals
F-orbitals result from triple barbell-like distribution of the electrons about the
nucleus. There are the seven different f-orbitals, each oriented about a different
plane or axis. Electrons are not found at the nucleus. F-orbitals have three nodal
planes. Little chemistry is carried out with the f-orbitals, so they are uncommon.
Collective Orbital View of Energy Levels
Orbitals result from probability calculations, where energetics is considered.
Different orbitals are associated with different energies. Conceptually, we use
orbitals to show the energy and most frequent location of an electron. Figure 2-
16 shows orbitals with relative size emphasized, from lowest energy levels to the
higher energy levels. Levels are spaced according to energetics. Arrows
represent electrons and their spin orientation. Because there are twelve electrons
shown, the element represented is magnesium.
2pxOO 2?yCf>
The upward single-headed
arrow represents an electron in
the Is orbital with its magnetic
spin orientation up.
2s
Is
Figure 2-16
Sd^
2P,
The downward single-headed
arrow represents an electron in
the Is orbital with its magnetic
spin orientation down.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Electrons within an element fill the energy levels starting from the lowest energy.
This means that the electrons within an element follow a specific filling order.
There are some rules to consider when looking at electronic configurations.
Pauli's exclusion principle: No two electrons can have the same set of quantum
numbers (n, /, n\, ms).
Hund's rule: Electrons completely fill lower energy levels before starting to fill
higher energy levels. Ina degenerate setoforbitals, electrons singly occupy each
orbital before a second electron pairs up within the same orbital. Figure 2-17
demonstrates Hund's rule.
Not allowed, because electrons fill
different orbitals before pairing up.
Allowed, because electrons have filled
each orbital singly without pairing.
Figure 2-17
Aufbau principle: Electrons are added one by one to the shells, startingwith the
lowest energylevel, and then into sequentially increasing energy levels. The
numbers in Figure2-18 represent the sequenceof addition for the electrons.
2p

2s
Is
i
o
i
0
r
9
Figure 2-18
Electronic Configuration
Electronicconfigurations are shorthand notation for the electrons present in an
atom and their energylevels. Electrons fill according to a set pattern, one that is
derived from the Aufbau principle chart shown in Figure 2-19. Bydrawing the
table and then sequentially following the arrows, the orbital filling sequence is
generated. Couple this information with the orbital occupancy, and electronic
configurations are seen to be systematic. For instance, the first line shows that
the Is level fills first, to an occupancy of two electrons. The next arrow crosses
through the 2s level, so the 2s orbital is filled next. Fromhere the third arrow
shows that the 2plevelfollowed thenby the 3slevelare filled. It continuesdown
the chart. The first break from numerical sequencing comes when the 4s level is
filled before the 3d level, despite the fact that the perimeter of the 3d level is
closer to the nucleus than the perimeter of the 4s orbital. The reason for the
apparent discrepancy is that the energy of the level is based on an average
position of the electron, not the extreme position. Ionizing electrons are not
removed from the atom in reverse order, however. Outer shell electrons are
always removedfirst when forming cations. Figure2.8shows only the first five
arrows, but the pattern continues. You should also be able to deduce the
electronic configurations for neutral atoms, cations, anions, excited states, and
any exceptions to the rules.
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry Atomic Theory Electronic Structure
1: Fills the Is orbital to: Is2
2: Fills the 2s orbital to: 2s2
3: Fills the 2p then 3s orbitals to: 2p63s2
4: Fills the 3p then 4s orbitals to: 3p64s2
5g 5: Fills the 3d, 4p then 5s orbitals to: 3d104p65s2
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-19 shows that the electrons fill according the orbitals listed by the
sequential arrows. It works by following the arrows sequentially. Arrow 1 goes
through Is, so the Is orbital is filled first. Arrow 2 goes through 2s, so the 2s
orbital is filled next. Arrow 3 goes first through 2p, then through 3s, so the 2p
orbital is filled after the 2s orbital, followed by the filling of the 3s orbital. The
process is repeated arrow after arrow until all of the electrons have been
accounted for. Although g-, h-, and j-orbitals exist in theory, the periodic table
contains no elements that have electrons in either g-, h-, or j-orbitals.
Example 2.9
The electronic configuration for manganese is which of the following?
A. ls22s22p63s23p63d7
B. ls22s22p63s23p63d5
C. ls22s22p63s23p64s23d5
D. ls22s22p63s23p64s23d7
Solution
Manganese (Mn) is element number 25, so a neutral manganese atom must
contain 25 electrons. This eliminates choice B (only 23 electrons) and choice D
(containing 27 electrons). Because the 4s orbital is filled before the 3d orbital,
choice A is eliminated. This leaves only choice C.
Example 2.10
An element in which column of the periodic table is diamagnetic?
A. Column 1 (alkali metals)
B. Column 2 (alkaline earth metals)
C. Column 6 (chalcogens)
D. Column 7 (halogens)
Solution
A diamagnetic compound has all of its electrons spin-paired. This means that
there must be an even number of electrons in the element. Based on the even
number constraint, choices A and D are eliminated. Column 6 elements (the
chalcogens) have a valence electronic configuration of ns2np4, which results in
two p-orbitals having only one electron each. This means that chalcogens are
paramagnetic, eliminating choice C. This means that the alkaline earth metals in
column 2 arediamagnetic, with a valance electronic configuration of ns2. The
alkaline earth metals and the noble gases are diamagnetic. The best answer is
choice B.
Copyrightby The Berkeley Review 89 Exclusive MCAT Preparation
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Electronic Structure
Electronic configurations mayinclude abbreviations based on filled coreshells.
Afilled coreis represented by the noble gas that contains thosesame electrons.
For example, aluminum (Al) is ls22s22p63s23p1, which isequivalent todrawing
it as [Ne]3s23p1. This shorthand is typical. In addition, you must be aware of
somecommon exceptions to the Aufbau principle. Half-filled d-shell and filled
d-shell stability results when a singleelectronis elevated from a lower energy
level that is paired (usually thes-orbital) toyield evendistribution of electrons in
the d-level. Half-filled d-shell stability is seen with chromium, molybdenum,
and tungsten. Filled d-shell stability isseen withcopper, silver, gold, andsome
sayplatinum. Figure 2-20 shows theelectronic configurations for chromium and
copper, exceptions to the Aufbaufilling order.
Half-filled d-shell stability inchromium: [Ar]4s13d5 rather than [Arl4s23d4
Filled d-shell stability in copper: [Ar]4s13d10 rather than [Ar}4s23d9
Figure 2-20
Elements in the samecolumn of the periodic tablehave similarvalenceshellsand
electronic configurations, with thenotabledifference beingthe shell number. For
instance, Na is{Ne^s1 and potassium is [Ar^s1. This means that alkali metals
are s1 metals, and exhibit similar chemical behavior, given their common
tendency to lose one electron. Blocks in the periodic table are named after the
last electron in the electronic configuration. Alkali metals fall into the s-block by
virtue of their last electron in an s-orbital. So far, we have viewed ground state
electronic configurations. Groundstateelectronic configurations occurwhenthe
electrons occupy the orbitals in the exact predicted order, starting from least
energetic and filling orbitals that are progressively of higher energy. Anexcited
state electronic configuration occurs when any electron absorbs energy and
moves to a higher energy level than it normally occupies in the ground state.
The absorption and emission of energy, usually in the form of a photon, is
associated with the excitation and relaxation of an electron, as it moves between
the ground and excited states.
Example 2.11
Which electronic configuration represents an excited state?
A. F:ls22s22p6
B. N:ls22s22p3
C. He: Is2
D. Liils^p1
Solution
An excited state electronicconfiguration does not followenergetic sequence. An
excited state has at least one electron in an energy level higher than what is
drawn as standard for the ground state. Besure not to confuse an ion (either
cation or anion) with an excited state. A cation is an atom that has a deficit of at
least one electron and thus carries a positive charge. An anion is an atom that
has an excess of at least one electron and thus carries a negative charge. In this
question, choice Ais a fluorine anion(itcontains an extraelectron), and choices B
andCarenormal. For Li, it should havels22s1 as a groundstate. The electronic
configuration given in the answer choice has the last electron in a 2p-orbital,
which is of higher energy than the ground state 2s. This makes choice D the
correct answer, because it is an excited state.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Quantum Numbers
Quantum numbers are a set of four numbers that uniquely describe an electron
within an atom. Four factors describe an electron: the shell, the orbital, the
orientationof the orbital, and the alignment of the magnetic field resultingfrom
the precessing electron. These terms translate into the quantum numbers. A
fundamental rule with quantum numbers is that no two electrons can have the
same set of quantum numbers (this is the Pauli exclusion principle). Quantum
numbers are used to describe the motion and location of each electron in an
element. Quantum numbers describe the shape of an electron's cloud, the
momentum of the electron, the orientation of the electron density, and the
rotation of the electron about its axis. There are four quantum numbers used to
describe an electron; n, /, m/, and ms. There are also rules that must be followed
when assigning quantum numbers to an element. Each number has its specific
guidelines, which often depend on the other quantum numbers. Table 2.2 lists
the rules for assigning quantum numbers.
Quantum # Rules
n
Principle (n): Describes the shell (average radius of the
electron from the nucleus and its energy level) in which the
electron resides. It can be any integer greater than zero.
/
Angular Momentum (/): Describes the orbital (shape of the
electron cloud formed by the orbiting electron) in which the
electron resides. It must be less than the value of n. It can be
a positive value or zero.
i*V
Magnetic (mi): Describes the orientation of the orbital about a
plane or axis. It can be any value in the range from negative 1
to positive 1, including zero.
ms
Spin (ms): Describes the rotation (counterclockwise or
clockwise) of the electron about its axis. It can be either
positive or negative one-half (spin up or spin down).
Table 2.2
Table 2.3 shows the correlation of quantum numbers to electrons within an atom.
n /
l
ms orbital
total
electrons
Description
1 0 0
+ 1
2
Is 2 1st lsi
2 0 0
+ 1
2
2s 2 2st 2si
2 1 1,0
+ 1
2
2p
6 2pxt 2pvT 2pzT 2px42pvi 2pz!
3 0 0
+ 1
2
3s 2 3st 3si
3 1 1,0
+ 1
2
3p 6 3pxT 3pvt 3pzt 3pxl 3pv43pz4
4 0 0
+ 1
2
4s 2 4sT 4s!
3 2 2, 1, 0
+ 1
2
3d 10
3dxyt 3dxzT 3dyzt 3dx2. y2t 3dz2t
3dxv! 3dxzl 3dvz! 3dx2. v24 3dz2i
Table 2.3
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
When assigning quantum numbers toanelectron, you must keep in mind that
"no two electrons orbiting the nucleus of the same element have the same set of
quantum numbers." To assign quantum numbers, you must first describe the
electron in words. Consider an electron in the third shell. There are eighteen
electrons held in the third shell, so we need to be more specific. An electron in
the third shellcanbe in eitheran s-orbital, a p-orbital, or a d-orbital. For sakeof
argument, let's consider a p-orbital. There are three p-orbitals, each capable of
holding two electrons, sothere are six electrons that can befound inthe 3plevel.
Weneed to be morespecific. Each p-orbital has a different orientationin space
(px along the x-axis, py along the y-axis, and pz along the z-axis). For sake of
argument, let's consider the p-orbital aligned onthe x-axis. This isthe px-orbital.
Two electrons can be found within a 3px-orbital, one with a magnetic spin
moment upward and the other with a magnetic spin moment downward. By
describing the electron as spin up, the electron is unique. There is only one
electron that canbespinup withina 3px-orbital. It tookfour terms tonarrowit
down to a unique electron, hence there are four quantum numbers. Let's
consider that same electron:
A3px-spin up electron has the following description in words and therefore
these corresponding quantum numbers:
therefore, the principle quantum number (n) is 3
therefore, the angular momentumquantum number (/)is 1
therefore, the magnetic quantum number (ny) is -1
Third shell
P-orbital
X-axis orientation
Spin up
therefore, the magnetic spin quantum number (ms) is +^
The quantumnumbers for the electron are: n=3,/ =1, ny =-1, and ms =+A. The
skill youmust (re)develop is getting the four numbers quickly. Determining n
and / is relatively easy. The n-value is theshell number, so it is prettymucha
given. The /-value is theorbital. Orbitals increase from s top tod tof, andsoon,
and the /-values increase from 0 to 1 to 2 to 3 and so on. An /-value of 0
corresponds to an s-orbital, an /-value of 1 corresponds to a p-orbital, and so
forth. Thechallenging part is finding the ny and ms values. In all likelihood,
you have no idea why x-axis orientation leads to the conclusion that ny = -1.
That's just thewaythey do it. Just as xcomes before y and z in the alphabet, -1
comes before 0and +1 numerically. Toget the ny and ms values, you must draw
out theenergy levels. The assignment of ny values for the p-orbitals is shownin
Figure 2-21.
Px
ny = -l
Py
m/ = 0
Figure 2-21
Pz
ny = +l
Chemistry convention tells us to number the different orbitals from -/ to +/
sequentially. The middle orbital always has annyvalue of0. This is true for all
orbitals. The assignment ofnyvalues for thed-orbitals is shownin Figure 2-22.
dxy
m/ = -2
dxz
ny = -l
92
dyz
m/ = 0
Figure 2-22
dx2.y2
ny = +l
dz2
ny = +2
The Berkeley Review
Ueneral ChemiStry Atomic Theory Electronic Structure
Electrons are filled into orbitals one at a time from left to right, with spin up
going in first, followed by spin down once each degenerate orbital has one
electron. Filling spinup first is a convention anddoes not represent thephysical
reality of electrons. When an electron is spin up in an orbital, it has a spin
quantum number (ms) of +1/2- When anelectron isspin down inanorbital, it
has ms =-1/2. For the 3px spin upelectron, the filling isshown inFigure 2-23.
Px Py pz
ny = -1 ny = 0 ny = +1
Figure 2-23
Theelectronfalls into the first p-orbital, so ny is -1. Theelectronis spin up, so ms
is+V*
To be able to apply these quantum numbers, keep in mind that each electron
within an element has a unique set of quantum numbers. An electron can be
described in terms of words (such as an electron in the second energy level in a
p-orbital with x-orientationand spin up is a 2px T) or in terms of numbers (n = 2,
/ = 1, ny = -1, mg = +V2)- Quantum numbers followarbitrary guidelines. For
instance, the electron in a p-orbital oriented on the z-axis in the third shell with
spin up has the quantum numbers n = 3 (for the third shell), / = 1 (because the
electron is inap-orbital), ny =+1 (for the z-axis), and ms =+I/2 (for spin up).
Example 2.12
All of the following are true of an electron EXCEPT:
A. electrons in a lower energy level can absorb energy and elevate to a higher
energy.
B. exactly the same amount of energy is emitted when an electron relaxes
between the same states.
C. there are many energy absorptions possible, but they are always of a
precisely known energy.
D. an electron in the n = 1 energy level can be found at an infinite number of
distances from the nucleus.
Solution
Our model of atoms is a positive concentric nucleus surrounded by orbiting
electrons. These electrons may occupy only specific orbits, which have distinct
energies and pathways. According to this description, electrons in a lower
energy level can absorb energy and elevate to a higher energy, so choice A is
valid and thus eliminated. According to this description, exactly the same
amount of energy is emitted when an electron relaxes between the same states, so
choice B is valid and thus eliminated. According to this description, there are
many possible energy absorptions possible, but they are always of an exact
energy, so choice C is valid and thus eliminated. According to this description,
an electron in the n = 1 energy level is found at only one distance from the
nucleus, not at an infinite number of distances. This makes choice D invalid, and
thus the best answer.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Periodic Trends
PenodH
The Periodic Table
The periodic table isorganized according to valence electrons. Figure 2-24 shows
theshell of the periodic table. The blocks arenamed after the last electron that
fills each respective atom in that section of the periodic chart. For instance, an
element in the D-block has its last electron (a valence electron) in a d-orbital.
Understanding the blocks helps tounderstand theperiodic trends. The S-block
comprises only metals. The D-block houses the transition metals, where periodic
behavior is not necessarily an obvious trend. The P-block includes metals and
metalloids in its left side and non-metals in its right side.
1
1
i i i i
......
blnck
: :p block :
i i i i
i i i
' ' ' Deblock! _
i i i i _^^^^r^

1^^^^^

i 1
i i
i i i
i i i
t-block-
Figure 2-24
General Elemental Periodic Trends
Periodic trends refer to any chemical behavior that can be matched to a trend
within the periodic table. All chemical properties depend on the valence
electrons, so periodic trends ultimately growout of valence electrontrends. Any
feature of an atomthat affects how tightly a valence electron is held contributes
toperiodic trends. The two major factors arethe effective nuclear charge andthe
valence shell, bothof whichsupport periodic trends. Theyare listedbelow:
O As you move from left to right across a period in the periodic table, the
effective nuclear charge increases.
Asyou descend a family in the periodic table, the valence shell increases, so
the distance of the valence electron from the nucleus of the atom increases.
The effective nuclear charge(Zeff) is the net charge exerted upon the outermost
electrons (valenceelectrons). This value is empirically determined and takes into
account attraction due to the protons, shielding due to the neutrons, and
repulsion due to the core electrons. It is generally approximated as the proton
charge minus the electron repulsion. The effective nuclear charge affects how
tightly the electrons are held, which affects the ionization energy, the electron
affinity, and the atomic radius. The effective nuclear charge increases across a
row in the periodic table. Although we generally approximate the effective
nuclear charge, it canbe derived from the ionization energy. This procedure
assumes that ionization energyis purely related to the effective nuclear charge,
and failsto account for shell stability, particularlyfilled-octet stability.
The Berkeley Review
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Periodic Trends
Example 2.13
Which ofthefollowing atoms hastheGREATEST effective nuclear charge?
A. Carbon
B. Fluorine
C. Sodium
D. Sulfur
Solution
Effective nuclear charge increases from left to right in the periodic table, so the
element in the column that is farthest to the right has the greatest effective
nuclear charge. Fluorine is to the right of carbon within the same period, so it
has a greater effective nuclear charge (Zeff). Choice Ais eliminated. Sodium is in
the first column of the periodic table, so it has the smallest effective nuclear
charge. Choice C is eliminated. The correct answer is choice B.
Periodic trends depend on both the effective nuclear charge (affecting the
strength with which valence electrons are held) and the valence shell (affecting
the distance between electrons and the nucleus.) Periodic trends as we move
from left to right across a row of the periodic table (period) are attributed to
increasing effective nuclear charge. Periodic trends as we move up through a
column of the periodic table (family) are attributed to decreasing valence shells.
The net result of these two effects is represented by the bold arrow shown in
Figure 2-24. As we move along the pathway of the bold arrow, the following
general atomic trends are observed:
O The atomic size decreases (the radius of the atom is defined as the distance
from the center of the nucleus to the exterior of the valence electron cloud).
@ The ionization energy increases (the energy required to remove the
outermost electron from the atom).
The electron affinity increases (the energetics associated with an atom
gaining an electron).
0 The electronegativity increases (the tendency to share an electron with
another atom within a bond).
Example 2.14
Which sequence accurately lists increasing ionization energy of the atoms?
A. Br>F>Cl>Te
B. 0>S>P>Br
C. Br<F<Cl<Te
D. 0<S<P<Br
Solution
The appearance of fluorine in the middle of a trend should get your attention as a
wrong answer, eliminating choices A and C. Oxygen is directly above sulfur in
the periodic table, so oxygen has a greater ionization energy than sulfur. The
correct answer is choice B.
None of the trends is uniform or perfect. The effective nuclear charge does not
uniformly increase when we scan across a period. There are.deviations insome
trends. One of the more common deviations is seen with electron affinity and
ionization energy, due to half-filled stability and filled-shell stability. For
instance, nitrogen has a greater ionization energy than oxygen, because upon
ionization, nitrogen loses its half-filled p-shell. On the contrary, oxygen gains
half-filled stability upon being ionized. The test writers may not prey onthese
exceptions, but they certainly can emphasize the conceptual aspects by looking at
the factors that affect periodicity. For instance, rather than ask about atomic
radius, theymayaskabout ionic radius.
As a general rule, cations are smaller than neutral atoms, because the loss of
electrons allows the atom to compact more tightly, given the diminished
repulsion associated with the missing electrons. As a general rule, anions are
larger than neutral atoms, because the gain of electrons causes the atom to
expand, given the enhanced repulsion associated with the additional electrons.
Valance electrons account for the size of anions, neutral atoms, and cations.
Extra electrons repel and thus increase the atomic size ofananion, while aloss of
electrons results in less repulsionand a smaller radius for a cation.
Example 2.15
When strontium (Sr) becomes an ion, what is observed?
A. It forms a +1 cation that is smaller than Sr.
B. It forms a +1 cation that is larger than Sr.
C. It forms a +2 cation that is smaller than Sr.
D. It forms a +2 cation that is larger than Sr.
Solution
ChoiceCis correct Strontium (Sr) is found in the secondcolumnof the periodic
table. Alkaline earth metals lose two electrons to gain octet stability. As such,
strontiumcarries a +2 charge, so choices A and Bare eliminated. Cations are
smaller than neutral species, because there are fewer electrons and thus less
repulsion. Thismakeschoice C the best answer.
Example 2.16
Which of the following ions is the LARGEST?
A. Cl-
B. Na+
C. K+
D. Br"
Solution
Within a period, anions are larger than cations, so chloride (CI") is larger than
sodium cation,and bromide (Br") is larger than potassium cation. This eliminates
choices Band C. Because Bris lower in the periodic table than CI, Br is larger as
a neutral atom than CI. This same trend holds true, if both Br and CI pick up the
same number of electrons. In this case, both bromide and chloride picked up one
electron each, so bromide, with its electrons in a higher valence shell, is larger
than chloride. The answer is choice D.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Atomic Radius
The atomic radiusis thedistance from thecenter of thenucleus totheedgeof the
valence cloud of electrons. However, most of the empirical measurements of
atomic radii that exist are not from electron density maps, but instead are
determined by dividing bond distances between like atoms in half. Because of
overlapping electron clouds, this method does not generate a true atomic radius,
but rather a covalent bonding radius. However, it does lead to internally
consistent values. Atomic radii are measured in units of picometers. The radius
of an atom decreases as a family in the periodic table is ascended, because the
number of electronic shells decreases. The radius of an atom decreases as a
period in the periodic table is scanned from left to right, because the effective
nuclear charge increases. The trend is fairly uniform from left to right, with no
distinct exceptions due to half-filled stability.
Figure 2-25 lists the atomic radii of the first twenty elements. As a general
observation, within a period, atomic radius decreases as the atomic number
increases.
2.01
1.9
1.8
1.7-
1.6-
1.5"
-< 1-4'
2
y i.n
S
2 1.01
<
0.91
0.8
0.7-
0.6-
0.5
0.4-
0.3-
0.2-
0.1
1.2-
H
Li
Be
N
He
Na
Mg
O
Ne
Figure 2-25
Al
Si
T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1TTTTTi 1 r
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Atomic Number
K
Ca
CI
Ar
Periodic Trends
The sudden increase in size from He to Li, Ne to Na, and Ar to K is attributed to
the expanded valance shell associated with the additional electron. For instance,
the electronic configuration of Ar is ls22s22p63s23p6, while K is
ls22s22p63s23p64s1. The fourth shell (n =4quantum level) has a larger radius,
sothepotassium atom is larger than the argon atom. Table 2-25 terminates at
element 20, becausefromelement 21 to 30 the radius stays roughly equal, since
theelectrons are being added tothe third quantum level (3d orbitals). This does
not affect the radius of the electronshell drastically. The transition metals have
very similar atomic radii, although they arenot exactly equal.
The trend isconsistent through theelements listed, withtheexception of helium
and hydrogen. The larger atomic radius ofhelium when compared tohydrogen
goes against the discussed trend ineffective nuclear charge. The best explanation
for this deviation involves both the shielding effect of the two neutrons in the
helium nucleus and the electron repulsion experiencedby electrons in the first
quantum level where they are closer together than in any other quantum shell.
In other words, the electrons in the n = 1 level repel one another more than
electrons in the n = 2 level, because they have the smallest interelectronic
distance. This repulsion forces the electrons away from one another, resulting in
a greater area being occupied by the orbiting electrons. Keep in mind that the
electrons, notprotons orneutrons, define the radius ofanatom. The atomic radii
of atoms may beused topredict the bond length within molecules. The smaller
the atomic radius of the atom, the shorter the bond it forms when sharing
electrons with another atom. Shorter bonds are stronger bonds, so there exists a
correlation between anelement's location in the periodictableand the strengthof
the bonds that element can form.
Example 2.17
Which of the following elements has the LARGEST atomicradius?
A. O
B. F
C. Ne
D. Na
Solution
This is just a simple case of reading from the periodic table. The element in the
lowest and furthest left positionis sodium, Na, so choiceD is the best answer.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Ionization Energy
Ionization is the process of losing an electron from the valence shell. When an
atom is ionized, it becomes a cation. The energy required to remove the outer
most electron fromthe valence shell is knownas the ionization energy. Ageneric
reaction for ionization is shownbelow, whereErepresents anyelement.
E(g) E+(g) + e"
The energy required to carry out ionization depends on the attraction of the
electron to the nucleus, its distance from the nucleus, and the stability of its
electronic configuration. Because several factors influence ionization energy, it is
too difficult to calculate, and thus it is generallyevaluated in a qualitative sense.
Figure 2-26 lists the ionization energies of the first twenty elements in the
periodic table. Within a row in the periodic table, ionization energy increases as
the atomicnumber increases. Thisis a general trend, but with some exceptions.
2500
2400
2300
2200
2100
2000
1900
1800
^ 1700
o 1600 \
a
^ 1500
^1400
oS 1300
c
" 1200
5
J3 1100
.a
1000
900
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
He
H
Be
Li
12 3 4 5 6
Ne
Ar
N
O
CI
Si
Mg
Al
Ca
Na
K
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Atomic Number
Figure 2-26
Periodic Trends
Ionization energy for anelement generally increases asyou move left toright in
the periodic table. Notable exceptions occur when there ishalf-filled stability of
the energy level and when there is an s2-shell. Ionization energy for an element
increases asyou ascend a column inthe periodic table, with the element higher
up the column having the greater ionization energy. This is because as the
numberof electronic shells decreases, the proximity of an electron to the nucleus
increases, and thus the attraction to the nucleus increases. The sudden decrease
in ionization energy from Heto Li, Ne to Na, and Ar to Kis attributed to the
expanded valance shell (and thus reduced attraction) associated with the
additional electron. For instance, the electronic configuration of Ne isls22s22p6,
while for Nait is ls22s22p63s1. The third shell (n=3quantum level) hasa larger
radius, so the sodium atomcan more easily lose an electron than the neon atom
(with its outermost electron being more attracted by the nucleus). As with
atomic radius, from element 21 to element 30 the ionization energy remains
roughly equal, because the electrons are being removed from the same 4s-orbital.
The effective nuclear charge onthe4s-electrons does not change drastically. The
exceptions in the transition metals are also due tohalf-filled and filled d-shell
stability.
Ionization energy may beused topredict the oxidation and reduction potentials
of an atom. The easier it is to ionize an atom, the easier it is to oxidize that atom
by one electron. This leads to a larger (more positive) value for the oxidation
potential. Alow ionization energy for anatom correlates toa smaller (or more
negative) value for the reduction potential ofthecation thatisformed.
Example 2.18
Why is the ionization energy of beryllium greater than the ionization energy of
lithium?
A. Behas a larger principalquantumnumber than Li.
B. Li has a greater density than Be.
C. Be has a larger effective nuclear chargethan Li.
D. Li has a bigger proton count than Be.
Solution
Both beryllium and lithium have their last electron (the electron lost upon
ionization) in a 2s-orbital. This eliminates choice A, because the principle
quantum number (valence shell) is the same for both. Lithium is less massive
andlarger than beryllium, soit is less dense. This eliminates choice B. Lithium
has three protons, while beryllium has four, so choice D is a false statement.
Only choice Cremains. The difference between lithium andberyllium lies inthe
effective nuclear charge. The beryllium nucleus has four protons, while the
lithiumnucleus has onlythreeprotons. Thegreaternumber of protons increases
the attractive pull on the electron. Because the pull is greater, the effective
nuclear charge isgreater. The greater the effective nuclear charge, thegreater the
ionization energy; therefore beryllium has a greater ionization energy than
lithium,because it has a greatereffective nuclearchargethan lithium.
TheMCAT testwriters design questions toencompass logical analysis. Totest a
concept andgenerate the illusion ofunfamiliarity, they can make subtle changes
to a question. The second ionization energy can be tested in a question.
Consider the periodic trends for elements, but remember that when youevaluate
ions, reading from theperiodic table doesnot always givetheright answer.
General ChemiStry Atomic Theory Periodic Trends
Example 2.19
How does the ionization energy of sodium compare to the ionization energy of
magnesium?
A. Na has a greater ionization energy, because it has the greater effective
nuclear charge.
B. Mg has a greater ionization energy, because it has the greater effective
nuclear charge.
C. Na has a greater ionization energy, because it has the greater electronic shell.
D. Mg has a greater ionization energy, because it has the greater electronic shell.
Solution
This is just a simple case of reading from the periodic table. Both magnesium
and sodium are in the same period (third), so they have the same valence shell.
This eliminates choices C and D. The element that is furthest to the right in the
periodic table is magnesium, so magnesium has the greater ionization energy.
Choice B is the best answer, because Na and Mg are in the same row of the
periodic table, where effective nuclear charge is the reasoning behind periodic
differences.
Example 2.20
How does the second ionization energy of sodium compare to the second
ionization energy of magnesium?
A. Na has a greater second ionization energy, because it has the greater effective
nuclear charge.
B. Mg has a greater second ionization energy, because it has the greater
effective nuclear charge.
C. Na has a greater second ionization energy, because it has the smaller
electronic shell.
D. Mg has a greater second ionization energy, because it has the smaller
electronic shell.
Solution
The second ionization energy is the energy associated with losing the second
electron, which takes the element from +1 to +2. For sodium, an octet is obtained
by losing the first electron, thus the second electron lost drastically destabilizes
the electron cloud. This makes the second ionization energy very high. For
magnesium, an octet is obtained by losing the first and second electrons, thus the
second electron lost stabilizes the electron cloud. This makes the second
ionization energy very low for magnesium, eliminating choices Band D. Because
we are talking about shell stability, the best (albeit not perfect) answer is choice
C.
Na+ Na2+ Mg+ Mg2*
ls22s22p6 ls22s22p5 ls22s22p63s1 ls22s22p6
The electronic configurations show that sodium loses octet stability upon its
second ionization, while magnesium gains octet stability upon its second
ionization.
By asking about the second ionization energy, the concept rather than the
memorization of periodic trends is tested.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Periodic Trends
Electron Affinity
Electron affinity measures thetendency of an element to gainan electron. It is a
measurement of theenergy absorbed or released when an electron is added into
the valenceshell. Electron affinity can be either negative or positive, meaning
that gaining an electron canbe either exothermic or endothermic. The generic
reaction for electron affinity is shownbelow, where Erepresents any element:
E(g) + e- E"(g)
Figure 2-27 lists the electron affinity for the first twenty elements in the periodic
table. Within a rowin the periodic table, electron affinity correlates with atomic
number, but there are some extremespikes in the trend.
250
225
200
175
150
125
^ 10
o 75
,*
fr
50
25
I
< -25
Jj "50
u
jaj -75
w
-100
-125
-150
-175
-200
-225
-250
-275
-300
-325
-350
Be
He
N
Li
H
12 3 4 5 6 7
Mg
Ca
Ne
Ar
Na
Al
K
Si
O
CI
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Atomic Number
Figure 2-27
102
The Berkeley Review
The biggest deviations are attributed to the stability associated with a filled s-
shell. The graph may seem confusing at first, because the lowest numbers have
the greatest electron affinity. The numbers listed are energy released upon
gaining an electron, so a negative number refers to an element with a high
electron affinity. Thesudden increase in electron affinity (energy released upon
gaining an electron) from Be to B, Mg to Al, and Ca to Ga is attributed to the
instability ofone electron in the p-level. For instance, upon gaining anelectron,
the electronic configuration of Mg goes from ls22s22p3s2 to ls22s22p63s23p1,
which creates a new energy level, and is unfavorable. Upon gaining an electron,
the electronic configuration ofNagoes from ls22s22p^3s1 tols22s22p^3s2, which
fills the s-shell and generates stability. From element 21 to element 30, electron
affinity is erratic, because the d-shell stability is changing. No trend for electron
affinity is evident in the transition metals.
Like ionization energy, the energy associated with electron affinity depends on
the attraction of an electron to the nucleus, its distance from the nucleus, and the
stability of its electronic configuration. Because several factors influence electron
affinity, the trend across a period is erratic. In general, an element releases more
energy upon gaining an electron as you move left to right in the periodic table.
Drastic exceptions occur when there is half-filled stability of the energy level and
when there is an s2-shell. In general, anelement also releases more energy upon
gaining an electron as you ascend a column in the periodic table. This is because
as the number of electronic shells decreases, the new electron is closer to the
nucleus, and thus the attraction to the nucleus increases.
Example 2.21
The electron affinity of an element is MOST similar to which of the following
properties?
A. Electronegativity
B. Ionization energy
C. Oxidation potential
D. Reduction potential
Solution
The electron affinity for an element measures the energy associated with the gain
of one electron. Choices B and C are out, because both of them deal with losing
an electron. Electronegativity is not the best choice, because it deals with the
sharing of electrons in a bond, not the gaining of an electron. The best answer is
choice D, reduction potential, because reduction is the gain of an electron. An
element with a high reduction potential has a high electron affinity.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Periodic Trends
Electronegativity
Electronegativity is a measure of an atom's tendency to gain and retain an
electron from a neighboring atom within a bond. It is formally defined as the
ability of an atom to attract towards itself the electrons in a chemical bond.
Electronegativity isrelated toboth ionization energy andelectron affinity. This
is to say that the electronegativity of an atom depends on both the electron
affinity andionization energy ofthat atom. Linus Pauling generated a method to
measure electronegativity, and created a scale, referred to as the Pauling scale.
Electronegativity ismeasured ona relative scale, with thevalues measured from
the electron distribution within a bond. The standards are 0.9 for sodium and 4.0
for fluorine, and all other values are based on dipole moments associated with
bonds to these atoms.
The electronegativity of an atom increases as the periodic table is ascended,
because as the number of electronic shells decreases, causing the attraction to the
nucleus to increase. The electronegativity of an atom increases as the periodic
table is scanned fromleft to right, because the effectivenuclear charge increases.
The trend in electronegativity is very clean, showingno exceptions. Figure2-28
reflects these trends.
(8
60
O)
c
2
u
W
4.0
3.8
3.6
3.4
3.2
3.0
2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.01
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
O
N CI
H
Si
Be Al
Mg
Li
Ca
Na
K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Atomic Number
Figure 2-28
104
The Berkeley Review
When the electronegativity values of the two atoms within a bond are close, the
bond is covalent. When the electronegativity difference exceeds 2.0, then the
bond is ionic. Figure 2-29 represents the electron clouds and shows the relative
electronegativity of the atoms involved in an ionic bond and a covalent bond.
Unequal sharing Relatively equal sharing
(AEneg =2.1, .\ the bond is ionic) (AEneg =1.0, .*. the bond is covalent)
Figure 2-29
Example 2.22
Electronegativitydifference between bonded atoms is BEST determined by:
A. measuring the bond length.
B. measuring the dipole moment.
C. calculating the difference in electron affinity between the two elements.
D. calculating the difference in ionization energy between the two elements.
Solution
Because electronegativity measures the tendency to share an electron, and the
dipole moment represents the degree of sharing between two atoms in a bond,
the best answer is choice B. Electronegativity is related to both electron affinity
and ionization energy, so electronegativity can be estimated knowing both
ionizationenergy and electron affinity, but not just one of them. Choices C and
D are eliminated, because you need both to approximate the electronegativity
difference. Choice A is eliminated, because bond length dictates bond strength,
but not necessarily the relative electronegativity. This question may seem
challenging, because the terms are interconnected.
Example 2.23
The trend in electronegativity increases with which of the following?
A. Ionization energy
B. Atomic radius
C. Atomic number
D. Number of valence electrons
Solution
Thisquestion is close to verbatimin reproducing a questionfrom a recent MCAT
exam. Electronegativity follows a cleanly predictable trend, so choice A is
eliminated, because ionization energy follows an erratic trend. Electronegativity
increases as atomic radius decreases, so choice Bis eliminated. Increasing atomic
number sounds tempting; but when a new shell is formed, electronegativity
drops, while atomic number increases. This can be seen in going from fluorine to
neon to sodium. This eliminates choice C. As the number of valence electrons
increases, we are moving from left to right across a period of the periodic table.
Increasing valence electrons does not affect shells. Fromleft to right in a period,
electronegativity increases. This makes choice D the best answer.
Periodic Families (Groups)
Columns in the periodic table (families) contain elements that have the same
valence electron count and thus show similar chemical reactivity. They are
referred to as groups of elements. Someof the groups you should know are the
alkali metals (first column of H through Fr), the alkaline earth metals (second
column of Be through Ra), the chalcogens (sixth column of O through Po), the
halogens (theseventh column of FthroughAt), and the noble gases (last column
of He through Rn). The last column of elements is observed to be generally non-
reactive. They are the inert gases. The MCAT test-writers have been known to
include a great deal of excess information in the passage. It is up to you to
recognize what is pertinent and what is not.
Alkali Metals (Group I)
Alkali metals are in the first column of the periodic table. Included are lithium,
sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, francium, and to some extent hydrogen.
Hydrogen can act as both a halogenand an alkali metal. The common feature is
that their valence shell is ns1, where n is any integer greater thanone. Asneutral
elements, they are strong reducing agents, because they readily lose an electron
to become a +1 cation (which gives them a complete octet). They are some of the
strongest reducing agents (most favorably oxidized). They react with any
compound or element that has even a slight electron affinity. Their reactivity
increases as you descend the column, mostly because it is easier to lose an s-
electron from a shell that is further out (greater n quantum number). Their
cation form is very soluble in water with almost any anion.
All alkali metals react favorably with water to form the metal hydroxide and
hydrogen gas. Reaction 2.1 is the generic reaction:
2 Mfe) + 2 H20(g; ~ 2 MOH(aq) + H2(g)
Reaction 2.1
The oxides they form are variable with the metal. Lithium forms an oxide
(M2O), sodium forms a peroxide (M2O2), and potassium, rubidium, and cesium
form superoxides (MO2). Reactions 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, and 2.6 show the oxidation
reactions of the alkali metals:
4 U(s) + 02(g) 2 Li20(s)
Reaction 2.2
2Na(s) + 02(g) Na2C2(s;
Reaction 2.3
K(s) + 02(g) K02(s)
Reaction 2.4
Rb(s) + 02(g) Rb02fs)
Reaction 2.5
Cs(s) + 02(g) Cs02(s)
Reaction 2.6
Besides reacting with oxygen, alkali metals are oxidized by halogens, nitrogen,
and hydrogen. Reactions 2.7,2.8, and 2.9are a sampling of these reactions.
6Li(s) + N2(g) 2Li3N(s)
Reaction 2.7
2Na(s) + H2(g) 2NaH(s)
Reaction 2.8
2Cs(s) + Br2(l) 2CsBr(s)
Reaction 2.9
Example 2.24
What happens to sodium metal when it is added to water?
A. It is oxidized to yield sodium hydroxide, which is insoluble in water.
B. It is oxidized to yield sodium hydroxide, which is soluble in water.
C. It is reduced to yield sodium hydride, which is insoluble in water.
D. It is reduced to yield sodium hydride, which is soluble in water.
Solution
As shown genericallyin Reaction2.1, a metal hydroxide is formed upon addition
of an alkali metal to water. Because sodium is going from neutral to +1 when
losing an electron to oxygen, sodiumis oxidized. This eliminates choices Cand
D. You may recall from your acid-base chemistry experience that sodium
hydroxideis a strong base, and it readilydissociates in water. ThismakesNaOH
very soluble in water. The best answer is choiceB.
Alkaline Earth Metals (Group II)
Alkaline earth metals are metals from the second column of the periodic table.
Included are beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, and barium. Most
berylliumcomplexes are covalent in nature. The commonfeature is that their
valence shellis ns2, wheren is anyinteger greater thanone. Asneutralelements,
they are strong reducing agents, because they readily lose two electrons to
become a +2cation with a filled octet. However, they are not as reactive as alkali
metals. Like alkali metals, they are strong reducing agents. They too react with
any compound or element that has a high electron affinity. Their reactivity
increases as you descend the column, because the first and second ionization
energies both decrease. Their cation form is not as soluble in water as are the
alkali metals, primarily due to their +2 charge and smaller radius.
Alkaline earth metals, except beryllium, react favorably with water to form a
metal hydroxide and hydrogen gas. Reaction2.10 is the genericreaction:
M(s) + 2H20(g) *- M(OH)2(aq) + H2(g)
Reaction 2.10
The alkaline earth metals all form oxides (MO) when oxidized by oxygen gas.
The generic reaction is shown in Reaction 2.11.
2M(s) + 02(g) 2MO(s)
Reaction 2.11
Besides reacting with oxygen, alkaline earth metals can also be oxidized by
halogens, nitrogen, and hydrogen. Reactions 2.12, 2.13, 2.14, and 2.15 are a
random sampling of these reactions:
Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq) MgCl2(aq) + H2(g)
Reaction 2.12
3Sr(s) + 2N2(g) 2Sr3N2(s)
Reaction 2.13
Be(s) + H2(g) BeH2(s)
Reaction 2.14
Ba(s) + I2(g) Bal2(s)
Reaction 2.15
Chalcogens (Group VI)
Chalcogens are metalloids and non-metals fromthe sixth column of the periodic
table. Included are oxygen, sulfur, selenium, tellurium, and polonium. Oxygen,
sulfur, and selenium are non-metals, while tellurium and polonium are
metalloids. The common feature is that their valence shell is ns2np4. They form
several covalent molecules with non-metals. As neutral elements, they are
oxidizing agents, because they gain two electrons to become a -2 anion with a
filled octet. However, their reactivity decreases as you descend the column,
because the first and second electron affinities are not as great. They are often
insoluble, although it varies with their counterion (cation). Oxygen exists as a
diatomic molecule (C^), sulfur and selenium exist as octatomic molecules (Ss and
Ses), and tellurium and polonium exist in vast molecular matrices.
Halogens (Group VII)
Halogens are non-metals from the seventh column of the periodic table.
Included are fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, and astatine. The common
feature is that their valence shell is ns2np5. They form covalent molecules with
non-metals and ionic compounds with metals. As neutral elements, they are
strong oxidizing agents, because they readily gain an electron to become a -1
anion with a filled octet. However, their reactivity decreases as you descend the
column, because the electron affinity is not as great. They are often soluble,
although it varies with their counterion (cation). They all exist as a diatomic
molecules (X2), although little is known of astatine due to its radioactivity.
Noble Gases (Group VIII)
Noble gases are non-metals from the eighth (and last) column of the periodic
table. Included are helium, neon, argon, krypton, xenon, and radon. The
common feature is that their valence shell is complete at ns2np6. For the most
part, theyform no bonds and exist as monatomic atoms. Thanks to the workof
Neil Bartlettof U.C. Berkeley, xenonand krypton are known to formcompounds
with halogens. The compounds with fluorine show more electron density
around fluorine, implying that fluorine is moreelectronegative than either xenon
or krypton.
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Light Absorption and Emission
Light Absorption and Emission
Excitation and Relaxation
It requires energy to ionize an atom, because one of its electrons is removed from
a stable environment and placed into a less stable environment. However, when
a quantum of energy less than what is required to ionize the element is absorbed
by the element, then an electron can be excited to a higher energy state (known as
an excited state). Different forms of energy may be absorbed to excite an electron
up to a higher energy level. For instance, heat energy can be absorbed to excite
the electron. When the electron relaxes back toward its ground state, the energy is
released as a photon. This is seen with fireworks. Some different forms of
energy include light energy, thermal energy (usually vibrational kinetic energy),
mechanical energy (usually translational kinetic energy), and electrical energy. It
is important to consider different energy forms, because there are many things
capable of absorbing one form of energy and emitting a different form.
Absorption (Excitation): The gain of energy by an element or molecule, resulting
in the excitation of an electron from a lower energy state (often the ground state)
to a higher energy state (an excited state). The form of energy absorbed can vary.
Emission (Relaxation): The loss of energy by an element or molecule, resulting in
the relaxation of an electron from a higher energy state (which must be an excited
state) to a lower energy state (which can be the ground state or another excited
state, but of lower energy). The form of energy emitted can vary.
Absorption of energy is defined as any process in which a photon is absorbed by
a compound to excite an electron in the compound to an elevated electronic
energy level (excited state). This means that the electrongoes to a higher energy
state. Theperiod of time that the electronremains in thiselevatedenergylevel is
referred to as the lifetime of the excited state. A compound can store energy by
maintaininga high population of electronsin elevatedenergystates. When the
electronrelaxesback down to the ground state, energyis emittedin the formof a
photon. Absorption and emissionare therefore oppositeprocesses. Figure 2-30
shows the absorption and emission processes for a theoretical pair of energy
levels. Because the energylevelsare equal, theenergyof thephotonabsorbedfor
excitationis equal in energy to the photon released upon relaxation.
Excited state
hv absorbed
Ground state-
Absorption (Excitation)
Electron excites
up to a higher
energy level
Excited state
Electron relaxes
down to a lower
energy level
Ground state-
hv emitted
Emission (Relaxation)
Figure 2-30
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory Light Absorption and Emission
In this generic example, the energy of the photon absorbed is equal to the energy
of the photonemitted. In actuality, there is more than one singular energylevel
for the ground state and the excited state due to the coupling of electrical energy
levelsand rotational energylevels associated with the atom. Transitions involve
a change in electronic state as well as a change in the rotational energy of the
atom. In molecules, there are vibrational energy levels to consider, in addition to
the rotationaland electronic energylevels. The result is that the ground state and
excitedstate exists as a band of energy levels, not a single level. This means that
multiple possibilities exist for theenergy of transition. Rather than a single line
absorption or emission spectrum beingformed, a range is formed. This is why
Figure1-2 is a broad peakand not a sharp line. Figure2-31 shows different types
of emission and absorption spectra where the color range is shown. Absorption
spectra show all light except what was absorbed, which appears as a black line,
due to the absence of light. They are black lines in a rainbow. Emission spectra
show only the emitted light. They are colored lines against a dark background
(due to only selectedfrequencies being emitted). They are stripes of color.
Absorption spectra
Wavelength
Emission spectra
Wavelength
Figure 2-31
The lifetime of an excited state is often in the picosecond to nanosecond range, so
the interval of combined excitation and relaxation is very fast. The conversion
between energy forms is exploited in many devices. Incandescent bulbs absorb
thermal energy resulting from the resistance associated with electrical flow and
emit light energy (although some energy is dissipated in the form of heat
through conduction and convection). The operation of tube lighting involves this
conversion process. Plate charges build up at each end of the tube, creating an
electric field. A cation in the gas tube is accelerated by the electric force. As it
collides with other gas molecules, its kinetic energy is transferred to the other
molecule, which absorbs the energy to excite an electron. Upon relaxing, the
energy is released as light. In reality, the tubes must run on alternating current
(AC), so that the cation never reaches a plate. This is why tube lights, such as
fluorescent tubes, are actually high-frequency strobe lights.
The Berkeley Review
Atomic Spectrum of Hydrogen
Hydrogen is highly studied in terms of its absorption of light. Separate samples
of hydrogen gas exhibit exactly the same emission and absorption spectra. This
means that all hydrogen molecules absorb the same frequency of photons. The
repeatability of the hydrogen spectrum is attributed to the quantization of the
energy transitions. What is meant by "quantized energy transitions" is that the
absorption and emission of light by hydrogen occurs in distinct increments (or
quantities). Because hydrogen has distinct transitions between energy levels, it
must also have distinct energy levels. However, with the large number of energy
levels, there are a large number of transitions that are possible. For hydrogen,
groups of transitions are named for the energy level to which they relax. For
instance, all transitions down to the n = 1 level are categorized into the Lyman
series and emit photons in the ultraviolet region of the EM spectrum. Selected
energy levels and transition series for hydrogen are shown in Figure 2-32.
n = l
Figure 2-32
n = co
_yman
series
These electronic transition series names are specific to hydrogen. Of the four
series shown in Figure 2-32, only the Balmer series emits photons in the visible
range. When a sample of hydrogen gas glows, it is because electrons are relaxing
down to the n = 2 level, which is still an excited state. Figure 2-33 shows the line
spectrum associated with the Balmer series:
Balmer series emission spectrum
^8-2 h-2 V2
Wavelength
Figure 2-33
The Balmerseries emits photons in the visible range. In the Balmerseries, A.3-2 is
656 nm, A.4.2 is 486 nm, A5.2 is 380 nm and A^-2 is 410 nm, so they fall in the
visible range of the spectrum. This also means that A4-2 and A5.2 fall in the
Copyright by The Berkeley Review HI
visible range. The Paschen series involves photons in the infrared region of the
EM spectrum. The Brackett series involves photons in the low infrared and
microwave regions.
Example 2.25
Given that A.3.2 is 656nm, which of the following is NOT true?
A. All Balmer series transitions are less than 800 nm.
B. All Lymanseries transitionsare less than 400nm.
C. The lowest energy Paschentransition is greater than 800nm.
D. The highest energy Brackett transition is less than 800nm.
Solution
This requires lookingcloselyat Figure 2-32.
Choice A: Transitions to the n=2 level fall into the Balmer series. The lowest
energy transition in the Balmer series is fromn=3 to n=2 and is given as 656nm.
All other transitions in the Balmer series are more energetic, so these transitions
emit photons with a wavelength less than 656nm. ChoiceAis a valid statement.
Choice B: Transitions to the n=l level fall into the Lyman series. The lowest
energytransition in the Lyman seriesis fromn=2 to n=l, and it is of significantly
higher energy than the n= to n=2 transition. This means that all photons in the
Lymanseries are of higher energy and shorter wavelength than the transitions in
the Balmer series. According to Figure 2-33, the Balmer series emits photons
near 400nm, so transitions in the Lyman series emit photons with a wavelength
less than 400nm. Choice B is a valid statement.
Choice C: Transitions to the n=3 level fall into the Paschen series. The lowest
energy transition in the Paschen series is from n=4 to n=3, and it is of
significantly lower energy than the n=3 to n=2 transition. This means that the
lowest energy photon in the Paschen series is of lower energy and higher
frequency than the transitions in the Balmer series. The Balmer series emits a
photon at 656nm, so the lowest energy transition in the Paschen series emits a
photon with a wavelength greater than 656nm, and according to Figure 2-32,
higher than 800nm. Choice C is a valid statement.
Choice D: Transitions to the n=4 level fall into the Brackett series. The highest
energy transition in the Brackett series is from n= to n=4, and it is of much
lower energy than the n=3 to n=2 transition. This means that the highest energy
photon in the Brackett series is of lower energy and higher frequency than the
transitions in the Balmer series. The Balmer series emits a photon at 656nm, so
the lowest energy transition in the Brackett series emits a photon with a
wavelength greater than 656nm, and according to Figure 2-32, higher than
800nm. Choice D is an invalid statement, and thus is the correct answer choice.
Electromagnetic Spectrum
Photons have associated with them a distinctive frequency, energy amount, and
wavelength. The relative energetics of various radiation must be known. If you
ever have difficulty recalling the electromagneticradiation spectrum, think about
the fact that you wear sunglasses to protect your eyes from ultraviolet radiation,
not visible radiation. This means that ultraviolet radiation is of higher energy
than visible light. Also, lead shields are used to filter out x-rays, so they must be
of even higher energy than ultraviolet photons. Conversely, we are fairly safe
from radio waves considering the fact that millions of radio waves pass through
us every second. Common sense can be applied to recall the relative spectrum.
Table 2.4lists the common EMranges in terms of frequency and wavelength.
EM Radiation Wavelength (m) Frequency (Hz) Common Usage
AM 103 -104 105 to 106
Cheaper radio
communication
FM 1-102 107 to 108
Expensive radio
communication
Microwave 10-4 -1 108 to 1012
Satellite, cell phones,
radar, heating water
Infrared
10-6 _10-3
10H to 1014
Line-of-sight com,
molecular ID, heat
Visible 4xl0-7-7xl0-7 4.3xl014-7.5xl014
Vision, fiber optic
communication
Ultraviolet
10-8. io-7
1015 to 1016
Bond-breaking,
exciting electrons
X-ray 10"12-10-8 10l6 to 1020
Nucleus detection,
core e" ionization
Gamma
10-15_10-IO
1018to 1023
Nuclear excitation,
world destruction
Table 2.4
Common practical uses of EM radiation are something that should be learned,
because of the tradition of test writers asking about such devices. It should be
commonknowledge that radio waves and low-energy microwaves are used in
communications. Microwave communications include satellite transmissions,
cable television, cellular phone networks, and airport landing systems.
Microwaves are also used for cooking and heating things that contain water,
because the frequency required to rotate a water molecule is found in the
microwave region. Remote control units (also known as line-of-sight
communicators) oftenuse infraredsignalstosend information. Thefrequency of
the EM radiation used in these common tools and appliances to which we are
directly exposed cannot be near 1700 cm"l, 3000 cm'l, or 3500 cm'l, because those
are the bond-stretching frequencies associatedwith molecularbonds common to
all animal life. Ultraviolet light is used to breakbonds, and x-rays are used for
imagingatomic structure (including bones and teeth).
Visible Spectrum and Colors
The visible spectrum runs from red (around 700 nm), orange, yellow, green, blue,
throughviolet(around400 nm). Therelative wavelength, frequency, and energy
of photonsin the visible spectrumof light (bydecreasing wavelength, increasing
frequency, and increasing energy) is given in Figure2-34.
Red < Orange < Yellow < Green < Blue < Violet
700 to 627 run 627 to 594 nm 594 to 561 nm 561 to 477 nm 477 to 438 nm 438 to 400 nm
Figure 2-34
The order of the colors of the visible spectrum is often recalled using the
mnemonic ROYG. BiV, an acronym for the spectrum of visible light in sequence
of increasing energy. It is alsoimportant to knowthat the visible range of light is
fromapproximately 700 nmfor red light to approximately 400 nm for violet light.
Ultraviolet spectroscopy ranges from 20 nm to 400 nm.
Example 2.26
For some substance X, AEi yields yellow light, while AE3 yields blue light. What
must be true of the photon associated with AE2?
A. It is probably orange.
B. It has a wavelength of 700nm.
C. It is probably green.
D. It has a wavelength of 400 nm.
Solution
AE2 falls between AEi and AE3, so the photon emitted must be between yellow
and blue light in the visible spectrum. According to the spectrum mnemonic
(ROYGBiV), green light falls between yellow light and blue light. This eliminates
choice A and makes choice C the best answer. A wavelength of 700 nm
corresponds to red light, and a wavelength of 400nm corresponds to violet light,
eliminating both choice Band choice D.
Color is a phenomenon associated with vision. Light in the 400 nm to 700 nm
range can be detected by the eye and processed in the brain. Color is the result of
light within this range being absorbed by the cones of the eye. Rods also detect
light (in the green range), but this is for the purpose of intensity analysis of
details in the image. Consider the eye to function like a visible light
spectrophotometer, analyzing stimuli for intensity and wavelength. There are
three kinds of cones, each one responsible for detecting different frequency
ranges of light. Color, in a photon sense, can result from one of two phenomena.
Color is perceived from either the emission of light at a specific frequency or the
reflection of light at a specific frequency. Hence, there are two types of color to
consider: emitted and reflected.
Emitted Color
Colors is emitted from a source that radiates visible photons. Atoms emit light
energy when an electron relaxes from an excited state to a lower level. Figure 2-
35 illustrates the concept of emitted color.
^\/\/W r v ; -zam!\/\/\Ar^
Figure 2-35
An electron relaxes from an excited state and releases a photon of some
wavelength. All of the photons in Figure 2-35 are of essentially the same
wavelength. The color that is observed is the color emitted. Simply put, with
emitted color, "What you get is what you see." Emitted colors can be seen at
night, because their source is emitting light. A good test to determine whether a
color is an emitted color is to ask whether it can be seen in the dark. If the
answer is yes, then it is an emitted color. Examples of emitted light sources
include: neon light tubes, television screens, fireworks, and glow-in-the-dark ink.
Reflected Color and the Color Wheel
Reflected colors are produced when incident light (we'll consider it to be white
light, for the sake of simplicity) strikes a surface, and the surface absorbs certain
frequencies, thus reflecting only a portion of the incident light to the eye. The
reflected radiation appears as a color that is a combination of the reflected
photons. The color we observe is the complementary color of the frequency that
had the highest intensity of absorption. This is where the color wheel can help.
Complementary colors are on opposite sides in the color wheel. Given that white
light is a combination of all colors, it is a combination of all complementary pairs.
This is a over-simplification, because the primary colors of light are different
from the primary pigment colors, but we shall use the two interchangably to aid
in answering chemistry questions. Complementary pairs include red and green,
blue and orange, and yellow and violet. A color wheel is shown in Figure 2-36.
The color wheel is used to determine complementary
colors. Red and green are opposing on the color wheel,
so they are complementary colors. Moving around the
wheel, violet is the complementary color of yellow
and blue is the complementary color of orange.
Figure 2-36
Chlorophyll appears green in the presenceof white light. Theconclusion is that
chlorophyll containsa pigment that has a maximum intensity absorbance of red
light, the complementary color of green. One type of chlorophyll has an
absorbance maximum at 740 nm, while another has an absorbance maximum at
680 nm. Bothof these values correspond to red light. Figure 2-37 illustrates the
concept of emitted color as it relates to chlorophyll.
Incident
white light
Reflected color
(appears green)
( Chlorophyll sample )
(absorbs red) \
= 700 nm
Figure 2-37
Reflected colors can be seen only in the presence of an external light source. If a
color cannot be seen in the dark, then it is a reflected color. Examples of reflected
light sources include paint pigments, pen inks, and fabric dyes.
General Chemistry
Example 2.27
Which of the following statements is NOT true?
A. Ayellowpaint pigment absorbslight with a Xmax of 411 nm.
B. Agreen light bulb emits light with a Xmax of 522nm.
C. Ablue shirt has a dye that absorbs light with a A,max of 611 nm.
D. Atelevision screenglowingviolet emits light with a A.max of 573 nm.
Solution
This question entails comparingreflected and emitted colors. The first thing you
should ask yourself is whether the color can be seen at night. If the answer is
yes, then it is an emitted color and what you see is the color involved in the
electronic transition (emission). If the answer is no, then it is a reflected color
and what you see is the complementary color of the light involved in the
electronic transition (absorption). Choice A is a paint pigment, which cannot be
seen at night. The yellow color is a reflected color, so according to the color
wheel, violet light has been absorbed. Violet light has a wavelength near 400 nm,
so choice A is viable. Choice B is a light bulb, which can be seen at night. The
green color is an emitted color, so green light has been emitted. Green light has a
wavelength between 561 nm and 477 nm, so choice B is valid. Choice C is a
fabric dye, which cannot be seen at night. The blue color is a reflected color, so
according to the color wheel, orange light has been absorbed. Orange light has a
wavelength between 627 nm and 594 nm, so choice C is valid. Choice D is a
radiating screen, which can be seen at night. The violet color is an emitted color,
so violet light has been emitted. Violet light has a wavelength near 400 nm, so
choice D is invalid, and thus the best answer to this question.
The absorption of energy followed by the emission of a photon of light is a useful
principle that can be applied to many forms of spectroscopy. Infrared
spectroscopy can be used in organic chemistry to identify bond types and
functional groups. It is also involved in UV-visible spectroscopy, where a
compound is subjected to incident light at a specific frequency, and the relative
intensity of a transmitted beam compared to a reference beam is measured.
Conclusions about the concentration and the kind of compound itself can be
inferred from the results. Classical experiments that involve measuring
quantities of components in a gaseous mixture often focus on analysis of the
emission and absorbance spectra of the gases. This is at the heart of atomic
absorption spectroscopy, used to analyze amongst other things planetary gases.
The MCAT is not printed in color, so questions involving color will present
numerical data for wavelengths or graphs of absorbance spectrum. Figure 2-38
shows an absorbance spectrum and its analysis.
Abs = e[C]l
\nax is the wavelength at the greatest
absorbance. A Xmax at570nm means that
yellow light is absorbed, so the compound
appears violet to the human eye.
570 Wavelength (in nanometers)
Figure 2-38
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStry Atomic Theory Light Absorption and Emission
Fluorescence
Fluorescence at the simplest level is the conversion of ultraviolet light into visible
light. A material with a semi-stable excited state can absorb an ultraviolet
photon, relax a slight amount giving off infrared photons, and then relax
completely back to its original state. The visible photon emitted is of slightly less
energy than the ultraviolet photon absorbed, because of the small loss of energy
when the infrared photon was lost. The next energy range down from ultraviolet
is violet light in the visible range. This is why fluorescing materials appear
purple. The term "black light" refers to an ultraviolet light (it emits light outside
of the visible range) that when shined upon fluorescing material appears purple.
You may have seen this in organic chemistry lab when you analyzed tic plates or
at social gatherings with fluorescent hand stamps. This concept does not need to
be interpreted at any higher level, so this rough explanation is adequate.
Fluorescence will be addressed in a passage.
Photoelectric Effect
The photoelectric effect is exactly what the name implies. An incident photon
causes the release of an electron. It is a fancy way of saying that a compound can
be ionized with a photon, as long as the photon has energy greater than the
ionization limit of the material. The energy required to remove an electron from
the surface of the solid material is referred to as the work function, (J). Excess
energy (energy in excess of the work function) becomes kinetic energy for the
electron that is emitted. The photoelectric effect is really quite simple, but
confusion sometimes arises from the different terminology used in chemistry and
physics. Don't be fooled; just say no to physics (just kidding, but I'ma chemistry
nerd and just had to say that). Equation 2.9 is the equation for the photoelectric
effect.
hv=<t> +i/2mv2 (2.9)
hv = energy to ejectelectron + kineticenergy of ejected electron (2.10)
The photoelectric effect is the principle at work in solar panels. Photons of all
different wavelengths and energy are emitted by the Sun. This energy can be
collected at the Earth's surface. Some solar photons are sufficiently energetic to
eject an electron when theystrike a metal surface. Todo so, the photon must be
of an energy high enough to remove the electron from the valence shell of the
metal. The loss of an electron from the metal creates electrical flow (electricity),
which can be converted to either potential energy (stored in an electrochemical
cell) or mechanical energy (used to power a device).
As the energy of the incident photon increases, the kinetic energy of the
discharged electron increases. Figure 2-39 shows an apparatus devised to
measure the photoelectric effect, while Figure 2-40 is a graph of the electron's
kineticenergy as a function of the frequency of the incident photon.
General Chemistry
Incident beam of light
Detector of KE
31
c
c
o
1-
o
w
Ejected electrons
Stopping Voltage
Figure 2-39
hv = hv0 + KEe.
v0: threshold frequency
Frequency of incident photon (Hz)
Figure 2-40
The threshold frequency corresponds to the photon equal in energy to the
ionizing energy. Any photon with a frequency less than the threshold frequency
does not have enough energy to ionize the material, so no electron is ejected.
Example 2.28
Which material probably has the LOWESTthreshold frequency for the
photoelectric effect?
A. Boron
B. Carbon
C. Sodium
D. Sulfur
Solution
The threshold frequency corresponds to the work function of the material (<J> =
hv0). Each atom holds onto its valence electrons with a different work function,
therefore each atom requires a different amount of energy to undergo ionization.
The lowest threshold frequency for the photoelectric effect corresponds to the
material that is easiest to ionize. This question is asking for the material with the
lowest work function. Of the choices, only one is a metal, so only one has a low
work function. The best answer is choice C, sodium. This answer corresponds
with lowest ionization energy as well.
Nuclear Chemistry
Nuclear Particles
Simply put, nuclear chemistry is the chemistry that the nucleus of an atom can
undergo. Instead of referring to it as reactivity, it is referred to as instability of the
nucleus. The science community knows little of nuclear behavior at this point in
history, but there are theories. From our perspective, however, all we will
concern ourselves with is nuclear decay and nuclear capture. The process of
particle loss from the nucleus that results in a different nucleus is referred to as
nuclear decay. In physics, it may also be referred to as fission. The process of
particle gain by the nucleus which results in a different nucleus is referred to as
nuclear capture. In physics, it may also be referred to as fusion. As a general
rule, particles with mass less than 56 amu undergo fusion, while particles with
mass greater than 56amu undergo fission. Particlesthat we consider to be lost or
gained are alpha particles (helium nucleus), beta particles (an electron), positrons
(a positively charged particle with the mass of an electron), neutrons, and
neutrinos (an uncharged particle with the mass of an electron). The nucleus also
has ground states and excited states associated with it (just as the orbiting
electrons have energy levels), so nuclei can also undergo photon absorption and
emission. The high-energy photon is a gamma ray. Table 2.5 lists some of the
common nuclear processes. You should treat these reactions as exercises in
simple algebra. The total mass and number of protons should be equal on both
sides of the reaction. This is because mass and charge are conserved (along with
momentum) in each process.
Process
a-Decay
fi-Decay
fi+-Decay
y-Emission
oc-Capture
fi-Capture
fi+-Capture
y-Absorption
Reaction Tracking
8* -> fa +!J|Y
w -> -a
e + }?z
W -> * +!$Q
'8x* -> hv +i8x
l^X+^lgA
I8x -fe ->
^Q
gX + }e -> igz
igjX + hv - !8X*
Notes
The mass works: 120 = 4 +116.
The proton number works: 50 = 2 + 48.
The mass works: 120 = 0 + 120.
The proton number works: 50 = -1 + 51.
The mass works: 120 = 0 + 120.
Mass and proton number do not change.
The nucleus relaxes to emit a photon.
The mass works: 120 + 4 = 124.
The proton number works: 50 + -1 = 49.
The proton number works: 50 + 1 = 51.
Mass and proton number do not change.
The nucleus absorbs a photon to excite.
Table 2.5
Nuclear Decay and Capture
A heavy element undergoes a decay process to increase its nuclear stability. A
light element undergoes a capture process when struck by a high-energy particle
to increase its nuclear stability. There are a few points you should note for these
processes. With C-decay, the electron may or may not be added to the electrical
shell of the atom. If it is, the atom remains neutral. If the electron escapes, the
Nuclear Chemistry
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Nuclear Chemistry
compound becomesa cation. Usually the particle escapes, and an ion is formed,
althoughwe typically ignore this fact in nuclearchemistry. The representationof
the beta particle as having a -1for its Z term is not accurate, but it works for the
algebra of the equation. Beta capture and positron decayboth result in the same
element being formed. Likewise, beta decay and positron capture both result in
the same element being formed. The positron behaves just as a beta particle
does, only it carries a positive charge and is an anti-electron. This makes it anti
matter, but for our purpose that doesn't matter.
The reactions in Table 2.5 are simplified. We have ignored conservation of
energy and conservation of momentum. To balance these more accurately, the
mass of the electron(beta particle) and positron (anti-electron) cannot be treated
as zero. A neutrino is required in some cases to balance the equation. Solving
decay and capture questions in the manner that these examples are presented
will work fine on test questions you may see. The questions you may see will
involve deterrnining the particle that was lost in a process, or determining the
final elemental product after a nuclear reaction has taken place. It is sort of odd
that if you reverse the first two letters in nuclear chemistry the phrase becomes
unclear chemistry. Giventhe sciencecommunity's level of understanding at the
present time, unclear is an accurate depiction of the subject.
Example 2.29
Whichof the following elements results from two consecutive alpha decays of
21At?
A. 210Fr
B. 206Bi
C# 202ji
D. 2<>2Bi
Solution
Alpha particles are heliumnuclei (alpha-helium sounds like alpha-helix, so
remember the phrase "alpha helium"). An alpha particlehas a mass of 4 amu,
thus losingtwo alpha particles results in the loss of 8 amu. The element that
remains after two consecutive alpha decays has four fewer protons than the
original element (from 85 to 81) and has a mass eight less than the original
element (from210 to 202 amu). At is element number 85, so the final element
must have atomicnumber 81. Consulting a periodic table shows that element 81
isTl. 202jj is mebeS answer, sopick C.
Example 2.30
Electron capturebya nucleus resultsin whichof the following?
A. An increase in atomicnumber by one, and a mass increase of one amu.
B. An increase in atomic number by one, and no change in atomic mass.
C. A decrease in atomicnumber by one, and a mass decrease of one amu.
D. A decrease in atomic number by one, and no change in atomic mass.
Solution
Electron capture involves thegainof an electron by the nucleus. Anelectron has
a -1 charge and no mass. This means that the element should experience a
decrease in its positive charge by one, and no change in its mass. This is best
described in choice D.
iieneral ChemiStry Atomic Theory Nuclear Chemistry
Example 2.31
Which of the following processes would NOT result in the formation of tritium?
A. Alpha decay of7Li
B. Positron emission by3He
C. Beta decay of4He
D. Gamma emission from 3H
Solution
Analphaparticle is a heliumnucleus(4He), so when7Li loses a helium nucleus,
the mass decreases by four to three and the number of protons decreases by two
toone. The final product istritium (3H). Choice Aisvalid. Apositron isamass-
less positively charged particle that when lost, converts a proton into a neutron.
The mass remains the same, but the 3Heconvert into tritium (3H). Choice Bis
valid. Beta decay involves the loss of an electron from the nucleus. This converts
a neutron into a proton. The mass does not change and thus remains at four.
The number of protons increases by one to three. The product is 4Li, which is
NOT tritium. The best answer is choice C. Gamma emission does not change the
particle, thus choice D is valid.
Example 2.32
Inthe conversion from 165Ho to157Gd, at least two alpha particles were emitted.
What else was emitted?
A. A third alpha particle
B. One neutron
C. One beta particle
D. One positron
Solution
Inconverting from 16^Ho to ^Gd, themass decreases byeight, which equates
to the mass of two alpha particles. This means that any other particles emitted
are massless. This eliminates choices A and B. The atomic number has decreased
by three. Loss of two alpha particles decreases the atomic number by four, so the
other particle emitted must increase the atomic number by one. Loss of a
positron decreases the atomic number by one, so choice D is eliminated. A beta
particle must also have been emitted in addition to the two alpha particles.
Choice C is correct.
General Chemistry
Atomic Theory
Nuclear Chemistry
Half-Life
The half-life ofa sample of material is theperiod of time required for50% of the
concentration ofmaterial todecay toa different (possibly stabler) form. It is most
common to see half-lives associatedwith first-order decay processes. The graphs
shown inFigures 2-41 and 2-42 show the concentration ofa component over time
for first-order decay (exponential decay) and zero-order decay (linear decay).
The graphs shown inFigures 2-43 and 2-44 are the derivative graphs ofFigures
2-41 and2-42, which represent thechange in rateas a function ofchange in time.
d[X]
dt
First-order decay
i(exponential decay)
[X]
Zero-order decay
lear decay)
Time *
Tune *
Figure 2-41
Figure 2-42
\. First-order decay
\fexponential decay)
rate =
d[X]
dt
d[X]
dt
n
Zero-order decay
(linear decay)
T" te.
Tune
Figure 2-43
i nne ^
Figure 2-44
In Figures 2-45 and2-46, the graphs are marked at 50% and 25% of the initial
concentration values. These are the various concentrations after consecutive half-
lives. It takes one half-life to cut the concentration in half, and a second half-life
tocut that concentration in halfagain, whichresultsin one-quarter of the original
concentration. Figure 2-45 shows half-life as a function of time for a first-order
decay. Figure 2-46 shows half-life as a function of time for a zero-order decay.
25%-
First-Order Decay
(exponential decay)
Half-life is constant
time
Figure 2-45
122
25%"
Zero-Order Decay
(linear decay)
Half-life decreases
time
Figure 2-46
The Berkeley Review
Ueneral ChemiStry Atomic Theory Nuclear Chemistry
Figure2-45 demonstrates that for a first-order process, the half-life is constant,
regardless of concentration. As the concentration decreases, the duration of the
half-life remains the same. Figure 2-46 demonstrates that for a zero-order
process, the half-life is directly proportional to the concentration of the
compound. As the concentration decreases, so does the duration of the half-life.
The second half-life is half as long as the first half-life, because the concentration
change is half as large. As a point of interest, for a second-order process, thehalf-
life is indirectly proportional to the concentration of the compound. As the
concentration decreases, the length of the half-life increases.
These graphs should look familiar from biology and physics. In biology,
bacterialgrowth is exponential, and enzyme kinetics can be either exponential or
linear. In physics, displacement, velocity and acceleration follow similar
patterns. The point is that you must understand what these graphs tell you
about some values increasing or decreasing as a function of time. Half-life
analysis is most commonly evaluated using the upper graphs.
On the MCAT, you can expect to have to solve some half-lifequestions. As far as
half-life problems are concerned, there are two methods by which they are
solved. One method is to use Equation 2.11, the first-order decay equation:
Q =C0e-kt (2.11)
where Q is the concentration at a given time, C0 is the initial concentration, k is
the rate constant for the decay process, and t is the elapsed time. This works but
requires the use of natural logs, which can be time-consuming.
The second method involves the sequential summing of half-lives required to
reach a specific concentration. The test traditionally uses numbers that work well
with this method. It is the most time-efficient method. When a problem asks
how much time passes until a certain percentage of the original quantity remains,
it is easiest to figure how many half-lives are required to reach that percentage
and then convert the quantity of half-lives to total time. When using this
method, use reasonable approximations. For instance, if the half-life is 110years,
then 335 years is three half-lives plus a little bit. There is 50%remaining after the
first half-life, 25% remaining after the second half-life, and 12.5%remaining after
the third half-life. Thus, there is just under 12.5%remaining after 335 years.
Example 2.33
How many half-lives are required to decompose 93.75%of some material?
A. 2
B. 3
C. 4
D. 5
Solution
Decomposing (decaying) 93.75% of the initial material results in 6.25%
remaining. The quick and easy method is to cut the percentage in half
continually until 6.25 is reached.
100% -> 50% -> 25% -> 12.5% -> 6.25%
It requires a total of four half-lives to reach a point where 6.25%remains, which
is a decomposition of 93.75%of the material. The best answer is choice C.
General Chemistry Atomic Theory Nuclear Chemistry
Example 2.34
If the initial concentration of a toxic material is 1500parts per million and the
half-life is4.5 days, how long will it take for thelevel toreach a concentration of
100 ppm?
A. 13.6 days
B. 17.8 days
C. 18.2 days
D. 22.3 days
Solution
We mustsequentially halve 1500 untilanumber close to100 is reached.
1500 ppm -> 750 ppm -> 375 ppm -> 187.5 ppm - 93.75 ppm
After four half-lives, there is a little less than the target value of 100 ppm
remaining. This means that just under four half-lives are needed to reach 100
ppm. Four half-lives areeighteen days, sothebestanswer is slightly less than18
days. The best answer is choiceB.
Sequential halving of theconcentration infirst-order decay questions is far easier
than usingEquation 2.11 or other rate equations. The test-writers may giveyou
the appropriate equations needed to solve the question in longhand, but this
methodshouldbe your method of choice. Just because the test writers provide
youwitha piece ofinformation, doesnot meanthat youneed to use it.
This technique can alsobe applied to exponential growth problems, as seen in
biology withpopulation genetics that obey exponential growthbehavior. With
growth, you continually double the concentration rather thancut it in half. For
instance, if a bacterial population doubles in 12 seconds, then in one minute it
increases 32times (25).
X -* 2X -> 4X -> 8X -> 16X - 32X
Example 2.35
If the half-life of a particular atomis 20.4 minutesand the initialconcentration is
1200 parts per million, what willtheconcentration be afterexactly onehour?
A. 582 ppm
B. 291 ppm
C. 155 ppm
D. 145 ppm
Solution
Onehour is not exactly equaltothreehalf-lives (three half-lives =1hour and 1.2
minutes). After three half-lives, we have the following:
1200 ppm -> 600 ppm -> 300 ppm - 150ppm
We haven't quite used a full three half-lives, so the concentration shouldnot
have decreased all the way down to 150 ppm. This means that the correct
answershouldbejust over150 ppm (150+ ppm). Theonlyanswer choice that is
slightly greater than 150ppm is 155ppm, choice C.
Atomic
Structure
Passages
14 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Atomic Structure Passage Schedule:
I: After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I, IV- VI, & VIII
U: Following Task I: Passages II, III, VII, IX, & XIV, (34 questions in 44 minutes)
m*: Review: Passages X - XIII & Questions 96-100
R-E-V-I-EW
Atomic Theory Study Passages
I. Classical Experiments
II. Isotopic Abundance and Average Atomic Mass
III. Bohr Model of Hydrogen
IV. Paramagnetism and Liquid Crystal Displays
V. Migration through a Membrane
VI. Ionization Energy
VII. Transition Metal Trends
VIII. Lasers
IX. Paint Pigments
X. Fluorescence and Phosphorescence
XI. Flame Test
XII. Glyphosate
XIII. Technetium Decay
XIV. Cold Fusion
Questions Mot Based on a Descriptive Passage
Atomic Structure Scoring Scale
84 - 100 13- 15
66 -83 10 - 12
47 -65 7 -9
34-46 4-6
1 -33 1 -3
(1 -8)
(9- 14)
(15 - 21)
(22 - 28)
(29 - 35)
(36 - 42)
(43 - 49)
(50 - 56)
(57 - 63)
(64 - 69)
(70 - 76)
(77-81)
(82 - 88)
(89 - 95)
(96 - 100)
Two of the more famous classical experiments in
establishing the properties of subatomic particles are the
Thomson experiment and the Millikan oil drop experiment.
The Thomson experiment determined that the mass-to-charge
ratio for an electron is 5.686 x 10*12 kg/C. The Thomson
experiment involved the application of a perpendicular
electricfield to a beam of electrons produced by a cathode ray
tube. The Thomson apparatus is shown in Figure 1.
Double filter
Upper cathode plate
IT
m
Lower anode plate
Electron beam
Figure 1
The double filter ensures that the electron beam is in a
single direction. The electron beam, when exposed to the
electric field generated by the two plates, is bent towards the
positively charged plate. The curvature is constant as long as
the field strength is constant. The bending of the electron
beam is attributed to both the attractive force of the
oppositely charged plate and the repulsive force of the like
charged plate. A magnetic field may also be used to bend the
electron beam. When using a magnetic field to deflect the
electrons, the radius of the arc of the electron beam can be
employed to determine the mass-to-charge ratio using
Equation 1.
m _Br
q v
Equation 1
In Equation 1, the mass of the electron is m, the charge of
the electron is q, the strength of the magnetic field is B, the
radius of the arc of the electron pathway is r, and the velocity
of the electron is v.
In the Millikan oil drop experiment, after ten years of
data collection, it was determined that the charge of an
electron is 1.6x 10"19 C. The experiment involved charging
an oil drop by bombarding it with an ionizing electron beam.
Several oil drops passed through the ionizing beam, but only
a few gained a charge. The oil drops then fell into an electric
field generated by two charged plates in a glass cylinder. The
field was aligned so that the lower plate repelled the oil drop
upward, while the upper plate pulled the oil drop upward.
The force upward on the oil drop is thus qV, where q is
the charge of the oil drop and V is the voltage of the field.
The force pulling the oil drop downward is mg, where m is
the mass of the oil drop, and g is the gravitational force
constant. If the oil drop is suspended, then the two forces are
equal, and it is possible to determine the charge of the oil
drop. The charge of the oil drop must be a whole number
multiple of the charge of an electron. The apparatus used in
the Millikan oil drop apparatus is shown in Figure 2.
Oil can
X
Suspended
charged oil drop
Figure 2
The hole in the top plate allows for oil droplets to fall
into the chamber. The field between the two plates is
assumed to be uniform, so that the force on the oil droplet is
equal at any position between the two charged plates. The
field is adjustable, so that droplets of variable mass can be
suspended. Not all oil droplets are of equal mass, so an
average value is assumed.
1. An assumption of the Millikan oil drop experiment is
which of the following?
A. Oil drops are naturally charged.
B. The pull of gravity is equal in all directions at the
microscopic level.
C. The mass of electrons is negligible compared to the
mass of the oil drop.
D. The magnitude of charge for an electron can vary.
2. The electron beam bends downward as it passes between
the two charged plates in the Thomson experiment.
What can we expect for a beam of neutrons and
protons?
A. The proton beam would arc upwards as it travels,
while the neutron beam would not arc at all.
B. The neutron beam would arc upwards as it travels
while the proton beam would not arc at all.
C. Both the neutron and the proton beams would arc
upwards as they travel between the plates.
D. Neither the neutron nor the proton beam would arc
as they travel between the plates.
3. How could a value of 3.2 x 10"19 C in anoil drop in
the Millikan oil drop experiment be explained?
A. The oil drop was doubly ionized.
B. The oil drop gained an electron rather than lost an
electron.
C. The oil drop lost a proton rather than lost an
electron.
D. The oil drop gained a proton rather than gained an
electron.
4. The Thomson experiment determined which of the
following?
A. The mass of an electron
B. The mass of a proton
C. The mass-to-charge ratio of an electron
D. The mass-to-chargeratio of a proton
5 . The Millikan oil drop experiment requires knowing all
of the following EXCEPT:
A. the mass of the oil droplet.
B. the voltage of the electric field.
C. the gravitational force constant.
D. the temperature of the chamber.
6. In a neutral atom, what can be said about the number of
electrons relative to the number of protons and
neutrons?
A. The number of electrons must equal both the
numberof protons andthe number of neutrons.
B. The number of electrons must equal the number of
protons only, and the number of neutrons is
irrelevant.
C. The number of electrons must equal the number of
neutrons only, and the number of protons is
irrelevant.
D . The number of electrons must equal the sum of the
protonsand neutrons combined.
7. The STRONGEST attractive electrostatic force is felt
between:
A. a proton and a neutron.
B. a neutron and an electron.
C. an electron and an electron.
D . an electron and a proton.
8. If anoil dropwere slowly descending once it was in the
electric field betweenthe twochargedplates, then which
of the following changes would NOT stop it from
continuing to fall?
A . Increase the number of electrons on the drop.
B. Decrease the number of electrons on the drop.
C. Increase the voltage difference between the two
plates.
D. Offset the gravitational pull withan electric force.
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review
128
To determine the relative abundance of the isotopes for
an element, a mass spectrometer is employed. The element
is first vaporized intoits gaseous state, if it is not already in
gas form. Because this is carried out in a vacuum, a high
temperature may not be required to vaporize the material.
The cationic compound is generated by high-energy electron
impact with the neutral atoms. A neutral atom loses a
valence electron to ionization upon impact. The cationic
species formed is then accelerated in an electric field until it
reaches a set velocity (v). The particle beam produced is
projected through a double filter to ensure that no deflected
particles pass through to the detector.
Once particles are passed through the double filter, they
aresubjected toa magnetic field perpendicular to the original
electric field. This curves the pathway of the particles. The
force on charged particles moving through a magnetic field is
found using Equation 1.
F = qvB
Equation 1
where q is thecharge of theparticle (assumed tobe +1) and B
is themagnetic field strength. According to Newton's second
law, the force on the particle is F = ma, where m is mass and
a is acceleration. The particle is moving along a curved path,
so it has angularacceleration, which is found using Equation
2.
a =
R
Equation 2
where R is the radius of the arc. Substituting ma for F in
Equation 1andmanipulating the variables yields Equation 3.
qB=mv
R
Equation 3
The equations support the intuitive perception of how
the path is affected by mass, charge, velocity, and external
field strength. Figure 1 shows a basic schematic of a mass
spectrometer.
Detector
High energy
electron beam
Double
Gaseous
atoms
Atomic
ions x x x x x
Magnetic field
Figure 1
Different isotopes have different atomic masses, so each
isotope has a unique radius (R). The detector determines the
relative quantities of each isotope. This information is then
usedto determine the average atomic mass, a value that takes
into account all of the isotopes for a particular element.
Table 1 lists the isotopic abundance for the common isotopes
of boron, magnesium, and silver.
Element Atomic Mass Percentage
Boron-10 10.013 amu 19.78%
Boron-11 11.009 amu 80.22%
Magnesium-24 23.985 amu 78.70%
Silver-107 106.91 amu 51.80%
Silver-109 108.90 amu 48.20%
Table 1
9. Why is carbon added to a sample before it is vaporized
in a mass spectrometer?
A. Carbon-12 is used as a standard for mass reference.
B. Carbon-13 is used as a standard for mass reference.
C. Carbon helps to lubricate the atoms at an atomic
level.
D. Carbon absorbs heat from the atoms and prevents
the sample from overheating.
10. Which of the following plots represents the output
from the mass spectrometer for magnesium?
A. B.
11. Which of the following calculations accurately
determines the average atomic mass for silver?
A. 0.787 (23.985) + 0.1013 (24.986) + 0.1117 (25.983)
B. 0.1117 (23.985) + 0.1013 (24.986) + 0.787 (25.983)
C. 0.482 (106.91) + 0.518 (108.90)
D. 0.518 (106.91) + 0.482 (108.90)
Copyright by The BerkeleyReview 129
12. When a mass spectrum is to be obtained for a solid
compound, the first step in the process is which of the
following?
A. Vaporization
B. Condensation
C. Ionization
D. Sublimation
13. Identify the TRUE statement(s) from the following:
I. The average atomic mass of an element is always
greater than the mass of the heaviest isotope for
that element.
n.
ffl.
A.
B.
C.
D.
The average atomic mass of an element is always
greater than the mass of the lightest isotope for
that element.
When there are two isotopes for an element, the
average atomic mass is closer to the more abundant
isotope than the less abundant isotope.
I only
II only
I and III only
II and III only
14. The difference between the two isotopes of boron is:
A. the isotope of boron with mass 11.009 amu has
one proton less than the isotope of boron with
mass 10.013 amu.
B. the isotope of boron with mass 11.009 amu has
one proton more than the isotope of boron with
mass 10.013 amu.
C. the isotope of boron with mass 11.009 amu has
one neutron less than the isotope of boron with
mass 10.013 amu.
D. the isotope of boron with mass 11.009 amu has
one neutron more than the isotope of boron with
mass 10.013 amu.
The Bohr model for hydrogen proposes that there are
quantized energy levels in which an orbiting electron may be
found. Thetheory is derived from the observation that exact
frequencies of light are absorbed by hydrogen gas, no matter
what the concentration of the sample or intensity of the
incident light source. Given that light frequency directly
relates to light energy, the idea is that quantized amounts of
energy are absorbed and emitted asanelectron moves between
energy levels. Figure 1 shows the Bohr representation of
hydrogen.
n = 1
Energy levels
Orbital levels
Figure 1
Due to Coulombic attraction, the most stable energy
levels for the electron correspond to the closest proximity to
the nucleus. This means that the energetics of the orbiting
electron depend on the charge nucleus and the distance from
the nucleus (or quantum level). The energy level for the
electron of hydrogenis found using Equation 1.
E=-2.178 x 10"I8|^|J
Equation 1
15. What is the ionization energy for hydrogen?
A. 1.634 x 1018 J
B. 2.178 x 1018 J
C. 4.356 x 10",8J
D. 8.712 x 10*,8J
16. ThedeBroglie equation relates theenergyof a photon to
its equivalent mass according to E=mc2. How can the
deBroglie wavelength of an electron be found?
A. x =-h-
mc
B. X = mc
h
C. X=^-
>2
D
mc'
2h
130
17. Which of the following transitions relates to the
GREATEST energy of absorption?
A. From the n = 2 level to the n = 4 level
B. From the n = 2 level to the n = 1 level
C. From the n = 1 level to the n = 2 level
D. From the n = 2 level to the n = 5 level
18. Which statements are valid regarding the energy levels
of hydrogen?
I. As the value of n increases, the electron is farther
from the nucleus, therefore the electron is present
in a higher energy state.
II. As the value of n increases, the difference between
adjacent energy levels (with n values differing by
one), gets smaller.
III. A larger nuclear charge has no effect on transition
energies, although it lower all of the energy levels.
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II only
D. II and III only
19. For some compound X, which emits orange light for a
transition from the n = 4 level to the n = 3 level, what
must be TRUE?
A. A transition from the n = 5 level to the n = 4 level
emits green light.
B. A transition from the n = 4 level to the n = 2 level
emits red light.
C. A transition from the n = 6 level to the n = 4 level
emits violet light.
D . A transition from the n = 5 level to the n = 3 level
emits yellow light.
20. Which of the following observation leads to the
conclusion that energy levels are quantized?
A. A sample always absorbs the same amount of
light.
B. A sample always absorbs the same color of light.
C. A sample always emits different frequencies at
different temperatures.
D. A sample always emits different frequencies at
different concentrations.
Liquid crystal displays (LCDs) utilize the properties of
paramagnetic species. When plane-polarized light passes
through a solution containing a paramagnetic species, it
rotates the plane-polarized light. If the paramagnetic species
is subjected to a magnetic field, then the particles align in the
field, and the plane-polarized light is not rotated. The display
commonly seen in calculators and digital watches uses this
principle to filter or pass light through templates.
The basic design of the display board involves passing
light through a polarizing plate into a cell containing the
paramagnetic species and then having the light pass through
a second polarizing plate that is rotated 90' relative to the
first plate. If the field is off, the light will rotate and thus be
passed through the second polarizer. This results in a bright
spot on the display board. If the field is on, the light will
not rotate and thus will not pass through the second
polarizer. This results in a dark spot on the display board.
Figure 1 shows a simple display circuit.
Circuit on (Solution is aligned)
Vertical polarizer
(only vertical waves pass)
Vertical polarizer
(only vertical waves pass)
Horizontal polarizer
(only horizontal waves pass)
light passes
Aligned paramagnetic solution does NOT rotate light plane
Circuit off (Solution is random)
Horizontal polarizer
(only horizontal waves pass)
Light passes
Unaligned paramagnetic solution rotates light plane
Figure 1
A paramagnetic species is defined as a compound that
has unpaired electrons. Many common examples involve
transition metals with a d-shell count of d* tod9. Organic
compounds that are paramagnetic are referred to as radicals.
Oxygen gas has two unpaired electrons; thus, when exposed
to a magnetic field, oxygen molecules will with the field.
21. Which of the following can be used in an LCD?
A. CdCl2
B. F2
C. CoCl2-6H20
D. H2
22. What are the quantum numbers associated with the
LAST electron in the nitrogen atom?
A.n =2 1= 1 mj =+l ms =+J-
B.n =2 1= 1 mj =+l ms =-I
C.n =2 1= 1 mi =-l ms =+J-
D. n=2 1=1 mi =-l ms =-^
23. What isthe shape of Fe(CN)63"?
A. Octahedral
B. Square planar
C. Tetrahedral
D. Trigonal bipyramidal
2 4. Which of the following compounds is polar?
A. FeCl63-
B. Ni(CN)53-
C. cis-Pt(NH3)2Cl2
D. trans-Pt(NH3)2Cl2
2 5. Which ion has the MOST unpaired electrons?
A. Cr3+
B. Mn2+
C. Cu+
D. Ni2+
26. Which of the following statements is NOTtrue?
A. Cr has a higher formal charge in Cr(CN)6 than
Cr(NH3)63+.
B. Cu(H20)6+ has ten d-electrons.
C. Fe(NH3)63+ has the same shape as FeCl63".
D. Scandium is more likely to have +4 formal charge
than titanium.
27. Which of the following pairs of molecules does NOT
have the central atom (transition metal) with the same
number of d-electrons in both compounds?
A. Fe(NH3)63+andFeCl63-
B. Co(H20)63+ and MnCl64-
C. Cr(NH3)63+andMoCl63"
D. Os(NH3)42+ and RhCl3(PR3)3
132
In vivo, semi-permeable membranes are used by the
body tocontrol diffusion andosmosis (entropically favorable
occurrences). In the kidney, Bowman's capsule functions in
such a manner. Semipermeable membranes have
microscopic pores that allowthe passage of some molecules
or, in certain cases such as the sodium-potassium pump,
ions. They function by allowing only selected ions to pass
from the solution on one side of the membrane to the
solution on the other side of the membrane. Semi-permeable
membranescan distinguish by size, charge, or both.
Semipermeable membranes can be applied to bench top
chemistry (in vitro) as well. This application can increase a
reaction's selectivity. Semipermeable membranes used in
vitro, that separate by size, are oftenreferred to as molecular
and atomic sieves. While some molecular sieves differentiate
byatomic radius, others differentiate bycharge. Tostudy the
effectiveness of a semipermeable membrane, twosolutions of
differentsoluteconcentrations are separatedby the membrane.
Figure 1 shows a U-tube with a semipermeable membrane
separating the two solutions.
v
Sidel
Side 1 starts with solute that
cannot cross the membrane.
Side 2 starts with solute that
can cross the membrane.
-Semipermeablemembrane
Side 2
= c=
V:j:::i:i:-:j::&ii| /
After the solute migrates across the
membrane, there is a concentration
difference. Flow stops when osmotic
pressure equals hydrostatic pressure.
Figure 1
Table 1 the rates of effusion from Solution I through a
synthetic membrane into Solution II for a generic study.
Cation Rate (M/s)
Li+ 4.7 x 10'2
Na+
1.1 x 10-2
Mg2+ 2.9 x 10"2
K+ 3.5 x 10'3
Ca2+ 8.3 x 10'3
Table 1
Note: The synthetic membrane used in the experiment
represented in Table 1 is believed to be aprotic and
discriminates by atomic size. It is modeled after a protein
that is found in the lipid bilayer.
28. Based on the data in Table 1, which of the following
conclusions is valid?
A. As cationic size increases, the rate of migration
across the membrane decreases.
B. As cationic size increases, the rate of migration
across the membrane increases.
C. The cationic size has no direct effect on the rate of
migration across the membrane.
D. Because cations are larger than neutral atoms, the
effect of cationic size on the rate of migration
cannot be determined.
29. The BEST explanation for why potassium (K) has a
lower ionization potential than sodium (Na) is that:
A. potassium is more metallic than sodium.
B. potassium has a larger enthalpy of reaction with
water than does sodium.
C. the 4s-orbital is larger than the 3s-orbital.
D. potassium has a larger electron affinity than does
sodium.
3 0. The BEST explanation for why fluorine is smaller than
carbon is which of the following?
A. Fluorine's electrons are at a lower quantum level
than those of carbon.
B. Filled p-orbitals contract more than half-filled p-
orbitals.
C. Fluorine has a larger effective nuclear charge than
carbon.
D. Fluorine is heavier than carbon.
31. Which of the following is the SMALLEST?
A. F-
B. Ne
C. Na+
d. cr
32. What is the charge on the MOST stable ion of
magnesium?
A. +2
B. +1
C -1
D. -2
3 3. Which of the following atoms is LARGEST?
A. F
B. CI
C. Br
D. I
34. If the pore of the membrane used in the experiment
associated with Table 1 were to distinguish by both size
and charge, the SLOWEST rate would occur with which
cation?
A. Li+
B. K+
C. Mg2+
D. Ca2+
2500-
2400-
2300-
2200-
2100-
2000-
j 1900-
1 1800-
3 1700-
^ 1600-
1500-
1400-
c 1300-
ts 120-
jjj 1100-
.2 1000-
900-
800"
700-
600-
500-
400-
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Atomic Number
Figure 1
Figure 1 shows the first ionization energy for the first
twenty elements in the periodic table. The first ionization
energy is defined as the energy required to remove the first
electron from the valence shell of an element to form a
monocation. The general reaction, where E symbolizes any
element from the periodic table, is shown in Reaction 1.
E(g)>E+(g) + e-
Reaction 1
To negate solvent effects, ionization reactions are done
in the gas phase. The first ionization energy is proportional
to the square of the effective nuclear charge of the element.
The effective nuclear charge is the charge exerted upon the
valence electrons by all other charged species in the atom.
The effective nuclear charge takes into account the numberof
protons in the nucleus and the number of core electrons
(electrons in principal quantum shells lower thanthe valance
electrons). Ionization energy depends on the valence shell
principal quantum number. Ionization energy decreases as
you descend a family in the periodic table. A larger principle
quantum number corresponds to a lower ionization energy.
Figure 1 shows deviations from the behavior predicted
from effective nuclear charge data. Deviations are seen with
elements having valance electronic configurations of ns2np1
and ns2np4, which is attributed to the filled s-level and the
half-filled p-level associatedwith the cations that are formed.
There is additional stability when the p-orbitals have equal
occupancy of electrons. The symmetry associated with the
half-filled state results in cation stability.
134
35. Which of the following BEST explains the high
ionization energy of helium?
A. Helium has no valance electrons to remove.
B. Helium has an effective nuclear charge greater than
two.
C. The electron must be removed from the first
quantum level, which experiences the greatest
nuclear charge.
D. Helium requires a great amount of energy to be
converted first into the gas phase.
36. What can be expected for the second ionizationenergy
of lithium, sodium, and potassium?
A. The second ionization energies are only slightly
larger thanthefirst ionization energies, because the
Zeffhas not changed drastically.
B. The second ionization energies are only slightly
larger than thefirst ionization energies, because the
valance shell has changed.
C. The second ionization energies are substantially
larger than thefirst ionization energies, because the
Zeffhas not changeddrastically.
D. The second ionization energies are substantially
larger than thefirstionization energies, because the
valance shell has changed.
3 7. How can the lower ionization energy for oxygen than
nitrogen BEST be explained?
A. Nitrogen is more electronegative than oxygen, so it
does not share electrons as readily.
B. Nitrogen has more protons than oxygen, so it
carries a greater effective nuclear charge.
C. Nitrogen is larger than oxygen, so it is harder to
remove a valance electron.
D. Nitrogen has a half-filled p-level, so it does not
lose an electron as readily. Oxygen, when it loses
one electron, attains half-filled p-level stability.
38. How can the trend in first ionization energy between
aluminum, silicon, and phosphorus BEST be
explained?
A. The effective nuclear charge increases as you move
from Al to P in the periodic table.
B. The effective nuclear charge decreases as you move
from Al to P in the periodic table.
C. The number of core electrons increases as you
move from Al to P in the periodic table.
D. The number of core electrons decreases as you
move from Al to P in the periodic table.
39. Why is the first ionization energy of fluorine greater
than the first ionization energy of chlorine?
A. Fluorine is less electronegative than chlorine, so it
shares electrons more readily than chlorine.
B. Chlorine has more protons than fluorine, so it
carries a greater effective nuclear charge.
C. Chlorine is losing an electron from a shell that is
farther from the nucleus than fluorine, so chlorine
can lose an electron more easily.
D. Chlorine has no electrons in the p-level, so it does
not lose an electron. Fluorine, when it loses one
electron, completes its valance shell.
40. Which of the following elements can be oxidized
MOST easily?
A. Sulfur
B. Magnesium
C. Boron
D. Argon
41. What can be expected for the first ionization energies of
bromine, krypton, and selenium?
A. LE.Br > IE.Kr > IE.Se
B. I.E.Kr > LE.Br > IE.Se
C. I.E.Se > I.E.Br > LE.Kr
D. I.E.Se > LE.Kr > LE.Br
4 2. The first ionization energy for sodium is 495 kJ/mole
and the second ionization energy is 4558 kJ/mole. The
first ionization energy of magnesium is 732 kJ/mole,
and the second ionization energy is 1451 kJ/mole.
How can the change in second ionization energy be
explained?
A. The first and second ionizations of sodium are from
different quantum levels, while the first and second
ionizations of magnesium are from the same
quantum level.
B. Sodium is less electronegative than magnesium,
which implies that the second ionization energy
must be greater.
C. Once one electron has been lost from magnesium,
the second electron is repelled by the positive
charge of the magnesium cation.
D. Sodium metal gains half-filled stability by losing
one electron, while magnesium requires losing two
electrons to attain half-filled stability
Transition metals do not follow the same periodic trends
associated with the main-group elements. The reasoning
behindtheir separate trend is rooted in their valenceelectrons.
The d-electrons of transition metals are not the outermost
electrons, despite the fact that the d-level is being filled as
you move left to right through any row of the transition
metals. When we look at first-row transition metals, we see
electrons fill the levels according to the Aufbau principle, so
they fill the 4s-level prior to the 3d-level. However, when
electrons are lost (when the element undergoes ionization),
the electrons are lost from the 4s-level before the 3d-level.
Table 1 shows the ionization energy data associated with the
first row of transition metals. The first three ionization
energy valuesare listedfor eachof the transition metals.
M M2+
M3+
1st IE 2nd IE 3rdIE
Sc 4s23d' [Ar] 631 1235 2389
Ti 4s23d2 3d2 3d*
658 1309 2650
V 4s23d3 3d3 3d2
650 1413 2828
Cr
4sJ3d5 3d4 3d3
652 1591 2986
Mn 4s23d5 3d5 3d4
717 1509 3250
Fe 4s23d6 3d6 3d5
759 1561 2956
Co
4s23d7 3d? 3d6
760 1645 3231
Ni 4s23d8 3d8 3d?
736 1751 3393
Cu
4s13d10 3d9 3d8
745 1958 3578
Zn
4s23d10 3d*0
922 1772
Table 1
Periodic trends also include atomic radius, ionic radius,
and atomic density at 25C. Transition metals also show a
deviation from main group elements in terms of trends in
atomic size. Table 2 lists radius data for selected metals.
Radius Physical Properties
M
M2+ M3+
M.P. B.P. Density
K 227 63.7 760 0.86
Ca 197 99 838 1441 1.54
Sc 162 81 1539 2738 3.0
Ti 147 90 77 1668 3259 4.51
V 134 88 74 1903 3447 6.1
Cr 130 85 64 1874 2667 7.19
Mn 135 80 66 1241 2152 7.43
Fe 126 77 60 1536 3001 7.86
Co 125 75 64 1495 2908 8.9
Ni 124 69 1453 2731 8.92
Cu 128 72 1083 2597 8.96
Zn 138 74 419.5 906 7.14
Table 2
136
Trends are predictable when based on the effective nuclear
charge and the outermost electron shell (valence shell).
However, the effective nuclear charge and valence cloud of the
different transition metals do not follow the same pattern as
main block elements. Similar reasons can be employed to
explain deviations in trends. Half-filled d-shell stability is
associated with chromium, and filled d-shell stability is
associatedwith copper, which accounts for deviations in their
electronic configurations from what is expected according to
the Aufbau principle.
43. What is the density of manganese at 1000C?
A. Between 1.00 and 2.00 gpercm3.
B. Between 2.00 and 7.43 gpercm3.
C. Between 7.43 and 9.00 gper cm3.
D. Between 9.00 and 12.00 gper cm3.
44. What is true of the relative second ionization energy
values of Mo, Tc, Pd, and Ag?
A. Mo>Tc>Pd>Ag
B. Ag>Pd>Tc>Mo
C. Ag>Tc>Mo>Pd
D. Ag>Pd>Mo>Tc
45. Howcan the lower melting point and boiling point for
zinccompared to other transition metalsbe explained?
A. Increased interatomic forces with the filled 3d-shell.
B. Reduced interatomic forces with the filled 3d-shell.
C. Increased interatomic forces with the half-filled 3d-
shell.
D. Reduced interatomic forces with the half-filled 3d-
shell.
4 6. What can be concluded about the ease of removing a 3d-
electroncomparedto a 4s-electron?
A. The 4s is more easily removed because it is closer
to the nucleus.
B. The 4s is less easily removed because it is closer to
the nucleus.
C. The 4s is more easily removed because it is farther
from the nucleus.
D. The 4s is less easily removed because it is farther
from the nucleus.
47. What is TRUE about changes in density and atomic
radius as one scans across the 3d row of the periodic
table?
A. As atomic radius increases, density increases.
B. As atomic radius increases, density decreases.
C. As atomic radius increases, density increases,
except for elements with filled d-shell stability.
D. As atomic radius increases, the density does not
vary in a predictable fashion.
4 8. How can the reduced radii of transition metal cations be
explained?
A. Transition metals lose their outermost electrons
from the 4s-orbital, when becoming a cation.
B. Transition metals lose their outermost electrons
from the 3d-orbital, when becoming a cation.
C. Transition metals lose their highest-energy
electrons from the 4s-orbital, when becoming a
cation.
D. Transition metals lose their highest-energy
electrons from the 3d-orbital, when becoming a
cation.
49. If the reduction potential of Mn2+ is-1.18 Vand Co2+
is -0.28 V, what can be concluded about the reduction
potential of Fe2+?
A. E'reductjon of Fe2+ is less than -1.18V.
B. E0reduction ofFe2+ is between -1.18 and -0.73 V.
C. Eduction f Ee2+ is between -0.73 and -0.28 V.
D. E0reduction f Ee2+ 1S greater than -0.28 V.
The basic principle behind the operation of a laser is the
excitation of electrons from the ground state of a compound
to some meta-stable excited state. The term meta-stable
refers to an excited state where an electron can exist for a
sustained period of time before it falls back to its ground
state. By constantly supplying energy to the compound, the
electrons can be "held" in the excited state. This preference
for a higher energy level is in accordance with Boltzmann's
distribution law of energy for any chemical or physical
system. Boltzmann's distribution law predicts that the energy
of a system will be distributed throughout the different levels
according to a standard probability function that follows a
bell curve. At higher total energy for the system, more
electrons are present in an excited state than at lower total
energy for the system. Figure 1 shows a molecular system
before and after energy has been added. The excited and
ground states are represented as levels capable of holding
multiple electrons.
hvin
Before energy is added After energy is added
II
i i i ii in i ii
Meta-stable excited state
ii
tiilllilL
II
Ground state energy level
Figure 1
Energy is most easily introduced into the system by
incident light (photons). A system analogous to the laser is
the electrical capacitor, which can be filled with electrical
energy andthen instantly drained, releasing a pulse of energy.
Lasers can also store energy (light energy) and then release a
pulse of photons. A laser emits light energy corresponding
to the transition-level changes. Once the crystal or gas in the
laser releases photons, the light is collected and reflected
between mirrors, before it is released through an aperture
emitting the laser beam. Light emitted from a laser is close
to being monochromatic (that is, light of one wavelength),
but not precisely monochromatic. To date, absolutely
monochromatic light has yet to be observed. This is
attributed to the fact that the ground state and excited states
are not single energy levels, but are in fact a band of
quantized levels with identical electronic energy, but varying
vibrational and rotational energies.
5 0. Which of the following electronic configurations is the
ground stateelectronic configuration for aluminum?
A. ls22s22p63p3
B. ls22s22p63s3
C. ls^s^p^s^p1
D. ls22s22p63s!3p2
51. Monochromatic light is NOTobserved for which of the
following reasons?
A. Lasers are not precise in their emissions.
B. Crystals always havesome imperfections.
C. The laser re-absorbs some of the energy emitted.
D. Each electronic energy level has many rotational
sub-levels.
52. What is the energyinjoules associated witha photon of
light with a wavelengthof 330 nanometers?
(E =be., where h=6.6 x 10"34, X, =wavelength in nm)
X
A. 6.0 x 10"28 J
B. 6.0 x 10*,9J
C. 6.0 x 10'17 J
D. 6.0 x 1015 J
53. Which of the following sets of quantum numbers are
associated with the last electron in neutral vanadium
(element # 23)?
--J.
2
__L
2
A. n = 3; 1= 2;
B. n = 3; 1 = 2;
C. n = 4; 1 = 0;
D. n = 4; 1 = 0;
m| = 0;
mi = 0;
mi = 0;
ms = +J
ms =
mc = +-i-
mj = +l; ms =-L
2
54. Which of the following elements would have an
electronic configuration of ns^(n-l)d^ due to half-filled
stability?
A. Copper
B. Silicon
C. Manganese
D. Molybdenum
55. According to Figure 1, the photons emitted compare in
what way to the photons absorbed by the transition
between energy levels in the laser system?
A. The light emitted is of higher wavelength.
B. The light emitted is of equal wavelength.
C. The light emitted is of lesser wavelength.
D. The light emitted is incomparable.
5 6. For a laser to emit visible light, the material used must
have an emission in what energy range, knowing that
the visible range is approximately 400 nm to 750 nm?
1.24 x 10"6eV
(E =
A.
B.
C.
D.
-, where X is measured in meters)
6.25 eV to 9.90 eV
3.10 eV to 6.25 eV
1.65 eV to 3.10 eV
1.24 eV to 1.65 eV
Long before the advent of modern technology, colored
paints existed. The pigments for these paints were extracted
from natural sources, such as plants and mineral deposits. In
Europe and the Middle East, the majority of the pigments
used for painting were metal oxides. In the Orient, more
organic pigments were used. By tracing the origins of
pigments, art historians have been able to determine the
source not only of paintings, but of stylistic influences as
well. Listed in Table 1 are some of the more common
sources of colors used in the early centuries A.D.
Pigment Chemical Formula Color
Alizarin 1,2-dihydroxyanthraquinone Yellow
Azurite 2CuC03Cu(OH)2 Blue
Cinnabar HgS Red
Massicot PbO Yellow
Minium Pb304
Scarlet
Orpiment As2S3 Yellow
Realgar AS2S2
Orange red
Rust Fe203H20 Brick red
Ultramarine blue SiS2/Al2S3 Blue
Verdigris Cu(C2H302)2-Cu(OH)2
Greenblue
White lead 2PbC03Pb(OH)2 White
Table 1
As a rule, inorganic paint pigments last for a far longer
period of time than the organic paint pigments. For this
reason, inorganic pigments are a more reliable source used to
identify the time and region from which many paintings
originated. The colors in inorganic paint pigments are caused
by the absorption of light in the visible range of the light
spectrum. The absorption is due to transitions between the
d-orbitals, which because of the asymmetry of the ligands are
not degenerate. The splitting of the d-orbitals results in
different energy levels within the d-level. Figure 1 shows the
energetic splitting of the d-orbitals in an octahedral complex.
dx2.
y2
d22
dxy
yz
Figure 1
The color we see is the reflected color, the
complementary color of the color that is absorbed. If a paint
appears blue, it is because of a paint pigment is present in it
that is absorbing orange light (the complementary color of
blue). Figure 2 shows an artist's color wheel, which can be
used to determine complementary colors. Complementary
colors oppose one another on the color wheel. Blue opposes
orange, so they are complementary colors of one another.
Red and green are also a complementary pair.
Figure 2
White light is a combination of all colors, so when one
color is absorbed from white light by a pigment, the other
colors reflect. All the colors are no longer present, so at
least one of the colors has no complementary color present.
The result is that the reflected light takes on a hue of the
color that has no complementary color to cancel it. When
white light reflects off of a pigment, the reflected light can be
analyzed for intensity versus wavelength after a prism splits
the light via refraction. The output is an absorption
spectrum, which appears as a rainbow band with vertical
black lines, due to the absence of the light absorbed.
Absorption spectra are the opposite of emission spectra,
althoughboth require a prism to refract (grate) the light.
5 7. Which of the following pigments absorbs light of the
SHORTEST wavelength?
A. Alizarin
B. Azurite
C. Cinnabar
D. Verdigris
58. When a sample is heated by flame, and the emitted light
is put througha prism, what result is produced?
A. An emission spectrum of dark background with
some colored bands.
B. An absorption spectrum of dark background with
some colored bands.
C. An emission spectrum of colored background with
some black bands.
D. An absorption spectrum of colored background
with some black bands.
59. In the absorption spectrum of realgar, what color band
would contain black lines?
A. Orange and red
B. Orange and green
C. Blue and red
D. Blue and green
60. Given that the wavelength of visible light has a range
from about 740 nm to 390 nm, what is the
approximate wavelength of light absorbed by the copper
dication in Cu(C2H302)2'Cu(OH)2?
A. 450 nm
B. 550 nm
C. 650 nm
D. 750 nm
61. White lead absorbs which colors?
A. All colors
B. Green, blue, and violet
C. Red, orange, and yellow
D. No colors in the visible range
62. All of the following exhibit reflected color EXCEPT:
A. Candle wax
B. Fabric dyes
C. Pen ink
D. Gas-filled light tubes
6 3. Which of the following pigments will decompose first?
A. Alizarin
B. Azurite
C. Rust
D. Verdigris
Fluorescence occurs with the absorption of a photon by
a molecule, exciting one of its electrons to a higher energy
state. Because the material is molecular and not atomic,
there are also vibrational and rotational energy levels
associated with it. The molecule can change its vibrational
energy level (by changing its bond-stretching frequency) and
give off energy in the form of IR photons or heat. Heat is
released during collisions with less energetic molecules.
When the electron falls back to the ground state, a photon of
less energy than was initially absorbed is given off. A
fluorescing compound can thus absorb high-energy light
(such as ultraviolet) and give off lesser-energy light (such as
visible light).
Phosphorescence also begins with the absorption of a
photon by a molecule, exciting one of its electrons to a
higher energy state. The electron can flip its spin in this
excited state, dissipating some of the extra energy. When the
electron relaxes, because it shares the same spin as the
ground state electron, it cannot fall back to its ground state.
It must relax to an intermediate state, so a lower-energy
photon is emitted than was initially absorbed. Figure 1
represents what goes on during both fluorescence and
phosphorescence. The Xq potential well represents the
ground electronic state, and Xi represents the excited state.
The lines within the well represent the different stretching
modes (vibrational energy levels) of the molecule.
u
I
Bond radius (A)
Figure 1
The wiggly arrows in Figure 1 represent energy that is
dissipated as an excited electron drops in vibrational energy,,
which is released in the form of an IR photon. The
vibrational energy thereby released can be measured as heat
given off from the system. The amount of heat emitted
varies with different molecules, because the electronic energy
levels are not singular levels (they have both vibrational and
rotational energy levels associated with them). The
transition energy is thus the result of a random combination
of energy levels. Because the electronic energy levels are not
singular levels and because the transition is random, it is
impossible for a molecule to absorb or emit light in such a
manner that all of the photons simultaneously have the same
frequency (or wavelength). For this reason, monochromatic
light is not physically possible.
64. A spin flip in the excited state is associated with which
of the following processes?
A. Fluorescence only
B. Phosphorescence only
C. Both fluorescence and phosphorescence
D. Neither fluorescence and phosphorescence
65. What can be said about the photon absorbed relative to
the photon emitted by a fluorescing diatomic molecule?
A. The energy of the photon absorbed is greater than
the energy of the photon emitted, while the
wavelength of the photon absorbed is less than the
wavelength of the photon emitted.
B. The energy of the photon absorbed is less than the
energy of the photon emitted, while the wavelength
of the photon absorbed is greater than the
wavelength of the photon emitted.
C. Both the energy and wavelength of the photon
absorbed are greater than the energy and wavelength
of the photon emitted.
D. Both the energy and wavelength of the photon
absorbed are less than the energy and wavelength of
the photon emitted.
66. What is TRUE about monochromatic light?
A. Monochromatic light is not possible, because light
is not quantized.
B. Monochromatic light is possible, because light is
quantized.
C. Monochromatic light is not possible, because there
are vibrational energy levels of lower energy
difference than the electronic energy levels with
which they are associated.
D. Monochromatic light is possible, because there are
vibrational energy levels of greater energy
difference than the electronic energy levels with
which they are associated.
67. According to the graph, how do the photons emitted
from fluorescence and phosphorescence compare?
A. The photons emitted from fluorescence have a
longer wavelength than the photons emitted from
phosphorescence.
B. The photons emitted from fluorescence have a
shorter wavelength than the photons emitted from
phosphorescence.
C. The photons emitted from fluorescence have the
same wavelength as the photons emitted from
phosphorescence.
D. The photons emitted from phosphorescence are of
higher energy than the photons emitted from
fluorescence.
68. Which of the following transitions emits the
SHORTEST wavelength of light?
A. Xi V = 1 to Xrj V = 0, where V is the vibrational
energy level.
B. XiV = 0toXrjV = 0, where V is the vibrational
energy level.
C. Xrj V = 1 to Xi V = 0, where V is the vibrational
energy level.
D. Xq. V = 0 to Xi V = 0, where V is the vibrational
energy level.
69. Which of the following statements about fluorescence
is FALSE?
A. Fluorescence is possible with molecules.
B. Fluorescence converts visible light into ultraviolet
light.
C. Fluorescence can dissipate energy in the form of
heat.
D. There are some atoms for which fluorescence is not
possible.
A student conducts an experiment where a series of
aqueous solutions of group I cations (alkali metals) or group
II cations (alkaline earth metals) are each heated by a flame.
The heat of the flame, if hot enough, can stimulate electrons
in the cations to leave their ground state. When they relax to
the ground state, light is emitted. Because the light is a
narrowband of photons with predominantlyone wavelength,
it appears colored. The color is used to identify the cation in
solution. Table 1 shows the student's result.
Barium Lime-green ring around flame
Lithium Brilliant crimson flame
Potassium Light purple ring around flame
Sodium Orange-yellow flame
Strontium Red flame
Table 1
The student then conducts the same experiment using
transition metals rather than main-group metals. The trend
in color is predictable with main-group cations of the same
column (family) in the periodic table. The color of the
transition metal cations depends more on the ligands attached
to the metal cation. Table 2 also shows the colors obtained.
Vanadium (II) Violet flame
Copper (I) Orange flame
Nickel (H) Red flame
Chromium (DT) Red flame
Cobalt (H) Green flame
Table 2
With transition metals, the color emitted by the flame is
often the color of the light absorbed when the cation in
solution is exposed to white light. The color of the aqueous
solution that is detected by the eye is the complementary
color of the color absorbed. The color that is associated with
transition metals is due to an electronic transition within the
d-orbitals (between the d-levels, which split due to the
presence of ligands). These electronic transitions are referred
to as d-d transitions, and they occur only with transition
metals that are not dôr d^ intheir electronic configuration.
7 0. Which cation is paramagnetic?
A. Na+
B. Sr2+
C. Cu+
D. Cr3+
71. What is the electronic configuration of chromium?
A. [Ar]4s23d4
B. [ArHs^d5
C. [Arl3d6
D. [Ar]3d3
72. Which of the following transition metals has the
GREATEST d-d transition energy, given that the color
observed in the flame test is due to a d-d electronic
transition?
A. Ni2+
B. Cr3+
C. Co2+
D. V2+
7 3. Identify the TRUE statement(s) from the following.
I. As ionic size increases; the energy of the transition
increases.
II. The transition energy of K+ is greater than the
transition energy ofCr3+.
DX Cu+ and Ni2+ have the same electronic
configuration.
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and H only
D. II and IE only
74. What are the quantum numbers associated of the last
electron of nickel dication?
ms =- -!
2
m<t = - i-
A.n = 3 1= 2 mi = -l
B. n = 3 1= 2 mi = 0
C. n=3 1=2 mi =+l ms =-i-
D.n =3 1=2 mj =+l ms =+-
75. Given that lithium cation emits a red flame, sodium
cation emits an orange-yellow flame, and potassium
cation emits a violet flame, what color flame will be
emitted by rubidium cation?
A. Yellow
B. Green
C. Blue
D. Colorless (and thus the normal orange)
76. An emission spectrum of lithium would appear in what
manner?
A. It would be a rainbow with a black line in the red
region of the spectrum.
B. It would be a rainbow with a black line in the
green region of the spectrum.
C. It would have a black background with a red line.
D. It wouldhave a black backgroundwith a green line.
Passage XII (Questions 77-81)
Glyphosate, shown in Figure 1, is a synthetic compound
that is currently the world's largest selling commercial
herbicide. Glyphosate kills vegetation by binding metals
within a plant, thus starving the organism of essential
metallic nutrients needed for the transport of other nutrients
and waste, such as carbon dioxide and oxygen. When
Glyphosate leeches metals from the plant, its respiration is
shut down. Glyphosate is shown in Figure 1 in its salt
form, as extracted from pH = 7 aqueous solution.
O H
II I
H0 A A
H H H H
Figure 1
After the plant has died, Glyphosate decomposes in the
presence of moisture into phosphate, carbon dioxide, and
ammonia. The decomposition products are environmentally
safe, and some are useful nutrients for the soil. In a study of
the decomposition of Glyphosate in vivo, isotopically labeled
Glyphosate was applied to vegetation, and the isotopic
abundance was monitored at regular intervals over a twenty-
day period. Based on kinetic data associated with hydrolysis
and decomposition, the conclusion was reached that the decay
time of Glyphosate to its inorganic products is approximately
fourteen days. The compound was radio-labeled in three
separate experiments, using a different radio-label in each
experiment. The first experiment employed tritium (3H), the
second experiment employed 14C, and the third experiment
employed 32P to monitor the half-life and decay rates.
Carbon-14 was used as a marker, but not for kinetic
purposes. The half-life of carbon-14 is far greater than the
lifetime of a typical lab experiment. The isotopic marker
helps to study the migration of Glyphosate through the
environment.
77. Which of the following is an isotope of 32P?
A. 32S
B. 32P-
C. 3IP
D. 3,Si
78. The molecular shape about the nitrogen in Glyphosate
is BEST described as:
A. trigonal planar.
B. trigonal pyramidal.
C. square planar.
D. bent.
79. The half-life of 32P is approximately 14 days. If the
concentration of a 32P radio-labeled Glyphosate sample
(C3HgN06P) is found to be 188 parts per million
initially, how long will it take until the concentration
is 25 ppm?
A. 27 days
B. 33 days
C. 41 days
D. 43days
8 0. Which of the following molecules have ionic bonding?
I
II
III
A.
B.
NH3
C02
Na2P04H
I only
II only
C. Ill only
D. I and II only
81. As 32P decays, it changes into a product that is still
phosphorus. This is necessary in a marker so that the
chemical behavior of the labeled species does not
change. What is the MOST likely particle given off in
the decay of phosphorus-32?
A. A neutron
B. An alpha particle
C. A beta particle
D. A positron
Passage XIII (Questions 82 - 88)
In order to image vital organs by photon emission,
technetium-99 is ingested into the body so that its low-level
gamma radiation (140-keV) may be detected. For brain
imaging, 99Tc is introduced via the bloodstream, and it
subsequently diffuses throughout the body, including to the
brain. Technetium-99 has a half-life of approximately six
hours, so scanning and analysis must closely follow
ingestion. For 99Tc tomigrate toall of the target organs in
a concentration high enough to be detectable requires roughly
two hours. After two hours, the concentration of active
technetium-99 is approximately eighty percent (80%) of its
original value. Technetium-99 decays through gamma
emission, meaning that its nucleons simply drop in one step
from an excited nuclear state to a ground nuclear state when
they emit photons. The nucleus of technetium does not
change upon the emission of the gamma photon.
For brain imaging, the skull is encompassed by a
detection device that collects and records the gamma radiation
at arbitrary sites. Radiation escapes more readily from the
areas of the brain that have a lower tissue density and fluid
than those that have a greater density, but a complication in
the analysis of brain images is that the radiation dissipates in
liquid. This means that slight variations in the texture and
composition of brain matter can produce different imaging
patterns. The display pattern collected can be converted into
a contour map of the brain. This technique work well with
organs that have a relatively low water content.
82. Beta decay of 210Po results inwhich of the following?
A. 210At
B. 210Bi
C. 206Pb
D. 2<>9At
83. Alpha decay is observed
transformations EXCEPT:
A. 254Esto250Bk
B. 238uto234Th
C. 223Frto221Bi
D. 247Cmto243Pu
in all of the following
84. If the initial dosage of 99Tc gave a reading of 120 p:Ci,
what will the reading be after 12 hours?
A. 60 uCi
B. 40 uCi
C. 30 uCi
D. 20 |iCi
85. Electron capture by carbon produces the same element
as which of the following processes?
A. Positron capture by boron
B. Positron decay of carbon
C. Beta capture by nitrogen
D. Alpha decay of oxygen
8 6. Gamma radiation is considered to:
A. weigh4 amu and have a nuclear charge of +2.
B. be massless with a nuclear charge of -1.
C. weigh4 amu and have no nuclear charge.
D. be massless and have no nuclear charge.
87. The electronic configuration for 99Tc is which of the
following?
A. [Ar]5s23d5
B. [Krl5s24d5
C. [Kr]5sUd6
D. [Kr]5s24d7
88. When 99Tc undergoes gamma decay, the final product
is which of the following?
A. "Tc
B. "Ru
C. 95Nb
D. "Mo
Passage XIV (Questions 89 - 95)
As of March 1989 physicists and chemists had yet to
carry out a nuclear fusion reaction that did not require more
energy input than output. Fusion reactions require high
temperature and strong magnetic fields to be carried out.
This is the reason that nuclear power generators are fission
reactors. Reaction 1 is an example of a fusion reaction,
while Reaction 2 is an example of a fission reaction.
^Li +2H -> 2^He
Reaction 1
292U +0n^32He +286Rn+0n
Reaction 2
Then in March of 1989, B. Stanley Pons and Martin
Fleischmann announced that they has achieved a nuclear
fusion reaction in a test tube at room temperature. Pons and
Fleischmann set up a simple electrochemical cell with a
palladium cathode in 0.1 M LiOD(D20) and a platinum
anode. The design of the cell was to formD2 gas by passing
an electron flow from the platinum anode to the palladium
cathode. The cell generated more heat than expected, so it
was proposed that a nuclearreaction must havetranspired.
The researchers believed that the deuterium migrated into
the palladium metal of the cathode and gathered in the
pockets of the lattice, so they hypothesized that the
deuteriumfused together in the palladium electrode by either
Reaction 3 or Reaction 4.
2H +^H Jh +^h
Reaction 3
2H +2H -> lQn +\Ue
Reaction 4
Pons and Fleischmann in their original paper stated that
both tritium and neutrons were observed in the cathode of
their electrochemical cell, but the concentrations were too
low to account for the extra heat generated. Since that time,
the hypothesis of a "cold fusion" nuclear reaction taking
place under these experimental conditions hasbeen dismissed
as improbable by most scientists in the field.
89. What is NOT a product when two deuterium atoms
undergo a fusion reaction?
A. Tritium
B. Helium-4
C. Helium-3
D. Hydrogen
90. What evidence did Pons and Fleischmann point to that
would indicate that a nuclear reaction had transpired in
the electrochemical cell?
A. Less heat was released than expected.
B. More heat was released than expected.
C. That electrons were emitted by the cell.
D. That electrons were absorbed by the cell.
91. Cold fusion is BEST described as:
A. an endothermic nuclear reaction capable of rapidly
cooling the environment.
B. an exothermic nuclear reaction capable of rapidly
cooling the environment.
C. an endothermic nuclear reaction capable of being
carried out at room temperature.
D. an exothermic nuclear reaction capable of being
carried out at room temperature.
9 2. Nuclear power plants employ what reaction to generate
power?
A. Fission, because fusion requires such a great energy
input that it is inefficient, and the net energy
change is unfavorable.
B. Fusion, because fusion requires such a great energy
C. Fission, because fission requires such a great
energy input that it is inefficient, and the net
energy change is unfavorable.
D. Fusion, because fission requires such a great energy
9 3. Which of the following is a fusion reaction?
A. 23952U +in^232Th +4He
B. 239>-*292U +2He
c 23<u +
11
B-> 2$Cf
D.f3Tc*-*99Tc +h/
94. What is formed when 238U emits an alpha particle and
a deuterium nucleus?
A. 234Ac
B. 232Ac
C. 236U
D. 232Ra
95. Capture of which of the following particles would NOT
result in a change in the atomic number?
A. Alpha
B. Beta
C. Neutron
D. Tritium nucleus
Questions 96 - 100 are NOT based
on a descriptive passage.
9 6. Which of the following supports the conclusion that
electrons have quantized energy levels?
A. The existence of a nucleus
B. Scattering of X-rays by a thin sheet of a material
C. The bending of nuclear radiation particles by a
magnetic field
D. Distinct lines in an electromagnetic radiation
spectra
97. The LONGEST wavelength of light would be
associated with:
A. X-rays.
B. violet light.
C. green light.
D. infrared light.
98. The ionization energy of H(g) is 1312 ^ . Agood
mole
approximation for the second ionization potential of
helium (g) is:
A.
B.
C.
D.
5248-^-
mole
2624 -&-
mole
656-kJL
mole
328^-
mole
99. Which of the following is the electronic configuration
for an excited state of Na+?
A. ls22s22p53s2
B. ls^s^p^s1
C. ls22s22p6
D. ls^s^p^s1
100. What is the MOST common shape for a transition
metal with five ligands attached?
A. Square planar
B. Trigonal bipyramidal
C. Pentagonal planar
D. Hexahedral
\M'.y'^,x
"I know where my nucleus is. do vou?"
1. C 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. D
6. B 7. D 8. B 9. A 10. B
11. D 12. D 13. D 14. D 15. B
16. A 17. C 18. C 19. D 20. B
21. C 22. A 23. A 24. C 25. B
26. D 27. B 28. A 29. C 30. C
31. C 32. A 33. D 34. D 35. C
36. D 37. D 38. A 39. C 40. B
41. B 42. A 43. B 44. D 45. B
46. C 47. B 48. A 49. C 50. C
51. D 52. B 53. A 54. D 55. B
56. C 57. A 58. A 59. D 60. C
61. D 62. D 63. A 64. B 65. A
66. C 67. B 68. A 69. B 70. D
71. B 72. D 73. C 74. B 75. D
76. C 77. C 78. B 79. C 80. C
81. A 82. A 83. C 84. C 85. B
86. D 87. B 88. A 89. B 90. B
91. D 92. A 93. C 94. B 95. C
96. D 97. D 98. A 99. D 100. B
STOP, YOU'VE HAD ENOUGH!
Atomic Theory Passage Answers
Passage I (Questions 1-8) Classical Experiments
1. Choice C is correct. If oil drops were naturally charged, then the experiment could not work, because the total
charge onthe droplet would not be generated by the electron beam alone. The charge determined from the
experiment would not necessarily reflect the charge of an electron. This eliminates choice A, because it is
assumed in the experiment that the oil droplet is initially uncharged before exposure to the electron beam.
Because the gravitational pull on the oil droplet is calculated as opposing the electric field, it must be assumed
to be in one direction (downward). If the gravitational pull were in all directions, the experiment would not be
possible. This eliminates choice B. The mass used in the calculation is the average mass of an oil droplet, so
the mass of the electrons is in fact ignored. This can be assumed knowing that protons and neutrons are far more
massive than electrons. The change in mass by gaining or losing electrons is negligible compared to the rest of
the atomic mass. This makes choice C the best answer; an answer to be chosen by many, like you. The charge of
an electron is assumed to be constant, if you are solving for an exact value. The experiment could be solved for an
average value, but there is no reasoning behind one electron being of a different charge than another electron.
This is to say that charge is quantized (has an exact value).
2. ChoiceAis correct. In the tube in Figure 1, the electron beam is negatively charged, so it bends downwards due
to its attraction to the positively charged plate below and its repulsion from the negatively charged plate
above. It may seem odd that the cathode plate (plate above) is negatively charged and the anode plate (plate
below) is positively charged, but the plates form a charged capacitor, not a discharging battery. For a
discharging battery and charging capacitor, the plate charges are opposite. Because a proton has the charge
opposite from an electron (protons carry a positive charge), protons exhibit behavior opposite from an electron.
Proton beams therefore bend upwards. Aneutron is neutral, so its pathway would not arc at all between the two
charged plates. The neutron does not arc, because it is unaffected by the charged plates. The best answer is
choice A.
3. ChoiceA is correct. The value of the charge is twice as large as expected. This can be explained in terms of
magnitude ofcharge rather than sign of charge. Avalue that is twice as large as expected is attributed to a
doubly charged oil droplet. Choice A, doubly ionized, would explain this. Choices B, C, and Dall address sign
of charge and thus are eliminated.
4. Choice Cis correct. TheThomson experiment, as stated in the passage, determined the mass-to-charge ratio of
the electron. It can be used to determine the mass-to-charge ratio for any charged particle, but in this
particular experiment, the particle was an electron. The best answer is choice C. Amass spectrometer is a
mechanical variation of the Thomson experiment theme.
5. Choice Dis correct. The charge of an electron is determined by equating the mass of the droplet and the
gravitational force constant (mg) with the voltage of the electric field and charge of the oil droplet (qV). To
solve for q, the other three variables must be known. This means that choices A, B, and Care all values that
must be known. There isno temperature factor in the equation (mass, charge, gravity, and voltage do not vary
with temperature), so choice D represents the factor that is least important in the calculations.
6. Choice Bis correct. An atom is neutral when it carries no net charge. Klectrons carry a negative charge, while
protons carry a positive charge. Neutrons are uncharged. In order for an atom to be neutral, the number of
electrons must be equal to the number of protons. The best answer is choice B. Choice Ais not false per se, but
because there exist isotopes whose number of electrons does not equal the number ofneutrons, no conclusion can be
drawn about the number of electrons and neutrons within a neutral atom.
7. Choice Dis correct. The strongest electrostatic attractive force is felt between particles of opposite charge.
Thisis known as Coulomb's law. Anelectron and proton carry opposite charges, so the best answer is choice D.
Aproton and neutron exhibit no Coulombic attraction, but because they are held tightly in the core of the
nucleus, there must be some attractive force between them. Without the electrostatic caveat, this question
could not have a proton and a proton listed as an answer choice because of the strong force associated with the
nucleus that holds protons together. This is a more advanced topic that you may see in courses in nuclear
chemistry (atomic physics) but as it is presented in the MCAT, the ambiguity presented by nuclear attractions
(the uncertaintyof the source of the strong force) is not a probable topic for questions.
147
Section II Detailed Explanations
Choice Biscorrect. If an electron is descending, anet upward force must be applied to accelerate the particle in
the opposite direction. To increase the net upward force, the force upward must be increased or the force
downward reduced. This would slow the particle and eventually stop it from dropping. This means that either
the mass must be decreased, the gravity must be decreased, the charge must be increased, or the voltage of the
field must be increased. The easiest thing todo is increase the voltage of the field. In the actual experiment,
this is what is done. Increasing the number ofelectrons in the drop increases the charge, which should stop (or
at least slow) the descent orchange the direction of its path to an ascent. Decreasing the gravitational pull,
which requires placing the apparatus in an anti-gravity environment, would also alleviate the descending
difficulty. The only choice that would definitely not stop the descent, but would in fact increase the descent, is
to increase the mass of the oil droplet. The best answer is choice B.
Passage II (Questions 9- 14)
Isotopic Abundance and Average Atomic Mass
9. Choice Ais correct. All atomic masses intheperiodic table are referenced against carbon-12. Carbon-I2 is the
standard traditionally used. The carbon-12 isotope is defined as having a mass ofexactly 12.0000 amu. Carbon
is added toa sample to standardize the mass ofthe peaks given in the spectrum. Not all elements have exact
whole number masses, so a referenceis necessary. Youare wise to pick A.
Choice Bis correct. According toTable 1, magnesium has three major isotopes. The isotope with the lowest
atomic mass is the most abundant (78.70%). This means that the lowest peak by mass (the first peak from left
toright) must be thelargest peak. This is trueonly inthe spectrum ofchoice B.
Choice Dis correct. The average atomic mass for any element is the weighted average ofall of the isotopes of
the given element. Choices Aand Bare eliminated, because Table 1lists only two isotopes for silver, and the
calculation shows three values being summed. Choice A is the calculation of average atomic mass for
magnesium. The correct answer is choice D, because that has the correct percentages multiplied by the correct
isotopic masses. You would be a very wisdom-laden soul, ifyou were toselect Das youranswer.
12. Choice Dis correct. In order to send the isotopes of the element through the mass spectrometer, the element
must be in the gas phase. This means that any sample not in the gas phase initially must be converted to the
gas phase to be analyzed using mass spectroscopy. The process of converting a solid into a gas is referred to as
sublimation, thus making choice D correct.
13. Choice Dis correct. Because the average atomic mass is an average of the masses of all of the isotopes, the
average atomic mass must fall within the range of the isotopic masses, meaning that the average atomic mass
is greater than the lightest isotope but less than the most massive isotope. When there are two isotopes only,
then the average atomic mass is the weighted average of the two. In a fifty-fifty mixture of two isotopes, the
average atomic mass lies perfectly between the two masses ofthe isotopes. If the mixture favors one of the
isotopes, then the average atomic mass would be closer to the more abundant isotope than the less abundant
isotope. The true statements are II and III, making the best answerchoice D.
14. Choice Dis correct. The difference between isotopes of the same element is found in the number of neutrons. If
two atoms have a different number of protons, then they are not the same element. Choices A and B are
eliminated, because they allude toa different number of protons. The greater mass associated with the boron-
11 isotope is attributed to an extra neutron being present in the Boron-11 isotope as compared to the boron-10
isotope. The best answer is choice D.
10.
11.
Passage III (Questions 15 - 20)
Bohr Model of Hydrogen
15. Choice Bis correct. The ionization of hydrogen involves an electronic transition from the n =1energy level to
the n =oo energy level. Using Equation 1todetermine the transition energy yields the following:
2.L78xl0-18(Z2)[4r--Uj
\nr nf2/
where Z=1, nj =1, and nf =<*>. Having . in the denominator makes the number zero, which results in a value of
2.178 xlO'18 (Z2)J. With a value of Z=1, the ionization energy is 2.178 x10'18 J. The ionization energy of
hydrogen from its valence level is 2.178 x10"18J, which makes the best answer choice B.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 148 Section II Detailed Explanations
16. Choice A is correct. This solution requires relating the formula for the energy of a photon to the energy
equation given in the question. The relationship is as follows:
E = mc2 and E =&- .-. mc2 = M => mc =-k => X= ^-
X X X mc
which is choice A.
17. Choice C is correct. Choice Bis eliminated, because from the n = 2 energy level to the n = 1 energy level, there
is a drop in energy, which corresponds to emissionof light, not absorption. The best answer is choice C, because
the energy levels get closer together as the n value increases, so the transition from the n = 1 energy level to the
n = 2 energy level is always of greater energy than any transition starting at an energy state where n > 1.
However, to be certain, the following mathematical relationship can be derived:
Given that the energy level of an electron is E=-2.178 x10~18|2_ J,
the transition energy is AE =-2.178 x10-18 (Z2)U-- -UJ=2.178 x10"18 (Z2)U-- -U J-
Inr2 ni2/ Um2 nf2/
The relative energies are therefore comparable by the value of the 1-1- --M term.
W2 ni2/
\a2 22J \22 52J \22 42j \i 4/ l4 25/ U 16/
f1-1| >(-25 4_j >|_4_. _1_| => 3>_21_ >JL, therefore choice Cis the best answer.
\ 4/ VlOO 100/ U6 16/ 4 100 16
18. Choice C is correct. Statement I is valid, because as an electron's principle quantum number (n) increases, the
electron is in an energy level (orbit) that is farther from the nucleus. Statement II can be viewed from the
pictorial representation of the energy levels in Figure 1. As the value of n is increasing, the energy levels
become closer to one another. This makes statement II a valid statement. According to the answer choices, this
makes choice C the best answer. Alarger nuclear charge (Z) affects the energy at eachlevel, and thus affects
the transition energies as well. This makes statement III incorrect, and confirms that choice C is the best
answer. Choose C and feel a little giddy.
19. Choice D is correct. The electronic transition fromthe n = 5 energylevel to the n = 4 energy level is of lower
energy than the electronic transition from the n =4energy level to the n =3energy level. Therefore, the photon
emitted is oflower energy than a photon corresponding toorange light. Because green light is ofhigher energy
than orange light, choice Ais eliminated. The electronic transition from the n =4 energy level to the n =2
energy level is ofhigher energy than the electronic transition from the n =4energy level to the n =3energy
level. Therefore, the photon emitted is of higher energy than a photon corresponding toorange light. Because
red light is of lower energy than orange light, choice Bis eliminated. The electronic transition from the n =6
energy level to the n =4energy level is of lower energy than the electronic transition from the n =4energy level
to the n =3 energy level. Therefore, the photon emitted is of lower energy than a photon corresponding to
orange light. Because violet light is ofhigher energy than orange light, choice Cis eliminated. The electronic
transition from the n =5energy level tothe n =3energy level is ofhigher energy than theelectronic transition
from the n =4energy level tothe n =3energy level. Therefore, the photon emitted is ofhigher energy than a
photon corresponding toorange light. Because yellow light is ofhigher energy than orange light, choice Dis
the best answer.
20. Choice Bis correct. Choice A is an invalid statement, because according to Beer's law, the absorbance of light
is proportional to sample concentration. Because samples can have varying concentrations, they can in fact
absorb different amounts of light. The color of light (or frequency) corresponds to transition energy. Because
the sample, independent of concentration, absorbs the samefrequency of light each time, the transition energy
must be a fixed value. Thisleads to the conclusion that energy levels are fixed, and thus quantized. Choice B
is the best answer. The sample emits light of the same frequency, regardless of solution's temperature and
concentration. Temperature can affect the intensity of the light that is emitted, but not the frequency. The
frequency of the light remains constant. This eliminates choice C (temperature effects) and choice D
(concentration effects). Choice B is your answer choice.
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review 149 Section II Detailed Explanations
Paramagnetism and Liquid Crystal Displays
21. Choice C is correct. A liquid crystal display uses a paramagnetic compound in its polarizing cells to rotate (or
not rotate) light. A paramagnetic species has at least one unpaired electron. Because chlorides are -1 each,
cadmium in CdCl2 carries a +2 charge. This is the result of losing two 5s electrons from elemental cadmium,
which results in an electronic configuration of ls22s22p63s23p64s23d104p64d10 for Cd2+. Each level is full, so
there are no unpaired electrons. Choice A is eliminated. In elemental fluorine, the two fluorine atoms share
their unpaired electrons in the form of a bond. This means that thefluorine molecule has no unpaired electrons.
Choice B is eliminated. Because chlorides are -1 each, cobalt in CoCl2-6 H2O carries a +2 charge. This is the
result of losing two 4s-electrons from elemental cobalt, which results in an electronic configuration for Co2+ of
ls22s22p63s23p63d7. There is an odd number of electrons, so the species must be paramagnetic. The correct
choice is answer C. Just as was the case with F2> molecular hydrogen (H2) has no unpaired electrons.
22. Choice Ais correct. Atomic nitrogen (N) has the electronic configuration ls22s22p3. The last electron is the
third electron to enter the 2p orbital. The principle quantum number is given as 2, and because it is a p-orbital,
the angular momentum quantum number (l) is equal to 1. All of the answer choices contain these two values, so
nothing is eliminated. To obtain the m/ and ms values, the electrons must be filled into their respective p-
orbitals. This is drawn below:
@
m^= -1 m^= 0 m^= +1
Last electron is in the third p-orbital, so m= +1;
2
Last electron is spin up, so m s = + -
The correct answer is therefore choice A.
23. Choice A is correct. Having six ligands attached results in an octahedral shape. The correct answer is choice
A. Drawn below are generic structures for the other answer choices.
NO
NC
N 3-
C
Fe'- CN
C
N
Octahedral
.**
L* M"
Generic square planar
M-..
N>//
L
..**
L
Generic tetrahedral Generic trigonal bipyramidal
24. Choice C is correct. Polarity results from the asymmetric distribution of electron density. Cis compounds are
always polar. The correct answer is choice C. The structures for the four choices are drawn below.
Cl-
Cl1
CI
3-
Fe~ CI
ci
3-
FeCfe
CN
3-
..,u\\CN
'CN
NC Fe
CN
Fe(CN)
3-
Cl-
Cl1
.^\NH3
Fe-nh.
cis-Pt(NH3)2Cl2
ci-
HsN1
,^NH3
Fe-ci
trans-Pt(NH3)2Cl2
25.
26.
27.
Choice B is correct. To determine the number of unpaired electrons (as well as which one has the most), the d-
electron count for each transition metal cation first must be worked out. To determine the d-electron count for
the four cations, you must consider the electronic configuration. Neutral chromiumis [Ar^s^d5, so when it is
Cr3+, it has lost the 4s-electron andtwo 3d-electrons, leaving it with anelectronic configuration of [Ar]3d3. We
refer to Cr3+ as a d3-cation. Neutral manganese is [Ar]4s23d5, so whenit is Mn2+, it has lost both 4s-electron,
leaving it with an electronic configuration of [Ar]3d5. We refer to Mn2+ as a d5-cation. Neutral copper is
[Ar]4s13d1^1, sowhen it isCu+, it has lost its 4s-electron, leaving it with anelectronic configuration of [Ar]3d10.
We refer to Cu+ as a d10-cation. Finally, neutral nickel is [Ar]4s23d8, so when it is Ni2+, it has lost both 4s-
electron, leaving it with an electronic configuration of [Ar]3d8. We refer to Ni2+ as a d8-cation. From here, it
is a matter of placing the d electrons into their respective orbitals. The electron filling is as follows:
3+
Cr
2+
Ivfri
m] = -2 rri| = -l mi = 0 rri|= +l m]= +2
3 unpaired electrons
rrij= -2 mj = -1 rrtj= 0 rri|= +1 rnj = +2
Cu
Ni2+:
I I I i i
' ' ' '
rri| = -2 mi = -l mi = 0 mi = +l mi = +2
t i i
mi = -2 rri] = -1 rri| = 0 xr\\ = +1 mj = +2
The most unpaired electrons is found with Mn, so choice Bis the best answer.
Choice D is correct. The cyano ligand carries a -1 charge, so chromium must have a +6 charge in order for
Cr(CN)6 to be neutral. The amino ligand is neutral, so chromium must have a +3 charge in order for Cr(NH3)f,
to have an overall positive three charge. The charge of chromium is in fact greater in Cr(CN)6 than
Cr(NH3)6, so choice A is valid. The water ligand is neutral, so copper must have a +1 charge in order for
Cu(H20)6 tohave an overall +1 charge. When copper is neutral its electronic configuration is [Ar^s^d^0, so
when copper carries a +1 charge, it has electronic configuration [Ar]3d10. This gives copper ten d-electrons
which makes choice Bvalid. In both Fe(NH3)63+ and FeClf,3", iron has six ligands attached, so the shape of
both molecules is the same. Choice Cis valid. Scandium has theelectronic configuration [Ar^s^d1, so it can
lose only three electrons. It is not possible for scandium to have a +4charge (at most it is +3). This means that
choice D is not true. Pick choice D, and feel a little peppier because of it.
Choice B is correct. To determine the number of electrons on the central metal, the formal charge of the metal
first must be determined. From the charge, the electronicconfiguration is found, so the d-electron count is found.
Fe carries a +3 charge inboth Fe(NH3)63+ and FeCl63~, so choice Ais eliminated, because they both must have
the same d-count. Co carries a +3 charge inCo(H20)63+, and Mn carries a +2 charge inMnClft4". Neutral Co is
[Ar]4s23d7, soCo3+ hasa d-electron count of6(3d6). Neutral Mn is [Ar]4s23d5, soMn2+ hasa d-electron count of
5 (3d5). The d-electron counts are not equal, so choice Bmust be the correct answer. Cr carries a +3 chargein
Cr(NH3)63+, and Mo carries a +3 charge in MoCl63'. Neutral Cr is [Ar]4s13d5, so Cr3+ has a d-electron count of
3 (3d3). Neutral Mo is [Kr^sUd5, soMo3+ has a d-electron count of 3(4d3). The d-electron counts areequal so
choice C is eliminated. Finally, Os carries a +2 charge in Os(NH3)42+ and Rh carries a +3 charge in
RhCl3(PR3)3. Neutral Os is [Xe}6s24f145d6, so Os2+ has a d-electron count of 6 (5d6). Neutral Rh is
[Kr]5s24d7, so Rh3+ has a d-electroncount of 6 (4d6). The d-electron counts are equal so choiceD is eliminated.
PassageV (Questions 28 - 34)
Migration through a Membrane
28. Choice Ais correct. The relative sizes of ions from smallest to largest radius is: Li+ <Mg2+ <Na+ <Ca2+ <K+.
The rate of effusion is: Li+ > Mg2+ > Na+ > Ca2+ > K+. Li+ (the smallest) is the fastest while, K+ (the largest)
is the slowest. The best answer is A. Choice D is eliminated, because cations are smaller than neutral atoms.
29. Choice C is correct. Every trend in the periodic table comes back to the nuclear pull on the electrons. The
ionization potential is the energy required to remove an electron from the outermost shell, which in the case of
sodium and potassium is the 3s and the 4s, respectively. It requires less energy to remove an electron from the
larger 4s-orbital, because the electron is farther away from the nucleus than the 3s-orbital. This makes choice
C the best choice. Choice D is eliminated, because potassium has a lower electron affinity than sodium.

30. Choice C is correct. The size of an ion or element is a result of the nuclear pull on the electrons orbiting the
nucleus. This is best explained by choice C. Because C (carbon) has six protons, F (fluorine) has nine protons,
and both have the same principle quantum number for their valence shell, the nuclear pull of fluorine is greater
than that of carbon. Because the electrons are pulled closer to the nucleus in fluorine, and because size of an
atomis determined by the electroncloud, fluorine is smaller than carbon.
31.
32.
33.
34.
C: Is 2s 2p
F: ls22s22p5
Choice C is correct. F", Ne, and Na+ all have 10 electrons total, so CI" (with 18 electrons) is eliminated. Of the
three choices left, the largest nuclear charge is found on Na+, making it the smallest (the one with the
electrons held most tightly). Choose C to choose correctness. The following chart of the protons and electrons
for the three choices shows that the greater the proton-to-electron ratio, the smaller the species, assuming
that the outermost electrons are in the same valance shell.
Element Protons Electrons Observation Radius
Na+
11 10 protons exceed electrons, therefore it contracts 65 pm
Ne 10 10 protons equal electrons 70 pm
F"
9 10 electrons exceed protons, therefore it expands
136 pm
Choice A is correct. The electronic configuration for magnesium is ls22s22p63s2. Magnesium must lose 2
electrons (the two 3s electrons) to have a filled outer valance shell (the n = 2 shell). This would make
magnesium a +2 cation. Answer choice Ais a fine selection if your goal is to be correct.
Choice D is correct. According to periodictrends, the size of an atom increases as you descend a column in the
periodic table. I (iodine) is the lowest in the periodic table of the halogen choices, so I is the largest of the
halogen choices. Trust periodic trends and choose D.
Choice D is correct. If the pore were to distinguish by charge, then the greater the charge of the cation, the
slower the rate of migration for the cation. For example, if the pore were capable of forming attractive
interactions with the cations such as polar attraction or hydrogen bonding, then the pore would distinguish by
charge. The cations with the greatest charges are Mg2+ and Ca2+. Because Ca2+ is larger than Mg2*, Ca2+
would migrate more slowly than Mg2+ through a pore which distinguishes by both size and charge. This
means that overall, Ca2+ would have theslowest migration rate. This makes choice D the best choice.
Ionization Energy
35.
36.
Choice Cis correct. The electronic configuration for helium isIs2. The two electrons ofhelium areboth valence
electrons, so choice A is eliminated. Helium cannot have an effective nuclear charge greater than 2, because it
contains only two protons. Choice B is thus eliminated. The ionization energy does not include any
vaporization energy. Helium is a gas at room temperature, so there is no need to add energy to vaporize
helium. This eliminates choice D. The electron must be removed from the first quantum level. The first
quantum level experiences the greatest nuclear attraction, so the ls-electrons are hardest to remove. It is in
your best interest to choose C.
Choice D is correct. The second ionization energy of the alkali metals (lithium, sodium, and potassium) is
substantially larger than the first ionization energy, because the second electron is being removed from a filled
octet. After the first electron has been lost and the alkali metals are cations, their electronic configuration is
ns2np6, and they each have a filled valence shell. To remove the second electron would be like removing an
electron from a noble gas, only harder, because the nuclear charge is greater for the alkali cation than the
neutral noble gas. Given the answer selections, choice D is the best choice.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Choice D is correct. As stated in the passage, there is half-filled stability for the p-level when each of the p-
orbitals contains one electron. Nitrogen as a neutral element has half-filled stability, so when it is ionized, it
loses its half-filled stability. Oxygen, on the other hand, has one electron beyond the half-filled state;
therefore, when oxygen is ionized, it attains half-filled stability. Losing half-filled stability raises the
ionization energy of nitrogen (ionization is less favorable), while gaining half-filled stability lowers the
ionization energy of oxygen (ionization is more favorable). Nitrogen is less electronegative than oxygen, so
choice A is eliminated. Nitrogen has seven protons, while oxygen has eight, so choice B is eliminated.
Nitrogen is in fact larger than oxygen, but a larger radius implies that the electrons are farther from the
nucleus on average. Being farther from the nucleus, the electrons are not as tightlyheld, so the larger radius of
nitrogen would imply a lower ionization energy for nitrogen than oxygen. The best answer is choice D.
Choice A is correct. The ionization energies for aluminum, silicon, and phosphorus followan increasing linear
trend. All three elements are in the same row (period) of the periodic table, so the number of core electrons for
all three is the same. This eliminates choices C and D. As you move from left to right across a period of the
periodic table, the atomic number increases, so the number of protons increases, and ultimately the effective
nuclear charge increases. The increasing nuclear charge best explains the trend in first ionization energy
between aluminum, silicon, and phosphorus. Be a hero or heroine by choosing A. Note that there is no half-
filled or unfilled p-orbital stability affecting the observed trend.
Choice C is correct. Fluorine and chlorine are in the same column (family) of the periodic table. Fluorine has
its valence electrons in the n = 2 quantum level, while chlorine has its valence electrons in the n = 3 quantum
level. The larger the quantum number, the easier it is to remove the electrons and thus the lower the ionization
energy. Fluorine is more electronegative than chlorine, so choice A is wrong and eliminated. The effective
nuclear charge is found from both the number of protons and the number of core electrons. It is true that chlorine
has a greater nuclear charge than fluorine, but chlorine has more core electrons than fluorine. This implies
that the effective nuclear charge is approximately equal for the two halogens, eliminating choice B. The
larger radius of chlorine implies that the valence electrons are farther from the nucleus on average than the
valence electrons of fluorine. This makes the ionization energy of fluorine greater than that of chlorine and
consequently makes choice C the best choice. Choice D is nonsensical, so ignore it.
Choice B is correct. The term "oxidation" refers to the loss of an electron. The lower the ionization energy, the
easier it is for an element to lose an electron. The chart lists the first ionization energies, therefore it can be
inferred that the element with the lowest first ionization energy is MOST easily oxidized. Of the choices,
magnesium has the lowest first ionization energy. Choice B is the choice of winners... be a winner.
Choice B is correct. The relative ionization energies of krypton, bromine, and selenium are predictable, because
they are in the same row (period) of the periodic table. By comparing the three to chlorine, argon, and sulfur,
a trend can be determined. The ionization energies of argon, chlorine, and sulfur follow: I.E.Ar > I-E-Cl > I-E.$,
so the first ionization energies of bromine, krypton, and selenium should be LE.Kr > I-E-Br > I-E-Se/ choice B.
Choice A is correct. When sodium loses its first electron, it gains a filled octet and thus stability in its valence
shell. If it were to lose the second electron, the octet would be lost and thus it would become an unstable cation.
This explains the drastic difference between the first and second ionization energies for sodium. For magnesium
to have a full octet, it must lose two electrons resulting in relatively low first and second ionization energies.
This answer is best explained in answer choice A. The following illustrates the point:
1st ionization: Na(g) -
2nd ionization: Na+(g)
1st ionization: Mg(g)
2nd ionization: Mg+(g)
Na+(g) +e" Na: ls22s22p63s1 and Na+: ls22s22p6 Na+ has a filled octet.
Na2+(g) +e- Na+: ls22s22p6 and Na2+: ls22s22p5. Na2+ has lost filled octet.
Mg+(g) +e" Mg: ls22s22p63s2 and Mg+: ls22s22p63s1. Mg+ has no filled octet.
Mg2+(g) +e" Mg+: ls22s22p63s1 andMg2+: ls22s22p6. Mg2+ has a filled octet.
Passage VII (Questions 43 - 49) Transition Metal Trends
43. Choice B is correct. Table 1 lists room temperature density values of the transition metals. As a metal is
heated, it expands. The density of manganese decreases with increasing temperature, because volume increases
as mass remains constant. The density is slightly less than 7.43 grams per cm3, so the answer is choice B.

44. Choice D is correct. The first, second, and third rows of the transition metals followsimilar trends as you move
left to right across any particular row. The metals from the answer choices are all inthe second-row of the
transitions metals. No information is given for the second-row transition metals, so their relationship must be
extrapolated from the information given for the first-row transition metals. The first-row transition metals
follow the trend Cu > Ni >Cr >Mnfor the second ionization energy. According to periodicbehavior trends, Mo
and Cr should exhibit similar properties, Tc and Mn should exhibit similar properties, Pd and Ni should
exhibit similar properties, and Cu and Ag should exhibit similar properties. This means that the correct
relationship between the 4d-transition metals is found by substituting the second-row transition metals into
the relationship for the first-row transition metals. The relationship is Ag >Pd >Mo >Tc, making choice D
the best answer.
45. Choice Bis correct. The boiling point and melting point ofanelement increase asthe forces holding the atoms
together increase. The greater the forces, the greater the energy required to break the forces. Because zinc has
a lower boiling and melting point than other transition metals, it can be concluded that there are weaker forces
holding zinc atoms together than the other first-row transition metals. Because zinc has a filled d-shell
([Ar]4s23d10), there should beno covalent interactions between the zinc atoms. This makes choice Bthe correct
choice.
46. ChoiceC is correct. All of the transition metals listedin Table 1 losetheir 4s-electrons prior to losingtheir 3d-
electrons, implying that it is easier to lose the 4s-electrons. Because the 4s-level fills prior to the 3d-level, it
can alsobe concluded that 4s-electrons are at a lowerenergy level. In theory, the 3d-electrons should require
less energy to remove (since the 3d-level is of higher energy than the 4s-level). However, the 4s-electrons are
more exposed (further from the nucleus), so they are lost more easily than 3d-electrons. This makes choice C
the best answer.
47. Choice Bis correct. Within a row of the periodic table, atomic radius decreases as you move left to right in
main-group elements. Table 2 shows that it is nearly true for the first row of transition metals, with zinc
showing the only notable deviation. As you move left to right across a row of the periodic table, the mass of
the elements increases. The density of an element is measured in terms of mass per volume. As the atomic
radius increases, the volume increases, so moving left to right across a row in the periodic table results in
greater mass and reduced volume. This means that the density of the element increases from left to right in the
periodic table. Data inTable 2confirms this inverse relationship, except inthe case ofmanganese, where the
radius and density both increase. This eliminates choices Aand C. Manganese isanexception, because it has a
larger radius due to half-filled stability, but it follows the same trend with density because itsmass is greater
than chromium (the previous transition metal). Zinc follows the trend ofgreater radius associated with lower
density, soit is not anexception to that rule. Choice Dis eliminated, because a general trend is observable,
despite the deviation due to manganese. Choice Bis the best choice.
48. Choice A is correct. When a transition metal element becomes a cation, it loses electrons from the 4s-level. As
electrons are lost fromthe outer shell (valence shell), the radius must become smaller. As a note, the effective
nuclear charge is increasing, because the cation experiences less valence electron repulsion with the absence of
valence electrons. The best answer is choice A.
49. Choice Cis correct. Anegative reduction potential implies that it is less favorable toreduce thedication than
it is toreduce hydrogen ion (a proton). The unfavorable nature ofthe reduction correlates toa low ionization
energy. The easier it is to ionize (lose two electrons to become the dication), the easier it is to oxidize the
element. The easier it is to oxidize the element, the harder it is to reduce the dication that forms. The sum of
the first and second ionization energies of Mn is 2226 kj/mole, and the reduction potential is -1.18 volts. The
sum ofthefirst andsecond ionization energies ofCo is2405 kj/mole, andthereduction potential is -0.28 volts.
The sumof the first andsecond ionization energies ofFe is 2320 kj/mole, which is closer to thevalue ofcobalt
(differs by 85 kj/mole) than the value of Mn (differs by 94 kj/mole). The reduction potential should be between
-1.18 volts and -0.28 volts, but closer to-0.28 volts. The bestanswer ischoice C. (The actual valueforanyof you
electromotive force trivia buffs is -0.44 volts.) The data are given below:
hfa Mn2+ +2e" I 1stand 2nd I.E. =2226 kj/mole Eoxidation =1-18 V .-. Ereduction ="1-18 V
Fe Fe2+ + 2e" 11st and 2ndI.E. =2320 kj/mole E'oxidation = ??? V .-. Ereduction = ??? V
Co Co2+ +2e" 11st and 2nd I.E. =2405 kj/mole Eoxidation =0.28 V /. E"reduction =-0.28 V
Lasers
50. Choice C is correct. It is grunt work when it comes to figuring out electronic configurations! You can save
yourself some time by eliminating choices with either too many or too few electrons. Aluminum has thirteen
electrons, as do all of the choices. This means that no choices are eliminated. Choice A is out, because an s-
orbital can hold no more than two electrons. Choices B and D are eliminated, because the s-orbital fills
completely before the p-orbital begins to fill. The correct answer is choice C. If it is needed, the Aufbau
principle can be applied to determine the filling order.
51. Choice D is correct. Monochromatic light is light that is composed of photons with exactly one wavelength (or
frequency). This would occur if every photon emitted came from exactly the same electronic transition between
energy levels. However, not all electrons are at exactly the same energy level, due to the close proximity of
rotational and vibrational levels. As a result, not every electron undergoes the exact same energy transition,
and thus not every photon that is emitted has the same energy (and thus neither the same frequency nor
wavelength). This is stated near the end of the passage. Choose D to be a stellar student.
52. Choice B is correct. This question requires determining the photon's energy from its wavelength
(6.6 xlO"34 j-sec x 3.0 x 108 JSL) 198 x 1Q-26 T.m
E = he =
X
330 x 10"9m
The more important part of the answer is the power of ten. From that, you must select choice B.
53. Choice Ais correct. The shorthand for the electronic configuration ofvanadium is [Arl4s23d3. For the quantum
numbers of vanadium, we are concerned only with the last electron in vanadium (V). We are therefore
concerned with the third 3d-electron. Drawn below is the 3d level:
1 I

3.3 x 10"7m
E=MxlO"19J
3.3
3d
mi = -2 m! = -l rri|=0 mj = +l mj=+2
4s
m,= 0
Last electron is in the third d orbital, so m, = 0; Last electron is spin up, so ms =+ -
The last electron is in the n = 3 level, because that is given by 3d3. The electron is in the 1= 2 level, because
that is given by d-orbital in3d3. The mj andms values must be derived byfilling electrons into their respective
levels. As listed in the box, m\ =0, ms =+*/% which is choice A.
54. Choice D is correct. Half-filled stability would come into play for atoms that can promote one electron from
the lower energy s-orbital up to the higher energy d-orbital to yield a d5 species. The term "half-filled
stability" is derived from the half-filled d-level (the d-level has a maximum occupancy of ten electrons).
Half-filled stability is possible for only chromium (Cr), molybdenum (Mo), and tungsten (W), because they are
all in thecolumn that shouldbes2d4. Tobea quality chemistry student, pick choice D. Copper canexcite one s-
electron to fill the d-level completely (to make the species a d-^ atom).
55. Choice Bis correct. Whatever goes in, must come out for normal behavior of light. Thereare situations where
a high-energy photon is absorbed that results in the excitation of an electron through multiple levels. From
here, the electron may relax (fall back to the ground state) by a variety of pathways (either gradually
dissipating its energy or releasing the energyall at once). As a general rule, the energy that is absorbed is also
emitted. Pickchoice B. The exception to this rule is phosphorescence. With a phosphorescing species, light
energy is absorbed, and the compound undergoes a change in its electronic structure. The excited state is
therefore a different complex than the ground state. When the new complex gives off energy to fall to its
ground state, the photon released is not of the sameenergy as the original photon absorbed. Phosphorescence
and fluorescence were passage topicson a previous MCAT. Quantum numbers were alsoa passage topic.
56. Choice Cis correct. Visible light is found approximately in the range 390 x10"9 mto 740 x10'9 m. To be used in
the formula provided, the wavelength must be in terms of 10"6 m. Visible light has arange from 0.39 x10'6 mto
0.74 x10"6 m. The value for this range in terms of eV is 1-24/o.74 eV to 1-24/o.39 eV. This is a range from some
number just over 1.5 to some number barely greater than 3.0, a range that fits choice C.
PassageIX (Questions 57- 63)
Paint Pigments
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
Choice Ais correct. The reflected color of the four pigments are yellow for alizarin, blue for azurite, red for
cinnabar, and blue-green for verdigris. To determine the light absorbed, you must take the complementary color
of the color observed. Theabsorbencies are thus violet for alizarin, orange for azurite, green for cinnabar, and
orange-red for verdigris. The shortest wavelength is associated with the highest-energy light. Violet has
the highest energy in the visible spectrum, so it has the shortest wavelength. The correct answer is choice A.
Choice A is correct. When a sample is heated, its electrons are thermally excited to a higher energy state.
When they relax back to their ground state, light is emitted at an exact wavelength. This results in light of a
specific color, best described by choice A.
Choice Discorrect. The absorption spectrum contains black lines where the complementary colors of orange-red
(the colors reflected by realgar) should be. The complementary colors are blue-green, so the best answer
selection is choice D.
Choice C is correct. The reflected color of verdigris (Cu(C2H302)2-Cu(OH)2) is green-blue, so the absorbed
color is red-orange. Red and orange lie at the low end of the visible spectrum as far as the energy is concerned,
so the wavelength lies at the high end of the visible spectrum. The spectrum goes red-orange-yellow-green-
blue-violet, so the wavelength oforange light falls below 700 nm, and the wavelength of red is around 700 ran.
This means that the wavelength is less than 700 nm by a small amount. The best answer is 650 nm, which
makes the best answerchoice C. Therange of visible light in the EM spectrum is givenon page 113.
Choice Dis correct. Because white lead appears white incolor, nolight has been absorbed in the visible range.
When no light is absorbed, white light (the incident light) is reflected. The d-d transition associated with
white lead must lie outside of the visible range. The best answer is thus choice D.
Choice D is correct. Areflected color can beseen only when white light is reflected offof it. This means that
reflected colors cannot be seen in the dark (absence of white light). Candles cannot be seen in the dark, so a
colored candle is made froma wax that contains a dye that exhibits reflected color. Clothes cannot be seen in
the dark, soa fabric dye exhibits reflected color. If you wish to argue that there are certain glow-in-the-dark
fabric dyes, you're absolutely right. Glow-in-the-dark dyes exhibit emitted color. You are wise in the ways of
trivia. Unfortunately, you get zero credit on this question, because it is not the best answer. Knowing about
special cases like that is a great way to impress your peers, but it hurts you on a standardized exam. Ink from
pens cannot be seen in the dark, so ink exhibits reflected color. Gas-filled light tubes (i.e., neon lights) can be
seen in the dark, soa glowing gas-filled light bulb exhibits emitted color. The best answer is choice D.
Choice A is correct. The fastest decomposition is observed in the organic pigment. This is stated in the
passage. The inorganic pigments are already oxidized, so they should remain air-stable for some time. The
organic pigments can oxidize in air, so they do not last as long. The only organic compound among the choices
(and in Table 1) is 1,2-dihydroxyanthraquinone, which is the pigment of alizarin. This makes choice A
correct. Note that organic pigments contain conjugated 7t-networks and are found inoil-based paints.
Fluorescence and Phosphorescence
64. Choice Bis correct. As stated in the passage, a spin flip is associated with the process ofphosphorescence. In
the ground state, two electrons in the same orbital must be spin-paired (have opposite spins). Once an electron
has been excited to a higher electronic level where it occupies the orbital alone, it is free to flip its spin.
Equally, the electron that remains in the ground state may also flip its spin. Aspin flip changes the total
energy of the system. The excited electron may not be able to relax back to its original level, since it shares the
same spin as the lower level electron now. When the electron falls back to a lower level, it falls to a different
energy level, which emits a different frequency of light than it absorbed. Whether or not you know what
phosphorescence is, the answer is given inthe passage. The best answer is choice B.
65. Choice A is correct. A diatomic molecule can gain and lose energy in several ways, including changing
electronic levels, vibrating at different frequencies, and rotating at different frequencies. In a diatomic
molecule, when an electron is excited, the valence shell increases, which affects the bond length and bond
strength. The diatomic molecule ismore susceptible to changing its vibrational frequency. This is the physical
cause of fluorescence. When an electron in the diatomic molecule is excited, a photon is absorbed. Because
energy is dissipated from the excited statein theform of rotational and vibrational energy, the molecule is in a
lower energy state. When it finally relaxes back to its ground state, the energy of the photon emitted is less
than the energy ofthephoton absorbed. The energy ofthe photon absorbed is equal totheenergy ofthephoton
emitted plus the dissipated energy (vibrational and rotational transitions). This eliminates choices B and D.
As the wavelength of a photon increases, it has less energy. This implies that the photon emitted (being of
less energy) has a longer wavelength than the photon absorbed. Thismakes choiceAcorrect.
66. Choice C is correct. "Because the electronic energy levels are not singular levels and because the transition is
random, it is impossible for a molecule to absorb or emit light in such a manner that all of the photons
simultaneously have the same frequency (or wavelength). For this reason, monochromatic light is not
physically possible." These last two sentence from the passage state that monochromatic light (light of one
wavelength) is not possible, and give the reasoning for that. Because monochromatic light is not possible,
choices Band D are eliminated. The reasoning has to do with energy levels, not the quantization of light, so
choiceC is the best answer. This question about a difficult concept is actually an easy question to answer, if you
don't get intimidated. Learning to manage the intimidation factor associated with seeing new information is a
part of your MCAT preparation.
For the sake of learning the concept, we shall look at what choice C is stating. The diagram below shows two
scenarios, one where electronic transitions are not coupled with vibrational transitions (on the left) and the
other one where electronic transitions are coupled with vibrational transitions (on the right).
67.
Electronic Transition (no vibrational transitions)
~ EExcited
JGround
Electronic transitions occur without vibrational
transitions, so a single energy transition is possible.
Only one photon is emitted, which would result in
monochromatic light.
Electronic Transition (with vibrational transitions
V
EExcitedV2
EExcitedVl
EExcitedM)
^_^ EGroundV2
fipSf EGroundVl
EGroundV0
Electronic transitions occur with vibrational
transitions, so a multiple energy transitions
are possible. Multiple photons are emitted, so
the emission is polychromatic light.
From the diagram, it can be seen that when vibrational energy levels are closer together than electronic energy
levels, the transitions can couple. Single transitions between electronic levels are not possible, although single
transitions between vibrational levels appear to be possible. However, vibrational transitions couple with
rotational levels, so infrared emissions are not of single wavelength. The best answer is choice C.
Choice Bis correct. The arrow in Figure 1 that represents emission due to fluorescence is longer than the arrow
that represents emission due to phosphorescence, so the energy associated with fluorescence is greater than the
energy associated with phosphorescence. This means that the light from fluorescence is of shorter wavelength
than the light from phosphorescence. Choice B is the best answer. Choices A and D are the same answer
worded differently (if fluorescence emission is of longer wavelength than phosphorescence, then
phosphorescence must have emission of higher energy than fluorescence), so both choices should have been
eliminated (assuming as we do that there is only one best answer per question).
68. Choice A is correct. The shortest wavelength of light belongs to light of the greatest energy. This occurs with
the transition from the highest excited state relaxing to the lowest ground state. Choices C and D are
eliminated immediately, because the transitions they represent are increases in energy, which absorb light,
not emit light. The best answer is choice A, because the excited state is the highest of the choices left (A and
B), and both of the choices left drop energy to the same ground state.
69. Choice Bis correct. Fluorescence is possible with molecules, because molecules can exhibit vibrational energy
transitions. This allows for the dissipation of energy via of heat. Choices A and C true, so they are
eliminated. Because atoms do not have vibrational energy transitions (they have no bonds, so they have no
bending and stretching modes of their bonds), atoms may not necessarily exhibit fluorescence. It is possible to
convert ultraviolet light to the lesser-energy visible light by fluorescence, but it is not possible to convert
visible light to the higher-energy ultraviolet light by fluorescence. This makes choice Bthe false statement.
Passage XI (Questions 70- 76)
Flame Test
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
Choice Dis correct. The definition of paramagnetic is having at least one unpaired electron. The electronic
configuration for Na+ is ls22s22p6. All electrons are paired, because the octet is complete, eliminating choice
A. The electronic configuration for Sr2+ is ls22s22p63s23p64s23d104p6. All electrons are paired, because the
octet is complete, eliminating choice B. The electronic configuration for Cu+ is ls22s22p63s23p63dlu (copper
has filled d-shell stability, and it loses its 4s-electron before its 3d-electrons). All electrons are paired
because each level is filled, eliminating choice C. The electronic configuration for Cr3+ is ls22s22p63s 3p 3d
(first-row transition metals lose their 4s-electrons before losing their 3d-electrons). Not all electrons can be
paired, because there is an odd number of electrons. Because Cr3* is paramagnetic, choice Dis the best answer.
Choice B is correct. Chromium has half-filled d-shell stability, giving it an electronic configuration of
ls22s22p63s23p64s13d5. The correct choice is answer choice B. Without the half-filled stability, the answer
would have been choice A. Molybdenum (Mo) and tungsten (W) also exhibit half-filled stability.
Choice Dis correct. The largest transition is associated with the greatest energy. Vanadium dication (V2+)
produces violet light, therefore the highest energy is associated with vanadium dication. Pick choice D.
Choice C is correct. It can be observed from the data in Table 1 that as the first or second columns in the
periodic table are descended, the light emitted from the transition is of progressively higher energy. This
makes statement I a true statement. Because statement I is not included in choices Band D, choices Band D are
eliminated. It can be deduced from the answer choices that remain that statement III must be false. To verify
this, copper has the electronic configuration [Ar^s^d10, so Cu+ has the electronic configuration [Ar]3d10.
Nickel has the electronic configuration [Ar]4s23d8, so Ni2+ has the electronic configuration [Ar]3d8. Statement
III is in fact a false statement, because Cu+ and Ni2+ do not have the same electronic configuration. The
transition for potassium cation (K+) emits purple light, while the transition for chromium trication (Cr3+)
yields red light. The transition for K+ is of higher energy than the transition for Cr3+, making statement II
true and choice C correct.
Choice Bis correct. Nickel dication (Ni2+) has the electronic configuration ls22s22p63s23p63d8. The last
electron is the eighth electron in the 3d-orbital. The principle quantum number is given as 3and being in a d-
orbital makes 1equal to 2. From the answer choices, this is already known. To obtain the mi and ms values, the
electrons must be filled into their respective d-orbitals. This is drawn below:
<>i
,
0 i 0
&l J
Ni2+:
mi = -2 rri[ = -l rri| = 0 m! = +l mi = +2
Last electron is in the third d orbital, so rq=0; Last electron isspindown, so ms=- -
The correct answer is therefore choice B.
Choice Dis correct. Because violet light is higher inenergy than orange-yellow light, which is in turn higher
energy than red light, the electronic transitions for the group Ications increase as the column is descended. The
transition for rubidium should therefore be of greater energy than violet light, which makes the transition
emit ultraviolet light. Ultraviolet light is not detected by the human eye, so the flame from heating rubidium
should appear colorless. The best answer is choice D.

158
76. Choice Cis correct. An emission spectrum shows just the color emitted by the compound after it has been
excited. The color observed in the flame test is an emitted color, so it is present in the emission spectrum.
Crimson was emitted by lithium cation, so the emission spectrum is simply a bright red line. The best answer is
choice C. Otherminoremissions maybeseen, but theywon'tbe as intense as the red emission.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
Glyphosate
Choice Cis correct. Two isotopes (of neutral elements) have the same number of protons and electrons, but a
different number ofneutrons. Choice Ahas onemore proton than phosphorus-32, choice Bhas one more electron
than phosphorus-32, and choice Dhas oneelectron less thanphosphorus-32. This eliminates choices A, B, and
D. Choice Chas a mass that is one less with the same number of protons as phosphorus-32, soit must have one
neutron less. This makes choice C the correct answer.
Choice Bis correct. Nitrogen in neutral molecules makes three bonds total (in this case, the three bonds are a 11
sigma bonds), and has one lone pair of electrons. The lone pair of electrons repels the electrons in the three
sigma bonds to form a trigonal pyramidal orientation about the nitrogen. This can be confirmed when looking at
the hybridization of nitrogen (sp3). The best choice is therefore answer B. Drawn below is a three-
dimensional picture of Glyphosate with the nitrogen isolated:
v",,,CH2C02Na+
CH2OP03H+ Na+
Choice Ciscorrect. The concentration of 32P label atconsecutive half-life points along the first-order decay is:
188 - 94 -> 47 -> 23.5. Each arrow represents one half-life, so after three half-lives the concentration is less
than 25 ppm (it has decayed to 23.5 ppm). To reach a concentration of 25 ppm, it takes a little less than three
half-lives. The best answer is a little less than 42 (3 x 14) minutes. Choice C, 41 minutes, is the best answer.
Choice Ciscorrect. An ionic compound ismade upof ions. The quickest way, without just knowing the answer,
is tolook for metals suchas sodium. Ammonia is held together by three covalent bonds (sigma bonds). Carbon
dioxide is held together by two covalent bonds (two doubles bonds made up of one sigma bond and one 7t-bond
each). It is onlyincompound III, Na2PC>3H, that we find ionic bonds. Choice C, III only, is the best answer.
Choice Ais correct. Because 32P remains chemically equivalent after nuclear decay, it is phosphorus. This
means that a proton was neither gained nor lost inthe process. When a neutron is lost, a phosphorus-32 isotope
becomes a phosphorus-31 isotope. This makes choice Athe best choice listed. An alpha particle contains two
protons and twoneutrons, so theloss of analpha particle would form aluminum, eliminating choice B. The loss
ofa beta particle converts a neutron intoa proton, which would form sulfur, eliminating choice C. The loss of a
positronconvertsa proton into a neutron which would form silicon, eliminating choice D. The answer choices
did not list a gamma ray. Agamma ray is a high-energy photon that, when given off, does not change the
chemical behavior, either. This was not listed as a choice, but it is food for thought.
Technetium Decay
82.
Choice A is correct. Beta decay is the loss of an electron from the nucleus. No mass is lost, therefore the mass
should not change. Choices Cand Dare eliminated. Charge must be conserved, so losing a negative charge
should increase the atomic number by 1. This makes choice A the best answer. The reaction is shown below:
210Po _> 2jgAt + 0e
83. Choice Cis correct. An alpha particle is a helium nucleus (mass =4amu and z =2), so the loss of an alpha
particle decreases themass by 4and theatomic number by2. 250Bk is 4mass units less than254Es, sochoice A is
eliminated. 234Th is 4mass units less than 238U, so choice Bis eliminated. 221Bi is only 2mass units less than
223Fr, sochoice Cis the best answer. 243Pu is 4 mass units less than 247Cm, so choice Dis eliminated. What
else but berkelium could be right?
84. Choice C is correct. From the passage, the half-life is given as six hours. The twelve-hour duration is
therefore a total of two half-lives. The initial concentration should therefore be cut in half two successive
times to determine the final concentration. The math is as follows: 120 uCi > 60 uCi > 30 u\Ci. The final
readingis 30u.Ci, so thecorrect choice is choice C.
85. Choice Bis correct. Electron capture bya nucleus decreases the positive charge (converting a proton into a
neutron), which reduces zby1. This converts element #6(carbon) into element #5(boron).
12C + 5e -> 12B
The question is asking for anuclear process that forms boron. Positron capture increases the nuclear charge by
one, so positron capture by boron cannot yield boron. It yields carbon, one atomic number higher, which
eliminates choice A. Positron decay decreases the nuclear charge byone, sopositron decay bycarbon yields
boron, one atomic number lower. This makes choice Bthe best answer. Beta capture decreases the nuclear
charge by one, so beta capture by nitrogen yields carbon, one atomic number lower. This eliminates choice C.
Alpha decay decreases the nuclear charge by two, so alpha decay by oxygen yields carbon, two atomic numbers
lower. This eliminates choice D. Thebest answer is choice B, the only choice that didn't formcarbon. The
processes inchoices A,B,C, andDareshown below.
Choice A: ijB +Jfi -> aJC; Choice B: igC -> 12,B +?fi; Choice C: 14,N +_?e -> ^C; Choice D: ijO -> ^ +\a
86. Choice D is correct. A gamma ray is high-energy electromagnetic radiation, not a particle. The energy
associated with a gamma ray is greater than the energy associated with an x-ray. Because it is a photon
(energy) and not a particle, a gamma ray is massless and without charge. When the nucleus of what emits a
gamma ray, it drops from anuclear excited state to alower (and possibly ground) state, as mentioned in the
passage. No mass is lost by gamma emission. Choice Dis the best answer. Choice Adescribes an alpha
particle, and choice Bsort of describes abeta particle (the charge is negative one, but it is not necessarily the
nuclear charge). Choice Cis not a common nuclear particle and is probably a conglomeration of subatomic
particles.
87. Choice B is correct. The electronic configuration for 99Tc is no different than for any other isotope of
technetium. Although isotopes have adifferent number of neutrons, they have an identical number of protons
and an identicalnumber of electrons in their neutral state. Technetium is elementnumber 43,so it has 43protons
and 43 electrons as a neutral element. The filling ofelectrons follows standard Aufbau principle rules, which
makes answer Bthe right choice. Itis sometimes ashortcut to look at the periodic table and see where the last
electron falls. In the case of technetium, it is directly below manganese, so its last electron should be a d -
electron (like manganese). The last electron is ina 4d-orbital, sochoice Bisbest.
88. Choice Ais correct. Gamma decay just involves the loss ofnuclear energy, and nota particle. Technetium goes
from an excited nuclearstate to a lowernuclear stateafterit undergoes gamma decay. No nuclear particles are
lost or gained by technetium, so its mass and atomic number remain the same. This means that the nuclear
composition of the element remains the same, so the element remains the same. The correct choice is thus A.
Passage XIV (Questions 89 -95) ColdFusion
89. Choice Bis correct. Reaction 3andReaction 4show fusion oftwodeuteriumatoms. The fusion of twodeuterium
atoms can generate either atritium (3H) and hydrogen (aH) (as shown in Reaction 3), or one neutron and helium
isotope (3He) (as shown in Reaction 4). The only particle in the answer choices that is not shown as aproduct
is hehum-4, so the correct answer is choice B.
90. Choice Bis correct. We see inthe passage, that the major piece of evidence for believing anuclear reaction had
transpired was the release of more heat than can be explained by the electrochemical cell reaction. The
expected nuclear products were observed only in low concentrations however. The best answer is choice B. The
absorption oremission ofanelectron (beta particle) had noeffect onthe reaction.
91. Choice Dis correct. As described inthe passage, cold fusion is anuclear fusion reaction that can becarried out
at room temperature. The example inthe passage takes place inanelectrode within a test tube. Because more
energy is released than expected, itcan be assumed that the fusion reaction is exothermic (because of the excess
heat that was released). The correct answer is choice D. Pick D, and you'll smile brightly.
92. Choice Ais correct. In the passage, we read that nuclear power plants employ the fission reaction, because to
date, fusion reactions require both high temperature and strong magnetic fields. Fusion reactions require more
input energy thanthe fusion reaction releases, making them endothermic and unfavorable as a source of energy.
The best answer is choice A.
93. Choice Cis correct. Afusion reaction results in the combination of the nuclei of the twoparticles undergoing
fusion. Answer choice C involves the combining of twoparticles to form one product (with an atomic number
greater than the two incident particles). This defines fusion. Choices A and Bare both fission, and choice D
involves the emission of a gamma photon via thedrop from a nuclear excited state to the nuclear ground state.
94. Choice Bis correct. An alpha particle has a mass of four and two protons, and a deuterium nucleus has a mass of
two and oneproton. After losing an alpha particle and deuterium nucleus, themassof an element drops bysix
and the number of protons drops by three. Choices Aand Care not sixmass units less, so they are eliminated.
Choice Dis not three atomic numbers less, so it is eliminated. Theprocess is shown below.
2gU-fa + 2H+2g|Ac
95. Choice C is correct. Achange in the atomicnumber results froma change in the number of protons in the nucleus.
The alpha particle has two protons, so the capture of an alpha particle increases the atomic number by two.
This eliminates choice A. The capture of a beta particle converts a proton into a neutron, so the atomic number
decreases by one. This eliminates choice B. The tritium nucleus carries one proton, so capture of a tritium
nucleus increases the atomic number by one. This eliminates choice D. A neutron capture increases the mass by
one, but does not affect the atomic number. Choice C is the best answer.
Questions 96 -100 Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
96. Choice D is correct. "Quantized energy levels" refer to states of finite energy where electrons may exist. For
this exam, you should know conceptually what behavior is expected. The existence of a neutron or proton at the
nucleus may exert Coulombic forces on an orbiting electron, but it does not have any bearing on the quantization
of energy levels. Choice A is therefore eliminated. The scattering of x-rays by thin sheets of material (metal
foil in the Rutherford experiment) shows that matter is mostly empty space, with dense uniformly spaced
nuclei. Choice B is eliminated. The bending of any particle when moving through a magnetic field simply
indicates that the particle in motion has a net charge of some kind, and that the direction of motion is not in
line with the field. Choice C is eliminated. Distinct lines (which can be reproduced in separate trials) show
that the same amount of energy is absorbed when an electron is excited. If the transition between levels is a
quantized value (an exact quantity), then it seems logical that the energy levels are also quantized. This
makes choice D the correct answer.
97. Choice D is correct. As the wavelength of a photon increases, the energy of the photon decreases. This question
is testing your recall of relative energetics of electromagnetic radiation. The lowest energy of the choices given
is associated with infrared light. This makes D the best choice.
98. Choice A is correct. The value of Zeff for H is +1. The value of Zeff for He+, the starting point for the second
ionization of helium, is +2. Because theionization energy is proportional to Z2, the second ionization energy of
helium should be four times as great as the ionization energy of hydrogen. Both electrons in question are being
ionized from the ls-orbital, so n = 1 for both ionization energies. You need consider only the effective nuclear
charge. To feel the sensation of correctness, pick choice A. Drawn below are the respective ionization
reactions:
n = l
H H+ + le"
He
n=l
He + le"
99. Choice D is correct. Sodium cation has ten electrons, which eliminates choices A and B, both with eleven
electrons. Choice Cis the ground state (all electrons fill sequentially) for sodium cation, given that it has the
ten electrons filledin order. In choice D, there are ten electrons and an electronhas been excitedfromthe 2p-
level to the 3s-level. This leaves choice D to be the best answer.
100. Choice Bis correct. The most common shape for a transition metal with five Ugands is trigonal bipyramidal.
The best answer is choice B. Square planar has only four ligands attached, so choice A is eliminated.
Hexahedral does not exist; and if it did, hex is Greek for six, and only five ligands are attached. This would
also eliminate choice D. Drawn below is a chart for deterrnining molecular shapes:
Coordination Number = 2
L A L
no lone pairs (sp hybr.)
Linear
Bond Angle = 180
L
IT L
Trigonal Planar
Bond Angles = 120
L
I
-N.
l*JTv
Tetrahedral
Bond Angles = 109.5

IT L
2
one lone pair (sp hybr.)
Bent
Bond Angle < 120

one lone pair (sp hybr.)
Trigonal Pyramidal
Bond Angles < 109.5
L
..... L
L
no lone pairs (dsp hybr.)
Trigonal Bipyramidal
Bond Angles = 90&120
162

* A *
/ X
L L
two lone pairs (sp hybr.)
Bent
Bond Angle < 109.5
L
q
two lone pairs (dsp hybr.)
Trigonal Planar or T-shaped
Bond Angles = 90, 120, 180
L
L^Â- L
2 3
no lone pairs (d sp hybr.)
Octahedral
Bond Angles = 90
Section in
Equilibrium
by Todd Bennett
A(g) + B(g) ^=^ C(g) + D(g)
Keq =
Time
Products = (Pc)(Pp)
Reactants (Pa)(Pb)
Time
Fundamentals of Equilibrium
a) Definitions and Terminology
b) Equilibrium Constant (Keq)
c) Reaction Quotient (Qrx)
d) Case Specific K-Values
e) Keq Calculations
f) Using Keq to Calculate Shifts
g) Complex Equilibrium
h) Experimental Determination of K
Le Chateliers Principle
a) Effect of Stress
b) Perturbations and Shifts
i. Direction of Shift
Solubility
a) Definitions
b) Solubility Rules
c) Ionic Structures
i. nomenclature of Salts
ii. Polyatomic Ions
d) Solubility Product and Molar Solubility
e) Relative Solubility
f) Solubility Experiments
g) Common Ion Effect
h) Separation by Precipitation
i) Ion Exchange Columns
Berkeley
Ur'E'V.Ê'W8
>
>
Equilibrium Section Goals
Know how to determine an equilibrium constant from experimental data.
There are experiments that are designed todetermine achange intotal pressure over time for agas
equilibriumsystem. The change inpressure (fromthe time the reactants are mixed until the reaction
reaches asteadyequilibriumpressure) canbeused tocalculate anequilibriumconstant. The difference
inpressure is theshiftrequired toreach equilibrium.
Understand Le Chatelier's principle and its effects on equilibrium systems.
LeChatelier's principle predicts certainbehavior inanequilibriumsystemoncea stressis applied
tothesystem. Because changing onevariable canaffect another variable (for instance, changing the
pressure may also change thevolume), you must evaluate how thechemical reaction will adjust to
alleviatethe applied stressin order to reestablish equilibrium.
Understand the mathematical arrangement of the equilibrium expression.
Theequilibriumexpression, simply put, is the ratioof productsover reactants. Themathematical
rules require that you do not put pure liquids (solvents) or solids into the expression. If more than
one mole ofproduct orreactant are involved inthe reaction, then the stoichiometric coefficient in
the balanced equation becomes anexponent in the equilibrium expression. The value of the
equilibrium constant changes only with temperature.
Know the effects of the system variables P, V, n, and T on reaction equilibrium.
It is not possible tochange justonevariable inanequality. Changing theconditions of thesystem
shifts an equilibrium,but it does not necessarily changethe equilibriumconstant. The numerical
value of the equilibrium constant changes only with temperature.
Know the relationship between molar solubility and solubility product.
The molar solubility of a salt is the concentration of the salt (as measured in molarity) needed to
solvate an aqueous solution completely. The solubilityproduct is an equilibrium constant for the
dissociation reaction. What makes solubility products unique is that thereactant is alwaya a solid,
so the equilibrium expression has no denominator. Molar solubility is a more useful quantity to
know than solubility product, because it measures the amount of salt in solution.
Understand separation by precipitation and the chelation effect.
Chelating is the formation of a Lewis acid-basebond between a lone pair-donor (ligand) and a lone-
pair acceptor (central atom). Chelation changes thesolubility ofa saltbychanging theconcentration
of free ionsin solution. When a ligand bindsa central metal, thereis a formation constant that
measures the strength of the chelation. This allows for specific ions to be removed from solution
bybinding themtoform a more soluble complex ion. Ions also can beremoved from solutionby
adding counter-ions that form an insoluble salt.
Understand the common ion effect.
The common ion effect is a twist on Le Chatelier's principle as it applies to solubility. The addition
of products to an equilibriummixtureshiftsthe reactionin the reverse direction, which in the case
of solubility results m precipitation. This means that addition of an ion to solution or the presence
of an ion in solution reduces the solubility of a salt.
General Chemistry Equilibrium introduction
Equilibrium
Equilibrium, as you have learned it, involves the balancing of a chemical reaction
between reactants and products. Equilibrium is a state that is achieved when the
reactants go on to form products at the same rate that the products go back to
form reactants. Equilibrium reactions take place in both the gas phase and
solution state, where reactant and product molecules are free to migrate and
collide. The kinetic theory model states that molecules must collide to react.
Equilibrium occurs only in a closed system, although steps in a pathway (an
open system) may be an equilibrium reaction.
Equilibrium is an odd yet obvious thing. It is the essence of nature and the foe of
permanence. We can't beat it... EVER! The concept of equilibrium pervades not
only chemistry, but politics, economics, sociology, health...even our
relationships. A bank represents a good illustration of this concept. There are
deposits and withdrawals continually going on, but on the whole, the amount of
money in the bank remains essentially constant (except following a bank
robbery, after which a new equilibrium will be established). Everything lies in a
balance, and all one has to do is read the scale. Fortunately, in chemistry it is easy
to read the scale. To understand equilibrium better, consider the following saga:
In a certain house with a large backyard lived an elderly man with a plum tree.
Next-door to him lived a young boy who also had a plum tree. Given that
neither of these two were farmers by any means, the fruit generally fell to the
ground and rotted. One day, while out in his back yard cleaning up the plums,
the elderly man was struck by a flash of insight; instead of using all his energy to
consolidate the plums in a trash container, he would instead simply fling them
over the fence. The boy next-door saw this and decided that two could play at
this game. The next time he was out in the back yard, he flung a fewplums over
the fence. This soon evolved into a daily contest with the advantage going to the
little boy, for he was younger and quicker and could move around the yard
faster. He was therefore able to fling the unlikely projectiles over the fence at
three times the rate of the old man. At first, there were roughly equal amounts of
plums in eachyard, but due to the boy's greater flinging prowess, the old man's
yard gradually accumulated more. Finally, when the point was reached where
the old man's yard had three times as much as the boy's, the overall amount in
eachyard becamestable and didn't change. Because the boy had so fewplums in
his yard, he spent the majority of his time running around collecting them. The
man, however, could simply stand in one place, scooping and flinging. From the
neighbors' perspective, for every one that would sail through the air to the left,
there was one that would sail through the air to the right. The plum-flinging had
reached its equilibrium. The ratio of the plums in each yard was equal to the
ratio of the rates at which the two could fling plums (known as the "plum-
flingingrate"). This in essence is as deep as equilibrium gets.
This example may not be the most eloquent, but it serves the purpose of
generating a memorable analogy to chemical reactions. It is the external
conditions that affect the equilibrium between products and reactants, and a
skilled chemist knows how to manipulate this relationship. We will address how
equilibrium plays out in a solvent environment and in the gas phase. We shall
view the effect of factors governing the system, such as volume, pressure,
temperature, and concentration. We will finishby lookingat the equilibrium of a
salt dissociating into aqueous solution, and the factors that are involved.
Throughout all of the discussion, Le Chatelier's principle will play a roll.
General Chemistry
Equilibrium
Fundamentals of Equilibrium
jjiiiilliijiiM^
Definitions and Terminology
Equilibrium occurs ina closed system when the rate of the forward reaction is
equal to the rate of the reverse reaction (rate forward =rate reverse). The result
is that from a macroscopic perspective, the system appears not to change.
However, a net change of zero does not automatically mean the systemis in
equilibrium. Reactions may stop when there is noreactant present, which is a
case ofnoreaction, not equilibrium. As anintroduction toequilibrium, consider
Reaction 3.1, where R=reactant, P =product, kf = forward rate constant, and kr
= reverse rate constant.
R ^
Reaction 3.1
The forward rate for this reaction is based on the amount of reactants and the
forward rate constant (rate forward = kf[Reactants]). The reverse rate for this
reaction is based on the amount of products and the reverse rate constant (rate
reverse = kr[Products]). Equilibriumis achieved when:
kf[Reactants] = kr[Productsl
(3.1)
Example 3.1
Which of the following graphs represents what is observed over time for a
reaction starting with all reactants?
Reverse rate
Time Time
Solution
Choices A and Bare eliminated, because the rates must be equal at equilibrium,
andneither graphreflects this. Choice Dis eliminated, because straight lines are
not very common for graphs inchemistry. Astraight line would imply that the
reaction abruptly stopped, once equilibrium wasreached. The reality is that the
reaction gradually slows untilit reaches equilibrium. The best answer is choice
C, which shows equal rates after time and constantly changing rates until
equilibrium is reached.
Copyright by The BerkeleyReview
166
The Berkeley Review
General ChemiStiy Equilibrium Fundamentals of Equilibrium
Equilibrium Constant (Keq)
The equilibrium constant is a mathematical quantity that is calculated for a
reaction at equilibrium. By definition, the equilibrium constant is the
concentration of products at equilibrium divided by the concentration of
reactants at equilibrium. Equation 3.2 shows this relationship.
Keq =[PrduCtel/[Reactants]
By applying Equation 3.2 to Reaction 3.1, we find that the equilibrium constant is
equal to the forward rate constant divided by the reverse rate constant.
Example 3.2
For Reaction 3.1, if the forward rate constant is four times the reverse rate
constant, what is Keq after a catalyst has been addedthat doubles therateof the
forward reaction?
A. Keq =2
B. Keq =4
C Keq = o
D. Keq =16
Solution
Adding a catalyst lowers the activation energy, so the reaction speeds up. In this
example, the forward rate is doubled, because the forward rate constant is
doubled. However, the activation energy is lowered for the reverse reaction as
well. The reverse reaction rate is also doubled. The ratio of the forward rate to
the reverse rate remains the same. This means that equilibrium is the same, so
the equilibrium constant (Keq) is thesame. Equilibrium is achieved sooner, but
the same equilibrium conditions are reached. The forward rate is four times the
reverse rate, so the equilibrium constant is equal to 4, choice B.
Table 3.1 lists some rules about the equilibrium constant you must know.
Among them is the rule that the numerical value of Keq changes only with
temperature. Knowing this rule would have made Example 3.2easier to solve.
Stoichiometric values from the balanced equation become exponents
in the Keqexpression.
Do not include solids or pure liquids in the Keq expression, only
solutes (for Kc) andgases (for Kp).
The numerical value of Keq varies only with changing temperature,
not with catalysts, pressure, volume, or moles.
Table 3.1
When multiple reactants or multiple products are present in the reaction, which
is usually the case, rule # 1 applies. Because the concentration of a solid or pure
liquid (solvent) does not change, their values are constant. For this reason, they
are ignored in the Keq determination. As a rule of thumb, only molecules that
are free to move and are rarely in contact with other reacting molecules affect the
equilibriumexpression. Lastly, because the equilibriumconstant is a measure of
energy distribution, only a change in temperature (a measure of the system's
energy) changes the valueof Keq.
Copyright byTheBerkeley Review 167 Exclusive MCAT Preparation
General Chemistry Equilibrium Fundamentals of Equilibrium
Consider Reaction 3.2,
kf
2A(g) ^ k " B(g) + C(s)
Reaction 3.2
Applying the three rules toReaction 3.2 generates thecorrect expression for Keq.
TBirci
We start byplugging inproducts overreactants: Keq =
[A]
TBITCI
Invalid, because stoichiometric coefficients must be exponents .*. Keq =
[Al2
TBI
Invalid, because Kea does not include solids or liquids/. Keq =z-
4 [A]2
Kea can be written as either Kc =-M-M"1 orKp =S_ atm."1
4 [A]2 K (PA)2
Reaction Quotient (Qrx)
When a reaction is not at equilibrium, the expression of products over reactants
is said to be the reaction quotient (Qrx)- The relationship between Keq and Qrx
dictates the directionin whicha reactionproceeds to reach equilibrium. When K
> Q, the denominator of Q (reactants) is too large and the numerator of Q
(products) is too small. To establish equilibrium, the reaction must shift to the
right. The reaction shifts to the right to increase the products (numerator) and
decrease the reactants (denominator). When K < Q, the denominator of Q
(reactants) is too small and the numerator of Q (products) is too large. To
establish equilibrium, thereaction mustshifttotheleft. The reaction shifts tothe
left to decrease the products (numerator) and increase the reactants
(denominator). A shortcut to determine the direction the reaction proceeds to
reachequilibrium involves drawing the relationship of Kand Q alphabetically,
and then converting the <or >sign into an arrow. For example: K>Qbecomes
K> Q, so the reaction moves right to reach equilibrium, because the arrow is
pointing to the right.
Example 3.3
When the reaction quotient is greater than theequilibrium constant, which of the
following is NOT true?
A. The systemhas too many products and too few reactants.
B. The reaction is displaced from equilibrium.
C. The reaction must shift in the forward direction to reach equilibrium.
D. The reverse reaction rate is greater than the forward reaction rate.
Solution
When the reaction quotient is greater than the equilibriumconstant, the system
has an excess of products and shortage of reactants, relative to equilibrium.
Choice A is a valid statement. The system is not at equilibrium, so choice Bis a
valid statement. Toreach equilibrium, the reaction must have a net shift in the
reverse direction to reduce the amount of products and increase the amount of
reactants. This means that the reverse reaction rate is greater than the forward
reaction rate, making choice Dvalid. Thesystem cannot have a net shift in the
forward direction, so choice C is an invalid statement.
Case Specific K-values
All equilibrium constants obey the same rules, but depending on the reaction,
there may be special features that recur. Different reactions have special K-
values. Table 3.2 liststhesixtypesof Keq values weshalladdress.
Ktype Type of reaction to which the K applies
Kp Kgq for thereaction of gases. Values areinpressure units.
Kc Keq for the reaction of solutes. Values arein concentration units.
Ksp Keq for saltsdissociating intoions. Measures thesolubility.
Ka Kgq for acidsdissociating in water. Measures theacidity.
Kb Keq for baseshydrolyzing in water. Measures thebasicity.
Kw Keq forautoionization ofwaterintohydronium andhydroxide.
Table 3.2
Understanding that the rules are the same for all types of K-values will enhance
your journey through the wonderful world of equilibrium. Knowing that the
common ion effect is nothing more than Le Chatelier's principle applied to
solubility systems is a perfect example of how the rules apply to all equilibrium
systems. There are just different names to describe the reaction conditions.
Keq Calculations
Now comes the math part, which we will handle through practice! Getting
reacquainted with equilibrium math is a matter of repetition and practice. Once
you feel sufficiently familiarized, then move on to the next topic.
Example 3.4
At 650K, the partial pressures of the component gases were determined for the
following reaction:
H2(g) + I2(g) ^=^ 2HI(g)
Ph2=0.20 arm., Pi2 =1.50 arm., andPhi =3.00 atm.
What is theKpfor this reaction?
A. 10.0 atm.
B. 15.0 atm.
C. 30.0 atm.
D. 45.0 atm.
Solution
Possibleerrors with this problem stem from forgetting to square the numerator
or ignoringl2, becauseyou have seenit as a solidbefore (notethat this reactionis
at 650K). In this case, forgetting to square the numerator would yield an answer
that is too small by a factor of 3. As long as you don't forget these things, the
problemmerely involves doing your math quickly. Themath setup is as follows:
Kp =
(Phi)2 _ (3)'
(PH2)(Pl2) (0.2)(1.5)
Choice C is the correct answer. To make this a more conceptual type of question,
they may give the answer choices as ranges rather than exact numbers.
= _9_=90 = 30
0.3 3
169
Example 3.5
At 323C, there are 0.10 moles H2(g), 0.20 moles HC104(g), 0.10 moles H20(g),
and 0.36 moles HCl(g) at equilibrium in a 400-mL flask. What is Keq for this
equilibrium mixture?
lHC104(g) + 4H2(g) ^=^ lHCl(g) + 4H20(g)
A. 0.0362
B. 0.0724
C 1.8000
D. 44.100
Solution
In this problem, the system is already at equilibrium, so no determination of
changes (x-values) is required. This problem is of the plug-'n'-chug (simple
substitution) type. Moles can be used directly in the equilibrium expression,
because although it is technically correct to use concentrations, in this case
volume cancels out of both the denominator and the numerator, leaving just the
moles. This is true any time that the number of reactants is equal to the number
of products in either the gas phase or as solutes. The question is really just a
math problem, solved in the following way:
Ke _(PHC1)(PH20)4 ,(036)(0.10) 4_0,36 -0.18 . L8
^ (PhC104)(Ph2)4 (0.2
This makes choice C the correct answer.
Example 3.6
At STP, the partial pressure of NO is 152torr and the partial pressure of O2 is 228
torr. If the mixture is at equilibrium, what is the Keq at STP for the following
reaction?
NO(g) + Ctyg) ^*- N03(g)
A. 8.333 arm."1
B. 4.167 atm.'1
C. 1.000 arm."1
D. 0.240 atm.'1
Solution
The key piece of informationin this question is STP(standard temperature and
pressure). This implies that the total pressure of the systems is 760torr. The sum
of the partial pressures is the total pressure, so 760 = PNO3 + PNO + Po2- Bv
substitution, 760 =Pno3 +152 +228, so PNO3 =38 torr. Because the answer is
listed in atmospheres, the values in torr must be converted to atmospheres before
they are useful. The conversion is 760 torr per atmosphere. The equation for
calculating Keq is:
_ Pno3 _ *%,, _ V2 .Vz.so^
^"(PNOXPO.) >Y760X228/7J -(1/5X3/10) "3/50 " 6
Of the answer choices given, only choice A is greater than 8. If you pick A, you
will definitely be a star!
Copyrightby The Berkeley Review 170 The Berkeley Review
GCIlCral ChemiStry Equilibrium Fundamentals of Equilibrium
Example 3.7
For the following reaction, 0.20 moles Bi2S3(s) are mixed with 0.50 moles H2(g).
Once equilibrium is established, 0.225 moles of H2(g) remain. What is the value
ofKeq for thisreaction?
lBi2S3(s) + 3H2(g) ^ * 2Bi(s) + 3H2S(g)
A. 0.57
B. 0.82
C. 1.22
D. 1.81
Solution
This question is best solved by determining the equilibrium concentrations for
both of the gases. Solids do not affect the equilibrium, so be sure not to include
any solids in the equilibrium expression. The equilibrium expression involves
partial pressures, but the answer is the same whether you use the partial
pressures of the gases or the concentrations of the gases. This is because there is
the same number of gas molecules on each side of the reaction. The solids are
ignored altogether as long as they are not the limiting reagent. Becauseyou need
three times as much H2(g) as Bi2S3(s) and you have only 2.5 times as much,
hydrogen is the limiting reagent in this reaction, if it were to go to completion.
This means that to determine the value of Keq, youmust determine the ratioof
the two gases. The values are found in the following way:
Reaction: Bi2S3(s) 3H2(g) ^ 2Bi(s) 3H20(g)
Initially: 0.2 0.5
Shift: zX zte
Equilibrium: 0.2 - x 0.5 - 3x
0 0
2x + 3x
2x 3x
In this case, we can solve for the value of 3x from the information given. At
equilibrium, there are 0.225 moles of hydrogen gas remaining, so 0.5- 3x = 0.225.
This means that 3x = 0.275. There is no need to solve for x, because 3x is present
in the gas terms, and solids are not going to be considered. Plugging0.275 in for
3xinto the equilibrium line of the reaction chart yields:
Reaction: Bi2S3(s) 3H2(g) * 2Bi(s) 3H20(g)
Equilibrium: don't care 0.225 don't care 0.275
These numbers work nicely in determining the equilibrium constant. The math
is shown below:
Ke JPH2S)3 _(molesH2s)3 _(0.275)3 _/p.275\3 =(llf =1.223 =1.22+
Gq (Ph2)3 (moleSH2)3 (0.225)3 H).225/ \9/
Only choice D is a value that is greater than 1.22, so that is the best answer. If.
you forget to cube the value, it is easy to choose answer choice C by mistake.
Choices A and B are eliminated, because there are more products than reactants,
so the value of Keq must be greater than 1.0. Be sure to use commonsense to
eliminate incorrect answer choices. Developing intuition and learning to trust
your common sense is more important in MCAT preparation than honing your
algebra and multiplication skills.
Copyright byTheBerkeley Review 171 Exclusive MCAT Preparation
General Chemistiy Equilibrium Fundamentals of Equilibrium
Using Keq toCalculate Shifts
Theequilibriumconstant is usedtocalculate thequantityof the productsand the
reactants present at equilibrium. Thisis achieved by following the molesof each
speciesfrominitial conditions to equilibriumconditions, specifically by setting
up a tableto keeptrackof the components systematically over the courseof the
reaction. There are three stages to consider: the initial stage, the shift, and
equilibrium. Consider Reaction3.3:
CO(g) + HzO(g) * " C02(g) + H2(g)
Reaction 3.3
At 375C, the equilibriumconstant for Reaction 3.3 is 2.51 x101. The equilibrium
constant is unitless when the number of products equals the number of reactants.
Consider the reaction to start with 1.0 atm of CO and 1.0 atm. of H2O. Figure 3-1
shows the setup for deterrnining the shift and final pressures in Reaction3.3.
Reaction: CO(g) H20(g)
Initially: 1.00 1.00
Shift: -x
zJL
Equilibrium: 1.00-x 1.00-x
C02(g) H2(g)
0 0
+ x
X X
Figure 3-1
As mentioned, there are three considerations in the setup. The first line is what is
initially given. The second line shows the direction of the shift and the
stoichiometric consequences. Youmust be able to determine the direction of the
shift by comparing the initial concentrations to the equilibrium distribution. In
this case it was easy, becausethere are no products, so the reaction must shift in
the forward direction. The third line accounts for what is present once
equilibriumis established. Values fromline 3 are plugged into the equilibrium
expression, to solvefor x, the shift in the reaction. The solution is as follows:
K a(PCQ2XPH2) = (x)(x) =^ml ^ 251 =_x?_
9 (PcoXPH2o) d-x)(l-x) (1-X)2
25.1 = x2 => 5 = ^L_ =* 5-5x = x => 5=6x .\x=^ =0.83
(1-x)2 1-x 6
The math was simpler that it first appeared in this case. The MCATdoes not
seek to test your algebra skills, as much as it tests your reasoning ability. Being
able to estimate the magnitude of the x (the shift) relative to the initial values is
important.
Example 3.8
At 773K, the Kp for the following reaction is 3.0 x10"5. If the partial pressure of
N2(g) is initially 3.75atm., and the partial pressure of H2(g) is initially 2.0 atm,;
what is the partial pressure of NH3(g) once equilibrium is established, assuming
there is no ammonia in the system initially?
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 1 * 2NH3(g)
A. 0.0900 atm.
B. 0.0300 atm.
C. 0.0100 atm.
D. 0.0010 atm.
Solution
This is a straightforward example. Because the reaction starts with all reactants,
it shifts forward to reach equilibrium. The reaction has a very small Keq and
starts with all reactants, so the shift is small. The x-term can be ignored when it
is subtracted from or added to numerical values. The setup is as follows:
Reaction: N2(g) 3H2(g) > * NH3(g)
0
** +2x
2x
Shift: - X -3x
Equilibrium: 3.75 - x 2.00-3x
Ignoring the x and 3x portions of the reactant quantities yields the following:
a (PNH3)2 = (2x)2 =3x 1Q-5 ^ 3x 10-5 =_Jx?_
q (Pn^Ph/ (3-75) (2)3 3.75x8
:4xf
30
x2 =30 x3x 10"5 =22.5x10*5 =>x2 = 2.25x10"4 .\x =Vl25'x 10-2 =1.5x 10"2
4
The concentration of NH3 at equilibrium is 2x, which is 3.0 x10"2 M. The best
answer is choice B. This is considerably more math than the MCAT requires you
to use, so think of this example as merely a step towards getting re-acquainted.
A concern you may recall from your general chemistry class involves whether it
is safe to ignore x when it is either added to or subtracted froma numerical term.
The x-value is ignored when the initial conditions are like the equilibrium
conditions, because the shift is minimal and the value of x is trivial. In Example
3.8, Keq isless than 1.0, sothere are fewer products than reactants at equilibrium.
This means that hardly anything shifts over to the product side, so x can be
ignored. Table3.3shows cases when x can and cannot be ignored.
Initial
Conditions
Equilibrium
Constant
Shift x-term?
All
Reactants
Keq <IO-3
Q and K are SIMILAR .-. SMALL x
SMALL shift in the forward direction
Ignore
All
Products
Kgq <10-3
Q and K are DIFFERENT .-. LARGE x
LARGE shift in the reverse direction
Consider
All
Reactants
Kgq >103
Q and K are DIFFERENT .-. LARGE x
LARGE shift in the forward direction
Consider
All
Products
Kgq >103
Q and K are SIMILAR /. SMALL x
SMALL shift in the reverse direction
Ignore
Reactants &
Products
Keq = 1
Q and K are SIMILAR .\ SMALL x
SMALL shift in either direction
Ignore
Reactants &
Products
Keq or 1
Q and K are DIFFERENT /. LARGE x
LARGE shift in either direction
Consider
Table 3.3
Understanding the math associated with equilibrium is important. Keq canbe
used to find concentration values at equilibrium, and equilibrium concentration
values can be used to find Keq. This fits nicely into an MCAT experiment,
because equilibrium constants result from experiments conducted to determine
equilibrium concentrations, in several trials with different starting conditions.
Example 3.9
At 92.2'C, the Kp for the following reaction is 0.2000 atm."1. If you were to place
exactly 0.200 atm. of N204(g) into a 1.00 liter vessel, what would the partial
pressure of N02(g)be onceequilibriumwas established?
2N02(g) ^f=^^ N204(g)
A. 0.025 atm. N02(g)
B. 0.200 atm. N02(g)
C. 0.350 atm. N02(g)
D. 0.400 atm. N02(g)
Solution
To solve this precisely, it is necessary to use the quadratic equation. On the
MCAT, it is unlikely that you will need to use the quadratic equation. This
question emphasizes the technique of eliminating answer choices through
approximation. First, you must use the equilibrium expression to estimate the
magnitude of x. In this case, Keq is less than1.0, and the reaction starts withall
products. The value of x is going to be significant (more than half shifts over). If
half of the 0.200 atm. of N2O4 shifts over, then the partial pressure of nitrogen
dioxide is 0.200atm. Considering that more than half of the N204(g) is going to
shift, the value of N02(g) is greater than 0.200 atm. However, not all of the
N204(g) can shift over (which would result in 0.400 atm. of NO2), so the answer
must be less than 0.400 atm. Only choice C falls within the range of 0.200 to
0.400. In a multiple-choice format, this question is rather easy to answer.
In the interest of developing an alternative method to answer the question,
substitute one of the four answer choices (the one closest to the x you
approximate) into the equilibrium expression and then compare the answer you
get tothegiven value of Keq. Your answer either will equal Keq or it won't equal
Keq. If it equals Keq, you picked well (go to Las Vegas or Atlantic City with
those skills). If it does not equal K, the error can be used to zero in on the correct
answer, depending on whether your value is too high or too low. For this
reason, always start by substituting a middle value.
Reaction: 2N02(g) fc N204(g)
Initially: 0 0.200
Shift: +2x - oc
Equilibrium: 2x 0.20 - x
These numbers should be plugged into the equilibrium expression.
K _ pN2Q4 _Q.2-x-0.2-x
P (PNOzJ2 <2x)2 4x*
Be sure not to substitute the answer choice values directly for x, because the
values in the answer choices are for Pn02 which is 2x. Choices Band C fall in
the middle of the range, so choose either one to plug in. For numerical ease, let's
use choice B. IfPno2 is 0-200 atm-, thenx is 0.100.
K - 0-2- x _ 0.2 - 0.1 - 0.10 _ 10 - 2.5
P (2x)2 (0.20)2 0.04 4
This number (2.5) is too large (greater than 0.2000), which means that the x we
chose was too small, so we need to choose a larger value for x. Choice C is best.
Complex Equilibrium
A complex equilibrium is a balance between two separate reactions that share a
common reagent. In essence, it is two reactions whose equilibrium states depend
on one another. In a complex equilibrium, a product in one reaction is a reactant
in the other reaction. As a result, if one reaction is displaced from equilibrium,
then the other reaction is also affected. When adding the component reactions,
the common reagent is absent in the overall reaction and is considered to be an
intermediate. The equilibrium constant for the overall reaction is found by
multiplying the individual equilibrium constants of the component reactions.
This is because the reagent that disappears when you add the reactions is in the
numerator of one reaction and in the denominator of the other reaction. To
eliminate it, KeqS aremultiplied. Figure 3-2 is a sample ofcomplex equilibrium:
Reaction I: 2S03(g) ^ " 2S02(g) + 02(g) Keqi
Reaction II: CaO(s) + S02(g) * CaS03(s) Keq2
Overall: 2CaO(s) + 2S03(g) * * 2CaS03(s) + 02(g) Keqix(Keq2)2
Figure 3-2
Reaction II is multiplied by 2 to balance SO2 when you add the reactions.
Because Reaction II is multiplied by 2, its Kgq value is squared. The addition of
calcium oxide to an equilibrium mixture of O2, SO2, and SO3reduces the partial
pressure of SO3. This occurs despite the fact that sulfur trioxide and calcium
oxide do not react directly. Complex equilibrium questions are essentially just
manipulations of the overall equilibrium and of Le Chatelier's principle.
Example 3.10
Consider the following complex equilibrium:
2NO(g) + 102(g) * " 2N02(g) Keqi
2N02(g) 1 ' lN204(g) Keq2
2NO(g) + 102(g) * " lN204(g) KeqixKeq2
When N2O4 gas is removed, how are the partial pressures of NO gas and NO2
gas affected?
A. Pfsjo and Pno2 both decrease.
B. Pno and PN02both increase.
C. Pno decreases, while Pno2 remains the same.
D. Pno increases, while Pno2 remains the same.
Solution
The second reaction shifts to the right to compensate for the loss of N2O4, so the
partial pressure of NO2 decreases. A decrease in NO2 causes the first reaction to
shift to the right as well, resulting in a decrease in the partial pressure of NO gas
and an increase in the partial pressure of NO2. However, the increase in NO2
from the forward shift of the first reaction is less significant than the decrease in
NO2 caused by the forward shift of the second reaction. This is because the shift
in the first reaction cannot completely replenish the lost NO2 without losing so
much NO that the reaction is beyond equilibrium. A shift never regenerates as
much as was lost. Both NO and NO2 decrease, making choice A the best answer.
General Chemistry
Equilibrium Fundamentals of Equilibrium
Experimental Determination of K
In this experiment, a 500-mL closed glass flask is employed, so the system is
isochoric (has Vconstant)- The pressure of the system is monitored continually
over the course of the experiment. The researcher tests Reaction3.4by observing
the total pressure of the systemduring a fixed interval.
H2(g) + I2(s) ^=^ 2HI(g)
Reaction 3.4
Theresearcher mixes together 1.00 atm. of hydrogen gas (H2) with excess iodine
solid (I2). Thetotal pressureof thesystemis monitoredby a small detectorin the
wall of the flaskthroughout the reaction, which is said to be in equilibriumonce
the total pressure of the system stabilizes. Ample time is given to allow the
systemto reachequilibrium. Thesetup for the reactionis shown in Figure 3-3.
Reaction:
H2(g)
I2(s)
Initially: 1.00 excess
Shift: - x - x
Equilibrium: 1.00 - x who cares?
2HI(g)
0
+ 2x
2x
Figure 3-3
The reactionproceeds forward to reach equilibrium. It is unknown how much
the reaction proceeds, so the shift value is assigned the term x. Hydrogen gas
decreases by x, while hydroiodic acid gas increases by 2x, because of the
stoichiometry. Because the number of gas molecules increases, so does the total
pressure of the system. Figure 3-4shows the total pressure of the system as a
function of time. The pressures for H2 and HI are inferred from the total
pressure graph.
Pfinal
Time
Figure 3-4
Ptotal
increases from 1.00 to 1.00 + x
HI
increases from 0 to 2x
H2
decreases from 1.00 to 1.00 - x
Keq is calculated from Ptotal> because the shift inthe reaction (x) isequal to AP.
For instance, if Ptotal is 1-60 atm. and Pjnitial is 1.00atm., then AP is 0.60atm. If
AP is 0.60 arm., then at equilibrium Phi is 1.20 atm. and Ph2 is 0.40 atm. The
equilibriumexpression for the reaction does not include iodine, because it is a
solid. Plugging intotheequilibriumexpression yieldsa numerical valuefor Keq.
The Berkeley Review
Determination ofK
(Ph=(2x =(t2)^ =(1.2)(1.2) =1^ 6
4 PH2 1.0-x 0.4 0.4 0.4
This experiment determines the value of Keq under the ambient reaction
conditions. Changes to the system are made to study equilibrium further.
Effect of the Addition of Reactant
Once the pressure stabilizes at 1.60 atm., the researcher alters the system by
adding 0.10 atm. of isotopically rich hydrogen gas (predominantly molecular
deuterium, 2H2H). The total pressure of the systemincreases as hydrogen gas
is added to the system. After the addition is complete, the total pressure
continues to increase, gradually slowing until it reaches a stable value of 1.76
atm. Ptotal fr me system increases by 0.16 arm., more than the 0.10atm. added.
Analysis using infraredspectroscopy confirms that both 2HI and 2HH are
formed. From these observations, it is concluded that addition of a reactant gas
shifted the reaction in the forward direction to a new distribution of compounds.
Substituting the values for Ph2 and Phi in the equilibrium expression reveals
that Keq remains the same, although the partial pressure of each gas has
changed. This means that addition of the reactant gas displacesthe reactionfrom
equilibrium, following which the reaction shifts in such a way as to reestablish
equilibrium. In addition, the equilibrium is dynamic, given that the mixed
hydrogen (2HH) forms by the reverse reaction.
Followingthe addition of the labeled hydrogen, the researcher makes a second
addition to the system, after the pressure stabilizes at 1.76 arm., by adding 10.0g
ofisotopically rich iodine (predominantly 127I127I). The system is continually
monitored, but no change in pressure is detected. Again, the gases in the system
are analyzed by infrared spectroscopy The labels appear to be completely
scrambled, with H127I, 2H127I, HI, and 2HI all being observed. From
this, it is concluded that the addition of a solid reactant does not shift the reaction
in either direction. It reconfirms that the equilibrium is dynamic, given that the
mixture of isotopically labeled compounds.
Amajorpoint of this experiment is to support the concept of dynamic equilibrium,
a state where the system is continually reacting in both the forward and reverse
directions. On the macroscopic level, there is no net change. This implies that
the forward and reverse reaction rates are equal and that the concentrationof the
reactants and products remains constant. The scrambling of the isotopic labels
supports this idea. If this were a case of static equilibrium, the isotope would not
be incorporated into the product or back-react to form the mixed isotope
reactant. Any set of questions on the MCAT that accompanies the descriptionof
an experiment like this, would include a questionon dynamicequilibrium.
Such an experiment is typical for an MCATphysical sciences passage. It is to
your advantage to ponder what types of questions might be asked. Questions
could involve total pressure and its relationship to equilibriumthrough partial
pressure. The shift can be rationalized using Le Chatelier's principle, so
questions on Le Chatelier's principle are probable. To round out the questions,
there is the possibility of pH questions, solubilityquestions, and the relationship
between the reaction quotient (Q) and the equilibrium constant (K). It is more
than worth your time to make up some multiple-choice questions to accompany
this passage. If you know how to write a multiple-choice test, you will
understand better how to take one.
General Chemistiy Equilibrium Le Chatelier's Principle
Le Chatelier's Principle
Le Chatelier's principle is justified both mathematically and theoretically. The
basic rule is that whatever change you make to a system that is in equilibrium,
the reaction mixture will react in a way to undo the change and reestablish
equilibrium. Theformal definitionof the principle is as follows:
Ifan external stress isapplied to a system at equilibrium, the system will shift itself in
such a way that the stress ispartially relieved and equilibrium is reestablished.
Effects of Stress
An external stress on the system includes changing moles (concentration of a
component), pressure, volume, and temperature. In all cases, except changing
temperature, the numerical value of K remains constant, and the system will
continue to react until the K value is obtained once again. When a reaction
system is not in a state of equilibrium, the same calculation for the equilibrium
expression(K) is used, but it is referred to as the reaction quotient (Q). If Kis not
equal to Q, then the system is not in equilibrium. It is important to note that
changing an equilibriumsystemby adding a pure solid or a pure liquid does not
disrupt the equilibrium nor change the equilibrium constant.
This is why in the sample experiment on the preceding page, when iodine
crystals were added (a solid), the system was not moved from equilibrium.
However, when molecular hydrogen was added (a gas), the system was moved
from equilibrium, and it shifted accordingly, to reestablish equilibrium. It is
important that this conceptual view of equilibrium makes sense to you, because
the MCATis a conceptual exam that evaluates your understanding at this level.
We shall look at Le Chatelier's principle in terms of mathematics and intuitive
problem-solving. We shall address the mathematical relationships only to the
extent necessary to support our observations. In generic Reaction 3.5, the
mathematical aspects of Le Chatelier's Principle are considered.
A(g) + B(g) ^^ C(g)
Reaction 3.5
Let's assume that Keq for the reaction is 1.00 and that initially, the partial
pressure of all threecomponents is 1.00 atm. BY substitution into the equilibrium
expression, we see that the value is 1.0, meaning that the system is in
equilibrium. Upon doubling the external pressure (i.e., by applying a stress to
the equilibrium), the system is displaced from equilibrium. According to Le
Chatelier's principle, it will shift to reduce the pressure of the system, which we
predict will be in the forward direction. Byshifting in the forward direction, the
reaction goes from the side with two molecules to the side with one molecule,
thereby reducing the number of molecules and thus reducing the pressure. The
math to support this prediction is as follows:
Reaction: A(g) + B(g)
Initially: 1.0 1.0
After Stress: 2.0 2.0
Shift: - X -X
Final: 2-x 2-x
C(g) C/A-B
State
1.0 1.00 equilibrium
2.0 0.5 not equilibrium
_x reacting
2 + x 1.00 new equilibrium
The external pressure increased, causing internal pressures to increase. This
generated a systemwhere K> Q, so to reestablishequilibrium, the reaction shifts
forward until once again Q = K.
General Chemistry Equilibrium
The numerical value of K does not change with the change in pressure, although
the equilibrium distribution does change.
Kea=It=_2+_x_ = x+2 =1=> x2.4x +4 =x +2=>x2-5x +2 =0
4 (PaXPb) (2-x)2 x2-4x +4
Using the quadratic equation yields a value of roughly 0.44, which means that
the new partial pressures are Pa = 1-56 atm., Pr = 1-56 atm., and Pc = 2.44 atm.
Table 3.4 shows different equilibrium distributions for Reaction 3.5. You should
notice that the ratio of thecompounds varies, but thevalue ofKeq isconstant.
Pa Pb PC
pc/PA
Pc/pAPb
0.80 0.80 0.64 0.80 1.000
0.90 0.90 0.81 0.90 1.000
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.000
1.10 1.10 1.21 1.10 1.000
1.25 1.25 1.56 1.25 1.000
1.50 1.50 2.25 1.50 1.000
1.56 1.56 2.44 1.56 1.003
0.80 1.25 1.00 1.25 1.000
1.20 1.50 1.80 1.50 1.000
1.33 0.50 0.67 0.50 1.000
Table 3.4
Example 3.11
What is the observed result of increasing the total pressure under isothermal
conditions in the following system initially at equilibrium?
PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) ^=^ PCl5(g)
No change in the PPCI3 to PPCI5 rano
An increase in the Pq2 to PPCI5 rano
Adecrease in theratioof PPCI5 to (PPCI3)x (PCI2)
An increasein the PPCI5 to PPCI3 ran0
Solution
Increasing the external pressure shifts the reaction to the right, so it can reduce
the pressure to counteract the stress associated with increasing the pressure of
the system. An alternative way to look at this is to say that when the total
pressure increases, thenumber of collisions between molecules increases, forcing
the reaction to proceed in the forward direction (only the forward reaction
depends on collisions). If the system shifts to the right, the partial pressure of
PCI3 decreases, the partial pressure of CI2 decreases, and the partial pressure of
PCI5 increases. This eliminates choice A, because choiceAcould be true only if
the reaction did not shift. Choice B is eliminated, because an increase in the CI2-
to-PCls ratio results from a reaction shifting in the reverse direction. Choice C is
eliminated, because the equilibrium constant does not change unless the
temperature changes. The change is said to be isothermal, so temperature did
not change during the shift. Choice D results from the reaction shifting in the
forward direction, so it is the best answer.
General Chemistry
Equilibrium Le Chatelier's Principle
Example 3.12
Which of the following reactions at equilibriumwould NOTshift as the result of
an increase in pressure?
A. CaO(s) + C02(g) * CaC03(s)
B. PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) ^5=^ PCl5(g)
C. N2(g) + 3H2(g) ^^ 2NH3(g)
D. H2(g) + I2(g) -^=^ 2HI(g)
Solution
The equilibriumreactiondoes not shift after an increasein pressure when there is
an equal number of gas molecules on each side of the reaction. This is observed
in choice D. As a point of interest, CaC03 cannot be stored in an open space for
this reason, because it will fully dissociate into CaO and C02 over time, if the
carbon dioxide partial pressure is not high enough. Also take note that I2is a gas
in choice D, which means that the reaction must be at a temperature above
ambient conditions.
Perturbations and Shifts
Before conducting an experiment, it is important to consider the properties of the
container in which a reaction transpires. Two common containers are the closed
flask and the closed piston. Flasks are made of a rigid material, so their volume
is fixed (Vconstant)- The pressure varies when using a flask (Pvariable)- Pistons
are flexible (a wall of the piston is free to move), so the volume can vary.
(Vvariable)- m piston reactions, the initial pressure equals the final pressure
(Pinitial = Pfinal)/ if the volume of the piston exhibits no instantaneous change.
This is to say that for a piston that starts with a stationary lid, once the lid is
stationary again, the internal pressure equals the external pressure. As a result,
reactions are susceptible to environmental changes (perturbations) depending on
the container. Temperature may change in each container, but its effect on
pressure and volume depend on the container itself. Le Chatelier's principle
should be applied taking into account the features of the reaction container.
Le Chatelier's principle deals with changes to a system that starts in equilibrium.
When you have a system in balance, a change in environment results in the
disturbance of equilibrium. To compensate, the system will shift either left or
right (increasing and decreasing concentrations in doing so) to reestablish
equilibrium. Thegeneral rule is that the systemwill do whatever it takes to undo
or compensate for what you have done to disturb it. Table 3.5 lists the generic
shifts a reaction undergoes to alleviate an applied stress.
Applied Stress System's Adjustment Direction of Shift
Add reactant Remove reactant To the Right
Add product Remove product To the Left
Decrease volume Decrease gas volume To the side with fewer molecules
Increase volume Increase gas volume To the side with more molecules
Decrease temperature React to generate heat In the exothermic direction
Increase temperature React to absorb heat In the endothermic direction
Table 3.5
General Chemistry Equilibrium Le Chatelier's Principle
Direction of Shift
To observe how these shifts work, each is applied to Reaction 3.6.
N204(g) ^^- 2N02(g) AH=+146 kj/mol
Reaction 3.6
Situation #1 Add N204(g): This perturbation results in a system with too many
reactants. The value of K is greater than Q. To reestablish equilibrium, the
system reacts in the forward direction to absorb some of the excess reactants and
formmore products. The system shifts to the right. The same result would have
occurred had N02(g) been removed.
Situation #2 Add N02(g): This perturbation results in a system with too many
products. The value of K is less than Q. To reestablish equilibrium, the system
reacts in the reverse direction to form more reactants and absorb some of the
excess products. The system shifts to the left. The same result would have
occurred had N204(g) been removed.
Situation #3 Increase the external pressure: This perturbation results in a system
where the partial pressures are too high. Thismeans that the spacein which the
gasescoexist has been reduced, so their molecules are more crowdedand collide
more often. To reduce this crowding, the system goes from products (two
molecules) to reactants (one molecule) and reduce the total moles of gas in the
container. Also, if they collide more often, this forces the NC^ moleculesto form
bonds and thus dimerize to N2O4. The system shifts to the left.
Situation #4 Increase the volume: This perturbation results in a system where
the concentrations are too low. This means that the space in which the gases
coexisthas increased, so they are less crowded and collide less often. Using the
inverse of the reasoning from situation #3, the system reacts to make two
molecules of N02(g) from N204(g). The system shifts to the right.
Situation#5 Heat the system: This perturbation results in a system where there
is too much free energy. Byheating the system, we have added energy to the
reaction. To consume most of this additional energy, the system reacts in the
endothermic direction, which for Reaction 3.6 is the forward direction. The
system shifts to the right.
Situation#6 Cool the system: This perturbation results in a system where there
is toolittle free energy. Bycoolingthe systemwe have takenenergyaway from
the reaction. To regenerate energy to balance this loss of energy to some degree,
the reaction moves in the exothermic direction, which for Reaction 3.6 is the
reverse direction. The system shifts to the left
Thesescenarios all address a gas-phase equilibrium. The shifts are similar for a
solution-phase equilibrium, except that concentrations are considered, rather
than volume changes of the container. Changes in the concentration can result
from changes in the volume (quantity) of solvent. The only effect is that
situations #3 and #4 are now dilution and evaporation of solvent. The system
still reacts by asserting the inverse of the stress done upon it. When diluted, it
reacts to increase its concentration. When solvent is removed, increasing the
concentration, it reacts to reduce the concentration. The rules of Le Chatelier's
principle work very well, if you apply them correctly.
General Chemistry Equilibrium LeChateUefs Principle
Example 3.13
Whichof the following is the result of coolingan endothermic reaction that starts
at equilibrium?
A. The amount of products decreases.
B. The amount of reactants decreases.
C. The equilibrium constant increases.
D. All partial pressures increase.
Solution
Coolingthe systemcauses it to move in the direction that generates heat. Heat is
released when a reaction that is endothermic as written goes from products to
reactants. Endothermic reactions are viewed as follows:
Reactants + heat ^ *" Products
Heat can be treated as a reactant. As the reaction shifts to the left, the amount of
products decrease, the amount of reactants increase, and the equilibrium
constant decreases. This eliminates choices B and C, and makes choice A the
correct answer. Coolinga systemdecreases the pressure, so in all likelihood, all
partial pressures would decrease, not increase. Evenif the reactionshifts enough
to offset the pressure decrease due to reduced temperature, that is true only for
reactants. Partial pressure of products must decrease. This eliminates choiceD.
You should recall that AHis positive for an endothermic reaction.
Example 3.14
If the following reaction represents a system at equilibrium, indicate which
statement is NOT true.
PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) ^^ PCl5(g)
A. Increasing the pressure would cause a decrease in PC13.
B. Adding PCI5 would cause an increase in PC13.
C. Increasing the volume would cause an increase in PC13.
D. Removing Cl2would cause a decrease in PC13.
Solution
The term "NOT true" means false. Do not forget halfway through the problem
that you're looking for thefalse answer choice. A common mistake on "NOT1
problems is to forget that the correct answer is a false statement. To avoid this,
write either "T" or "F" next to each answer choice as you run through them. Then
choose the answer choice with the unique letter.
Tocompensatefor increasingexternal pressure, the reaction shifts to the right, so
it can reduce the pressure to counteract the increase in pressure felt from the
changeto the system. If thesystemshiftsto the right, PC13 decreases, so choice A
is true. Adding a product to an equilibrium mixture shifts the reaction to the
reactant side in order to counteract the increase in PCI5 (the product). If the
systemshifts to the left,PCI3 increases, so choiceBis true. Increasing the volume
decreases the crowding in of the system. To compensate for increasing volume,
the reaction shifts to the left, so it fills in the empty space created by the volume
increase. If the system shifts to the left, PC13 increases, so choice C is true.
Removing a reactant shifts the reaction to the reactant side in order to make up
for the lost reactant (Cl2). If the systemshifts to the left, PC13 increases, so choice
D is a false statement, and is thus our answer choice.
General Chemistry Equilibrium Le Chatelier's Principle
Example 3.15
For the following equilibrium reaction, what is the effect of increasing the
external pressure?
2S02(g) + 102(g) ^^ 2S03(g)
A. A decrease in the moles of sulfur dioxide
B. An increase in the moles of oxygen
C. A decrease in the moles of sulfur trioxide
D. An increase the equilibrium constant
Solution
Increasing the pressure crowds the molecules in a reaction and forces the reaction
to shift to the side of the equilibrium with fewer gas molecules (in this case, the
product side). This means that the moles of products (sulfur trioxide) increase
and the moles of reactants (sulfur dioxide and oxygen) decrease. This eliminates
choices Band C, and makes choice A the best answer. The equilibrium constant
does not change with pressure changes, so choice D is eliminated.
Example 3.16
N02 is a brown gas, while N204 (the product of dimerization) is a clear gas. The
two are in equilibrium in a 1.00 liter flask. Upon heating, the contents of the flask
became darker brown. What can be said about the following reaction as written?
2N02(g) ^5=^ N204(g)
A. The reaction is endothermic as written.
B. The reaction is exothermic as written.
C. The reaction is isothermal as written.
D. The reaction is adiabatic as written.
Solution
Because the reaction produced a darker mixture with the addition of heat, the
reaction must have shifted to the left, since it formed more of the brown gas
(N02(g)). This means that heat is acting as a product in this reaction. If heat is a
product, then the reaction is exothermic as written. This makes choice Bcorrect.
The term isothermal means that there was no change in temperature during the
reaction, and the term adiabatic means that there was no change in heat during
the reaction. Both of these statements (choices C and D) are incorrect.
Example 3.17
What is the effect of adding CaO(s) to the following equilibrium mixture?
CaC03(s) ^!= COz(g) + CaO(s)
A. The products will decrease.
B. The reactants will increase.
C. The equilibrium constant will increase.
D. There is no change in the equilibrium.
Solution
Adding a solid to a reaction mixture that is already at equilibrium has no effect
on the equilibrium. This means that the correct answer is choice D. A solid
affects a reaction mixture only if the reaction is not yet at equilibrium. This is to
say that the solid is involved only when it is the limiting reagent for the reaction.
General Chemistry
Buffers and Titration Indicators
Solubility
Solubility is a popular topic on the MCAT. However, for many people, it was a
topic covered only briefly during their general chemistrycourse. For this reason,
we shall look thoroughly at solubility. Conceptually, solubility is the breaking
apart of a lattice to allowparticles to move freely in solvent. In this section, we
focus on the dissociation of a salt into water. When a salt dissociates into water,
the ionic forces holding the charged species together break, and interactions with
the dipoles of the water form. The fundamental rationale behind solubility
involves lattice energy (the interionic forces in the crystal form), the solvation
energy (the strength of the attraction between solvent and dissociated ions), and
entropy (the solute formis more disordered than the crystalline form). Whether
a salt remains in its crystalline form or dissociates into solution depends
completely on the relative energetics of the three key features. Figure 3-5shows
the process of dissociation into solvent (water) for sodium chloride.
Figure 3-5
The base of the container holds the undissociated salt, while above the salt are
ions in solution. Salts dissociate from the surface, where they have the least ionic
interactions with neighboring ions in the lattice, and thus are held least tightly.
Surface ions have the greatest contact with solvent, so they are more susceptible
to solvation. Corners dissolve away fastest, followed by edges and then faces.
Definitions
For every solute, there is a maximum amount that dissolves into a given volume
of solvent at a set temperature. The solubility of most salts has been measured at
25Cand are compiled in tables (like Table 3.8). You should know how to extract
information from a table. Information listed in solubility tables measures the
degree to which a salt dissociates into water. As a rule, some salts have a very
low solubility, leading to a low numerical value for the equilibrium constant
associated with dissociation (KSp). The equilibrium constant associated with
dissociation is known as the solubility product. However, the relative KSp values
for a group of salts is not always a good indicator of their relative solubility. This
isbecause the units ofsolubility product (KSp) vary withthenumber ofions.
General Chemistry Equilibrium solubility
The subject of solubility requires being familiar with several terms. Defined
beloware eleven that are regularly encountered in this subject.
Dissolving: The breakdown of intermolecular forces between molecules as a solid
becomesa solute within a solvent. The molecule remains intact when dissolving
into solution. An example is the dissolving of sucrose into water, where atoms in
the sucrose molecule remain covalently bonded, but the forces between sucrose
molecules are eliminated.
Dissociation: The breakdown of ionic bonds between atoms within a lattice
structure as a salt turns into a solute within the solvent. The crystal lattice of the
salt breaks apart when it dissociates into solution. An example is sodium
chloride dissociating into water. The ionic bonds between sodium cations and
chloride anions break, and the ions are stabilized by the partial charges of water.
Solvent: The species in greatest concentration into which the solute dissolves, or
salt dissociates. A solvent must be a fluid (have the ability to flow).
Solute: The species not in highest concentration that dissolves into the solvent, or
in the case of a salt, dissociates.
Solubility: A measurement of the degree of dissolving that a solute undergoes
within a particular solvent. The driving force for solubility is a preference for
solvation of molecules (or ions) over the lattice strength of the solid. In addition,
entropy favors the dissolving process. As the solubility of a compound increases,
it is deduced that either the lattice energy of the solid is decreasing, the solvation
energy of the solute form is increasing, or both effects are taking place.
Saturated: Describes the state of a solution at the point where no more solid
(solute) can dissolve into solution. When an aqueous salt solution is saturated,
the rate of dissociation of the salt equals the rate of precipitation.
Supersaturated: Describes the state of a solution where the amount of solid
(solute) that is dissolved into solution is beyond the maximum amount at a given
temperature. The solution is actually a suspension that when disturbed can form
a precipitate rapidly. This state can be achieved by first heating a solvent, then
adding solute to the solution until the solution is saturated at that temperature.
Slowly cooling this solution causes the amount of solute in it to exceed what
should dissolve at the reduced temperature.
Solubility product (Ks): The equilibrium constant for a dissociation reaction,
determined from the molar solubility according to standard rules for calculating
equilibrium constants.
Molar solubility: The quantitative measurement of the maximum number of
moles of solid (solute) that can dissolve into enough solvent to make one liter of
solution under standard conditions. For all practical purposes, the solvent is
always water in inorganic chemistry and thus the calculations are similar in
nearly every example. Molar solubility can be thought of as the x-value in the
calculation of thesolubility product (KSp).
Gram solubility: The quantitative measurement of the maximum number of
grams of solid (solute) that can dissolve into enough solvent to make one
hundred milliliters of solution under standard conditions.
Common ion effect: This results in a reduction in the amount of solid (solute) that
can dissolve into solution due to the presence in the solution of an ion that is also
present in the solid. This concept is similar to Le Chatelier's principle, except that
with Le Chatelier's principle, the addition of one of the products (ions) causes
precipitation (reduced solubility). With the common ion effect, the ion causing
the reduced solubility is present in solution at the beginning of the reaction,
rather than being added once the solution has reached a solubility equilibrium.
Solubility Rules
You may recall from general chemistry a list of general rules for predicting
solubility. We will emphasize using data from tables todetermine solubility, but
here is a paraphrased version of the solubility rules. The rules as they are
typically written in general chemistry textbooks are listed on page 26 of this
book. These rules may beused togive a good estimate ofsolubility andshould
be used when no solubilitydata are available.
1. Most salts composed ofa +1 cation (excluding transition metals)
and -1 anion are soluble in water at room temperature.
2. Nitrate (NO3") is a large anion that forms weak lattice
interactions and forms strong hydrogen bonds with water, so
most nitrate salts are water-soluble.
3. Most salts containing sulfate anions (SO42") with +1 cations
(excluding transition metals) are water-soluble.
4. Most salts with -2 or -3 anions are insoluble in water, excluding
the sulfate salts.
5. Most oxide (O2-) and hydroxide anion (OH-) salts are only
slightly water-soluble. KOH and NaOH are notable exceptions
that are substantially soluble.
Ionic Structures
Composed ofions (charged species) held together byionic bonds (electrostatic
forces). Inionic structures, electrons arenot shared; they aretransferred between
atoms, so that atoms with a deficiency of electrons (cation) and atoms with an
excess of electrons (anions) are formed. Atypical example of an ionic compound
is sodium chloride (NaCl).
Cation: An atom in which the number of protons exceeds the number of
electrons, thereby resulting in an excess of positive charge. A cation is a
positively charged atom. Potassium cation (K+) carries a +1 charge, implying
that there is one more proton than the number of electrons in the atom.
Potassiumhasnineteen protons, sopotassiumcationhas eighteen electrons.
Anion: An atom in which the number of electrons exceeds the number of
protons, thereby resulting in an excess of negative charge. An anion is a
negatively charged atom. Fluoride anion (F") carries a -1 charge, implying that
thereis one moreelectron than the number of protons in the atom. Fluorine has
nine protons, so fluoride anion has ten electrons. Note that the name changes
from "fluorine" (used when the atom is neutral) to "fluoride" (used when the
atom carries a negative charge). Negatively charged species aregiven the "-ide"
suffix.
Nomenclature of Salts
Scientific convention says that when you name a salt, the name of the cation
precedes the name of the anion. That is why we refer to NaCl as sodium
chloride, rather thanchloride sodium. Therulesfor naminga simplebinarysalt
are as follows:
O Name the cation before the anion in the salt.
@ The cation name is derived from the element forming the cation (often
ending in "-ium")
The anion name is derived from the element forming the anion with an "-
ide" suffix added.
Example 3.18
What is the proper chemical name for the salt BaF2?
A. Barium difluorine
B. Barium fluoride
C. Difluorobarane
D. Fluorinium baride
Solution
The cation of this salt is derived from barium, and the anion is derived from
fluorine. Thus, the name begins with barium and ends with the "-ide" form of
fluorine (fluoride): barium fluoride, which makes choice B the correct answer.
The subscript two in the formula (showing that there are two fluoride anions)
need not be named, given that fluoride can be only -1 and barium is +2. The ratio
is implied. It was fun to write wrong answers for this question. Granted, I am a
chemistry-loving geek, so my credibility when it comes to determining what is
cool and what isn't is dubious, but nevertheless, choiceC is a cool wrong answer.
Polyatomic Ions
Over the course of your academic science career, you may have seen the same
ions recurring in a variety of contexts in different subjects. In biology, the
interactions of bicarbonate with carbonate and dihydrogen phosphate with
hydrogen phosphate are essential in blood buffering and in the action of the
kidney. Kidney stones result from the precipitation of calcium with various
polyatomic ions. Because of the frequency with which molecular ions appear as
a factor in many problems, the MCAT test writers expect you to be familiar with
some common ones. Table 3.6 lists a few that you should know.
-1 Anions -2 Anions
Acetate
C2H3O2- Carbonate CO32-
Bicarbonate HCO3- Chromate C1-O42-
Bisulfite (hydrogen sulfite) HSO3- Dichromate Cr2072-
Bisulfate (hydrogen sulfate) HSO4- Hydrogen phosphate HPO42-
Dihydrogen phosphate H2P04- Oxalate C2O42-
Hypochlorite cio- Oxide 02-
Chlorite cio?- Peroxide 022"
Chlorate
C103- Sulfite so32-
Perchlorate C104- Sulfate so42"
Cyanide CN"
Hydroxide OH- -3 Anions
Superoxide
o2- Phosphate P043-
Nitrite N02"
Nitrate
NO3- +1 Cations
Permanganate Mn04" Ammonium NH4 +
Table 3.6
You should know these twenty-six ions by charge, structure, and nomenclature.
Knowing a little about their common applications may help, too.
Solubility
General Chemistry
Equilibrium
Solubility
SolubilityProduct and MolarSolubility(Mathematical Applications)
With solubility, calculations typically involve converting between molar
solubility and solubility product (Ksp). Molar solubility and solubility product
show up together in calculations, but they are very different terms. If onesalt
has alower Ksp value than another salt, it does not mean that it is less soluble
(has a lower molar solubility). Solubility isdetermined bythemolar solubility of
a salt, not the solubility product. Ksp values are calculated as products over
reactants, but because solids are ignored, there is no denominator. Table 3.7
shows different ion combinationsfor salts, where x represents molar solubility.
Solubility Reaction KSn Expression Ksp Calculation
MX(s) ^=^" M+(aq) + X"(aq)
Ksp =M+][xr]
_v2
KSp =(xXx) =x
r2+,
MX2(s) ^=^ Mz+(aq) + 2X"(aq) ksd = M2+][X)2
_ av3
Ksp=(x)(2x)2=4x;
MX3(s) ^=^ M3+(aq) +3X"(aq)
- 1^3+1
Ksp = MJ+][X"] Ksp =(x)(3x)3 =27x4
M2X(s) ^=^~ 2M+(aq) +X2"(aq)
Ksp =[M+]2[X2'] KSp =(2x)2(x)=4x3
M3X(s) ^=^ 3M+(aq) +X3"(aq)
Ksp =[M+]3[X3"] KSp =(3x)3(x)=27x
Table 3.7
Example 3.19
Whatis the molarsolubility for the hypothetical compoundMX, if it is knownto
have Ksp =4.0 x10"10 M2 in water?
A. 1.0xlO"5M
B. 2.0xlO"5M
C. 4.0xlO"5M
D. 2.0xlO-10M
Solution
For an MX salt, Ksp =[M+][X"1 =x2, where xis the molar solubility. This means
that themolar solubility isthesquare rootoftheKsp value.
Ksp -x
,x=VK^" =V4.0xlO-lu =yi0xVl0-10 =2.0xl0"5
This makes choice B the best answer.
Example 3.20
Whatis themolarsolubility for thehypothetical compoundMX2, if it is knownto
have Ksp =1.08 x10"7 M3 in water?
A. 1.65x10"^
B. 2.10xlO"3M
C 3.00 x lO-3 M
D. 4.80xlO"3M
Solution
For an MX2 salt, Ksp =[M2+][X']2 =4x3, where xis the molar solubility. This
means that themolar solubility is thecube rootofone-fourth of theKsp value.
=^27 xVlCT^ =3.0x 10-3
x =
3/Ksp ?/1.08 xlO"7 ?l 108 xlO
4
The Berkeley Review
It is good to understand the hypothetical examples, because actual salts are done
the same way, except the numbers are not as clean. Thekey fact to recognize is
found in the units. If Ksp is M2, then square root must be found. Square roots
are easier to solve ifthe power of ten is divisible by two. If Ksp is M3, then cube
root is necessary. Cube roots are easier to solve if the power often is divisible by
three. Fromthat point it requires approximatingsquare roots and cube roots by
ranging the values based on squares and cubes you know.
Example 3.21
What isthe molar solubility oflead(II) iodide, PM2, ifit isknown to have Ksp =
1.42 x 10"8 M3 in water?
A. 1.19xlO-4M
B. 8.83x10-^
C 1.52xlO"3M
D. 2.42xlO"3M
Solution
For Pbl2, Ksp =[Pb2+][I~]2 =4x3, where xis the molar solubility. This means that
the molar solubility isthe cube root ofone-fourth ofthe Ksp value.
Ksp =4x3 /.x-yÊ =/yi-42xl0- ^1*2x10*
=211*2. xVlO-^ =7355 xlO"3 =1.5xl0"3
The cube root of 3.55 is not a common piece of knowledge. However, the cube
root of 1 is 1 and the cube root of 8 is 2. This means that the cube root of 3.55 falls
between 1 and 2. This makes the best answer choice C.
In the previous three questions, you were asked to derive the molar solubility
from the solubility product. An alternative way to pose this question is to ask
you to derive the solubility product from the molar solubility. Beforeyou attack
these problems, it is important that you make a conscious note of potential
mistakes. Remember to multiply the ions by the coefficient from the balanced
equation! This is the most common error on these problems. The second trick is
toremember cuberootsby thinking of common numbers cubed, suchas 23 =8,
33=27, and 43= 64.
Example 3.22
What is thesolubility product ofanM2X salt with molar solubility =5.0 x10"2 M?
A. 1.25xlO"4M3
B. 2.50xlO"4M3
C. 5.00 xKHM3
D. 1.25xlO"3M3
Solution
For an M2X salt, Ksp =[M+]2[X2-] =4X3, where xis the molar solubility. This
means that theKsp valueis four times the molarsolubility cubed.
Ksp =4x3= 4x(5.0 x10"2)3 =4x125xlO-6 =500x10'6 =5.0 xlO"4
Solubility
General Chemistry Equilibrium soiubmty
Relative Solubility
It is difficult topredict relative solubility. The onlywayto compare is through
experiments ordata analysis. We'll start bycomparing the solubilities ofcalcium
carbonate (CaC03) and calcium fluoride (CaF2). When a question asks for the
highest solubility, it refers to the compound that produces the greatest amount of
dissociated salt,which refers togreatest molarsolubility, not solubility product!
The solubility product of CaC03 is 8.7 x10"9 M2, and the solubility product for
CaF2 is4.0 x10"11 M3. Which ofthetwosaltsismoresoluble?
With questions like these, keep inmind that you never compare numbers with
unlike units. Solubility products are used to determine the molar solubility.
CaC03 is an MX salt, so Ksp =x2, while CaF2 is an MX2 salt, so Ksp =4x3. The
determinations of molar solubility for both calcium salts is shown below.
CaC03:x =/K^" =V8.7xlO"9 =V87xVlO'10 =9.?xlO"5M
CaF2:x=^^-^
The molar solubility for CaC03 is 9.3 x10"5 Mand for CaF^ it is 2.2 x10'4, but
exact values are not necessary, because 9.? x10"5 Mis less than 2.? x10"4 M. CaF2
is more soluble than CaC03, even though it has a smaller solubility product.
Relative solubility questions are asked in many ways such as: "Which salt
exhibits greater solvation?" and "Which salt precipitates first?". Use molar
solubility toanswer questions that address relative solubility. Solubility product
is employed only for calculation-based questions.
Example 3.23
Which of the following saltsyieldsthe LEAST amount of silver ion in water?
A. AgBr(s) Ksp =7.9 x10"13 M2
B. AgCl(s) Ksp =1.6 x10"10 M2
C. Ag2Cr04(s) Ksp =9.0 x10"12 M3
D. Ag3P04(s) Ksp =1.8 x10"18 M4
Solution
You must recognize that thechoices are not all the same type of salt. Choices A
and Bare MX salts, so their solubility products may be compared. AgBr has a
lower solubility product thanAgCl, so AgBr also has a lower molar solubility.
This eliminates choice B. Choice C is an M2X salt, and choice D is an M3Xsalt.
To solve the question, youneed molar solubility values. The calculation of the
molar solubility for the threeremainingsalts is shown below.
Choice A: x=fK^ =Y7.9X10"13 =V79 xVlO'14 =8.9 x10"7 M
ChoiceC: x=^^=^^^ =V^"xV^2"=1.3x 10-4M
ChoiceD: X=^/^=^M^2^ =V^xYl^l.6xlO^M
AgBr, choice A, has the lowest molar solubility. However, the question asked for
lowest [Ag+], not lowest molar solubility. For choice C, Ag2Cr04, there are two
silver cations, and choice D, Ag3P04, has three silver cations, so the [Ag+] is
actually double andtriple their respective molar solubilities, making them much
too high to be the actual answer.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 190 The BerkeleyReview
Solubility Experiments
Themolar solubilityof a salt is an empiricalvalue, determinedfromexperiments
involving saturated solutions. While forming a saturated solution is easy to do,
determining the ion concentration is not necessarily an easy task. To form a
saturated solution, enough salt is added to water so that precipitate remains on
the bottom of the container. Determining the amount of dissolved salt may be
accomplished in many ways, of which we shall discuss three. The first method
involves spectroscopy, where the amount of absorbedlight at a fixed wavelength
depends on the concentration of ions, according to Beer's law (Equation 1.3).
Thismethod works only if one of the ions absorbs electromagnetic radiation. The
second method involves measuring the amount of salt added and then collecting,
drying, weighing, and then subtracting the mass of precipitate from this value.
This method works only if the salt is highly soluble. The third method involves
using an ion exchange column to exchange the cation in solution for hydronium.
Theconcentration of hydronium is determined via pH. This method works only
if the salt does not exhibit acid-base properties and has a cation concentration of
at least 10"5 M. You may encounter passages about all three methods.
Example 3.24
What is the molar solubility of calcium carbonate in water given that the addition
of 4.00 mg of CaC03(s) to enough water to form exactly500.0 mL of an aqueous
CaC03 solution yields 0.55mg of anhydrous precipitate?
A. 6.90xl0-3MCaCO3
B. 3.45xl0-3MCaCO3
C. 6.90xl0-5MCaCO3
D. 3.45xl0-5MCaCO3
Solution
You must keep in mind the units of the question and then solve for each unit. In
other words, the answer is in terms of moles/liter, which implies that you must
find both moles and liters to solve the question. The liters of solution are simple,
in that 500.0 mL is equal to 0.500 liters. The amount of calcium carbonate that
dissociates into solution is 3.45 mg. The amount of calcium carbonate in
milligrams is converted to grams bymultiplying by 10"3, andthen tomoles by
dividing by the molecular mass of calciumcarbonate (100 grams per mole). The
mathematical set-up is shown below
Moles: 3.45 x10-3 gramsCaCOa =^ ^ ^
Volume: 500.0 mLx 1-00L = 0.500L CaC03(aq)
1000 mL
Concentration: 3.45 x10^ molesCaCQ3 =69Qx 1Q-5 MCaCo3(aq)
0.500 L solution
The correct answer is choice C.
Solubility looks daunting, but is actually quite simple conceptually. Don't be
intimidated by difficult-looking topics. They're usually pretty easy. Some
applications of solubility include ion exchange (ion exchange columns), selective
solubility (precipitation of a selected cation or anion), and the common ion effect.
Of ion exchange, selective solubility, and the common ion effect, only common
ion effect involves heavy mathematics.
Solubility
General Chemistry Equilibrium soiubmty
Common Ion Effect
The common ion effect is the reduction in solubility of an ionic solid (salt) in
solution, because one of the ions in the salt is already present in solution. In a
way, the concept is similar to Le Chatelier's principle. According to Le
Chatelier's principle, when you add one of the ions toa saturated salt solution,
the reactionshifts to the left (reactant side). This results in the formation of a
precipitate (more solid), so the salt is less soluble. Addition of anion to solution
reduced the solubility. According tothe common ion effect, if one of theions is
already present in solution, then less salt is capable of dissociating, so the
solubility isreduced. The results are the same when anion isadded to solution;
the difference between Le Chatelier's principle and the common ion effect is the
timing of whenthey areadded. Consider Reaction 3.7.
AgCl(s) + H20(1) ^ * Ag+(aq) + Cf(aq)
Reaction 3.7
With the addition of either Ag+ or CI" to solution in Reaction 3.7, there is a
reduction intheamount ofAgCl thatcandissociate intoit, due tothepresence in
the solution of oneof theionsconstituting the salt (Ag+ or CI"). Thisis similarto
Le Chatelier's principle, except that either Ag+ or CI" ispresent insolution inthe
beginning rather than being added once the solution has reached a solubility
equilibrium. Questions on the MCAT may be asked from either a common ion
perspective or a Le Chatelier's principle's perspective.
Le Chatelier's style question: Which way will the reaction shift when Ag+(aq) is
added to a saturated aqueous silver chloride solution? According to Le
Chatelier's principle, adding aproduct shifts the reaction tothe reactant side, so a
precipitate forms. This means that the salt becomes less soluble.
Common ion effect style question: Issilver chloride more soluble in pure water or a
0.10 MNaCl(aq) solution? According to the common ion effect, because the
sodium chloridesolutionhas chloride ions (alsofound in silver chloride) already
present insolution, the solubility of the salt is reduced. We shall look at this
question from amathematical perspective, later inthe discussion ofthis topic.
The common ion effect, simply put, says that the presence of a mutual ion
already dissolved into solution reduces the solubility ofasecond salt sharing that
mutual ion. For instance, stannous fluoride is less soluble in a solution of sodium
fluoride than distilled water because of the presence of the fluoride anion.
Common ioneffect questions canincorporate pHandhydroxide concentration.
Example 3.25
Magnesium hydroxide isMOST soluble inwhich of the following solutions?
A. Vinegar (pH = 2.5)
B. Citric acid (pH = 4.5)
C. Los Angeles tap water (pH = 5.5)
D. Distilled water (pH = 7.0)
Solution
This question involves the common ion effect, where the common ion is
hydroxide anion. Magnesium hydroxide is most soluble inthe solution with the
least hydroxide anion, which corresponds to the most acidic solution. The most
acidic solution has the lowest pH, which makes choice Athebestanswer. This is
the reasonthat acidrainis sucha seriousproblem: it dissolves basicsalts.
Example 3.26
At what pH is Ca(OH)2(s) most soluble in water?
A. 3
B. 5
C. 9
D. 11
Solution
The pH at which Ca(OH)2(s) is most soluble is the pH at which there is the least
common ion (OH") present in solution. There is the least OH" present at lower
pH values, where the solution is acidic. The best answer is choice A. Note that
basic salts are most soluble in acidic solutions.
Example 3.27
(NH4)3(CoCl6)(s) is MOSTsoluble at which pH?
A. 3
B. 5
C. 9
D. 11
Solution
The pH at which (NH4)3(CoCl6)(s) is most soluble is the pH at which there is the
most OH" in solution. This is because of a complex equilibrium. The OH" in
solution can deprotonate the ammonium cation (NH4+) to form ammonia, which
reduces the amount of ammonium present in solution. As the amount of NH4+
in solution decreases, the (NH4)3(CoCl6)(s) equilibrium shifts to products to
generate more NH4+. The most OH" is present at higher pH values, where the
solution is basic. The best answer is choice D. Note here that acidic salts are
most soluble in basic solutions. The two equilibrium equations are as follows:
(NH4)3(CoCl6)(s) ^ * 3NH4+(aq) + CoCl63"(aq)
NH4+(aq) + OH'(aq) * * NH3(aq) + H20(aq)
As the second reaction shifts to the right, the first reaction is displaced from
equilibrium, so it too shifts to the right. This is a complex equilibrium. The two
reactions are dependent on one another.
Be able to make qualitative predictions about solubility based on both the
common ion effect and complex equilibrium. Example 3.25and Example 3.26 are
examples of the common ion effect. Example 3.27 is an example of increased
solubility due to the presence of a complexing ion in solution. Both of these
concepts play a role in determining solubility. When doing calculations with the
common ion effect, be sure not to plug variables into the solubility product
formula blindly. In the case of an MX salt, for instance, KSp still is equal to
[M+1[X"], but the values of [M+] and [X"] are not just x with the common ion
effect. The concentration of the ion that is already present in the solution is
found by summing the initial concentration and the additional ion formed from
the dissociation of the salt (x). This is [X"]initial + x. In most cases, the x will be
insignificant relative to the [X"]initiai, so it can be ignored. Most common ion
effectquestions should be simple and fun after you have done enough of them.
Example 3.28
Whatis themolarsolubility ofCaCl2(s) in 0.01 MNaCl(aq) solution?
CaCl2(s) ^=^ Ca2+(aq) + 2Cl"(aq) Ksp =2.5x 10"10 M3
A. 2.5xlO"4M
B. 2.5xlO-6M
C. 2.5xlO"8M
D. 2.5xlO"10M
Solution
This question is purely mathematical. The key fact is recognizing that there is
0.01 MCI" insolutioninitially. Thesetup and solutionare as follows:
Reaction: CaCl2(s) ^ * Ca2+(aq) + 2C1"
Initially: excess 0 0.01
Shift: z S 2&
Equilibrium: who cares? x 0.01 +2x
Ksp =P*2+][Cr]2 /.Ksp =(x<0.01 +2xf
If we ignore 2x: Ksp =2.5x 10"10 =(x)(0.0l)2 =0.0001(x) .\x =2.5x 10"6 M
The correct answer is choice B.
Example 3.29
What is themolar solubility ofCa(OH)2 inan aqueous solution at pH=13, given
that the Ksp for Ca(OH)2 is 6.5 x10"6 M3?
A. 6.5xlO"6M
B. 6.5xlO"4M
C. 1.2xlO"2M
D. 6.5xl020M
Solution
This question is purely mathematical as well. You must recognize that there is
0.10 MOH- present in a pH = 13 solution, because pH + pOH = 14 for an
aqueous solution and [OH-] =10"POH. The equation, set-up, and solution are as
follows:
Reaction: Ca(OH)2(s) ^ * Ca2+(aq) + 20H"
Initially: excess 0 0.10
Shift: ix +x 2x
Equilibrium: who cares? x 0.10+ 2x
Ksp =eCa2+][OH12 .-.Ksp =(x<0.10 +2xf
Upon ignoring 2x: Ksp =6.5x 10'6 =(x)(0.10)2 =0.01(x) .\x =6.5x 10"4 M
Calculation questions involving the common ion effect are actually rather simple,
but in most cases the average student is not familiar with the process. Simply
plug inthe value for the preexisting concentration, andsolve for xfrom the Ksp
expression.
Separation by Precipitation
Removal of certain ions (cations or anions) from solution can be done in a
selective fashion, by precipitation of cations with various anions, according to
their relative solubility values. The least soluble salt precipitates from solution
first. Questionsabout selective precipitationinvolvecomparingmolar solubility
values. Be careful not tofall into thetrap ofthinking that the smallest Ksp is the
least soluble. You must consider what type of ionic system it is. The compound
with the smallest value for x (molar solubility) precipitates from solution first.
Table 3.8 lists the solubility products for some common salts at standard
temperature. The values are listed without units, as is conventional in general
chemistry textbooks, but you should always consider the units when they are
provided.
Salt Ksp Salt
Ksp
Salt
Ksp
BaF2 2.4 x 10"5 CaF2 4.0 xlO"11 MgF2 6.4 x 10"9
PbF2 4.1 x 10"8 SrF2 7.9 x lO'10 ZnF2 2.5 x 10"8
BaS04 1.5 x 10"9 CaS04 6.1 x 10"5 MgS04 7.2 x 10"5
PbS04 4.1 x 10-8 SrS04 7.9 x 10"10 ZnS04 8.3 xlO"9
BaC03 1.6 x 10"9 CaC03 6.1 x 10"9 MgC03 1.1 x 10"15
PbC03 1.4 x 10-15 SrC03 8.4 x 10"10 ZnC03 2.2 xlO"12
Ba(OH)2 5.3 x 10"3 Ca(OH)2 1.4 xlO"6 Mg(OH)2 1.2 xlO"11
Pb(OH)2 1.3 x 10"15 Sr(OH)2 4.1 x lO"4 Zn(OH)2 2.1 x 10"16
Table 3.8
Figure 3-6 shows a precipitation flow chart from a qualitative analysis
experiment designed to identify cations in solution. The cations are selected
from Table 3.8. All of the cations are +2 cations, so they all form the same type of
salts. As such, solubility products can be directly compared. Each step shows
the salt that precipitates.
Ba2+,Ca2+,Pb2+,Sr2+
CO,
PbC03(s) Ba2+,Ca2+,Sr2+
SO.
SrS04(s)
a small amount of BaS04(s)
also forms a precipitate
T
CaF2(s)
Figure 3-6
Ba2+,Ca2+
2+
Ba
Solubility
General Chemistry Equilibrium soiubiuty
Example 3.30
According to data in Table 3.8, to remove strontiumby precipitation from a
solution with Ca2+, Mg2+, and Sr2+, it isBEST toadd:
A. F"
B. S042"
C. co32-
D. OH-
Solution
The best anion to add to solution to remove a cation is the one that forms a salt
less soluble than the salts of the other cations in solution. Of the three cations
(Ca2+, Mg2+, and Sr2"*-), the least soluble fluoride salt is CaF2, eliminating choice
A. Of the three cations, the least soluble sulfate salt is SrS04/ so choice B is the
best answer. Of the three cations, the least soluble carbonate salt is MgC03, and
the least soluble hydroxide salt is Mg(OH)2, eliminating choices Cand D.
Example 3.31
Mercury II cations areMOST soluble in whichof the following solutions?
A. 0.10 M NaCl
B. 0.10MNa2S
C. 0.10 MNal
D. 0.10MNaNO3
Solution
This is a question ofrelative solubilities. This question is askingwhat therelative
solubilities of HgCl2, HgS, Hgl2, and Hg(N03)2 are. The key fact to keep in
mind is that nitrates are infinitely soluble in water (one of the solubility rules).
Of the anions, only nitrate can formhydrogen bonds with water, so it has the
greatest solvation energy of thefour anions. It is alsothe largestof the anions, so
it has the weakest electrostatic forces in its lattice structure. The conclusion is
that nitrate salts are the most soluble, so the best answer is choice D. This is
purely a qualitative argument for the solubility. There is mathematical evidence
to back this up as well, but the numbers were not given in the problem.
Example 3.32
Given asolution that combines Ag+(aq), Pb2+(aq), Srâq), and Zn2+(aq), what is
the sequenceof precipitation when NaCl(aq) is added to solution?
KSp AgCl =2x10"10, Ksp pbCl2 =2x10"5, Ksp SrCl2 =9x10"3, Ksp ZnCl2 =1x10"4
A. 1st:AgCl, 2nd: SrCl2,3rd: ZnCl2,4th: PbCl2
B. 1st: AgCl, 2nd: PbCl2/ 3rd: ZnCl2,4th: SrCl2
C. 1st: SrCl2,2nd: ZnCl^ 3rd: PbCl2,4th: AgCl
D. 1st: PbCl2,2nd: ZnCl2,3rd: SrCl2,4th: AgCl
Solution
The salt with the lowest molar solubility forms a precipitate first. AgCl has the
lowest solubility product, and themolarsolubility is the square root of KSp. For
the other three salts, use the cube root of Ksp toobtain molar solubility. This
makes AgCl theleast soluble, and the first to precipitate, eliminating choices C
and D. Theremaining saltshave +2cations, so the order of precipitation is from
the lowest Ksp value to the highest Ksp value. This makes choice Bcorrect.
Ion Exchange Column
An ion exchange column exchanges one ion in solution for another (which is
initially bound to the column), by precipitating out the ion that forms the less
soluble salt and releasing a more soluble ion into solution to replace it. A water
softener is an ionexchange column. Hard water (rich in Ca2+(aq)) travels down
the column where the anion in the ion exchange resin binds calcium cations to
form an insoluble salt while releasing sodium cations (Na+(aq)) into solution.
Aqueous sodium cation is referred to as soft water. As calcium precipitates
through the ion exchange column, it is filtered from the water, preventing it from
forming precipitates in the plumbing lines of appliances (such as a washer or
water heater). To evaluate the viability of an ion exchange column, the molar
solubility values are compared. Figure 3-7 shows an ion exchange column.
Ca2+(aq) enters at the topof
the ion exchange column.
The column is filled with an ion
exchange resin. The cation to be
precipitated must have a lower
molar solubility with the anion of
the resin than the salt in the resin.
1Na+(aq) exitsfromthebase
of the ion exchange column.
Figure 3-7
In the water softening example, the removal of calcium ions from tap water is
accomplished by passing the water across rock salt (large chunks of NaCl) and
then filtering out the calcium chloride. Reaction 3.8 is the exchange reaction in a
water softener.
2Na+(aq) + CaCl2(s) ^ * Ca2+(aq) + 2NaCl(s)
Reaction 3.8
Rock salt is employed to minimize surface area, and to prevent sodium chloride
from dissociating into solution too rapidly. Sodium chloride is used because its
ions are non-toxic, and it does not change the pH of the water.
Selective Precipitation and Ion Exchange: The addition of an ion to solution with the
intention of precipitating an existing ion out from the solution. This is achieved
when the salt being precipitated is less soluble (has a lower molar solubility) than
any other salt combination in solution.
2AgCl(s) + Hg2+(aq) ^ 2Ag+(aq) + HgCl2(s)
Reaction 3.9
Because mercury chloride is less soluble than silver chloride, the addition of
silver chloride to the mercury solution precipitates mercury out of water. This is
the same principle applied in ion exchange columns and can also be applied in
qualitative analysis when we look for ions in solution.
Solubility
Complex Ion Formation: Complex equilibrium occurs when two reactions are
summed to form one overall reaction. This is possible when the product of one
reaction is a reactant in a second reaction. A great example involves the addition
of ammoniumto salt buildup in sinks in order to remove the deposit. Tocheck
this, take a small whiff of a bathroom cleaner, and you will detect ammonia.
CaC03(s) + H20(1) ^ ^ Ca2+(aq) + C032"(aq)
Reaction 3.10
Ca2+(aq) + 4NH3(aq) ^ * Ca(NH3)42+(aq)
Reaction 3.11
Because ammonia forms hydrogen bonds with water, the calcium-ammonia
complex is moresoluble thanthe calcium cation. By the addition of ammonia to
solution, free calcium cation forms a complex ion (the result of Reaction 3.11
shifting in theforward direction), which reduces theamount of free calciumand
forces the Reaction 3.10 toproceedin the forward direction. As mentionedprior,
when reactions are added together, the equilibrium constant for the overall
reactionis the product of the equilibriumconstants of the component reactions.
Complex Ions (Coordination complexes): Complex ions form when a ligand (lone
pair donor or Lewis base) donates a pair of electrons to a central atom(Lewis
acid), which is typically a metal, to form a coordinate covalent bond. This
process is referred to as chelation, where the Lewis base is a chelating agent. A
prime example is hemoglobin whose porphyrin ring serves as a polydentate
ligand by chelating the central iron.
Example 3.33
Silver chloride is MOSTsoluble in which of the following solutions at 250C?
A. 0.10MHgNO3(aq)
B. Pure water
C. AgN03(aq)
D. NaCl(aq)
Solution
Silver chloride (AgCl(s)) is most soluble in a solution whereHg+is present. This
is because of a complex equilibrium. TheHg+ in solution canbind the chloride
anion (CI") to form a precipitate. As the amount of CI" in solution decreases,
more AgCl dissolves into solution to replace it. The best answer is choice A.
Both choices C and D are eliminated, because of the common ion effect.
"Chemistry every day keeps yon balanced!"
Equilibrium
Passages
14 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Equilibrium Passage Schedule:
I: After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I,II & VI - IX
Following Task I: Passages III - V, X & XI (34 questions in 44 minutes)
Review: Passages XII - XIV & Questions 97 - 100
II
III
R-E-V-I.E-W
Ipeializing ii MGAT Preparation
Eqmlibnum Study Passages
I. Carbon Dioxide and Carbon Monoxide Equilibrium (1-7)
II. Hydrogen and Bromine Equilibrium (8 - 15)
III. Equilibrium Constant Magnitude (17-22)
IV. Gas-Phase Equilibrium Constant Experiment (23 - 29)
V. Equilibrium Reactions (30 - 36)
VI. Le Chatelier's Principle (37 - 42)
VII. Solubility and Qualitative Analysis (43 - 49)
VIII. Solubility Experiment (50 - 56)
IX. Qualitative Analysis Experiment (57 - 62)
X. Solubility Chart (63 - 69)
XI. Calcium Salts Solubility (70 - 75)
XII. Complex Equilibrium (76 - 82)
XIII. Hemoglobin and Acclimation (83 - 89)
XIV. Equilibrium Reaction of N02 and N2O4 (90 - 96)
Questions Not Based on a Descriptive Passage (97 - 100)
Equilibrium Scoring Scale
84 - 100 13- 15
66-83 10- 12
47 -65 7 -9
34-46 4-6
1 -33 1 -3
A researcher studies the equilibrium of carbon monoxide
withcarbon dioxide in the presence of oxygen gas at various
temperatures. The relationshipis shown in Reaction 1.
2 CO(g) + Q2(g) > ^ 2 C02(g)
Reaction 1
This is accomplished by monitoring the total pressureof
the systemas it depends on temperature. There are different
stoichiometric amounts of gases on each side of Reaction 1,
so the reaction can shift with changes in pressure or volume.
To quantify the contents in the flask at equilibrium, the
pressure for the system is analyzed. It is assumed that
pressure changesare due to shifts in equilibrium and changes
in the system that obey the ideal gas equation (PV = nRT).
Changes in the total pressureare evaluatedfor the systemand
the equilibrium constant is derived from the values for
pressure. The reaction is monitored for three trials at each
temperature over a wide range of temperatures. The results
are summarized in Table 1.
Temperature (K) Kp (atm"1)
375 09.0
425 20.8
500 32.2
600 60.5
Table 1
Data in Table 1 demonstrate that the value of the
equilibrium increases withincreasing temperature. Although
the equilibrium systemshifts upon changes in the moles of
reactant, moles of product, external pressure, and volume, the
equilibriumconstant remains constant.
1
2.
At 102C, Pco = 2.0atm. and Po2 = 1-0 atm. What is
the partial pressureof CO2at this temperature?
A. 2.2 atm.
B. 6.0 atm.
C. 9.0 atm.
D. 18.0 atm.
Addition of C02(g) to the equilibrium mixture results in
A. A decrease in the moles of 02(g).
B. A decrease in the moles of CO(g).
C. An increase inthevalue of Kp.
D. Nochange inthevalue of Kp.
3. According to Table 1, the reaction is which of the
following?
A. Exothermic as written
B. Endothermic as written
C. Adiabatic as carried out
D. Isothermal upon reaction
4. The equilibrium constant (K) varies only with which of
the following?
A. A change in the pressure of the system
B. A change in the volume of the system
C. A change in the concentration of the system
D. A change in the temperature of the system
If a flask were filled with pure C02(g) to a total pressure
of 1.00atm., then once equilibrium is reached, the total
pressure of the system is which of the following?
A. Less than 1.00 atm.
B. Exactly 1.00 atm.
C. Between 1.00 atm. and 1.50 atm.
D. Exactly 1.50 atm.
6. According to Reaction 1, compressing the reaction
vessel leads to which of the following?
A. An increase in the partial pressure of C02(g)
B. An increase in the moles of 02(g)
C. An increase in the mole fraction of CO(g)
D. An increase in the equilibrium constant
7. Based on the following reaction, the addition of
Ca(OH)2(aq) to Reaction 1 at equilibrium results in
Ca(OH)2(aq) + C02(g)^=^=- CaC03(s) + H20(1)
A. No change in the moles of C02(g).
B. A decrease in the concentration of 02(g).
C. An increase in partial pressure of CO(g).
D. An increase in the total pressure.
Hydrogen bromide gas is one of the strongest acids
available in gas form. In aqueous solution, HBr has a pKa
value of approximately -12. A pKa value of -12 is indicative
of a very strong acid. By comparison, HCl has a pKa of
approximately -9. Hydrobromic acid (HBr) can be produced
by Reaction 1.
H2(g) + Br2(l) ^^ 2 HBr(g)
Reaction 1
A student decides to study the equilibrium distribution
for Reaction 1. Under ambient conditions, Reaction 1
reaches equilibrium at some temperature T and pressure P.
Once at equilibrium, measurements are taken for the partial
pressure of each gas and the mass of bromine liquid. The
values are listed in Table 1.
Br2(l) 10.0 grams
H2(g)
1.36 atm.
HBr(g) 2.72 atm.
Table 1
The student takes notice that Reaction 1 shifts with
changes in the conditions of the system, such as the addition
of bromine liquid, the removal of hydrobromic acid, and
increases in volume. The student irreversibly increases the
volume of the system by opening a valve on the reaction
flask that is connected to an evacuated column. Not all
changes shift the reaction. Changes in the equilibrium
concentrations are not accurately recorded.
8. What is the value of K at ambient temperature, T?
A. 0.20 atm.
B. 0.544 atm.
C. 2.00 atm.
D. 5.44 atm.
9. Addition of HBr(g) to an equilibrium mixture of
Reaction 1 results in which of the following?
A. An increase in the partial pressure of H2(g)
B. A decrease in the partial pressure of H2(g)
C. An increase in the concentration of Br2(l)
D. A decrease in the concentration of Br2(l)
10. Which of the following starting conditions results in
the GREATEST amount of H2(g) at equilibrium?
A. 0.80 atm. H2(g) and 20 g Br2(l)
B. 1.00 atm. H2(g) and 20 g Br2(l)
C. 0.80 atm. H2(g) and 30 g Br2(l)
D. 1.00 atm. HBr(g) and 30 g Br2(l)
11. Subsequent experiments show that as the temperature
increases, the mole percent of the hydrogen bromide gas
increases. Which of the following is TRUE about the
equilibrium reaction as written?
A. It is endothermic.
B. It is exothermic.
C. It is isobaric.
D. It is not an equilibrium mixture.
12. How can it be explained that a reaction mixture of 1.0
atm. HBr(g) and 1.0 atm. H2(g) results in no change in
hydrogen gas partial pressure?
A. The reaction is in equilibrium.
B. The reaction cannot move in the forward direction
due to a limiting reagent in zero concentration.
C. The reaction cannot move in the reverse direction
due to a limiting reagent in zero concentration.
D. The reaction is moving forward and backward at the
same rate.
13. Mixing 3.0 atm. HBr(g) with 1.5 atm. H2(g) over
Br2(l) shows which of the following in time?
A. A large increase in the partial pressure of HBr(g)
B. A small increase in the partial pressure of HBr(g)
C. A large increase in the partial pressure of H2(g)
D. A small increase in the partial pressure of H2(g)
14. A flask is initially filled with pure HBr(g). Which of
the following graphs represents the partial pressure of
H2(g) over time?
time time
15. Addition of which of the following to the equilibrium
mixture will NOT affect the partial pressure of H2(g)?
A. NaOH(aq)
B. Br2(l)
C. H2(g)
D. HBr(g)
Chlorine gas has a high reduction potential (large
positive voltage for its reduction half-reaction). Chemically
speaking, chlorinegas is veryeasily reduced. Chlorinegas is
a strong oxidizing agent that can dissolve away most metals
in short periods of time. The dissolving is the result of an
oxidation-reduction reaction. The relative ease with which
metals are oxidized accounts for this strong tendency to lose
electrons to chlorine. Chlorine gas is not as successful at
oxidizing non-metals as it is at oxidizing metals. This is
attributed to the decreased desire for non-metals to be oxidized
relative to metals. Non-metals have a higher ionization
energy and electronegativity than metals. With non-metals,
chlorine may only partially oxidize the corresponding
reducingagent. Reactions 1 and 2 are prime examples of the
oxidationcapability of chlorine on non-metal compounds.
PCb(g) +Cl2(g) -i * PCl5(g)
Reaction 1
2 NO(g) + Cl2(g) ^ 2 NOCKg)
Reaction 2
The equilibrium constant for Reaction 1is 1.95 atm."1
at 100'C, while the equilibrium constant for Reaction 2 is
2.1 x 104 atm."1 at 100"C. Bothreactions favor products as
written, but not to the same degree.
In these examples, the non-metals (phosphorus in
Reaction 1 and nitrogen in Reaction 2) are already in a
positive oxidation state in the reactants. The greater the
value of the equilibrium constant, the more favorable the
reaction, and thus the more product that is formed.
16. According to the equilibriumconstants associated with
Reaction 1 and Reaction 2, which compound is most
readily oxidized by chlorine?
A. PC13
B. PC15
C. NO
D. NOC1
17. If a flask were filled with PCI3 and CI2 to a total
pressure of 1.50 atm. such that the mole fraction of
PCI3 is twice that of CI2, then what is the total
pressure of the system once at equilibrium?
A. Less than 1.00 atm.
B. Between 1.00 atm. and 1.25 atm.
C. Between 1.25 atm. and 1.50 atm.
D. Greater than 1.50 atm.
18. What is the equilibrium constant for the following
reaction?
2 NOCl(g)
A. 4.9 x 10"17 atm.
B. 4.9 x 10'5 atm.
C. 1.4 x 102 atm.
D. 2.1 x Kâtm.
2 NO(g) + Cl2(g)
19. If there is initially 1.00 atm. of NOC1 in a flask, what
is the partial of NO gas, once at equilibrium?
A. 0.0230 atm.
B. 0.0460 atm.
C. 0.0025 atm.
D. 0.0050 atm.
2 0. The GREATEST concentration of Cl2(g) is in which of
the following systems, once equilibrium is reached?
A. A system initially with 1.0 atm. PCI3
B. A system initially with 1.0 atm. PCI5
C. A system initially with 1.0 atm. NO
D. A system initially with 1.0 atm. NOC1
21. Which of the following statements is true about the
effectof adding chlorine gas to eachequilibrium?
A. It will cause the greatest change in Reaction 1.
B. It will cause the greatest change in Reaction 2.
C. It will cause equal changes in both reactions.
D. It will change the equilibrium constant.
22. A flask at 100C is charged with 0.40 atm. each of
PCI3, PCI5, and CI2. In which direction will it react
to reach equilibrium, according to Reaction 1?
A. It is already at equilibrium.
B. To the left (reactant side)
C. To the right (product side)
D. It varies with a catalyst.
The equilibrium constant for a reaction involving gases
can be determined by experimentation, using a glass column
as a closed system. The apparatus used in equilibrium
experiments, shown in Figure 1, is connected to a vacuum
pump at one end and is sealed at the other. On the column
are three stopcocks with air tight fittings, to which flasks
containing gases may be attached. At the sealed end of the
tube is a pressure gauge. The volume of the glass column is
exactly 1.00 liters, when all stopcocks areclosed. Each flask
and attached stopcock contain volumes of exactly 250 mL.
This means that when all three stopcocks are open in a
manner where gas is free to flow betweenthe glass column
andany of the attachedflasks, the total volume for theclosed
systemis exactly 1.75liters. Figure 1 shows the apparatus.
^ Connected
Pressure gauge tovacuum
Flask 1 Flask 2 Flask 3
Figure 1
During an experiment, the closed glass cylinder is filled
with 1.00 atm. of hydrogen (H2) according to the gauge in
the cylinder. Flask 1 is filled with 1.0 atm. carbon disulfide
(CS2). The reaction starts when the stopcock is opened,
allowing the two gases to mix. The temperature of the glass
column is maintained at 25C using an external heat sink.
The internal pressure is monitored until it stays constant.
Figure 2 shows the internal pressure over time, where t = 0
represents the time at which the two gasses were mixed.
1.0-
Time (minutes)
Figure 2
The pressure of each gas in the reaction mixture can be
calculated from the change in internal pressure. The initial
partial pressure of hydrogen gas is 0.8 atmospheres in the
1.25 liter closed system. The decrease in partial pressure of
hydrogen gas is double the decrease in the internal pressure,
based on the stoichiometry of the Reaction 1, which shows
the reactivity of the compounds.
1 CS2(g) + 4 H2(g) * 1 CH4(g) + 2 H2S(g)
Reaction 1
The final internal pressure is the sum of the partial
pressures. Thetotal pressure canbe found using Equation 1.
Ptotal = PCS2 + PH2 + PCH4 + PH2S
Equation 1
23. Which of the following is the BEST explanation as to
why thereaction temperature mustbe heldat 25*C?
A. Atemperature change cancausethecarbon disulfide
to decomposeto carbondioxide.
B. The reaction will not proceed unless the
temperature is exactly 25C.
C. The glass will begin to melt at temperatures in
excess of 25C.
D. The equilibrium constant can change with
temperature.
24. The temperature of the closed reaction vessel was
increased. This resulted in the pressure of the closed
systemdecreasing, rather than increasing as expected.
Which of the following explanations BEST explains
this observation?
A. The pressure of a closed system decreases as the
temperature increases according to Charles'slaw.
B. The reaction is endothermic as written.
C. The reaction is exothermic as written.
D. Heavier molecules are being formed causing the
number of collisions to increase.
25. How can the partial pressures of CH4 and H2S at
equilibrium be determinedfrom the experiment?
A. At equilibrium, the partial pressure of CH4equals
the value for the change in the pressure of the
system (APt0tal) while the partial pressure of H2S
equals twice the value for the change in the
pressure of the system (2APtotai).
B. At equilibrium, the partial pressure of H2S equals
system(APt0tal)> while the partial pressure of CH4
equals twice the value for the change in the
pressure of the system (2APtotai).
C. At equilibrium, the partial pressure of CH4equals
system(APtotal). while the partial pressureof H2S
equals half the value for the change in the pressure
of the system (-APtotal)-
D. At equilibrium, the partial pressure of H2S equals
system(APtotal)* while the partial pressureof CH4
equals half the value for the change in the pressure
of the system (-APtotal)-
2
26. Which of the following relationships between partial
pressure for the gases in the mixture at equilibrium will
ALWAYS be true for the reaction as it is set up?
A. Pcs2>PCH4
B.
PCH4 >Ph2
C.
PH2> Pcs2
D.
Ph2s >PH2
27. Which of the following equations represents the
equilibriumexpression for the reaction?
A v _(Pch4)(Ph2s)2
A. K.p
(Pcs2)(Ph2)4
B K_ (Pcs2)(Ph2)4
P (Pch4)(Ph2s)2
c K _(Pch4)(Ph2s)
P (Pcs2)(Ph2)
D K - (PCS2)(PH2)
P (Pch4)(Ph2s)
28. The final total pressure of the system must be:
A. greater than 1.6 atmospheres.
B. greater than 1.0, but less than 1.6 atmospheres.
C. greater than 0.6, but less than 1.0 atmospheres.
D. less than 0.6 atmospheres.
29. Which of the following stresses on the system will
change the value of the equilibriumconstant?
A. Opening the stopcock to Flask 2, which was filled
with hydrogen gas.
B. Turning on the vacuum pump to remove some of
the gas in the column.
C. Opening the stopcock to Flask 3, which was filled
with hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas.
D. Heating the gas in the glass column by heating the
glass with a hot air blower.
Chemical equilibrium obeys the rules of Le Chatelier's
principle. Le Chatelier's principle states that when a system
at equilibrium is stressed, the reaction will shift in a manner
to partially relieve the stress and reestablish equilibrium. In
a gas phase equilibrium, stresses that can be applied include
changes in pressure, volume, temperature, and moles of
either reactant or product. It is not possible to change just
one of the variables, so a change in one variable will lead to
in a change in another variable. For instance, if the volume
is increased, the pressure must decrease. Written below are
three reactions and their respective equilibrium constants at
500'C:
Reaction 1:
2 S02(g) + 1 02(g) -S"^ 2 S03(g)
Kp =5.82 x102 atm.'1 at 500eC
Reaction 2:
1 H20(g) + 1 Cl20(g) ^z^r 2 HOCl(g)
Kp =8.61 x10"3 at 500C
Reaction 3:
1 HCl(g) + 1 CO(g) -g-*- 1 HCOCl(g)
Kp =3.26 xlO'6 atm."1 at 500C
The equilibrium constant is derived by dividing the
partial pressures of the product gases by the partial pressures
of the reactant gases. In Reaction 1 and Reaction 3, the
equilibrium constants weredetermined usinga pistonsystem
where thetotal pressure and volume weremonitored, andany
change in pressure or volume can be attributed to a shift in
the reaction equilibrium. Because the number of products
equals thenumber of reactants, thetotal pressure and volume
cannot change in reaction 2, so equilibrium concentrations
were determined using infrared spectroscopy.
30. Given the initial partial pressure for Ph20 ls 0.5 atm
and for Pci20ls 0.5 atm, which graph accurately shows
the rate as a function of time for the reaction?
Time Time
31. Which reactions will shift when the pressure changes?
A. Reaction 1 only
B. Reactions 1 and 2 only
C. Reactions 1 and 3 only
D. Reactions 1, 2, and 3
32. Upon increasing the volume at constant temperature of
a vessel holding Reaction 3, how are the partial
pressures affected?
A# "HCOC1 increases; HCQC1 increases
Phci-Pco Phci
B# PhCOCI decreases; "HCOC1 decreases
Phci-Pco phci
q 9 PHCOCI remains constant; HCOC1 increase
Phci-Pco phci
D. PhCOCI remains constant; HCQC1 decreases
Phci-Pco Phci
33. Which graph depicts partial pressures as a function of
time after 0.75 atm SO2 is mixed with 0.50 atm O2?
S02
Time
Time
02
B.
D.
3
'S03
Time
Time
34. Which Keq value does NOT match the reaction?
A. 2HOCl(g) -^= 1 H20(g) + 1 Cl20(g)
: 1 HOCl(g)
Kp =8.61 x10'3 at 500eC
B. lH20(g)+ICl20(g) -^
Kp =9.28 xlO'2 at 500"C
C. iHCOCl(g) -^^r iHCl(g) + ICO(g)
Kp =5.54 x102 at 500C
D. 2 HCl(g) + 2 CO(g) -^=
Kp=1.06x lO'11 at500C
2 HCOCl(g)
35. To convert aKp value in terms of ton-1 to aKp value
interms of atm"1, you should:
A. multiply the Kp value by760.
B. divide the Kp value by760.
C. multiply theKp value by0.76.
D. divide the Kp value by 0.76.
36. Coolingan endothermic equilibriumreactionresults in
A. The mole fraction of products will decrease.
B. The mole fraction of reactants will decrease.
C. The mole fraction of products will increase.
D. The ratio of products to reactants will increase.
Le Chatelier's principle is invoked to explain reaction
shifts following the disruption of equilibrium. A system in
dynamic equilibrium is a closed system where the forward
reaction rate and reverse reaction rate are equal. Components
in the mixture maintain fixed concentration. Equilibrium is
different from steady state. In steady state systems, an
intermediate has a static concentration, because the formation
reaction and the consumption reaction have equal rates.
A systemcan be disturbed fromequilibrium by applying
a stress, such as changing the temperature, volume, pressure,
or moles of a reagent. According to Le Chatelier's principle,
the system reacts in a manner to partially alleviate the stress
and reestablish equilibrium. Reaction 1 starts with three
different starting concentrations on its way to equilibrium.
CO(g) + H20(g) ^=^ C02(g) + H2(g)
Reaction 1
Table 1 lists the starting and equilibrium concentrations
for each of the three trials. The reactions are observed at
1000C and the equilibrium constant is found to be 0.569.
Trial I Trial II Trial III
Molarity Initial Final Initial Final Initial Final
CO 1.00 0.57 0.10 0.014 0.50 0.373
H20 1.00 0.57 1.00 0.914 0.50 0.373
C02
0 0.43 0 0.086 0.50 0.627
H2 0 0.43 0 0.086 0 0.127
Table 1
Once at equilibrium, a separate stresses were appliedto
each system. To reaction System I, an additional 0.10moles
of CO was added to the 1.00 liter vessel in which the reaction
was housed. To reaction System II, all of the H2O was
removed from the 1.00 liter vessel in which the reaction was
housed. The 1.00 liter vessel containing reaction System III
was cooled to 500"C. Once equilibrium was reestablished in
the three reaction vessels, the partial pressure of CO2 had
increased in reactionssystems I and HI and decreasedin II.
37. All of the following affect the reactant/product ratiosof
the equilibrium mixture EXCEPT:
A. increasingthe volumeof the reactionvessel.
B. heating the reaction vessel.
C. cooling the reaction vessel.
D. addingreactant to the reaction vessel.
38. If 1.00 moles of both CO2 and H2 were mixed in a
1.00 liter container at 1000C, what will the
equilibrium concentrationsbe for both CO2and H2?
A. [C021 = 0.57 M; [H2] = 0.57 M
B. [CO2] = 0.57 M; [H2] = 0.43 M
C. [CO2I = 0.43 M; [H21 = 0.57 M
D. [CO2I = 0.43 M; [H2] = 0.43 M
39. As heat is added to Reaction 1, what occurs?
A. Both theequilibrium constant (Kgq) and thepartial
pressure of CO2 decrease.
B. Both theequilibrium constant (Keq) andthepartial
pressure of CO2 increase.
C. The equilibrium constant (Keq) remains constant
while the partial pressure of CO2 increases.
D. The equilibrium constant (Keq) remains constant
while the partial pressure of CO2 decreases.
4 0. What effect would an increase in pressure have on the
equilibrium system of Reaction 1?
A. The reaction would shift to the right and the
equilibrium constant would increase.
B. The reaction would shift to the left and the
equilibriumconstant would decrease.
C. The reaction would shift to the right and the
equilibrium constant wouldremain constant.
D. The reaction would not shift in either direction and
the equilibriumconstant would remainconstant.
41. Which of the following graphs represents what would
be observed over time if equal parts of CO(g), C02(g),
andH2(g) weremixedin a closed system?
A. B.
Time
p
$
Cfl ^ *
</)
P
t
Time
22
3
GO
CA
a
Time
= Total Pressure
= H20 Pressure
= CO Pressure
42. For an exothermic reaction at 100C, the equilibrium
concentration of the products equals the equilibrium
concentration of the reactants. What is true at 25"C?
A. Keq> 1; [Products] > [Reactants]
B. Keq> 1; [Products] < [Reactants]
C. Keq < 1; [Products] > [Reactants]
D. Keq< 1; [Products] < [Reactants]
Thesolubility of a salt in water is measured by its molar
solubility. The molar solubility is defined as the moles of
salt that dissociate into one liter of aqueous solution. The
solubility product (Ksp) is the equilibrium constant for the
dissociation reaction. Table 1 lists solubility data for various
salts of silver, lead, strontium, and zinc.
Compound
^sp
Molar solubility
AgCl 1.7 x 10-10M2 1.3 x lO'5 M
PbCl2 1.6 x 10'5 M3 1.2 x 10-2M
SrCl2 8.8 x lO'3 M3 1.3 x 10"1 M
ZnCl2 1.1 x 10"4M3 3.1 x 10"2M
Ag2C03 8.1 x 10"12 M3 1.2 x 10"4M
PbC03 8.3 x lO'11 M2 9.1 x 10'6M
SrC03 7.1 x 10'10M2 2.6 x 10"5 M
ZnC03 2.0 x 10"10 M2 1.4 x 10"5 M
AgOH 2.0 x 10"8 M2 1.4 x 10'4M
Pb(OH)2 1.2 x 10"15M3 6.5 x 10"6M
Sr(OH)2 3.2 x 10"4M3 4.3 x 10"2 M
Zn(OH)2 2.1 x 10"16M3 3.8 x 10"6 M
Ag2S 1.6 x 10"49M3 3.4 x 10"17 M
PbS 2.6 x 10"27 M2 5.1 x 10"14M
SrS 4.0 x 10"6 M2 2.0 x 10"3 M
ZnS 2.5 x 10"22 M2 1.6 x lO'11 M
Ag2S04 1.4 x 10"5M3 1.3 x 10-2M
PbS04 1.7 x 10"8M2 1.3 x 10"4M
SrS04 3.2 x 10"7 M2 5.6 x lO'4 M
ZnS04 7.6 x lO'8 M3 2.7 x 10"4 M
Table 1
The relative molar solubility values can be used to
determine which salts precipitate out from solution when
various cations or anions are added. For instance, PbS04
precipitates first when sodium sulfate is added to a solution
containing lead, strontium, and zinc cations, because lead
sulfate is the least soluble (has the lowest molar solubility)
of the sulfate salts.
4 3. Which of the following statements are valid?
I. Sulfates are more soluble than carbonates.
n. Insoluble cations can be dissolved into solution by
adding a complexing agent such as EDTA.
HI. The solubility of chloride salts show pH
dependence, while the solubility of sulfide salts
show no pH dependence.
A. I and II only
B. I and m only
C. Hand m only
D. I,n,andm
44. The Ksp value for which of the following salts is the
MOST accurate in terms of smallest percent error?
A. Ag2S04
B. Pb(OH)2
C. S1CO3
D. ZnS
45. Which anion should be added to selectively remove
Zn2+ from an aqueous solution that contains Ag+,
Sr2+, and Zn2+?
A. Cl-
B. CO32-
C. OH-
D. S042_
46. If a precipitate forms when NaCl is added to an aqueous
salt solution, what conclusion can be drawn?
A. There is no Zn2+(aq) present insolution.
B. There is Ag+(aq) present in solution.
C. There is both Sr2+(aq) or Pb2+(aq) present in
solution.
D. There is no Sr2+(aq) present insolution.
47. Ifan aqueous solution containing Ag+, Pb2+, Sr2+, and
Zn2+ is treatedfirst withchloride anion, secondly with
sulfide dianion, and lastly with hydroxide anion, then
what cation is most likely still present in solution?
A. Ag+
B. Pb2+
C. Sr2+
D. Zn2+
48. Adding acid to an aqueous solution containing a basic
salt has what effect?
A. It will increase the solubility.
B. It will decrease the solubility.
C. It will have no effect on the solubility.
D. It will lower the temperature of the solution.
49. Silver hydroxide is MOST water-soluble at which of
the following pH values?
A. 3
B. 5
C. 9
D. 11
The solubility of salts is often measured in terms of
moles solute per liter solution in a saturated solution. I t
may also be measured in terms of grams solute per 100 mL
solution. The term saturated refers to a solution in which the
maximum amount of salt that can dissociated into solution is
dissociated. The more salt that dissociates into solution, the
more soluble the salt. Solubility measurements cannot be
used interchangeably when comparing the solubility of two
salts without first considering the molecular mass of each
salt. This can be observed in the following experiment.
Experiment I
Water at 25C is added to a calibrated burette, to the 25-
mL mark. A salt is added in 1.0 grams increments, until
the salt no longer dissociates into solution. At this
point, a precipitate should settle to the bottom of the
burette. The temperatureof the solution in the burette is
slowly increased until the salt completely dissociates.
The solution is slowly cooled until the first signs of
precipitate are observed. At this point, the temperature
and volume of the solution are recorded.
Experiment2
The solution continues cooling until it reaches 25C. At
thispoint, purewaterat 25C is added quantitatively until
the last detectable sign of the precipitate dissociate into
solution. The volume of the solution is recorded as
precisely as the burette reads.
Table 1 lists data for this experiment using hypothetical
salts MX, MY, and MZ. Column 3 lists data from
Experiment 1andcolumn 4 lists datafrom Experiment 2.
Salt Mass Volume when heated Volume w/ H2O added
MX 7.0 g 26.2mL(@31.6C) 28.9 mL (@25.0C)
MY 9.0 g 25.3 mL (@ 27.4C) 26.1 mL(@25.0C)
MZ 4.0 g 25.7 mL (@ 30.3C) 28.7 mL (@25.0C)
Table 1
The molecular mass for MX is 100 grams per mole, for
MY is 120 grams per mole, and for MZ is 150 grams per
mole. The concentration of each solution is measurable in
any standard units, including molarity (moles solute perliter
solution), grams per mL, mass percent, and density.
Concentration units can be inter-converted. For instance, the
percent solution by mass can be multiplied by the density to
determinethe mass solute per volume of solution, which can
be converted to molarity using molecular mass.
Adding solvent to a solution dilutes the solution and
thus reduces the concentration of the solution. All of the
measurements of concentration decrease upon the addition of
solvent, with the exception of the density. The density
change depends on the relative density of the solvent and
solution. In these experiments, water is the solvent for each
solution, and the density of water at 25C is found to be
0.9971 grams per mL.
50. How do the solubility products for the three salts in the
passage compare to one another?
A. KspMX > KspMY > KspMZ
B. KspMY > KspMX > KspMZ
C KspMZ > KspMX > KspMY
D- KspMZ > KspMY > KspMX
51. Which of the following solutions has the GREATEST
molarity?
A. Saturated MX at 31.6 C
B. Saturated MX at 25.0 *C
C. Saturated MY at 27.4 "C
D. Saturated MY at 25.0 C
52. Roughly how many grams of MX will dissociate into
25mLofwaterat25.0C?
A. Less than 4.0 grams.
B. Greater than 4.0 grams, but less than 7.0 grams.
C. Greater than 7.0 grams, but less than 9.0 grams.
D. Greater than 9.0 grams.
53. What is the molarity of a saturated solution of MY at
25C?
A.
B.
9 grams
120ilîx 0.0261 liters
mole
9 grams
120grams_x002531iters
mole
c 9grams x0.0261 liters
120grams_
mole
D 9grams x0.0253 liters
120grams_
mole
54. As temperature increases, what happens tothe various
concentration measurements of a solution, assuming no
evaporation of solvent and noaddition of solute?
A . The density and molarity both increase.
B. Thedensity increases, whilethemolarity decreases.
C. Thedensity decreases, whilethe molarity increases.
D. The density and molarity both decrease.
5 5. Which of the following relationships at 25Caccurately
shows the relative density values of saturated solutions
of MX(aq), MY(aq), and MZ(aq)?
A. 1.00 > MX(aq) > MY(aq) > MZ(aq)
B. 1.00 > MY(aq) > MX(aq) > MZ(aq)
C. MX(aq) > MY(aq) > MZ(aq) > 1.00
D. MY(aq) > MX(aq) > MZ(aq) > 1.00
56. Which solution has the HIGHEST boiling point?
A. 1.0 grams MX with 10 mL water at 25C
B. 1.0 grams MY with 10 mL water at 25C
C. 1.0 grams MX with 10 mL water at 50C
D. 1.0 grams MY with 10 mL water at 50C
The qualitative analysis of an aqueous salt solution
involves the systematic addition of reagents designed to
identify certain component ions. For instance, mercury can
be distinguished from alkaline earth metals by adding sulfide
(S2") to solution by the formation of an insoluble precipitate
with mercury dication. Silver can be distinguished from
alkali metals by the addition of either chloride, bromide, or
iodide. The precipitate that forms between chloride and silver
can be re-dissolved by adding ammonia to solution.
Once a precipitate is formed, it can be removed from
solution by centrifuging the mixture and decanting away the
supernatant or by filtering away the filtrate. The solution
can then be further analyzed for other ions. Table 1 shows
the results of a matrix involving the mixture of four cation
nitrate solutions mixed with five potassium anion solutions
mixed one at a time. All solutions are 0.05 M, with the
exception of KOH(aq), which has a concentration of 0.10 M.
Any compound that forms a precipitate is assumed to have a
molar solubility less than 0.001.
Ba(N03)2 Sr(N03)2 Ca(N03)2 Mg(N03)2
K2co3 Pcpt Pcpt Pcpt No pcpt
KOH Pcpt No pcpt No pcpt Pcpt
K2Cr04
Pcpt No pcpt No pcpt No pcpt
K2S04
Pcpt Pcpt No pcpt No pcpt
K2C204
Pcpt Pcpt Pcpt No pcpt
Table 1
Table 2 shows the results of a similar experiment where
anions were exposed to a sequence of multiple reactions. The
anions selected for testing are chloride, iodide, carbonate, and
sulfate. The test solutions are silver nitrate, barium nitrate,
ammonia, and nitric acid. The matrix of Table 2 lists the
observations of sixteen different test tubes. Nitric acid reacts
with carbonate anion to form carbon dioxide gas, which then
bubbles out of solution.
HN03
1. Ba2+
2. HNO3
l.Ag+
2. HNO3
l.Ag+
2. NH3
3. HNO3
Cl"
NoRx l.NoRx
2. No Rx
1. Whtppt
2. No Rx
1. Whtppt
2. Dissolves
3. NoRx
I-
NoRx l.NoRx
2. No Rx
1. Yell ppt
2. No Rx
1. Yell ppt
2. No Rx
3. No Rx
co32-
Gas forms
(Bubbles)
1. Pcpt
2. Bubbles
1. Whtppt
2. Bubbles
1. Whtppt
2. No Rx
3. Bubbles
so42-
NoRx 1. Pcpt
2. No Rx
1. No Rx
2. No Rx
l.NoRx
2. No Rx
3. No Rx
Table 2
57. What anion should be added to a solution in order to
identify any barium cation present in the solution?
A. Cr042"
B. S042"
c c2o42-
D. CO32-
58. What reaction took place when nitric acid was added to
the precipitate formed from mixing Ba2+ and CO32"?
A. Ba2C03(s) + 2 HN03(aq) ->
2 BaN03(aq) + C02(g) + H20(1)
B. BaC03(s) + 2 HN03(aq) ->
Ba(N03)2(aq) + C02(g) + H20(1)
C. Ba2C03(s) + HN03(aq) ->
BaHC03(aq) + BaN03(aq)
D. BaC03(s) + 2HN03(aq) ->
Ba(N03)2(aq) + C02(g) + H2(g)+ 02(g)
59. Whyis it NOTpossibleto use hydrochloric acid instead
of nitric acid in experiment II?
A. Chloride anion will interfere with the reactions.
B. Nitrate anion will interfere with the reactions.
C. Hydrochloric acid is too weak to react.
D. Hydrochloric acid is too strong to use.
60. If an unknown mixture was treated with K2SO4 and a
precipitate formed, what can beconcluded?
A. The unknown contained no calcium or magnesium
cations.
B. The unknown contained a barium cation.
C. The unknown contained a strontium cation.
D. The unknown contained either a strontium cation, a
barium cation, or both.
61. Which of the following anions does form a white
precipitate with silver cation but does NOT react with
nitric acid?
A. Sulfate
B. Carbonate
C. Chloride
D. Iodide
62. The information from Table 1 was used to derive the
following flow chart:
_, 2+ 2+ 2+ 2+
Ba , Sr , Ca , Mg
BaV(s) Sr2+, Ca2+, Mg2+
W
SrW(s) Ca2+, Mg2+
CaX(s)
or
CaY(s)
XorY
2+
Mg
Z
\
MgZ2(s)
Which of the following choices represents an
INCORRECT anion-to-letter correlation?
A. V=C032"
B. W= S042_
c x =c2o42-
D. Z = OH-
Water can be analyzed for various inorganiccomponents
using a series of qualitative tests for metals in their various
oxidation states. This process is referred to as qualitative
analysis. Many of the tests involve the formation of an
insoluble salt. The formation of a precipitate results from
the addition of an anion to an aqueous cation solution. Some
anions may complex with more than one metal, so multiple
tests are necessary. Molar solubility is different for each salt,
so occasionally an anion may precipitate with one cation
over another and the second metal can be "masked". For this
reason a schematic of the series of tests is evaluated.
Insoluble to the eye is defined as less than one mg
dissociating into one mL of solution. By looking at the
combination of precipitates formed, the cations can be
narrowed down until one is chosen with reasonable accuracy.
A researcher analyzed an aqueous sample believed to
contain roughly equal concentrations of Ag+, Ca2+, Zn2+,
and Na+. Table 1 lists solubility data useful in developing a
schematic for the tests. An ideal schematic sequentially
identifies one cation at a time, leaving the remaining cations
in solution.
Compound
KSp
Molar solubility
Ag2S 1.6 x lO'49 M3 3.4 x 10-,7M
ZnS 2.5 x 10'22 M2 1.6 x 10"11 M
CaS 1.1 x lO"11 M2 3.5 x 10'6 M
CaC03 8.7 x lO"9 M2 9.3 x lO'5 M
Ag2C03 8.1 x 10'12M3 1.2 x 10"4M
ZnC03
2.0 x 10-,0M2 1.4 x 10'5M
AgCl
1.6 x 10-10M2 1.2 x lO"5 M
ZnCl2 1.1 x 10"4M3 3.1 x lO'2 M
Table 1
The values listed in Table 1 are all determined in distilled
water at 25C. It is occasionally necessary to conduct tests at
an elevated temperature, in order to carry out qualitative
analysis and the separation of cations. Sodium salts are not
listed in the table, because sodium salts are infinitely soluble
with nearly all anions, compared to the other metals listed in
the data. To identify sodium cation, a flame test is often
applied. By applying a flame to a small sample of the
solution, electrons in sodium are excited. When they relax
back to their ground state, photons are emitted. In the case
of sodium, the light emitted is orange in color.
63. When 0.1 gram ZnC03 is added to 100 mL of water at
25C, which of the following statements is true?
A. It dissolves completely.
B. It dissolves almost completely, with only a small
portion not dissolving.
C. It dissolves slightly, with most of the ZnC03
remaining not dissolving.
D. None of the sample dissolves.
64. It is best to visually distinguish a sample tube
containing Zn2+ from a separate sample tube
containingAg+by the addition of:
A. 0.10MNa2S.
B. 0.10 M NaCl.
C. 0.10MNaNO3.
D. 0.10MNa2CO3.
65. In which solution is Ag2S MOST soluble?
A. 0.10MAg+(aq)
B. 0.01MAg+(aq)
C. 0.10MS2"(aq)
D. 0.01MS2"(aq)
66. What is the molar solubility of ZnC03 in 0.010 M
ZnCl2?
A. 2.0 x 10-12M
B. 2.0 x 10-10M
C. 2.0 x 10"8M
D. 1.4 x 10'8M
67. Which of the following salts is MOST soluble in
water?
A. CaC03
B. Ag2C03
C. ZnC03
D. AgCl
68. Which of the following values accurately depicts the
solubility product of Ca3(P04)2 if the molar solubility
of Ca3(P04)2 is represented by x?
A. 18 x3
B. 27 x4
C. 54 x5
D. 108 x5
69. To remove a cation from solution, the solution can be
flowed through an ion exchange column where it will
precipitate the cation while releasing a more soluble
cation. Which of the following filters will NOT work?
A. Ag+(aq) through a column containing NaCl(s)
B. Zn2+(aq) through a column containing CaS(s)
C. Ca2+(aq) through a column containing ZnC03(s)
D. Ca2+(aq) through a column containing Na2S(s)
Calcium salts are generally insoluble in water at standard
temperature. Biologically, this is beneficial in that the Ca2+
ion is soluble enough to be transported through aqueous
medium, yet insoluble enough to be a major component of
structural features in the human body, such as bones. Listed
in Table 1are some KSp values at 27'Cfor various calcium
salts:
Calcium Salt Ksp (@ 27C)
CaF2 4.8 x 10-n M3
CaS04 6.1 x 10"6M2
CaC03 9.1 x 10"9M2
Ca(OH)2 4.3 x 10"6M3
Ca3(P04)2 1.3 x 10-32M5
Table 1
The solubility products of the given salts can be
compared only when the anions bonded to calcium carry the
same negative charge. For instance, the solubility products
of CaF2 and Ca(OH)2 can be directly compared to determine
their relative solubilities. To enhance the solubility of a
calcium salt, an anion that complexes calcium can be added
to solution. The anion competes for calcium in a complex
equilibrium. A complex equilibrium is defined as the
coupling of at least two equilibrium reactions where the
product of one reaction is the reactant in another equilibrium
reaction. Reaction 1 and Reaction 2 combine to form a
complexequilibrium involving calcium cation.
Ca(OH)2(s) +H20(1) i ** Ca2+(aq) +2OH"(aq)
Reaction 1
Ca2+(aq) +Na2C03(s) ^ * CaC03(s) + 2 Na+(aq)
Reaction 2
A change in calcium cation concentration affect both
reactions. If the Reaction 2 shifts to the right, then Reaction
1 is forced to shift to the right in order to maintain its
equilibrium.
70. What is observed when sodium carbonate is added to a
saturated calcium hydroxide solution with undissolved
calcium hydroxide on the bottom of the flask?
A. The pH of the solution will increase more than it
would increase had it been added to an unsaturated
solution of calcium hydroxide.
B. The pH of the solution will increase less than it
would increase had it been added to an unsaturated
C. The pH of the solution will decrease more than it
would decrease had it been added to an unsaturated
D. The pH of the solution will decrease less than it
would decrease had it been added to an unsaturated
71. The maximum [Ca2+1 in a pH= 14 solution would be
which of the following values?
A. 4.3 x 108MCa2+
B. 4.3 x 10"2MCa2+
C. 4.3 x 10"6MCa2+
D. 4.3 x 10"10MCa2+
72. Enough CaCl2 is added to water so that not all of it
dissolves, and thus some CaCl2 remains as a solid on
the bottom of the flask. The [CI"] is then measured.
Addition of which of the following to the solution will
increase the chloride ion concentration ([CI"])?
A. Water
B. Silver nitrate
C. Calcium fluoride
D. Sodium phosphate
73. Which of the following graphs depicts the log [Ca2+]
versus the buffered pH of an aqueous buffer solution as
calcium hydroxide is dissolved into different solutions?
A. B..
Buffer pH
Buffer pH
7 4. If addition of salt to water makes the water warmer once
the salt has dissolved, which of the following are true
for solvation of that salt?
A. AHis positive, AS is negative.
B. AHis negative, AS is positive.
C. AHand AS are both positive.
D. AH and AS are both negative.
7 5. Which of the following, when added to water at 300 K,
will yield thehighest [Ca2+]?
A. CaF2
B. CaS04
C. CaC03
D. Ca(OH)2
Smog is a collection of several gas pollutants. Most
prevalent in theconglomeration of impurities arethe sulfur
and nitrogen oxides. The brown color so familiar in smoggy
skies is due to the presence of nitrogen dioxide (NO2). This,
along with nitric oxide (NO), make up the majority of the
airborne nitrogen oxides. The nitrogen oxides can be inter-
convertedby a series of equilibriumreactions.
2 NO(g) + 02(g) -^=r 2 N02(g)
Reaction 1
2 N02(g) ^=^r N204(g)
Reaction 2
N02(g) + 02(g) ^^r NO(g) + 03(g)
Reaction 3
Reactions 1 and 2 are both exothermic while the
Reaction 3 is endothermic. Reaction 3 requires the addition
of light to transpire. As the day progresses, sunlight carries
out Reaction 3, resulting in the highest ozone concentration
in the early afternoon. Figure 1 depicts the concentration of
pollutants during a hypothetical day:
_0.3
E
Q.
Q.
ro.2
0.1
0
u
c
o
JryL _V, _ /> , ' ,.1,^,'
.". ^"^ 1111%
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
NO
o
o
Time
NO,
Figure 1
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
The amount of the nitrogen oxides in the air can be
reduced by bubbling air through an aqueous transition metal
halide solution such as MnCl2(aq). Nitrogen dioxide (NO2)
reacts with the water to form nitric acid (HNO3) and nitrous
acid (HNO2), both of undergo deprotonation and bind the
manganese, forming a complex ion. Reactions 4 and 5 make
up a complex equilibrium, as do Reactions 4 and 6.
2 N02(g) + H20(1) -^^r HN02(aq) + HN03(aq)
Reaction 4
MnCl2 + 2 N02"(aq) ^ * Mn(N02)2 + 2 Cl"(aq)
Reaction 5
MnCl2 + 2 N03"(aq) ^ ^ Mn(N03)2 + 2 Cl"(aq)
Reaction 6
When reactions are added to produce an overall reaction,
the equilibrium constants for the reactions are multiplied to
obtain the equilibrium constant for the overall reaction. This
is true for any type of equilibrium reaction.
76. Whichof the reactions has a negative entropy change?
A. Reaction 2
B. Reaction 3
C. Reaction 5
D. Reaction 6
77. Whichof the followingwill NOTincrease the [N2O4]?
A. Decreasing the temperature.
B. Increasing the pressure.
C. Addition of water vapor to the air.
D. Addition of NO2 to the air.
78. If the following reaction is carried out in a closed steel
reaction vessel, what will be observed for the pressure
of the systemif the temperatureis doubled?
A(g) + B(g) -^^r C(g) + D(g) + E(g)
AH = -112kJ/mole
A. The pressure will remain the same.
B. The pressurewill increaseby less than 100%.
C. The pressure will exactly double.
D. The pressure will increase by more than 100%.
7 9. What can be concluded about the change in enthalpy for
Reaction 2?
A. Because a bond is broken, the reaction is
endothermic in the forward direction.
B. Because a bond is broken, the reaction is
exothermic in the forward direction.
C. Because a bond is formed, the reaction is
endothermic in the forward direction.
D. Because a bond is formed, the reaction is
exothermic in the forward direction.
8 0. If Reaction 1 is carried out in a closed piston system
with an external pressure of 1 atm, what occurs when
0.1 atm of NO gas is added to the system?
A. The volume decreases by more than ten percent.
B. The volume decreases by less than ten percent.
C. The volume increases by less than ten percent.
D. The volume increases by more than ten percent.
81. Which will shift reaction 4 to the left?
A. Addition of sodium hydroxide to the solution
B. Addition of manganese(II) chloride to the solution
C. Removal of nitrate from the solution
D. Removal of water from the solution
82. Which of the following graphs accurately depicts the
NO2 concentration in a flask containing reaction 2
before and after it has been bubbled through MnCl2(aq)?
A. B.
time time
C. D.
time time
Physiological response is correlated with climate. This
can be proven by observing the shortness of breath and/or
headaches experienced by mountain climbers and skiers when
they rapidly change altitudes. These symptoms are associated
with a disorder referred to as hypoxia, a deficiency in the
amount of oxygen that reaches body tissue. Hypoxia is a
temporary disorder that in some cases can be fatal in the short
term. After time, the disorder will disappear because the
body becomes acclimated to the new environment.
The cause of hypoxia is a result of the decrease in
oxygen in the environment caused by the increase in altitude.
The partial pressure of oxygen gas at sea level in most parts
of the world is just over 0.20 atm. At an altitude of one
mile above sea level, the partial pressure of oxygen gas is
roughly 0.16 atm. Over time, the body adjusts to the lower
oxygen content by increasing the production of hemoglobin
(Hb), the molecule that binds oxygen. Reaction 1 expresses
the binding of oxygen by hemoglobin.
Hb(aq) + 4 02(aq) > Hb(02)4(aq)
Reaction 1
The equilibriumexpression for Reaction 1 is:
K^_[Hb(02)4]
[Hb][02]4
Figure 1
Hemoglobin is composed of four separate polypeptide
strands, each capable of binding a ferrous (Fe2+) cation, held
together as one molecule. By producing more hemoglobin,
the body can shift the equilibrium to the right (forward
direction). This results in more oxygen diffusing across the
cell membrane. Once in the cell, myoglobin transports one
oxygen molecule from the interior of the cell membrane to
the mitochondria.
In acclimation, the amount of myoglobin does not
change. Acclimation takes a period of timethat ranges from
a week or two to months. For the 1968 Mexico City
Olympics, several athletes trained in high altitude to
approximate the environment of Mexico City (elevation
7500 feet above sea level). For those athletes that trained
closer to sea level, many did not perform well in the
"thinner" air. Conversely, many current runners train in the
mountains for sea-level races so that their blood can provide
extra oxygen to starving muscle cells.
83. Once hemoglobin transfers oxygen to the cell
membrane where it is absorbed, how many myoglobin
molecules should be present per hemoglobin?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 4
D. 8
84. Which of the following changes will NOT increase the
amount (in moles) of free oxygen in the body?
A. Increased ventilation, resulting in an increased
amount of air transferred through the lungs.
B. An increase in the production of Hb
C. Increasing the partial pressure of COconsumed in a
normal breath.
D. Increasing the total amount of blood.
85. What will be observed when a long-time mountain
resident travels back to sea level?
A. They will experience hypoxia due to the lower
partial pressure of oxygen at sea level.
B. They will experience hypoxia due to the higher
partial pressure of oxygen at sea level.
C. They will experience an increase in vitality due to
the lower partial pressure of oxygen at sea level.
D. They will experience an increase in vitality due to
the higher partial pressure of oxygen at sea level.
86. In the presence of carbon monoxide, hemoglobin
preferentially binds CO over O2 in a ratio close to 200
: 1. Over time, what occurs in the blood of someone
moving to a carbon monoxide rich environment?
A. The increased CO reduces the amount of Hb that
binds oxygen, so the Hb(02)4 decreases. To
compensate, the body produces more Hb and
increases its rate of respiration.
B. The increased CO reduces the amount of Hb that
binds oxygen, so/ the Hb(02)4 increases. To
compensate, the body produces more Hb and
increases its rate of respiration.
C. The increased GO reduces the amount of Hb that
binds oxygen, so the Hb(02)4 decreases. To
compensate, the body produces less Hb and
decreases its rate of respiration.
D. The increased CO reduces the amount of Hb that
binds oxygen, so the Hb(02)4 increases. To
compensate, the body produces less Hb and
decreases its rate of respiration.
8 7. How does hypoxia affect the amount of myoglobin?
A. Myoglobin increases initially and then decreases.
B. Myoglobin increases initially and then remain at
higher concentration.
C. Myoglobin decreases initially and then remain at
lower concentration.
D. Myoglobin remains constant.
88. What activity will most likely result in hypoxia?
A. Repellingdown a mountain
B. SCUBA diving
C. Water skiing on the ocean
D. Snow skiing
8 9. Why should an athlete choose to train at high altitudes?
A. At higher altitudes, the partial pressure of oxygen
is greater, thus the athlete's body will increase its
hemoglobin count.
B. At higher altitudes, the partial pressure of oxygen
is less, thus the athlete's body will increase its
hemoglobin count.
C. At higher altitudes, the partial pressure of oxygen
is greater, thus the athlete's body will decrease its
hemoglobin count.
D. At higher altitudes, the partial pressure of oxygen
is less, thus the athlete's body will decrease its
hemoglobin count.
The equilibrium of a gas-phase reaction can vary with
the dimensions of the container. This is observed when a
reaction has a different number of gas molecules on the two
sides of the reaction equilibrium. Although the equilibrium
constant remains constant when pressure, volume, and moles
are altered, the ratio of product to reactant can vary. The
following reaction is a typical reaction which shows a
dependence on the dimensions of the container:
N204(g) ^ * 2 N02(g)
Reaction 1
The reaction may be carried out in a glass flask, where
the volume of the container remains constant while the
internal pressure may vary. The reaction may also be carried
out in an enclosed piston, where the internal pressure remains
constant while the volume of the container may vary. Le
Chatelier's principle predicts that when the internal pressure
rises, Reaction I will shift to the left to alleviate the increase
in pressure. Le Chatelier's principle also predicts that when
the volume of the container is increased, Reaction 1 will
shift to the right to fill the volume. The equilibrium
constant for Reaction 1 at 25C is 4.72 x 10"3 atm.
Independent of the starting conditions and presence or
absence of an inert gas, the ratio of the square of the partial
pressure of nitrogen dioxide to the partial pressure of
dinitrogen tetraoxide is constant, given that the temperature
does not change. The ratio of nitrogen dioxide to dinitrogen
tetraoxideincreases as the temperature is increased.
9 0. The reaction as written is:
A. endothermic with AS > 0.
B. endothermic with AS < 0.
C. exothermic with AS > 0.
D. exothermic with AS < 0.
91. The reaction will shift to the right with all of the
following changes EXCEPT:
A. addition of N204(g).
B. an increase in volume at constant pressure.
C. a decrease in pressure at constant volume.
D. addition of He gas to the system at constant
volume.
92. Which of the following accurately shows Keq in terms
of AG?
A. Keq =
B. Keq =
^ InRT
AG/
C. Keq =e 'RT
-AG/
D. Keq =e 'RT
AG
InRT
AG
217
93. What is NOT true for a reaction with an equilibrium
constant of 1.0 x 105?
A . There is mostly product present at equilibrium.
B. When starting with all reactants, the shift to reach
equilibrium is insignificant.
C. The Keq for the reverse reaction is 1.0 x10"5
D. The same reaction when carried out with a catalyst
will have the same equilibrium constant.
94. If the value of Keq at a certain temperature is greater
than one, what will be observed after radiolabeled
15N204 is added toanequilibrium mixture of NO2 and
N2O4 in a rigid container?
A . The amount of radio-labeled NO2 increases, while
the amount of radio-labeled N2O4 decreases.
B. The amount of radio-labeled NO2 decreases, while
the amount of radio-labeled N2O4 increases.
C. The amount of radio-labeled NO2 increases, while
the amount of radio-labeled N2O4 remains
constant.
D. The amount of radio-labeled NO2 decreases, while
the amount of radio-labeled N2O4 remains
constant.
95. As the handle of a piston container filled with an
equilibrium mixture of NO2 and N2O4 is lifted, what
occurs?
I. The
PNO2
ratio increases.
pN204
II. The piston cools down.
HI. The mole percent of N2O4 increases.
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II only
D. II and HI only
96. The Keq for the reaction as written is:
pN02
A. Keq =
B. Keq
PN204
(Pno2)2
pN204
C K -PN24
PN02
D. Keq =J^t.
(pNo2r
Questions97-100 are NOTbased
97. If the molar solubility of an MXtype of salt is defined
as y, then the solubility product is:
A. y
B. 2y
C. y2
D. 4y2
98. MgF2(s) would be most soluble in which of the
following solutions?
A. 0.10MCaF2(aq)
B. O.lOMNaF(aq)
C. O.lOMNaCl(aq)
D. 0.10MMgCl2(aq)
99. If the forward rate constant for a one-step reaction is
four times the reverse rate constant, then which of the
following is true?
A. Keq= 0.0625
B. Keq= 0.25
C. Keq= 4.00
D. Keq =16.00
100. The amount of a salt that dissociates into water is
ALWAYS increased by which of the following
changes?
A. Increasing the temperature.
B. Decreasing the temperature.
C. Increasing the amount of water.
D. Decreasing the amount of water.
"It's all about balance you sec, you must keep balance!"
1. B 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. C
6. A 7. B 8. D 9. A 10. B
11. A 12. B 13. D 14. C 15. B
16. C 17. B 18. B 19. B 20. B
21. B 22. B 23. D 24. B 25. D
26. C 27. A 28. C 29. D 30. A
31. C 32. D 33. C 34. A 35. A
36. A 37. A 38. D 39. A 40. D
41. B 42. A 43. A 44. A 45. C
46. B 47. C .48. A 49. A 50. B
51. C 52. B 53. A 54. D 55. D
56. C 57. A 58. B 59. A 60. D
61. C 62. A 63. C 64. B 65. D
66. C 67. B 68. D 69. C 70. A
71. C 72. D 73. C 74. B 75. D
76. A 77. C 78. B 79. D 80. C
81. D 82. A 83. C 84. B 85. D
86. A 87. D 88. D 89. B 90. A
91. D 92. D 93. B 94. A 95. C
96. B 97. C 98. C 99. C 100. c
THAT'S IT!
Equilibrium Passage Answers
Passage I (Questions 1-7)
CarbonDioxide and Carbon Monoxide Equilibrium
Choice B is correct.
This question involves first determining the value of the equilibrium constant (Keq) at
eq;
102C, and then solving for the partial pressure of CO2 at 102C. Converting 102C into Kelvin yields 375 K.
According to Table 1, at 375 K, Keq =9atm"1. The solution is as follows:
Keq -9 -
(Pco2)2 (Pco,)2 (Pco,)2
(Pcor(Poo) (2)2(i;
=9 .-. (PCO2)2 =36 .-. Pco2 =6atm., choice B
2. Choice D is correct. Adding CO2(a product) to an equilibrium mixture forces the reaction to the left. When the
reaction shifts to the left, reactants (02(g) and CO(g)) increase. This eliminates choices Aand B. Because Keq
changes only with temperature, and the temperature did not change in this case, choice C is invalid. By
default, (the elimination of three wrong choices), choice D is the correct answer.
3. Choice Bis correct. Because the value ofKeq increases as the temperature increases, products increase upon the
addition of heat to the reaction. This means that heat lies on the reactant side of the reaction and thus the
reaction is endothermic as written. The AHis positive for an endothermic reaction. Pick B and feel warm.
4. Choice D is correct. The equilibrium constant is just that, a constant. It is specificfor a given temperature, so it
varies only with a change in temperature. The equilibrium may shift with changes in either the pressure,
volume or concentration, but the value of K remains constant. This makes choice D the best answer.
5. Choice C is correct. The following chart summarizes the partial pressures during the course of the reaction:
6.
7.
Reaction:
Initially:
Shift:
Equilibrium:
2CO(g)
0
2x
2x
02(g)
0
+ x
2C02(g)
1.00
-2x
l-2x
The total pressure of the system is the sum of the partial pressures of each component at any given time during
the reaction. The question here asks for the total pressure at equilibrium, so the equilibrium partial pressures
must be added. To solve this question, use the equation:
Ptotal =PC02 +pCO +Po2=(! "2x) +2x+ x= 1+ x-
The value of x can be no larger than 0.5 atm., because you can lose no more C02(g) than you start out with (1.00
arm.). The value of x must be somewhere between 0 and 0.5, because some of the carbon dioxide is lost, but not
all of it. This makes the following relationship 1.5 > Ptotal > 1 true> which is choice C, your best choice.
Choice A is correct. Compressing the reaction vessel results in reduced volume and increased pressure. Upon
decreasing the container volume, prior to any shifting of the reaction, the partial pressure and concentration of
each gas increases, but the mole ratio is the same until the reaction shifts. This is why no answer choices
contained the term concentration. Compressing the container decreases the free area in which the gases can
exist. The more crowded environment favors the formation of CO2, because carbon dioxide lies on the less
crowded side of the reaction. This means that moles of CO2 increase, moles of CO decrease, and moles of O2
decrease. This eliminates choice B. When moles of CO decrease, the mole fraction of CO decreases, so choice C
is eliminated. The temperature did not change, so the equilibrium constant remains the same, so choice D is
eliminated. The best answer is choice A. As a note of interest, all of the partial pressures increase, but carbon
dioxide increases by the greatest amount. The shift to re-establish equilibrium never completely offsets the
stress, so the result is that CO and O2 have slight increases in partial pressure overall, while CO2 shows a
significant increase in partial pressure.
Choice B is correct. Addition of Ca(OH)2(aq) to an equilibrium mixture of Reaction 1 serves to remove C02(g)
from the reaction mixture. To compensate for lost 002(g), Reaction 1 proceeds in a way so as to regenerate
002(g), but it is not completely regenerated. This eliminates choice A. To produce C02(g), the reaction must
shift right, which consumes both 02(g) and CO(g). This results in a decrease of both 02(g) and CO(g). The best
answer is choice B. Total moles of gas decrease, so the total pressure of the system decreases.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 219 Section III Detailed Explanations
Passage II (Questions 8 -15)
Hydrogen and BromineEquilibrium
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Choice Dis correct. Keq for the reaction is determined by plugging the values from Table 2into the equilibrium
expression. Upon doing so, the value is found to be 5.44 atm., making choice Dthe best answer.
Ke =(PHBr)2 =(^l =(2.72)(2.72) =171x172 =272x2= 5M atm.
PH
1.36 1.36 1.36
Choice Ais correct. Addition of the gaseous HBr (a product in Reaction 1) to the equilibrium mixture pushes
the reaction to the reactant side (right), and thus increases both the partial pressure and mole percent of H2. If
you are of sound mind and body, then you should pick choice A. As long as the temperature remains constant,
the concentration ofBr2(l) (or any other pure liquid) remains constant. The concentration ofa liquid ismeasured
as density, which changes with temperature. This eliminates choices Cand D, so don't pick them.
Choice Bis correct. The greatest amount of Pb(g) forms from the reaction that generates the greatest back
reaction or smallest forward reaction. Choices A and C are eliminated, because less H2(g) is present initially
than inchoice B, therefore less H2(g) exists at equilibrium. Inaddition, the difference between choices AandC
is the amount of Br2(l), and liquids do not affect the equilibrium distribution, so both yield the same amount of
H2(g). There is only one correct answer per question, so identical answer choices should both be eliminated. If
choice Dwent one hundred percent in the reverse direction, then 0.50 atm. of H2(g) would be generated. This
value is half of the amount of H2(g) inchoice B, sochoice Dis eliminated. To generate an equivalent amount of
H2(g) at equilibrium asstarting with 1.00 atm. H2(g) and excess Br2(l), requires starting with 2.00 atm. HBr(g).
Choice A is correct. An increase in temperature results in the addition of heat to the equilibrium mixture.
Because the mole percent of product (HBr) increases, heat must be viewed as a reactant in the reaction.
Heat + H2(g) + Br2(l) ^=^ 2 HBrfe)
When heat is viewed as a reactant, the reaction is defined as being endothermic, so choice A is the correct
answer. An endothermic reaction has AH value that is a positive number. Choice C is eliminated, because the
pressure changed with both the influx ofheat and the shift of the reaction, soit cannot be anisobaric (constant
pressure) process. Choice Dis eliminated, because the passage states that Reaction 1is an equilibrium mixture.
Choice Bis correct. The definition of equilibrium is a state where the forward and back reactions have equal
rate. Choices A and D are equivalent, so they are both eliminated. The reaction lacks Br2(l), and despite
liquids not affecting equilibrium, keep in mind that thesystem is not in equilibrium. Liquids can be a limiting
reagent. Because there isno Br2(l) present, the reaction cannot move in the forward direction, even if it wanted
to. This makes choice B the best answer. At this point, we are uncertain it is correct, but it is the best answer
choice. To determine the direction in which a reaction proceeds, it is necessary to compare the value of the
reaction quotient (Qrx) to the equilibrium constant (Keq). The two possible scenarios are: Qrx >Keq, in which
case the numerator is too large in the equilibrium quotient (products are in excess of reactants), making the
reaction shift to the left (reactant side) to reach equilibrium. The second scenario is where Qrx <KeC[, in which
case the denominator is too large in the equilibrium quotient (reactants are in excess of products), making the
reaction shift to the right (product side) to reach equilibrium. We solve for Q as follows:
s2
Qrx =
_(PHBr)2 _12 _
1 1.36 W
'lb
Because Qrx <Keq, Reaction 1should shift right (to the product side). The problem here is that there is no Br2
present, so there can be no reaction. This confirms that Br2 is the limiting reagent. To quickly determine the
direction ofa reaction, put Keq and Qrx alphabetically and turn the greater than or less than sign into anarrow
(i.e., the Keq >Qrx becomes Keq > Qrx, meaning the reaction proceeds forward to reach equilibrium).
Choice D is correct. All reagents are present, soa reaction is possible. To answer this question, solve for Qrx
.(PHBr)2 _32 (2.72)2
Qrx =
Pr-b
1.5 1.36
.*. Keq <Qrx bya small amount
Because Keq <Qrx, the reaction proceeds to the left (reactant side). This decreases HBr(g) and increases H2(g),
so choices A and Bare eliminated. The shift is small, because Q and K are close, so choice D is the best answer.

Section III Detailed Explanations
14.
15.
Choice Cis correct. If the flask is initially charged with only HBr(g), then the graph of H2(g) over time starts
at 0, eliminating choice A. Choice Dis a titration curve, so it is an incorrect answer choice. The graphs depict
the progression of a reaction. Reactions proceed with a gradual tapering off (choice C), not an instantaneous
shut-off (choice B). Pick C, because H2(g) increases most rapidly initially, then levels off until equilibrium.
Choice Bis correct. "...NOT affect the partial pressure of H2(g)?" Addition of NaOH(aq) removes HBr and
indirectly shifts the Reaction 1equilibrium to the right, through a complex equilibrium. Addition ofH2(g) and
HBr(g) directly affect the equilibrium, shifting the equilibrium to the opposite side of the compound added. If
the reaction is already at equilibrium, then neither a solid nor a liquid (such as Br2(l) in this case) affects the
equilibrium. For this reason, choice Bis a particularly swell answer choice. Asolid or liquid can only affect
the net results (equilibrium conditions) if the system is not at equilibrium and the compound being added (the
solid or liquid) is the limiting reagent. When added in, thesystem canthen achieve equilibrium.
Equilibnum Constant Magnitude
16.
17.
18.
Choice C is correct. According to the two reactions, only PCI3 and NOreact with CI2, so PCI5 and NOCl are not
oxidized by CI2. This eliminates answer choices Band D. By looking at the oxidation states of the reactants
and products, PCI3 (P = +3), PCI5 (P = +5), NO (N = +2), and NOCl (N = +3), it shows that the forward
direction in both Reaction 1 and Reaction 2 as drawn are oxidation half-reactions for the non-metal compounds.
The reactants get oxidized by chlorine in the forward reaction as written. Comparing the two values of Keq
shows that reaction 2 lies further to the right (product side) than does Reaction 1. Thus, Reaction 2 favors the
formation of products more so than Reaction 1. This implies that NO reacts with CI2 more readily than PCI3
reacts with CI2. The greater the reaction with CI2 means more oxidation by CI2. Choose C to feel good.
Choice B is correct. Initially, there is twice as much PCI3 as CI2, and their sum pressure is 1.50 atm. When the
reaction shifts in the forward direction, total pressure decreases, so choice D is eliminated. According to the
mole ratio, the initial partial pressure of phosphorus trichloride is 1.0 atm. and the initial partial pressure of
chlorine gas is 0.5 atm. The chart below summarizes the partial pressures during the course of the reaction.
Reaction:
PCl3(g) Cl2(g)
Initially: 1.0 0.5
Shift: ^x -x
Equilibrium: 1-x 0.5-x
PCl5(g)
0
x
x
The total pressure of the system is a sum of the partial pressures of each component at any given time during
the reaction. The question here asks for the total pressure at equilibrium, so the equilibrium partial pressures
must be added. To solve this question, use the formula X Pj = Ptotal- ln this case the following holds true:
Ptotal = PPCI3 +PC12 +pPCl5 =(1 " x) +(0-5 - x) + x =1.5 - x.
If everything reacted to the limiting reagent capacity, then x is 0.5. But the reaction does not go to completion,
so the value of x falls between 0 and 0.5. This is because some, but not all, of the reactant is lost. Choice A is
eliminated, because 1.5 > Ptotal > 1- To solve this question, you must estimate the magnitude of x. The value of
x is greater than 0.25, because over half shifts to products to reach an equilibrium constant of 1.95. This makes
choice B the best answer. To solve it more precisely, assume Ptotal at equilibrium is 1.25 (the borderline
between answer choices B and C). If Ptotal at equilibrium is 1.25 atm., then x = 0.25 atm., and at equilibrium,
PpCl3 =0.75 atm., Pq2 =0-25 arm., and PPCI5 =0.25 atm. The following Qwould result:
PPC15 _
Qrx =
0.25 _ 1 _
=1.33 .'. Keq >Qrx, somore mustshift over.
(PPC13XPC12) (0.75)(0.25) 0.75
This means that x is between 0.25 and 0.50 atm., and thus Ptotal at equilibrium is between 1.00 and 1.25.
Choice B is correct. The reaction listed in the question is the reverse reaction of Reaction 2. When a reaction is
reversed, the equilibrium expression is inverted, because reactants and products are inter-converted. The
resulting equilibrium constant is the inverse of the original value. The inverse of something times 104 is
something times 10"5, makingchoice Bthe best answer. Choice A is an incorrect answer that could have been
reached if you inadvertently decided the values must multiply to 1.0 x 10"14 (a common value in acid-base
chemistry). Choice C was the result of taking the square root, which is wrong in this case. Choice D is
eliminated because the forward and back reactions are different.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Choice Bis correct. Welcome to the wonderful world of math. The following chart summarizes the changes in
partial pressures as the system goes to equilibrium. You must solve for the x-value. Keep in mind that the
answer you seek is actually 2x, but you must first solve for xbefore you determine 2x.
^ S 2 NOCl(g)
Reaction:
Initially:
Shift:
Equilibrium:
2 NO(g)
0
2x
2x
Cl2(g)
0
+ x
1.0 atm.
-2x
1 -2x
From here, it is a matter of plugging theequilibrium values into theequilibrium expression.
(PNOCl)2 _(l-0-2x)2_ t2
K =
>q (PNO^Pciz) (2x)Z(>0 (2xî i
=J- =2.1 xlO4
3
The easiest thing to do here is to take the reciprocal of each side and then solve for x, keeping in mind that the
answer choices are 2x.
4X3 = 1 =4.9 xlO"5 =49 xlO"6 .\x3 =12.25 X10"6 .\x= T12.25 x10"2
2.1 x 104
The cube root of 12.25 lies between 2and 3(because 23 =8and 33 =27), so let's call it 2.? PNo =2(2.? x10"2) =4.?
x 10"2, which is choice B. The math is not that bad, if you approximate.
Choice Bis correct. Immediately, choices Aand Care eliminated, because there is no reaction possible, when
the reaction has only one reactant (and lacks CI2). From here, it comes down to interpreting the magnitude of
Keq values. The reaction that forms the greatest amount of CI2 is the reaction with the Keq that most favors
formation of reactants (because CI2 is a reactant in Reaction 1 and Reaction 2). Reaction 1, with the smaller
Keq, most readily favors the formation of reactants out of the two reactions. Because of the squared term in keq
for Reaction 2, we need to look more closely in most cases, but the Keq values are so drastically different for the
two reactions, that you are safe ignoring the squared terms in the Keq of Reaction 2. The larger Keq is
associated with Reaction 2, so choice D is out and the best answer is choice B.
Choice Bis correct. This is a rehash of an ongoing theme in this passage. Addition of CI2 shifts both Reaction
1 and Reaction 2 in the forward direction. The question here entails the magnitude of the shift. Reaction 1,
with a Keq value of approximately 1, shifts the equilibrium to the product side to use roughly half of the CI2
gas that was added. Adding CI2 toreaction 2, with a KCq that is extremely large, will shift the equilibrium to
the product side to use nearly all of the CI2 gas that was added. Choice Bis the best answer.
Choice Bis correct. To determine the direction of a shift requires first solving for the equilibrium quotient (Q)
and then comparing that value to the Keq.
Qrx =
Ppci5
0.40 _ 1 _
=2.5 .". KL.q <Qrx, so thereaction shifts left.
(PPC13XPC12) (0.40)(0.40) 0.40
When K< Q, the Q is too large, so the products must decrease and the reactants must decrease (K <- Q). This
forces the reaction to move to the left (reactant side). You really should pick choice C. Choice D is eliminated,
because a catalyst affects only the kinetics (rate), and not the thermodynamics of a reaction. Acatalyst simply
lowers the activation energy, but has no effect on the heat of reaction (AH), the free energychange (AG) for the
reaction, or the equilibrium constant (K) for the reaction.
Gas-Phase Equilibrium Constant Experiment
Passage IV (Questions 23- 29)
This is an experiment that is used to determine theequilibrium constant for the gas phase reaction listed in the
passage. In interpreting the apparatus in Figure 1, you must note the two reactants are being reacted once the
valve is opened between the gas line and the flask. The reactants are mixed in a ratio of4H2 to 1CS2, and
they just-so-happen toreact in a ratio of 4: 1. This means that the reactants always exist in a 4 : 1 ratio and
the products always exist in a 2: 1ratio. The reactants are never completely depleted, thus the total pressure
(Pjnit - 2x) of thesystem can never reach a value as low as0.60 atm. Overall, thenumber of molecules of gas are
decreasing as the reaction proceeds, which accounts for the decrease in pressure experienced by the system as i t
approaches equilibrium. The final total pressure is not given on the graph, but a AP is a negative value. This
passages seems hard, but it is really testing your organization skills.
23. Choice Dis correct. The purpose of the experiment is todetermine the equilibrium constant (K) for Reaction 1.
The value of theequilibrium constant varies with the temperature, so the temperature must beheldconstant to
accurately evaluate the value of the equilibrium constant. This means that the best answer is choice D.
Hopefullythe other answer choices did not seemthat tempting.
24. Choice Bis correct. Upon heating a closed, isochoric system, the internal pressure increases according to the
ideal gas law (PV = nRT). This in essence is Charles' law, eliminating choice A, which has Charles' law
listed incorrectly. Because the pressure decreases rather than increases, another variable must be changing.
The system is in a flask, so the volume can't change. This means that moles must be decreasing, causing the
pressure to decrease. The only way for moles to change in a closed system, is for a chemical reaction to take
place. Reaction 1 shifted from the reactant side (five gas molecules) to the product side (three gas molecules).
This means that the reaction proceeds in the forward direction to consume the heat added to the system. This
means that the reaction as written must be endothermic, making choiceBcorrect.
25. Choice D is correct. This question requires setting up the equilibrium relationship that transpires during the
course of the reaction. The reaction goes as follows:
Reaction: CS2(g) 4H2(g)
Shift: -x -4x
Equilibrium: 0.2-x 0.8 - 4x
CH4(g) 2H2S(g)
0 0
+ x 2x
X 2x
At any point, including equilibrium, the total pressure of the system is found according to Equation 1.
Ptotal = PCS2 +PH2 +PCH4 +Ph2S =(0-2 - x)+ (0.8 - 4x) +x +2x=1.0- 2x
The initial pressure of the system was 1.0 atmospheres when the valve was first opened to start the reaction.
The pressure of the system at equilibrium is 1 - 2x atm., therefore the change in internal pressure from the start
of the reaction until equilibrium is 2x. This means that the partial pressure at equilibrium due to H2S (which
is also 2x) equals the change in internal pressure during the reaction. The partial pressure due to CH4 at
equilibrium is one-half of the change in internal pressure. This makes choice D the best answer.
26. Choice C is correct. This question requires that you deduce that the value of x can never exceed 0.2. This upper
limit of 0.2 is due to the initial pressure of CS2being only 0.2 atm. You can lose no more CS2 than you have
available as a reactant. Because of this, no matter what value for x is used (any value between 0 and 0.2), 0.8 -
4xwill alwaysbe greater than 0.2 -x. This means that Ph2 is always greater than Pcs2 because 4xmust always
be less than 0.8. The best answer is choice C. If the reaction goes completely in the forward direction, then
products will exceed reactants and Pcs2<PCH4/ eliminating choice A. Because thereis no CH4 or H2S in the
initial reaction mixture, the only CH4 or H2S present during the reaction or at equilibrium, is the result of the
reactionproceeding in the forward direction. For everyone CH4that forms, two moleculesof H2Sform, so Ph2S
is always greater (not less) than PCH4/ eliminating choice B. If the reaction barely proceeds in the forward
direction, then the reactants will exceed the productsand Ph2>Ph2S- Thiseliminates choice D.
27. Choice A is correct. The equilibrium constant is the pressure of the products divided by the pressure of the
reactants. Answer choices B and D (which both have reactants divided by products) are eliminated. The
coefficients from the balanced equation must be included as exponents in the equilibrium expression, so choice A
is the correct choice. All of the reactants and products are gases, thus they all belong in the Keq expression.
Keep in mind that solids and pure liquids are not included in the equilibrium expression. The equilibrium
constant for this reaction is referred toas Kp, because it is a gas system and the values are partial pressures.
28. Choice C is correct. The total pressure of the system at equilibrium is a sum of the partial pressure of each
component gas at equilibrium. The total pressure of the system is found as follows:
Ptotal =PCS2 +PH2 +PCH4 +PH2S =(0.2 - x) +(0.8 - 4x) +x +2x=1.0- 2x
Choices A and D are eliminated, because the total pressure is less than 1.0 atm. The final pressure of the
system at equilibrium is 1 - 2x. The value of x cannot be greater than 0.20 atm because the CS2 gas is the
limiting reagent and only 0.20 atm. of CS2 is initially present. Because the value of 2x is subtracted, the final
pressure drops, but it cannot drop to a value less than 0.6atmospheres. The best answer is choice C.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 223 Section in Detailed Explanations
29. Choice Dis correct. The equilibrium constant (a numerical value), changes with the temperature, but it does
not change with volume, pressure, moles of reactants, or moles of products. Choice Ainvolves adding hydrogen
gas (a reactant). The reaction shifts to the right to reestablish equilibrium, but the equilibrium constant
remains constant. This is tosay that the equilibrium position may change, but the equilibrium constant does
not. Choice Binvolves removing all four gases. To determine which escapes most readily involves molecular
mass and effusion rates, but that is irrelevant in this question. Losing both products and reactants causes the
reaction to shift to reestablish equilibrium, but the equilibrium constant remains constant. Choice Bis
eliminated. Choice C involves adding hydrogen sulfide gas (a product). The reaction shifts to the left to
reestablish equilibrium, but the equilibrium constant will remain constant. Choice Dinvolves increasing the
temperature. The equilibrium position and the equilibrium constant both change with achange intemperature.
The value of the equilibriumconstant canonlybe changedby temperature.
Passage V (Questions 30- 36)
Equilibrium Reactions
30. Choice Ais correct. Given that the initial partial pressures of H2O and CI2O are both 0.5 atmospheres, and
both are reactants, it is possible initially for the reaction to proceed in the forward direction. As such, the
initial forward rate cannot start at zero. This eliminates choices C and D. There is no HOC1 present initially,
therefore the reverse reaction rate must start at zero. This reaffirms that choices C and D are invalid. As the
reaction proceeds to equilibrium, the reactant pressures decrease, thus the forward reaction slows gradually
until equilibrium is reached. Equilibrium occurs when the rate forward is equal to the rate reverse. Because
the forward rate diminishes with time, the best answer is choice A.
31. Choice C is correct. Reactions that can shift when the pressure of the systemchanges are reactions that have
an unequal number ofgas molecules on thereactant and product sides of the reaction. InReaction 1, there are
three reactant gas molecules and two product gas molecules, soReaction 1shifts in the forward direction if the
total pressure increases on the equilibrium system. In Reaction 2, there aretwo reactant gas molecules and two
product gas molecules, soReaction 2cannot shift in either the forward or reverse direction if the total pressure
increases. In Reaction 3, thereare tworeactant gas molecules and one product gas molecule, so Reaction 3shifts
in the forward direction if the total pressure increases on the equilibrium system. This means that both
Reaction1 and Reaction 3 shift when the total pressure of the system changes. The best answer is choice C.
32. Choice D is correct. The equilibrium constant of a reaction remains constant unless the temperature of the
system ischanged. Changing the volume ofthe system does not change the equilibrium constant (although the
reaction may shift and the equilibrium ratios change). This eliminates choices Aand B, which show the Keq
inits equation form. As the volume of the system increases, the reaction shifts to the side of the reaction with
more molecules (in this case the reactant side), thus the ratio of HCOC1 (a product) to HCl (a reactant)
decreases as the reaction reestablishes equilibrium following a change in volume. The best answer is choice D.
33. Choice C is correct. Sulfur dioxide and oxygen are bothreactants, according to Reaction 1. When mixing 0.75
atm. SO2 with 0.50 atm. O2, Reaction 1 proceeds in the forward direction to establish equilibrium. The value
of Keq for this reaction (582), as listed in the passage, is well above one. At equilibrium, there is significantly
more SO3 than both SO2 and O2. This eliminates choices Band D. TheSO2 should start higher than the O2,
but it diminishes twice as fast as O2, thus the SO2 line should drop below the O2 line at equilibrium. If SO2 is
completely depleted (all 0.75 atm. areconsumed), 0.375 atm. of O2 would be consumed, leaving 0.125 atm. O2.
This is because SO2 is the limiting reagent, if the reaction goes to completion. This makes choice C the best
answer.
34. Choice Ais correct. The equilibrium constant for reaction 2 is 8.61 x 10"3 at 500C Choice Ais the reverse
reaction from Reaction 2, so the equilibrium constant is the reciprocal of 8.61 x 10"3 at 500C. This leads to a
value with 102, not 10"3 in it. This makes choice Athe mismatch of Keq andreaction. Choice Bis the same as
Reaction 2except the values have been cut inhalf. The result is that the Keq as written should be the square
root of 8.61 x 10"3. This leads to a value with 10"2 in it, therefore choice B seems reasonable and thus valid.
The equilibrium constant for Reaction 3is3.26 x10"6 at 500C. Choice Cis the reverse reaction from Reaction 3,
whereall the valueshave beencut in half. The equilibrium constant as writtenshould be the square root of the
reciprocal of 3.26 x10"6 at 500C. This leads to a value with 102 init, so choice Cseems reasonable andvalid.
Choice D is Reaction 3, where all the values have been doubled. The equilibrium constant as written should be
the square of 3.26 x10'6 at 500C. This leads to a value with 10"11 or 10"12 in it, so choice Dseems reasonable
and valid. The only mismatch is found with choice A.
224
35.
Choice Ais correct. The conversion from the pressure unit of torr to the pressure unit of atmospheres involves
dividing the value in torr by 760 (the conversion factor from torr to atm.). Because the Kp value is given in
terms oftorr1, the value must be multiplied by 760 inorder to convert it into a value interms ofatm-1. The best
answer is choice A.
36. Choice A is correct. An endothermic reaction is set up as follows:
heat + reactants -^ *- products.
The cooling of the reaction can be treated as the removal of heat. When heat is removed from an endothermic
reaction, because the heat is acting like a reactant, the reaction shifts to the left (reactant side) to regenerate
the lost heat. This shift causes an increase in reactants and a decrease in products. The product to reactant
ratio therefore decreases. Choices B, C, and D all account for the same shift, so the three choices can be
eliminated. The best choice is thus choice A.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
The interesting feature of this reaction is that the ratio of the reagents is 1 : 1 : 1 : 1, so the total pressure of the
systemnever changes. The reactants always decrease by the same amount, and the products always increase by
thesameamount as the reaction proceeds from the initial conditions to theequilibrium conditions. Thepurpose
of this experiment is to prove that equilibrium is pathway independent, implying that whether the reaction
starts with all reactants or all products, it will reach the exactly the same equilibrium.
Choice A is correct. Increasing the volume of the reaction vessel has no effect on the equilibrium, because there
are equal moles of gas molecules on both sides of the reaction. Adding moles of either reactant or product will
shift the equilibrium to the opposite side. Because the reaction is exothermic, it will shift forward with a
decrease in temperature and reverse with an increase in temperature. Thus, the best answer is choice A.
Choice D is correct. The equilibrium constant is less than 1.00, so the reactants are more abundant than the
products. This means at equilibrium, both CO2 and H2 have concentrations less than half of their initial
concentration (1.00 M). The only answer that shows this is choice D. Note that the final concentrations are the
same as in trial I. Regardless of the starting concentrations, the equilibrium concentrations will be the same if
the total pressure and the temperature are the same.
Choice A is correct. When reaction vessel III was cooled from 1000C to 500C, the partial pressure of carbon
dioxide gas (CO2) increased. This increase in partial pressure for carbon dioxide indicates that the reaction
shifted to the right (product side). The reaction must therefore be exothermic, because as heat is removed from
the system, the reaction shifts to the product side to produce heat. Any reaction that releases heat in the
forward direction is exothermic. This means that as heat is added to the reaction, the reaction shifts to the
left (to the reactant side). This results in a decrease in the partial pressure of CO2 and a decrease in the
equilibrium constant. The correct answer is choice A.
Choice D is correct. A change in pressure will never change the equilibrium constant. This eliminates choices A
and B. Because there is the same number of gas molecules on both sides of the equation, a change in pressure has
no effect on the equilibrium. This means that the equilibrium does not shift so the best choice is D.
Choice B is correct. Because there is an equal number of gas molecules on both sides of the reaction (two
molecules on each side), the total pressure of the system will not change with shifts in the reaction. This
eliminates choices A and C. Because there is no water present initially, the reaction must shift left to reach
equilibrium. This results in an increase in both water and carbon monoxide, therefore both slopes should
increase equally. This is shown only in choice B.
Choice A is correct. When the equilibrium constant (Keq) is greater than 1, the concentration of products is
greater than the concentration of reactants. As such, choices B and C are incorrect statements, and can be
eliminated. For an exothermic reaction, the equilibrium of the system shifts to the right (product side) as the
temperature of the system decreases. This means that the products increase and the reactants decrease as the
temperature of the system decreases. Both choices Band D are eliminated because of this, leaving only choice
A still standing. If the products out number the reactants, then the equilibrium constant is greater than 1.0, so
the best answer is choice A.
Passage VII (Questions 43- 49)
Solubility and Qualitative Analysis
43. Choice Ais correct. The molar solubility values of the sulfate salts are greater than the molar solubility
values of the carbonate salts, as shown by the values in Table 1. This makes statement I valid. The addition of
complexing agents helps to dissolve cations into aqueous solution by forming ligand bonds to the metal. The
most common example is hemoglobin, which serves to make iron dication and trication more water soluble.
This makes statement II valid. Given that both statements I and II are true, choices Band C are both
eliminated. Hydrochloric acid is a strong acid, therefore chloride anion is not affected by the presence of
hydronium ion. As aresult, chloride salts show no pH dependence. Sulfide is aweak base, therefore sulfide
shows apH dependence. This makes statement III invalid, so the best answer is choice A.
44. Choice Ais correct. The most accurate value for Kgp is found when the most accurate measurement of the molar
solubility is used in the calculation. The most accurate measurement of the molar solubility is found with the
salt having the greatest molar solubility. As ageneral rule, the larger the value, the less significant the error
in its measurement. The highest molar solubility is found with Ag2S04/ at 1.3 x10"2 M. The best answer is
choice A. This question is just adifferent way of asking which compound has the greatest molar solubility.
45. Choice Cis correct. The anion chosen to remove Zn2+ selectively is the anion that forms the least soluble salt
with zinc dication, rather than with silver cation or strontium dication. According tomolar solubility values,
the least soluble chloride salt is AgCl, so chloride anion is not a good choice. According to molar solubility
values, the least soluble carbonate salt is ZnC03, so carbonate anion is a possible choice. According to molar
solubility values, the least soluble hydroxide salt is Zn(OH)2/ by asubstantial margin, thus hydroxide anion
is the best choice so far. According to molar solubility values, the least soluble sulfate salt isZnSO^ so sulfate
anion is apossible choice. The greatest difference between zinc and the next most soluble cation comes with
hydroxide anion. Thebest answeris thus choice C.
46. Choice Bis correct. Silver chloride is the only chloride salt that is highly insoluble. Aprecipitate forming
whenchloride is added to solution indicates that silver cation must be present. This makes choice Bthe best
answer. Choices AandDcannot beconcluded, because noprecipitate is expected between chloride andeither
zinc or strontium. This means that zinc or strontium may or may not be present.
47. ChoiceC is correct. When the cation mixture is treated with chloride anion, the least soluble chloride salt is
silver chloride, therefore chloride will remove the Ag+ from solution. When the solution with the three
remaining cations is treated with sulfide dianion, the least soluble sulfide salt is lead sulfide, therefore
sulfide will remove the Pb2+ from solution. When the solution with the two remaining cations is treatedwith
hydroxide anion, the least soluble hydroxide salt is zinc hydroxide, therefore hydroxide will remove the Zn2+
fromsolution. Thecationthat will remain in solution is strontium (Sr2-1-), thus the best answer is choice C.
48. Choice Ais correct. An acid can protonate abasic salt insolution (which insome cases serves toform the more
soluble ionic form of the product). The acid serves to reduce the hydroxide concentration which allows more of
the basic salt to dissociate. This is a complex equilibrium that develops as a result. Acomplex equilibrium
usually enhances thesolubility in aqueous solution. Pick Atofeel perky.
49. Choice Ais correct. Because the solution has OH" present already, the solubility ofAgOH will behindered by
the common ion effect where hydroxide is the common ion. AgOH will be most soluble inthe solution with the
least hydroxide anion present. The least hydroxide is found in the solution with the most H+ present. This
solution consequently has thelowest pH. Pick Atofeel spunky.
Solubility Experiment
50. Choice Bis correct. Because all three salts dissociate into one cationand one anion, the compoundwith the
greatest molar solubility also has the greatest value for its solubility product (Ksp). The MZ salt is the
heaviest and has the least mass dissociate intosolution, so MZhas the lowest molesof salt in solutionand thus
has the lowest solubility product. This eliminates choices Cand D. Deciding between MX and MY requires
morework. Moremass of MY dissociates that MX, but MX has a lowermolecular mass. Themolesof MX equal 7
over 100 while the moles ofMY equal 9over 120. This means that there are 0.07 moles MX and 0.075 moles MY.
MY is present in a smaller volume of solution than MX, so MY has a greater molarity and solubility product
than MX at 25C The correct answer is choice B.
226
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
Choice Cis correct. Because the solubility of a salt increases with temperature, answer choices Band Dare
eliminated. It canalsobe read from the thirdcolumn in Table 1 that moreMX and MY dissociate into water at
a temperature greater than 25C than what dissociates at 25.0. This also eliminates choices B and D. The
molarity of MXat 31.6C and the molarity of MY at 27.4qC are found as follows:
7g 9g
MMX03L6-C =10g'mOle"1 =O^ZQmol =_7_
0.0262 L 0.0262 L 2.62
M Mmy@274'C =120g'mle"1 =0-075 mol =^5_M
2.53 0.0253 L 0.0253 L
There are more moles of MYthan MXin a smaller volume of solution, therefore saturated MYat 27.4C is more
concentrated than saturated MX at 31.6C. The best answer is choice C.
Choice Bis correct. Exactly 7.0 grams of MX dissociates into 28.9 mL of water at 25.0C according to Table 1.
The mass that will dissolve into 25.0 mL isproportionally less. The volume ratio isjustunderninety percent, so
roughly ninety percent of 7.0 grams MXwill dissociate. The best answer is choice B.
Choice A is correct. As with any question like this, first consider units, liters must be in the denominator, so
choices Cand Dare eliminated. At 25C, 9.0 grams ofMY requires that enoughwater be added to reach26.1 mL
of solution when fully dissociated. This makes choice A the best answer. To determine the molarity of the
solution, the 9.0grams must first be converted into moles, by dividing 9.0 grams by the molecular mass of MY
(120 grams per mole). This value is divided by the volume of the solution as measured in liters (0.0261 L). The
value of 0.0253 preys upon the possibilityyou read the wrong column. The best answer is choiceA.
Choice D is correct. As the temperature rises, the volume of the solution increases according to Table 1.
Liquids, as a general rule, expand with increasing temperature. As the volume increases, both the molarity
and the density of a solution decrease. The best answer is therefore choice D.
Choice D is correct. Density is defined as mass per volume. The densities of all of the solutions are greater
than pure water (1.00), so choices A and Bare eliminated. It is easy to forget to consider the mass of the water
when determining the density. At 25C there are 7.0grams of MXand 25.0grams of H2O in 28.9mL of solution,
9.0grams of MYand 25.0grams of H2Oin 26.1 mLof solution, and 4.0grams of MZ and 25.0grams of H2Oin 28.1
mL of solution. The densest solution (greatest mass in the least volume) is found with the saturated MY
solution. This makes choice D the correct choice.
56. Choice C is correct. The solution with the highest boiling point is the solution with the highest molality of
impurities. Molality is defined as moles solute per kg solvent. MX has a lower molecular mass than MY, thus
1.0 grams of MX generates a greater moles of solute than 1.0 grams of MY. Because the density of water
decreases as the temperature of water increases, the mass of 10 mL water is greater at the lower temperature.
This means that the largest molality is found with 10 mL water at 50C, because the mass solvent is least. The
best answer is therefore choice C.
Passage IX (Questions 57 - 62) Qualitative Analysis Experiment
57. Choice A is correct. An anion can be used to identify a cation when it reacts differently with that cation than
the other cations. Of the five anions used in table I, all five form a precipitate with barium cation. This
means that to identify barium (distinguish barium from the other cations) the anion chosen must precipitate
exclusively with barium. Only chromate Cr042" forms a precipitate with barium and no other cation. To
distinguish barium cation from the others, chromate should be added to solution. If a precipitate forms, then
barium was present in the solution. If no precipitate forms, then barium was not present in the solution. The
best answer is choice A.
58. Choice B is correct. Nitric acid protonated carbonate anion to form carbonic acid (H2CO3), which subsequently
decomposed to form water and carbon dioxide. Becausethe carbonate anion carries a -2 charge, two equivalents
of nitric acid are required. The two nitrate anions and barium cation are spectator ions. The best answer is
therefore choice B. This can also be inferred from the passage, where it is stated that nitric acid is added to
react with carbonate anion to form carbon dioxide gas. The barium cation carries a +2 charge and carbonate
anion carries a -2 charge, therefore the two must be in a one-to-one ratio in the salt. This eliminates choices A
andC.
59. Choice Ais correct. Hydrochloric acid is not used, because it would introduce the chloride anion, which
according to table II, forms a precipitate with silver cation. This means that chloride interferes, making
choice A the correct choice.
60. Choice D is correct. The salt K2S04 delivers the anion S042" (sulfate) to solution. From table I, sulfate
precipitates with both barium and strontium cations. The conclusion reached upon observing the formation of a
precipitate should be that either strontium or barium is present in solution. It cannot be determined whether or
not calcium or magnesium cations are present because they do not form any detectable precipitate with sulfate.
The best answer is choice D.
61. Choice Cis correct. Looking at the third reactivity column of table II shows that a white precipitate forms
upon the addition of silver cation with both carbonate and chloride anions. Addition of nitric acid dissolves
the carbonate away, but it does not react with the chloride. The best choice is the chloride anion, choice C.
62. Choice A is correct. The first anion added precipitates with only barium. This according to the chart is
chromate (Cr042'). Answer choice Ashows this to be carbonate (CO32-), making choice Aanincorrect choice.
Just tobecertain, anion Wprecipitates with strontium but not calcium andmagnesium. According to the chart,
this is sulfate (SO42-) sochoice Bis valid. Anion Xprecipitates with calcium but not magnesium. According to
Table 1, it is either carbonate (CO32-) or oxalate (C2042"), so choice C (oxalate) is valid. Anion Z precipitates
with magnesium. According to the chart, this is hydroxide (OH-), sochoice D(hydroxide) is valid.
Passage X (Questions 63 -69) Solubility Chart
The focus of this passage is onthe solubility of different cations inthe presence ofanions. Solubility isone of
the more favored topics on the MCAT so far, so be certain to make sense of this passage. The key fact to
remember is that when comparing solubility, lookat the molarsolubility, not the Kspvalue.
63. Choice Cis correct. This question boils down to whether Qsp orKsp islarger. When Q>K, there are too many
products, inwhich case the salt cannot completely dissociate. When Q<K, there is room for more products, in
which case the salt completely dissociates. When Q = K, it is exactly saturated. In this question, it is far
easier to decide whether the molarity of ZnCC>3 in the event it fully dissociates exceeds the molar solubility
conveniently listed in Table 1. The molarity if Z1-1CO3 fully dissociates is calculated as follows:
ai &ams =OJL mole =-QA. m0le =0.0008 mole => Q-0008 mole =0.008 M
1?[-. grams/ 125 1000 0.10L
iZD-* /mole
0.008 M > 0.000014 by a largeamount. This means that very little of the ZnCC>3 dissociates. On this question,
you must goeven further. It will barely dissociate according to the numbers which implies choice C. Do what
is expected of you: be kind to strangers, brush after every meal, and pick choice C.
64. Choice Bis correct. To distinguish one thing from another visually, you must beable toseea difference in their
behaviors. The behavior here is the formation of a precipitate. To visually distinguish a tube with Zn2+ from
a tube with Ag+, ananion thatprecipitates with only one of them must be used. The passage defines the cut-off
for seeing a precipitate as one mg permL solution. Assuming the average salt tohave a molecular mass around
100 grams per mole, means that the cut-off for visual delegability is roughly 0.010 M. You must locate the
anion that shows a greater molar solubility than 0.01 Mfor one cation, but less for the other. Sulfides show the
biggest ratio of numerical values, but in a practical sense, neither dissolves to a detectable extent to visually
distinguish. The numbers are different in a multiplicative manner, but they are close in an additive sense.
Choice Ais eliminated. With the chloride salts ([Ag+] =1.2 x10"5, while [Zn2+] =3.1 x10"2), there is a case
where the silver chloride precipitates while the zinc chloride dissociates. The zinc concentration is
detectable to the eye. In other words, we can see the quantity ofsalt that dissociates. Choose B, and feel nice.
65. Choice Dis correct. This question addresses the common ion effect from aconceptual perspective. Silver sulfide
is most soluble in a solution with the least amount of common ion. This eliminates choices A and C. The
question is whether or not silver cation or sulfur dianion more affects the calculation. In this case, we are
deciding which leads to agreater xvalue, Ksp =(.01)2(x) or Ksp =(2x)2(0.01). In asolution with 0.01 MAg+,
the solubility is 104 xKsp. In asolution with 0.01 MS2", the solubility is 5xsquare root of Ksp. Because the
Ksp for Ag2S is so small, the square root of Ksp is alarger number than Ksp. The best answer is choice D.
66.
67.
68.
69.
Choice Cis correct. This question is purely mathematical. The key fact is recognizing that there is 0.01 MCI"
present in solution initially. The set-up and solution are as follows:
^ Zn2+(aq)
0.01
Reaction: ZnC03(s) ^
Initially: excess
Shift: zX +x
Equilibrium: who cares? 0.01 + x
Ksp =[Zn2+][C0321 Ksp =(0.01 +x)(x)
co32-
0
x
x
Upon ignoring x: Ksp =2.0 x10"10 =(0.01 +x)(x) =0.01(x) .-. x=2.0 x10"8 M
The correct answer is choice C.
Choice B is correct. The most soluble salt is the salt with the highest molar solubility (not necessarily the
highest solubility product). This is a "read-the-chart" type of question. According to data in Table 1, the
largest molar solubility of the choices is found with Ag2CC>3 (1.2 x 10~4 M). The trick here is picking the
correct column in the table toreference (molar solubility rather than Ksp). To be more thanyoucanbe, pick B.
Choice D is correct. To calculate the solubility product for the calcium phosphate salt, the solubility reaction
is needed:
Ca3(P04)2
r 3Ca2+(aq) +2P043"(aq)
Ksp =[Ca2+l3[P043-l2 =(3x)3(2x)2 =(27 x3)(4 x2) =108 x5
^sp
The best answer is choice D.
Choice C is correct. An ion exchange column involves competition by two cations for an anion bound to the
column. The cation of the less soluble salt will precipitate with the anion, which is bound to the column. The
two cations to consider are the one in solution and the one originally bound to the column. The columns works if
the cation in solution is less soluble with the anion in the column than the cation originally coupled with the
anion in the column. Silver chloride (AgCl) has a lower molar solubility than sodium chloride (NaCl),
therefore silver cation precipitates with chlorine anion preferentially over sodium cation. Choice A is a valid
statement. Zinc sulfide (ZnS) has a lower molar solubility than calcium sulfide (CaS), therefore zinc cation
precipitates with sulfide anion preferentially over calcium cation. Choice B is a valid statement. Calcium
carbonate (CaCC>3) has a higher molar solubility than zinc carbonate (ZnCC^), therefore calcium cation does
not precipitate with carbonate anion preferentially over zinc cation. The column of choice C will not work,
thus choice C is the best answer. Calcium sulfide (CaS) has a lower molar solubility than sodium sulfide
(Na2S), therefore calcium cation precipitates with sulfide anion preferentially over sodium cation. Even
though the two salts have different stoichiometry, they can be compared directly through their molar
solubility values. Choice D is a valid statement.
Calcium Salts Solubility
70. Choice A is correct. Because there is solid calcium hydroxide at the base of the flask, it can safely be assumed
that the solution is saturated. As sodium carbonate is added to the flask, calcium carbonate will begin to
precipitate. This reduces the calcium ionconcentration, causing more of the calcium hydroxide solid can begin
to dissociate in order to regenerate calciumion in solution. As calciumhydroxide dissociates into solution, the
hydroxide concentration increases. As the hydroxide ion increases, the solution's pH increases, eliminating
choices C and D. Had the solution not been saturated, there would not be any solid calcium hydroxide present
to dissociateinto solution. This means that the pH increases more in the solution with solid calciumhydroxide
present than the solution with no calcium hydroxide present. The best choice is therefore answer A.
71. Choice C is correct. The maximum calcium ion concentration at pH = 14 can be determined using the solubility
product of calcium hydroxide (Ksp =[Ca2+][OH-]2). Because the pH is 14, the pOH is 0, so the hydroxide anion
concentration is 1.00M. This means that when plugging into the solubility product to determine the calcium ion
concentration, it can be determined that the calcium ion concentration equals the numerical value of the
solubility product (Ksp =[Ca2+1). The solubility product is 4.3 x10"6 M3. The best choice is C, 4.3 x10"6 M.
72. Choice D is correct. In order to increase the chloride concentration in solution, an anion must be added that
precipitates calcium cation out from solution. This allows the calcium chloride solid present on the bottom of
the flask to dissociate into solution to regenerate the lost calcium cation. As the calcium chloride dissociates,
the chloride anion concentration increases. Choice C should be eliminated immediately, because the solubility
ofcalcium chloride is reduced by the common ion effect. Choice Bis eliminated, because thesilver cation will
precipitate chloride anion from solution. This is one of the solubility rules you may want to know. Silver
halides are insoluble in water. The answer is either choice A or D. The sodium phosphate adds phosphate
anion into solution, which then precipitates out of solution as calcium phosphate and thus decreases the
calcium cation concentration. The solid calcium chloride dissociates to counteract the decrease in calcium
concentration andindoing soincreases the chloride ion concentration. The bestanswer ischoice D.
73. Choice C is correct. It is important to realize that the solution is buffered, so the calcium hydroxide that
dissociates does not drastically affect the pH. The buffer absorbs the hydroxide that is released as calcium
hydroxide dissociates. The amount of calcium hydroxide that dissociates is controlled by the pH of the
solution. At a high pH, there is a large amount ofhydroxide present in solution, so only a small amount of
calcium hydroxide dissociates. As the pHdecreases, the hydroxide anion concentration decreases, resulting in
an increasing calcium ion concentration. The overall effect is that as the pH of the buffer increases, calcium
hydroxide isless soluble duetothe common ion effect. This results inaninverse relationship, sochoices Aand
B are eliminated.
The question may also beaddressed from a complex equilibrium perspective. As the buffer pHdecreases, the
amountofhydronium insolution increases. Increasing thehydronium concentration forces thesecond reaction in
the forward direction. This reduces the hydroxide concentration. To compensate, the first reaction shifts
forward to regenerate hydroxide. In doing so, calcium cation is released into solution. This confirms that the
calcium ion concentration increases as the pH decreases.
Ca(OH)2(s) + H20(1) -^-^ Ca2+(aq) + 2OH"(aq)
H3Q+(aq) + OH-(aq) ^^r 2H2Q(1)
Ca(OH)2(s) + 2H30+(aq) ^ Ca2+(aq) + 4 H20(1)
The net result is that as the [H3<D+1 increases, the [Ca2+] increases. As the calcium cation concentration
increases, the log of the calcium cation concentration increases, therefore the log of the calcium ion
concentration increases as the pH decreases. Because both the x-axis and y-axis are based on a log scale, the
relationship is linear, but not necessarilywith a slope of one. The slope is negative (due to the negative sign in
determining pH). The best answer is choice C.
74. Choice B is correct. If the dissociating of a salt into water increases the temperature of the water, then
dissociation (the solvation process) releases heat. The release of heat makes the solvation process exothermic
which makes the enthalpy change (AH) a negative number. This eliminates choices A and C. The entropy
increases when a salt dissociates into solution, because the ions have more freedom to randomize within the
solution than within the lattice. The change in entropy (AS) for dissociation is therefore positive. The correct
answer is choice B.
75. Choice D is correct. This question requires viewingTable 1. The solubility of calciumfluoride and calcium
hydroxide are directlycomparable using the solubility product, becausefluoride and hydroxide carry the same
anionic charge. The solubility of calciumsulfate and calciumcarbonate are directly comparable using the
solubility product, because sulfate and carbonate carry the same anionic charge. Choices A and C are
eliminated due to their lower solubility product values. Because calciumhydroxide forms three ions when
dissociating into solution, the solubility product is 4x3, where xis the calcium ion concentration ([Ca2+]). The
value of x ([Ca2+]) is some number times 10-2 for Ca(OH)2- For calcium sulfate, the solubility product is x2,
where xis thecalcium ion concentration ([Ca2+]). The value ofx ([Ca2+]) is some value times 10"3 for calcium
sulfate. The value is greater for calciumhydroxide, so the best answer is calciumhydroxide, choiceD.
Complex Equilibrium
This is a difficult passage because as one reaction shifts, it affects the other reactions. It is easiest to view the
reactions as independent, and observe how specific reagents are changing during each step. For instance, the
shift of reaction 1 will affect the partial pressure of NO2 which will in turn affect reactions 2, 3, and 4. The
result is a complex equilibrium.
76. Choice A is correct. A negative change in entropy results when the system becomes more ordered. The system
becomes more ordered when it decreases in volume or changes phase to a more ordered phase. Reaction 2 goes
from two gas molecules to one gas molecule, therefore in has lost in entropy. Reaction 3 goes from two gas
molecules to two gas molecules, therefore entropy has not changed. Reaction 5 goes from three ions in solution to
three ions in solution, therefore entropy has not changed. Reaction 6 also goes from three ions in solution to
three ions in solution, therefore entropy has not changed. The best answer is therefore choice A.
77. Choice C is correct. Decreasing the temperature shifts reaction 2 in the forward direction, because it is
exothermic. This results in an increase in [N2O4]. Increasing the pressure shifts reaction 2 in the forward
direction. This results in an increase in [N2O4]. Water vapor in the air reacts with the NO2 in the air
(according to reaction 4), and thus reduces the amount of N02- Reaction 2 shifts in the reverse direction to re
establish equilibrium. This decreases (NOT increases) the [N2O4]. Choice C is the correct choice. Addition of
NO2 shifts reaction 2 in the forward direction which increases the [N2O4].
78. Choice B is correct. According to the ideal gas law, when the temperature of a gas system is doubled, the
pressure doubles, as long as the volume of the system and moles of gas remain the same. The reaction vessel is a
closed steel container, so the volume of the system cannot change. The problem here is that the moles of gas
change with the increase in temperature. Because the reaction is exothermic, an increase in temperature
pushes the reaction in the reverse direction. This increases the reactants and decreases the products. There are
more products than reactants in the balanced equation, so a shift in the reverse direction results in fewer moles
of gas in the system. The increase in pressure due to the ideal gas law is not be as great as expected, due to the
decrease due to the shift in equilibrium. The ideal gas law predicts that change in temperature doubles the
pressure, while the shift in reaction (reduction in moles of gas) predicts that the pressure decreases. The
change in moles is a smaller factor than the increase temperature, because at the least, the moles of gas would
be two-thirds of their original value. The moles cannot be cut in half according to the balanced equation.
Therefore, the overall change in pressure is a little less than double. This is best described as choice B.
79. Choice D is correct. A bond must be formed in reaction 2, because the two NO2 molecules are combining to form
one N2O4 molecule. This eliminates choices A and B. Bond formation is an exothermic process, therefore
choice D is the correct answer.
80. Choice C is correct. The total pressure of reaction 1 at equilibrium is 1.00 atmospheres, because the internal
pressure can equilibrate with the external pressure in a piston system. The pressures equilibrate by having the
piston plunger either rise up (increasing the volume) or drop down (decreasing the volume). The addition of
0.10 atmospheres of NO gas initially increases the total pressure of the systemto 1.10 atmospheres, before the
system can equilibrate. The piston rises to accommodate the change in pressure (and equilibrate the internal
and external pressures), thus increasing the volume of the piston. The addition of NO gas displaces the
reaction from equilibrium. The reaction is no longer at equilibrium, so it reacts to re-establish equilibrium.
Excess reactant is present, so the reaction shifts in the forward direction (to use up the excess reactant). There
are three moles of reactants and only two moles of products, so the number of moles decreases, causing the
volume to decrease slightly. The overall result is a slight increase in volume, making choice C correct. If there
was no shift in the reaction, the volume would increase by exactly ten percent, therefore the increase in volume
must be less than ten percent.
81. Choice D is correct. Addition of sodium hydroxide to solution deprotonates HNO2 (HNO3 is a strong acid and
has already fully dissociated), and thus shifts reaction 4 to the product side to re-establish equilibrium.
Addition of manganese(II) chloride (M1-1CI2) to solution removes both NO2" and NO3" from solution through
complexing of the ligands. To re-establish equilibrium in reaction 4, the reaction must shift right to make more
NO2" and NO3". Removal of nitrate (NO3") from solution results in a shift in the product direction to re
establish equilibrium. Removal of water (a reactant) results in a shift in the reverse direction (left) to re
establish equilibrium. Choice D is the best answer available to you.

82. Choice A is correct. At equilibrium, the NO2 concentration is constant. When bubbled through water, it reacts
to form nitrous acid (HNO2) and nitricacid (HNO3), which can bothdeprotonate and formligand bonds to the
manganese cation. This means that the N02(g) is depleted when it is bubbled through an aqueous solution of
manganese chloride. Graphs C and D are eliminated, because they show that the concentration of NO2
increases with the addition of aqueous manganese chloride solution. The N02(g) is gradually regenerated by
both the reverse reaction of reaction 2 and the forward reaction of reaction 1. This means NO2 is regenerated
(and thus increases), but not to the level it was initially at. This is best shown in graph A.
PassageXIII (Questions 83- 89)
Hemoglobin and Acclimation
83. Choice C is correct. The passage states that hemoglobin binds four oxygen molecules while myoglobin binds
onlyoneoxygen molecule. Totransfer all of theoxygen, there must be four myoglobin molecules per hemoglobin.
Thisshould be common knowledgefrom biology. Pick choice C, and start the passage off on the right foot.
84. Choice B is correct. Increasing the rate of respiration increases the uptake of oxygen. This results in an increase
in free oxygen, which lessens slightly by the shift in equilibrium to the oxygenated hemoglobin. Overall, the
amount of free oxygenincreases, so choice Ais eliminated. An increase in the amount of hemoglobinresults in a
shift in the equilibrium in the forward direction. This reduces the amount of free oxygen. Choice B is therefore
the best answer. An increase in CO consumed results in more bound sites on the iron of hemoglobin, so less oxygen
can bind. Less oxygen bound results in more free oxygen. Choice C is eliminated. More blood results in more
moles of all components in the equilibrium including oxygen. Choice D is thus eliminated. Select choice B.
85. Choice D is correct. A long-time mountain resident has more hemoglobin in their blood than a long-time sea-
level resident. When the long-time mountain resident descends to sea level where there is a higher abundance
of oxygen, they experience increased vitality due to the increased partial pressure of oxygen gas. Pick D.
86. Choice A is correct. Because CO binds the iron of hemoglobin preferentially over O2, any CO present in the air
bind iron cation, and thus reduce the amount of O2 that can bind. To compensate, respiration increases, in order
to increase the amount of air consumed. Over time, the body produces more Hb (this is a result of acclimation).
The best answer is choice A.
87. Choice D is correct. Because hypoxia does not directly affect the cellular uptake rate of oxygen, once it is
absorbed from the lungs, myoglobin (present in cells) is not affected directly by hypoxia. Without considering
any other factors, the myoglobin should remain constant. The best answer is choice D.
88. Choice D is correct. Hypoxia results from a drastic decrease in the amount of oxygen present in the air. This
decrease is associated with an increase in elevation. Repelling down a mountain and scuba diving both involve
increases in the oxygen present. In scuba tanks, the gas may be mixed with helium (an inert gas) to compensate
for the greater amount of air consumed per breath (due to the increased pressure under water). If the tanks were
not partially filled with helium, too much nitrogen and oxygen would enter the body. Of the last two choices,
only snow skiing involves a high elevation, so choice D is the best answer.
89. Choice B is correct. According to the passage, there is less oxygen present at higher elevations. By training at
higher elevations, where the air has less moles of oxygen, the body acclimates by producing more Hb. Once an
athlete returns to a lower elevation, the increased amount of Hb remains for a short time, before the body can
re-acclimate. For a short period of time, an athlete can increase their oxygen carrying capacity (and thus
increase their cellular metabolism). The best answer is choice B.
r
Equilibrium Reaction of NO2 and N2O4
This passage mimics a passage that appeared on the MCAT years ago. The reaction is a typical example of gas
phase equilibrium, and is found in most every general chemistry text book. The reaction is often used to
demonstrate Le Chatelier's principle. In this passage, the reaction is chosen because it has an unequal number
of reactant molecules as product molecules. This means that changes in the condition of the system (volume and
pressure) can shift the equilibrium reaction, but the equilibrium constant remains the same, as long as a
temperature change does not accompany the volume or pressure change. The passage also points out that an
inert gas does not disturb an equilibrium, as long as the container is rigid (which a glass container is assumed to
be). You may wish to note that if inert gas is added to an expandable container, it can disrupt the equilibrium,
because the partial pressures of the component gases are changed.
90. Choice A is correct. Because the reaction involves the breaking of a bond, it must be an endothermic reaction.
This is confirmed in the last sentence of the passage, which states that the ratio product to reactant increases
as the temperature increases. Because there are two molecules formed from just one, the AS for the reaction as
written is greater than zero (positive). The best answer is therefore choice A.
91. Choice D is correct. Addition of reactant (N2O4) shifts the reaction to the right (product side), thus choice A
is valid. An increase in volume disrupts equilibrium, and results in the reaction shifting from the side with one
molecule to the side with two molecules. This results in a shift to the right, so choice Bis valid. A decrease in
pressure disrupts equilibrium, and results in the reaction shifting from the side with fewer molecules (one) to
the side with more molecules (two). This results in a shift to the right, thus choice C is valid. Choices Band C
should both have been eliminated, because they are the same answer and cannot both be correct. When adding
helium gas (an inert gas) to the reaction at constant volume, the partial pressures of N2O4 and NO2 do not
change. Because the partial pressures do not change, the reaction is not displaced from equilibrium, thus it
does not shift in either direction. This makes choice D the correct answer.
92. Choice Dis correct. The equation relating AG and Keq is AG =-RT In Keq. To isolate Keq, both sides of the
equation are first divided by -RT. Toeliminate the natural log function, the two sides of the equationmust be
exponentsof e. Thismakes choice D the correct answer. Thederivationis shown below.
AG =-RT InKeq .'. lnKgq =-.-. K^ =e"AG/Rr
93. Choice Bis correct. When the equilibrium constant has 105 associated with it, it is said to be large. As such,
the reaction distribution at equilibrium is almost exclusively products, making choice A valid. If the reaction
starts as mostly reactants, it shifts nearly one hundred percent to form products, making the shift significant.
Choice B is NOT true. The equilibriumconstant for the reverse reaction is the reciprocal of the equilibrium
constant for the forward reaction. This makes choice C valid. A catalyst increases the reaction rate (in both
the forward and the reverse directions), but it does not affect the equilibrium constant. This makes choice D
valid. The best answer is choice B.
94. Choice A is correct. Because the equilibrium is dynamic, the forward and reverse reactions are continually
transpiring. When the equilibrium is disturbed by the addition of N2O4 (labeled or not), the equilibrium is
lost and the reaction must undergo a net shift forward to compensate for the excess reactant. The reverse
reaction continues as well, but not to the degree of the forward reaction. The result is that the amount of N2O4
decreases and the amount of NO2 increases. The radiolabeled nitrogen will eventually be evenly distributed
between the products and reactants, once equilibriumhas been re-established. This makes choice A the best
answer. This is referred to as scrambling of the label.
95. Choice C is correct. Because there are more molecules on the product side than the reactant side, the reaction
shifts to products as the volume of the piston increases. This makes statement I a valid statement. The
reaction is shifting in the forward direction, which is endothermic, therefore heat is absorbed by the reaction.
The result is that the temperature decreases. This makes statement II a valid statement. Do not mistakenly
think of PV= nRT, because the volume changes and the pressure changes, the temperature was not changed to
cause the volume or pressure change. As the reaction shifts to the right, N2O4 decreases and the amount of
NO2 increases, causing the mole fraction of N2O4 to decrease. This makes statement III an invalid statement.
The best answer is choice C, both statements I and II.
96. Choice Bis correct. In this case, the equilibrium constant is the product squared (because of the stoichiometric
coefficient) divided by the reactant. This makes choice B the best answer.
Questions 97-100
Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
97. Choice C is correct. When an MX salt dissociates into water, it forms M+ cation and X' anion. The solubility
product (Ksp) is equal to [M+][X"] =y2. You really have no alternative but to pick C.
98. Choice C is correct. This is a question involving the common ion effect. Because F" is present in solution in
choices Aand B, and Mg2+ is present in choice D, all of thechoices except Careeliminated due to thecommon
ion effect. Itis only in choice Cthat the compound does not have acommon ion (either Mg2+ orF") present.
99. Choice C is correct. Equilibrium is the state in which the forward reaction rate equals the reverse reaction
rate. For a one-step reaction at equilibrium, kf[R] =kr[P]. Keq is defined as products over reactants, which is
manipulated as follows:
Given kf[R] =kr[P] and Keq =, Keq =M
[RJ kr
Because the forward rate is four times thereverse rate, 4kr canbesubstituted for kfand thus Keq is4kr divided
by kr, which is 4. Choose with dignity; choose C.
100. Choice C is correct. Choice D is eliminated, because less solvent reduces the amount of a salt that can
dissociate into solution. Because a solvation reaction can be either exothermic or endothermic, the effect on the
system by a change in temperature varies, and is thus unpredictable. This eliminates choices A and B. In most
cases, an increase in temperature results in an increase in the amount of salt that dissociates into solution, but
there are some exceptions. Only choice C, increasing the solvent, always increases the amount of a salt that
dissociates into solution. As more solvent is added, more compound can dissociate. Be sure that you realize
that this question is asking about the amount (in mass or moles) of salt dissociated, not the concentration (molar
solubility).

Section IV
Acids and Bases
by Todd Bennett
Strong Acid:
pH =-log[HX]
Strong Base:
pOH =-log[MOH]
Weak Acid:
PH=ipKa-ilog[HA]
Weak Base:
pOH=IpKb-llog[A"]
Buffer:
pH = pKa + log
or
[A"]
[HA]
pH=pKa +log m0leS Con)ugate Base
moles Conjugate Acid
Terminology
a) Fundamental Definitions
b) Water-based Acid-Base Chemistry
i. Acid Dissociation
ii Base Hydrolysis
c) Determination of Reagent Strength
i. Strong Acids
ii. Weak Acids
iii. Very Weak Acids
iv. Strength and the pK Scale
v. Strong Bases
vi. Weak Bases
vii Very Weak Bases
Types of Acids and Bases
a) Haloacids
b) Oxyacids
c) Metal Oxides and Metal Hydroxides
d) Organic Acids
e) Polyprotic Acids
Calculating pH
a) Determining pH
b) Log Review
c) pH for Strong Reagents
d) pH for Weak Reagents
Conjugate Pairs
a) Typical Conjugate Pairs
b) Relationship of pKa and pKb
c) Henderson-Hasselbalch Equation
BERKELEY
Ur-e-v-iê>w
>
S>
>
Acids 8t Bases Section Goals
Know the definitions for an acid and some common examples of acids.
Anacid canbedefined aseither a proton donor, anelectron-pair acceptor, or a compound that yields
H30+ when added to water. Typical examples includeacetic acid (H3CCO2H), hydrochloric acid
(HCl), and sulfuric acid (H2SO4). You are expected to recognize the common acids.
Know the definitions for a base and some common examples of bases.
Abase can be defined as either a proton acceptor, an electron-pair donor, or a compound thatyields
OH"when added to water. Typical examples include sodium nydroxide (NaOH), ammonia (NH3),
and potassium tert-butoxide ((CH3)3COK). You are expected to recognize the common bases.
Be able to calculate the pH of aqueous solutions of base or acid.
The pHof a solution is defined as the negative log of the hydroniumion concentration in the solution.
You must be ableto determine the pH of the solution, knowing the concentration and strengthof
thespecies. ThepHofa weakacidis greater thanthepHofa strongacidwhenthetwoareinequal
molar concentrations.
Understand what is meant by the strength of a reagent.
The strengthofa reagent isthe measure ofitsdegree ofdissociation inwater. Acompound thatfully
dissociates inwater issaid tobestrong, while a reagent thatonly partially dissociates inwater is
said tobe weak. You should be able to aetermine the relativestrengths of acid fromchemicalfeatures
and its pH in the aqueous solution.
0<j^ Know how conjugate pairsand buffers work.
Abuffer is formed when a weak acid and its conjugate base are combinedin an aqueous solution.
An equilibrium exists betweenthe two species, so as long as both are present m solution, the
hydroniumion concentration will remain fairly constant, andthe pHwill also remain constant. This
effect isknown as"buffering." You must understand buffers ana howpHis determined using the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation.
Recognize and specific types of compounds.
Youshould understand why metal oxides and metal hydroxides are basic. Youshould understand
whynon-metal oxides and non-metal hydroxides areacidic. Befamiliar withtypical examples such
as acid rain and soil pH. Recognize that the conversion from a non-metal oxide (Lewis acid form)
to a non-metal hydroxide (Br0nsted-Lowry form) involves hydration of the acid. The strength of
the reagent is not affectedby this conversion.
Understand the terms associated with polyprotic acids.
Polyprotic acids have multiple pKa and pKbvalues. You must understand the conceptual and
mathematical relationships of the variables to one another. Youmust be familiar with terms such
as "normaility" and "equivalents." Knowthe typicalexamplesof polyproticacids and their formulae.
General Chemistry Acids and Bases
Acids and Bases
Acid-and-base chemistry is a foundation for understanding organic chemistry,
biochemistry, and physiology. As such, we shall address it from several
perspectives, observing what effect the varying of a solvent has on the nature of a
reaction. Water and other protic solvents solvate charged species, so acid-and-
base chemistry can be monitored by the gain and loss of charge, associated
specifically with the gain and loss of an ionized hydrogen atom (H+). The terms
"protonated" and "deprotonated" are derived from the ionized hydrogen atom,
which is just a proton. In a lipid environment, charges cannot be stabilized, so
acid-and-base chemistry is typically considered from an electron-transfer
perspective, where bonds are broken and formed. The different definitions of
acids and bases are the result of differences in solvent, not chemical reactivity.
Once the definitions are established, reactivity will be considered. There are two
common misconceptions to clear up, if we are to understand acid and base
chemistry better. The first common misconception is that the pH scale has fixed
limits. The second common misconception is that weak acids automatically have
strong conjugatebases. Let us address both of these before anything else.
Acidity is typicallymeasured in terms of [H+] on the pH scale. The pH value of a
solution is determined by taking the negative log of the hydronium
concentration. Because neutral water has a hydronium concentration of 10~7 M,
due to autoionization of water, neutral water has a pH = 7.0. Acidic solutions
have pH values less than 7.0, while basic solutions have pH values greater than
7.0. The only limits to the value of pH are associated with concentration and
solubility, so the pH scale is limitless in theory. In practice, there are limits.
The pHscale does not range from0 to 14. The pHofacompound can be negative
for highly concentrated strong acids and greater than 14 for highly concentrated
strong bases (e.g., 10MHCl has pH=-1, and 10MNaOH has pH= 15).
The relative strength of an acid can be determined from the relative strength of
its conjugate base. This relation is reversible: The relative strength of a base can
also be determined from the relative strength of its conjugate acid. Using the
relationship between pKa and pK^, for conjugate pairs in water at 25C, either pK
value can be determined from knowing the other. For instance, a weak acid with
a pKa of 7 has a conjugate base with a pKbof 7. Note that the conjugatebase of
the weak acid is a weak base. This is not a typo! It is the relative reactivities that
are compared, not the absolute reactivities. If acid HA is stronger than acid HB,
then base A" is weaker than base B". This can be demonstrated by comparing
Reaction 4.1 with Reaction 4.2:
HA(aq) +
pKa = 7
HB(aq) +
pKa =9
H20(1)
H20(l)
Reaction 4.1
Reaction 4.2
H30+(aq)
H30+(aq) +
A-(aq)
pKb =7
B-(aq)
pKb = 5
The lower pKa value indicates that HA is a stronger acid than HB while the
larger pKb value indicates that A" is a weaker base than B".
The stronger the acid, the weaker its conjugate base. It is not necessarily the case
that weak acids have strong conjugate bases. Aprime example is a weak acid with
pKa = 7. The pK[, of the conjugate base is 7, which is not strong.
Introduction
General Chemistry Acids and Bases Terminology
Terminology
Fundamental Definitions
A perfect place to start a discussion of acids and bases is with the definitions of
an acid, a base, and strength. There are three definitions proposed for both acids
and bases, although each considers an acid as the opposite of a base. The first
definition is the Arrhenius definition, which states that an acid yields H30+
when added to water, while a base yields OH" when added to water. An acidic
aqueous solution therefore has a higher hydronium concentration than
hydroxide. This definition is useful when doing calculations of pH and pKa. The
second definition is the Bronsted-Lowry definition, which states that an acid is a
proton (H+) donor and that a base is a proton (H+) acceptor. This definition is
based on what occurs in a protic solvent, where reactions are viewed as proton-
transfer reactions. The third definition is the Lewis definition, which states that
an acid is an electron-pair acceptor while a base is an electron-pair donor. This
definition is based on what occurs in an aprotic solvent, and is typically used in
organic chemistry. For this section, only the Arrhenius definition will be
emphasized. Table 4.1 lists the different definitions of acids and bases.
Term Definition Example
Arrhenius acid yields H30+ when added to H2O aq: [H30+] > [OH"]
Arrhenius base yields OH" when added to H2O aq: [OH"] > [H30+]
BrOTisted-Lowry acid Proton donor HX in protic solvent
Br0nsted-Lowry base Proton acceptor KOH in protic solvent
Lewis acid Electron pair acceptor BF3 in aprotic solvent
Lewis base Electron pair donor NH3 in aprotic solvent
Table 4.1
Water-based Acid-Base Chemistry
For our purposes, acid and base chemistry is to be considered as reactions that
only occur in aqueous solution. Therefore, to understand water-based acidity
and basicity, it is vital to understand the properties of water. Water is
amphoteric, meaning that it may act as either an acid or a base. Neutral water
naturally dissociates into hydronium and hydroxide, according to Reaction 4.3.
2 H20(1) -^-^ H30+(aq) + OH"(aq)
Reaction 4.3
Only a small fraction of water dissociates into solution. Water at 25"C, in the
absence ofanacid or a base, dissociates enough togenerate a solution with 10"7
MH30+(aq) and10"7 MOH"(aq). This means that neutral water has botha little
hydronium and a little hydroxide. A neutral aqueous solution is defined as one
in which [H30+] = [OH"], and therefore pH = pOH. If the solution is at 25C,
then the pH and pOH are both equal to 7.0. For an acidic aqueous solution,
[H30+] > [OH"], pH < pOH, and the pH of the solution is less than 7.0. Equally,
for a basic aqueous solution, [OH"] > [H30+], pH > pOH, and the pH of the
solution is greater than 7.0. There are several perspectives according to which a
solution may be deemed acidic or basic, and regardless of the reasoning behind
each one, you must know how all of these different perspectives relate to one
another. Any acidic solution has a pH of less than 7.0, hydronium in it being
more abundant than hydroxide, and it can turn blue litmus paper red.
Acid Dissociation
When an acid is mixed with water, it is said to dissociate. This is the reason we
use the term acid dissociation, expressed quantitatively with an acid dissociation
constant (Ka). The acid dissociation constant is nothing more than the
equilibriumconstant for the dissociation reactionof an acid in water. A molecule
of an acid when added to water, dissociates to form hydronium ion (H30+) and
its conjugate base (expressed generically as A") upon reaction with one water
molecule. Reaction 4.1 is an acid dissociation reaction in water.
HA(aq) + H2O0) ^ H30+(aq) + A'(aq)
Reaction 4.1
Equation 4.1 is the equilibrium expression (used to solve for the equilibrium
constant) for the acid dissociation reaction shown in Reaction 4.1.
K [H3Q+][A-] (41)
[HA]
Equations 4.2and 4.3are the equations for convertingbetweenpKa and Ka.
pKa = - log Ka (4.2)
Ka =10"PKa (4.3)
As the relative strength of an acid increases, its Ka increases and its pKa
decreases. This means that stronger acids have higher Ka values and lower pKa
values. The Ka and pKa of an acid depend on the strength of the acid, but not its
concentration.
Base Hydrolysis
When a base is mixed with water, it is said to undergo hydrolysis. This is the
reason we use the term base hydrolysis, expressed quantitatively with a base
hydrolysis constant (Kb). The base hydrolysis constant is nothing more than the
equilibrium constant for the hydrolysis reaction of a base in water. Each
molecule of a base when added to water, hydrolyzes one water molecule to form
hydroxide ion (OH") and its conjugate acid (expressed generically as HA).
Reaction 4.4 is a base hydrolysis reaction in water.
A'(aq) + H2O0) ^ HA(aq) + OH'(aq)
Reaction 4.4
Equation 4.4 is the equilibrium expression (used to solve for the equilibrium
constant) for the base hydrolysis reaction shown in Reaction 4.4.
[HA11QH-] (44)
[Al
Equations 4.5 and 4.6are the equations for convertingbetweenpKb and Kb-
pKb = - log Kb (4.5)
Kb=10"PKb (4.6)
As the relative strength of a base increases, its Kb increases and its pKb
decreases. This means that stronger bases have higher Kbvalues and lower pKb
values. As seen with the acids, the Kb and pKb of a base depend on the strength
of the base, but not its concentration.
Tying everything together for a conjugate set, we observe that as the acid gets
stronger, its conjugate base gets weaker. The overall correlation is shown in
Figure 4-1.
Overall Relationship
As acid strength T, Ka T, pKa i, conjugate base strength i, Kb I, pKb T
Figure 4-1
Determination of Reagent Strength
The strength of a reagent is determined strictly from the Ka (or pKa) and the Kb
(or pKb). Strength is a measure of the completeness of a reaction in water. Terms
that are sometimes used instead of "dissociation" are ionization and electrolytic
nature. The stronger the acid, the more electrolytic it is, because it conducts
electricity better due to the greater number of ions in solution. For water to
conduct electricity, there must be ions in solution to transfer the electron charge.
Because the equilibrium expressions are comparable, the values can be correlated
for a conjugate pair. At 25C, Equation 4.7 describes the relationship between
pKa and pKb-
pKa (HA) +pKb (A-) =14 (4.7)
The strength of a reagent is measured by its ability to carry out a reaction in
water. The stronger an acid, the more readily it dissociates into water. The
stronger the base, the more readily it undergoes hydrolysis when mixed with
water. Be careful not to confuse the concentration of a reactant with its strength.
A highly concentrated weak acid may have a lower pH than a strong acid in low
concentration.
Example 4.1
What can be said of the pKb associated with the conjugate base of the more
electrolytic acid of a pair of acids?
A. The pKb associated with the conjugate base of the more electrolytic acid is
greater than the pKb associated with the conjugate base of the less
electrolytic acid.
B. The pKb associated with the conjugate base of the more electrolytic acid is
smaller than the pKb associated with the conjugate base of the less
electrolytic acid.
C. The pKb associated with the conjugate base of the more electrolytic acid is
equal to the pKb associated with the conjugate base of the less electrolytic
acid.
D. The pKb values associated with the conjugate bases of two electrolytic acids
cannot be compared.
Solution
The acid that is more electrolytic is the acid that forms more ions, and thus is
better able to conduct electricity. The stronger acid dissociates more, and in
doing so, produces a greater ion concentration. The more electrolyticacid is the
stronger acid, and according to Figure 4-10, the stronger acid has a conjugate
base with a higher pKb(associated with the weaker conjugate base.) This makes
choice A the best answer.
Strong Acids
Strong acids are acids that dissociate fully when mixed with water. That is to say
that strong acids ionize completely into hydronium and a conjugate base when
added to water. Reactants convert completely into products, so the Ka value of a
strong acid is very large. It is safe to assume that an acid that does not have a
measurable Ka (i.e., it has a Ka that is too large to measure, making it greater than
1.0)is a strong acid. Reaction 4.5shows the dissociation of a strong acid, HX.
HX(aq) + H2OP) 1 H30+(aq) + X"(aq)
Reaction 4.5
Theequilibriumconstant for the acid dissociationreactionshown in Reaction 4.5
has a largenumerator and a minusculedenominator. As such, Ka is significantly
greater than 1.0, and pKais negativefor HX. Thisis summarizedin Figure4-2.
Ka=[H3Ol[>C]>>1
[HX]
pKa<0
Figure 4-2
It happens that all of the strong acids can be classified as either haloacids or
oxyacids. Sometypicalstrong acids are listedin Table 4.2.
Acid Name pKa
HCl Hydrochloric acid -7
HBr Hydrobromic acid -7
HI Hydroiodic acid -9
H2SO4 Sulfuric acid -9(pKai)
HNO3 Nitric acid -2
HCIO4 Perchloric acid -10
Table 4.2
Weak Acids
Weakacids are acids that only dissociate partially when dissolved into water.
They do not fully ionize into conjugate base and hydronium ion in water.
Reactants areconverted partially intoproducts, sodividing products byreactants
indicates a smallvaluefor Ka (avaluethat is lessthan1.0). Anyacid withKa less
than 1.0 is a weak acid. Reaction 4.1 shows the dissociation of a weak acid.
HA(aq) + H20(1) ^ ^ H30+(aq) + A"(aq)
Reaction 4.1
The equilibrium constant for the acid dissociation reaction shown inReaction 4.1
is less than 1.0. However, because our definitions must apply to biochemistry as
well as general chemistry, weak acids are classified as weak or very weak. For
instance, aspartic acid issaid tohave anacidic side chain, while the side chain of
leucine is considered to be neutral. We will define any acid with a Ka less than
10"14 (and thus a pKa greater than 14) as a very weak acid, meaning that the pKa
range fora weakacid is from 0to14. This is summarized inFigure 4-3.
=[H3Q+][A-];wherel >K >10-i4 . 0<pKa <14
[HA]
Figure 4-3
Terminology
241
General Chemistry
Acids and Bases Terminology
Weak acids are members of a number of different classifications, including
oxyacids of low oxidation state, one haloacid, carboxylic acids, alkyl
ammoniums, and phenols. Table 4.3 lists some typical weak acids and their
corresponding pKa values.
Acid Name
PKa
CI3CCO2H Trichloroacetic acid 0.64
CI2HCCO2H Dichloroacetic acid 1.27
H2SO3
Sulfurous acid 1.82 (pKai)
HCIO2
Chlorous acid 1.90
C1H2CC02H Chloroacetic acid 2.82
HF Hydrofluoric acid 3.15
HN02 Nitrous acid 3.41
HC02H Formic acid 3.74
H3CCO2H Acetic acid 4.74
2,4-(H3C)2C6H3NH3+
2,4-dimemylanilinium 5.08
4-H2NC6H4NH3+ 4-aminoanilinium 6.18
H2CO3
Carbonic acid 6.36 (pKai)
4-02NC6H4OH 4-nitrophenol 7.15
HCIO Hypochlorous acid 7.46
HBrO Hypobromous acid 8.72
NH4+ Ammonium 9.26
HCN Hydrogen cyanide 9.32
HIO Hypoiodous acid 10.66
Table 4.3
Very Weak Acids
Very weak acids dissociate less than water. The Ka value of a very weak acid is
less than 10~14, because products divided by reactants is less than 1.0 x 10"14
(Kw). Given thatwater is thought tobeneutral, anacid witha Ka less than10"14
(and pKa greater than 14) is a very weak acid. This is summarized in Figure 4-4.
[H30+][A-] r <10_14 >^
[HA]
Figure 4-4
Strength and the pK Scale
The same rules that apply to acids also apply to bases, except that hydrolysis,
rather than dissociation, is considered, and Kb replaces Ka. As the pK value for a
compound decreases, its strength increases (this is true for both acids and bases).
As a rule, the stronger the acid, the weaker its conjugate base. Strong acids have
very weak conjugate bases, and strong bases have very weak conjugate acids.
The odd sounding relationship is that weak acids have weak conjugate bases. It
may seem peculiar, but the conjugate base of a weak acid is most often a weak
base. You have seen this relationship before with buffers, although it is unlikely
that it was emphasized in your general chemistry courses.
Table 4.4 defines the strength of an acid and a base in relative terms.
Compound
Numerical
Data
Conjugate
Numerical
Data
Strong acid
(Fully dissociates in H20)
e.g.,HCl(PKa=-7)
Kal
pKa<0
Very weak base
(Hydrolyzes less than H20)
e.g./Cl-(pKb = 21)
Kb <10'14
pKb > 14
Weak acid
(Partly dissociates in H2O)
e.g.,RC02H(pKa = 3-5)
10'14 < Ka <1
0 < pKa < 14
Weak base
(Partly hydrolyzes in H20)
e.g., RC02-(pKb = 9-11)
10"14 < Kb < 1
0 < pKb < 14
Very weak acid
(Dissociates less than H20)
e.g.,CH4(PKa=49)
Ka <10"14
pKa > 14
Strong base
(Fully hydrolyzes in H20)
e.g.,CH3-(pKa = -35)
Kbl
pKb<0
Table 4.4
The strength of a reagent is measured by its ability to react in water. The more
readily an aciddissociates into water, the stronger it is. The more readilya base
undergoes hydrolysis, the stronger it is. Do not confuse the concentration of a
reactant with its strength. Both affect pH. Within conjugate pairs, to calculate
thestrengthof one reagent from the strength of itsconjugate, use Equation 4.7.
On the exam, one of the required skills will be determining what the question is
asking. In terms of acidand base chemistry, manyof the questions will be more
complicated versions of thebasicquestion of "which acid isstronger?"
Example 4.2
Whichof the following acids would yield the highest pH in water?
A. OAOMHCKaq)
B. 0.10 M HC104f^)
C. 0.10 M HBrfaq)
D. 0.10 M HC02H(aq)
Solution
The highest pHinwater results from thelowest hydronium concentration. This
is associated with the weakest acid, which in this case is carboxylic acid, choice
D. Choices A, B, and C are all strong acids that fully dissociate in water.
Example 4.3
Which of the following is the BEST choiceto titrate 0.10 MH3CNH2M?
A. 0.50 M KOHfoq)
B. 0.05 M NH3H;
C. 0.10 MHBr(aq)
D. 0.10MHCO2Hfa^
Solution
To ensure complete reaction, thetitrantmust always bea strong reagent. This
eliminates choice B(a weak base) and choice D (a weak acid). In this case, the
solution being titrated is a weakbasesolution(H3CNH2 is a weakbase), so
strong acid is added. Choice Ais a strongbaseand choice Cisa strongacid.
Terminology
General Chemistry
Acids and Bases Terminology
Example 4.4
Whichof the following acids dissociatesto the GREATEST extent when added to
water?
A. HNO3
B. HNO2
C. H3PO4
D. H2CO3
Solution
The most complete dissociation is associated with the strongest acid. The
strongest acid in this caseis nitric acid (HNO3), choiceA. These questions show
a few of the many ways relative acidity can be compared. In addition to
dissociation, acidities can also be compared by pKa values (lower is more acidic),
Ka values (larger is more acidic), pH values (lower is more acidic for equal acid
concentrations), electrolytic strength (more electrolytic is more acidic), and
reactivity with bases (stronger acids react with weaker bases).
Strong Bases
Strong bases, like strong acids, react completely when they are added to water.
Strong bases fully hydrolyze water, so they completely ionize when dissolved
into water. Reactants are completely converted into products; thus, the Kb value
of a strong base is much greater than 1.0, because products divided by reactants
is very large. Any base that does not have a measurable Kb (or has a Kb that is
much greater than 1.0) is a strong base. Reaction 4.6 shows the hydrolysis of the
strong base, KOH:
MOH(s) + H20(1) 1 M+(aq) + OH'(aq)
Reaction 4.6
The equilibrium constant for the base hydrolysis reaction shown in Reaction 4.6
has a large numerator and a minuscule denominator. Its value, therefore, is
significantly greater than 1.0. This results in a negative pKb value for a strong
base. This is summarized in Figure 4-5.
[M+][OH]
[MOH]
1 .-. pKb<0
Figure 4-5
It happens that all of the strong bases are either hydrides, hydroxides, alkoxides,
amides, or carbides. Some typical strong bases are listed in Table 4.5. No pKb
values are listed, because all of these bases when added to water will form
hydroxide.
Base Name
KH Potassium Hydride
NaOH Sodium Hydroxide
KOCH3 Potassium Methoxide
NaNH2 Sodium Amide
Li(CH2)3CH3 Butyl Lithium
Table 4.5
244 The Berkeley Review
Weak Bases
Weak bases, like weak acids, partially react when added to water. Weak bases
partially hydrolyze water, so they only partially ionize when dissolved into
water. Reactants are only partially converted into products, so dividing products
by reactants is placing a small number over a large number, leading to a small
value for Kb (less than one). As with the weak acids, because water is considered
to beneutral, we will define any base witha Kb less than 10"14 (and thus pKb
greater than 14) to be a base that is too weak to consider. This means that the
pKb range for a weak base is from 0 to 14. It should be safe to assume that any
base on the test for which you are given a Kb value (or pKb value), is likely to be
a weak base. A base with less than 100%hydrolysis is a weak base. Reaction 4.7
shows the hydrolysis of a weak base, A".
A-(aq) + H2OO) 1 HA(aq) + OH"(aq)
Reaction 4.7
The equilibrium constant for the base hydrolysis reaction shown in Reaction 4.7
has a small numerator and a larger denominator, making it less than 1.0. This
results in a small positive pKb value for a weak base. This is summarized in
Figure 4-6.
Kb =[HA][OH]; where 10"14 <Kb <1.\ 14 >pKb >0
[A"]
Figure 4-6
There are many different types of weak bases. Some typical weak bases are the
conjugate bases of the acids listed in Table4.3. In addition, other commonweak
bases include the carboxylates (RCO2"), the alkyl amines (RNH2), bicarbonate
(HCO3-), carbonate (C03*"), phosphate (PO43-), and phenoxides (C6H5O-).
Very Weak Bases
Very weak bases do not undergo any significant (or detectable) hydrolysis in
water. The Kb value for a very weak base isless than 10"14, because the products
divided byreactants isless than 1.0 x10"14 (Kw). Given that water isconsidered
tobeneutral, a basewitha Kb less than10"14 (and pKb greater than14) is a very
weak base. This is summarized in Figure 4-7.
Kb =[HA][OH-];whereKb <10_i4 .pKb >14
[A"]
Figure 4-7
Example 4.5
Which of the following compounds when added to water does NOT yield a
solution where hydroxide ion is in greater concentration than hydronium ion?
A. Na2C03
B. HC02Na
C. HNO3
D. C6H5ONa
Solution
A base is a compound that hydrolyzes water to generate hydroxide, and thus
form a solution where hydroxide is more concentrated than hydronium. This
question is in essenceasking, "Whichcompound is NOT a base?" Choice C, nitric
acid, is NOT a base, making choice C the answer.
Example 4.6
Which of the followingbases has the STRONGEST conjugate acid?
A. 0.50 M KOH
B. 0.50MLiN(CH3)2
C. 0.50 MNaH
D. 0.50MNaHCO3
Solution
The concentration does not affect the strength. No matter what concentration is
added to solution, the value of Kb is constant. This means that this question
simply addresses the strength of the compound. The strongest conjugate acid is
associated with the weakest base. In this question, choice A is a metal hydroxide,
choice Bis a metal amide, and choice C is a metal hydride. Choices A, B, and C
are strong bases. The only weak base is the bicarbonate base, choice D.
Example 4.7
Which of the following is the BEST choice to titrate 25 mL of 0.10M HC02H(aq)?
A. 0.10 M KOH
B. 0.05MH3CNH2
C. 0.10 M HBr
D. 0.05MH3CCO2H
Solution
To ensure complete reaction, the titrant must be a strong reagent. This eliminates
choice B (a weak base) and choice D (a weak acid). In this case, the solution
being titrated is a weak acid solution (HCO2H is a weak acid), so strong base
must be added. Choices C is a strong acid, so the only strong base is choice A,
KOH.
General CliemiStry Acids and Bases Types ofAcids and Bases
Haloacids
The haloacids are the series of HX acids, whose Xrepresents a halogen. The
acidity of haloacids is predictable based on the size of the halide ion. The larger
the halide, the more acidic the haloacid. This means that HI > HBr > HCl > HF.
This trend in acidity is attributed to the increased stability of the conjugate base
as it increases in size. The negative charge is more diffuse on the larger anion.
The more diffuse, the less basic the anion, and thus the more acidic its conjugate
acid. A second, and perhaps easier, way to view the acidity of haloacids involves
estimating their bond strengths. The longer the bond, the weaker the bond, as a
general rule in chemistry. As you descend the halogen column in the periodic
table, halogen size increases. As halogen size increases, the bond length of an H-
X bond must also increase. As the bond length increases, the bond strength
decreases, and the H+ can be removed more readily. This approach works even
though bond dissociation energies are determined from homolytic bond
breaking, as opposed to the heterolytic cleavage associated with acid-base
chemistry. Ions (H+ and A") are the result of heterolytic bond breaking, but the
correlation between bond strength and acidity still holds for haloacids. Figure 4-
8 summarizes the effect of halide size on acidity.
HF
HCI
H Br
H 1
Descending a column:
Halogen size increases
.*. Bond length increases
.'. Bond strength decresases
/. Dissociation increases
/. Acidity increases
Figure 4-8
Example 4.8
Which of the following conclusions can be made concerning the relative acidities
of haloacids?
A. Acid strength increases with increasing electron affinity of the halide.
B. Acid strength increases with increasing electronegativity of the halide.
C. Acidstrength increases with increasing ionicradius of the halide.
D. Acidstrength increaseswith decreasingisotopicabundanceof the halide.
Solution
As you descend a column in the periodic table (such as the halogen column),
acidity increases due to the increase in atomic size. The anion formed upon
deprotonation is more stable as it increases in size, so acidity increases as the
column is descended. Electron affinity and electronegativity decrease as the
column is descended, and they have no bearing on acidity. Isotopic abundance
and atomic mass do not affect acidity, either, so choice C is the best answer.
An important fact to recall about haloacids is that they are all strong acids, except
for hydrofluoric acid (HF). HF has a pKa of roughly 3.3, so it does not fully
dissociate when added to water. As we have observed in studying other topics
related to the properties of this chemical family, this weaker acidity is attributed
to the smaller atomic radius of fluorine relative to the other halogens.
General Chemistry
Acids and Bases
Example 4.9
Whichof the following acidshas the largest Ka value?
A. HF
B. HCl
C. HBr
D. H2S
Solution
The largest Ka value is associated with the strongest acid. Because Br is the
largest anion of thehalogens listed, it dissociates from the protonmost readily.
This makes HBr the most acidic, so you should pick choice C. Choices D (H2S)
can be eliminated, because S is of roughly comparable size with, but less
electronegative than, CI. This meansthat HCl is a stronger acid than H2S.
Within a period (row) of theperiodic table, it is electronegativity that dictates the
strength of an acid, not atomic radius. A prime example of this idea is the
relationship between ammonia (HNH2), water (HOH), and hydrofluoric
acid (HF). Thestrongest acid of the three compounds is the hydrofluoric acid,
because fluorine is more electronegative than both nitrogen and oxygen. The
atomicsizedoes not changethat noticeably between N, O, and F, because theyall
have the same valencelevel (n = 2). The periodic trend that most changes is the
electronegativity.
Oxyacids (Non-metal Hydroxides and Non-metal Oxides)
Oxyacidsare alsoan acid type to be familiar with. They differ fromhaloacids, in
that the hydrogendissociates froman oxygen rather than a halide. In an oxyacid,
the acidic hydrogenis bonded to an oxygen, whichin turn is bonded to a central
atom (which in some cases can be a halogen). The simplest rule is that the more
oxygen atoms there are bonded to the central atom, the more the oxygen atoms
withdraw electron density from the central atom, and thus the more acidic the
oxyacid. This can be summarized as the resonance effect (which is typically
classified as an organic chemistry concept). Unlike the haloacids, where size is
important, in oxyacids, the electronegativity of the central atom is most
important. As a general rule, for every additional oxygen on the central atom,
the pKa of the acid will drop by approximately 5 pKa units. Table 4.6 lists some
typical oxyacids.
Oxyacid Name Oxyacid Name
HNO2 Nitrous acid HNO3 Nitric acid
H2SO3 Sulfurous acid H2SO4 Sulfuric acid
H3PO3 Phosphorous acid H3PO4
Phosphoric acid
H2CO3 Carbonic acid H02CC02H Oxalic acid
HCIO Hypochlorous acid HCIO2
Chlorous acid
HCIO3 Chloric acid HCIO4 Perchloric acid
HBrO Hypobromous acid HBr02
Bromous acid
HBr03 Bromic acid HBr04 Perbromic acid
HIO Hypoiodous acid HI02
Iodous acid
HIO3 Iodic acid HIO4
Periodic acid
Table 4.6
When comparing the relative strength of oxyacids, the number of excess oxygen
atoms and the electronegativity of the central atom must both be considered. For
carbonic acid, there is an excess oxygen count of one. What is meant by excess
oxygencount is the number of oxygen atoms exceedingthe number of hydrogen
atoms. The excess oxygen count often turns out to be the number of oxygen
atoms double-bonded to central atom. The more rc-bonds to oxygen from the
central atom, the more resonance withdrawal from the central atom, and thus the
more acidic the compound. This explains why H2SO4 is a stronger acid than
H2SO3. When two compounds have the same excess oxygen count, the next
factor to consider is the electronegativity of the central atom. The more
electronegativethe central atom, the more it withdraws electrondensity from the
acidic proton, increasing the acidity. This is in essence the inductive effect.
Sulfur is more electronegative than carbon, so H2SO3 is a stronger acid than
H2CO3. As you learned in organic chemistry, the resonance effect is greater than
the inductive effect.
Example 4.10
Which of the following acids has the LARGEST pKa value?
A. HC102
B. HI02
C. HCIO3
D. HIO3
Solution
The largest pKa value is associated with the weakest oxyacid, which is associated
with the acid having the smallest number of excess oxygens and the least
electronegative central atom. Choices C and D are eliminated, because they
contain two excess oxygens each. Choice B is better than choice A, because they
both have one excess oxygen, but iodine is less electronegative than chlorine.
This question could have easily asked for the strongest acid. It is important to
realize that most questions will be asking for either the strongest acid or the
weakest acid among the answer choices. The wording may be in reference to
conjugate bases, electrolytic nature, ionizability, Ka values, pKa values, pH
values, or reactivity. The secret is to do enough practice questions so that you
encounter all the different possibilities at least a few times before your test.
As a point of interest, oxyacids result from the hydration of non-metal oxides.
This is the cause of acid rain, where most often nitrogen oxides and sulfur oxides
(Lewis acids) react with moisture in the air to form Bransted-Lowry acids. A
lowering in pH for rainfall may also be observed in environments rich in carbon
dioxide (which hydrates to become carbonic acid). Reaction 4.8 shows the
hydration of carbon dioxide, while Reaction 4.9 shows the hydration of sulfur
trioxide.
C02(g) + H20(1) ^
non-metal oxide
Reaction 4.8
S02(g) + H20(1) ^=
non-metal oxide
Reaction 4.9
H2C03(aq)
oxyacid
H2S03(aq)
oxyacid
General Chemistry Acids and Bases Types of Acids and Bases
Non-metal oxides act as Lewis acids (electron-pair acceptors), while their
hydrated counterparts (non-metal hydroxides, commonly known as oxyacids) act
as Bronsted-Lowry acids. Both SO3 and H2SO4 react with hydroxide to form
HS04", so theyare equivalent in terms of strength. Thedifference is that SO3 is
hydrated to become H2SO4. By a similar reaction, sulfur dioxide (SO2) forms
H2SO3 (sulfurous acid) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) forms both HNO2 (nitrous
acid) and HNO3 (nitric acid). These are major components of acid rain. Acid
rain is a combination of rain and air-borne pollutants, such as sulfur oxides and
nitrogen oxides. It is often treated with steam to convert from the Lewis acid
form (non-metal oxide) intotheBransted-Lowry form (non-metal hydroxide) and
then neutralized with calcium oxide.
Metal Hydroxides and Metal Oxides
Just as non-metal oxides are Lewis acidsand non-metalhydroxides are Bronsted-
Lowry acids, metal oxides are Lewis bases and metal hydroxides are Bronsted-
Lowry bases. You should be familiar with these general classifications. Metal
oxides are basic and will form metal hydroxides when treated with water. A
prime example is calcium oxide (CaO), which forms calcium hydroxide
(Ca(OH)2) whenhydrated. Reaction 4.10 shows theLewis acid-base reaction ofa
metal oxide and a non-metal oxide, while Reaction 4.11 shows the Bransted-
Lowry acid-base reaction of a metal hydroxide and a non-metal hydroxide. The
reactants in Reaction 4.11 are the hydrated formof the reactants in Reaction4.10.
S03(g) + CaO(s) ^ " CaS04(s)
non-metal oxide metal oxide neutral salt
Lewis acid Lewis base
Reaction 4.10
H2S04(aq) + Ca(OH)2(aq) ^ fc Ca2+(aq) +S042"(aq) + 2H20(1)
non-metal hydroxide metal hydroxide cation anion
Bren-Lowry acid Brem-Lowry base
Reaction 4.11
Organic Acids
Let us considerthree types of organic acids: carboxylic acids, phenols, and alkyl
ammonium salts. It is importantthat you recognize thesefunctional groups and
knowtheir pKa ranges. Forcarboxylic acidsand alkyl ammoniums, you should
knowtheir organic pKa rangeand their range in aminoacids. In carboxylic acids
and phenols, the protoncomesoff of an oxygenthat is involved in resonance. In
an alkyl ammonium cation, the proton comes offof a nitrogen. Figure4-9 shows
a generic carboxylic acidand its pKa range, a genericphenol and its pKa range,
and a generic alkyl ammonium cation and its pKa range. TheAAin parenthesis
refers to amino acid terminals, while the Rdesignation refers to an alkyl group.
:o: ^^ H H
\
N
R OH R H
Carboxylic acid *QH Alkyl ammonium cation
pKa(R) =3-5 Phenol pKa(R) =9-U
pKa(AA) =2-3 PKa =9-5"10-5 PKa(AA) =9-10
Figure 4-9
General ChemiStry Acids and Bases Types ofAcids and Bases
Polyprotic Acids
Polyprotic acids are acids which yield multiple equivalents of hydronium
(H30+) when treated with a base. The three most common examples from
general chemistry are carbonic acid (H2CO3), sulfuric acid (H2SO4), and
phosphoric acid (H3PO4). In addition to these three acids, there are also common
amino acids that qualify as either diprotic (no active proton on the side chain) or
triprotic (an active proton on the side chain). Concentrations of polyprotic acids
are often given in terms of normality (N). Normality is defined as moles of
equivalents per liter solution. This is to say that a 1.0molar diprotic acid solution
would be listed as "2.0 normal," because there are two equivalents of acid.
Example 4.11
Which of the following acid solutions is 3.0 N?
A. 1.00 M alanine
B. 1.50 M carbonic acid
C. 1.50 M phosphoric acid
D. 1.25 M sulfuric acid
Solution
Normality (N) is found by multiplying the molarity of an acid by the number of
protons per molecule. In choice A, alanine (H3NCH(CH3)C02H) is diprotic, so
the normality is 1.00 x 2, which equals 2.0 N. Choice A is eliminated. In choice B,
carbonic acid (H2CO3) is diprotic, so the normality is 1.50x 2, which equals 3.0
N. Choice B is the correct answer. In choice C, phosphoric acid (H3PO4) is
triprotic, so the normality is 1.50x 3, which equals 4.5 N. Choice C is eliminated.
In choice D, sulfuric acid (H2SO4) is diprotic, so the normality is 1.25 x 2, which
equals 2.5 N. Choice D is eliminated.
Polyprotic acids have multiple pKa values, one for each dissociable proton. By
definition, the first proton removed is more acidic than the second one removed,
so pKai is always lower than pKa2- Some difficulty may arise when you consider
the pKa values of a polyprotic acid and its conjugate base. For a diprotic acid
such as H2CO3, the first proton removed corresponds to the second proton
gained by the conjugate base. H2CO3 and HCO3" are a conjugate pair with pKai
and pKb2 summing to 14. The full dissociation of carbonic acid is shown in
Reaction 4.12 and Reaction 4.13.
PKai
H2C03(aq) + H20(1) * * H30+(aq) + HC03"(aq)
PKb2
Reaction 4.12
HC03"(aq) + H20(1) * *2 " H30+(aq) +C032"(aq)
PKbl
Reaction 4.13
Determining the amount of base needed to neutralize a polyprotic acid is a
typical question from general chemistry. While the MCAT does not emphasize
solving mathematical problems, understanding the setup is still important,
because understanding equivalents can help to determine the pH of mixtures.
General Chemistry Acids and Bases Types of Acids and Bases
Example 4.12
How many mL of 0.40 MNaOH are required to neutralize 100 mL 0.25 M
H2S04?
A. 62.5 mL
B. 80.0 mL
C 100.0 mL
D. 125.0 mL
Solution
In order to neutralize an acid, an equal mole quantity of hydroxide must be
added to thehydronium source. The general relationship is shown in Equation
4.8.
molesOH" =molesH+ .-. (Moh-)(Voh-) = (Mh+)(Vh+) (4.8)
Substituting intoEquation 4.8 yields thefollowing results:
(MrjH-XVoH-) = (MH+)(VH+)
(0.40 M)(V0H-) = 2 x (0.25 M)(100 mL)
VoH- =2x(-25M)xl00mL =(-50) x100 mL =125 mL
V0.40M/ V0.40/
Choice D is the best answer. Choice A would have been the result of your
calculation, if you had forgotten to multiply the molarity by the number of
equivalents, a common mistake withthese typesof questions.
Example 4.13
How many milliliters of0.60 MHCl arerequired toneutralize 3.0 grams CaC03?
A. 50 mL
B. 100 mL
C. 200 mL
D. 300 mL
Solution
According tothebalanced equation, twomolecules ofHClarerequired for every
one molecule of CaC03- The balanced equation is shown below:
CaC03(s) + 2HCl(aq) ^ * CaCl2(aq) + C02(g) + H20(1)
The mathematical setup is:
moles OH" =2 xmoles CO32- = (Mh+)(Vh+)
2x 3-0g =(0.60 M)(VH+)
1007mole
0.06 moles = (0.60M)(Vh+) '. Vh+ = 0.10 L = 100 mL
Choice B is the best answer. Choice A would have been the result of your
calculation, if you had forgotten to multiply the molarity by the number of
equivalents, a common mistake with thesetypes of questions.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 252 The BerkeleyReview
General ChemiStry Acids and Bases Types of Acids and Bases
Example 4.14
Citricacid (C6Hg07) has three dissociable protons with pKa values of 3.14,4.79,
and 5.20. Which of the following solutionswould have thelowestpH values?
A. 50mL0.10 Mcitric acid(aq) + 75mL0.20 MNaOH(aq)
B. 25mL 0.10M citric acid(aq) + 50 mL 0.10M NaOH(aq)
C. 25 mL 0.20 M citric acid(aq) + 75 mL 0.20M NaOH(aq)
D. 50 mL 0.20M citric acid(aq) + 50 mL 0.10M NaOH(aq)
Solution
For questions involving mixtures, it is important to think of the reagents in terms
of equivalents. The lowest pH belongs to the solution that is most acidic. The
most acidic solution is the solution where the fewest equivalents of base relative
to citric acid have been added. In choice A, the NaOH(aq) solution is 1.5 times
the volume and twice the concentration of the citric acid solution, so there are
three equivalents of NaOH(aq). In choice B, the NaOH(aq) solution is double the
volume of the citric acid solution and of equal concentration, so there are two
equivalents of NaOH(aq). In choice C, the NaOH(aq) solution is three times the
volume of the citric acid solution and of equal concentration, so there are three
equivalents of NaOH(aq). In choice D, the NaOH(aq)solution is of equal volume
and half the concentration of the citric acid solution, so there is only one-half of
an equivalent of NaOH(aq). The fewest equivalents are found in choice D, so
choice D is the best answer.
General Chemistry Acids and Bases Calculating pH
Calculating pH
Determining pH
Asolution's acidity ismeasured interms ofhydronium concentration ([H30+l)
using the pH scale. The pH value ofasolution isdetermined using Equation 4.9.
pH=-log [H30+] (4.9)
By manipulating Equation 4.9 soas toisolate hydronium concentration, Equation
4.10 can be derived.
[H30+1 =10"PH (4.10)
Because neutral water has an H30+ concentration of 10"7 M, due to the
autoionizationof water, neutral water has a pH of 7.0. Acidicsolutions have pH
values less than 7.0, whilebasicsolutionshave pH values greater than 7.0. There
are no limits to the pH scale other than those imposed by the strength and
concentration of the acid or base in solution.
Onthetest, youcan almost assume that they will have questions about bothpH
andpOH for anaqueous solution. Just asEquation 4.9 defines pH, Equation 4.11
defines pOH.
pOH=-log[OH"] (4.11)
This means that in order to calculate pH or pOH, it is necessary to determine the
H30+ concentration or the OH" concentration. Once this is accomplished, it is
simply log math (negative logs, actually). There areno calculators allowed on
this test. The volume of a solution does not matter in determining pH; only the
concentration is important. Equation 4.12 may be used to interconvert between
pH and pOH in an aqueous solution at 25C
pH +pOH=14 (4.12)
Example 4.15
What is the pH of a solution where the hydroxide concentration is 106 times
greater than the hydronium concentration?
A. 4
B. 6
C. 10
D. 13
Solution
Because hydroxide is in greater concentration than hydronium, the solutionis
basic, so thepHmust be greater than7. This eliminates choices Aand B. The
trick hereis to use thelogscale correctly. Because the concentrations differ by a
factor of106, the pHandpOH differ bylog 106, which is 6. If thepHis 10, then
thepOHis 4, which aredifferent by 6. If thepH is 13, then the pOHis 1, and the
difference is 12. This means that the best answer is choice C. This is a tricky
question where understanding the conversion between the log scale and
concentration scale is pertinent. Most students choose D, because they add 6 to
the neutral pH of 7. It is important to recognize why choice D is a typical
mistake.
General Chemistry
Acids and Bases
Log Review
Because pHis based on logs, it is helpful todo a quick review of logs. When you
multiply numbers, you add their logs. When you divide numbers, you subtract
their logs. You can solve for any log given that log 2 =0.3 and log 3 =0.48.
Drawn inTable4.7are examples of how to solve for a logvalue.
Number Mathematical Calculation Log Value
2 Given value 0.301
3 Given value 0.477
4 Log 4 = Log (2x2) = log 2 + log 2 = .301 + .301 = .602
0.602
5 Log 5 = Log (10 * 2) = log 10 - log 2 = 1.00- .301 = .699 0.699
6 Log 6 = Log (3x2) = log 3 + log 2 = .477 + .301 = .778 0.778
7 Log7 is approximated as being closer to log 8 than log 6 0.845 .01
8 Log 8 = Log (2 x 2 x 2) = 3 (log 2) = 3(.301) = .903 0.903
9 Log 9 = Log (3 x 3) = log 3 + log 3 = .477 + .477 = .954 0.954
0.33 Log 0.33 = Log (1 * 3) = log 1 - log 3 = 0 - .477 -0.477
0.50 Log 0.50 = Log (1 * 2) = log 1 - log 2 = 0 - .301 -0.301
1.20 Log 1.2 = Log (6*5) = log 6 - log 5 = .778 - .699 = .079 0.079
1.25 Log 1.25 = Log (5*4) = log 5 - log 4 = .699 - .602 = .097 0.097
1.33 Log 1.33 = Log (4*3) = log 4 - log 3 = .602 - .477 = .125 0.125
1.40 Log 1.40 = Log (7*5) = log 7 - log 5 .845 - .699 = .146 0.146
1.50 Log 1.50 = Log (3*2) = log 3 - log 2 = .477 - .301 = .176 0.176
1.60 Log 1.60 = Log (8*5) = log 8 - log 5 = .903 - .699 = .204 0.204
1.67 Log 1.67 = Log (5 * 3) = log 5 - log 3 = ..699- .477 = .222 0.222
1.75 Log 1.75 = Log (7*4) = log 7 - log 4 .845 - .602= .243 0.243
1.80 Log 1.80 = Log (9*5) = log 9 - log 5 = .954 - .699 = .255 0.255
Table 4.7
Logcalculations should be carried out only to the level of approximation. Do not
forget that log of 10* = x, so knowing the power of 10 that some quantity is can
be a useful hint when selecting the correct log value. Often, only one answer
choice relates to the correct power of 10, which saves a great deal of time spent in
calculating. All sorts of shortcuts and tricks will be presented during the
following sample problems. Before moving on in this section, however, make a
concerted effort to work through Table 4.7 and understand thoroughly how to
estimate log values.
Determining pH for Strong Reagents
Calculating the pH for strong acid and strong base solutions is based on the
concept of full dissociation. The calculation of the pH for a strong reagent
follows an easy pattern. For a strong acid, Equation 4.9 is employed, where the
concentration of the strong acid ([HX]) is substituted for the concentration of
hydronium (IH30+J). For a strong base, Equation 4.11 is employed, where the
concentration of the strong base ([MOH]) is substituted for the concentration of
hydroxide ([OH")). Calculating pH and pOH from concentrations is most easily
done when the concentration is written in scientific notation. This is because
taking the log of a number in scientific notation is more convenient in terms of
bookkeeping than taking the log of a number in standard notation.
Calculating pH
Example 4.16
What is the pH of 0.0020 MHCl(aq)?
A. 2.00
B. 2.70
C 3.00
D. 7.00
Solution
Determining an exact numerical value involves calculations. The pH for any
solution isdefined aspH=- log [H30+], sofor astrong acid, thepHis- log [HX].
It is best to use scientific notation for the concentration.
pH=- log (2xl0-3)
pH=-(log 2+log lO'3) =-log 2-log 10"3
pH = -log2-(-3) = 3-log2
pH = 3-0.3 = 2.7
The correct answer is choice B. Choice D should have been eliminated, because
the solution is acidic, so pH is less than 7.00. Choices A and C could also have
been eliminated, ifyou noted that thelogvalues endedin ".00". For a logtobea
whole number, the concentration must be a power of ten. The fact that the
concentration was .002 tells us that the log could not be a whole number. From
thisexample, youshould derive a shortcut for usein thefuture. You mighttake
notice that the - log of2x10"3 isequal to3- log 2,sowhy not remember this and
skipa few steps inthefuture. Use therelationship: - log(zx10_y) =y- logz.
This shortcut applies to all negative log calculations, including the conversion
from Ka to pKa. For instance, the pKa for aweak acid with Ka equal to 4.1 x10"6
is6- log4.1. This value canbeestimated tobegreater than5.0 (which is equal to
6 - log 10), but less than5.5 (which is equal to 6 - log3). A range of 5.0 to 5.5
shouldbe good enough to choose the correct answer from four choices. With
exact numerical questions on the MCAT, your goal should be to narrow the
answer choice range enough sothat threewronganswers maybe eliminated.
Example 4.17
What is the pH of 100mL of 0.030 MHBr(aq)?
A. 1.30
B. 1.52
C. 2.30
D. 7.00
Solution
The volume of the solution does not affect the pH, unless another solution is
added. Using the shortcut, the pH is found as follows:
pH =- log (3 x10"2) =2- log 3
pH = 2 - 0.48 = 1.52
The correct answer is choice B. Choice D should have been eliminated, because
the solution is acidic, so pH is less than 7.00. Choices Aand Ccould alsohave
beeneliminated, if you noted that the log values ended in ".30". This would
come from logarithmic insights.
Example 4.18
What is the pOH of 0.050 M KOHfa^?
A. 1.30
B. 1.70
C. 12.30
D. 12.70
Solution
The pOH of a basic solution is found in a manner similar to getting the pH of an
acidic solution. Using the shortcut, the pOH is found as follows:
pOH =- log(5 xlO'2) =2- log 5
pOH = 2-0.7= 1.30
The correct answer is choice A. Choices C and D should have been eliminated,
because the solution is basic, so pH is greater than 7.00, and therefore pOH is less
than 7.00. The pH of the solution can be found using pH = 14 - pOH, where
pOH = 14-1.30 = 12.70.
Example 4.19
What is the pH of 200 mL of 0.00391 M KOH(aq)?
A. 2.41
B. 2.61
C. 11.39
D. 11.59
Solution
This question would seem to be quite difficult at first glance; but if you follow
the rules, it is easy. Because KOH is a strong base, it will fully dissociate when
added to water. Plugging values into our shortcut method yields the following:
pOH =- log (3.91 xlO'3) =3- log 3.91
3 - log 10 < 3 - log 3.91 < 3 - log 3 .-. 2 < pOH < 2.5
If 2 < pOH < 2.5, then 12 > pH > 11.5
The correct answer is choice D. Choices A and B should have been eliminated,
because the solution is basic, so pH is greater than 7.00. Choice C is eliminated,
because it does not fit into the range for the correct number. Some of you may
have chosen to approximate 3.91 as 4, and solved accordingly. This method is
fine, too.
You should be able to determine pH or pOH for strong compounds in less than
fifteen seconds. While the MCAT does not offer up many calculation questions,
if you are fortunate enough to get a pH calculation question, you should finish it
quickly, and carry the time you save over to more difficult questions.
General Chemistry Acids and Bases Conjugate Pairs
Determining pH for Weak Reagents
Because weak acids and weak bases do not fully dissociate, it is necessary to use
the Ka and Kb values to determine their H30+(aq) and OH"(aq) concentrations.
Ka and Kb are equilibrium constants for the respective compounds in water.
Equation 4.7 shows the relationship between the pKa and pKb for anacid and its
conjugate base. Equation 4.13 is based on the relationship of equilibrium
constants to Kw (the dissociation constant for water).
KaxKb =10-14 (4.13)
According to Reaction 4.1, weak acids dissociate intohydronium and conjugate
base when added to water. Equal parts of conjugate base and hydronium ion
form. To determine the [H30+], the dissociation reaction and the dissociation
constant (Ka) must be employed. This too, like the strong acids, is a systematic
process tomaster, in the course of which weshall discover another shortcut. To
understandthe process, consider someconcentration of a weakacid(HA) witha
pKa between 2and 12. The setupfor thereaction isshownin Figure 4-10.
Reaction: HA(aq) H20(1) H30+(aq) A"(aq)
Initially: [HA]jnit excess negligible 0
Shift: ix ix +x x
Equilibrium: [HA]init-x irrelevant x x
Figure 4-10
Substituting values into the acid dissociation expression leads to Equation 4.14,
whichcan be applied if the concentration is greater than the Ka, and if pKa falls
between 2 and 12. Equation 4.14 does not generate precise answers, but it does
give a very close approximation.
Given: [Al =H30+], then Ka =1^ JH30+][H30+] JH^l
J [HA] IHA] [HA]
JH30+] . [h30+]2 =Ka x[HA] .-. [H30+] =VKax[HA]
[HA]
Plugging this valueintoEquation 4.9 for [H30+], yields Equation 4.14
pH=-log VKax[HA] (4.14)
Equation 4.14 canbe further manipulated to generate Equation 4.15 (theshortcut
equation), which will save you time, once it is understood and mastered.
pH =-log VKax[HA] =- log/Ka" +(- log V[HA])
pH =-log(Ka)V2 +(-log [HA]V2) =-1 log Ka -1log [HA]
pH =-i log Ka -1 log [HA] =1pKa -1 log [HA]
pH =1pKa -1 log [HA] (4.15)
2 2
Toensure that Equation 4.15 makes conceptual sense, let's consider the pH of a
weak acidsolution. If you add more acid, the pH should decrease. According to
Equation 4.15, increasing [HA] lowers the pH. Stronger acids have more
dissociation, so they should formsolutions of a lower pH. Equation 4.15 shows
thisby including thepKa term. Getting thepHof a weakacid shouldbe easy.
vieneral ChemiStry Acids and Bases Calculating pH
Example 4.20
What is the pH of 1.00M HF(aq) with pKa = 3.32?
A. 0.50
B. 1.66
C. 2.00
D. 6.64
Solution
This question is made easy by applying Equation 4.15. Two requirements for
Equation 4.15 to work are that: 1) the weak acid concentration must be greater
than the Ka and 2) the pKa must lie between 2 and 12. Both of these criteria are
met, so Equation 4.15 may be applied.
pH =1 pKa -1 log [HA] =1(3.32) -1log 1.0 =1.66 -1(0) =1.66
2 2 2 2 2
The correct answer is choice B. Because [HA] is 1.0M, the pH is half of the pKa.
If the acid concentration is 0.10 M, then the pH is half of the pKa + 0.5. This
means that the pH of a weak acid can be estimated quickly.
Example 4.21
What is the pH of 0.07562 M HC02H with a pKa of 3.642?
A. 2.259
B. 2.383
C. 2.759
D. 2.883
Solution
The pH can be estimated from one-half of the pKa. If the acid concentration were
1.00M, then the pH would be 1.821 (half of the pKa). If the acid concentration
were 0.10 M, then the pH would be 2.321 (half of the pKa + 0.5). If the acid
concentration were 0.010 M, then the pH would be 2.821 (half of the pKa + 1.0).
The concentration falls between 0.10 M and 0.010M, so the pH must fall between
2.321 and 2.821. This eliminates choices A and D. Because the concentration is
just less than 0.10 M, the pH should be slightly higher than 2.321, making choice
B the best answer.
You should not expect numbers to be this difficult. But given that these numbers
now can be handled without difficulty, any weak acid pH calculation can be
made easy. The answer to a question like this one in a multiple-choice exam can
be approximated quickly and simply using this technique. The answer choices
may be considered as other expressions of.
A. 1.821+0.438
B. 2.321+0.062
C. 2.321 + 0.438
D. 2.821 + 0.062
Equation 4.16 is the equivalent equation for the pOH of a weak base solution. It
is derived in the same fashion as Equation 4.15, but Kbreplaces Ka, [A"] replaces
[HA], and base hydrolysis is considered instead of acid dissociation.
pOH =1 pKb -1 log [A-] (4.16)
Example 4.22
What is the pH of 0.20 Msodium propionate, if ithas Kb =7.2 x10"10?
A. Less than 3
B. Between 3 and 7
C. Between 7 and 11
D. Greater than 11
Solution
Thesolution is basic, so the pHis greaterthan 7.0, eliminating choices Aand B.
Theweakbaseconcentration is greaterthanKb, and pKbfalls between 2 and 12,
soEquation 4.16 can beapplied. The pKb for thebase is 10 - log7.2, which is
slightlymore than 9. Agood estimateis 9.2.
The pOHcanbe estimated from one-half of the pKb- If the baseconcentration
were 1.00 M, then the pOH would be 4.6 (half of the pKb). If the base
concentration were 0.10 M, then the pOH would be 5.1 (half of the pKb + 0.5).
The concentration is 0.20 M, so the pOH lies between 4.6 and 5.1. This means
that pHliesbetween 8.9 and9.4, makingchoice Cthe best answer.
General ChemiStry Acids and Bases Conjugate Pairs
Conjugate Pairs
A conjugate pair consists of an acid and a base that exchange one proton; one
gains a proton and the other member of the pair loses that proton. An acid when
deprotonated forms its conjugate base, and a base when protonated forms its
conjugate acid. Reaction 4.1 and Reaction 4.4show that HA and A"are a generic
conjugate pair. The charge difference between the acid and the base in a
conjugate pair is +1.
Example 4.23
The conjugate base of HC03" is which of the following?
A. C032"
B. H2CO3
C. CO2
D. HC02"
Solution
A conjugate base is formed when an acid loses one proton. This eliminates
choice B, which happens to be the conjugate acid of HCO3". The conjugate base
of HCO3" is CO32", so choice Ais the best answer. Thedissociation reaction of
bicarbonate into hydronium and carbonate is shown below:
HC03"(aq) + H2CKI) ^ H30+(aq) + C032"(aq)
acid conjugate base
Example 4.24
Which of the following pairs of compounds is NOT a conjugate pair?
A. NH3/NH4+
B. H2C03/HC03"
C. H2SO3/HSO3-
D. P0437H2P04-
Solution
In choice A, NH4+ is formed when a proton is added to NH3, so NH4"1" and NH3
differ by one proton. This makes them a conjugate pair, and it eliminates choice
A. In choice B, H2C03 is formed when a proton is added to HC03", so H2CO3
and HCO3" differ by one proton. This makes them a conjugate pair, and it
eliminates choice B. In choice C, H2SO3 is formed when a proton is added to
HS03", so H2S03 and HS03" differ by one proton. Thismakes thema conjugate
pair, and it eliminates choice C. Choice Disthe best answer because, PO43" and
H2PO4" differ by two protons, so they do not constitute a conjugate pair.
Recognizing conjugate pairs should be effortless. Knowing how to apply the
concept of a conjugate pair to solving problems is the more useful ability.
Typical Conjugate Pairs
Typical conjugate pairs either areobserved inbiological examples or arecommon
laboratory buffer systems. There aremany weak acids andconjugate bases, soit
is a good idea for you to recall classes of compounds, rather than specific
compounds. Common conjugate pairs where both components areweak include
thecarboxylic acids/carboxylates (RCO2H/RCO2"), thealkyl ammoniums/alkyl
amines (RNH3+/RNH2), and phenols/phenoxides (C6H5OH/C6H5O-) Specific
pairs that arelikely toappear ontheMCAT with great frequency arecarbonic
acid/bicarbonate (H2C03/HC03") and phosphoric acid/dihydrogen phosphate
(H3P04/H2PC>4"), due to their presence in physiological systems. It is a good
idea to know the acid-base properties of compounds that are common in
physiology.
The distribution within a conjugate pair is dictated by the pH of the solution.
Theconjugate pair favors theconjugate acidform in the presence of hydronium.
Theconjugate pair favors the conjugate baseformin the presence of hydroxide.
The exact distribution is determined by the relationship between pH of the
solution and thepKa of theconjugate acid. Figure 4-11 shows this relationship.
IfpH>pKa, thesolution isbasic relative tothecompound, soit is deprotonated.
IfpH<pKa/ thesolution isacidic relative tothecompound, soit is protonated.
Figure 4-11
The pH refers to the surrounding solution (environment) in which the
compounds exist. The pKa refers to the conjugate acid that exists in solution.
Thecompound responds tothepHof thesolution. Because of the importance of
relatingpH to pKa, common pKa ranges should be known. SomecommonpKa
ranges are shownin Figure 4-9. Carboxylic acids have pKa values of 2 to 5. In
amino acids, the carboxyl terminal has a pKa between 2 and 3. Because of the
lowpKa valuerelative to physiological pH, the physiological form of carboxylic
acids is the deprotonated form. Ammonium and alkyl ammoniums have pKa
values of 9 to 11. In amino acids, the amino terminal has a pKa between 9 and 10.
Because of the high pKa value relative to physiological pH, the physiological
form of amines is the protonated form. Figure 4-12 summarizes some common
physiological compounds and their natural states:
Acid Conjugate Base
RC02H (pKa = 3-5) RC02- (pKb= 9-11)
physiological form, because 7.4> 5
RNH3+ (pKa =9-10) RNH2(pKb =4-5)
physiological form, because 7.4< 9
H2P04- (pKa2 =7.2) HPO42- (pKb2 =6.8)
physiological form, because 7.4> 7.2
H2C03 (pKai = 6.4) HC03" (pKb2 = 7.6)
physiological form, because 7.4> 6.4
Figure 4-12
Relationship of pKa and pKb
Because the members of a conjugate pair exchange one proton, their respective
equilibrium constants are related. An acid when deprotonated forms its
conjugate base, and a base when protonated forms its conjugate acid. Equation
4.7 shows the relationship of the pKa for the acid and the pKb for its conjugate
base. This relationship is useful for interconverting between pK values.
However, when polyprotic acids are involved, it gets a little more complicated.
The relationship is emphasized in Reaction 4.12 and Reaction 4.13. Also keep in
mind that Equation 4.7 applies only at 25Cin water.
Example 4.25
What is the pKa for ammonia, given that the pKb for ammonia is 4.7?
A. 4.7
B. 7.0
C. 9.3
D. 33
Solution
It is not 9.3! The compound with a pKa of 9.3 is ammonium (NH44"), the
conjugate acid of ammonia. Ammonia is a weaker acid than ammonium, so it
has a pKa greater than 9.3 The best answer is choice D, 33, indicating that
ammonia is such a weak acid that when added to water, there is no detectable
dissociation. The mistake of choosing 9.3 is easy to make, one that most students
make routinely. But the equation pKa (HA) +PKb (A") = I4 is fr conjugate pairs,
not for the same compound.
The test-writers are more likely to apply this concept to carbonic acid (H2C03),
which has two dissociable protons, and thus has both pKai and pKa2- The
correct relationships between pKa and pKb for the two respective conjugate pairs
are pKai + pKb2= 14 and pKa2 + pKbi = 14. Also note that pKai is always less
than pKa2, because the first proton is more acidic than the second one, by
definition.
Henderson-Hasselbalch Equation
The pHofa solution comprised ofbothcomponents ina weak conjugate paircan
be determined using the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, which is shown
below as Equation 4.17. For the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation to hold true,
both the acid and its conjugatebase must be present in appreciable concentration
in solution.
pH =PKa +logIC"jugatebase] ^
IConjugate acid]
Theequation shows that as the conjugate base concentration ([conjugate base])
increases, the pHof the buffer increases. It alsoshows that as the conjugate acid
concentration ([conjugate acid]) increases, the pH of the buffer decreases.
Equation 4.17is derived from the Ka equation.
JA-HH^l + |IHA]|
[HA] \ [Al |
taking -log ofeverything yields: -log [ H30+] =-logKa - log
\ IA ] /
-log[H30+] =-logKa-log(!j^pH =pKa-log(^) =pKa +logjiJlj
Equation4.17 can be used with either concentration units or mole quantities for
HA and A". This means that Equation 4.17 can be rewritten as Equation 4.18.
.. . moles Conjugate Base ,,10,
pH = pKa + log *-2 (4.18)
moles Conjugate Acid
According to Equation 4.17, the addition of water to a conjugate pair mixture has
no effect on the pH of the solution. The compounds are diluted; and thus less
concentrated, but the pH remains the same because the [A"] : [HAJ ratio remains
the same.
Example 4.26
Which of the following solutions has the GREATESTpH?
A. 10 mL 0.10M NH3(/u/) with 15 mL 0.10 M NH4+(aq)
B. 15 mL 0.10M NH3(aq) with 10 mL 0.10 M NH4+(aq)
C. 10 mL 0.10 M HCQ2Nafaj) with 15 mL 0.10 M HC02H(aq)
D. 15 mL 0.10 M HCC^Nafog) with 10 mL 0.10 M HCC^Hfaq)
Solution
The pH of a conjugatemixture can be determined using Equation 4.18. To make
the pH high, the pKa must be high, and the mixture must be rich in conjugate
base. The pKa of ammonium is greater than the pKa of a carboxylic acid (in this
case, formic acid), so choices C and D are eliminated. Choice A has more acid
than conjugate base, so the pH is less than the pKa for the acid. Choice B has
more base than conjugate acid, so the pH is greater than the pKa for the acid.
This means that choice B has the greatest pH.
Acids
and
Bases
Passages
13 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Acids and Bases Passage Schedule:
I: After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I, III, V, VII, & IX
Following Task I: Passages II, IV, VI, & VIII (27 questions in 35 minutes)
Review: Passages X - XIII & Questions 92 - 100
Focus on reviewing the concepts. Do not worry about timing
II
III
mmm^m
Acids and Bases Study Passages
I. Acid and Base Definitions
II. Dissociation and Colligative Properties
III. Oxyacids
IV. Acidity of Thiols and Alcohols
V. Organic Acids
VI. Electron-Withdrawing Effect and Acidity
VII. Weak Acid pH Equation
VIII. Aspirin and Antacids
IX. Household Acids and Bases
X. Stomach Acid and pH
XI. Tooth Decay and pH
XII. Acid Rain and Scrubbers
XIII. Amino Acids pKa Values
Questions not Based on a Descriptive Passage
Acids and Bases Scoring Scale
84 - 100 13- 15
66-83 10- 12
47 -65 7 -9
34 -46 4-6
1 -33 1 -3
(1 -7)
(8- 13)
(14-21)
(22 - 28)
(29 - 34)
(42 - 48)
(35-41)
(49 - 55)
(56 - 62)
(63 - 70)
(71 -76)
(77 - 84)
(85-91)
(92 - 100)
A base can be defined in three different ways, depending
on its solvent. The definitions are:
1. The Arrhenius definition states that a base yields
OH"(aq) when added to water.
2. The Br0nsted-Lowry definition states that a base is a
proton acceptor.
3. The Lewis definition states that a base is an electron
pair donor.
The same base can fit the description of all three
definitions. The perfect example of a base that fits the three
definitions is ammonia (NH3), which can donate its lone pair
of electrons to accept a proton from water, to yield an
aqueous hydroxide anion (OH"(aq)).
Although a base may simultaneously fit the three
definitions, each definition has its own unique application.
For the calculation of the pH of water-based solutions, the
Arrhenius definition is the most applicable. The Br0nsted-
Lowry definition is applicable in a more general sense,
because it accounts for acid-base chemistry that takes place in
a protic solvent other than water. The Lewis definition is
most commonly applied to organic chemistry where bases
donate their lone pairs to empty p-orbitals. A Lewis base can
react in any solvent, including aprotic ones.
A Lewis base also may be referred to as a nucleophile.
The electrons of the nucleophile are donated to the partially
positive site on an electrophile (which also may be a proton
in addition to a partially positive carbon). The partial or full
cationic charge is often the result of an excess of protons on
the electrophile. The term "nucleophile" is derived from the
strong affinity of the substances for positive charge (the
charge of protonsin an atomic nucleus). All threedefinitions
can account for the nucleophilic nature of a base.
1. If the [OH"l of a pH = 8.0 solution is tripled, the new
pH will be:
A. 5.0.
B. 7.5.
C. 8.5.
D. 11.0.
2. Which of the following bases would have the
LARGEST pKb value?
A. A base that undergoes 20% hydrolysis in water
B. A base that undergoes 15% hydrolysis in water
C. A base that undergoes 10% hydrolysis in water
D. A base that undergoes 5% hydrolysis in water
3.
4.
6.
Which of the following is an Arrhenius base?
A. HCIO
B. HB1O2
C. Li2C03
D. HN02
Which of the following would be the BEST choice to
neutralize 25 mL 0.10 M HCIO3?
A. 25mL0.10MNaOH(aq)
B. 250 mL 0.010 M NH3(aq)
C. 25mL0.10MHCl(aq)
D. 250 mL 0.010 M HCQ2H(aq)
As the conjugate acid for a base gets stronger, the base:
A. exhibits a decreasing pKb value.
B. can react with weaker acids.
C. acquires a higher pOH value in water.
D. requiresmore moles of acid to be neutralized.
Which of the following definitions does NOT describe
an acid?
A. A electron-pair acceptor
B. A proton donor
C. Acompound that produceshydronium ionin water
D. A nucleophilic molecule
As the strength of an acid increases, which of the
following does NOT happen?
A. The acid becomes more electrolytic.
B. The acid dissociates more.
C. The acid has a lower pKa.
D. The acid has a lower Ka.
The strength of an acid in water is defined by its ability
to dissociate into hydronium and conjugate base. Strong
acids generate moreions in solution. As the number of ionic
impurities in the water increases, so does the solution's
electrical conductivity. Current does not readilypass through
distilled water, so the degree of an acid's dissociation can be
estimated by a solution'sabilityto conductelectricity.
To determine the correlation between acid strength and
electrical conductivity, a researcher places the twoends of an
open circuit into a container of water so that the solution
becomes part of a closed circuit. Two volumetric tubes are
poised above the solution, allowing for an exact quantity of
solution to be added to the circuit solution. Figure 1 shows
the apparatus used in the experiment.
Tube A TubeB
Jl -i
-o
Aqueous solution
12V
Figure 1
In different trials, 25 mL aliquots of acid are added, and
the current is measured at different points in the wire. An
average current was recorded. Any deviation in current at
different sites can be attributed to errors in measurement, as
the circuit is a single loop, so current should be uniform
throughout. Table 1 lists the average current in the wire and
the contents of each tube in six separate trials.
Trial Tube A Tube B Current
1 0.10 M HCl Nothing 5.94 amps
2 0.10MHC1O Nothing 0.42 amps
3 0.10 M HCl 0.10 M KOH 6.03 amps
4 0.10MHC1O 0.10 M KOH 5.98 amps
5 0.10 M KOH Nothing 5.89 amps
6 O.lOMKOAc Nothing 5.92 amps
Table 1
The voltage of the battery is constant for the duration of
the experiment.
8. What current would be expected, if 25.0 mL of 0.10 M
HF were added to the aqueous solution?
A. 0.02 amps
B. 0.48 amps
C. 5.42 amps
D. 6.17 amps
9. How can it be explained that there is no difference
between the current readings in Trial 5 and Trial 6?
A. Both KOH and KOAc are strong bases.
B. Both KOH and KOAc are weak bases.
C. Neither compound dissociates into ions in water.
D. The number of ions in solution does not depend on
the base strength.
10. In Trial 2, the water is acting as:
A. aBr0nsted-Lowrybase.
B. an Arrhenius acid.
C. a Lewis acid.
D. an amphoteric species.
11. Which of the following is NOT true?
A. The solution in Trial 1 has a higher boiling point
than the solution in Trial 2.
B. The solution in Trial 1 has a higher freezing point
than the solution in Trial 2.
C. The solution in Trial 1 has a higher osmotic
pressure than the solution in Trial 2.
D. The solution in Trial 1 is more electrolytic than the
solution in Trial 2.
12. All of the following would show a current of roughly 6
amps when added to the solution EXCEPT:
A. O.IOMHNO3.
B. O.IOMH2SO4.
C. 0.10 M NaOH.
D. 0.10 MNH3.
13. What might be the reason for the similarities between
the results in Trial 3 and Trial 4?
A. Acompletereaction transpires only in Trial 3.
B. A complete reaction transpires only in Trial 4.
C. After reaction, whether it is a strong acid with a
strong base or a weak acid with a strong base, the
same concentration of spectator ions remains.
D. Only anions conduct electricity, and both solutions
have the same amount of anions after reaction.
The term oxyacid is coined from the oxygen, the key
component of this type of acid. Oxyacids contain a non-
metal atom (highly electronegative) bonded to oxygens, and
the acidic hydrogen is bonded to an oxygen. A typical
example is nitric acid (HNO3), where nitrogen is the
electronegative atom that is bonded to the oxygens, one of
which is also bonded to a hydrogen. Some oxyacids of
interest are those containing halides, sulfur, phosphorus, and
nitrogen.
The primary rule for predicting the strength of an oxyacid
is that the greater the number of oxygens attached to the
central atom, the more acidic the compound. For example,
HCIO4 is more acidic than HCIO3. The secondary rule for
predicting the strength of oxyacids is that it increases as the
electronegativity of the central atom increases when the
number of oxygens is equal between two oxyacids. Table 1
shows the trend for the halide acids:
Acid Formula Ka value
pKa
Perchloric HCIO4 1.4 x 109 -8.8
Perbromic HB1O4 2.6 x 105 -4.6
Periodic HIO4 1.5 x 102 -1.8
Chloric HCIO3 8.9 x lO'1 0.1
Chlorous HCIO2
1.3 x lO'2 1.9
Hypochlorous HOC1 5.4 x 10"8 7.3
Hypobromous HOBr 2.3 x lO"9 8.6
Hypoiodous HOI 1.7 x lO"11 10.8
Table 1
Table 1 shows that the more dominant of the two causes
of strengthened acidity is the increase in oxygens attached to
the central atom of the acid. This exceeds the effect of
changing the halide central atom. A rough approximation is
that each additional oxygen will lower the pKa of the acid by
approximately 5. Fluorine cannot expand its octet to
accommodate multiple oxygens, so it is not among the
elements that form halogen-based oxyacids.
14. The acidity of halide-containing oxyacids increases
directly with which of the following?
A. The increasingelectronegativityof the halide
B. The increasingbond length of the H-O bond
C. The increasing size of the halide
D. The increasing bond angle of H-O-X
15. Whichsequenceaccuratelydescribesthe relativestrength
of oxyacids?
A. HIO4 > HCIO4 > HCIO3 > HBr03
B. HCIO4 > HBr03 > HIO4 > HIO3
C. HIO4 > HCIO4 > HBr03 > HCIO3
D. HCIO4 > HCIO3 > HBrQ3 > HI02
16. If HCIO has a pKa = 7.26, then the pH of a 0.10 M
HCIO solution is which of the following?
A. 3.63
B. 4.13
C. 7.26
D. 8.26
17. If pKai for a diprotic acid is 7.8, then the BEST choice
for pKa2 for its conjugate base, formed when the acid
loses a proton, is which of the following?
A. 3.9
B. 6.2
C. 7.8
D. 12.9
18. If the dissociation of an acid is exothermic, then
(assuming that entropy is negligible):
A. Kashould increase as the temperature increases.
B. Kashouldremainconstantas temperature increases.
C. Kashoulddecrease as the temperature increases.
D. Ka never changes with varying temperature.
19. Which of the following values MOST accurately
describes the pKa for HB1O2, based on Table 1?
A. 0.63
B. 1.44
C. 1.92
D. 2.85
20. Which of the following acids would show the
GREATEST dissociation in water?
A. H3PO4
B. HN02
C. HIO2
D. HCIO4
21. What is the pH for a 125-mL sample of 0.10 M
HCIO4, given that HCIO4 is a strong acid?
A. -1
B. 0.1
C. 1
D. 7
The acidityof thiols (RSH) is observedto be greaterthan
the acidity of alcohols (ROH). This is determined by
comparing the relative pKa values for corresponding alkyl
groups attached to thiols and alcohols. Table 1 lists pKa
values for various alcohols and thiols with comparable alkyl
substituents. From these values, it is possible to determine
the relative acidities of the two classes of compounds.
Alcohol
pKa
Thiol
pKa
H3COH 16.1 H3CSH 10.3
H3CCH2OH 16.3 H3CCH2SH 10.6
(H3Q2CHOH 17.0 (H3Q2CHSH 11.0
(H3Q3COH 17.8 (H3O3CSH 11.4
Table 1
The difference in acidity between alcohols and thiols is
attributed to the polarizability of their respective conjugate
bases. The larger the anion (more correctly, the atom
carrying the negative charge in the conjugate base), the more
diffuse the electrons will be, and thus the more polarizable
the electron cloud of the anion. The result is that the electron
cloud is spread over more area, increasing the stability of the
anion (conjugate base).
As the stability of the conjugate base increases, the
basicityof the conjugate base decreases. The final correlation
is that as the basicity of the conjugate base decreases, the
acidity of the conjugate acid increases. This leads ultimately
to the conclusion that as the size of the atom to which the
acidic hydrogen is attached increases, the acidity of the
compoundincreases. This can also be correlatedto the bond
length of the bond between the acidic hydrogen and the atom.
The longer the bond, the weaker that bond will be.
2 2. Which of the following compounds would be MOST
acidic?
A. H3CSCH3
B. H3COCH3
C. H3CNHCH3
D. H3CCH2CH3
23. From the table of pKa values, what conclusion can be
drawn about the role of alkyl groups?
A. Alkyl groups are electron-withdrawing and decrease
acidity.
B. Alkyl groups are electron-donating and decrease
acidity.
C. Alkyl groups are electron-withdrawing and increase
acidity.
D. Alkyl groups are electron-donating and increase
acidity.
24. Which of the following halogen-containing acids is the
STRONGEST acid?
A. HF
B. HCl
C. HBr
D. HI
25. HCl is considerably more acidic than H2S, because the
relative acidities of the compounds formed by:
A. atoms in the same row of the periodic table depend
on the electronegativity of the non-hydrogen atom
in the compound.
B. atoms in the same column of the periodic table
dependon the electronegativityof the non-hydrogen
atom in the compound.
C. atoms in the same row of the periodic table depend
on the size of the non-hydrogen atom in the
compound.
D. atoms in the same column of the periodic table
dependon the size of the non-hydrogen atomin the
compound.
26. Howdoes ethanol compare with its corresponding ethyl
thiol?
A. Ethanol has a greater value of Ka.
B. Ethanol dissociates more completely in water.
C. H3CCH2O- is a stronger base than H3CCH2S-.
D. Ethanol yields a greater [H30+l.
27. When an atomin question is not directly attachedto the
acidic hydrogen, then the acidity of that compound
correlates to the electronegativity of that atom, not its
size. This is known as the inductive effect. According
to the inductive effect, which of these acids is the
STRONGEST?
A. H3CCH2C02H
B. H3CCCI2CO2H
C. H3CCSCO2H
D. H3CCI2C02H
28. Whichsequenceaccuratelydescribes the relativestrength
of these acids?
A. H3CCH2SH > (H3Q3CSH > H3CCO2H
B. (H3Q3CSH > H3CCH2SH > H3CCO2H
C. H3CCO2H> H3CCH2SH > (H3O3CSH
D. H3CCO2H > (H3O3CSH > H3CCH2SH
Common organic acids include carboxylic acids
(RCO2H) and phenols (C6H5OH). Electron-withdrawing
groups along the backbone of an acid increase its acidity, and
thus lower its pKa. Chloro, fluoro, and nitro groups are
among the common electron-withdrawing groups. Table 1
lists some organic acids with their respective pKa values.
They are all monoprotic organic acids.
Structure Formula
pKa
0
II
CI3C OH
CI3CCO2H 0.64
/ V
HJK>H
p-02NC6H4C02H 3.40
QÔH
C6H5C02H 4.21
O
II
H3C OH
H3CCO2H 4.74
02N4^-OH
p-02NC6H4OH 7.18
O~0H
C6H5OH 10.01
Table 1
When a weak acid dissolves into water, it partially
dissociatesaccording to its Ka. Equation I, can be applied to
calculatethe pH of an aqueous solution of a weakacid.
PH =ipKa-llog[HAl
2 2
Equation 1
Equation 1is derivedfrom the equilibrium expression for
the dissociation of a weak acid in water. It applies only if the
acid concentration exceeds Ka by 100 fold and if the pKa of
the weak acid is between 2 and 12.
log 2 =0.3 log 3 = 0.48
29. What is the pH for an acid solution with a concentration
of0.50MandaKa =8x 10"8?
A . 0 < pH < 3.0
B. 3.0<pH<3.5
C. 3.5 < pH < 7.0
D. pH>7.0
30. What is the mass percent of carbon in phenol
(C6H5OH)?
A. 66.7%
B. 72.0%
C. 76.6%
D. 82.4%
31. Which of the following acids would yield the lowest pH
value once completely neutralized by strong base?
A. Acetic acid (H3CCO2H)
B. Trichloroacetic acid (CI3CCO2H)
C. p-Nitro benzoic acid (O2NC6H4CO2H)
D. Benzoic acid (C6H5CO2H)
3 2. When comparing equal molar aqueous solutions of acids
from Table 1, what is TRUE?
A. 1.0 M acetic acid has a higher boiling point than
1.0 M p-nitro benzoic acid.
B. 1.0 M trichloroacetic acid has a higher boiling
point than 1.0 M p-nitrophenol (P-O2NC6H4OH).
C. 1.0 M trichloroacetic acid has a higher freezing
point than 1.0 M benzoic acid.
D. 1.0 M acetic acid has a higher freezing point than
1.0 M phenol.
33. Which of the following acids has the STRONGEST
conjugate base?
A. Phenol (C6H5OH)
D. p-NitrophenoI (P-O2NC6H4OH)
C. Acetic acid (H3CCO2H)
D. Trichloroacetic acid (CI3CCO2H)
34. After 0.10 moles of an unknown weak acid HA are
dissolved into 100 mL of H2O, the solution's pH is
3.7. What is the concentration of the conjugate base
(A")?
A. [A-]>2x 10"4M
B. [A'l = 2x 10"4M
C. [A1<2x 10'4M
D. The Ka of the weak acid must be known to
determine the value of [A"].
Passage VI (Questions 35-41)
The strengthof an organic acid varies directly with the
strength of any electron-withdrawing groups attached to its
organic backbone. Forinstance, theacidity of acetic acid can
be increased by adding an electron-withdrawing groupto the
methyl carbon. Theacidity of acetic acid canbedecreased by
adding an electron donating group to the methyl carbon. The
effect on the strengthof the acid varies with the location and
electronegativity of the electron-withdrawing group and is
most substantial when the functional group withdraws by
way of resonance. The following set of phenols demonstrates
the effect of these substituents on acidity:
Organic Acid &
02N4V-OH
7.2
3>-Oh~oh
O
8.4
O~0H
10.0
H3C4ÔH
10.4
H3CO ^H
11.2
Figure 1
Increased acidity can be attributed to the withdrawal of
electron density (through either the inductive effect or
resonance) from the O-H bond of phenol. The loss of
electron density weakens the bond, causing it to break in a
heterolytic fashion more easily. This makes the compound
more acidic. Resonance withdrawal is most pronounced when
the substituent is in the ortho or para position, so the
strongest acids are those with electron-withdrawing groups
attached to the phenyl ring at the ortho or para positions.
Resonance is substantially weaker from the meta position.
The inductive effect is weaker than resonance from any
position.
3 5. The LOWEST pH value would be associated with:
A. 0.10 M O2NC6H4OH (p-nitrophenol).
B. 0.50 M O2NC6H4OH (p-nitrophenol).
C. 0.10 M C6H5OH (phenol).
D. 0.50 M C6H5OH (phenol).
36. A 100mL 1.0 M phenol solution has a pH of:
A. 10.0.
B. 7.0.
C. 5.0.
D. 1.0.
37. According to the pKadata in Figure 1, whichcompound
is the STRONGEST electron-withdrawing group?
A. 02N
B. H3CO
C. H3C
D. H3CCO
38. The conjugate baseof p-nitrophenol has a pKbof:
A. 10.4.
B. 7.2.
C. 6.8.
D. 3.6.
39. Howmany grams of methoxy phenol must be added to
100mLof pure water to reach a pHof 6.1?
A. 12.4 grams
B. 2.48 grams
C. 1.24 grams
D. 0.62 grams
4 0. What is the Ka associated with p-methyl phenol?
A. 4.0 x 10"10
B. 2.5 x 10'10
C. 4.0 x lO"1 ]
D. 2.5 x 10"11
41. What is the pH of a solution made by mixing 20 mL
0.15 M phenol with 10 mL water?
A. 10.0
B. 7.0
C. 5.8
D. 5.5
A strong acid fully dissociates when dissolved in water,
and the pH of the resulting solution can be found by taking
the negative log of the strong acid concentration:
pH = -log [strong acid]
Equation 1
For a weak acid, the determination of the pH is not as
simple as it is with a strong acid, because weak acids do not
dissociate completely when addedto water. To find the pH of
a weak acid in water, the [H30+] must first be determined
from the weak acid equilibrium:
HA(aq) - ^ H+(aq) + A-(aq)
Initial: [HAJinitiai lO'7 0
Dissociation: - x + X + X
Equilibrium: [HAlinitiai - x x + 10"7 x
10~7 is assumed to be negligible compared to x, and
x is assumed to be negligible compared to [HA]jnjtia|
The [H30+] can be determined from the Ka value. The
following is a derivation of Equation 2, used to determine the
pHfor an aqueous solution of a weakacid.
K=[H30+][A-1 =[H3Q+12 ... Ka x[HAJ =[H30+]2
[HA] [HA]
[H30+] = VKax[HA]
pH =-log [H30+] = -log VKax[HA]
-log VKax[HA] =-logVKa" - logV[HA]
=- i-logKa - i-log [HA] =ipKa - llog[HA]
2 2 2 2
.-. pH =ipKa - i-log [HA]
2 2
Equation 2
Equation 2 works only when the value of Ka is less than
[HA], and when pKa is between 2 and 12.
42. For which of the following acid solutions does Equation
2 NOT work?
A. HCIO
B. H2C03
C. HI
D. H5C6C02H
43. What assumption is inherent in the derivation of
Equation 2?
A. [HA] < [H30+]
B. [H30+] = [A1
C. [HA] = [A"I
D. [HA]<[A"]
44,
45
46.
47.
48.
If the pH of a 0.10 M aqueous weak acid solution is
2.70, what is the concentration of the dissociated
conjugate base in solution?
A. 0.I0M
B. 2.0 x 10'2M
C. 2.0 x 10"3M
D. 2.0 x 10"4M
Which of the following equations can be used to
determine the pOH of an aqueous weak base solution?
A. pOH = -log [OH']
B. POH =IpKa-llog[A-]
2
C. pOH =ipKb
2
-Llog IA-]
2
D. pOH =14 -(i-pKa -i-log [HA])
If a weak acid is titrated with enough strong base so that
[A"] > [HA], then for the resulting compound:
A. [H30+]<Ka.
B. pH < pKa.
C. [H30+]>[A-].
D. [HA]<[H30+].
Which acid yields the GREATEST conjugate base
concentration when 0.010 moles HA are added to
enough water to make the final volume 100mL?
A. HF
B. HNO3
C. HCN
D. H3CC02H
A series of 0.10 M weak acid solutions, each containing
a different acid are compared. What is true for the acid
in the series that has the GREATEST Ka value?
A. Its aqueous solution has the lowest conjugate base
concentration.
B. Its aqueous solution has the lowest pOH.
C. Its aqueous solution has the highest [H30+].
D. Its aqueous solution has the highest ratio of HA to
A".
When the pH of the stomach drops to a value less than
2.0, the excess acidity may be reduced by consuming an
antacid. The role of the antacid is to neutralize the HCl in
the gastric fluid. Somecommon bases found in antacids are
CaC03, MgC03, Mg(OH)2, and NaHC03- Calcium
carbonate, magnesium carbonate, and magnesium hydroxide
neutralize acid in a two-to-one ratio. Sodium bicarbonate
neutralizes only in a one-to-one ratio.
The gas buildup experiencedafter consumingan antacid
is due to carbon dioxide gas, which forms in the stomach
when carbonic acid (formed upon the full protonation of
carbonate) decomposes into water and carbon dioxide. The
principal antacid ingredients of some common, commercially
available products are listed in Table 1.
Alka-Seltzer Aspirin, NaHC03, citric acid
Bufferin Aspirin, MgC03, aluminum glycinate
Milk of Magnesia Mg(OH)2
Rolaids Dihydroxyaluminum sodium carbonate
Turns Calcium carbonate
Table 1
Aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid) can irritate the stomach
lining. In an acidic environment, aspirin does not
deprotonate, so the molecule remains neutral and thus lipid
soluble. As a result, aspirin is able to work its way into the
membrane of the stomach lining and then into hydrophilic
pores within the membrane. It deprotonates inside the
hydrophilic pore, causing ion levels to build up in the
pocket, until osmotic pressure forces water into the interior
region of the membrane, where parietal cells swell and
rupture. The net effect is to eat away the stomach lining.
Figure 1 shows the structure of aspirin and its ionization
equilibrium.
O^CH3 O^CH3
O O
Figure 1
49. At what pH is aspirin MOST soluble in water?
A. 1.5
B. 3.4
C. 7.4
D. 9.2
+ H +
5 0. How many acidic sites are there in acetylsalicylic acid?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
51. Which antacid gives the MOST neutralizing strength
per gram?
A. Magnesiumcarbonate (84.3 grams per mole)
B. Calcium carbonate (100 grams per mole)
C. Magnesium hydroxide (58.3 grams per mole)
D. Sodium bicarbonate (83.9 grams per mole)
5 2. Which of the following compounds would cause the
MOST damage to stomach lining?
OCH
53. How many acidic protons can be neutralized per
molecule of dihyroxyaluminum sodium carbonate
(Al(OH)2NaC03)?
A. 1
B. 2
C. 3
D. 4
54. The Keq for the ionization reaction of acetylsalicylic
acid in water is:
A. much greater than 1.00.
B. barely greater than 1.00.
C. barely less than 1.00.
D. much less than 1.00.
55. Which of the following mixtures results in a buffer
solution?
A. 1equiv. acetylsalicylic acid + 1equiv. HCl
B. 2 equiv. acetylsalicylic acid + 1 equiv. HCl
C. 1equiv. acetylsalicylate + 1equiv. HCl
D. 2 equiv. acetylsalicylate + f equiv. HCl
Many common products used every day have acidic and
basic properties. An example is the antacid taken by many
heartburn sufferers to neutralize excess stomach acid (HCl).
Antacids often contain hydroxide anion, carbonate anion, or
both in their salt forms. The contents of a normally
functioning stomach can reach a pH as low as 1.7 (highly
acidic) and in extreme cases can reach a pH as low as 1.0.
Because the pH scale is a log scale, a decrease of 0.7 pH units
represents a hydronium ion (H30+) concentration that is
500% greater. Equation 1 is used to determine the pH of a
solution.
pH = -log[H30+]
Equation 1
Table 1 lists some common household acids.
Acids Formula Product
Acetic acid H3CC02H Vinegar
Ascorbic acid C6H806 Vitamin C
Hypochlorousacid HCIO Bleach
Acetyl salicylate H3C2OC6H4CO2H Aspirin
Sulfuric acid H2SO4
Battery acid
Table 1
Table 2 lists some common household bases.
Bases Formula Product
Ammonia NH3 Windex
Sodium Bicarbonate NaHC03 Baking Soda
Sodium Hydroxide NaOH Drano
Sodium Lauryl sulfate H3C(CH2)i6S04Na Shampoo
Bases when added to neutral water raise the pH of the
solution to a value greater than 7.0. Acids when added to
neutral water lower the pH of the solution to a value less
than 7.0. A pH of 7.0 is considered to be neutral, because
pure (distilled) water has an [H30+] = 1.0 x10"7.
Acid in solution may be represented as either H30+ or
H+, depending on the solvent. Both representations are
equivalent ways of describing an acid.
56. A hydroxide anion is formed when water loses a proton
(H+) to another water (known as autoionization). If the
concentration of dissociated hydroxide anion (OH") in
distilled water is 1.0 x 10-6 M, the pH of the solution
must be:
A. 7.0, because [H30+] = [OH'].
B. 7.0, because water always has a pH of 7.0.
C. 6.0, because [H30+] = [OH"].
D. 8.0, because the solution is rich in base (OH").
57. What is the hydronium ion concentration ([H30+]) of
an aqueous solution with a pH value of 1.7?
A. 1.7MH30+
B. 2.0 x 10-2MH3O+
C. 1.0x 10-7MH3O+
D. 5.0 x 10-,3MH3O+
58. If 10 mL of an aqueous solution of a strong acid with
pH = 2.0 were mixed with 100 mL of pure water, then
the final pH value would be:
A. less than 2.0.
B. between 2.0 and 3.0.
C. exactly 3.0.
D. greater than 3.0.
59. Howmany grams of CaC03 are needed to neutralize 50
mL of stomach acid at pH = 2.0 completely, if the
following equation represents the neutralization
reaction?
CaC03(aq) +2H+(aq) > Ca2+(aq) +C02(g) +H20(1)
A. 25 mg
B. 50 mg
C. 100 mg
D. 1.0 grams
6 0. Which of the following household products would NOT
undergo an acid-base reaction withWindex?
A. Vinegar
B. Aspirin
C. Drano
D. Bleach
61. Which of the following when added to an aqueous
solution at pH = 6.0 would NOT raise the pH of the
solution?
A. Distilled water
B. Shampoo
C. Antacid
D. Vitamin C
62. How many milliliters of 0.20 M H30+ are required to
neutralize 1.68 gramsof baking sodacompletely?
NaHC03(aq) + H+(aq) >Na+(aq) + C02(g) + H20(1)
A. 10 mL
B. 25 mL
C. 50 mL
D. 100 mL
The average human being produces between two and
three liters of gastric fluid in the normal day. Gastric fluid is
highly acidic (due tothe presence of hydrochloric acid). It is
secreted by the mucous membrane of the stomach lining to
aid in the digestion of food. The average pHof this fluid is
around 1.5. The acid concentration necessary for this pH is
0.030M, if the acid is a strongacid. The acidin gastric fluid
is strong enough and concentrated enough to dissolve
(oxidize) metals witha positiveoxidation potential.
The liningof the stomach includes parietal cells that are
tightly fused to form junctions in the stomach wall. These
cells have a cell membrane that is permeable to neutral
molecules (such as water), but not to ions (such as Na+ and
CI"). Hydronium ion, responsible for the acidity of the
stomach, is a byproduct of metabolism. Carbon dioxide, a
byproduct of metabolism, is a non-metal oxide that converts
to an oxyacid when combined with water. The hydration of
carbon dioxide (CO2) to carbonic acid (H2CO3) is shownin
Reaction 1. Carbonic acid is a weak acid that partially
dissociates into bicarbonate anion and a proton, as shown in
Reaction 2.
C02(g) + H20(1) ^
H2C03(aq)
Reaction 1
H2C03(aq) , H+(aq) + HC03"(aq)
Reaction 2
The proton, along with a chloride anion, is carried across
the membrane into the stomach via active transport.
Enzymes assist the migration of both the proton and chloride
anion from the blood plasma into the interior of the stomach.
These ions remain in the stomach until removed, because of
the impermeability of the cell membrane to ions.
Eating stimulates the production of the enzyme
responsible for active transport and thus the release of acid
into the stomach to hydrolyze food molecules. Some protons
are absorbed by the mucous lining of the stomach wall,
resulting in small localized hemorrhages. About 30 million
cells are destroyed per hour in normal stomach activity. As a
result, the stomach's entire lining is regenerated roughly once
every 72 hours. Excess acid production increases this
hemorrhaging and, in the worst case scenario, an ulcer
develops.
6 3. What can be concluded about the following reaction?
H2C03(aq) + NaCl(aq) -^-^ NaHC03(aq) + HCI(aq)
A. AG > 0; requires active transport in vivo.
B. AG < 0; requires active transport in vivo.
C. AG > 0; does not require active transport in vivo.
D. AG < 0; does not require active transport in vivo.
6 4. Which solution has the LOWEST pH?
A. Carbonated water
B. Distilled water
C. Saltwater
D. Lime water (CaO(aq))
65. Which of the following metals can be oxidized by
gastric fluid?
A. Copper
B. Gold
C. Silver
D. Zinc
66. Which of the following reactions is NOT catalyzed by
acid?
A. Hydrolysis of disaccharides
B. Hydrolysis of polypeptides
C. Hydrolysis of esters
D. Hydrolysis of alkanes
67. Which will NOT reduce the hydronium ion (H30+)
concentration in the stomach?
A. The consumption of water
B. The consumptionof baking soda (NaHC03)
C. The consumption of aluminum metal
D. The consumption of solid food
68. What is the pHof 0.030 M HCl(aq) solution?
A. 0.7
B. 1.5
C. 3.0
D. 7.0
69. Which of the following beverages when consumeddoes
NOT promote the decay of the stomach lining?
A. Orangejuice (citric acid)
B. Lemonade (citric acid)
C. Milk (lactose)
D. Coca-Cola (phosphoric acid)
7 0. Which of the following has the LOWEST pH?
A. 0.03MHCl(aq)
B. 0.01 MHCl(aq)
C. 0.03 M H2C03(aq)
D. 0.01 M H2C03(aq)
As a general rule, the solubility for basic salts (conjugate
bases of weak acids) increases as the pH of the solution
decreases. This is to say that basic salts are more soluble in
acidic solution than in neutral solution. The calcium salts
such as calcium hydroxide (found in cement), calcium
carbonate (marble), and hydroxyapatite (tooth enamel) are
perfect examples. Hydroxyapatite is CasfPOÔH but can
also be written as 3Ca3(P04)2 Ca(OH)2- Cavities result
when the hydroxyapatite dissolves away. When small
crevices are formed in teeth, acid-producing bacteria build up
and further dissolve away the worn region in the enamel. The
acid that dissolves the enamel is formed when aldoses
(aldehyde sugars, such as glucose) are oxidized to their
respective aldonicacid compounds. To reducethe dissolving
of the enamel, toothpaste and mouthwash containing fluoride
are recommended. The fluoride will substitute for hydroxide
in the salt to form the less soluble fluorapatite Ca5(P04)3F
(also known as 3Ca3(P04h CaF2). This lengthens the
lifetime of tooth enamel.
The solubility product (Ksp) for calcium fluoride (CaF2)
is 3.4x 10" M3, for pure calciumphosphate (Ca3(P04)2)
is 1.4x 10"26 M5, and for calciumhydroxide (Ca(OH)2) free
of calciumoxide is 2.3 x 10"8 M3. The lower solubilityof
calciumfluoride compared to calcium hydroxide is mimicked
in the reduced solubility of fluorapatite compared to
hydroxyapatite.
The following chart lists the molar solubility of calcium
hydroxide at varyingpH along with the gramsolubility per
100 mL solution at varying pH. The temperature was held
constant at 25C for all values:
pH
Molar solubility Gram solubility
1 2.3 x 1018 1.7 x 1019
2 2.3 x 1016 1.7 x 1017
3 2.3 x 1014 1.7 x 1015
7 2.3 x 106 1.7 x 107
11 2.3 x 10"2 1.7 x lO"1
12 2.3 x 10"4 1.7 x 10"3
Table 1
Table 1 shows that the effect of pH on the solubility of
basic salts is drastic. This is because pH is measured on a
logscale, while solubilities aremeasured on a linear scale.
71. As sodium fluoride (NaF) is added to an aqueous
solution with undissolved hydroxyapatite in it, what
happens to the solution?
A. The pH of the solution increases.
B. The pH of the solution decreases.
C. The pH of the solution remains constant at a value
greater than 7.0.
D. The pH of the solution remains constant at a value
less than 7.0.
72. Calcium hydroxide is BEST described as which of the
following?
A. A strong acid
B. A strong base
C. A weak acid
D. A weak base
73. If the solubility of enamel in a 1.00 M solution of acid
HA is greater than the solubility of enamel in a 1.00 M
solution of acid HB, which of the following
conclusions can be drawn concerning to the two acids?
A. HA when dissolved into 100 mL pure water has a
higher pH than HB.
B. The conjugate base of HA is a stronger base than
the conjugate base of HB.
C. HA has a higher Ka value than HB.
D. HA has a higher pKa value than HB.
74. Which of the following changes will ALWAYS
increase the amount of hydroxyapatite that dissolves
into solution?
A. Adding a strong acid to the solution
B. Adding a strong base to the solution
C. Increasing the pH of the solution
D. Lowering the amount of water in the solution by
evaporation
75. An example of an aldonic acid is drawn below. With
which of the answer selections listed should the aldonic
acid share a similar pKa value?
O OH
HCOH
I
HOCH
I
HC OH
I
HCOH
I
CH2OH
Acetic acid (H3CCO2H)
Hydrochloric acid (HCl)
Nitric acid (HNO3)
Sodium carbonate (Na2C03)
A.
B.
C.
D.
76. In which of the following solutions does tooth enamel
dissolve the FASTEST?
A. 100 mL 0.10 M HCl
B. 100 mL 0.0010 M HCl
C. 100 mL 0.10MHF(Ka = 6.8x 10"4)
D. 100 mL 0.0010 M HF(Ka = 6.8x 10"4)
Normal rainfall hasa pHbetween 5.6 and 6.0, depending
on the amount of carbon dioxide in the air. Excessive
amounts of atmospheric carbon dioxide lower the pH of rain.
However, even with high carbon dioxide concentration, the
pH ofrain does not drop much below 5.4. While rain rich in
carbon dioxide is more acidic than normal rain, it is not
considered to be acid rain.
Acid rain is attributed to nonmetal oxides present in the
air, like sulfur trioxide, and the nitrogen oxides. These
nonmetal oxides combine with atmospheric moisture to form
nonmetal hydroxides, known as oxyacids. Reaction 1 shows
the hydration of sulfur trioxide, converting it from a
nonmetal oxide into a nonmetal hydroxide.
S03(g) + H20(g)
H2S04(g)
Reaction 1
Sulfur oxides are common by-products produced during
the combustion of coal. A scrubber (a chamber at the base of
an exhaust stack filled with high pressure steam and calcium
oxide) can help neutralize the non-metal oxides in the
industrial emissions of coal-burning factories. As the
exhaust passes through the chamber, steam hydrates the
nonmetal oxide and converts it from an airborne Lewis acid
intoan aqueous Br0nsted-Lowry acid. Then as this nonmetal
hydroxide solution flows across the calcium oxide in the
scrubber, it is converted into calcium sulfate and water. This
is shown in Reaction 2.
H2S04(aq) + CaO(s) Z, CnS04(s) + H20(i)
Reaction 2
If the acidic industrial waste generated by burning fossil
fuel is not treated in this manner, it can produce rain with a
pH as low as 4.0. Acid rain is known to damage bodies of
water by changing the bacteria population. Acid rain
damages plants by changing soil pH. Changes in pH affect
the structure of plant enzymes needed for the uptake and
transport of nutrients. The enzymes become ineffective at
lower pH because of their denatured structures.
77. What chemical reaction is indicated in Reaction 1?
A . The neutralization of sulfur trioxide
B. The acidification of sulfur trioxide
C. The conversion of a Br0nsted-Lowry acid into a
Lewis acid.
D. The conversion of a Lewis acid into a Br0nsted-
Lowry acid.
78. A nonmetal oxide can be characterized as:
A. amphoteric.
B. an Arrhenius base.
C. a Br0nsted-Lowry acid.
D . a Lewis acid.
79. Which of the following compounds would create a
solution with the LOWEST pH when added to water?
A. S02
B. C02
C. N205
D. MgO
80. What is the pH of 0.10 M HOClfa^, which has a pKa
of 7.46?
A. 1.00
B. 4.23
C. 6.46
D. 7.46
81. Which of the following could be a component of acid
rain?
A. Na20
B. N2
C. N02
D. H2
82. All of the following qualifications affect the acidity of
an oxyacid EXCEPT:
A . the oxidation state of the central atom.
B. the electronegativity of the central atom.
C . the size of the central atom.
D. the number of 7i-bonds to the central atom.
83. All of these statements about H2SO4, H2SO3, and
their constituents are true EXCEPT:
A. SO32" has a lower pKbi than SO42".
B. 1.0 M H2S04(aq) has a lower pH than 1.0 M
H2S03(a^.
C. H2SO4 has a higher Ka| than H2S03.
D. H2S03 is more electrolytic than H2SO4.
84. Which sequence correctly lists the four acids shown
below according to their INCREASING pKa value?
A. pKai h2S04 < pKaHN03 < PKal H2S03 < Pâ
HN02
B. pKaHN03 < PKal H2S04 < Pâ HN02 < PKal
H2S03
C PKal H2S03 < pKaHN02 < PKal H2S04 < PKa
HNO3
D- PKaHN02 < PKal H2S03 < Pâ HN03 < PKal
H2S04
Passage XIII (Questions 85-91)
Amino acids can be classified as either diprotic or
triprotic acids, depending on their side chain. A generic
amino acid is shown below in Figure 1:
O
H3N+
c
4\
H R
Figure 1
O"
The chemical structure in Figure 1 represents an amino
acid in a pH = 7 aqueous environment. At a pH less than the
pKa of the carboxyl terminal (pKai), the carboxylate group is
protonated and exists in its neutral carboxylic acid form.
Similarly, at a pH greater than the pKa of the amino terminal
(pKa2 or pKa3), the ammonium group is deprotonated and
exists in its neutral amine form.
If the R group (side chain) of an amino acid exhibits
acid-base properties, then the amino acid is triprotic. The
side chain may be deprotonated at pH = 7, depending on the
nature of the functional group. The carboxyl terminal pKa
lies between 1.8 and 2.6, and the amino terminal pKa lies
between 8.8 and 10.6 for all twenty common amino acids.
The pKa for the protonated form and the pKb for the
deprotonatedform add up to a value of 14at 25C.
pKa (protonated form) + P^b (deprotonated form) = 14
Equation 1
The pKa values for common side chains range from 3.9
to 13.2. Table 1 lists the R group and pKa values for seven
common triprotic amino acids.
Amino acid Side chain group pKa
Aspartic acid -CH2C02H 3.88
Glutamic acid -CH2CH2CO2H 4.32
Histidine -CH2C=CH-N+H=CH-NH- 6.05
Cysteine -CH2SH 8.36
Tyrosine -CH2C6H4OH 10.07
Lysine -CH2CH2CH2CH2NH3+ 10.80
Arginine -(CH2)3NHC(NH2)=NH2+ 13.21
Table 1
Physiological pH is considered to be 7.4, although
gastric fluids and the fluid contained in lysosomes have
considerably lower pH. At physiological pH, a diprotic
amino acid exists predominantly in its zwitterion form.
8 5. What is the relationship between the pKa and pKb for
lysine?
A. pKai +pKbi = 14
B. PKai+pKb2=14
C. PKa2 + pKb2=14
D. pKa2 + pKb3 = 14
86. At physiological pH, which of the following amino
acids exists predominantly as a cation?
A. Arginine
B. Glutamic acid
C. Glycine
D. Histidine
87. What explains the lower pKa for the side chain
associated with cysteine than the one associated with
serine (R = -CH2OH)?
A. Oxygen is less electronegative than sulfur.
B. Sulfur is less electronegative than oxygen.
C . Oxygen has a greater atomic radius than sulfur.
D. Sulfur has a greater atomic radius than oxygen.
8 8. The carbon chain associated with aspartic acid is shorter
than the one associated with glutamic acid, which
results in a:
A. stronger inductive effect, making aspartic acid's side
chain more acidic.
B. weaker inductive effect, making aspartic acid's side
chain more acidic.
C. stronger inductive effect, making aspartic acid's side
chain less acidic.
D. weaker inductive effect, making aspartic acid's side
chain less acidic.
89. At pH = 7, what are the applicable values for histidine?
A. pKai = 1.81; pKa2 = 6.05; pKb3 = 4.85
B. pKa3 = 9.15; pKb2 = 7.95; pKbi = 4.85
C. pKb2 = 7.95; pKa2 = 6.05; pKa3 = 9.15
D. pKa3 = 9.15; pKb2 = 7.95; pKb3 = 12.19
90. What is the normality of 0.50 M glutamic acid in
water?
A . 0.50 N H3N+CH(CH2CH2C02H)C02H(aq)
B. 1.00 N H3N+CH(CH2CH2C02H)C02H(aq)
C . 1.50 N H3N+CH(CH2CH2C02H)C02H(aq)
D. 2.00 N H3N+CH(CH2CH2C02H)C02H(aq)
91. All of the following amino acids have a neutral side
chain at pH = 7 EXCEPT:
A. cysteine.
B. histidine.
C. lysine.
D. tyrosine.
279 GO ON TO THE NEXT PAGE
Questions 92-100 are NOT based
92. Which of the following solutions has the LOWEST
pH?
A. 0.01 M HCIO (pKa = 7.5)
B. 0.05 M HC02H (pKa = 3.6)
C. 0.10 MHF(pKa = 3.3)
D. 1.00 MHCN(pKa = 9.1)
93. Acid rain can possibly contain all of the following
compounds EXCEPT:
A. oxidized non-metals.
B. hydrated non-metal oxides.
C. electron pair acceptors.
D. metal hydroxides.
94. Which of the following conjugate pair-mixtures has the
LOWEST pH?
A. 10 mL 0.10 M HF(aq) with 15 mL 0.10 M KF(aq)
B. 15 mL 0.10 M HF(aq) with 10 mL 0.10 M KF(aq)
C. 10 mL 0.10 M NH3(aq) with 15 mL 0.10 M
NH4+(aq)
D. 15 mL 0.10 M NH3(aq) with 10 mL 0.10 M
NH4+(aq)
95. Which of the following relationships applies to
phosphoric acid?
A. pKai +pKbi = 14
B. PKa2 + pKb2 = 14
C. pKa3 + pKb3=14
D. PKal+pKa3 = 14
96. What is the normality of a solution made by mixing
50.00 mL of 1.5 M H3PO4 with 50.00 mL of pure
water?
A. 3.OONH3PO4
B. 2.25NH3P04
C. I.5ONH3PO4
D. O.75NH3PO4
97. A 0.10 M solution of unknown material has a pH of
4.62. It can BEST be described as a:
A. strong acid.
B. weak acid.
C. strong base.
D. weak base.
98. The HIGHEST pH is observed in which of the
following solutions?
A. 0.10MHNO2(aq)
B. 0.10MHNO3(aq)
C. 0.10MNaNO2(aq)
D. 0.10MNaNO3(aq)
99. What is the pHof 0.050 M H3CCH2C02H? (pKa for
H3CCH2CO2H is 4.89)
A. 1.30
B. 3.10
C. 4.89
D. 9.78
100. Which pH is INCORRECT for the corresponding
solution?
A. 0.10 M HBr(aq) has pH = 1.00
B. 0.10 M HC02H(aq) has pH = 2.32
C. 0.10 M NaOAc(aq) has pH = 5.13
D. 0.10 M KOH(aq) has pH = 13.00
1. C 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. C
6. D 7. D 8. B 9. D 10. A
11. B 12. D 13. C 14. A 15. D
16. B 17. D 18. C 19. D 20. D
21. C 22. C 23. B 24. D 25. A
26. C 27. B 28. C 29. C 30. C
31. B 32. B 33. A 34. B 35. B
36. C 37. A 38. C 39. C 40. C
41. D 42. C 43. B 44. C 45. C
46. A 47. B 48. C 49. D 50. A
51. C 52. C 53. D 54. D 55. D
56. C 57. B 58. D 59. A 60. C
61. D 62. D 63. A 64. A 65. D
66. D 67. D 68. B 69. C 70. A
71. A 72. B 73. C 74. A 75. A
76. A 77. D 78. D 79. C 80. B
81. C 82. C 83. D 84. A 85. C
86. A 87. D 88. A 89. D 90. C
91. C 92. C 93. D 94. B 95. B
96. B 97. B 98. C 99. B 100. C
THAT'S ENOUGH CHEM FOR NOW.
Acids and Bases Passage Answers
Acid and Base Definitions
Choice C is correct. A quick look says that the pH should increase when the hydroxide ion concentration
increases, which eliminates choices A and B. The pH should not increase by a full 3 units. An increase by 3
units would mean 1000 times the base concentration. This implies choice C is the most intuitive choice. This
problemcan be solved longhand as well. The question deals with [OH"] and pH, so some form of conversion must
occur. First, pH must be converted to pOH, using the relationship pOH = 14- pH (14 - 8 = 6.0). Then, pOHmust
be converted to [OH"], using the relationship [OH'] =10-POH ([OH'] =10"6). Tripling the amount ofOH" yields
a concentration of 3 x10"6 M. The new pOH is - log (3 x10"6), which equals 6 - log3, which is approximately
5.5. The new pH is equal to 14 - 5.5 = 8.5, so choice C is in fact correct.
Choice D is correct. The larger the value of pKb, the weaker the base. The weaker the base, the less it
undergoes hydrolysis to form hydroxide anion when added to water. This makes choice D the correct choice.
Choice C is correct. An Arrhenius base is defined as a base that yields OH'(aq) upon addition to water. Of the
answer selections, only choice C is basic. Choice C must be correct.
Choice A is correct. HCIO3 is a weak acid that can be neutralized using a base of some sort. This eliminates
both choice C and choice D. Choice Bis a weak base, so it cannot fully react, eliminating choice B. Pick choice
A. For titration, 25 mL of strong base is ideal, because there are 25 mL of equimolar acid present. Although we
haven't reviewed it yet, titration is the quantitative addition of an equal mole quantity of a reactant.
Choice C is correct. As the conjugate acid gets stronger, the conjugate base gets weaker. The weaker the
conjugate base, the higher its pKb value, so choice A is eliminated. The weaker the conjugate base, the stronger
the acid that is required to react with it, so choice B is eliminated. The weaker the conjugate base, the lower
the hydroxide anion concentration, so the higher the pOH and the lower the pH. This makes choice C correct.
The weaker base requires the same moles of acid as a stronger base to be neutralized, as long as they are in equal
concentration. The strength of the acid required for reaction is different for the two bases, but the moles of
hydroxide are the same from equimolar bases, regardless of their strengths.
Choice D is correct. The passage provided the three definitions for bases. The definitions for acids is the
opposite of that for bases. This means that the Lewis definition of an acid is an electron-pair acceptor. Choice
A is thus valid. The Bronsted-Lowry definition of an acid is a proton donor, making choice B valid. The
Arrhenius definition defines an acid as a compound that produces hydronium ion upon addition to water. This
makes choice C valid. Choice D must therefore be the best answer. A Lewis base, not a Lewis acid, is defined
as a nucleophilic molecule.
Choice D is correct. By definition, as the strength of an acid increases, it dissociates to a greater extent when
mixed with water. This eliminates choice B. By dissociating more, the acid produces more ions, making the
solution more electrolytic. Choice Ais eliminated. Astronger acid produces more hydronium ion, so Ka should
increase and pKa should decrease. This both eliminates choice C and makes choice D correct.
Dissociation and Colligative Properties
8. Choice B is correct. Hydrofluoric acid, HF, is a weak acid, so it partially dissociates in water. The current
would be minimal. HCIO is also a weak acid, so an HF solution has conductivity similar to an HCIO solution.
The best answer is choice B. Pick choice B, and be a happy camper.
9. Choice D is correct. Both KOH and KOAc are salts. As such, they will both completely dissociate into water,
so the ion concentration is the same in both solutions. This eliminates choice C. KOH is a strong base, while
KOAc is a weak base, so choices A and B are also eliminated. The best answer is choice D.
10. Choice A is correct. HCIO is a weak acid, so water must be acting as a base by removing a proton from
hypochlorous acid. This eliminates choices B and C. Water can be an amphoteric species, meaning it can act as
either an acid or a base, but in this reaction it acts only as a base. Choice D is eliminated. By gaining a proton
from HCIO, water is acting as a proton acceptor, making it a Bronsted-Lowry base. Choice A is the best answer.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 281 Section IV Detailed Explanations
11. Choice Bis correct. The solution inTrial 1shows a greater current than thesolution inTrial 2, so thesolution in
Trial 1 is more electrolytic than the solution in Trial 2. Electrolytic is defined as the ability of a solution to
conduct electricity. This eliminates choice D. HCl is a strong acid, while HCIO is a weak acid. As such, more
ions are present in solution during Trial 1than during Trial 2. This explains the greater conductivity in Trial 1
than Trial 2. Other colligative properties include boiling point elevation, freezing point depression, and
osmotic pressure. Because the solution in Trial 1has more ionic impurities (and thus more total impurities), the
solution in Trial 1 has a higher boiling point, lower freezing point, and greater osmotic pressure. This makes
choice B the correct answer.
12. Choice D is correct. As seen in the experiment, full dissociation leads to a current of approximately 6.0 amps.
Nitric acid is a strong acid, sochoice Ashould generate a current of roughly 6.0 amps. Sulfuric acid has one
strong proton, so choice Bshould generate acurrent of roughly 6.0 amps. Sodium hydroxide is a highly soluble
salt, so choice Cshould generate a current of roughly 6.0 amps. Ammonia is a weak base with no charge, so
addition of ammonia to water forms only a few ions. The current cannot reach 6.0 amps, so choice Dis thebest
answer.
13. Choice C is correct. Astrongbase is mixed with a strong acid in Trial 3. Acomplete reaction occurs, leaving
behind potassium cation (K+) and chloride anion (CI"). Astrong base is mixed with a weak acid in Trial 4. A
complete reaction occurs, leaving behind potassium cation (K+) and hypochlorite anion (CIO"). Acomplete
reaction occurs in both Trial 3 and Trial 4, because in each case a strong base has been added. This eliminates
choices Aand B. Because equal amounts ofstrong base (KOH) areaddedtoequal mole quantities of acid inboth
Trial 3and Trial 4, bothreactions go tocompletion, generating thesame number of ions in solution. This favors
choice C. Choice Dis invalid, because cations are also in equal concentration, and cations conduct electrons.
Oxyacids
14. Choice A is correct. From the relative acid strengths derived from the pKa values, HCIO4 is more acidic than
HBr04, which in turn is more acidic than HIO4. This same trend is seenwith HOC1, HOBr, and HOI. Because
CI is more electronegative than Br which is more electronegative than I, the trend indicates that the
electronegativity of the halide dictates the relative acidity of an oxyacid. This fact was also given in the
passage. Pick answer A, and feel what it is to becorrect. Choice Capplies tohaloacids, not oxyacids.
15. Choice D is correct. To determine the relative strength of the oxyacids, both the number of oxygens and the
electronegativity of the halide must be considered. HCIO4 is a stronger acid than HIO4, because chlorine is
more electronegative than iodine, so choices A and C are both eliminated. Choice B is eliminated, because
HIO4 is a stronger acid than HBr03, due to the extra resonance structure associated with the additional
oxygen. The best answer is choice D, since it follows both the decline in number of oxygens trend and the
decreasing electronegativity trend.
16. Choice B is correct. For a weak acid solution with [HA]jnjtial > Ka, use the shortcut equation to determine the
pH. The shortcut equation, pH =ipKa -ilog [HA], applies if the pKa lies between 2 and 12. The math is as
follows:
pH =IpKa - llog [HA] =1(7.26) - llog (0.10) =3.63 - I(-l) =3.63 +0.5 =4.13
2 2 2 2 2
17. Choice D is correct. The pKa2 valuemust be largerthan the pKai value, because the first proton is more acidic
than the second proton (by definition), and the stronger the acid, the lower its pKa value. Given that pKa] is
7.8, the value of pKa2 must be a number larger than 7.8. The only answer larger than 7.8 is 12.9, so pickchoice
D, and feel satisfied that you did. The pKb (not pKa) for the conjugate is 6.2, but the question asks for pKa2-
18. Choice C is correct. Since the dissociation reaction is exothermic, heat is given off when forming the products.
Thus when heat is added to the system, it acts as an inhibitor of product formation according to Le Chatelier's
principle. This means that products decrease and reactants increase, as the system is heated. The Ka
(equilibrium constant) is a measure of the products over the reactants, so the value of Ka decreases with the
addition of heat to the system. The best answer is choice C. Choice D should be eliminated immediately.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review0 282
Section IV Detailed Explanations
19.
20.
21.
Choice D is correct. We know HBr02 is less acidic than HC102, since both acids have the same number of
oxygen atoms, and chlorine is more electronegative than bromine. Given that HBr02 is the weaker acid, the
pKa for HBr02 must be greater than 1.9 (the pKa of HC102), so the only answer possible is choice D.
Choice Dis correct. Dissociation refers to the breaking of the bond between the acidic proton and the conjugate
base, so that the conjugate base and a hydronium ion are formed. The greatest dissociation is associated with
the strongest acid. This question is asking for the strongest acid. The strongest acid is the acid with the
greatest number of excess oxygens and the most electronegative central atom. This makes choice D the best
answer. This answer could also have been determined by recalling the six strong acids listed in the text. Only
choice D is one of these strong acids. Astrong acid fully dissociates, while weak acids partially dissociate.
The amount of dissociation can be determined from the Ka and vice versa. For instance, a 1.0M weak acid with
10% dissociation results in 0.90 MHA undissociated acid, and theformation of 0.10 MA" and 0.10 MH3O+ The
equilibrium constant for the dissociation reaction (Ka) is shown below:
K _[H3Q+][A] _(0.1X0.1) _o.Qi ;
[HA]
0.0111
0.9 0.9
Choice C is correct. The volume of the solution does not affect the pH; only the concentration and strength
affect the pH. The first step is to identify the type of acid. Since HCIO4 is a strong acid, it fully dissociates,
so the major source of protons in the aqueous solution is from the dissociation of HCIO4.
pH = - log [H30+] = - log [HCIO4] = - log(0.10) = - (-1) = 1
This best answer is choice C.
Acidity of Thiols and Alcohols
22. Choice Cis correct. Themost acidic compound is thecompound that most readily loses H+. In choices A, Band
D, the hydrogens are bonded to carbon. In choice C, there is a hydrogen that is bonded to nitrogen. The size
difference between atoms is significant only when the atoms are in different rows of the periodic table.
Nitrogen and carbon are in the same row of the periodic table, so they are comparable in size. When atoms are
in the same row of the periodic table, the most important factor to consider when looking at acidity is
electronegativity. Nitrogen is more electronegative than carbon, making a hydrogen on nitrogen more acidic
than a hydrogen on carbon, so choice C is the most acidic. It is a common mistake to not notice that the
hydrogens are all on carbons in choices A and B. Be careful not to make mistakes like this.
23. Choice Bis correct. It can be observed from the data in Table 1 that as the number of methyl groups increases,
the pKa value increases. An increase in pKa is indicative of decreased acidity. Acids are defined as electron-
accepting, so electron-withdrawing groups increase acidity, while electron-donating groups decrease acidity.
This makes choice B correct.
24. Choice D is correct. In haloacids (binary compounds), the acidic proton is directly bonded to a halogen, so
relative acidity can be discerned from the features of the halide. Halogens are in the same column of the
periodic table, so the important factor when considering bonding is the size of the halide. Because iodine is the
largest of the halogens, the HI bond is the weakest, so HI is the strongest haloacid. Pick choice D, and smile to
the world.
25. Choice A is correct. Sulfur and chlorine are adjacent to one another in the same row of the periodic table, so
choices Band D are eliminated. Because chlorine is smaller than sulfur, the increasing size does not correlate
with acidity. This eliminates choice C. Chlorine is more electronegative than S, so CI draws electrons from H
more than S does. This makes HCl a stronger acid that H2S. The electronegativity predicts the acidity best
for atoms in the same row, so pick answer choiceA to get this one correct.
26. Choice C is correct. Table 1 shows that thiols have lower pKa values than their corresponding alcohols, so
ethyl thiol is more acidic than ethanol. Because ethanol is a weaker acid (has a lower Ka value than ethyl
thiol), ethanol dissociates less than ethyl thiol when added to water, and ethanol yields a lower [H30+] than
ethyl thiol. These three facts eliminate choices A, B, and D. Because ethanol is a weaker acid than ethyl
thiol, the conjugate base of ethanol (CH3CH2O") is a stronger base than the conjugate base of ethyl thiol
(CH3CH2S"), making choice C the correct answer.
27. Choice Bis correct. The most electronegative atom that differs from choice to choice is chlorine. This high
degree of electron withdrawal due to chlorine results in an increase in acidity. This implies that because
chlorine is more electronegative than the other atoms, it withdraws electron density the most and thus
increases the acidity to the greatest extent. The answer ofanswer choices is choice B.
28. Choice C is correct. Of the answer choices, the carboxylic acid is the most acidic, because of the resonance
associated with the carbonyl bond. This eliminates choices Aand B. From this point, data in Table 1must be
analyzed. Table 1shows that as the substitution of the thiol decreases, the acidity increases, so the primary
thiol is more acidic than the tertiary thiol. This makes choice C the best answer.
Organic Acids
Passage V (Questions 29- 34)
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
Choice C is correct. The solution is acidic, so the pH is less than 7.0, eliminating choice D. For a weak acid
with pKa between 2and 12 in an aqueous solution with [HA]initiai >Ka, use the shortcut equation to determine
the pH. If Ka is 8x10"8, then pKa is 8- log 8=7-0.9 =7.1. The [HA] is 0.5 M, and log 0.5 =-log 2=-0.30.
pH =IpKa -llog [HA] =1(7.1) - -log (0.50) =3.55 -I(-0.3) =3.55 +0.15 =3.7
2 2 2 2 2
The value falls in the range of choice C, so thebest answer is choice C.
Choice Cis correct. Mass percent is defined as the mass of one component atom relative to the total mass of the
compound. In this case, we are interested in carbon within phenol. Units cancel, so we can use atomic masses.
72gC
mass %carbon= mass of carbon =
x 100% => 72% =^- <22- < Z2. =8o%
100 94 90
mass of molecule 94 g C6H5OH
The mass percent of carbon is between 72% and 80%. Choices Aand Bare too small, while choice Dis too large.
Only choice C, 76.6%, falls intotherange, sochoice Cis the best answer.
Choice Bis correct. When an acid is titrated to its equivalence point, it has been completely converted intoits
conjugate base. The lowest pH value after neutralization is found with the weakest conjugate base, assuming
that the concentrations are all equal. The weakest conjugate base corresponds with the strongest acid (that is,
the acid with the lowest pKa). This is because the stronger the acid, the weaker its conjugate base. Using the
data from Table 1, the acid with the lowest pKa value is choice B, trichloroacetic acid. Pick choice Bplease.
Choice Bis correct. Increasing the number of impurities dissolved into an aqueous solution raises the boiling
point and lowers the freezing point of a solution. The total impurity concentration depends on the solute
concentration, the number of particles it dissociates into, and the degree to which it dissociates. All of the
choices are monoprotic weak acids of equal concentration (1.0 M), so it depends only on the dissociation of the
acid (acid strength). Acetic acid is weaker than p-nitro benzoic acid, so choice Ais eliminated. Tricloroacetic
acid is stronger than p-nitrophenol, so choice Bis correct. Tricloroacetic acid is stronger than benzoic acid, so
choice C is eliminated. Acetic acid is stronger than phenol, so choice D is eliminated.
Choice A is correct. The acid with thestrongest conjugate base is theweakest acid. The highest pKa value is
associated with the weakest acid. Referring to the data in Table 1, the acid with the highest pKa is phenol.
Choice A is the correct answer, since the highest pKa value indicates the weakest acid.
Choice Bis correct. This question appears to be difficult at first glance. However, if you realize that when an
acid dissociates, equal parts of hydronium and conjugate based are formed, then you know that [H30+] =[A"].
All that is required is converting from pH to [H30+], using [H30+] =10"PH. The pH of the solution is 3.7, so the
[H30+] is 10"^-7 =1003 x10"4. Because log 2=0.3, itis true that 1003 =2. This means that 1003 x10"4 =2x10"4.
The [H30+] is 2x10"4 M, and [H30+] =[A"], so[A"] =2x10"4. The correct answer ischoice B.
Electron-Withdrawing Effect and Acidity
35. Choice B is correct. The lowest pH is found in the solution with the greatest amount of hydronium. The
hydronium concentration is affected by the strength and concentration of the acid. The most acidic solution
results from the strongest acid in highest concentration. In this question, p-nitrophenol has a lower pKa than
phenol, sochoices Cand Dare eliminated. Choice Bhas the higher concentration ofp-nitrophenol, sochoice B
is the best answer. Pick choice B for best results and greatest test satisfaction.
36.
37.
38.
Choice Cis correct. The solution is acidic, so the pH is less than 7.0, eliminating choices Aand B. For a weak
acid with pKa between 2 and 12 in an aqueous solution with [HA]initiai >Ka, use the shortcut equation to
determine the pH. The pKa of phenol is 10, and the [HA] is 1.0 M. The log of 1.0 is zero, so the pH is simply
half of the pKa. Half of ten is five, so the pH is 5.0. Choice C is the best answer.
Choice Ais correct. Astronger electron-withdrawing group on the aromatic ring of the phenol makes the
phenol more acidic, thus decreasing its pKa value. As a result, a substituted phenol with an electron-
withdrawing group has a lower pKa than phenol. From the acids listed in Table 1, the acid with the lowest
pKa is p-nitrophenol. The electron-withdrawing group on p-nitrophenol is 02N, so choice A is terrific.
Choice Cis correct. For a monoprotic acid and itsconjugate base, pKa +pKb =14. From Table 1, the pKa value
for p-nitrophenol is 7.2. This means that pKb for the conjugate base (p-nitrophenoxide) is 14 - 7.2 = 6.8. The
correct answer is choice C.
39. Choice C is correct. This problem is a twist on the normal approach (i.e., it's harder than typical problems).
This problem is most easily solved using the shortcut equation, pH =ipKa -llog [HA], to solve for [HA].
pH =IpKa -llog [HA] .-. 6.1 =1(11.2) - llog [HA] =5.6 -llog [HA] .-. 0.5 =-llog [HA], so log [HA] =-1
log[HA] =-1 .-. [HA] =10"1 M=0.10 M
The concentration of the acid is 0.10 M, so the next step of the solution is to determine the moles of weak acid
needed to make 100mL of a 0.10M solution. To make 100mL 0.1 M H3COC6H4OH, 0.01 moles of the acid must
be added to enough water to make100 mL aqueous solution. The final step is to convert 0.010 moles intograms.
The molecular mass of H3COC6H4OH is 124grams per mole, so 0.01 moles is 1.24grams H3COC6H4OH. The
correct answer is choice C.
40.
41.
Choice Cis correct. To convert from pKa toKa, the relationship is Ka =10"PKa. The pKa of p-methylphenol is
10.4 (as given in Table 1). The Ka is therefore 10"10-4 =100-6 x10"11, when expanded into scientific notation.
Given log2=0.3 and log 4=log2+log 2=0.3 +0.3 =0.6. According to theanti logrelationship, 100-6 =4. This
makes the value of Ka = 4 x10 . Pick choice Cand be a successstory in acids and bases.
Choice D is correct. The addition of water dilutes the aqueous phenol solution, but it does not react with the
phenol. Using the relationship, M1V1 = M2V2, the new molarity is found to be 0.10 M. As is becoming the
norm, this problem is most easily solved using the shortcut equation, pH=ipKa -llog [HA].
pH=IpKa -llog [HA] =1(10.0) - llog (0.10) =5.0 - i-(-l) =5.0 +0.5 =5.5
2 2 2 2 2
The correct answer is choice D. Because the solution is acidic, choices A and Bshould have been immediately
ruled out.
Passage VII (Questions 42 - 48) Weak Acid pH Equation
42. Choice C is correct. The shortcut equation, as presented in the passage, works only for weak acids. It does NOT
work with a strong acid. The only strong acid in the choices is hydroiodic acid (HI), which you should know is
a strong acid, because HI is stronger than HCl, a common strong acid. Choice B (carbonic acid) and choice D (a
carboxylic acid) should immediately be recognized as weak acids. Pick choice C for the greatest success here.
43. Choice B is correct. In the first step of the derivation, [H3O4"] is substituted for [A"], as shown in the conversion
from [H30+][A"] to [H3O"4"]2. Thebasic assumption is that when the acid dissociates, equal amounts of H30+
and A" are formed in solution, and the little (10"7 M) H30+ formed from water is insignificant. This makes
choice B the best answer.
44. Choice C is correct. Regardless of the molarity of the weak acid, when the pH of the solution is 2.70, the
[H30+] insolution is10"2-7 M. This means that the [H30+] is equal tosomething x10"3 (where "something" is a
value less than ten). Because [H30+] = [A"] when a weak acid dissociates, it should be concluded that [A"] =
something x 103, which makes choice C the best answer.
45. Choice C is correct. Starting from the Kb relationship for the hydrolysis of a weak base in water, the
equilibrium expression can be manipulated to yield the relationship pOH =-log VKbx[A"]. This relationship
can be manipulated in the same way that the pH relationship was manipulated in the passage to yield the
same type of equation as the shortcut equation, except that it's for a weak base. The logic is that the pOH
depends on the base, hence the formula contains Kb rather than Ka, and [A"] rather than [HA]. This makes
choice C the best answer. Choice Ais applied in general to all basic solutions, but it is not the best answer.
Choice Dmay sound tempting, but that is how the pOH for a weak acid solution is found, not for a weak base
solution.
46.
47.
48.
Choice Ais correct. According to the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, when [A-] > [HA], the pHis greater
than the pKa, because the log of the [A-] to [HA] ratio is a positive value. This eliminates choice B. If pH is
greater than the pKa, then by definition -log [H30+] is greater than the -log Ka, hence log Ka is greater than
the log [H30+] (when both sides of an inequality are multiplied by -1, the inequality sign must be reversed).
Because log Ka is greater than the log [H30+], Ka is greater than the [H30+], making choice Athe best answer.
Choice Ccannot be true, because as pH goes up, [A"] increases as [H30+] decreases, making [A"] >[H30+] at all
points of a reaction after the initial mixing of the weak acid into water. This eliminates choice C. Choice D
can be true only if [HA] = 0, which is physically impossible with the equilibrium constant favoring HA. It
should always be true that [HA] >[H3O4-], which eliminates choice D. The best answer ischoice A.
Choice Bis correct. The greatest conjugate base concentration is found with acid that dissociates to the greatest
extent. The acid that dissociates most completely is the strongest acid, which describes choice B(HNO3), the
only strong acid among the choices. This question is just another way ofasking, "Which acid is stronger?"
Choice C is correct. As the value of Ka increases, the strength of the acid is increasing. As the acid gets
stronger, the degree of dissociation when added to water increases. This causes the conjugate base concentration
to increase, which eliminates choice A. The amount of H30+ increases, which causes the pH to go down and
thus the pOH to increase. This eliminates choice Band confirms that choice Cis the best answer. Because the
acid dissociates more, the amount of HA decreases and the amount of A" increases, causing the ratio of HA to A"
to decrease. This eliminates choice D.
PassageVIII (Questions 49 -55)
Aspirin and Antacids
49. Choice D is correct. Aspirin (acetylsalicylic acid) when added to water dissociates into the anionic conjugate
base and a proton, just like all other carboxylic acids. The dissociation obeys the laws of equilibrium, resulting
in anequilibrium constant known as Ka. Because it obeys the laws of equilibrium, the anion form (more water-
soluble form) is most abundant when the H+ (proton) is removed from solution. The lowest concentration of
protons ([H30+]) is found at high pH. The highest pHresults in the greatest water solubility for the aspirin,
because it exists in its anionic form. This, in essence, is the common ion effect. The best answer is thus choice D.
50. Choice Ais correct. Acetylsalicylic acid has only one hydrogen on the carboxylic acid functional group that is
acidic. All of the other hydrogens are bondedto carbon, which does not make themacidic. The correct answer
for the number of acidic protons is thereforeonly one. ChoiceAis the best answer.
51. Choice C is correct. The first three choices can all neutralize two equivalents of acid, while choice D, sodium
bicarbonate, can neutralize only one equivalent of acid. This means that the most neutralizing strength per
gram is found with the compound having the lightest molecular mass of the compounds capable ofneutralizing
two equivalents ofacid. Magnesium hydroxide has the lowest molecular mass of the first three answer choices.
The correct answer is therefore choice C.
52. Choice C is correct. The molecule that can cause damage to stomach lining is the acidic molecule that ionizes
once within the membrane pocket of parietal cells. The only acidic compound of the choices is benzoic acid,
answer choice C. It is the most similar in structure to aspirin, so it is the best answer.
53. Choice D is correct. Dihydroxyaluminum sodium carbonate is composed of the dihydroxyaluminum cation
(which loses two hydroxide substituents when hydrolyzed), sodium cation (with no basic properties), and
carbonate dianion (which can neutralize twoacidic protons). The net result is that the two hydroxides and one
carbonate can neutralize four equivalents of protons, making choice Dcorrect. You might also consider that Al
carries a +3 chargeand Na carries a +1 charge, so thesumcharge of the bases must be -4.
54.
55.
Choice Dis correct. Acetylsalicylic acid is a carboxylic acid, and carboxylic acids are weak acids. Weak acids
have Ka values that are less than one. The pKa for acarboxylic acid ranges from 2.0 (as seen with the carboxyl
terminal of amino acids) to5.0 (as seen with regular alkyl chains). This results in a range for Ka of 10"2 to10"5,
which yields a Ka that is much less than 1.00. This vague question is best answered by choice D.
Choice Dis correct. Abuffer forms when the conjugate acid and base of a conjugate pair are present in roughly
equal molar ratio. Choices Aand Bshould immediately be eliminated, because the mixtures are made up of
two acids, and not of an acid and base pair. Choices Cand Dinvolve a strongacid and weak base, so thecorrect
choice involves partial titration of the weak base. It is in choice D that an equal molar ratio of the weak base
and its conjugate acid are present. The one equivalent of HCl will convert one of the two equivalents of
acetylsalicylate into acetylsalicylic acid, while one equivalent remains as acetylsalicylate. The equal
quantity of the twocomponents of theconjugate pair results in a buffer (with a pH equal to the pKa of theweak
acid). The best answer is choice D.
Household Acids and Bases
56.
Choice C is correct. The first word in the question is "If", so keep that in mind. The mantra that you chant
about water having a pH of 7 does not apply in this speculative question. If the only hydroxide ion in solution
is formed when one molecule of water loses a proton to another molecule of water, then the hydroxide anion
concentration [OH"] must equal the hydronium cation concentration ([H3O"1"]). This is true within distilled
water. This means that if [OH-] =1.0 x10"6 M, then [H30+] must also equal 1.0 x10"6 M. The negative log of1.0
x10"6 is 6.0, so the pH of the water must be 6.0. The best answer is choice C. For this hypothetical solution, pH
=6 and pOH= 6, which means that pH + pOH= 12, not 14. This may bother your sense of what is right in the
world of acid and base chemistry, but keep in mind that pH + pOH = 14 applies only at 25C. At higher
temperatures, there is more autoionization, so more hydronium and hydroxide are generated. At 37C for
instance, pH of distilled water is 6.8, so pH + pOH = 13.6.
57. Choice B is correct. The hydronium ion concentration in solution can be-found from the pH of the solution.
Because the pH is defined as pH = -log [H3O"1"], the hydronium ion concentration can be found by manipulating
the relationship to yield [HÔ*] = 10"PH. The hydronium ion concentration in a pH= 1.7 solution is 10"1-7 M,
which is therefore roughly equal to 10"2 M. The best answer selection is choice B.
58. Choice D is correct. The volume increases from 10 mL to 110 mL when 100 mL of distilled water is added to the
solution, so the concentration of the acid must decrease by a factor of 11. The log of 10 is equal to 1, so the log 11
is slightly greater than 1. This implies that the pH increases by just a little more than 1.0, because the [H30+]
goes down by a factor of 11. This makes the final pH greater than 3.0. The best answer is greater than 3.0,
which is choice D. This is true only of a strong acid solution. If the solution were an aqueous weak acid, the pH
increase would not be as significant as with the strong acid.
59. Choice A is correct. The hydronium ion concentration in a pH = 2.0 solution is 1.0 x 10"2 M. There are 50 mL
present, so the moles of H+ are found by multiplying 0.010 Mby 0.050 L=5.0 x 10"4 moles H+. Only half the
moles of CaC03 are necessary to neutralize the H+, because it is a 2 : 1 ratio of H+ to CaC03 in the balanced
equation. This means that 2.5 x 10"4 moles CaC03 are required to neutralize all of the hydronium ion (H3O"4").
2.5 x 10"4 moles when multiplied by 100 grams per mole yields 2.5 x 10"2 grams CaC03, which equals 25
milligrams. Choice A is the best possible answer you can choose in a situation like this.
60. Choice C is correct. Windex contains ammonia, which according to Table 2 is a base. An acid can react with a
base, while a base cannot react with another base. The question is thus asking: "Which of the following
compounds is not an acid?" Vinegar, aspirin, and bleach are all listed as acids in Table 1, so they all can react
with ammonia (Windex). The best answer is choice C, Drano, because Drano is a base and not an acid.
61. Choice D is correct. Raising the pH of a solution requires reducing (or diluting) the concentration of hydronium
ion (H30+). Adding distilled water reduces the hydronium ion concentration by diluting the solution. This
makes choice A invalid. Shampoo and antacid are bases, which when added to solution, react with the H3O4"
ion and thus reduce the hydronium ion concentration and raise the pH of the solution. Choices B and C are
therefore invalid. Adding an acid lowers ~ not raises the pH of the solution, so choice D (vitamin C), an
acid, is the only answer choice that will NOT increase the pH of the solution when added. Pick choice D with
a smile.
62. Choice Dis correct. 1.68 grams of baking soda is equal to 0.020 moles NaHC03 as determined by dividing the
1.68 grams by 84 grams per mole. The equation for the reaction shows a1:1 ratio between baking soda and the
hydronium ion for full neutralization, so 0.020 moles of H30+ are required to reach full neutralization. The
molarity of the acid solution when multiplied by the volume of the acid solution must equal 0.020 moles H3O+
The molarity of the acid solution is given as 0.20 M, so the volume of the acid solution must be 0.10 liters, which
is 100 mL. Selecting answer choice Dina situation like this, is the best thing to do.
Stomach Acid and pH
Passage X (Questions 63- 70)
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
Choice A is correct. The formation of a strong acid from a weak acid and neutral salt is unfavorable.
Hydrochloric acid is stronger than carbonic acid, so the reaction as written has AG >0. To carry this out zn
vivo, it must be coupled with some other favorable reaction. As stated in the passage, this process is active
transport. The correct answer is therefore choice A.
Choice Ais correct. The lowest pH is associated with the most acidic solution. Both salt water and distilled
water are neutral (have a pH of 7.0), so choices Band Care eliminated. Carbon dioxide (a non-metal oxide)
when dissolved into water gets hydrated to form carbonic acid (H2C03, a non-metal hydroxide). Calcium
oxide (a metal oxide) when dissolved into water gets hydrated to form calcium hydroxide (Ca(OH)2, ametal
hydroxide). Non-metal hydroxides are acidic and metal hydroxides are basic, so the best answer is choice A.
Choice Dis correct. Acid is capable of oxidizing any metal with a low ionization energy. In this question, only
one answer is correct, so it is better to ask yourself which metal is most easily oxidized (or least stable).
Relying on either trivial knowledge or experience, you know that copper, gold, and silver are relatively air-
stable, as evident by their commercial uses in wiring and currency. All three tarnish over enough time. Zinc
metal is most readily oxidized (more so than hydrogen gas even). The best answer is choice D. If you are
interested in smuggling zinc coins across the border, it is recommended that you refrain from ingesting them to do
so. If you don't know about the relative reactivity of these metals, you just have to take aguess and move on.
Choice Dis correct. This is really a misplaced organic chemistry question. But then again, the passage is on a
physiology topic, emphasizing that acidity and basicity are applicable to many areas of study. Alkanes
cannot be hydrolyzed whether an acid is present in solution or not. Disaccharides, polypeptides, and esters are
all brokendown in the stomach by acid-catalyzed hydrolysis. The best answer is choice D.
Choice D is correct. Consuming water dilutes all solutes (including H30+ in an acidic solution), thus the
hydronium ion concentration is reduced by consuming water. Baking soda can consume some of the hydronium ion
by way of an acid-base reaction. Aluminum metal can be oxidized by hydronium ion, resulting in the formation
of aluminum trication and hydrogen gas. Therefore, choices A, B, and Care all eliminated. Consumption of
solid food induces the release ofhydrochloric acid into the stomach. The correct answer is choice D.
Choice Bis correct. This answer is taken straight from the first paragraph of the passage. 0.030 Mhydronium
has a pH of 1.5. However, in the event you skipped reading the passage, you can solve for the pH by
determining the negative log of the hydronium concentration (pH =- log [H30+]). The pH of a 0.030 MHCl
solution is - log (3 x10"2) =2-log 3. The value is less than 2, but greater than 1. The correct answer ischoice B.
Choice C is correct. Stomach lining is deteriorated by reacting with acid. All of the answer choices except
milk contain acid, so they all promote the decay of the stomach lining. The best answer is choice C. This
question is asking for you to identify which compound is not an acid, so look for th choice that is different.
Lactose is a disaccharide composed of galactose and glucose.
Choice A is correct. The lowest pH results from the presence of the strongest acid in the highest molar
concentration. Hydrochloric acid is the strongest acid (stronger than carbonic acid), and 0.030 Mis a higher
concentration than 0.010 M. The correct answer is therefore choice A.
Tooth Decay and pH
71. Choice Ais correct. The first question is whether the pH of the solution changes. Because fluorapatite is less
soluble than hydroxyapatite, hydroxide anion is released as fluoride anion exchanges for the hydroxide of
hydroxyapatite. When hydroxide anion is released, the pH of the solution increases. Although the pH is
greater than 7.0, choice Cisincorrect, because the pHdoes not remain constant. The best choice is A.
72.
73.
Choice Bis correct. Calcium hydroxide when added to water yields hydroxide anion (OH"), making it basic.
This eliminates choices Aand C. The question is whether it is a strong or weak base. These questions on the
MCAT are tough, because who knows what the test-writer wants? Because calcium hydroxide does not fully
dissolve into water at high enough concentrations, it can be considered a weak base. However, because it reacts
with weak acids, and it does fully dissociate at low concentrations, it must be a strong base. The best answer
beyond any questioning and rational argument you can present is choice B(unless, of course, you wish to choose
D). Onsomequestions, like this one, there are tworeasonable answers, but the writer of the question wants you
to pick just one best answer.
Choice C is correct. Enamel is more soluble in the more acidic solution. Because enamel is more soluble in the
HA solution than the HB solution, the HA solution must be more acidic than the HB solution. Both the HA
and HBsolutions are of equal concentration, so it must be that HA is a stronger acid than HB. This means that
if HA is dissolved into water, it has a lower pH than when HB is dissolved into water. The conjugate base of
HB is a stronger base than the conjugate base of HA. HA has a higher Ka and a lower pKa than HB. This
eliminates choices A, B, and D. Choice C is the best choice.
74. Choice A is correct. The hydroxyapatite dissolves most readily in acidic medium, so the addition of acid
increases its solubility. Thus, the amount of hydroxyapatite that dissolves into solution increases as acid is
added to solution. Addition of base increases the pH of the solution, meaning that choices Band C are the same
answer. The MCAT presents questions like this on occasion. When they have two identical answers worded
differently, eliminate them both. Decreasing the solvent reduces the amount of salt that has dissolved into
solution. The best answer is choice A.
75. Choice A is correct. Sodium carbonate (choice D)should be eliminated immediately, because it is a base. Of
the three remaining choices, both hydrochloric acid (choice B) and nitric acid (choice C) are strong acids. The
aldonic acid drawn is not a strong acid, so choices Band C are eliminated. The structural similarity because of
the CO?H group on both acetic acid and gluconic acid (the aldonic acid drawn) makes answer A the best choice.
76. Choice A is correct. Tooth enamel is a basic substance, so it dissolves fastest in an acidic solution. Table 1 shows
that the solubility increases as pH decreases. This means that the most acidic solution (solution with the
lowest pH) dissolves tooth enamel the fastest. The lowest pH results from the strongest acid in the highest
concentration. The highest concentration is found in choices A and C, so choices B and D are eliminated. The
stronger of the two acids is HCl, leading us to conclude that the 0.10 M HCl solution dissolves the tooth enamel
the fastest. The best choice is answer A.
Passage XII (Questions 77 - 84) Acid Rain and Scrubbers
77. Choice D is correct. In Reaction 1, sulfur trioxide is hydrated. The addition of water (hydration) does not
change the acidic or basic nature of a compound. This eliminates choices A and B. As stated in the passage, the
hydration of a non-metal oxide (a Lewis acid) converts the compound into a non-metal hydroxide (a Bronsted-
Lowry acid). This tells us that choice C is wrong and makes choice D the best answer.
78. Choice D is correct. A non-metal oxide acts exclusivelyas an acidic (and not a base), so it is neither amphoteric
nor an Arrhenius base. This eliminates choices A and B. A non-metal oxide has no protons, so it cannot be a
Bronsted-Lowry acid. This eliminates choice C By having 7i-bonds, a non-metal oxide is a good electrophile,
which makes it a Lewis acid. The best answer is choice D.
79. Choice C is correct. The most acidic compound when combined with water creates the solution with the lowest
pH, although the compound's concentration has an effect on the pH of the solution as well. Metal oxides are
basic, so choice D (MgO) should be eliminated. The three acids formed when choices A, B, and C are added to
water are H2S03 (from S02 and H20), H2C03 (from C02 and H20), and HNO3 (from N205 and H20),
respectively. If you knew that nitric acid is stronger than either sulfurous acid or carbonic acid, then you could
have picked choice C. However, if you didn't know that tidbit of trivia, then you could have determined their
relative strength from their oxidation states and from the electronegativities of their central atoms. Sulfur
has a +4 oxidation state in S02 (and H2SO3), carbon has a +4 oxidation state in C02 (and H2C03), and
nitrogen has a +5 oxidation state in N2O5 (and HNO3). Nitrogen is the most electronegative and has the
highest oxidation state. The nitrogen-based oxyacid has the greatest propensity to gain an electron pair,
making HNO3 the most acidic. Pick choice C.
80. Choice Bis correct. The solution is acidic, so the pH is less than 7.0, eliminating choice D. For a weak acid
with pKa between 2and 12 in an aqueous solution with [HA]injtiai >Ka, use the shortcut equation to determine
the pH. The pKa is 7.46 and the [HA] is 0.10 M.
pH =IpKa -llog [HA] =1(7.46) -llog (0.10) =3.73 -U-l) =3.73 +0.50 =4.23
The best answer is choice B. Choice Acan be eliminated, because HCIO is a weak acid. A0.10 Mstrong acid
has a pH of 1.0. An equimolar weak acid, because it dissociates less than a strong acid, would have a pH
greater than 1.0. Choice Ccan be eliminated, because the pH is less than the pKa.
81. Choice Cis correct. This is a freebie question, if you read the passage carefully. Non-metal oxides arefound in
acid rain, particularly the oxides of sulfur and nitrogen. Choice Ais eliminated, because it is a metal oxide,
making it is basic, not acidic. Choice Bshould be eliminated, because nitrogen is present in the air all the time
and can be found in all rain, not just acid rain. Choice Dis eliminated, because it is neither acidic nor very
abundant in our atmosphere. This means that thecorrect answer is choice C.
82. Choice Cis correct. As theoxidation stateof the central atom in an oxyacid increases, the compound becomes
more acidic. This is because thenumber of rc-bonds between oxygen atoms and thecentral atom increases. This
increase in 7t-bonds results in more electron withdrawal (by way of resonance) from thecentral atom, making it
electron-poor. The compound therefore becomes more acidic. This means that both the oxidation state and the
number of Tt-bonds to the central atomaffect the acidity of the oxyacid, so choices A and Dare eliminated. As
the electronegativity of the central atom in an oxyacid increases, the compound becomes more acidic. This is
because of the inductive effect. The increase in electron withdrawal from the central atom, due to the inductive
effect, makes the central atom electron-poor. This means that the electronegativity of the central atom affects
the acidity of the oxyacid, so choice Bis eliminated. The size of the central atom has no bearing on the acidity
of the oxyacid, because the acidic proton is not directly bonded to the central atom. Tins makes choice Cthe
best answer.
83. Choice D is correct. Because H2S04 has more oxygen atoms than H?S03, it is more acidic. The more acidic
compound has a lower pKa, ahigher Ka, a weaker conjugate base (with a higher pKb), and generates a lower
pH in water. This makes choices A, B, and Cvalid statements. The fact that H2S04 is more acidic than
H2S03 means that H2S04 dissociates more when added to water, resulting in a higher ion concentration, and
thus a higher conductivity. H2S04 is more electrolytic (has higher conductivity) than H9SO3, so choice Dis
an invalid statement, which makes it the correct answer.
84. Choice A is correct. The stronger the acid, the lower its pKa value, so the lowest pKa is found with the
strongest acid. Having more oxygen atoms on an oxyacid increases its acidity, so HN02 and H2S03 cannot be
the most acidic compounds. This eliminates choices Cand D. Sulfuric acid is stronger than nitric acid, which
you can determine from their oxidation states (S is +6 is H2S04, while Nis +5 in HNO3). This makes choice A
the best answer.
85.
86.
Amino Acid pKa Values
Choice C is correct. Lysine is a triprotic acid. The first proton released (from the carboxyl terminal)
corresponds to the third proton gained by the conjugate base. This means that from a conjugate pair perspective,
the pKa-to-pKb relationship is: pKal +pKb3 =14. This is not one of the answer choices, so we next consider the
second proton on lysine. The second proton released (from the amino terminal) corresponds to the second proton
gained. This means that from a conjugate pair perspective, the pKa-to-pKb relationship is: pKa2 +pKb2 =14.
This makes choice C the correct answer; but to finish our discussion of the correlationbetween pKa and pKb, we
must consider the third proton. The third proton released (from the sidechain) corresponds to the first proton
gained. This means that from a conjugate pair perspective, the pKa-to-pKb relationship is: pKa3 +pKbi =14.
Choice Ais correct. At physiological pH, the carboxyl terminal isdeprotonated (pH >pKa (carboxyl terminal))'
so it carries a negative charge. At physiological pH, the amino terminal is protonated (pH < pKa (amino
terminal))' so ^ carries apositive charge. In order for the amino acid to be a cation, the side chain must carry a
positive charge. Arginine has a side chain pKa of 13.21, so pH <pKa. This means that the side chain is
protonated, so it carries a positive charge. Choice Ais the best answer. Choice Bis eliminated, because it is an
anion. Choice C is eliminated, because the side chain cannot carry a charge. Choice D is eliminated, because
histidine is deprotonated (pH> pKa (sjde chain))/ so it carries no charge.
290
87.
Choice D is correct. The difference between thesidechains of serine and cysteine is that serinehas an alcohol
group (O-H), while cysteine has a thiol group (S-H). This means that the difference in acidity lies in the
difference between oxygen and sulfur. Choices Aand Care eliminated immediately, because we know from
their relative positions in the periodic table that oxygen has a smaller atomic radius and is more
electronegative than sulfur. When comparing the acidity of protons bonded to different atoms that occupy the
same column of the periodic table, we find that the most significant factor influencing the acidity is atomic
radius. The best answer is choice D.
88. Choice A is correct. Based on the pKa values in Table 1, aspartic acid (with a side chain pKa of 3.88) is more
acidic than glutamic acid (with a side chain pKa of 4.32). This eliminates choice C and D. A shorter chain
results in the electron-withdrawing NH3+ group's being closer to the side chain carboxylic acid group, which
increases the acidity of the carboxylic acid group. This makes choice A the best answer.
89. Choice D is correct. According to Table 1 in the passage, the pKa values for histidine are: pKai between 1.8and
2.6, pKa2 = 6.05, and pKa3 between 8.8 and 10.6. At a pH of 7.0, the carboxyl terminal and the side chain are
deprotonated, while the amino terminal is protonated. This is because pKa3 > pH > pKa2 > pKa]. Since the
carboxyl terminal is deprotonated, we consider pKb3 rather than pKa-j. Since the side chain is deprotonated,
we consider pKb2 rather than pKa2. And since the amino terminal is protonated, we consider pKa3 rather than
pKbi- This means that the pK values of interest are pKa3, pKb2, and pKb3, making choice D the best answer.
90. Choice C is correct. Normality is defined as the moles of equivalents per liter. Because glutamic acid is
triprotic, it yields three acidic protons per molecule. For each mole of glutamic acid, three moles of acidic
protons can be generated. The normality in this case is the molarity multiplied by a factor of three (N = M x 3).
The molarity is 0.50, so the normality is 1.50. The best answer is choice C.
91. Choice C is correct. Cysteine is neutral when protonated. The side chain pKa for cysteine is 8.36, so at pH = 7.0,
pH < pKa. Under such conditions, the side chain of cysteine is protonated, and thus neutral. Choice A is
eliminated. Histidine is neutral when deprotonated. The side chain pKa for histidine is 6.05, so at pH = 7.0,
pH > pKa. Under such conditions, the side chain of histidine is deprotonated, and thus neutral. Choice B is
eliminated. Tyrosine is neutral when protonated. The side chain pKa for tyrosine is 10.07, so at pH = 7.0, pH <
pKa. Under such conditions, the side chain of tyrosine is protonated, and thus neutral. Choice D is eliminated.
Lysine is neutral when deprotonated (as is the case with the three basic amino acids). The side chain pKa for
lysine is 10.80, so at pH = 7.0, pH < pKa. Under such conditions, the side chain of lysine is protonated, and thus
cationic. Choice C is the best answer, because the side chain is charged.
Questions 92 -100 Not Based on a Descriptive Passage
92. Choice C is correct. The lowest pH is associated with the solution with the greatest hydronium concentration.
The greatest hydronium concentration depends on the concentration and the strength of the acid. To lower pH,
the concentration of an acid may be increased, or a stronger acid, with a lower pKa value, may be employed.
Tins means that the correct answer is a combination of lowest pKa and greatest concentration. Choice A gets
eliminated for having the lowest concentration and a high pKa value. Choice Bgets eliminated, because it has
a lower concentration and greater pKa than choice C. The pH in choice C is half of the pKa + 0.5, which is 1.65
+ 0.5 = 2.15. The pH in choice D is half of the pKa, which is 4.55. Choice C has the lowest pH.
93. Choice D is correct. Acid rain is contains airborne Lewis acids. Non-metal oxides such as sulfur oxides and
nitrogen oxides make up most of the acid rain we study. This means that choice A is an example of acid rain.
Once these non-metal oxides react with moisture in the air, they become hydrated, so acid rain does contain
hydrated non-metal oxides (also known as non-metal hydroxides). A Lewis acid is an electron-pair acceptor,
and non-metal oxides qualify in this category. Choice C is a valid description of an acid rain component. Metal
hydroxides are basic, so they are not found in acid rain. Choice D is the best answer.
94. Choice B is correct. The pH of a conjugate pair is found using the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation. The lowest
pH is attributed to the conjugate pair having the acid with the lowest pKa and the mixture that most favors
conjugate acid. The pKa of ammonium is 9.26 (although you really just need to know it's between 9 and 11),
while the pKa of hydrofluoric acid is 3.17. This eliminates choices C and D. Choice B has more acid than
base, while choice A has more base than acid. The best answer is choice B.
95. Choice Bis correct. For a conjugate pair at 25C, the pKa of the acid when added to the pKb ofits conjugate
base is equal to 14. This question boils down to which of choices represents aconjugate apair. Choice Dcan be
eliminated immediately, because both values are pKa values, and if they happen to sum to 14, it's purely
coincidental. Phosphoric acid is triprotic, so there are three pKa values. The first proton off (pKai)
corresponds to the third proton back on (pKb3), so pKai +pKb3 =14. The second proton off (pK^) corresponds to
the second proton back on (pKb2), so pKa2 +pKb2 =14, making choice Bthe correct answer. The third proton off
(pKa3) corresponds tothe first proton back on (pKbi), so pKa3 +pKbi =14.
H3P04(aq) +H20(1) * ^ *" H30+(aq) +H2P04-(aq)
First proton off/Third proton on .-. pKai +pKb3 =14
pKa2 ,,
H2P04-(aq) + H20(1) * * H30+(aq) + HP042-(aq)
PKb2
Second proton off/Second proton on ,\ pK^ +pKb2 =14
pKa3
HP042-(aq) +H20(1) * R * H30+(aq) +P043-(aq)
Thirdprotonoff/First protonon .*. pKa3 +pKbi =14
96. Choice B is correct. 1.5 MH3PO4 =4.5 NH3PO4, because there are 3 equivalents of H+ per H3PO4. The
normality is found by multiplying the molarity by the number of equivalents. Doubling the volume by adding
pure water cuts the concentration (measured in either normality or molarity) in half. This makes normality one
half of 4.5 N, so choice B, 2.25 N, is the best answer.
97. Choice Bis correct. Because the pHis less than seven, the solution must contain an acid rather than a base.
This eliminates choices CandD. If theacid were a.strong acid, it would fully dissociate in water. This would
lead to ahydronium concentration of 0.10 M, which would make the pH =1. Given that the pH is greater than
1.0, the acid does not fully dissociate, so it is a weak acid. This eliminates choice Aand makes choice Bthe
best answer.
98. Choice Cis correct. The highest pH is found in the solution with the highest concentration of hydroxide.
Hydroxide concentration depends on the compound and its concentration. Choice Ais aweak acid, so the pH is
low. This eliminates choice A. Choice Bis a strong acid, sopHis very low. This eliminates choice B. Choice
Cis the conjugate base of a weak acid, so it is aweak base. Choice Ccould be the correct answer. Choice Dis
the conjugate base of astrong acid, so it is avery weak base, meaning ithas no significant impact on the pH of
the aqueous solution. Because the pH of choice Dis 7.0, choice Diseliminated. The best answer ischoice C.
99. Choice Bis correct. The solution is acidic, sothe pHisless than 7.0, eliminating choice D. The acid is weak, so
it partially dissociates in water. If the acid were strong, it would fully dissociate, leading to a hydronium
concentration of0.050 Mand thus a pHof 1.30. Carboxylic acids are weak acids, sothe pHis higher than 1.3,
This eliminates choice A. The pHisless than the pKa, sochoice Cis eliminated. The only choice remaining is
choice B. Ifyou choose to do so, you can solve for the pH exactly. For aweak acid with pKa between 2and 12 in
an aqueous solution with [HA]initiai >Ka, use the shortcut equation to determine the pH. The pKa is 4.89. The
[HA] is 0.05 M, and log0.05 =- log20=- (log 10+log3)=- (1 +0.3) =-1.3.
pH=IpKa -llog[HA] =i(4.89) -llog (0.050) =2.45 -1<-13) =2.45 +0.65 =3.10
The value confirms that choice B is the best answer.
100. Choice Cis correct. Hydrobromic acid (HBr) isastrong acid, so a0.10 Msolution has a pH of1.00. Choice Ais
valid and thus eliminated. Formic acid (HCO2H) is a weak acid, so it does not fully dissociate. It has a pH
greater than 1.0 but less than 7.0. Choice Bcould be valid, soit is unlikely. To eliminate it with certainty, we
need to do a calculation. We shall hold off oncalculating until wehave evaluated theother answers. Sodium
acetate (NaOAc) is a weak base, soit does not fully hydrolyze. It has a pHgreater than 7.0 but less than 13.0.
Choice Cis invalid, so it is thebest answer. Potassium hydroxide (KOH) is a strongbase, so a 0.10 Msolution
has a pH of 13.00. Choice D is valid and thus eliminated.
Buffers
^* ^^^-t #- rV1>1 ^T a) Buffer Composition
3CC110I1 V b) pH Range for Buffers
c) Buffer Recipe
d) Physiological Buffers
Buffers and __
TTi f"l*C|f"1f\K| a) Quantitative Reactions
1 1LI CILIV711 b) fundamental Curve Shapes
by Todd Bennett c) Plotting a Titration Curve
d) Concentration Effects
pH ( e) Strength Effects
/ 0 Polyprotic Acids
8 85
Eq" Point"06 J Indicators
(
a) Composition and Function
b) Detecting the Equivalence Point
c) Estimating Solution pH
^ nc\
pH =pK^^^^-^^
3.00
0.5 1.0
Equivalents 0.10 M KOH added
n
BERKELEY
Specializingy in MCAT Preparation
%
Buffers & Titration Section Goals
Know how to approximate the pli of a solution using a titration curve.
By knowingthe relative molequantities of what has beenmixedin solution, a pH value canbe
estimatedfromthe positionon a titrationcurvecorresponding to the mixture. This requiresbeing
ableto identifythe shape of a titrationcurvebasedon the components in the mixture.
gfrifc Understand how polyproticacids affect the pH of a solution.
* Polyprotic acids have multiple equivalent points, ofwhich only the last will fluctuate withconcentration.
Know that amino acids are a subset of polyprotic acids. Be able to determine the pH at middle
equivalents points by applying the equation for pi (averaging the two respective pKa values).
'fr
*
Know the key points along all titration curves.
On titration curves associated with stronc reagents, the pH at equivalence is always equal to 7.0.
On titration curves associated with a weak acid or weak base, titrated by a strong reagent, the pH
at the half-titrated point is equal to the pKa of the weak acid. The pH at equivalence can be
approximated by averaging the pKa of the weak acid and the pH of the titrant.
Know the role of an indicator in titration and solution pH.
Anindicator is usedtomake theendpoint of thetitration visible. Anindicator is a species that has
a different color for the conjugate acid and conjugate base. Most indicators are organic compounds
with a great degree of conjugation, and the color is caused by a transition from the k level to the n*
level. Indicators can also oe used to predict the pH of a solution.
Know how conjugate pairs and buffers work.
A buffer is formed when a weak acid and its conjugate base are added to the aqueous solution.
Because there exists an equilibriumbetween the two species, as long as both are present in solution,
the hydronium ion concentration will remain fairly constant, therefore the pH will also remain
constant. The effect is known as "buffering." Youmust understand buffers and now the pH is found
from the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation.
Recognize and be able to generate titration curves for any titration.
Youmust be able to identify the titrant and the species being titrated when you look at the titration
curve. Features to note are the weak acid lip, the strong acicTsigmoidal shape, the ascent (associated
with the titration of an acid by a base) or descent (associated with the titration of a base by an acid)
of the curve, and the number of inflection points (indicative of whether the compound is polyprotic
or polybasic).
General Chemistry Buffers and Titration
Buffers and Titration
A buffer is a solution where pH remains relatively constant after the addition of
either strong acid or strong base. The pH may vary slightly, but for all intents
and purposes, it does not change significantly. Buffers play a major role in
physiology and biochemistry, so understanding how they work is critical. They
can be made in one of two ways. The first method involves combining a
conjugate pair in roughly equal mole portions. The second method involves
partially titrating a weak acid with roughly half of an equivalent of strong base,
or by partially titrating a weak conjugate base with roughly half of an equivalent
of strong acid. The pH of a buffered solution is determined using the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation. The data associated with buffers are generally
easy to work with in a conceptual sense. Titration curves have buffering regions,
so understanding buffers can help you to understand titration better.
Neutralization is the mixing of equal mole portions of an acid with a base,
regardless of their concentrations and strengths. To neutralize an acid, an equal
mole quantity of base must be added to solution. To neutralize a base, an equal
mole quantity of acid must be added to solution. A neutralized solution has
moles H30+ equal to moles OH". Addition of a base to an acid (or acid to a base)
yields water and a salt upon neutralization. This is shown in Reaction5.1:
HX(aq) MOH(l) H20(1) MX(aq)
Reaction 5.1
Depending on the strength of the acid and base, the pH at the neutralization
point (also referred to as the endpoint and the equivalence point in titration)
varies. Neutralization does not mean to make the pH of the solution equal to
7. When the base is stronger than the acid, the neutralized solution is slightly
basic, so the pH is greater than 7.0. When the base is weaker than the acid, the
neutralized solution is slightly acidic, so the pH is lower than 7.0. When the base
and acid are equally strong, the neutralized solutionis neutral, so the pH is equal
to 7.0. The three possible combinations are summarized below.
HX(aq) + MOH(l)
Strong acid + Strong base
Strong acid + Weak base
Weak acid + Strong base
H20(1) + MX(aq)
P**at equivalence = ' -0
pHatequivalence <' -0
pHatequivalence >7.0
The pHis not always 7 at theequivalence point of a titration. For aweak acid
titrated by a strong base, the equivalence point is the point at which it is completely
converted into its conjugate base. The conjugate base will yield a pHgreater than 7
so the pHisgreater than 7at the equivalence point.
The last section in this chapter involves detecting the equivalence point. Visual
indicators that change color upon changing pH are a typical component of any
general chemistry curriculum. They are often highly conjugate organic
molecules. The color associated with an indicator is a reflective color, resulting
from the absorbance of a photon accompanied by the excitation of an electron
from a rc-bonding molecular orbital to a rc-antibonding molecular orbital. The
transition energy changes when the compound gets deprotonated, so the energy
of the photon absorbed, and ultimately the color of light reflected also changes.
Hence, any pH-sensitive chromophore is an indicator.
Introduction
General Chemistiy Buffers and Titration Buffers
Buffer Composition
Buffers are solutions that resist drastic changes in pH. Buffers are made of a
roughly equal mole mixture of a weakacidand its weak conjugate base in an
aqueous solution. Both the acid andthe base oftheconjugate pairmustbeweak
in order to form a buffer solution. This is so that the equilibrium between the
two species can be controlled by the environment. With approximately equal
molar quantities ofconjugate acid and conjugate base in solution, the solution is
resistant topHchange caused bytheaddition ofeitherstrongacid or strongbase
to solution. When bothof the species in the conjugate pair are weak, the buffer
can equilibrate in both the forward and reverse directions of the reaction to
absorb anyhydronium or hydroxide that may be addedtosolution. Addition of
a strong acid tosolution converts theweak base intoits conjugate acid. This has
little to no effect on the pH. Likewise, addition of a strong base to the solution
converts the weak acid into its conjugate base and has little to no effect on the
pH.
Toemphasize theneedforroughly equal portions, the following experiment may
be studied. In this study, three mixtures of acid and conjugate base are
generated. In the first system, weak acid is in extreme excess relative to its
conjugate base. In the second system, the two species are in roughly equal
concentrations. In the third system, weak base is in extreme excess relative to its
conjugate acid. The results are shown in Figure 5-1.
System I: Mix 999 partsHAwith1part A". Tothismixture, add 1part OH".
Initially: -^J-=-- => after addition of 1part OH":-iL=_2_
J [HA] 999 [HA] 998
Because Ka =[H+] x-^-J-, and Ka is aconstant, when -i- doubles, [H+]
[HA] [HA]
must be cut in half, and the pH changes. SystemI is NOTa buffer.
System II: Mix 500 partsHAwith500 part A". Tothismixture, add 1part OH".
Initially: i^J-=52Q.=> after addition of 1part OH_:-^J-=^21
7 [HA] 500 [HA] 499
BecauseKa = [H+] x--, and Ka is a constant, when -- barely changes,
[HA] [HA]
[H+] is constant, and the pHdoesn't change. SystemII is a buffer.
System III: Mix 2partsHAwith998 part A". Tothismixture, add 1part OH".
Initially: i^l =998 rafter addition of 1part OH-:-I^J-=299
7 [HA] 2 [HA] 1
Because Ka =[H+] xJ-, and Ka is a constant, when - doubles, [H+]
[HA] [HA]
must be cut in half, and the pH changes. SystemHI is NOTa buffer.
Figure 5-1
The conclusion is that the pH remains constant only if the weak acid and its
conjugate base areinroughly equal concentration. The addition ofstrongbase or
strong acid shifts theratio of weak acid (HA) to its conjugate base(A"), but the
pH does not change, if the A": HA ratio is close to 1.0.
General Chemistry Buffers and Titration Buffers
pH Range for Buffers
The experiment in Figure 1 explains why the weak acid and weak conjugate base
must be present in roughly equal parts. If they are not relatively close in mole
quantity, then the system does not act as a buffer. According to convention, the
ratio can not exceed 10 : 1. Substituting 10 : 1 and 1 : 10 into the Henderson-
Hasselbalch equation shows us that the range of a buffer is the pKa of the weak
acid 1. The pH of a buffer solution obeys the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation,
which is shown in Figure 5-2.
, [A-] TT ,, , Moles conjugate base
pH =pKa +log-^- .\pH = pKa +log }2
[HA] Moles conjugate acid
Lowest pH =pKa +log-i- =pKa -1 Highest pH =pKa +log!2. =pKa +1
10 1
/. pH range = pKa 1
Figure 5-2
The derivation of the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation from the Ka equation is
on page 264. The Henderson-Hasselbalch equation shows that as [conjugate
base] increases, buffer pH increases. The Henderson-Hasselbalchequation also
shows that as [conjugate acid] increases, buffer pH decreases. It also offers
quantifiable verification of the concept that when pH is greater than the pKa, the
solution is rich in conjugate base.
Example 5.1
If water is added to a buffer solution with pH =3.96, what happens to the pH?
A. The pH increases slightly.
B. The pH decreases slightly.
C. The pH remains the same.
D. If the pH is greater than 7, then it decreases. If the pH is less than 7, then it
increases.
Solution
Addition of water to a buffer equally dilutes the concentration of the weak acid
and its weak conjugate base. This means that the mole ratio of the weak base to
the weak acid does not change upon the addition of water. According to the
Henderson-Hasselbalchequation, the pH of the solutiondoes not changebecause
pKais constant and the fraction has not changed. Theresult is that the pH of a
buffer does not change when it is diluted. This is why the Henderson-
Hasselbalch equationcan be written as moles A" overmoles HA, as well as [A"]
over [HA].
Knowing the buffer range is important when making a buffer, which is
accomplished in two steps. First, an acidwithinthe range must be chosen. The
pKa of the acid should be as close as possible to the desired pH. Second, a
mixture containing both weak acid (HA) and its weak conjugatebase (A") should
be formed so that the two species are in roughly equal concentration. Select an
acid for the buffer whose pKa value lies within the 1 range of the desired pH.
For buffering at pH values between 2 and 5, carboxylic acids are typical. For
buffering at pH values between 8 and 11, amines are typical.
Buffer Recipes
Buffers can be made either by mixing the conjugate pair together, or by partially
titrating either component in a conjugate pair of weak reagents. The partial
titration method can be either to half-titrate the weak acid with strong base, or to
half-titrate the weak conjugate base with strong acid. First, a weak acid must be
chosen with a pKa value close to the desired pH. Buffers can be mixed by any of
the methods shown in Figure 5-3.
1. Weak acid + the salt of the conjugate base in roughly equal mole
proportions (e.g., HCO2H with HC02Na)
2. Weak base + the salt of the conjugate acid in roughly equal mole
proportions (e.g., NH3 with NH4CI)
3. Weak acid and roughly half of an equivalent of strong base (e.g.,
HOAc with half equivalent KOH)
4. Weak base and roughly half of an equivalent of strong acid (e.g.,
H3CNH2 with half equivalent HCl)
Figure 5-3
When using either of the last two methods, titration takes place until the desired
pH is achieved within the buffering region. The buffering region (where the pH
does not change appreciably) is found in the middle area of the titration curve,
between the starting point and the equivalence point. Buffering occurs only with
the titration of a weak reagent by a strong reagent. A strong acid combined with
its conjugate base or a strong base combined with its conjugate acid do not
produce a buffer, so strong acid and strong base titration curves have no
buffering region.
Example 5.2
Which of the following solutions results in a buffer with a pH of 5.0, given that
HA has a pKa of 4.7?
A. HA with one-half equivalent of A"
B. A" with one equivalent of HA
C. HA with one-third equivalent of OH"
D. A"with one-third equivalent of H30+
Solution
The pH is greater than the pKa, so the solution must be rich in the deprotonated
species. In choice A, [HA] > [A-], so the pH is less than pKa (4.7), meaning that
choice A can be eliminated. In choice B, [HA] = [A-], so the pH equals pKa (4.7),
meaning that choice Bcan be eliminated. In choice C, one-third of an equivalent
of A"forms from the reaction, and two-thirds of an equivalent of HA is left over.
In choice C, [HA] > [A~], so the pH is less than pKa (4.7), meaning that choice C
can be eliminated. In choice D, one-third of an equivalent of HA forms from the
reaction, and two-thirds of an equivalent of A" is left over. In choice D, [HA] <
[A-], so the pH is greater than pKa (4.7). Choice D is the best option for those
who like to pick the correct answer. To solve for the exact numerical value, the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation must be employed. The values differ by 0.3,
and the antilog of 0.3 is 2, so the correct answer must form a 2 : 1 ratio of
conjugate base to acid.
Example 5.3
Which of the following combinations, when mixed in the correct ratio, produce a
buffer?
A. NaOH/NaCl
B. NaN03/HN03
C. HC1/KOH
D. NH3/HCI
Solution
Choice A is a strong base and a neutral salt, which does not make a buffer.
Choice B is a neutral salt and a strong acid, which does not make a buffer.
Choice C is a strong acid and a strong base, which also does not make a buffer.
By elimination, choice D is correct. To be a buffer, the weak base (NH3) must be
half-titrated by the strong acid (HCl). Ammonia and hydrochloric acid make a
buffer when mixed in the correct ratio (2:1).
Example 5.4
Which of the following does NOT form a buffer when added to NaHC03(s)?
A. NaOH(aq)
B. HCl(aq)
C. H2C03(aq)
D. H20(l)
Solution
Adding half of an equivalent of NaOH to a sodiumbicarbonate solutionconverts
half of theHCO3" to its conjugate base CO32". The mixture of the two forms a
buffer, so choice A is correct. Adding half of an equivalent of HCl to a sodium
bicarbonate solution converts half of the HCO3" to its conjugate acid H2CO3. The
mixture of the two forms a buffer, so choice Bis correct. Adding an equivalent of
H2CO3 to a sodium bicarbonate solution results in equal portions of the HCO3"
and its conjugate acid H2CO3. Themixtureof the twoforms a buffer, sochoice C
is correct. Adding water does not make a buffer, becausewater is amphoteric, so
it does not convert sodium bicarbonate to either its conjugate acid or conjugate
base. To be a buffer, there must be both a weak acid and its weak conjugate base
present in solution at the same time. This means that choiceD is correct.
Example 5.5
If the ratio of base to acid in a conjugate pair is 3:1, and the weak acid has a Ka =
1.0 x10"5, what canbe said about the pHof thebuffer solution?
A. pH<5
B. pH = 5
C. 5<pH<7
D. pH>7
Solution
If the ratio of base to acid were 1:1, the pH would equal the pKa. Because the
base isinexcess, the pHis greater than the pKa. The pKa is -log 1.0 x10"5 =5.
This eliminates choices A and B. According to the Henderson-Hasselbalch
equation, the pH is log 3 greater than the pKa. Log 10 = 1, and log 10 is greater
than log 3, so pH (= pKa + log 3) < 6. The best choice is C.
Example 5.6
If 1.0 moles of a weak acid in 1.0 liters of water are treated with 0.4 moles of
strong base, what is the pH of the solution? (Ka for the weak acid is 2.0 x10"4)
A. pH<3.7
B. pH = 3.7
C. 3.7<pH<7
D. pH>7
Solution
If the ratio of base to acid were 1:1, the pH would equal the pKa. The pKa is - log
2.0 x10"4 =4- log 2=4- 0.3 =3.7, ashinted at by theanswer choices. To behalf-
titrated, it would require0.5 moles of strong base. At the half-titrationpoint, the
pH =pKa. With only 0.4 moles ofbase, the halfway point is not yet reached and
there is excess weak acid relative to conjugate base (0.6 moles to 0.4 moles).
According to the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, the pH is less than the pKa.
The best answer is choice A. ThepH is less than pKa, which is 3.7. Beaware that
this questioncouldabout the [H+] as well as the pH of the solution. If a solution
is half-titrated, then the Ka = [H+]. This can be tricky, but the answer is found
from the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation. pH =pKa +logO^4-, so pH<pKa.
0.6
Example 5.7
Abuffer made by mixing 100 mL of0.5 MHOAc (Ka =1.8 x10"5) with 25 mL of
1.0MKOHhas a pH approximately equal to which of the following values?
A. 0.2
B. 4.7
C. 7.0
D. 9.3
Solution
There are 0.05 moles of HOAc present and 0.025 moles of KOH present. This
means that exactly half of an equivalent of strong base has been added to a weak
acid, converting halfof theoriginal weakacidto its conjugate base. Half of the
original weakacid remains unreacted. This means that pH =pKa. Thevaluefor
pKa is solved for as follows:
pKa =-log (1.8 x10"5) =-log 1.8 - log 10"5 =-log 1.8 - (-5) =-log 1.8 +5
Log 1.8 is lessthan1,sothepHis greaterthan 4and lessthan5. Choice Bis best.
Example 5.8
A buffered solutioninitially has a pH of 8.31. When five drops of 12M HCl are
added to a 500-mL beaker filled with this buffered solution, what would be
expected for the final pH value?
A. 3.31
B. 8.26
C. 8.31
D. 8.36
Solution
Addinga little acid decreases thepHslightly. Choice Ashowsa lower pHvalue,
but a drasticallylower pH value. The change is small, so the answer is choiceB.
Physiological Buffers
Physiological pH is considered to be 7.4 (although venous and arterial pH vary,
and gastric fluids are highly acidic). The pKa value for physiological acids
should be considered relative to this value in order to determine the structure of
the compound in vivo. When the pH of the environment is greater than the pKa
of the species, it exists predominantly in its deprotonated state. Equally, when
the pH of the environment is less than the pKa of the species, it exists
predominantly in its protonated state.
A prime example of physiological buffering involves carbonic acid, which is used
to buffer the blood of biological systems. Arterial blood is oxygen rich (and thus
carbon dioxide-poor), so it has a slightly higher pH than venous blood which is
carbon dioxide-rich. Carbon dioxide when added to water undergoes the
complex equilibrium shown as Reaction 5.2.
C02(g) + H20(1) ^-^ H2C03(aq) ^=^ HC03-(aq) + H+(aq)
Reaction 5.2
This equilibrium regulates blood pH, so any conditions (or disorders) that affect
carbon dioxide levels in physiological systems also affect the pH and buffering of
blood. For instance, emphysema hinders the uptake of oxygenfrom the lung and
the release of carbon dioxide into the lung. The blood can compensate for the
reduced uptake of oxygen by increasing heart rate and producing more red
blood cells. But the release of carbon dioxide is not as easily adjusted for. The
consequence is that carbondioxidelevelsin the bloodincrease, causingthe blood
to be more acidic than normal. This condition is known as respiratory acidosis.
This can inhibit the binding of oxygen, as is demonstrated by the Bohr effect.
Using the same logic, it canbe concluded that respiratory alkalosis results fromthe
excessive loss of carbon dioxide.
Gastricfluids are highly acidic (richin HCl), so the loss of gastricfluids results in
the loss of acid from the body, producing a conditionknown as metabolic alkalosis.
Loss of HCl can accompany vomiting or the pumping of the stomach. When the
stomachis pumped, the acidic solution that is removedmust be replenished to
reduce the risk of metabolic alkalosis. As a point of interest, food poisoning and
drug overdose patientsare givena solutionof charcoal and water todrink, which
absorbs the organic toxin. The porous carbon matrix binds organic molecules
better than the water, especially compounds with rc-bonds.
Waste products exit the body in a chemicallyneutralized state (and believe me
that if they didn't, you'd notice), so the lower end of the GI track must be basic.
Losing lower intestinal fluids results in the lossof basic metabolites, in particular,
HCO3" (bicarbonate). Diarrhea (which can be caused by Olestra consumption)
results in the loss of basic metabolites, producing a condition known as metabolic
acidosis. The intertwining of acid-base chemistryand physiology is a perennial
favorite on the MCAT. Figure 5-4 summarizes the pH-related disorders of the
body.
Retention ofCO2: Blood pHi .-. Respiratory acidosis
Loss of CO2: Blood pH T .*. Respiratory alkalosis
Loss of HCO3": Blood pHI .*. Metabolic acidosis
Loss of H30+: Blood pH t .*. Metabolic alkalosis
Figure 5-4
General Chemistry
Buffers and Titration Titration Curves
Titration Curves
Quantitative Reactions (Titration Theory)
Acid-base titration is the quantitative addition of a titrant acid to a base in
solution, or of a titrant base to an acid in solution. What is meant by quantitative
addition is that the volumes of acid and base are measured precisely. The
titration is said to reach its equivalence point when the moles of acid are equal to
the moles of titrant base. The volumes must be known precisely in order to
determine the relative concentrations, using the relationship that moles are equal
to the product of volume and molarity. We shall consider two versions of
titration. The first case is the titration of a strong reagent by a strong reagent,
such as strong acidby strongbaseor strong base by strong acid. The second case
is the titration of a weak reagent by a strong reagent, such as weak acid by strong
base or weak base by strong acid. There is no titration of a weak reagent with a
weak reagent, becausethe two weak reagents do not react with one another.
We shall first consider what is in solution at different points during the titration.
The two species canbe mixedin three different ways: excess of one, excess of the
other, or in equal portions. Let us address eachof these scenarios,along with the
initial point of titration. Whenless than one equivalent of the titrant is added to
the original reagent, this mixture is found in a region on the curve before the
equivalence point. When exactly one equivalent of the titrant is added to the
original reagent, this is theequivalence point. Whenmore than one equivalent of
the titrant is added to the original reagent, this mixture is found in a region on
the curve beyond the equivalence point. Table5.1 shows the different conditions
and pH calculations along a strong-by-strong titration curve.
Strong Acid titrated by a Strong Base
Point on Curve Species in Solution pH Range pH Calculation
Initial Pure strong acid pH7 pH = -log[HX]initiai
Before equivalence Leftover H30+ pH<7
pH =- log [H30+]excess
At equivalence H2O & neutral salt pH = 7 pH = 7 at equivalence
Past equivalence Leftover OH" pH>7
pOH = - log [OH-]excess
Table 5.1
When a weak reagent is titrated by a strong titrant, it's different than the strong-
by-strong titration. The difference when dealing with a weak reagent is that a
weak conjugate is formed as the product, so there is an equilibrium between
products and reactants. ThepH calculations must consider all species in solution
that affect the pH. Table 5.2shows the different conditions and pH calculations
along a weak-by-strong titration curve.
Weak Acid titrated by a Strong Base
Point on Curve Species in Solution pH Range pH Calculation
Initial Pure weak acid
pH<7
PH=lpKa-llog[HA]
Before equivalence HA and A" (Buffer)
pKal
pH =pKa+log[A]
V v [HA]
At equivalence A" (diluted)
pH>7
POH =IpKb-Ilog[A-]
Past equivalence Leftover OH" pH>7 pOH = - log [OH"]excess
Table 5.2
Fundamental Curve Shapes
The mixtures listed in Table 5.1 can be studied quantitatively with the help of
graphs. Strong acid and strong base titration curves have distinct features.
Figure 5-5shows the titration of a strong acid by a strong base. We shall call this
Case la.
pH
iEquivalence point (pH = 7)
moles HXinit = moles OH"added
mL strong base added
Case la: Strong acid titrated by a strong base
Figure 5-5
Figure5-6shows the titration of a strong base by a strong acid. We shall call this
Case lb.
Note that strong curves share
an equivalence point at pH = 7.
Equivalence point (pH = 7)
moles OH-init = moles H\dded
mL strong acid added
Case lb: Strong base titrated by a strong acid
Figure 5-6
In Cases la and lb, the equivalence point is at pH = 7.0, because the neutralized
product is a neutral salt formed from the reaction of a strong acid with a strong
base. The graph, although not extended far enough to tell, is symmetric about
the equivalence point. The shape of the curve is referred to as sigmoidal. The
reagent when initially added to water fully dissociates (or in the case lb,
hydrolyzes with a base), giving the highest concentration at first. Over the
course of the titration, the concentration is reduced. This means that the pH
gradually increases during the entire titration, with rapid pH change near the
equivalencepoint. Because pH is measured on a logscale, the graph assumes the
characteristic sigmoidal shape. The reasoning behind this is that as you
approach pH = 7, each change of 1.0 in the pH requires ten times less titrant. For
instance, in going from pH = 1 to pH = 2, the hydronium concentration goes from
0.10M to 0.01 M, a change of 0.09M H3O+ In going from pH = 2 to pH = 3, the
hydronium concentration goes from 0.01 M to 0.001 M, a change of 0.009 M
H30+. The change in hydronium concentration is ten times less when the pH is
one unit closer to 7.0.
Titration Curves
General Chemistry Buffers and Titration Titration Curves
The mixtures listed in Table 5.2 can be studied quantitatively with the help of
graphs. Weakacid and weak base titration curves have distinct features. Case
2a, shown in Figure5-7, shows the titrationof a weak acid by a strong base.
Equivalence point (pH > 7)
Case 2a: Weak acid titrated by a strong base
Figure 5-7
Case2b,showninFigure 5-8, shows the titrationof a weakbase by a strong acid.
pH
Lip-o-weakness
Because [A"] = [HA]
PH = pKa
Note that strong curves share half-
equivalence point at pH = pKa.
,Equivalence point (pH < 7)
Case 2b: Weak base titrated by a strong acid
Figure 5-8
Titration curves exhibit an initial cusp when the reagent being titrated is weak.
This is referred to as a lip-o-zveakness, and may be used to distinguish the nature
of the reagent fromits titration curve. The lip-o-weakness is due to the fact that
the equilibriumbetween weak acid and conjugate base heavily favors one of the
two species, so the pH changes significantly. This can be seen the experiment in
Figure5-1. ThepH at half-equivalence point is always equal to the pKa, which
can be inferred from the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation.
In Case 2a, the equivalence pH is above 7.0, because the neutralized product is a
weak base (the conjugate base of the weak acid). The weaker the acid titrated,
the stronger the conjugate base formed at equivalence, and consequently the
higher the pHat theequivalence point. ThepHof the conjugate base depends on
both the concentration and the Kb of the base at equivalence.
In Case 2b, the equivalence pH is below7.0, because the neutralized product is a
weak acid (the conjugate acid of the weak base). The weaker the base titrated,
the stronger the conjugate acid formed at equivalence, and consequently the
lower the pH at the equivalence point. ThepH of the conjugate acid depends on
both the concentration and the Ka of the acid at equivalence.
The Berkeley Review
Example 5.9
All of the following are a feature of a titration curve in which both reactants are
strong EXCEPT:
A. an equivalence pH of 7.0.
B. a sigmoidal graph shape.
C. the most rapid pH change near pH = 7.
D. a largechange in pH as the first fewdrops of titrant are added.
Solution
This question tests your knowledge about strong-by-strong titration curves.
When both reagents are strong, they neutralizeeachother and leavebehind a pH
=7aqueous salt solution. Thismakes choice Avalid. Because the reagent fully
dissociates (in the case of a strong acid) or hydrolyzes (in the case of a strong
base), the highest concentrations are initially observed. The result is a slow
change inpHuntil justbefore equivalence. This causes thecurve tobesigmoidal
and makes choice Bvalid. The pH change is always rapid near the equivalence
point, so for strong-by-strong curve, the pH change near pH = 7 is the most
drastic. Choice C is valid. The pH of the titration mixture is nearly constant at
the start of the titration. This is to say that a strong-by-strong curve is "lip-free"
in the beginning. Choice D is invalid, and is thus the best answer.
Example 5.10
All of the following are features of a titration curvein which one reactant is weak
and the titrant is strong EXCEPT:
A. a half-equivalence pH equal to pKa.
B. a sinusoidal graph shape.
C. a pH at equivalence that is not equal to 7.
D. a large change in pHas the first few drops of titrant areadded.
Solution
This question tests your knowledge about weak-by-strong titration curves.
When a weak reagent is half-titrated by a strong titrant, half of the original
species in converted to its conjugate. This leaves half of the original reagent
unreacted in solution. Because the two components of the conjugate pair are in
equal concentration, the pH of the solution is equal to the pKa. This makes
choice A a valid statement and eliminates it. A sinusoidal graph implies a sine
wave, which is not observed with weak-by-strong titration curves. This makes
choice B invalid, and thus the correct choice. When a weak acid is fully
neutralized bya strong base, it forms itsconjugate base. This results ina solution
with pH greater than 7. The equivalence pHis not equal to7. When a weak base
is fully neutralized bya strong acid, it forms itsconjugate acid. This results in a
solution with pH less than 7. The equivalence pH is not equal to 7. The pH at
equivalence for a weak-by-strong titration curve isnot 7, sochoice Cis valid and
thus eliminated. Early in a weak-by-strong titration curve, the equilibrium
between conjugates favors the one initially insolution. As a titrant is added, the
equilibrium shifts drastically, resulting in a big change in the hydronium
concentration. Abigchange in the hydronium concentration causes a significant
change in the pH of the solution. This makes choice D a valid statement and
eliminates it.
To understand titration curves better, Table 5.3 shows how the pH is calculated
at different points along a titration. The equations used to calculate pH are all in
Table5.2. The titration represents the titration of a hypothetical weak acid with a
pKa of 5.0 and an initial concentration of 0.10 M. The weak acid is titrated by
0.10 M KOH(aq). The pH represents the solution pH after the titrant base has
reacted with the weak acid in solution. The value points in Table 5.3 are plotted
in Figure 5-9, and by connecting the dots (yes, that's right, studying for the
MCAT involves a little connect-the-dots), a titration curve can be generated.
mLKOH pH calculation pH
0.00 pH -pKa -1 log [HA] -5-1log (0.10) - 2.5 +0.5 - 3.0
2 2 2 2
3.00
1.00
pH=pKa +log mLOH' -5.0 +log10 -5.0-log49
50-mLOH" 49.0
3.31
2.00
pH=pKa +log mLOH" -5.0 +log20 -5.0-log24
50-mLOH" 48.0
3.62
5.00
pH=pKa +log mLOH" -5.0+log5-0 -5.0-log9
50 - mLOH" 45.0
4.05
10.00
PH=pKa +log mLOH" -5.0 +log100 -5.0-log4
50-mLOH" 40.0
4.40
12.50
pH=pKa +log mLOH- -5.0 +log125 -5.0-log3
Y 50-mLOH" 37.5
4.52
25.00
pH-pKa +log mLOH" -5.0 +log25 -5.0 +log1
r r 50-mLOH" 25
5.00
37.50
pH=pKa+log mLOH" -5.0 +log37-5 -5.0 +log3
50-mLOH" 12.5
5.48
40.00
pH-pKa+log mLOH" -5.0 +log40-0 -5.0 +log4
50-mLOH" 10.0
5.60
45.00
pH=pKa+log mLOH" -5.0+log45-0 -5.0 +log9
50 - mLOH" 5.0
5.95
48.00
pH=pKa +log mLOH" -5.0 +log480 -5.0 +log24
50-mLOH" 2.0
6.38
49.00
pH-pKa +log mLOH" -5.0 +log49-0 -5.0 +log49
50-mLOH" 1.0
6.69
50.00
pH _ PKa +pHtitrant _5.0 +13 _18
2 2 2
8.85
51.00
pOH=-log [OHIexcess =-log(o.l0 x-L-) => pH =14 -pOH
11.00
55.00
pOH=-log [OH'lexcess =-log(o.l0 x-M=> pH =14 -pOH
V 105'
11.68
Table 5.3
Initially(at 0.00 mLadded), the pH is found using the shortcut equation. Before
equivalence (from 1.00mL added to 49.00 mL added), the pH is found using a
modified version of the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, where the moles OH"
added are substituted for moles A" (given that the OH" converts to A-) and 50 -
mL OH" is substituted for moles HA, because that describes the leftover HA. At
equivalence (at 50.00 mLadded), the pH is approximatedby averaging pH of the
titrant base and the pKa of the acid. The approximation is off by 0.15, so the pH
column shows the actual pH at equivalence. After equivalence (beyond 50.00mL
added), the pOH is found by taking the negative log mL OH" - 50 (for what is
reacted) over the total volume (50 + mL OH").
Plotting a Titration Curve
The points from Table 5.3 are represented in Figure 5-9as circles. The curves is
drawn to fit the circles. The shape of the curve for a weak acid is distinct. The
buffer region is not perfectly flat, showing that pH changes slightly in the buffer
region. The pH values at 1.00 mL and 2.00 mL are not exact, because the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation does not hold as well outside the pKa 1
range. Nevertheless, the values are close enough to generate a reasonable
titration curve.
10 15 20 25 30
mL 0.10 M KOH added
11.68
35
Figure 5-9
The titration curve should become familiar with enough examples. What makes
curves useful is that theysummarize a great deal of information. If you thinkof
titrationcurves in terms of equivalents and regions, you canextracta substantial
amount of information from them. For instance, when 21.27 mL of 0.1 M KOH
has been added, the pH is roughly 4.7to 4.8. That range is small enough that an
educated guess can be made on a multiple-choice question. Weshall emphasize
using titration curves in lieuof calculating the pH, when it comes tobuffers and
other mixtures.
Titration Curves
Exclusive NCAT Preparation
Example 5.11
What is the pH after 30 mL of 1.00M NaOH(aq) has been added to 100 mL 0.50 M
HOAc(aq)? HOAc has a pKa = 4.74.
A. 3.51
B. 4.56
C. 4.92
D. 5.97
Solution
Because the strong base is twice as concentrated as the weak acid, only half the
volume of strong base (relative to the weak acid) is required to reach the
equivalence point. This means that 50 mL of 1.00 M NaOH(aq) fully neutralizes
the 100 mL of 0.50 M HOAc(aq). The halfway point of the titration is reached
when exactly 25 mL of 1.00 M NaOHfaq) has been added. At the halfway point,
the pH of the solution equals the pKa of the weak acid. The additional strong
base beyond the 25 mL makes the pH of the solution slightly greater than the
pKa of the acid, 4.74. The best choice is answer C. The titration curve below
shows a summary of the intuitive approach:
pH
7"
30 mL NaOH added
pKa- 1< pH < pK
jZ
4
pKa-<pH<pKa + l
A
25
mL 1.00 M NaOH(padded
50
Equi valence
Point
When 30 mL has been added, the mixture is just beyond the half-titrated point on
the titration curve (as shown by the arrow). This makes the pH fall into the
range of pKa < pH < pKa + 1, according to the titration curve. According to the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, the pH equals the pKa + log (conjugate base
over acid). Past the half-titrated point, the concentration of the conjugate base
exceeds the concentration of the acid, so the ratio of conjugate base to acid is
greater than one. The log of a number greater than 1.0 is a positive value. When
a positive value is added to the pKa, the final value is greater than the pKa,
confirming that pH > pKa. These questions should be answered quickly, using
either a titration curve or the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation in a purely
conceptual manner.
Example 5.12
What is the pH after 70 mL of 0.20 M HCl has been added to 50 mL 0.60 M
H3CNH2? H3CNH2 has a pKb = 3.42.
A. 9.44
B. 10.51
C 10.65
D. 11.72
Solution
The strong acid is one-third as concentrated as the weak base, so three times the
volume of HCl (relative to the H3CNH2) is needed to reach the equivalence
point. Thismeans that 150 mLof 0.20 MHCl fullyneutralizes the 50mLof 0.60
MH3CNH2. The halfway point of the titration is reached when 75mL of 0.20 M
HCl is added. At the halfway point, the pH of the solution equals the pKa of the
weak acid. Less than the 75 mL has been added, so the pH of the solution is
slightly greater than the pKa of the conjugate acid, 10.58. The best choice is
answer C. The titration curve below shows how to estimate the value.
mL 0.20 M HCl(aq) added
Equivalence
Point
Example 5.13
What is the pHof a solutionmadebymixing 10.0 mL0.10 MHC02H(aq) with4.0
mL 0.10M KOH(aq)? The pKa for HCO2H is 3.64.
A. 1.34
B. 3.46
C. 3.82
D. 9.36
Solution
Thebest way to solve this question is to think in terms of equivalents. Theweak
acid and titrant strong base are of equal concentration, so 10 mL KOH is one
equivalent (the amount needed to reach the equivalence point.) If 5.0 mL are
added, then the acid is half-titrated, so pH =pKa. However,less than 5.0mLhas
beenadded, so pH is a little less than pKa. The pKa is 3.64, so the best answer is
choice B. Choice A is too much less than the pKa (more than 1.0is beyond the 10
: 1 ratio, which would be when less than 1.0 mL of KOH had been added.)
Titration Curves
Concentration Effect on Titration Curve Shape
The pH of a solution depends on the strength and concentration of the reagents,
so strength and concentration also affect titration curves. The concentration of
the reagents affects the dimensions of the titration curve, but not its basic shape.
A strong-by-strong curve maintains the same fundamental shape (sigmoidal),
but with varying concentrations, the curve may skew and elongate. The
equivalence point is always at pH = 7. A weak-by-strong curve also maintains
its same fundamental shape (i.e., has a lip-o-weakness), but with varying
concentrations, the curve also skews and elongates. The half-equivalence point is
always at pH = pKa.
For a strong acid titrated by a strong base, as the concentrations of both reagents
increase proportionally, the respective curves start lower and finish higher, but
they have the same distance in the x-direction (the mL axis). If the acid
concentration is increased but the base remains the same, then the curve starts
lower and stretches to a point farther from the origin along the x-axis for the
equivalence point. If the base concentration is increased but the acid remains the
same, then the curve finishes higher and contracts to a point closer to the origin
along the x-axis for the equivalence point. This is shown in Figure 5-10.
pH
1.0 M HCl(aq) + l.OMKOH(aq)
O.lMHCl(aq) + 0.1 M KOH(aq)
.01 M HCl(aq) + .01 M KOH(aq)
Note that strong curves share
an equivalence point at pH = 7.
mL titrant strong base added
Figure 5-10
In each titration, the concentration of the strong acid is equal to the concentration
of the strong base, so the volume of base required is the same in each case. This
is why the curves are similar in the x-direction. In the y-direction, the curve
depends on concentration. As the concentration lessens, the curve contracts with
respect to a line through pH = 7. Note that the initial pH is 0, 1, and 2
respectively for the three titration curves. The variation in the concentration of
base also causes the ends of the curves to vary (in the region of excess titrant).
But at equivalence, the pH is 7, no matter what the concentrations are.
For a weak acid titrated by a strong base, as the concentrations of both reagents
increase proportionally, the curve starts lower and finishes higher but advances
the same distance in the x-direction (the mL axis) and has the same buffer region.
If the acid concentration is increased but the base remains the same, then the
curve starts lower and stretches to a point farther from the origin along the x-axis
for its equivalence point. If the base concentration is increased but the acid
remains the same, then the curve finishes higher and contracts to a point closer to
the origin along the x-axis for its equivalence point. This is shown in Figure 5-11.
General Chemistry
On each curve, because
[A-] = [H],pH = p
LOM HOAc(aq) + 1.0 M KOH(aq)
0.1 M HOAc(aq) + 0.1 M KOH(aq)
01 M HOAc(aq) + .01 M KOH(aq)
The equivalence points vary, because higher
initial HOAC concentration leads to a higher
OAc"concentration at the equivalence point.
The approximate pH at equivalence is an
average of the pl^ and pH of the titrant base.
As acid concentration lessens, initial pH
increases, and the size of the lip lessens.
mL titrant strong base added
Figure 5-11
In each titration, the concentration of the weak acid is equal to the concentration
of the strong base, so the volume of base required is the same in each case. This
is why the curves are similar in the x-direction. In the y-direction, the curve
depends on concentration. As the concentration lessens, the curve contracts with
respect to a line through pH=pKa. The initial pH is)- pKa, i- pKa +0.5, and A-
pKa + 1.0respectivelyfor the three curves. The variationin the concentrationof
base also causes the ends of the curves to vary (in the region of excess titrant).
But at half-equivalence, the pH is pKa, no matter what the concentrations are.
Strength Effect on Titration Curve Shape
The examples in Figure 5-10and Figure 5-11 show the effect of concentration on
titration curves. The shape of a titration curve is also a reflection of the strength
of the reagents. When the concentrations are uniform between titration curves,
then the shape of the curve and location of key points give clues as to the nature
of the acidbeingtitrated. As the acidbecomes weaker, thereis a largerinitiallip,
a greater midpoint (where pH = pKa), and a greater equivalence point. This is
shown in Figure 5-12. As acid strength increases, initial pH decreases, and the
size of the lip-o-weakness lessens.
0.iMH22^
, N4-0lMKOH(aq}
0lMHNO3(aq^^
mL 0.10 M KOH(aq) added
Figure 5-12
CIO-
nAMKOH(*q^||OAc-
>N03'
Titration Curves
General Chemistry
Buffers and Titration Titration Curves
Polyprotic Acid Titration Curves
Polyprotic acids are acids which yield multiple equivalents of hydronium ion
(H30+). Three common polyprotic acids with which every test-taker must be
familiar are carbonic acid (H2CO3), phosphoric acid (H3PO4), and sulfuric acid
(H2SO4). Polyprotic titrationcurves have multiple equivalence points, one for
eachdissociable proton. But the protons are removed one at a time, so the curves
for each proton are separate. They should be treated as separate titration curves
that happen to overlapon the same graph. Figure5-13 shows the titrationcurve
for a typical diproticacid,wherebothprotons are weak. Examples that share the
same basic curve shape include carbonic acid, glycine, or a mixture of two weak
monoprotic acidsin the samesolution. Figure5-14 shows the titration curve for
a typical diprotic acid, where the first proton is strong and the second proton is
weak. An examplethat shares the samebasiccurve shape is sulfuric acid. Figure
5-15shows the titration curve for a typical triprotic acid, where all three protons
are weak. Examples that share the same basic curve shape include phosphoric
acid, citric acid, and glutamic acid.
Weak first
proton
pH
Figure 5-13
Second equivalence point
PH = pKa
First equivalence point
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
312
Third equivalence point
The Berkeley Review
Indicators
Indicator Composition and Function
An indicator is an organic compound with extended conjugation. Its weak acid
(protonated) form and conjugate weak base (deprotonated) form have two
distinct colors. The colors of both speciesare reflected colors. The energy state
transition that produces color involves the rc-bonding and rc-antibondingorbitals
and depends on the electron donating and withdrawing nature of substituents on
the rc-system. The lone pair formed upon deprotonation affects this conjugation.
When the pH of the solution is less than the pKa of the indicator (pHsoiution <
pKa (indicator))/ tne indicator exists predominantly in its protonated form (H
Ind > Ind"). If this is true, the solution assumes the hue of the protonated form of
the indicator (HInd). When the pH of the solution exceeds the pKa of the
indicator (pHsoiuti0n >pKa (indicator))/tne indicator exists predominantly in its
deprotonated form (Ind" > HInd). If this is true, the solution assumes the hue
of the deprotonated form of the indicator (Ind'). When the pH of the solution is
equalto the pKa of theindicator (pHsoiution =pKa (indicator))/ meindicator exists
equally in its protonated and deprotonated forms ([HInd] = [Ind']). If this is
true, the solution assumes a hue that is the result of a mixture of the protonated
and deprotonated forms of the indicator. When the pH of the solution is near the
pKa of the indicator, the color varies with small changes in pH. Reaction 5.3
represents the dissociation of an indicator in water.
HInd
yellow
H+
Reaction 5.3
Ind"
blue
Table 5.4 shows the pH effects on the generic indicator in Reaction 5.3, along
with a ratio of protonated-to-deprotonated species, and the color of the indicator.
pHsoiution Ratio of HInd to Ind" Mixture of colors to form solution color
pKa + 3.0 1:1000 1 yellow : 1000blue .-. blue
pKa + 2.0 1:100 1 yellow : 100blue /. blue
pKa +1.0 1:10 1 yellow: 10 blue .*. greenish blue
pKa + 0.7 1:5 1 yellow: 5 blue .*. blue-green
pKa + 0.3 1:2 1 yellow : 2 blue /. bluish green
pKa 1:1 1 yellow: 1 blue .*. green
pKa-0.3 2:1 2 yellow : 1 blue .\ yellowish green
pKa-0.7 5:1 5 yellow : 1 blue ,\ yellow-green
pKa-1.0 10:1 10 yellow : 1 blue /. greenish green
pKa-2.0 100:1 100 yellow with 1 blue .\ yellow
pKa - 3.0 1000:1 1000 yellow with 1 blue /. yellow
Table 5.4
When the solution is bluish green, it can be concluded that the pH of the solution
is slightly (about 0.2 to 0.4 times) greater than the pKa of the indicator. This
means that the pH of the solution can be approximated from the color of the
solution. The color change range (and thus the useful range) of an indicator is
pKa(Indicator) 1- An indicator is generally used for one of two purposes. The
first is to detect the endpoint of a titration, and the second is to approximate the
pH of a solution by observing the color of the indicator in the solution.
Indicators
General Chemistry
Indicators
Detecting the EquivalencePoint (UsingIndicators)
Indicators make the equivalence point of a titration visible, either by converting
from an uncolored species to the colored conjugate or by converting from one
colored species to its conjugate, which has a different color. An indicator
changes color at a pHnear theequivalence point of the titration. The change in
color can thus be used to determine the equivalence point. Indicators are added
in small quantities, so they do not interfere with the titration. The pH of the
solution thus dictates the color of the indicator. As the titration approaches
equivalence, the pH changes rapidly, so the color changes rapidly. A color
change indicates that equivalence has been reached, if the correct indicator is
chosen.
The ideal scenario for an indicator is when the pH at equivalence equals the pKa
of the indicator. The range of a color change for an indicator is centered on its
pKa. For the titration of a weak acid with a strong base, the pH at the
equivalence point may not be known exactly, so a best approximation of the
equivalence pH must be made. When approximating the equivalence pH,
consider that the pH at equivalence is greater than the pKa of the weak acid
being titrated, but less than the pH of the strong base being added. The pH at
equivalence lies roughly halfwaybetween the pKa of the acid and the pH of the
base being added. Agood approximation of the pH at equivalence is an average
of the pKa of theweakacid and the pHof the titrant strongbase. ThepKa of the
indicator should be somewhere around (within 1 unit) the average of the pKa
of the acid being titrated and the pH of the strong base. For the titration of a
weak base with a strong acid, the pH at the equivalence point is less than the pKa
of the conjugate acid of the weak base being titrated. The pKa of the indicator
should be somewhere around (within 1 unit) of the average of the pKa of the
conjugate acidof the weakbase being titrated and the pH of the strong acid. The
active range for an indicator is represented by the two titration curves in Figure
5-16 and Figure 5-17.
pH = pK^(acid)
Indicator
region
pH at equivalence point > 7.0
Best scenario: pHequivaience =pKa(indicator) 1
PKa(acid) +PH(titrant base) v . ,
Best approximation: = Pâ(indicator) 1
Choosing an indicator for the titration of a weak acid by a strong base
Figure 5-16
pH
pH =pl^(acid) " N.
7"
\ Equivalence
\ point
V i
pH at equivalencepoint <7.0 %^
Best scenario: pHequivalence =pKa(indicator) 1
Indicator
region
Best approximation:
pKa(conjugate acid) +P^(titrant acid)
= pK
a(indicator)
1
Choosing an indicator for the titration of a weak base by a strong acid
Figure 5-17
You should make note of the fact that the pH at equivalence for the titration of a
weak acid by a strong base can be approximated quite closely by averaging the
pKa of the weak acid with the pH of the titrant strong base. This value will be
within 0.5 of the actual value, meaning that for the titration of acetic acid by
sodium hydroxide, the pKa of the indicator should be greater than seven
(somewhere around nine.) As the titration is carried out, the pH of solution
increases; thus, the indicator starts out in its protonated form and eventually
become deprotonated. For the sample indicator in Reaction 5.2, the solution
would go from yellow to green to blue.
For the titration of a weak base by a strong acid, the pH at equivalence can be
approximated by averaging the pKa of the conjugate acid of the weak base with
the pH of the titrant strong acid. This means that for the titration of ammonia by
hydrochloric acid, the pKa of the indicator should be less than 7.0 (somewhere
around 5.0.) As the titration is carried out, the pH of solution decreases; thus, the
indicator starts out in its deprotonated form and eventually becomes protonated.
For the sample indicator in Reaction 5.3, the solution would go from blue to
green to yellow.
Indicators
315
General Chemistry
Indicators
Estimating Solution pH (using Indicators)
For a solution of unknown pH, if the pH is withinone unit of the pKa of the
indicator, then the hue of the indicator can be used to estimate the pH of the
solution. Consider an indicator with a pKaof 6.83 that is used to test pool water.
It isyellow when protonated and red when deprotonated. Table 5.5 can be used
to estimate the pH of the pool water.
pHsoiution
pH > 7.83
pH = 7.83
pH = 7.53
pH = 7.13
pH = 6.83
pH = 6.53
pH = 6.13
pH = 5.83
pH<5.83
Ratio of HInd to Ind"
1:10+
1:10
1:5
1:2
1:1
2:1
5:1
10:1
10+:1
Solution Color
Red
Orangish red
Red-orange
Reddish orange
orange
Yellowish orange
Yellow-orange
Orangish yellow
Yellow
Table 5.5
If the results of the pool water test is red, the water isbasic; andbecause red is
outside the color change range, the exact pHcannot be approximated. If the
results of the pool water test is yellow, then someone has left some acid in it.
Most people are aware that yellow pool water has some acid init, and it should
not be swumin. Theidealcolor is orangewith a slight hint of red. Indicators are
used inpHtest kits for swirrrming pools and fish tanks. The kits usually contain
more than oneindicator, increasing theaccuracy of theapproximation. All ofthe
indicators in sucha test kit shouldhave pKa valuesbetween6.0 and 8.0, because
the pHof the water should be around 7.0. Indicators arealso used in pHtest
sticks, where a series of threeor four indicatorsare on the stick. The pKavalues
oftheindicators differ byroughly two units. This allows for a wider range ofpH
values from which one can correlate the color to the solution pH. For instance, a
pHstick with three indicators, with pKa values of5.05,6.98, and 9.11, has a range
ofroughly 4.05 to10.11. This isbecause each indicator hasa two-pH-unit range.
Example 5.14
Given the following indicators ona pHstick, what is thepHof a solution that
yieldsX: red, Y: blue, and Z: red?
Indicator X: pKa =4.96; when deprotonated, it goes from yellow tored
Indicator Y: pKa =7.01; when deprotonated, it goes from yellow toblue
Indicator Z: pKa =8.98; when deprotonated, it goes from redtoblue
A. 5
B. 6
C. 7
D. 8
Solution
Because Indicator Yis blue, the pH must be at least one unit greater than 7.01
(the pKa of Indicator Y). Because Indicator Zisred, the pHmust beat least one
unit less than 8.98 (the pKa ofIndicator Z). The only value greater than 7.01 and
less than 8.98 is 8, choice D.
316
The Berkeley Review
Buffers
and
Titration
Passages
15 Passages
100 Questions
Suggested Buffers and Titration Passage Schedule:
I: After reading this section and attending lecture: Passages I, IV, VII, VIII & XI
Following Task I: Passages II, III, V, VI, IX, & XIV (41 questions in 53 minutes)
Review: Passages X, XII, XIII, & XV
Focus on reviewing the concepts. Do not worry about timing
II
III
R-E-V-I.E'W
isipiii^
I. Buffer pH and Weak Acids
II. Buffer Composition
III. Buffer Chart and pKa Chart Passage
IV. Molecular Weight from neutralization of an Organic
V. Conjugate Pair Titration Curve
VI. Titration Curves and Concentration Effects
VII. Titration Curves and Strength Effects
VIII. normality and neutralization
IX. Titration Curve of a Polyprotic Acid
X. Carbonate Titration Curve
XI. Indicator Selection
XII. Indicator Color and Solution pH
XIII. Indicator Table
XIV. pH Sticks and Indicators
XV. Acidity and Electronic Influences
Buffers and Titration Scoring Scale
84 - 100 13- 15
66-83 10 - 12
47 -65 7 -9
34-46 4-6
1 -33 1 -3
(1 -7)
(8- 14)
(15 -21)
Acid (22 - 29)
(30 - 36)
(37 - 42)
(43 - 49)
(50 - 56)
(57 - 63)
(64 - 70)
(71 -76)
(77 - 83)
(84 - 89)
(90 - 96)
(97 - 100)
An integral part of any biological study conducted in
vivo is the accurate simulation of body conditions with as
much precision as possible. As important as any factor to
biological systems is pH. To accommodate the need for a
constant and accurate pH, organisms of all types use buffers
to maintain a relatively constant internal pH range. A buffer
exists when there is both a weak acid and its weak conjugate
base present in solution in roughly equal molar
concentrations. It is important that both the acid and the base
be water-soluble and exhibit no side reactions. Organic acids
and their conjugate bases are best for this purpose.
The Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, Equation 1, is used
to calculate the value of the pH for a buffer.
PH =pKa +log**l
[Acid]
Equation 1
In human blood, a buffer of bicarbonate and carbonic acid
exists. Inorganic phosphates also play a role in buffering
within the body. The buffer must have a pH that is relatively
close to 7.4, known as biological pH. This can be simulated
in the lab by starting with a weak acid whose pKa is as close
to 7.4 as possible. After the acid has been added to water, the
solution is titrated with strong base until a pH of 7.4 is
obtained. This method ensures an accurate value. Buffers can
also be made by mixing equal molar portions of the weak
acid and its conjugate base (the conjugate base may come in
its salt form). The pH equals the pKa of the acid when a
buffer is made with equal molar portions of acid and
conjugate base.
1. What is the pH of a solution made by adding 0.839
grams NaHC03(s) (MW = 83.9 grams/mole) to 100 mL
0.10MH2CO3(aq)?
pKaj=6.4 pKa2=10.8
A. 3.20
B. 6.40
C. 8.60
D. 10.80
2. Which of the following pH values is the BEST choice
for the pH of a buffer initially at pH = 7.21 after HCl
has been added?
A. 7.14
B. 7.21
C. 7.28
D. 8.31
3. What should be mixed to make a pH = 4.2 buffer?
pKa(benzoic acid) = 4.2
A. 10 grams C6H5CC>2Na + 10 grams C6H5C02H
B. 10 mL 0.10 M C6H5CO2H + 5 mL 0.10 M NaOH
C. 10 mL 0.10 M C6H5CO2H + 10 mL 0.10 M
NaOH
D. 10 mL 0.10 M C6H5C02H + 15 mL 0.10 M
NaOH
4. How many mL of 0.20 M NaOH must you add to 50
mL of 0.10 M HF to produce a solution with a pH of
3.3? (pKa = 3.3)
A. 10.0 mL
B. 12.5 mL
C. 16.7 mL
D. 25.0 mL
5. What is the acetate anion concentration in a solution
made by mixing 20 mL 0.30 M HOAc with 10 mL 0.30
MNaOH?
A. 0.07MH3CCO2-
B. O.IOMH3CCO2-
C. 0.15MH3CCO2-
D. 0.20MH3CCO2-
6. Which of the following combinations produces a buffer?
A. 10 mL 0.25 M NH3(aq) + 20 mL 0.25 M HCl(aq)
B. 20 mL 0.25 M NH4Cl(aq) + 10 mL 0.25 M
HCl(aq)
C. 10 mL 0.25 M NH3(aq) + 20 mL 0.25 M NaOH(aq)
D. 20 mL 0.25 M NH4Cl(aq) + 10 mL 0.25 M
NaOH(aq)
What is the pH of 100 mL of 0.10 M propanoic acid,
pKa(propanoic acid) = 5.0?
A. 2.5
B. 3.0
C. 5.0
D. 6.0
A buffer is composed of a weak acid and its conjugate
base. In an effective buffer, the ratio of the conjugate pair
must be less than 10:1, in favor of either component.
According to Equation 1, when the two components of the
conjugate pair are roughly equal in concentration, the pH of
the solution is approximately the pKa of the weak acid.
pH = pKa + log
[Base]
[Acid]
Equation 1
Abuffer is capable of consuming any acid or base that is
added to solution. The pH of an aqueous buffer solution
changes only slightly after an acid or base is added. This is
because there is an equilibrium between the conjugates.
Table 1lists a series of weak acids and conjugate bases, along
with the pKa values for each acid. The pKa value of the
weak acid and the acid-base ratio can be used to determine the
pHof a bufferfrom Equation 1.
Weak Acid
Conjugate Base pKa value
CIH2CCO2H CIH2CC02K 2.82
HF NaF 3.19
HC02H HC02Na 3.64
H3CCOCO2H H3CC0C02Na 3.86
C6H5C02H C6H5C02K 4.19
C6H5NH3C1 C6H5NH2
4.62
H3CCO2H H3CC02Na 4.74
C5H5NHCI C5H5N 5.16
4-N02C6H4OH
4-N02C6H40K 7.15
HCIO KCIO 7.49
HBrO KBrO 8.67
NH4CI
NH3 9.26
C6H50H C6H5OK 10.01
H3CNH3CI H3CNH2
10.56
Table 1
To make a buffer, an acid must be chosen that has a pKa
value within one unit of the target pH. The closer the pKa
value is to the pH, the better the buffer. Buffers are made
either by mixing the weak acid with itsconjugate base, or by
partially titrating either the weak acid with strong base, or the
weak conjugate base with strong acid. When the pH exceeds
the pKa, there is more conjugate base present insolution.
8. Which mixture does NOT produce a buffer?
A. H3CCO2H with 2 equivalents of H3CCO2K
B. NH3 with 2 equivalents of NH4CI
C. H2CO3 1.5equivalents of KOH
D. H3CNH2 with 1.5 equivalents of HCl
320
9. What is the pH of a solution that contains two parts
weakacid and one part conjugatebase?
A. pKa(weak acid) + 2
B. pKa(weak acid) +'g 2
C. pKa(weak acid)" 2
D. pKa(weak acid) - 'og 2
10. At which of the following pH values would it be
MOST difficult to establish a pH buffer?
A. 1.0
B. 3.0
C. 5.0
D. 7.0
11. A buffered solution is BEST described as an aqueous
solution where the:
A. hydronium and hydroxide concentrations are equal.
B. hydronium-to-hydroxide concentration ratio never
exceeds 10:1 or is less than 1:10.
C. hydronium and hydroxide concentrations are
relatively constant.
D. hydronium-to-hydroxide concentration ratio is
within one unit of the pKa value for the weak acid.
12. Addition of 1.00 mL of 0.10 M KOH(aq) to a solution
made by mixing 15.00 mL0.10 M H3CC02H^/J with
10.00 mL 0.10 M U^CC02^n(aq) results in:
A . a solution with a pH less than 3.74.
B. a solution with a pH between 3.74 and 4.74.
C. a solution with a pH between 4.74 and 5.74.
D. a solution with a pH greater than 5.74.
13. In which solution is there the LARGEST ratio ot
conjugatebase to conjugate acid?
A . A solution of HC02H and HC02" with pH = 4.00
B. A solution of HCIO and CIO" with pH = 7.00
C . A solution of HBrO and BrO" with pH = 8.50
D. A solution of NH3 and NH4+with pH = 9.50
14. After 5.00 mL H20f7J has been added to 50.00 mL of a
buffered solution with pH initially at 5.0, the pH:
A. drops slightly.
B. remains constant.
C. increases slightly.
D. increases drastically.
Buffers are aqueous solutions of weak acids and their
conjugate base. The pH of solution is dictated by the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation: pH = pKa + log base/acid.
This means that a buffer solution should be mixed in a
manner where the pKa of the acid is close to the pH desired.
Table 1 lists the Ka and pKa values for some common
monoprotic weak acids:
Acid Ka value pKa value
H2NCONH3+ 6.6 x 10"1 0.18
HF
6.8 x 10"4 3.17
HCNO
3.5 x 10"4 3.49
HC02H
1.7 x 10-4 3.78
H3CCOC02H
1.4 x 10"4 3.89
C6H5C02H
6.5 x 10"5 4.19
C6H5NH3+ 2.3 x 10"5 4.64
H3CCO2H
1.8 x 10'5 4.74
C5H5NH+ 7.1 x lO'6 5.16
HCIO
3.5 x lO'8 7.49
B(OH)3
5.9 x 10-10 9.22
NH4+ 5.6 x 10"10 9.26
HCN
4.9 x lO'10 9.32
H3CNH3+ 2.2 x lO"11 10.66
(H3C)2NH2+ 1.9 x lO'11 10.77
Table 1
Polyprotic acids can also be used in making buffers. A
difficulty that arises with polyprotic acids involves the two or
more pKa values. For any given polyprotic acid, the
conjugate pair will buffer at the respective pKa for the acid of
the conjugate pair. For instance, carbonate/bicarbonate will
buffer at a pH around 10.8 because pKa2 of carbonic acid is
10.81. Carbonic acid/bicarbonate will buffer at a pH around
6.4 because pKaj of carbonic acid is 6.37. Table 2 lists the
Ka values for some common polyprotic acids:
Acid Kal value Ka2 value Ka3 value
H2C204
5.6 x lO'2 5.1 x lO'5
H2SO3 1.3 x 10"2 6.3 x 10"8
H3P04
6.9 x lO"3 6.2 x 10"8 4.8 x lO'13
H2C03
4.3 x lO'7 1.5 x 10"n
H2S
8.9 x 10"8 3.8 x lO'13
Table 2
As a point of interest, carbonates and phosphates are
believed to be the major contributors to buffering in human
blood. For years it was believed that carbonate played the
major role, but recent research indicates that phosphate may
play a more significant role than carbonate in the overall
buffering. Within the kidneys, phosphates are known to play
a significant role.
15. Combining all of the following results in a buffer with
pH = 9.5 EXCEPT:
A . 1.8 equivalents NH3 with 1.0 equivalents NH4+.
B. 1.6 equivalents NaCN with 1.0 equivalents HCN.
C. 0.7 equivalents HCl with 1.0 equivalents NH3.
D. 0.65 equivalents NaOH with 1.0 equivalents HCN.
16. To make a buffer at pH = 10.83, which of the following
should be mixed?
A. One-half equivalent of NaOH with one equivalent
of H2CO3
B. One and one-half equivalents of NaOH with one
equivalent of H2CO3
C. One and one-half equivalents of NaOH with one
equivalent of H3PO4.
D. Two and one-half equivalents of NaOH with one
equivalent of H3P04
17. Which of the following solutions forms a buffer with a
pH greater than 7.0?
A. One and one-half equivalents of KOH with one
equivalent of H2C204
B. One-half equivalent of KOH with one equivalent of
H2CO3
C. One-half equivalent of KOH with one equivalent of
HCIO
D. One-half equivalent of HCl with one equivalent of
C5H5N
18. Which of the following mixtures would NOT result in a
solution with pH = 4.00?
A. Excess HCO2" mixed with HCO2H
B. Excess C6H5NH3+ mixed with C6H5NH2
C. Excess C6H5C02- mixed with C6H5CO2H
D. Excess H3CCOC02_ mixed with H3CCOCO2H
19. Carbon dioxide when dissolved into the blood forms
carbonic acid. What is observed in C02-enriched blood?
A. The pH is less than 7.4.
B. The [P043_] increases.
C. The [HCO3"] decreases.
D. The [H30+] decreases.
20. In which of the following solutions is the conjugate
base in GREATER concentration than the acid?
A. HF(aq) with F"(aq) at pH = 3.00
B. H2C03(aq) with HC03"(aq) at pH= 6.00
C. HC204-(aq) with C2042-(aq) atpH =4.00
D. H2P04"(aq) with HP042-(aq) at pH =8.00
21. Biological pH is approximately 7.4. Which of the
following is NOTtrue about theconcentration of buffer
species at this pH?
A. [HCO3-] > [H2C03]
B. [HCO3I >[C0321
C. [H2P04-] > [HPO42-]
D. [HP0421 > [PO43-]
322
The formula weight of an acid can be determined by
titration, using a strong base of known concentration. The
process involves the titration of an exact mass of some
unknown acid. Once enough base has been added to reach
equivalence, the moles of base added are used todetermine the
moles of acid that were present in the solution initially. The
mass of the acid divided by the moles of the acid gives the
formula weight for the acid, not the molecular weight. Often
both weights are the same, but a difference arises if the
unknown is a polyprotic acid. Only when the acid is
monoprotic is the formula weight equal to the molecular
weight. Table 1 shows some phenols with their respective
pKa values. All of the phenols are solids at room
temperature andare monoprotic acids.
Structure
Formula pKa
02NU^ \- OH
P-O2NC6H4OH 7.2
"VQ-oH
P-H3CCOC6H4OH 8.4
Qkoh
C6H5OH 10.0
^-o^
p-H3CC6H4OH 10.4
h3co-^ y~m
p-H3COC6H5OH 11.2
Table 1
If the molecular mass of an acid is known, the pH of a
solution can be calculated from its gram concentration in
solution. To do this requires converting from grams into
moles. Once the concentration is known, the shortcut
equation, Equation 1, may be used toquickly calculate the pH
of the aqueous solution of the acid:
pH =1 pKa -1 log [HA]
2 2
Equation 1
22. 1.0 gram of which of the above acids requires exactly
30.0 mL of 0.20 M NaOH to reach equivalence?
A . Acetic acid (H3CC02H) MW = 60
B. Trichloroacetic acid (CI3CCO2H) MW = 151.5
C. p-nitro benzoic acid (02NC6H4C02H) MW=167
D. Benzoic acid (C6H5C02H) MW = 122
23. If 1.0 gram of an unknown acid requires exactly 40.00
mL of 0.25 M NaOH to reach the equivalence point,
what is the formula weight for the unknown acid?
A. 50 grams per mole
B. 80 grams per mole
C. 100 grams per mole
D. 125 grams per mole
2 4. Consider this graph:
mL of titrant
The graph represents the titration of:
A. H3CCO2H by NaOH.
B. HCl by NaOH.
C. NH3 by H3CCO2H.
D. NH3byHCl.
25. Which of the following indicators would be BEST for
the titration of p-nitrophenol(02NC6H40H) by NaOH?
A. Thymol blue (pH range of color change is 1.2 to
2.8)
B. Methyl red (pH range of color change is 4.6 to 5.8)
C. Bromthymol Blue (pH range of color change is 6.0
to 7.6)
D. Phenolphthalein (pH range of color change is 8.0
to 9.6)
26. Which of the following mixtures results in a buffered
solution?
A. 10 mL 0.25 M NaOH + 10 mL 0.25 M H3CC02H
B. 20 mL 0.25 M NaOH + 10 mL 0.25 M H3CC02H
C. 10 mL 0.25 M NaOH + 20 mL 0.25 M H3CC02H
D. 10 mL 0.25 M HCl + 10 mL 0.25 M H3CCO2H
2 7. The BEST choice for a pH = 8.5 buffer would be which
of the following?
A. O2NC6H4OH with less than one full equivalent of
NaOH
B. H3COC6H4OH with less than one full equivalent
of NaOH
C. H3CC6H4OH with less than one full equivalent of
NaOH
D. H3CCOC6H4OH with less than one full equivalent
of NaOH
28. What is the formula weight (equivalent weight) of
oxalic acid (HO2CCO2H)?
A. 45 grams per mole
B. 90 grams per mole
C. 135 grams per mole
D. 180 grams per mole
29. 25.0 mL of an unknown acid when titrated by exactly
30.0 mL of 0.100 M KOH(aq), requires seven drops of
0.100 M HCl(aq) to return to equivalence. What is the
concentration of the unknown acid?
A. 0.1217Macid(aq)
B. 0.1183Macid(aq)
C. 0.0849 M acid(aq)
D. 0.0817 Macid(aq)
Conjugate acid/base pairs areconnected bya relationship
between pKa and pKb- Equation 1 shows the relationship
within a conjugatepair at 25Cin aqueous solution.
pKa (conjugate acid) +P^b(conjugate base) =14
Equation 1
When titrating a weak acid or weak base, theportion of
the curve following the initial drops of titrant up until just
before theequivalence point is anequilibrium mixture of the
conjugate pair. As such, the titration curve of one
component in a conjugate pair have similarities to the
titration curve of the other component.
The titration curves for conjugatepairs are inversegraphs
that intersect at the half-titrated point. At this point, the pH
of the solution equals the pKaof the conjugate acid. At this
same point, the pOH of the solution equals the pKb of the
conjugate base. Figure 1 shows the titration of acetic acid
(H3CCO2H) with strong base (NaOH) overlaid onto the
titration of sodium acetate (H3CC02Na) with strong acid
(HCl). In bothtitration curves, all species are in equal molar
concentrations. The pKa for carboxylic acids is generally
between 3 and 5.
T r
12.5 25.0
mL titrant solution added
25mL0.10MHjCCO2H
titrated by 0.10 M NaOH
25mL0.10MH$CCO2Na
titrated by 0.10 M HCl
Figure 1
Figure 2 shows the titration of methyl ammonium
chloride (CH3NH3CI) with strong base(NaOH) overlaid onto
the titration of methyl amine (CH3NH2) with strong acid
(HCl). In both titrations, all species are in equal molar
concentrations. The pKa for amines is generally between 9
and 11.
Copyright byThe Berkeley Review 324
12.5
25 mL 0.10 M CH>NH3C1
titrated by 0.10 M NaOH
25mL0.10MCHjNH2
titrated by 0.10 M HCl
Figure 2
Both a weak acid and weak conjugate base titration curve
of a conjugate pair show the same pH at the half-titration
point (indicated by the empty circle on both graphs),
regardless of the initial concentration of the conjugate
species. The pH at the half-titration point inFigure 1is less
than the pH at the half-titration point in Figure 2. This is
because the pKa value of acetic acid is less than the pKa
value of methyl ammonium cation. At this point, the
conjugate base concentration equals the acid concentration;
therefore, according to the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation,
pH = pKa.
30. By roughly how much dothe two equivalents points in
the first graph differ?
A. Fewer than 2.0 pH units
B. Fewer than 4.0 pH units, but more than 2.0 pH
units
C. Fewer than 8.0 pH units, but more than 4.0 pH
units
D. More than 8.0 pH units
31. ThepHat equivalence is GREATEST for which of the
following titrations?
A. The titration of 0.10 M H3CCO2H by NaOH
B. The titration of 0.10 M H3CC02Na by HCl
C. The titration of 0.10 M CH3NH3CI by NaOH
D. The titration of 0.10 M CH3NH2 by HCl
32. What is true in the titration of ammonia by
hydrochloric acid, when the pH of the solution is greater
than the pKa for ammonium chloride?
A. [NH4+] > [NH3I; Ka(ammonium chloride) > [H+]
B. [NH4+1 > [NH3]; Ka(ammonium chloride) < [H+]
C. [NH4+1 < [NH3]; Ka(ammonium chloride) > [H+]
D. [NH4+] < [NH3I; Ka(ammoniumchloride) < [H+]
3 3. How does the pH at point a in Figure 1 compare to the
pH at point d in Figure 1?
A. The pH at point a is more than 1.0 pH unit greater
than the pH at point d.
B. The pH at point a is greater than the pH at point d,
but the difference is less than one pH unit.
C. The pH at point a is less than the pH at point d,
but the difference is less than one pH unit.
D. The pH at point a is more than 1.0 pH unit lower
than the pH at point d.
34. Given that H3CCO2H has a lower pKa value than
CH3NH3CI, which of the following statements is true?
A. H3CCO2H buffers at a higher pH value than
CH3NH3+
B. H3CCO2H has a conjugate base with a lower pKb
value than the conjugate base of CH3NH3+.
C. H3CCO2H dissociates less than CH3NH3+
D. H3CCO2H is a better electron pair acceptor than
CH3NH3+
35. Given that H3CCO2H is a stronger acid than
CH3NH3+, which of the following statements is NOT
true?
A. H3CCO2H yields a lower pH value than
CH3NH3+of equimolar concentration.
B. H3CCO2H has a conjugate base with a higher pKb
value than the conjugate base of CH3NH3+.
C. H3CCO2H produces more conjugate base than
CH3NH34" when added to water.
D. H3CCO2H is a worse proton donor than
CH3NH3+
36. If a similar experiment with identical concentrations and
volumes were conducted using hydrofluoric acid and
fluoride anion, what would be true, knowing that the
pKa of hydrofluoric acid is lower than the pKa of acetic
acid?
A. The initial pH for the titration of HF would be
greater than the equivalence point for the titration
ofH3CC02Na.
B. When both HF and H3CCO2H are one-third titrated
by equimolar NaOH, [F"] > [H3CC02"! and
Ka(acetic acid) < I" ]
C. When both HF and H3CCO2H are one-third titrated
by equimolar NaOH, [HF] > [H3CC02H] and
Ka(acetic acid) < [H ].
D. When both HF and H3CCO2H are one-half titrated
by equimolar NaOH, Ka(acetic acid) < tH+] in tne
HF titration.
Titration involves the quantitative additionof one reagent
to another, where the concentration is known for only one of
thespecies. Acids are often titrated by strong bases, so that
the concentration of the acid may be ascertained. Once the
equivalence point has been reached, the volume of titrant is
measured. Using Equation 1, it is possible to solve for the
molarity of the acid, if the molarity of the titrant strong base
is known.
M(acid)V(acid) = M(baSe)V(base)
Equation 1
Besides the quantitative aspects, qualitative features of
the acid may also be determined. The shape of the titration
curve varies with the strength of the acid. For strong acids,
the shape is sigmoidal, with a nearly horizontal initial
region. For weakacids, the shape is not sigmoidal, with an
initial vertical ascent before leveling off into a horizontal
buffering region. As the degree of the initial ascent increases,
it can be observed that the acid being titrated is weaker. The
concentration of the acid also affects the titration curve. The
same fundamental shape is observed, but the pH values are
different.
A researcher conducts two experiments studying the
effect of acid concentration. In the first experiment, she
titrates the same strong acid, HCl, at three different
concentrations, keeping the acid and titrant base in the same
concentration as each other. Figure 1 shows the three
titrations overlaid onto one graph. She finds that all three
titrations generate the same pH at their equivalence point,
regardlessof the initial concentrationof strong acid.
pH
7H
Titrations of HCl with NaOH
12.5
mL NaOH solution added
25.0
25 mL 0.01 M HCl titrated by 0.01 M NaOH
Figure 1
In the secondexperiment, the researcher titrates the same
weak acid, HOAc, at three different concentrations, keeping
the acid and titrant base in the same concentration as each
other. Figure 2 shows the three titrations overlaid onto one
graph. It is found that all three titrations generated the same
pHat theirhalf-equivalence points.
A
pH
7H
Titrations of HOAc with NaOH
1
12.5
mL NaOH solution added
25.0
25 mL 0.01 M HOAc titrated by 0.01 M NaOH
Figure 2
Weak acid titration curves show the same equivalence
point, regardless of the initial concentration of weak acid.
The pH at the half-equivalence point in all three titration
curves in Figure2 is equal to the pKa for acetic acid. At the
half-equivalence point, the concentration of the conjugate
base equals theconcentration of theacid; therefore, according
to the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, pH = pKa.
37. The initial pH is GREATEST in which titration?
A. The titration of 0.01 M H3CCO2H by NaOH
B. The titration of 1.00 M H3CCO2H by NaOH
C. The titration of 0.01 M HCl by NaOH
D. The titration of 1.00 M HCl by NaOH
38. What is true in the titration of acetic acid by sodium
hydroxide when the pH of the solution is greater than
the pKa for acetic acid?
A. [H3CC02-1 > [H3CCO2H]; Ka(acetic acid) >[H+l
B. [H3CCO2-] > [H3CCO2H]; Ka(acetic acid) <[H+l
C. [H3CCO2I < [H3CCO2HI; Ka(acetic acid) > [H+l
D. [H3CCO2I < [H3CCO2H]; Ka(acetic acid) < [H+l
326 GO ON TO THE NEXT PAGE
39. The BEST explanation for the greater pH at the
equivalence point observed with the higher initial
concentration of weak acid can be attributed to:
A. the greater number of mL of base solution added to
reach the equivalence point.
B. the lower number of mL of base solution added to
reach the equivalence point.
C. the greater conjugate base concentration at the
equivalence point.
D. the lower conjugate base concentration at the
equivalence point.
40. How would the titration curves in Figure 1 be affected if
the base concentrations were all doubled, while the acid
concentrations remained the same?
A. Equivalence would be achieved with half the
volume of titrant base, and the shape of the
titration curves would change.
B. Equivalence would be achieved with twice the
titration curves would change.
C. Equivalence would be achieved with half the
titration curves would not change.
D. Equivalence would be achieved with twice the
titration curves would not change.
41. Even though the NaOH concentration in the third trial
is 100 times greater than the NaOH concentration in the
first trial, the two graphs follow a similar slope. This
is BEST explained by which of the following
statements?
A. The solution is a buffered solution, so the pH
change is minimal.
B. The NaOH is a weak base and does not fully react
with the HCl.
C. The pH is a log scale, so as the pH increases up to
7.0, the amount of base necessary to increase the
pH becomes less.
D. The pH changes only at the equivalence point.
42. Which of the following graphs represents the results
that would be observed if the experiment described in
the passage were carried out with ammonia (NH3) and
hydrochloric acid (HCl)?
A.
pH
B.
A
pH
C.
A
pH
D.
A
pH
25mL0.10MNH3!
with 0.10 M HCl
25mL1.00MNH3
with LOOM HCl
1 1-
12.5 25.0
mL HCl solution added
25 mL 0.01 MNHjl
with 0.01 MHCl \1
25mL0.10MNH3'V
with 0.10 MHCl V^^^
25 mL 1.00 MNH 3 ^^-^.^^

with LOOM HCl
1 1
12.5 25.0
25mL0.10MNH3|
with 0.10 M HCl
25mL1.00MNH3
with 1.00 M HCl
12.5 25.0
25 mL 0.01 MNH
with 0.01 M HCl
25mL0.10MNH3,
with 0.10 M HCl
25 mL 1.00 MNH 3
with LOOM HCl
12.5 25.0
The four titrations curves shown in Figure 1, represent
the titration of three weak acids (HCN, HCIO, and HOAc)
and the titration of the strong acid HCl. The equivalence
point is represented bythedot at thevertical inflection point
of each curve. The respective conjugate base is shown next
to its equivalence point. At the start of eachtitration, 25mL
of 0.10 M acid are present. All of the acids are titrated by
O.lOMKOH(aq).
mL 0.10 M KOH(aq) solution added
Figure 1
The initial and equivalence pH values were collectedand
recorded for some of the titrations. Table 1 shows data
collected during the experiment.
Titration Initial pH Equivalence pH
HCl by KOH 1.00 7.00
HOAc by KOH 2.87 8.72
HCIO by KOH 4.23
HCN by KOH 11.01
Table 1
The pKa for each weak acid can be found by measuring
the pH of the aqueous solution at the half-equivalence point
in its respective titration. For instance, the pKa for HCNis
9.32, which is the pH at the half-equivalence point of the
titration curve. The values are approximated, because the
points on the curve cannot be read that accurately. The pH
values are listed in Table 1 were recorded from a pH meter, so
they are considered to be reliable.
43. The greatest Ka value is found with which of the
following acids?
A. HCN
B. HCIO
C. HOAc
D. HCl
44. If pKa of HOAc is 4.74, the pH at the equivalence in
the titration of HCN is 11.01, and the initial pH in the
titration of HCIO is 4.23, then what else must be true?
A. Initial pH in the titration of HCN is 3.86; the pH
at equivalence in the titrationof HCIOis 9.61.
B. Initial pH in the titration of HCN is 5.16; the pH
C. Initial pH in the titration of HCN is 6.12; the pH
D. Initial pH in the titration of HCN is 7.42; the pH
45. Which of the following statements are valid when
comparing the titration curve associated with a weak
acid by strong base titration to the titration curve
associatedwith a strong acid by strong base titration?
I. Strongacid titration curves have an initial drop in
pH due to the dissociation of the protons, while
weak acid titration curves start with a plateau.
II. Weak acid titration curves have a buffer region
while strong acid titration curves do not.
HI. All points beforetheequivalence point are less than
7 for both the titration of and weak acid and the
titration of a strong acid.
A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II only
D. II and D3only
46. Given that 0.10 M HIO has a pH greater than that of
0.10 M HCN, we can conclude that:
A. thepKaofHIOis8.61.
B. the pH at equivalence in the titration of HIO by
KOH is 10.06.
C. the pH of 0.10 M HlO(aq) is 7.21.
D. the difference between the pKa of HIO and the pH
at the equivalence point in the titration of 0.10 M
HlO(aq) by 0.10 M KOH(aq) is less than 3 pH
units.
47. When 10 mL 0.10 M HCIO is mixed with 10 mL 0.15
M KCIO, the pH is 7.64. What is the pH after 30 mL
of water is added to raise the volume to 50 mL?
A. 7.51
B. 7.64
C. 7.77
D. 8.26
48. Which of the following curves accurately represents
the titrations of 0.10 M NaCN(aq) by 0.10 M HCl(aq)
and 0.10 M NaClO(aq) by 0.10 M HCl(aq)?
A.
D.
CIO
CN"
pH
7H
mL0.10 MHCl(aq) added 25.0
mL 0.10 MHCl(aq) added 25.0
W
HCN
LHCIO
mL0.10MHCl(aq) added 25.0
329
4 9. Which of these sequences relates the pKa values of the
indicated acids in descending order?
A pKa(HCN) >pKa(HC10) >pKa(HOAc) >pKa(HCl)
B pKa(HOAc) > pKa(HC10) >PKa(HCN) > pKa(HCl)
C. pKa(HCl) > pKa(HCN) > pKa(HC10) > pKa(HOAc)
D PK3(HC1) >pKa(HOAc) >pKa(HC10) >pKa(HCN)
Apolyprotic acid is an acid that contains morethanone
acidicproton. The secondproton lost by the acid is neveras
strongly acidic as the first proton lost by the acid. The
second proton can be removed using strong base, once the
first proton has been completely removed from the acid.
Concentrations of polyprotic acids are measured in terms of
normality. Normality measures molar equivalence. The
normality of an acid equals the molarity of the equivalent
baserequiredto neutralizeall of the acidic protons.
A researcher sets out to determine the effect of mixing
solutions together, by studying their pH before and after
mixing. Into a flask (Flask 1) he places exactly 25.0 mLof
0.20 N H2SO4 to be titrated by a solution of NaOH of
unknown concentration. Into a second flask (Flask 2) he
placesexactly 40.0 mL of 0.30 N H3PO4, also to be titrated
by the same solution of NaOH. Both solutions are titratedin
succession to a visual endpoint, determined by the color
change of an indicator. The quantity of base needed to
achieve this is recorded accurately to the second decimal place.
5 0. If Flask 1 requires exactly 20.0 mL NaOH solution to
be neutralized, what must be the concentration of the
NaOH solution?
A. 0.125 MNaOH(aq)
B. 0.200 M NaOH(aq)
C. 0.250 M NaOH(aq)
D. 0.500 M NaOH(aq)
51. Which of the following statements is true?
A. pKai is always larger than pKa2-
B. pKa2 is always larger than pKaj.
C. There is no rule for pKa2 or pKai.
D. pKa2 is greater than pKai only for the oxyacids.
52. A solution of 0.30 M H3P04(aq) has which of the
following values for normality?
A. 0.10NH3PO4(aq)
B. 0.30 N H3P04(aq)
C. 0.60 N H3P04(aq)
D. 0.90 N H3P04(aq)
53. When 0.1 moles NaH2P04 and 0.2 moles Na2HP04
are mixed in 100 mL, what is the pH of the solution?
A. pH<PKal+PKa2
2
B. pKa2>pH>Pi^LPKa2
2
c# pKa2 +pKa3>pH>pKa2
2
D. pH>PKa2 +PKa3
2
54. How many mL of 0.40 M H2S04(aq) would require the
same amount of base to reach full neutralization as
would 25 mL 0.60 M H3P04(aq)?
A. 25.00 mL 0.40 M H2S04(aq)
B. 37.50 mL 0.40 M H2S04(aq)
C. 50.00 mL 0.40 M H2S04(aq)
D. 56.25 mL 0.40 M H2S04(aq)
55. Which titration curve represents the complete titration
of phosphoric acid?
A.
56. What is the phosphate concentration in Flask 2 after 40
mL of 0.30 N NaOH has been added?
A. 0.050 MP043-(aq)
B. 0.100 MP043-(aq)
C. 0.450 MP043"(aq)
D. 0.900 MP043"(aq)
Polyprotic acids are acids that contain more than one
acidic hydrogen. A typical example is sulfuric acid (H2SO4).
The first proton is easily removed, while the second proton is
harder to remove. Sulfuric acid is a strong acid with respect
to its first proton, but weak with respect to its second proton.
The titration curve for a polyprotic acid looks like two
separate titration curves that have been connected. The
endpoint of the curve for the first proton is the starting point
of the curve for the second proton. A student titrates an
unknown diprotic acid with strong base. The titration curve
for the experiment is shown in Figure 1.
mL Titrant added
Figure 1
The exact pH and exact volume of titrant used are not
known, but the graph is proportional throughout the duration
of the titration. The student repeats the experiment three
times, and the graph in Figure 1 represents the best results of
the three trials.
5 7. The unknown acid can BEST be categorized as which of
the following?
A. A strong monoprotic acid
B. A diprotic acid with both protons strong
C. A diprotic acid with one strong proton and one
weak proton
D. A diprotic acid with both protons weak
58. Which of the following relationships is NOT true about
the unknown acid?
A. pKai < pKa2
B. pH at first equivalence point > pKai
C. pH at second equivalence point > pKa2
D. pH at first equivalence point > pKa2
59. In Figure 1, the titrant can best be described as a:
A. strong acid.
B. strong base.
C. weak acid.
D. weak base.
6 0. Which change requires that the MOST titrant be added
to the solution?
A. Going from a pH < pKai to a pH > pKa2
B. Going from the first equivalence point to the
second equivalence point
C. Going from a pH > pKai to a pH < pKa2
D. Going from the initial point to the first equivalence
point
61. If, after the addition of 5 mL of titrant, the pH of the
solution is less than the pKai of a diprotic acid, what
volume of titrant is required to reach the second
equivalencepoint from the fully protonated state?
A. Between 5 and 10 mL
B. Between 10 and 15 mL
C. Between 15 and 20 mL
D. More than 20 mL
62. What is true the predominant species and any other
species present between points d and e on the titration
curve?
A. A2" (the fully deprotonated form) is all that is
present.
B. A2- is present along with some HA- (the partially
protonated form).
C. HA- (the partially protonated form) is all that is
present.
D. HA" is present along with some H2A (the fully
protonated form).
63. Which of these points in Figure 1 is NOT described
correctly below?
A . Point b is where [H2A] = [HA-].
B. Point c is the first equivalence point.
C. Point d is where pH = pKa2-
D. Point f is where [HA"] = [A2"].
Polyequivalent bases are bases that can neutralize more
than one acidic hydrogen per base molecule. A typical
example of a diequivalent base is carbonate (C032")- The
first proton added corresponds to thesecond proton removed.
Carbonate is a stronger base than its conjugate acid
bicarbonate (HCO3), although both are considered weak
bases, because the pKb values are 3.67 and 7.63 respectively.
The titration curve in Figure 1 is obtained when calcium
carbonate (CaC03) is titrated with a strong acid, such as
hydrochloric acid.
0.5 1.0 1.5
Equivalentsstrong acid added
Figure 1
The exact pH and exact volume of titrant used in this
titration are not provided, but the graph is proportional
throughout its duration. The nine points marked along the
titration curve note some of the key transitional points.
Despite the fact that the pH is recorded for the titrationof the
base (rather than the pOH), the titration curve is still
predictable.
Among the key points recorded are the two equivalence
points, and the two points at which the pH = pKa (both the
first and second pKa points are marked). It is interesting to
note that when pH = pKaj, pOH = pKb2- The other points
of the curve are interesting in that they represent different
points at which the pH is predictable from the trend in the pH
and the amount of acid added.
6 4. At which point is the pH equal to the value of pKai ?
A. Point c
B. Point d
C. Point f
D. Point h
6 5. Which of the following relationships is NOT true?
A. pKai +pKb2= 14
B. PKa2 + pKb2=14
C pHjnitially > PKa2
D. pHat 2nd equivalence <pKai
66. Howcan the pHof solution be determinedat point d?
A. pH = 7.0
B. pH - PKal +PKa2
C. PH=V(pKai)2+(pKa2)2
D. PH = 2(pKai-pKa2)
6 7. What is NOT true at point e on the titration curve?
A. Fewer than 1.5equivalentsof HCl have been added.
B. The pH is less than 6.37.
C. The pH is greater than pKaj.
D. The pH is less than pKa2-
68. In what pHrangeis the concentration of bicarbonate the
GREATEST?
A. pH less than 3.67
B. pH between 3.67 and 7.00
C. pH between pH 7.00 and 10.33
D. pH greater than 10.33
69. Between which two points does the pH of the solution
change by the GREATESTamount?
A. Betweenpoint c and point d
B. Between point d and point e
C. Between point e and point f
D. Between point f and point g
7 0. Which of the following graphs shows changing pOH as
a function of equivalents strong acid when calcium
carbonate is titrated by hydrochloric acid?
A. B.
Equivalents strongacid Equivalents strongacid
Equivalents strongacid Equivalents strongacid
When titrating an acid with a strong base, an indicator is
added to the solution to indicate when the equivalence point
has been reached. An indicator works by changing color at or
near the equivalence point of the titration. Because indicators
can lose or gain a proton, they are susceptible to the effects
of varying solution pHduring titration. Aconjugateacid and
its conjugate base have different colors (although in some
cases, one of the two is colorless.) With most indicators,
both the conjugate acid and conjugate base are colored
species. When both species are colored, it is often harder to
see the color change, unless there is a pronounced difference
between the two colors. An example with the hypothetical
indicator HQ, and its dissociation to conjugate base Q", is
shown in Reaction 1. Assume HQ is colorless and Q" is
orange.
HQ(aq) -g-^ H30+(aq) + Q"(aq)
Clear Orange
Reaction 1
Whenthe conjugate base (Q") is the predominantspecies
in solution, it appears orange. When the conjugate acid (HQ)
is the predominant species in solution, the solution appears
clear. Whenthe pHof the solution is equal to the pKa of the
indicator, there are equal parts of HQ and Q" in solution, so
the solution has an orange hue. Indicator are used in low
concentration, so they don't become visibly detectable until
at least one-tenth of the indicator is in its deprotonated
(orange conjugate base) form. This occurswhenthe solution
pH is approximately one pH unit below the pKa of the
indicator. Equation 1 lists the active range of an indicator.
pH(at equivalence) =pKa(indicator) 1-
Equation 1
Because it is desirable to have the color change near the
equivalence point of the species being titrated, Equation 1
helps when selectingan indicator. If the equivalence pH is
not known, then the pH at equivalence can be approximated
aspKa(acjd) +3 (where the pKa is for the acid being titrated).
This means that often the pKa of the indicator is about three
pH units higher than the pKa of the acid being titrated. This
holds true only if the pKa for the acid is between 4 and 10. It
is not affected by concentration factors. Figure 1 shows a
titration curve for the titration of a weak acid by strong base
and the active range of an indicator:
pH
Equivalence point
mL titrant added
Figure 1
The change in shading represents the increase in the
intensity of the orange color of the solution. The equivalence
occurs in the middle of the color change band.
71. The BEST indicator to use for the titration of an acid
with a pKa of 5.0 would be one having a pKa of:
A. 1.5.
B. 5.0.
C. 8.5.
D. 11.5.
72. An indicator in a concentration that is too high could
have what effect on a solution?
A. It could interfere with the acid and/or base
properties of the solution being titrated.
B. It could change the viscosity of the solution being
titrated, resulting in a non-homogeneous solution.
C. The color change could be too extreme to be useful.
D. The color change could be too subtle to detect.
73. What is the ratio of the conjugate base to conjugate acid
at two pH units above the pKa?
A. 100 : 1
B. 2: 1
C. 1 :2
D. 1 : 100
74.
Agood indicator haswhich of thefollowing properties?
A. It should be transparent throughout the titration.
B. It should be unreactive with respect to acid-base
reactions.
C. It should be a strong acid or a strong base.
D. It should be a weak acid or a weak base.
75. For which of these titrations is the pH at equivalence
the same, regardless of concentration?
A. The titration of a weak acid by a strong base
B. The titration of a strong acid by a weak base
C. The titration of the first proton of a weak diprotic
acid by a strong base
D. The titration of the second proton of a weak
diprotic acid by a strong base
76. Which BESTexplains why the indicator pKa may be
one unit off from the equivalence pH?
A. A difference of one pH unit has an insignificant
effect on color at the pH of the indicator's pKa.
B. The pHchanges rapidly at equivalence.
C. At theequivalence pointfor theacid, pH= pKa.
D. An indicator's color change occurs at only one very
specific pH value.
Indicators have two main purposes in chemistry. The
first use is as an aid in determining the equivalence point in a
titrationexperiment. If the pH at equivalence is known, then
an indicator that changes color at or near that pH valuecan be
used to detect the equivalence point. The ideal indicatorhas
its pKavaluewithin 1 of the pH at equivalence.
The second use of an indicator is to approximate the pH
of an unknown aqueous solution by examining the color of
the indicator in a sample of the solution. The indicator
changes color at a pH value approximately one unit from its
pKa value, so if the pHof solution is within one pHunit of
the indicator's pKa value, then the pH can be estimated.
Table 1 shows the relationship between pH and the color
associated with three indicators.
pH
Indicator I Indicator II Indicator in
1 Red Yellow Purple
2 Red Yellow Purple
3 Red Yellow Violet
4 Red Yellow Fuchsia
5 Red Yellow Clear
6 Red-orange Yellow Clear
7 Orange Yellow Clear
8 Mango Yellow Clear
9 Yellow Chartreuse Clear
10 Yellow Green Clear
11 Yellow Aquamarine Clear
12 Yellow Blue Clear
13 Yellow Blue Clear
Table 1
For the titration of a strong acid by strong base, the pH
at the equivalence point is 7.0, while for the titration of a
weak acid by a strong base, the pH at equivalence is greater
than 7.0. Because the pH at equivalence is different, a
different indicator is required for the two titrations, although
for a weak acid with a pKa of 3 or less, the indicator used in
the titration of a strong acid may work.
The equilibrium distribution of the deprotonated and
protonated forms of an indicator obeys Equation 1, where Ind"
is the deprotonated form and H-Ind is the protonated form.
PHsoiution = pKa(indicator) + lo8 77^7
H-Ind
Equation 1
77. Which indicator could be used to determine the
equivalence point in the titration of 1.0 M benzoic acid
by l.OMKOH(aq)?
The pKa of H5C6COOH is 4.21.
A. Indicator II only
B. Indicator D3only
C. Both Indicator I and Indicator n
D. Both Indicator II and Indicator III
78. Which combination of colors is NOT possible for a
solution?
A. I:red H: yellow DI: purple
B. I: mango Di: yellow ITI: violet
C. I: red II: yellow HI: fuchsia
D. I: yellow II: aquamarine DI: clear
7 9. If the ratio of blue species to clear species within an
indicator equilibriumis 1000:1 at pH = 6, what is the
pKa of the indicator, given that the deprotonated form
absorbs visible light?
A. 3
B. 4
C. 9
D. 10
80. What is the pHof a solutionthat is clear whenIndicator
III is added, faint chartreuse when Indicator II is added,
and faint mango when Indicator I is added?
A. 7.0
B. 7.5
C. 8.0
D. 8.5
81. Which of the following accurately describes the pKa
values for the three indicators?
A. 1:6.86 II: 9.87 ni: 4.22
B. 1:8.94 D: 7.21 III: 5.98
C. 1:7.21 II: 8.28 ffl: 4.11
D. 1:8.34 II: 9.66 III: 3.85
82. The active range for Indicator III is which of the
following?
A. pH2topH6
B. pH3topH4
C. pH3topH5
D. pH4topH6
83. The best description of the absorbance of light
associated with Indicator DI is:
A. The protonated form absorbs light with a ^max of
426 nm, while the deprotonated form absorbs light
with a ?lmax of 339 nm.
B. The protonated form absorbs light with a /kmax of
with a X,max of 426 nm.
C. The protonated form absorbs light with a A,max of
with a Xmaxof 339 nm.
D. The protonated form absorbs light with a Xmax of
with a X,max of 598 nm.
In titration, it is common to use indicators to signify a
certain pH for the solution. Indicators are made, most
commonly, from organic dyes that gradually change color
within a given pH range. A color change is observed,
because the indicator in its protonated state is one color and
in its deprotonated state is a different color. Reaction 1
shows the equilibrium for a generic indicator.
Hlnd(aq) + H2OO) ^ * H30+(aq) + Ind'(aq)
Reaction 1
Table 1 below lists a series of indicators, the pKa of the
indicator, the active range for visual detection, and the
respective colors of the protonated form (acid) and
deprotonated form (base). The Henderson-Hasselbalch
equation describes the relationship between the members of a
conjugate pair. When the concentrations of the acid and base
are equal, the pH equals the pKa. When this occurs, the color
of the solution is an average of the colors listed in Table 1.
Indicator pKa pH range Acid Base
Alizarin Yellow 10.8 10.0- 11.6 Yellow Red
Phenolphthalein 8.8 8.0 - 9.6 Clear Pink
Thymol Blue 8.4 7.6 - 9.2 Yellow Blue
Cresol Red 8.0 7.2 - 8.8 Yellow Red
Bromthymol Blue 6.8 6.0 - 7.6 Yellow Blue
Chlorophenol Blue 5.6 4.8 - 6.4 Yellow Red
Bromcresol Green 4.4 3.7-5.1 Yellow Blue
Methyl Orange 3.9 3.2 - 4.6 Orange Yellow
Bromphenol Blue 3.7 3.0 - 4.4 Yellow Blue
Erythrosin B 2.8 2.2 - 3.6 Orange Yellow
Thymol Blue 2.0 1.2-2.8 Red Yellow
Cresol Red 1.6 1.0-2.2 Red Yellow
Methyl Violet 0.8 0.0 - 1.6 Yellow Violet
Table 1
Depending on the concentrations and species being
titrated, there is one ideal indicator. To detect the equivalence
point for a titration, a small portion of indicator is added to
solution. Ideally, the equivalence point of the titration
should be equal to the pKa of the indicator. At the very least,
the equivalence pH must fall within the indicator's active
range. When a strong acid or strong base is titrated with a
strong titrant, the pH at the equivalence point is always equal
to 7.0. For a weak acid titration, the pH at equivalence can
be estimated by taking an average of the pKa of the acid
being titrated and the pH of the titrant base.
84. Which of the following does NOT form a blue
solution?
A. Bromphenol blue in a pH = 7.0 buffer
B. Bromcresol green in an aqueous ammonia solution
C. Thymol blue in an acetic acid solution
D. Bromthymol blue in a hydroxide solution
8 5. Which of the following indicators CANNOT be used for
the titration of ammonia by hydrochloric acid?
A. Phenolphthalein
B. Bromcresol green
C. Methyl orange
D. Bromphenol blue
86. If KCN has pKb = 4.68 and KF has pKb = 10.83,
which indicator is NOT the ideal choice for the
following proposed titrations?
A. 1.00 M KF(aq) titrated by 1.00 M HCl(aq) with an
indicator of cresol red
B. 0.01 M KF(aq) by 0.01 M HCl(aq) with an
indicator of methyl violet
C. 1.00 M KCN(aq) by 1.00 M HCl(aq) with an
indicator of bromcresol green
D. 0.01 M KCN(aq) by 0.01 M HCl(aq) with an
indicator of chlorophenol blue
87. Which of the following indicator : color correlations is
NOT correct for biological pH (pH = 7.4)?
A. Methyl violet: Violet
B. Methyl orange : Yellow
C. Thymol blue : Blue
D. Bromcresol green : Blue
88. Which of the following titrations requires thymol blue
indicator?
A. A low concentration of strong base titrated by a
strong acid
B. A low concentration of weak base titrated by a
strong acid
C. A highly concentrated strong base titrated by a
strong acid
D. A highly concentrated weak base titrated by a
strong acid
89. Which of the following indicators should be chosen to
identify theequivalence pointof a strong acidtitrated by
a strong base?
A. Methyl violet
B. Methyl orange
C. Bromthymol blue
D. Alizarin yellow
ApHstick is a device that can approximate the pHof an
aqueous solution by reference to a color blend band. It is a
plastic stickwithindicators attached to specific segments of
the stick. Each indicator has a range of color change that
extends to either side of a central pKavalue. Whenthe pHof
the solution is less than the pKa of the indicator, the
indicator exists predominantly in its protonated state. When
the pH of the solution is greater than the pKa of the
indicator, the indicator exists predominantly in its
deprotonated state. An indicator is ideal when both the
protonated and deprotonated species are colored. When the
species are primary colors, thechange is easiertoobserve.
Typical pH sticks come with three to four indicators,
such as those listed in Table 1. Each solution must be tested
witha separatepH stick. A pH stickcannot be usedfor more
than one test, because the acidity of the first test solution
affects other solutions that are added to the pH stick.
Indicator
pKa
Protonated
Color
Deprotonated
Color
Bromcresol Green 4.37
Yellow Blue
Methyl Red 5.21
Red Yellow
Bromthymol Blue 6.78
Yellow Blue
Phenolphthalein 8.79
Clear Magenta
Table 1
A student uses a pH stick with four indicator markers to
approximate the pH of five separate solutions. Table 2 lists
the results for the five separate solutions. Each sequence of
colors represents what is observed for the four indicators in
order of increasing pKa.
Solution
Bromcresol
Green
Methyl
Red
Bromthymol
Blue
Phenol
phthalein
1 Yellow Red Yellow Clear
2 Blue Orange Yellow Clear
3 Blue Yellow
Greenish-
blue
Clear
4 Blue Yellow Blue Magenta
5
Greenish-
blue
Reddish-
orange
Yellow Clear
Table 2
An indicator is used to detect the endpoint in a titration.
An ideal indicator for a titration has its pKa equal to the
equivalence pH of the titration. This is the ideal condition,
but in practice, the exact pH at equivalence often cannot be
determined. The general rule for titration is that the pH at
equivalence should be within one of the pKa of the indicator.
9 0. What is the pH range of the pH stick?
A. 3.4 to 8.8
B. 3.4 to 9.8
C. 4.4 to 8.8
D. 4.4 to 9.8
91. It is NOTpossible to estimate pH for:
A. Solution 1 only.
B. Solution 1 and Solution 2 only.
C. Solution 2 and Solution 3 only.
D. Solution 1 and Solution 4 only.
92. An aqueous solution that has a hydroxide concentration
of 1.0 x 10"6M would show what colors?
A. Yellow with bromcresol green
B. Red with methyl red
C. Blue with bromthymol blue
D. Clear with phenolphthalein
9 3. What is the approximate pH of Solution 5?
A. 4
B. 5
C. 6
D. 7
94. When HCl is added to Solution 2, the colors on the pH
stick do not change. How can this be explained?
A. The hydronium concentration is too high for the
pH to be affected by the addition of HCl.
B. The hydroniumconcentration is too low for the pH
to be affected by the addition of HCl.
C. The solution is a buffer made from a carboxylic
acid and its carboxylate conjugate base.
D. The solution is a buffer made from an amine and its
ammonium conjugate acid.
9 5. Which indicator could be used in the titration of a weak
acid by a strong base?
A. Bromcresol green
B. Methyl red
C. Bromthymol blue
D. Phenolphthalein
9 6. Which of the following statements is INVALID?
A. A solution that turns bromthymol blue to blue
would turn Phenolphthalein to magenta.
B. A solution cannot show two green marks on the
pH stick.
C. A solution that turns methyl red to yellow would
turn bromcresol green to blue.
D. The pH stick can estimate pH best when that value
falls between 4.21 and 5.37.
Passage XV (Questions 97 - 100)
A common class of acids in organic chemistry is the
carboxylic acids. Their acidity is attributable to the electron-
withdrawing nature of the carbonyl group through resonance.
Short-chain carboxylic acids are water-soluble. As the alkyl
chain length increases, the hydrophilicity decreases, making
carboxylic acids of five carbons or more rather insoluble.
Long-chain fatty acids are often used as surfactants because of
their insolubility.
Phenols constitute another common class of acids in
organic chemistry. Their acidity is attributable to the
electron-withdrawing nature of the benzene ring through
resonance. Because aromatic rings are less electron-
withdrawing than carbonyl groups, phenols are weaker acids
than their carboxylic acid counterparts. Most phenols are
insoluble in water in their protonated state. Table 1 lists a
few examples of carboxylic acids and phenols, along with
their pKa values.
Organic Acid
2L>
0
C13C^ OH
0.64
CN-fW0
\=/ OH
3.40
x=/ OH
4.21
02N4^-OH 7.18
O^0h
10.01
Table 1
Because of solubility constraints, carboxylic acids and
amines are more often involved in aqueous buffering than
phenols. However, it is possible to titrate phenols, because
their conjugate base is water-soluble, allowing for the
reaction to be monitored.
9 7. Which of these mixtures produces the MOST effective
buffer for pH 4.0?
A. H3CCO2H + H3CC02Na
B. CI3CCO2H + Cl3CC02Na
C. 02NC6H4C02H + 02NC6H4C02Na
D. C6H5C02H + C6H5C02Na
337
98. For the titration of p-nitrophenol, which of the
following reagents would be best?
A. KOH
B. Potassium p-nitrophenoxide
C. Phenol
D. HCl
9 9. What is the pH of a solution made by mixing 20 mL
0.10 M phenol with 10 mL 0.10 M KOH(aq)?
A. 10.0
B. 7.0
C. 5.8
D. 5.5
100. Which of the following graphs represents the titration
of 50 mL 0.1 M p-nitrophenol by 0.20 M KOH(aq)?
A. B.
mL 0.20 M KOH!aq) mL 0.20 M KOtfaq)
pH
7H
D.
pH
7H
T"
25
mL 0.20 M KOIfaq)
1. B
6. D
11. C
16. B
21. C
26. C
31. C
36. D
41. C
46. D
51. B
56. A
61. D
66. B
71. C
76. B
81. A
86. B
91. D
96. A
2. A
7. B
12. B
17. C
22. C
27. D
32.
37.
C
A
42. D
47. B
52. D
57. D
62. B
67. B
72. A
77.
82.
87.
92.
A
C
C
c
97. D
3. B
8. D
13. A
18. C
23. C
28. A
33. C
38. A
43. D
48. A
53. C
58. D
63. D
68. C
73. A
78. B
83. C
88. D
93. B
98. A
50
mL 0.20 M KORaq)
4. B
9. D
14. B
19. A
24. D
29. B
34. D
39. C
44. B
49. A
54. D
59. B
64. C
69. A
74. D
79. A
84. C
89. C
94. C
99. A
5. B
10. A
15. C
20. D
25. D
30. C
35. D
40. C
45. B
50. C
55. B
60. A
65. B
70. A
75. C
80. D
85. A
90. B
95. D
100. A
THAT'S ENOUGH CHEM FOR NOW.
Buffers and Titration Passage Answers
Buffer pH and Weak Acids
Choice B is correct. The mixture is composed of NaHCC>3 and H2CO3. Without considering how much of each
component is present in solution, recognize first that they are a conjugate pair, meaning that the solution is a
buffer. This means that the pH is close to the pKa. Carbonic acid is diprotic, so be sure you understand that the
first proton is involved in this conjugate pair, and that the pH should be close to pKai- This makes choice B
the best candidate. If you wish to solve for the exact value, the first step is to convert 0.839 grams NaHCC3(s)
into moles: (0.839 grams)( 1mole ) =0.01 moles NaHC03. The number of moles of H2C03 =(0.10 L)(0.10 M) =
84 grams
0.01 moles H2CO3. The pH can be found using the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation:
_, . Moles conjugate base u , Moles HCO3" ,. , , , oi c a , i~ 1 ca
pH = pKa + log L_2 _ ... pH = pKai + log *- = 6.4 + log^- = 6.4 + log 1 = 6.4
Moles conjugate acid Moles H2CO3 .01
Since the log of 1 is 0, the pH of the solution is equal to pKai, 6.4. The best answer is choice B.
Choice A is correct. Even though the solution is a buffer, the addition of HCl decreases the pH slightly. A
buffer resists extreme pH changes, but a small change is often observed. The addition of an acid to the buffered
solution lowers the pH. Since the pH is initially 7.21, the final pH value must be lower than 7.21. The only
answer choice less than 7.21 is choice A, 7.14.
Choice B is correct. To make a buffer, a weak acid and its conjugate base must be mixed. Benzoic acid is a weak
acid, so it must be mixed with benzoate, its conjugate base. The desired pH is equal to the pKa of benzoic acid,
so according to the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, equal parts of benzoate and benzoic acid must be mixed.
This can be accomplished either by adding one-half equivalent (in terms of moles) of strong base (NaOH) to
convert half of the benzoic acid into benzoate, or by adding an equivalent amount (in terms of moles) of benzoate
to the benzoic acid solution. Choice A has the conjugate pair added together in an equal gram ratio, not equal
mole ratio. This does generate equal mole portions, so the pH is not equal to the pKa. This eliminates choice A.
The remaining three choices involve the mixture of benzoic acid with a strong base, so they must be mixed in a
manner that half-titrates the benzoic acid. The only answer with half as much strong base as weak acid
(benzoic acid) is choice B. This mixture yields equal molar portions of the two components of the conjugate pair
(benzoic acid and benzoate), so the best answer is choice B.
Choice B is correct. The concentration of the titrant strong base (0.2 M NaOH) is twice that of the weak acid
HF (0.1 M), so to reach equivalence, only half the volume of strong base is required. There are initially 50 mL
of 0.1 M HF present, so only 25 mL of 0.2 M NaOH are required to reach the equivalence point. The target pH
for the solution is 3.3, which happens to be the pKa of HF. This means that the pH of solution is equal to pKa
of HF, which is true when [HF] = [F"]. This occurs when the HF(aq) is half-titrated. If 25 mL 0.2 M NaOH(aq) is
required for full titration, then 12.5 mL is required for half titration. Choice B is the best answer.
Choice B is correct. This question takes more than the usual amount of effort to answer. There are two factors to
consider: dilution and reactivity. Addition of sodium hydroxide solution converts some of the acetic acid to
acetate, and it dilutes the solution. After the completion of the reaction, 3.0 mmole of H3CCO2" are present in
30 mL of aqueous solution. From here on, it's strictly a matter of calculation, beginning with 3mmole _ q.i y^
30 mL
H3CCO2". Choice B is the best answer. The reaction chart below shows how the moles were determined.
HOAc + NaOH
init: 6 mmols 3 mmols
A: -3 mmols -3 mmols
final: 3 mmols 0
H20
XXX
XXX
XXX
H3CC02"
0
+3 mmols
3 mmols
6. Choice D is correct. A buffer is prepared by mixing (in this case) a weak acid with a half-molar equivalent of
strong base. This is also referred to as half-titrating a weak acid. Choice A is eliminated, because twice as
much acid as weak base has been added. Choice B is eliminated, because both species are acids. Choice C is
eliminated, because both species are bases. In choice D, half of an equivalent of strong base is added to a weak
acid. This results in a buffer, so the best answer is therefore answer choice D.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review 338 Section V Detailed Explanations

7. Choice Bis correct. The solution is acidic, so the pH is less than 7.0. All of the answer choices are less than 7,
so nothingis eliminated. For a weakacid with pKa between 2 and 12in an aqueous solutionwhere [HAJjnJtial is
greater than Ka, use the shortcut equation to determine the pH. The pKa is 5.0, and [HA] is 0.1M.
pH =IpKa -llog [HA] =1(5.0) - llog (0.10) =2.5 - I(-l) =2.5 +0.5 =3.0
2 2 2 2 2
The pH is 3.0, so the best answer is choice B.
Buffer Composition
8. Choice D is correct. A buffer results when a solution contains roughly equal concentrations of weak acid and its
conjugate base. This can be achieved by mixing the components of the conjugate pair in a roughly one-to-one
ratio, as is observed in choices A and B. In choice C, the acid is diprotic, so the 1.5 equivalents of strong base
completely remove the first proton (to form HCO3") and then pull off a second proton from half of the
bicarbonate ions. The result is a solution with equal parts HCO3" and CO32". Because these are a conjugate
pair, the solution forms a buffer. This eliminates choice C. In choice D, methyl amine is capable of gaining
only one proton, so the 1.5 equivalents of HCl completely converts the weak base (H3CNH2) into its conjugate
acid (H3CNH3+), with a leftover of 0.5 equivalents of HCl. The solution is a mixture of weak acid and strong
acid, which does not result in a buffer. The best answer is thus choice D.
9. Choice D is correct. Because the solution contains more weak acid than conjugate base, the pH is less than the
pKa of the acid. This eliminates choices A and B. According to Equation 1, it is a log relationship, so the best
answer is choice D. Plugging into Equation 1 would yield pH = pKa + log 1/2 = pKa - log 2.
10. Choice A is correct. The pH can be regulated (maintained at a relatively constant value) by a buffer. A buffer
is composed of a weak acid and its conjugate base. Because the pH of the buffer must be close to (within one unit
of) the pKa of the acid, the pH becomes harder to regulate as the weak acid becomes stronger. To regulate the
pH at 1.0 requires an acid with a pKa no greater than 2.0. An acid with a pKa of 2.0 or less would be one of the
strongest weak acids. Increasing acid strength diminishes its ability to buffer. You should note that Table 1
does not contain any acids that could be used to buffer at 1.0. The best answer is thus choice A.
11. Choice C is correct. A buffer serves to maintain relatively constant pH. Choice A is eliminated, because an
aqueous solution where the hydronium and hydroxide concentrations areequal hasa pHof 7.0, not necessarily a
constant pH. Abuffer solution is onein which the ratio of the acid and basein the conjugate pair neverexceeds
10: 1, but that does not address the hydronium-to-hydroxide ratio. Consider a pH = 4.0buffer, for instance. At
pH =4.0, the hydronium concentration is 10"4 M, and the hydroxide concentration is 10"10 M. This results in a
ratio of 1,000,000 : 1. This is far greater than 10:1, so choice Bis eliminated. Choice C is the best, because a
relatively constant pH implies that the hydronium concentration is relatively constant. If hydronium
concentration is relatively constant, so is hydroxide concentration. This makes choice C the best answer.
Choice D is eliminated, because the pH should be within one unit of the pKa value for the weak acid, not the
hydronium-to-hydroxide ratio. The best answer is thus choice C.
12. Choice Bis correct. The solution before adding the hydroxide has a 15: 10mole ratio of weak acid to conjugate
base. Addition of 1.00mL of KOH converts some of the weak acid into conjugate base so that the ratio of 15 : 10
becomes 14 : 11, still in favor of the weak acid. Because the weak acid is slightly more concentrated than its
conjugate base, the pH of the solution is slightly lower than the pKa. The pKa is 4.74, so the best answer is
choice B.
13. Choice Ais correct. The largest ratio of conjugate base to weakacid is found in the solutionwith a pH greater
than the pKa of the weak acid by the largest amount. Formic acid (HCO2H) has a pKa of 3.64. In choice A,
when the solution pH is 4.00, the pH is 0.36 greater than the pKa. Hypochlorous acid (HCIO) has a pKa of
7.49. In choice B, when the solution pH is 7.00, the pH is 0.49 less than the pKa. There is more weak acid than
conjugate base, which eliminates choice B. Hypobromous acid (HBrO) has a pKa of8.67. In choice C, when the
solution pH is 8.50, the pH is 0.17 less than the pKa. There is more weak acid than conjugate base, which
eliminates choice C. Ammonium ion (NH4+) has a pKa of 9.26. In choice D, when the solution pH is 9.50, the
pH is 0.24 greater than the pKa. 0.36is greater than 0.24, so the best answer is choice A.
Copyright by The Berkeley Review*- 339
Section V Detailed Explanations
14. Choice B is correct. Addition of water to a buffer equally dilutes the weak acid and its conjugate base. The
result is that the ratio of base to acid has not changed, so the buffer does not shift. The equilibrium has not
been disturbed, so the reaction exhibits no net shift. The pH remains constant. The best answer is choice B.
Buffer Chart and pKa Chart
15. Choice C is correct. Ammonium (NH4+) has a pKa value of 9.26 as given in Table 1. This means that when the
acid and conjugate base arepresent inequal molar concentration, the pHof thesolution is 9.26. Tomake thepH
of the solution equal 9.5, the conjugate base must be in excess to sucha degree that the log of the base-to-acid
ratio is 0.24. Choice A lists the conjugate base (ammonia) in excess, so choice A is valid. Hydrocyanic acid
(HCN) has a pKa value of 9.32 as given in Table 1. This means that when the acid and conjugate base are
present in equal molar concentration, the pHof the solution is 9.32. Tomake the pH of the solution equal 9.5,
the conjugate base must be in excess tosucha degree that the logof the base-to-acid ratio is 0.18. Choice Blists
theconjugate base (sodium cyanide) in excess, sochoice Bis valid. From choice A, we knowthat an ammonium
and ammonia solution must have excess ammonia for the pH to equal 9.5. If one-half equivalent of the strong
acid HCl were added to one equivalent of ammonia, then the pH would equal the pKa (9.26). The excess HCl
added lowers the pH, so the value is less than 9.5. This makes choice C invalid and thus the answer you
should choose. From choice D, we know that an hydrocyanic acid and cyanide solution must have excess
cyanide for the pH to equal 9.5. If one-half equivalent of thestrong base NaOH were added to one equivalent
of hydrocyanic acid, then the pH would equal the pKa (9.32). The excess NaOH added raises the pH to a
value greater than 9.32 and approximately equal to 9.5, making choice D valid. Choose answer C.
16. Choice B is correct. One half-equivalent of base when added to one equivalent of carbonic acid removes the
first proton from half of the carbonic acid molecules present in solution. This results in a solution of half
carbonic acid and half bicarbonate ([H2CO3] = [HCO3"]). When the concentration of acid equals the
concentration of conjugate base, pH equals pKai for carbonic acid, which is 6.37, as given in the passage. When
one and one-half equivalents of base are added to one equivalent of carbonic acid, the first proton is completely
removed from all of the carbonic acid molecules present in solution. The remaining half of an equivalent
continues to remove the second proton fromhalf of the bicarbonate molecules present in solution. This results in
a solution where [HCO3"] = [CO32"]. When the concentration of bicarbonate equals the concentration of
carbonate, pH equals pKa2 for carbonic acid, which is 10.83, as given in the passage. This makes choice B
correct. When one and one-half equivalents of base are added to one equivalent of phosphoric acid, the first
proton is completely removed from all of the phosphoric acid molecules present in solution. The remaining half
of an equivalent continues to remove the second proton from half of the dihydrophosphate present in solution.
This results in a solution where [H2PO4"] = [HPO42"]. When this equality holds true, the pH equals pKa2 for
phosphoric acid. From Table 2, we know that Ka2 for phosphoric acid is 6.2 x 10"8, which equates to a pKa2
value of 8 - log 6.2, which is a little over 7. This does not make a pH of 10.83, so choice C is eliminated. When
two and one-half equivalents of base are added to one equivalent of phosphoric acid, the first and second
protons are completely removed from all of the phosphoric acid molecules present in solution. The remaining
half of an equivalent removes the third proton from half of the hydrophosphate in solution. This results in a
solution where [HPO42"] = [PO43"]. When this equality holds true, the pH equals pKa3 for phosphoric acid.
From Table 2, we know that Ka3 for phosphoric acid is4.8 x10"13, which equates toa pKa3 value of13 - log 4.8,
which is a little over 12. This does not make a solution with a pH of 10.83, so choice D is eliminated.
17. Choice C is correct. One and one-half equivalents of base when added to one equivalent of oxalic acid
completely removes the first proton from all of the oxalic acid molecules present in solution and continues on to
remove the second proton from half of the bioxalate present in solution. This results in a solution where
[HC2O4"] = [C2O42"]. When this equality holds true, the pH equals pKa2 for oxalic acid. From Table 2, we
know that Ka2 for oxalic acid is 5.1 x 10"^, which equates to a pKa2 value of 5 - log5.1, which is less than 7, so
choice A is eliminated. One-half equivalent of base when added to one equivalent of carbonic acid removes the
first proton from half of the carbonic acid present in solution. This produces a solution where [H2CO3] =
[HCO3"]. When this equality holds true, the pH equals pKai for carbonic acid, which is 6.37, as given in the
passage. Choice B is eliminated. One-half equivalent of base when added to one equivalent of hypochlorous
acid removes the proton from half of the hypochlorous acid present in solution. This results in a solution where
[HCIO] = [CIO"]. When the concentration of acid equals the concentration of conjugate base, the pH equals pKa
for HCIO, which is 7.49 as given in the table. Choice C is therefore correct. One-half equivalent of acid when
added to one equivalent of pyridine adds a proton to half of the pyridine present in solution. This results in a
solution where [C5H5N] = [Cs^NH+J. When this is true, the pH equals pKa for C5H5N, which is 5.16, as
given in Table 1. Choice D is eliminated.
18. Choice C is correct. ThepKa value for formic acid (HCO2H) is 3.78. In order to have a pH =4.00, the solution
must be mixed with excess conjugate base (HCO2"). This makes choice A valid. The pKa value for anilinium
cation (C6H5NH3+) is 4.64. In order tohave a pH=4.00, thesolution must bemixed withexcess conjugate acid
(C6H5NH3+). This makes choice Bvalid. The pKa value for benzoic acid (C6H5CO2H) is 4.19. In order to
have a pH = 4.00, the solution must be mixed with excess conjugate acid (C.6H5CO2H). This makes choice C
invalid. If excess C6H5CO2" were mixed with C6H5CO2H, then the pH of the solution would be greater than
4.19, which is greater than 4.00. This makes choice C invalid. You should select choice C. The pKa value for
pyruvic acid (H3CCOCO2H) is 3.89. In order to have a pH = 4.00, the solution must be mixed with excess
conjugate base (H3CCOC02-)- This makes choice D valid.
19. Choice A is correct. Blood that is rich in carbon dioxide is also rich in H2CO3. Since carbonic acid is acidic, the
pH decreases as carbonic acid is added to solution. The final solution thus has a pH lower than 7.4. This makes
choice A the correct choice. Because the amount of acid is increasing, the phosphate buffer system is affected.
The additional hydronium ion present is absorbed by the phosphate buffer, thus increasing the amount of
H2PO4" present anddecreasing the amount ofHPO42" and PO43" present insolution. This eliminates choice B.
IfH2CO3 is addedtosolution, it equilibrates bymaking hydronium ion(H3O4") andbicarbonate anion (CO32").
This results in increases in the concentrations of both bicarbonate and hydronium ions. This eliminates choices
CandD.
20. Choice D is correct. The concentration of the conjugate base is greater than the concentration of the acid when
the pH is greater than the pKa. When the pH is greater than the pKa, the log of the ratio of base to acid is a
positive value, indicating that the ratio of conjugate base to acid is greater than 1.0. The pKa for HF is 3.17, so
at pH = 3.00, the pH is less than the pKa. This eliminates choice A. The value for pKai for H2CO3is 6.37, so
at pH = 6.00, the pH is less than the pKai. This eliminates choice B. The value for pKa2 for H2C2O4 is 5 - log
5.1 (which is roughly 4.3), so at pH = 4.00, the pH is less than the pKa2- This eliminates choice C. The value
for pKa2 for H3PO4 is 8 - log6.2 (which is roughly 7.2), so at pH =8.00, the pH is greater than the pKa2- This
results in the base being more concentrated than the acid, makingchoice D the correct choice.
21. Choice C is correct. The value of pKai is 6.37 and pKa2 is 10.33 for carbonic acid (H2CO3). The pH is greater
than pKai, so the conjugate base (bicarbonate) is in greater concentration than the acid (carbonic acid). This
makes choice A valid. ThepH is less than pKa2, so the conjugate acid (bicarbonate) is in greater concentration
than the base (carbonate). This makes choice B valid. The value for pKa2 is 7.20 and pKa3 is 12.32 for
phosphoric acid. The pH is greater than pKa2, so the conjugate base (HPO42") is in greater concentration than
the acid (H2PO4"). This means that choice C is invalid, makingit the correct choice for the question. The pH
is less than pKa3, so the conjugate acid (HP042-) is in greater concentration than the base (PO43"). This makes
choice D valid.
Molecular Weight from Neutralization of an Organic Acid
22.
23.
24.
Choice Cis correct. To reach equivalence, it takes (0.03 L)(0.20 M) =0.006 moles of NaOH. Formula weight is
grams per mole equivalent, so the unknown acid has aformula weight of 1-0 8/0.OO6 moles =17 grams per mole.
From the choices given, the only acid that is close to 167 grams per mole is p-nitro benzoic acid
(O2NC6H4CO2H). Toverify your answer, add up the atomic weights of the molecule, O= 12, N =14, C=12
and H = 1 (all in grams per mole). The sumis 46 (for NO2) + 76 (for C6H4) +45 (for CO2H) = 167 grams per
mole, so the answer is definitely C.
Choice C is correct. The formula weight of a compound is measured in grams per mole. The moles are
determined from 0.040 liters x0.25 M=0.010 moles. The formula weight is 1-0 g/n.010 moles =10grams per
mole. Pick choice C for best results.
Choice D is correct. Since the graph begins at a high pH, the initial solution must be basic. This rules out
choices A and B. The equivalence point is at pH = 4.6, which is < 7. This indicates that the neutralized
product is a weak acid, so the titrant must be a strong acid. (Because the equivalence point is not 7.0, the
compound mustbea weak base). The graph represents D, thetitration ofa weakbase bystrong acid.
25. Choice Dis correct. To predict the pHnear the equivalence point, which iswhat you're doing when you choose
an indicator, you should use the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation. At 2pH units beyond the pKa ofthe acid,
the ratio of conjugate base to acid is 100:1, which means that the reaction is almost at equivalence. This is the
point at which the indicator should start toshow some color change. In this question, the pKa for the weak
acid is 7.20. The best indicator is active around pH = 9.20. This is choice D, phenolphthalein, which is active
between 8.0 and 9.6. You mayremember usingphenolphthalein in titration labsfromgeneralchemistry.
26. ChoiceCis correct. Abuffer is formed whena conjugate pair (acid and base) are present in solutionin roughly
equal molar amounts. To achieve this, you can: (1) mix the conjugate acid and base evenly, (2) addthe acid and
half-titrate it (add a half molar equivalent of strong base), or (3) add the base and titrate it halfway (add
half an equivalent of strong base). Choice Ais a case of full titration, which leads to the complete conversion
of the weakacid to its conjugate base, so that is out. Choice Bis a case of over-titrating by adding double the
amount of base needed. In choice C, the weak acid (H3CCO2H) is added to a half-equivalent of strong base,
which results in a buffered solution. Pick C. Choice D is an acid with an acid, which doesn't react.
27. Choice D is correct. The best choice for a buffer of pH = 8.5 is a weak acid with a pKa close to 8.5 mixed in
solution with its conjugate base. The acid 4-ethanoylphenol (H3CCOC6H4OH) has a pKa of 8.4, which is
closest to the 8.5 value, so choose D. To make the buffer equal to 8.5 (slightly to the basic side of 8.4), there
should be a slight excess of the conjugate base relative to 4-ethanoylphenol. The log of the ratio of conjugate
base to weak acid should be 0.1, a positivenumber, so the ratio of conjugate base to weak acid must be greater
than 1.
28. Choice A is correct. The formula weight, also known as the empirical weight, is derived from the mass of
compound per mole of equivalent. Adding up the molecular mass of the compound yields 90 grams/mole.
Because there are two equivalents of protons per oxalic acid, the formula weight is 45 grams/mole. Pick A. Be
sure not to pick Bby mistake.
29. Choice Bis correct. If the titration required 30.0 mLof 0.10 MKOH(aq) to neutralize 25.0 mL of 0.10 M HA(aq),
then according the relationship MacidVacjd = MbaSeVbase/ ê mlarity f tne ac"*must be 0.12M. However,
seven drops (although the exact number is irrelevant) of HCl must be added to back titrate to the equivalence
point. This means that the molarity of the unknown weak acid is actually a little less than 0.12 M, making
choice B the best answer.
Passage V (Questions 30 - 36) Conjugate Pair Titration Curve
30. Choice C is correct. As a general rule, the pH at the equivalence point is either three units above or below the
pKa for the acid depending on the type of titration. This would mean that the pH at the two equivalence
points differs by approximately 6 pH units. This makes choice C the best choice.
To calculate the pH exactly for the two titrations, one can plug into the shortcut equation for both the conjugate
base (formed at point b) and conjugate acid (formedat point d). At the equivalence point, the volume is double
its original value, so the concentration is half of its initial value. At point b, there is 0.05M OAc", and at point
d, there is 0.05 M HOAc. From Figure 1, the pKa for HOAc is roughly 5.0. This means that pKb for OAc" is
roughly 9.0 The two calculations are shown below:
For HOAc at point d: pH = lpKa - llog [HA] =1(5.0) - llog (0.05) = 2.5 - 1(-1.3) = 2.5 + 0.65 = 3.15
For OAc- at point b: pOH =1 pKb -1log [A"] =1(9.0) - 1 log (0.05) =4.5 -1(-1.3) =4.5 +0.65 =5.15 .-. pH=8.85
The difference in pH is 5.7, so the best answer is choice C.
31. Choice C is correct. The pH of a solution depends on the concentration and strength of the reagents in solution.
The highest pH at equivalence results from the presence of the strongest conjugate base (since all of the
conjugate bases are in equal concentration). At equivalence, choices Band D are both acids, so they are both
eliminated (pH at equivalence is less than 7.0). Methyl ammonium is less acidic than acetic acid based on the
relative pKa general values given in the passage. The stronger base is the conjugate base of the weaker acid,
making methylamine the more basic compound between acetate and the amine. The greater hydroxide
concentration results from the titration of 0.10 M H3CNH3CI, so choice A is eliminated, and thus choice C is
the best answer.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Choice C is correct. When the pH is greater than the pKa, then according to the Henderson-Hasselbalch
equation, the conjugate base is in greater concentration than the acid. This eliminates choices A and B.
Because the pH and pKa are negative logvalues, if pH>pKa, then [H+] <Ka. Choice Cis correct.
Choice C is correct. Initially in the titration of H3CCO2H by NaOH (at point a), the concentration of
H3CCO2H is 0.10 M. At the equivalence point in the titration of H3CC02Na by HCl (point d), the
concentration of H3CCO2H is 0.05 M, due to dilution that occurs when the aqueous basesolution is added. Note
in the graph below that the final volume is 50mL, not 25 mL. The concentrations of H3CCO2H between the two
points in question differ by a factor of 2. This means that the pH of the two solutions differs by -logV2. With
the H3CCO2H concentration being greater at the initial point of the titration of H3CCO2H by NaOH than the
equivalence point of the titration of H3CC02Na by HCl, the pH is lower at point a (the initial point of the
titration of H3CCO2H by NaOH). The best answer is therefore choice C. The graph belowshows the data:
pH
Start with 25 mL
O.IOMH3CCO2"
Start with 25 mL
0.10 M H3CCO2H
Finish with 50 mL
0.05 M H3CCO2"
Start with 50 mL
0.05 M H3CC02H
25.0
Choice D is correct. By having a lower pKa value, H3CCO2H is more acidic than CH3NH3+. Because it is
more acidic, H3CCO2H buffers at a lower pH than CH3NH34", so choice A is eliminated. Because it is more
acidic, H3CCO2H has a conjugate base that is weaker (and thus has a higher pKD value) than the conjugate
base of CH3NH3+. Choice B is thus eliminated. Because it is more acidic, H3CCO2H dissociates more than
CH3NH3+, so choice C is eliminated. Because it is more acidic, H3CCO2H is a better electron pair acceptor
than CH3NH3"4" making choice D correct. The point of this question is to view the many different ways in
which relative acidity can be expressed.
Choice D is correct. Because it is more acidic, H3CCO2H yields a lower pH value than CH3NH34" of equimolar
concentration, so choice A is valid and consequently eliminated. Because it is more acidic, H3CCO2H has a
conjugate base with a higher pKb value than the conjugate base of CH3NH3+. Choice B is valid and thus
eliminated. Because it is more acidic, H3CCO2H produces more conjugatebase than CH3NH34" when added to
water, so choice C is valid and consequently eliminated. Because it is more acidic, H3CCO2H is a better proton
donor than CH3NH3+, so choice D is not true. The correct answer is choice D.
Choice D is correct. Given that the pKa value for HF is lower than that of H3CCO2H, HF is a stronger acid
than H3CCO2H. This means that equimolar HF and H3CCO2H solutions result in a lower pH for the HF
solution. This makes choice A invalid and thus eliminated. When equimolar HF and H3CCO2H are titrated
equally, they both have converted into the same amount of conjugate base in the buffer region, meaning that [F"]
equals [H3CCO2']. This eliminates choices Band C. When both HF and H3CCO2H are half-titrated, the pH
of solution is lower for the HF solution, because the pH equals the pKa of the acid and the pKa value for HF is
lower than that of H3CCO2H. This means that pH(HF solution) <pKa(acetic acid) which means that [H+](HF
solution) > Ka(acetic acid)- This makes choice D the best choice.
Passage VI (Questions 37 - 42) Titration Curves and Concentration Effects
37. Choice A is correct. The initial pH is greatest in the solution with the lowest concentration of the weakest
acid. H3CCO2H is the weaker acid of the two choices, and 0.010 M is the lowest of the concentrations. This
means that choice A is correct.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Choice Ais correct. When the pH of the solution exceeds the pKa for the acid, then there must be anexcess of
conjugate base relative to the conjugate acid, according to the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation. This
eliminates choices Cand D. The pHis the negative log of the [H30+] and the pKa is the negative log of the
Ka. If pH > pKa, then the [H30+] must be less than Ka. This makes choice Acorrect. To make this clearer,
when pH =pKa', then [H30+] =Ka. As the pH increases, the [H30+] decreases, while both pKa and Ka remain
constant. The[H30+] is thus less than Ka. The derivation from theequation for Ka is shown below:
Ka =[PW+][A-
K
[HA] [H30+] [HA]
[A], WhenpH>pKa, [
[HA]
> 1.0, so
K
[H3O4
> 1 and Ka > [H30+]
Choice C is correct. In all three weak acid titrations, the volume of sodium hydroxide solution added to reach
the equivalence point was 25.0 milliliters, so choices A and B are eliminated. The higher the acid
concentration initially, the more conjugate base that forms at the equivalence point. The higher the
concentration of conjugate base, thehigher pHfor thesolution at theequivalence point. Pick choice C.
Choice C is correct. If the base concentration is doubled while the acid concentration remains constant, then the
base is twice as concentrated as the acid. Half as much titrant (base) is required, so the equivalence point is
reached in half the base volume. This eliminates choices Band D. The acid is still HCl (a strong acid), and
the titrant base is still NaOH (a strong base), so the pH is still 7.0 at equivalence, and the curve still has the
same shape (lip-free and sigmoidal). The best answer is choice C.
Choice C is correct. Choice A is eliminated, because a strong acid and strong base do not make a buffer when
mixed together. Choice Bis eliminated, because NaOH is not a weak base. Choice D is eliminated, because
the pH changes throughout the titration; but it is at the equivalence point that the pH changes drastically.
Choice C is the best answer, because the log scale means that as long as the concentrations are 100 times
different, then the linear difference is 2.0 on the log scale. This in turn means that the slopes are equal through
most of the titration, except near the equivalence point. Perhaps the answer would be better if it mentioned the
different concentrations of the titrant bases in each trial. The best answer is not always perfect.
Choice D is correct. Ammonia is a weak base, so choices A and C are eliminated, because the curves do not show
the initial dip in pH (lip-o-weakness). The greater the concentration of ammonia initially, the greater the
pH initially, so the 1.00 M NH3 has a higher starting pH than the 0.010 M NH3. The correct choice is D.
PassageVII (Questions 43 - 49) Titration Curves and Strength Effects
43. Choice D is correct. The greatest Ka value correlates with the strongest acid. Of the acids in the experiment,
only HCl shows a strong acid titration curve (lip-free) and an equivalence pH of 7, so choice D is the answer.
44. Choice B is correct. The initial pH in the titration of HCN is greater than the initial pH in the titration of
HCIO, according to the titration curve in the passage. This means that the initial pH in the titration of HCN
must be greater than 4.23, which eliminates choice A. Because HCN is acidic, the initial pH must be below 7.0,
which eliminates choice D. The pH at the equivalence point in the titration of HCIO is less than the pH at
the equivalence point in the titration of HCN, according to the titration curve in the passage. This means that
the pH at the equivalence point in the titration of HCIO must be less than 11.01, which eliminates choice C.
The only choice that remains is choice B, so choice B is the best answer. The numbers are reasonable, because
5.16 is greater than 4.23 (and 4.74 if you look at the titration curve), and 10.08 fits between 8.72 and 11.01 in the
equivalence pH data.
45. Choice B is correct. Statement is invalid, as the curves in Figure 1 show. Strong acids fully dissociate upon
addition to water, so the pH is low in the beginning, It remains relatively constant, because pH is a log scale.
It is the strong acid curve that has a plateau in the beginning. A buffer is defined as a roughly equal molar
mixture of a weak acid and its conjugate base. Basedon the definition, a strong acid when mixed with a strong
base does not form a buffer. Do not be fooled by the flat region of the strong acid titration curve, which is
attributed to mathematics, not buffering. Statement II is valid. Statement III holds true for strong acids, but
not for weak acids. For instance, a weak acid with a pKa greater than 7, has a pH greater than seven for most
of the buffer region, which is observed before the equivalence point. For a weak acid titration curve, the pH is
greater than 7 at equivalence, so there must be a point on the curve before the equivalence point that is greater
than 7. Only statement II is valid, so choice B is correct.

46.
47.
48.
49.
Choice D is correct. Because 0.10 MHIO has a greater pHthan0.10 MHCN, HIO must be a weaker acid than
HCN, and the titration curve associated with HIO would have all of the points greater than the titration
curve of HCN. The pKa of HCN is greater than 8.72 (the half-equivalence pHis greater than the equivalence
pH in the HOAc titration curve). Thus, the pKa of HIO must be greater than 8.72, which makes choice A
incorrect. The pH at equivalence in the titration of HCN is 11.01, so the pH at equivalence in the titration of
HIO must be greater than 11.01, and choice Bis thus eliminated. The pH of 0.10 MHIO must have a pH less
than 7.0, because although it is a weak acid, it is still acidic. The pHcannot be 7.21, so choice Cis eliminated.
The pKa of HCN is9.32, so the pKa of HIO must be greater than 9.32. The pHat equivalence must be at least a
pH unit less than 13 (the pH of 0.10 MKOH), so the difference between the pKa and the pH at equivalence is
less thanthree pH units. This makes choice Da true statement. The other wayof confirming choice Dis tolook
at the trend whereby as the acid gets weaker, the difference between pKa and the pH at equivalence gets
smaller. The difference for HCN is 11.01 - 9.32 = 1.69. For HIO, the difference should be less than 1.69.
Choice B is correct. When 10 mL 0.10 M HCIO are mixed with 10 mL 0.15 M KCIO, a buffer is formed. When
water is added to a buffer, theacidand conjugate base are diluted equally, so the pH does not change. The pH
consequently remains at 7.64. The best answer is choice B.
Choice A is correct. Because CN" is a stronger base than CIO" (HCN is a weaker acid than HCIO), the titration
curve for NaCN should have a higher initial pH, higher pH at the half-titrated point (because the pKa for
HCNis greater than the pKa for HCIO), and higher pH at the equivalence point. This can be seen only in the
titration curve in choice A. Choices C and D should have been eliminated immediately, because their
respective graphs show that the two acids have the same pKa, which according to Figure 1 in the passage,
they don't have.
Choice A is correct. The stronger the acid, the lower its pKa value. HCl is the strongest acid, so it has the
lowest (and only negative) pKa value. Choices C and D are eliminated. From the titration data, it can be seen
that the next strongest acid is HOAc, meaning that the pKa for HOAc should be just ahead of the pKa for HCl
in the sequence. This makes choice A the best answer.
Passage VIII (Questions 50 - 56) Normality and Neutralization
50. C is correct. The moles of NaOH can be calculated from the moles of the acid (H+) that were neutralized, since
the amount of base added is to the point of neutralization, where the moles acid equals the moles base. Keep in
mind that sulfuric acid is diprotic and that the units given are units of normality. Normality already takes
into account the two equivalents of hydronium ion per sulfuric acid. Given in the passage, the number of moles
of acid (H+) is (.025 L)(0.20 M) = 0.005 moles. To reach equivalence, this must be the moles of NaOH as well.
The question asks for concentration, so the moles NaOH must be divided by the volume of solution.
Molarity = moles = 0-005 mole = 0.25 M
liter 0.02 L
Thus, the concentration of NaOH(aq) is 0.25 M. Answer C is the best answer for you to choose. Do what is best!
51. Choice B is correct. The first proton is always the easiest to remove (that is, pKai is smaller or more acidic
than pKa2). Reversing this wording gives the correct answer B. The first proton must be easiest to remove,
because it comes off first. This also a rare case where the correct choice contains the word "always."
52. Choice D is correct. Normality is based on the molarity of equivalent base required to neutralize all of the
acidic protons. Since there are three (3) acidic protons on H3PO4, the normality is three times the molarity.
Normality = 3(0.3 M) = 0.90 N H3PO4.
Pick choice D if you want to be a supernova of chemistry wisdom. Or pick it because it's the right answer.
53. Choice C is correct. The conversion from H3PO4 to H2PO4" involves the loss of the first proton, so the acidity is
calculated using pKa-|. The conversion from H2PO4" to HPO42" involves the loss of the second proton, so the
acidity is calculated using pKa2- Mixing NaH2P04 and Na2HP04 yields H2PO4" and HPO42", so the pH of
the solution is close to pKa2- Because there is more of HPO42" in solution than H2PO4", the pH is greater than
pKa2- This eliminates choices Aand B. If thesolution contained pure HPO42", the pH would be an average of
pKa2 and pKa3. The presence of H2PO4" lowers the pH, making the best answer choice C. Using the
Henderson-Hasselbalch equation would give a pH = pKa2 + log 2 = pKa2 + 0.3.
54. Choice Dis correct. Sulfuric acid has only two (2) acidic protons, whereas phosphoric acid has three (3) acidic
protons to neutralize. Thus, phosphoric acid requires only two-thirds the amount of base that is required for
sulfuric acid. The number of moles of phosphoric acid is (25 mL)(0.6 M) =15 mmoles H3PO4 . This means that
there are 45 mmoles of H+ toneutralize. The question asks how many mL of 0.40 MH2S04(aq) contains this
amount of H+. 0.40 MH2S04(aq) =0.8 MH+. This means that the number of mL is: fcfflmflk, which equals
0.8 M
56.25 mL 0.40M H2SO4, given as answer choice D.
55. Choice Bis correct. Phosphoric acid is a triprotic acid, so choices Aand Ccan be eliminated. Because the first
proton of phosphoric acid is weak, the start of the curve should have a cusp (lip-o-weakness). It is only in
choice Bthat the cusp is present, so the best answer is choice B.
56. Choice Ais correct. Flask 2is initially filled with 40.0 mL of 0.30 NH3PO4. The concentration is equivalent to
0.10 MH3PO4. Adding 40 mL of 0.30 NNaOH completely neutralizes all three protons on phosphoric acid,
leaving only the conjugate base P043"(aq) in solution. All of the moles of phosphoric acid(H3P04) present
initially are converted into phosphate (PO43-). The addition of 40 mL of NaOH solution also doubles the
volume ofthe solution, increasing it from 40 mL to 80 mL. This cuts the concentration inhalf. Had the volume
remained 40 mL, and if all of the H3PO4 were converted into PO43", then the concentration of P043"(aq) would
have been 0.10 M. However, the final concentration after the extra 40mLof solution is accounted for is 0.5x 0.10
MP043"(aq). That equals 0.050 MP043"(aq), which ischoice A.
PassageIX (Questions 57- 63)
Titration Curve of a Polyprotic Acid
57. Choice D is correct. Because there are two vertical inflection points on the titration curve, the acid has two
equivalence points and thus is diprotic. Because of the lip-o-weakness (initial cusp in the titration curve), the
first proton is associated with a weak acid. The second proton is always weaker than the first proton, so both
protons are weak. Choice D is the best answer.
58. Choice D is correct. The first pKa is always lower than thesecond pKa by definition, meaning that choice Ais
valid for all polyprotic acids. The first equivalence point (point c) is greater than the point where pH = pKai
(point b). This makes choice Ba valid statement and thus eliminates it. The second equivalence point (point e)
is greater than the point where pH = pKa2 (point d). This makes choice C a valid statement and thus
eliminates it. The first equivalence point (point c) is less than the point where pH = pKa2 (point d). This
makes choice D an invalid statement and thus makes it the best answer. To go from the first equivalence point
to the point at which the pH equals pKa2 (where [HA"] =[A2"]), base must be added to the solution. This
means that pKa2 is greater than the pH at the first equivalence point (addition of base increases the pH),
confirming choice D.
Choice Bis correct. To carry out the titration, a strong base must be added toreact with the unknown weak acid.
The pH increases as base is added, and according to the curve inFigure 1, the pHdoes increase when moving
left toright. The bestanswer ischoice B. Aweak base isnot strong enough tocarry out thetitration.
Choice Ais correct. To gofrom one equivalence point toanother requires that one equivalent (whatever exact
quantity that may be) of base titrant be added. Choices Band Dcan both be eliminated, because they require
anequal amount ofbase. It takes one equivalent oftitrant to go from pH =pKai topH=pKa2, soinchoice A,
more than one equivalent is required. In choice C, less than one equivalent is required. This makes the best
answer choice A. On the graph, to go from one labeled point to the next labeled point, requires one-half of an
equivalent. So starting to before point band finishing after point d clearly is more than one equivalent.
61. Choice D is correct. When pH=pKai (true at point a), exactly one-half of an equivalent of titrant has been
added tosolution. To reach the second equivalence point, two equivalents must be added. If5mL does not reach
the point at which pH equals pKa], then one-half of an equivalent must be greater than 5 mL. This means that
one equivalent is greater than 10 mL and thus, two equivalents are greater than 20 mL. More than 20 mL is
required to reach the second equivalence point, so the best answer is choice D.
62. Choice Bis correct. Point d is the point at which pH =pKa2 (where [HA"] =[A2"]). Point e is the second
equivalence point (at which all of the species present is A2"). Between the two points (d and e), it is safe to
assume that A2" is the predominant species with some HA" present. This isbest described by choice B.
59.
60.

63.
Choice D is correct. Point b is the point at which pH =pKal, so [H2A] = [HA"]. This makes choice Avalid.
Point c is the first vertical inflection point, so it is the first equivalence point. Choice Bis valid. Point d is the
point at which pH =pKa2, because [HA"] =[A2"]. Choice Cis valid. Point f represents apoint where excess
base is being added and all of the species exists in the fully deprotonated form (A2"). Pick Dto feel good.
64.
65.
Carbonate Titration Curve
The passage is easier when all of the points in Figure 1 are labeled.
a (All exists as C032")
H2COs(aq)
P*aU
pKb2
d (First equivalence point, all exists as HC03")
f(pH=pKai)
: >*g (pH<PKal)
H (aq) + H CO-^(aq)
h (Second equivalence point,
all exists as H2CO3)
i (excess acid added)
2.0 Equivalents strong acid added
Choice C is correct. The pH equals the pKa of the acid when the titration is half way to the equivalence point.
The two points marked by x represent the pointsat which pH = pKa. The value of pKai is lower than pKa2, so
the correct answer is point f, choice C. Point c is where the pH = pKa2, point d is the first equivalence point
(where the species exists as HCO3"), and point h is the second equivalence point (where the species exists as
H2CO3).
Choice B is correct. Conjugate pairs have pK values that sum to 14. In the case of a diprotic acid, the first
proton to be lost in an acid dissociation reaction corresponds to the second (last) proton to be gained in a base
hydrolysis reaction. This means that the following conjugate pair relationships hold true.
HC03-(aq)
P*a2,
P*M
H+(aq) + C032"(aq)
The conjugate pair relationship yields pKa] + pKb2 = 14 and pKa2 + pKbi = 14. This makes choice A valid and
choice B invalid. The question asks you to seek a statement that is not true, so choice B is best. According to
Figure 1, the initial pH is the highest point, and it is greater than pKa2, making choice C a valid statement.
According to Figure 1, the second equivalence point is lower than all pKa values, including pKai. This makes
choice D a valid statement.
66. Choice B is correct. In a fashion similar to the way in which we determine the isoelectric point of an amino
acid, the middle equivalence point can be determined by knowing that it lies exactly in the middle of the two
pKa values. The pH of the first equivalence point is thus found by averaging pKa] and pKa2- The pH cannot be
7.0 for this titration, and the Ka when dealing with the acidity of bicarbonate would involve pKa2 (because it
is the second proton to be lost). The best answer for this question is choice B.
67. Choice B is correct. At point e of the titration curve, the amount of HCl added is greater than one equivalent
but less than one and one-half equivalents. This makes choice A a valid statement. The pH should be lower
than the pH of point c (the point at which pH = pKa2), so choice D is a valid statement. The value of pKai is
6.37, so choices B and C are contradictory answers. The pH is greater than the pH at point f (the point at
which pH = pKal)/ which makes choice B invalid, and thus the best answer. It is critical in this passage that
you recognize where pKai and pKa2 lie.

68 Choice Cis correct. Bicarbonate is in its greatest concentration at the first equivalence point. This point lies
midway between pKai and pKa2- From the passage, the values for pKbi and pKb2 are 3.67 and 7.63
respectively. The values for pKai and pKa2 are therefore 6.37 and 10.33, respectively. The bicarbonate
concentration is greatest midway between 6.37 and 10.33. The best answer is choice C.
69 Choice Ais correct. The pH change between points cand dcorresponds to the change between pKa2 and the first
equivalence point. This is greater than the incremental change from point dto e(first equivalence to apoint
with pH greater than pKai), greater than the incremental change from point eto f (a point with pH barely
greater than pKai to apoint where pH =pKal), and greater than the incremental change from point f to g(a
point with pH =pKal to apoint where pH is just less than pKal). The best answer is choice A. It may be easier
to answer this question by observing the titration curve and noting the change in pH (y-axis) between the two
points in question.
70. Choice Ais correct. Changing the labeling of the y-axis from pH to pOH does not change the shape of the
graph. The base is still weak, so choice Bcan be eliminated. The pOH starts lower than 7(because pH starts
greater than 7), so choices Cand Dare eliminated. The best answer is choice A, because the graph flips
vertically about the pH orpOH =7line when pH and pOH are interchanged.
Indicator Selection
Passage XI (Questions 71- 76)
71. Choice C is correct. Because the indicator has to be active at the equivalence point, the pKa of the indicator
has to be greater then the pKa of the acid being titrated. This is because the equivalence pH is higher than
the pKa for the acid being titrated. Because the acid being titrated is weak, the pH at equivalence is greater
than 7.6. It is stated in the passage that the pKa values should differ by about 3. This makes the best choice C
(which differs by 3.5 pH units) the best. Choice Cis roughly three units above the pKa for the acid and is
greater than 7.0.
72.
73.
74.
75.
Choice Ais correct. An indicator concentration that is too highresults in a second competing acid that affects
the titration and a faint color in the solution that is permanent. If the indicator were in concentration equal to
the acid being titrated, then the curve would look like a diprotic acid. While the color is affected by the
excess indicator, the color change is certainly not going to be too minimal, sochoice Dgets eliminated. It is a
color change, which involves frequency of light. Ahigher indicator concentration affects the intensity of the
light, so the color change would just be more intense, but every bit as detectable. This eliminates choice C.
While the viscosity may change with the addition of the indicator, this should not affect the reaction
equilibrium, only the rate. The best answer is choice A, because the indicator can react with the titrant base.
You may recall from titration experiments in general chemistry lab that you add only a few drops of indicator
to the solution.
Choice Ais correct. When the pHis greater than the pKa, the solution has more conjugate base than acid, so
choices C and D are eliminated. The difference between the concentrations is 2 on the log scale, so on a linear
scale, it can't be 2 : 1 (it must be 100 : 1). This eliminates choice Band confirms that choice A is the correct
answer. Using the Henderson-Hasselbalch equation, the value can be determined.
pH =pKa +log-^-L =pKa +2=> log-^-L
V F 5[HA] F [HA]
=2 => i^-L =102 =100
[HA]
Choice Dis correct. Agood indicator changes color (thus it cannot be transparent) and it must be present inlow
concentrationin solution. This eliminateschoice A. If it is not affected by acid-base reactions, it can't react in a
way that indicates a pH change. Choice Bis eliminated. Because the indicator must undergo some acid-base
chemical reaction, it is best when the indicator is a weakacid or weak base, so it does not affect the pH much.
If it were a strong acid orstrong base would alter the pH and affect the titration. The best answer ischoice D.
Choice Cis correct. The question calls for a titration in which the pH at equivalence is the same, regardless of
the concentration of reactants. Choices A and Bcan be eliminated, because the pH of weak acids and bases
varies with the concentration. The pH at equivalence when the first proton of a weak diprotic acid has been
removed is the average of pKai and pKa2- You most likely can recall this from determining the isoelectric pH
of an amino acid. It applies to any polyprotic acid, including the amino acids. Because the pKa values do not
change, the pH at equivalence does not change, so the same pH at equivalence is observed. The best answer is
choice C. The second proton ofa diprotic acid isaffected by the concentration, sochoice Diseliminated.

76.
Choice Bis correct. Choice Cshould be eliminated first, because the pH at equivalence is greater than the pKa
of the acid. Choice Dshould also be eliminated, because the color changes over a range, not at one exact value.
At the equivalence pH (when the indicator is changing color), a change of one pH unit is substantial. This
eliminates choice A. The best answer is choice B, because the pH changes so rapidly that one drop of titrant
can change the pH by more than one pH unit at theequivalence point. The indicator candetermine this value
to the accuracy of the one drop.
77.
78.
Indicator Color and Solution pH
Choice Ais correct. The titration of 1.0 Mbenzoic acid by 1.0 Mpotassium hydroxide has an equivalence pH
value greater than 7.0, because the acid is weak and the base is strong, so the conjugate base that is formed at
equivalence makes the pH higher than 7. The conjugate base, benzoate, has a pKb value of 9.79. Thisconfirms
that benzoate is a weak base. The best indicator must have a color change range greater than 7.0. Indicator I
goes from reddish orange to mango as pH increases from 6 to 8, so Indicator I has a range that is too low.
Indicator I is eliminated. Indicator I may seemclose, but as the benzoic acid titration reaches equivalence, the
indicator would have already turned yellow, so no color change occurs at equivalence. Indicator II goes from
chartreuse to aquamarine as pH increases from 9 to 11, so Indicator II is a good choice. The pH at the
equivalence point falls between 9 and 11, in all likelihood. Indicator III goes from violet to clear as pH
increases from 3 to 5, so Indicator III is eliminated. Only Indicator II will work, so the best answer is choice A.
If you wish to solve for the pH at equivalence, keep in mind that the conjugate base has formed and that the
solution's volume has increased, diluting all components. The pOH at the equivalence point is found using the
shortcut equation.
pOH =IpKb-llog [A-] =1(9.79) - llog (0.5) =4.89 -l(-0.3) =4.89 +0.15 =5.04 .-. pH =8.96
2 2 2 2 2
This means that the pH at equivalence is about 9.0. The 0.5 M conjugate base is determined, because when the
strong base was added to the benzoic acid, it not only converted the benzoic acid to conjugate base, it also
diluted the solution. With an equivalence pH of 9.0, only Indicator II can work. A faster way to get the
approximate pH at equivalence is to average the pKa of the weak acid and the pH of the titrant. This yields
an approximate value. In this case, the average of 4.21 and 14 is 9.1. The approximate value is usually off by
about 0.15, which is close enough for our purposes.
Choice B is correct. The combination of colors that is not possible for a solution is the one that does not have a
pH value at which the three colors may exist. In choice A, Indicator I is red at pH values of 5 or less, Indicator
II is yellow at pH values of 8 or less, and Indicator III is purple at pH values of 2 or less. At a pH value of 2 or
less, the color combination in choice A is possible. In choice B, Indicator I is mango at a pH value of 8, Indicator
II is yellow at pH values of 8 or less, and Indicator III is violet at a pH value of 3. The solution cannot
simultaneously be pH = 3 and pH = 8, so the color combination in choice Bis not possible. In choice C, Indicator I
is red at pH values of 5 or less, Indicator II is yellow at pH values of 8 or less, and Indicator III is fuchsia at a
pH value of 4. At a pH value of 4, the color combination in choice C is possible. In choice D, Indicator I is
yellow at pH values of 9 or greater, Indicator II is aquamarine at a pH value of 11, and Indicator III is clear at
pH values of 5 or greater. At a pH value of 11, the color combination in choice D is possible. Choice B is the
best answer choice.
79. Choice A is correct. If the ratio of blue species to clear species within the indicator equilibrium is 1000 : 1 at pH
= 6, and the deprotonated form absorbs visible light (which makes the deprotonated form blue), then at a pH
of 6, the indicator is predominantly in the deprotonated form. This means that the pKa value is less than 6.0.
This eliminates choices C and D. Because the ratio is 1000:1, the log value is 3, making the pKa 3 units less
than the pH. The equation is as follows:
pH =pKa(indicator) +log ^Pro ona g - pKa(indicator) +log 100
Protonated
6.0 = pKa(indicator) + log1000 = pKa(indicator) + 3
Thus, the pKa(indicator) = 3-0' so tne Dest answer is choice A.
80. Choice D is correct. The key colors are faint mango with Indicator I (which implies that the pH is just greater
than 8) and faint chartreuse with Indicator II (which implies that the pH is just less than 9). The best option
for pH is thus choice D, 8.5, which falls between 8 and 9. Pick D to feel a rainbow of happy colors shine down.
81 Choice Ais correct. The color change range for Indicator I is from 6to 8, so the pKa value for Indicator I is
roughly 7. The color change range for Indicator II is from 9to 11, so the pKa value for Indicator II is roughly 10.
The color change range for Indicator III is from 3to 5, so the pKa value for Indicator III is roughly 4. The pKa
value for Indicator I is incorrect in choices Band D, the pKa value for Indicator II is incorrect in choices Band C,
and the pKa value for Indicator III is incorrect in choice B. The best answer is thus choice A.
82. Choice Cis correct. In Indicator III the color change of detectability is from violet (at pH of 3) to the first sign
of clear (at apH near 5). The pH range is thus best described as from 3to 5, which makes choice Cthe best
answer.
83. Choice Cis correct. Indicator III is purple when protonated (at low pH) and clear when deprotonated (at high
pH). This means that the absorbance by the deprotonated form is beyond the visible range, which eliminates
choices Band D. The visible range is 400 nm to 700 nm, so only the 339 nm absorbance can apply to the
deprotonated species. Because the protonated form is purple, the highest absorbance (kmax) must be in the
range of the complementary color of purple, which is yellow. Yellow light lies in the middle of the visible
spectrum, so it must have avalue somewhere in the middle between 400 and 700 nm. Avalue of 426 nm is low
enough to be associated with violet light, so the value of 598 nm must be the best choice for the absorbance of
the protonated species. The best answer is choice C. As apoint of interest, there is no known indicator which
goes from colored to clear when deprotonated, because the negative charge usually lowers the transition energy
between the ground state and first excited state in ahighly conjugated organic molecule. Ahighly conjugated
organic molecule is typical for an indicator.
Indicator Table
84. Choice Cis correct. Bromphenol blue at pH =7.0 has a pHvalue greater than the pKa, so the species is present
inits anionic (conjugate base) form. The base form of bromphenol blue according to Table 1isblue, sochoice Ais
eliminated. Bromcresol green in ammonia solution has a pH > 7.0, so the pHvalue is greater than the pKa.
This means that the species is present in its anionic (conjugate base) form. The base form ofbromcresol green
according to Table 1is blue, so choice Bis eliminated. Thymol blue in acetic acid solution has a pH <7.0, so the
pH value is less than the pKa, and the species is present in its cationic (conjugate acid) form. The acid form of
thymol blue according to Table 1is also yellow, so choice Cis correct. Bromthymol blue in hydroxide solution
has a pH > 7.0, so the pH value is greater than the pKa. This means that the species is present in its anionic
(conjugate base) form. The base form of bromthymol blue according to Table 1is blue, so choice Dis eliminated.
85. Choice A is correct. The titration of ammonia with hydrochloric acid forms an acid at the equivalence point.
This means that the pHat the equivalence point is less than 7.0. Of the choices, only phenolphthalein has a
pKa greater than 7.0, so phenolphthalein cannot be used as the indicator. The pH at the equivalence point
should equal the pKa of the indicator, so bromcresol green (pKa = 4.4), methyl orange (pKa = 4.0), and
bromphenol blue (pKa =3.7) should all be close enough together that they can all work. The better of the
indicators depends on the initial concentration of ammonia. Choice A is correct.
86. Choice Bis correct. The ideal indicator has a pKa close to the pH at equivalence. To solve this question, the
pH at equivalence must be determined for each answer choice. In choices Aand B, HF is formed at equivalence.
The pKa for HF is 3.17. In choice A, the pHof1.00 MHCl is 0. The average of the pKa for HF and the titrant
pH leads to a pH at equivalence of approximately 1.6. Cresol red has a pKa of 1.6, so choice Ahas a valid
indicator for the titration. In choice B, the pH of 0.01 MHCl is 2. The average of the pKa for HF and the
titrant pH leads to a pHat equivalence of approximately 2.6. Methyl violet has a pKa of0.8, sochoice Bhas
an invalid indicator for the titration. Choice B is the best answer.
If you are highly observant, you'll note that as the concentration of the species decreases, the equivalence pH
gets closer to 7. This means that choice Brequires an indicator with a higher pKa than choice A. This is also
true when comparing choices Cand D. Chlorophenol blue has a higher pKa than bromcresol green, so choices C
and D fit the desired trend. To verify this, let's consider the pH at equivalence for the remaining choices.
In choices Cand D, HCN is formed at equivalence. The pKa for HCN is9.32. In choice C, the pHof1.00 MHCl
is 0. The average of the pKa for HCN and the titrant pHleads to a pH at equivalence of approximately 4.7.
Bromcresol green has a pKa of 4.4, so choice Chas a valid indicator for the titration. In choice D, the pH of
0.01 M HCl is 2. The average of the pKa for HCN and the titrant pH leads to a pH at equivalence of
approximately 5.7. Chlorophenol blue has a pKa of5.6, sochoice Dhasa valid indicator for the titration.
350
87.
89.
Choice C is correct. When the pH is greater than the pKa of the indicator, the conjugate base is the
predominant species in solution, so the solution assumes the color of the conjugate base. When the pH is less
than the pKa of the indicator, the conjugate acid is the predominant species in solution, so thesolution assumes
the color of the conjugate acid. The pKa values for the four choices are: methyl violet (pKa =0.8), methyl
orange (pKa =4.0), thymol blue (pKa =8.4), and bromcresol green (pKa =4.4). At a pH of 7.4, methyl violet
exists in its violet conjugate base form, so choice Ais valid. At a pH of 7.4, methyl orange exists in its yellow
conjugate base form, so choice Bis valid. At apH of 7.4, thymol blue exists in its yellow conjugate acid form, so
choice Cis invalid. At a pHof7.4, bromcresol green exists inits blue conjugate base form, sochoice Dis valid.
The only choice that does not correctly correlate the indicator with the solution color is C.
Choice Dis correct. Thymol blue has a pKa value of 2.0, so it changes color in a highly acidic medium. When
titratinga strong base with a strong acid, the equivalence point is 7.0, so choices A and C are eliminated. The
titration of a weak base by a strong acid leads to an equivalence pH value less 7.0, so choice thymol blue is
appropriate for choices Band D. ApKa value of 2.0 is rather low, so the conjugate acid present at the
equivalence point must dissociate readily and be in high concentration. The higher the concentration of weak
base initially, the higher the concentration of weak acid at the equivalence point. To ensure that the
equivalence pHis as low as 2.0, the weak base and titrant strong acid should both behighly concentrated. The
base must be very weak with a pKb of 10.0 or greater to be a reasonable choice for this problem. Given the
limited information, the best answer is choice D.
Choice C is correct. Astrong acid when titrated by a strongbaseshows an equivalence pH of 7.0. The indicator
chosen should have a pKa value near 7.0. It is okay if the pKa is as high as 8.0, but not any greater than that.
The pKa values for the four choices are: methyl violet (pKa =0.8), methyl orange (pKa = 4.0), bromthymol blue
(pKa = 6.8), and alizarin yellow (pKa = 10.8). Only bromthymol blue has a pKa value close to 7.0, so only
bromthymol blue changes color at the equivalence point. The best answer is choice C.
pH Sticks and Indicators
90.
91.
92.
93.
Choice Bis correct. The pH range of the stick is found by considering the pH range of each indicator attached
to the pHstick. Indicators have a pHrange (color change band) of approximately pKa(incjicat0r) 1/ depending
on the colors and intensity of the indicator. The four indicators have respective ranges of 3.37 to 5.37, 4.21 to
6.21, 5.78 to 7.78, and 7.79 to 9.79. This means that the overall range of the pH stick is 3.37 to 9.79, which
makes choice B, 3.4 to 9.8, the best answer.
Choice D is correct. If bromcresol green appears yellow, the pH of the solution is less than 3.37 (4.37 -1). At
this pH, the other indicators would be protonated, so the pH could not be determined from any of the
indicators. Because Solution 1 appears yellow with bromcresol green, it is not possible to know the exact pH.
Solution 1 could have any pH value less than 3.37. If phenolphthalein appears magenta, the pH of the
solution is greater than 9.79 (8.79 +1). At this pH, the other indicators would be deprotonated, so the pH could
not be determined from any of the indicators. Because Solution 4 appears magenta with phenolphthalein, it is
not possible to know the exact pH. Solution 4 could have any pH value greater than 9.79. The pH of Solution 1
and Solution 4 cannot be approximated from the pH stick, so the best answer is choice D.
Choice C is correct. An aqueous solution with a hydroxide concentration of 1.0 x10"6 Mhas a pOHof 6.0 and
therefore a pH of 8.0. The pH of the solution is more than one unit greater than 4.37 (the pKa of bromcresol
green), so the bromcresol green indicator will turn blue. Choice A can be eliminated. The pH of the solution is
more than one unit greater than 5.21 (the pKa of methyl red), so the methyl red indicator will turn yellow.
Choice B can be eliminated. The pH of the solution is more than one unit greater than 6.78 (the pKa of
bromthymol blue), so the bromthymol blue indicator will turn blue. Choice C is the best answer. The pH of the
solution is roughly one unit less than 8.79 (the pKa of phenolphthalein), so the phenolphthalein indicator
appears clear. Choice D can be eliminated.
Choice Bis correct. Solution5 is greenish-blue with bromcresol blue, so the pH of Solution 5 is greater than 4.37
and less than 5.37. Solution 5 is reddish-orange with methyl red, so the pH of Solution 5 is less than 5.21 but
greater than 4.21. The pH of Solution 5 falls between4.37 and 5.21, so choice B is the best answer. Only when
the color of the indicator is a composite of the protonated and deprotonated colors can the pH of the solution be
approximated. Bromthymol blue and phenolphthalein are purely the protonated color, so they were not useful
in approximating the pH of Solution 5.
94 Choice C is correct. When HCl is added to a solution, hydronium ions are released. If the colors of the
indicators do not change, that means that the pH does not change significantly, and thus the hydronium ion
concentration does not change significantly. There are three explanations for the pH not changing
Significantly One reason pH does not change is that the hydronium concentration is so high that any change in
hydronium is negligible on the log scale. Asecond reason pH does not change is that the hydroxide
concentration is so high that any change in hydroxide concentration is negligible on the log scale. The last
reason is that the solution is a buffer. Because Solution 2 appears orange with methyl red indicator, the
approximate pH is around 5.2. This does not describe asolution rich in hydronium or hydroxide. The best
explanation is that Solution 2is abuffer with apH around 5. The pKa for acarboxylic acid is around 5, so the
best answer is choice C.
95. Choice Dis correct. Remember in choosing an indicator for titration that the pKa of the indicator must be
within 1 of the pH at equivalence. When titrating a weak acid with a strong base, the products the weak
conjugate base and water. An aqueous weak base solution forms at equivalence, which has apH greater than 7,
so the indicator should have a pKa value greater than 7. The best answer is phenolphthalein, choice D.
96 Choice Ais correct. Asolution that turns blue with bromthymol blue has a pH greater than 7.78 (pKa =6.68, so
the pure blue color starts at 6.68 +1). ApH greater than 7.78 does not guarantee that the pH is greater than
8.79, the pKa for phenolphthalein. This means that the solution may or may not turn magenta with
phenolphthalein. Choice Ais invalid. If asolution turns green with bromcresol green, the pH is roughly 4.37.
If asolution turns bromthymol blue green, the pH is roughly 6.68. The pH cannot simultaneously be 4.37 and
6.68, so the stick cannot simultaneously have two green marks. Choice Bis a valid statement. Asolution that
turns methyl red yellow has apH greater than 6.21 (pKa =5.21, so the pure yellow color starts at 5.21 +1). A
pH greater than 6.21 guarantees that the pH is greater than 4.31, the pKa for bromcresol green. This means
that the solution must turn blue with bromcresol green. Choice Cis a valid statement. When the pH of the
solution falls between 4.21 and 5.37, it falls into the color blend range of two separate indicators. As a result,
the pH can be approximated with twice the accuracy. Choice Dis a valid statement.
Passage XV (Questions 97-100)
Acidity and Electronic Influences
97.
98.
99.
100.
Choice Dis correct. The best choice for a buffer ofpH =4.0 is a weak acid with a pKa close to4.0 mixed with its
conjugate base. Benzoic acid has apKa of 4.21 and nitrobenzoic acid has apKa of 3.40. Benzoic acid is closer, so
choose D. If the buffer is to be 4.0 (the acidic side of 4.21), there should be a slight excess of benzoic acid
relative to the conjugate base.
Choice Ais correct. To titrate a weak acid (such as p-nitrophenol), you must add a strong base. The only strong
baselisted among the choices is KOH. Choose A, and moveon.
Choice Ais correct. The addition of 10 mL 0.10 MKOH(aq) to20 mL 0.10 Mphenol results in thehalf-titration
of the phenol. At the halfway point, pH =pKa. The pKa for phenol is 10.0, so choice Ais the best answer.
Choice A is correct. This titration is of a weak acid with a strong base that is twice as concentrated (0.20 M
base with 0.10 Mweak acid), so one-half thevolume of thestrong base is used. One-half of 50 mL amounts to
25 mL at equivalence. This eliminates choice Band D. Since the titrant is a strong base, the neutralized
product is aweak base, so the equivalence pH is greater than 7. Only the titration curve in choice Ashows pH
at equivalence and pKa for the phenol as being greater than7.
'One book down, one book to go!"

352
PERKELEY
Dr*v-i*w"
PERIODIC TABLE OP THE ELEMENTS
1
H
2
He
1.0 4.0
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be B C N O F Ne
6.9 9.0 10.8 12.0 14.0 16.0 19.0 20.2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S CI Ar
23.0 24.3 27.0 28.1 31.0 32.1 35.5 39.9
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
39.1 40.1 45.0 47.9 50.9 52.0 54.9 55.8 58.9 58.7 63.5 65.4 69.7 72.6 74.9 79.0 79.9 83.8
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
85.5 87.6 88.9 91.2 92.9 95.9 (98) 101.1 102,9 106.4 107.9 112.4 114.8 118.7 121.8 127.6 126.9 131.3
55 56
571
LaT
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Cs Ba Hf la W Re Os Ir Pt Ail
Hg
TI Pb Bi Po At Rn
132.9 137.3 138.9 178.5 180.9 183.9 186.2 190.2 192.2 195.1 197.0 200.6 204.4 207.2 209.0 (209) (210) (222)
87 88 89 K
Ac
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 HI 112
Fr Ra Rf Db
SR
Bh Hs Mt Uun Uuu Uub
(223) 226.0 227.0 (261) (262) (263) (262) (265) (266) (269) (272) (277)
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
67 68 69 70 71
t
Ce Pr Nd
Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tin Yb Lu
140.1 140.9 144.2 (145) 150.4 152.0 157.3 158.9 162.5 164.9 167.3 168.9 173.0 175.0
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
232.0 (231) 238.0 (237) (244) (243) (247) (247) (251) (252) (257) (258) (259) (260)
General
Chemistry
SM
If you study it, it will come!

Berkeley Review MCAT Prep Chemistry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Berkeley Review MCAT Prep Chemistry

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Berkeley Review MCAT Prep Chemistry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

General

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 53

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 151

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 153 Section II Detailed Explanations

Copyright by The Berkeley Review

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 220

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 231 Section III Detailed Explanations

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 234 Section III Detailed Explanations

25 mL 1.00 MNH 3 ^^-^.^^

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 338 Section V Detailed Explanations

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 344 Section V Detailed Explanations

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 346

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 347 Section V Detailed Explanations

Copyright by The Berkeley Review 348

Copyright by The Berkeley Review

You might also like